Micomho P446: Technical Manual

MiCOMho P446
Technical Manual
Fast Multifunction Distance Protection Relay
Platform Hardware Version: M
Platform Software Version: 71
Publication Reference: P446/EN/TM/E
P446/EN/TM/E © 2011. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of ALSTOM. The other names mentioned,
registered or not, are the property of their respective companies. The technical and other data contained in this document is provided for information only. Neither
ALSTOM, its officers or employees accept responsibility for, or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied), as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or
GRID
change this data at any time without further notice.
MiCOMho P446 1 Introduction
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1
P446/EN/TM/E 1-1
1 Introduction MiCOMho P446
1-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 FOREWORD
This technical manual provides a functional and technical description of Alstom Grid’s MiCOMho P446
range of IEDs, as well as a comprehensive set of instructions for using the device.
1.1 Target Audience

This manual is aimed towards all professionals charged with installing, commissioning, maintaining,
troubleshooting, or operating any of the products within the specified product range. This includes
installation and commissioning personnel as well as engineers who will be responsible for operating
the product.
The level at which this manual is written assumes that installation and commissioning engineers have
knowledge of handling electronic equipment and that system and protection engineers have a
thorough knowledge of protection systems and associated equipment.
1.2 Conventions
1.2.1 Typographical Conventions

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual.
 The names for special keys and function keys appear in capital letters.
For example: ENTER
 When describing software applications, menu items, buttons, labels etc as they appear on the
screen are written in bold type.
 For example: Select Save from the file menu.
 Menu hierarchies in documentation describing software applications use the > sign to indicate
the next level
For example: Select File > Save
 Filenames and paths use the courier font
For example: Example\File.text
 Special terminology is written with leading capitals
For example: Sensitive Earth Fault
 When reference is made to Alstom Grid's Courier database, the column text is written in upper
case
For example: The SYSTEM DATA column
 When reference is made to Alstom Grid's Courier database, the cell text is written in bold type
For example: The Language cell in the SYSTEM DATA column
 When reference is made to Alstom Grid's Courier database, the value of a cell's content is
enclosed in single quotation marks
For example: The Language cell in the SYSTEM DATA column contains the value 'English'
1.2.2 Nomenclature
Due to the technical nature of this manual, many special terms, abbreviations and acronyms are used
throughout the manual. Some of these terms are well-known industry-specific terms while others may
be special product-specific terms used by Alstom Grid. A glossary at the back of this manual provides
a complete description of all special terms used throughout the manual.
We would like to highlight the following changes of nomenclature however:
P446/EN/TM/E 1-3
 The word 'relay' is no longer used for the device itself. Instead, the device is referred to as an
'IED' (Intelligent Electronic Device), the 'device', the 'product', or the 'unit'. The word 'relay' is
used purely to describe the electromechanical components within the device, i.e. the output
relays.
 British English is used throughout this manual.
 The British term 'Earth' is used in favour of the American term 'Ground'.
1.3 Manual Structure

The manual consists of the following chapters:
 Chapter 1: Introduction
 Chapter 2: Safety Information
 Chapter 3: Hardware Design
 Chapter 4: Software Design
 Chapter 5: Configuration
 Chapter 6: Settings and Records
 Chapter 7: Operation
 Chapter 8: Application Examples
 Chapter 9: SCADA Communications
 Chapter 10: Cyber Security
 Chapter 11: PSL Editor
 Chapter 12: PSL Schemes
 Chapter 13: Installation
 Chapter 14: Commissioning Instructions
 Chapter 15: Maintenance & Troubleshooting
 Chapter 16: Technical Specifications
 Chapter 17: Symbols and Glossary
 Chapter 18: Wiring Diagrams
 Appendix A: Commissioning Record Forms
 Appendix B: P59x Commissioning Instructions
 Appendix C: DDB Signals
1.4 Product Scope

The MiCOMho P446 has been designed for overhead line and underground cable applications, where
the network is solidly/effectively grounded. The MiCOMho P446 is used in applications such as
breaker-and-a-half, or ring bus topologies, where two circuit breakers feed each line
The MiCOMho P446 is available in three variants; models B, C and D. The difference between the
variants is the amount of I/O and the type of output contacts used. These differences are summarized
in the table below:
1-4 P446/EN/TM/E
Features Model B Model C Model D

Number of CT Inputs 8 8 8
Number of VT inputs 5 5 5
Opto-coupled digital inputs 24 16 24
Standard relay output contacts 32 16 16
High speed high break output contacts 4 8
Table 1: Difference in model variants
1.5 Features and Functions

The product supports the following functions:
Distance/DEF/Delta features (optional)

Feature IEC61850 ANSI
Distance zones, full-scheme protection (5) DisPDIS 21/21N
Phase characteristic (Mho and quadrilateral)
Ground characteristic (Mho and quadrilateral)
CVT transient overreach elimination
Load blinder
Easy setting mode
Communication-aided schemes, PUTT, POTT, Blocking, Weak Infeed DisPSCH 85
Accelerated tripping – loss of load and Z1 extension
Switch on to fault and trip on reclose – elements for fast fault
SofPSOF/ TorPSOF 50SOTF/27SOTF
clearance on breaker closure
Power swing blocking PsbRPSB 68
Directional earth fault (DEF) unit protection 67N
Out of step OstRPSB 78
Delta directional comparison - fast channel schemes operating on
78DCB/78DCUB
fault generated superimposed quantities
Table 2: Distance/DEF/Delta features
Protection Features
Tripping Mode (1 & 3 pole) PTRC
ABC and ACB phase rotation
Phase overcurrent stages, with optional directionality (4) OcpPTOC/RDIR 50/51/67
Earth/Ground overcurrent stages, with optional directionality (4) EfdPTOC/RDIR 50N/51N/ 67N
Sensitive earth fault (SEF) (4) SenPTOC/RDIR 50N/51N/67N
High impedance restricted earth fault (REF) SenRefPDIF 64
Negative sequence overcurrent stages, with optional directionality (4) NgcPTOC/RDIR 67/46
Broken conductor (open jumper), used to detect open circuit faults 46
Thermal overload protection ThmPTTR 49
Undervoltage protection stages (2) VtpPhsPTUV 27
Overvoltage protection stages (2) VtpPhsPTOV 59
Remote overvoltage protection stages (2) VtpCmpPTOV 59R
Residual voltage stages (neutral displacement) (2) VtpResPTOV 59N
P446/EN/TM/E 1-5

4-stage underfrequency FrqPTUF 81
2-stage overfrequency FrqPTOF 81
Advanced 4-stage rate of change of frequency element DfpPFRC 81
High speed breaker fail - two-stage, suitable for re-tripping and
RBRF 50BF
backtripping
Current Transformer supervision 46
Voltage transformer supervision 47/27
Auto-reclose - shots supported (4) RREC 79
Check synchronization, 2 stages RSYN 25
InterMiCOM64 teleprotection for direct relay-relay communication
(optional)
Mutual compensation (for fault locator and distance zones)
Table 3: Protection features
Communication Features
Front RS232 serial communication port for configuration 16S
Rear serial RS485 communication port for SCADA control 16S
2 Additional rear serial communication ports for SCADA control and
16S
teleprotection (fibre and copper) (optional)
Ethernet communication (optional) 16E
Redundant Ethernet communication (optional) 16E
Courier 16S
IEC61850 (optional) 16E
IEC60870-5-103 (optional) 16S
DNP3.0 over serial link (optional) 16S
DNP3.0 over Ethernet (optional) 16E
IRIG-B time synchronization (optional) CLK
Table 4: Communication features
General Features
NERC compliant cybersecurity
Multiple password access control levels
Function keys (10) FnkGGIO
Programmable LEDs (18) LedGGIO
Programmable hotkeys (2)
Programmable allocation of digital inputs and outputs
Fully customizable menu texts
Measurement of all instantaneous & integrated values MET
Circuit breaker control, status & condition monitoring XCBR 52
Trip circuit and coil supervision
Control inputs PloGGIO1
Power-up diagnostics and continuous self-monitoring
Dual rated 1A and 5A CT inputs
1-6 P446/EN/TM/E

Alternative setting groups (4)
Fault locator RFLO
Event records SER
Disturbance recorder for waveform capture – specified in samples per
RDRE DFR
cycle (48)
Graphical programmable scheme logic (PSL)
Dual circuit breaker control , status & condition monitoring XCBR 52
Table 5: General features
P446/EN/TM/E 1-7
2 COMPLIANCE
The unit has undergone a range of extensive testing and certification processes to ensure and prove
compatibility with all target markets. Table 6 summarizes a list of standards with which the device is
compliant. A detailed description of these criteria can be found in the Technical Specifications chapter.
Condition Compliance
EMC compliance (compulsory) 2004/108/EC (demonstrated by EN50263:2000)
Product safety (compulsory) 2006/95/EC (demonstrated by EN60255-27:2005)
R&TTE Compliance (compulsory) 99/5/EC
EN50263, IEC 60255-22-1/2/3/4, IEC 61000-4-5/6/8/9/10, EN61000-
EMC
4-3/18, IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1/2, ENV50204, EN55022
Product Safety for North America UL/CL File No. UL/CUL E202519
Environmental conditions IEC 60068-2-1/30/60/78
Power supply interruption IEC 60255-11, IEC 61000-4-11
Type tests for Insulation, creepage distance and clearances, high
IEC 60255-27:2005
voltage dielectric withstand, and impulse voltage withstand
Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1992 – IP10, IP30, IP52
Mechanical robustness IEC 60255-21-1/2/3
Table 6: Compliance standards
1-8 P446/EN/TM/E
3 APPLICATION OVERVIEW
Figure 1: Application Overview
P446/EN/TM/E 1-9
4 ORDERING OPTIONS
Variants Order No.
Distance Protection P446 P446 **
Distance & Autoreclose for 2 Circuit Breakers
Nominal auxiliary voltage

24 - 48 Vdc 1
48 - 110 Vdc (40 - 100 Vac) 2
110 - 250 Vdc (100 - 240 Vac) 3
In/Vn rating
In = 1A/5A ; Vn = 100-120Vac 1
Protocol
Hardware options Compatibilty
Nothing 1, 3 & 4 1
IRIG-B Only (Modulated) 1, 3 & 4 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only 1, 3 & 4 3
IRIG-B (Modulated) & Fibre Optic Converter 1, 3 & 4 4
Ethernet (100Mbit/s) 6, 7 & 8 6
Ethernet (100Mbit/s) plus IRIG-B (Modulated) 6, 7 & 8 A
Ethernet (100Mbit/s) plus IRIG-B (De-modulated) 6, 7 & 8 B
IRIG-B (De-modulated) 1, 3 & 4 C
InterMiCOM + Courier Rear Port 1, 3 & 4 E
InterMiCOM + Courier Rear Port + IRIG-B modulated 1, 3 & 4 F
Redundant Ethernet Self-Healing Ring, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + Modulated IRIG-B 6, 7 & 8 G
Redundant Ethernet Self-Healing Ring, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + Un-modulated IRIG-B 6, 7 & 8 H
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + Modulated IRIG-B 6, 7 & 8 J
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + Un-modulated IRIG-B 6, 7 & 8 K
Redundant Ethernet Dual-Homing Star, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + Modulated IRIG-B 6, 7 & 8 L
Redundant Ethernet Dual-Homing Star, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + Un-modulated IRIG-B 6, 7 & 8 M
Product Options
24 inputs and 32-standard outputs B
24 inputs and 8 standard plus 12 high break outputs C
24 inputs and 16 standard plus 8 high break outputs D
As B + 850nm dual channel F
As C + 850nm dual channel G
As D + 850nm dual channel H
As B + 1300nm SM single channel J
As C + 1300nm SM single channel K
As D + 1300nm SM single channel L
As B + 1300nm SM dual channel N
As C + 1300nm SM dual channel O
As D + 1300nm SM dual channel P
As B + 1300nm MM single channel R
As C + 1300nm MM single channel S
As D + 1300nm MM single channel T
As B + 1300nm MM dual channel V
As C + 1300nm MM dual channel W
As D + 1300nm MM dual channel X
As B + 850nm MM + 1300mn SM Z
As D + 850nm MM + 1300mn SM 1
As B + 1300mn SM + 850nm MM 2
As D + 1300mn SM + 850nm MM 3
As B + 850nm MM + 1300mn MM 4
As D + 850nm MM + 1300mn MM 5
As B + 1300mn MM + 850nm MM 6
As D + 1300mn MM + 850nm MM 7
Protocol options Hardware Compatibilty

K-Bus 1, 2, 3, 4, C, E & F 1
IEC870 1, 2, 3, 4, C, E & F 3
DNP3.0 1, 2, 3, 4, C, E & F 4
IEC61850 + Courier via rear RS485 port 6, A, B, G, H, J, K, L, M 6
IEC61850+IEC60870-5-103 via rear RS485 port 6, A, B, G, H, J, K, L, M 7
DNP3.0 Over Ethernet with Courier rear port K-Bus/RS485 protocol 6, A, B, G, H, J, K, L, M 8
Mounting
Flush/Panel mounting M
19" Rack mounting N
Flush/panel mounting with harsh environment coating P
19" Rack mounting with harsh environmental coating Q
Language
English, French, German, Spanish 0
English, French, German, Russian 5
Chinese, English or French via HMI, with English or French only via Communications port C
Software version
Date and application dependant **
Customer specific options

Standard version 0
Customer version A
Hardware version
Extended main processor (XCPU2) With Function Keys & Tri-colour LEDs K
As K plus increased main processor memory (XCPU3), Cyber Security M
1-10 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 2 Safety Information
SAFETY INFORMATION
CHAPTER 2
P446/EN/TM/E 2-1
2 Safety Information MiCOMho P446
2-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The Safety Information chapter provides information for the safe handling of the equipment. You must
be familiar with information contained in this chapter before unpacking, installing, commissioning, or
servicing the equipment.
The chapter contains the following sections
1 Chapter Overview
2 Health and Safety
3 Symbols
4 Installation, Commissioning and Servicing
4.1 General Safety Guidelines
4.1.1 Lifting Hazards
4.1.2 Electrical Hazards
4.2 UL/CSA/CUL Requirements
4.3 Equipment Connections
4.4 Protection Class 1 Equipment Requirements
4.5 Pre-energization Checklist
4.6 Peripheral Circuitry
4.7 Upgrading/Servicing
5 Decommissioning and Disposal
P446/EN/TM/E 2-3
2 HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in this chapter is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled
in order to maintain it in a safe condition and to keep personnel safe at all times.
Personnel associated with the equipment must also be familiar with the contents of this Safety
Information chapter as well as the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M).
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Improper use of the equipment and failure to observe warning notices will endanger
personnel.
Only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals
who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and the system
to which it is being connected.
 Are familiar with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-
energize equipment in the correct manner.
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Although the documentation provides instructions for installing, commissioning and operating the
equipment, it cannot cover all conceivable circumstances nor include detailed information on all topics.
In the event of questions or problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Please
contact the appropriate Alstom Grid technical sales office and request the necessary information.
2-4 P446/EN/TM/E
3 SYMBOLS
Throughout this chapter you may come across the following symbols. You will also see these symbols
on parts of the equipment.
Caution: refer to equipment documentation. Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment
Caution: Risk of electric shock
Ground terminal (In some countries, known as the Earth terminal)
Protective ground terminal
P446/EN/TM/E 2-5
4 INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
4.1 General Safety Guidelines
4.1.1 Lifting Hazards

Plan carefully, identify any possible hazards and determine whether the load needs to be moved at all.
Look at other ways of moving the load to avoid manual handling. Use the correct lifting techniques
and Personal Protective Equipment to reduce the risk of injury.
Many injuries are caused by:
 Lifting heavy objects

 Lifting things incorrectly
 Pushing or pulling heavy objects
 Using the same muscles repetitively.
Follow the Health and Safety at Work, etc Act 1974, and the Management of Health and Safety at
Work Regulations 1999.
4.1.2 Electrical Hazards
All personnel involved in installing, commissioning, or servicing of this equipment must be familiar with the
correct working procedures.
Consult the equipment documentation before installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
Always use the equipment in a manner specified by the manufacturer. Failure to do will jeopardize the
protection provided by the equipment.
Removal of equipment panels or covers may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the
electrical power is removed. Take extra care when there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment.
Before working on the terminal strips, the equipment must be isolated.
A suitable protective barrier should be provided for areas with restricted space, where there is a risk of electric
shock due to exposed terminals.
Disconnect power before disassembling. Disassembly of the equipment may expose sensitive electronic
circuitry. Take suitable precautions against electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) to avoid damage to the
equipment.
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters
should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test,
the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Equipment operating conditions

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are
energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be
removed.
2-6 P446/EN/TM/E
4.2 UL/CSA/CUL Requirements

Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure, as defined by
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
To maintain compliance with UL and CSA/CUL, the equipment should be installed using UL/CSA-recognized
parts for: connection cables, protective fuses, fuse holders and circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and
replacement internal batteries.
For external fuse protection, a UL or CSA Listed fuse must be used. The listed protective fuse type is: Class J
time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum DC rating of 250 V dc (for example type
AJT15).
Where UL/CSA listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum
current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum dc rating of 250 V dc may be used (for example Red Spot type NIT or
TIA.
4.3 Equipment Connections

Beware! Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous
voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
M4 (#8) clamping screws of heavy duty terminal block connectors used for CT and VT wiring must be tightened
to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.
M3.5 (#6) clamping screws of medium duty terminal block connectors used for binary I/O and power supply
wiring must be tightened to a nominal torque of 0.8 Nm.
Pin terminal screws of terminal block connectors used for field wiring must be tightened to a nominal torque of
0.25 Nm.
Always use insulated crimp terminations for voltage and current connections.
Always use the correct crimp terminal and tool according to the wire size.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided to indicate the health of the device. Alstom Grid strongly
recommends that you hardwire these contacts into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
4.4 Protection Class 1 Equipment Requirements
Ground the equipment with the supplied PCT (Protective Conductor Terminal).
Do not remove the PCT.
The PCT is sometimes used to terminate cable screens. Always check the PCT’s integrity after adding or
removing such functional ground connections.
Use a locknut or similar mechanism to ensure the integrity of M4 stud-connected PCTs.
The recommended minimum PCT wire size is 2.5 mm² for countries whose mains supply is 230 V (e.g. Europe)
and 3.3 mm² for countries whose mains supply is 110 V (e.g. North America). This may be superseded by local
or country wiring regulations.
P446/EN/TM/E 2-7
The PCT connection must have low-inductance and be as short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used,
should be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays
are connected to a common potential, unused, pre-wired connections should be connected to the common
potential of the grouped connections.
4.5 Pre-energization Checklist
Check voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation).
Check CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections.
Check protective fuse or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) rating.
Check integrity of the PCT connection.
Check voltage and current rating of external wiring, ensuring it is appropriate for the application.
4.6 Peripheral Circuitry

Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and
could damage insulation. The secondary of the line CT should be shorted before opening any connections to it.
Note: For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer
termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may
not be required. Check the equipment documentation first to see if this applies.
Where external components, such as resistors or voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are used, these may
present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Take extreme care when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM
ALSTOM P990, as hazardous voltages may be exposed. CT shorting links must be in place before inserting or
removing MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
4.7 Upgrading/Servicing
Modules, PCBs, or expansion boards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment while
energized, as this may result in damage to the equipment. Hazardous live voltages would also be exposed,
thus endangering personnel.
2-8 P446/EN/TM/E
5 DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Before decommissioning, isolate completely the equipment power supplies (both poles of any dc supply). The
auxiliary supply input may have capacitors in parallel, which may still be charged. To avoid electric shock, the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning.
Avoid incineration or disposal to water courses. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe, responsible, in
an environmentally friendly manner, and if applicable, in accordance with country-specific regulations.
P446/EN/TM/E 2-9
2-10 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 3 Hardware Design
HARDWARE DESIGN
CHAPTER 3
P446/EN/TM/E 3-1
3 Hardware Design MiCOMho P446
3-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The Hardware Design chapter describes the design of the product's hardware platform. It consists of
the following sections:
1 Chapter Overview
2 Hardware Design
3 Housing Variants
4 Front Panel
4.1 Front panel ports
5 Rear Panel
6 Boards and modules
6.1 Main Processor Board
6.2 Power Supply Board
6.3 Standard Output Relay Board
6.4 Input Module
6.4.1 Transformer Board
6.4.2 Input board
6.5 Coprocessor board
6.6 IRIG-B board
6.7 Ethernet board
6.8 Redundant Ethernet with IRIG-B input
6.9 Rear Communications Board
6.10 Fibre Board
6.11 High Break Relay Output Board
P446/EN/TM/E 3-3
2 HARDWARE DESIGN
All products based on the Px40 platform have common hardware architecture. The unit’s hardware is
based on a modular design philosophy and is made up of several modules drawn from a standard
range.
The exact specification and number of hardware modules used depends on the model number and the
variant, but the product will consists of a combination of the following boards:
Board Part No.
Power supply board 24/54 V DC ZN0021 001
Relay output board with 8 outputs ZN0019 001
Transformer board ZN0004 001
Input board ZN0017 011
Input board with opto-inputs ZN0017 012
Processor board ZN0069 001
IRIG-B board ZN0007 001
Fibre ZN0007 002
Fibre + IRIG-B ZN0007 003
2nd rear communications board ZN0025 001
2nd rear communications board with IRIG-B input ZN0025 002
100 MhZ Ethernet board ZN0049 001
100 MhZ Ethernet board with IRIG-B modulated input ZN0049 002
100 MhZ Ethernet board with IRIG-B demodulated input ZN0049 003
IRIG-B demodulated input ZN0049 004
High-break output relay board ZN0042 001
Coprocessor board ZN0020 002
Coprocessor board ZN0020 003
Redundant Ethernet SHP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + modulated IRIG-B ZN0071 001
Redundant Ethernet SHP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + demodulated IRIG-B ZN0071 002
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + modulated IRIG-B ZN0071 005
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + demodulated IRIG-B ZN0071 006
Redundant Ethernet DHP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + modulated IRIG-B ZN0071 007
Redundant Ethernet DHP, 2 multi-mode fibre ports + demodulated IRIG-B ZN0071 008
Table 1 Board options
All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus, which allows the processor board to
send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate
serial data bus for conveying sampled data from the input module to the processors. The figure below
shows the modules and the flow of information between them.
3-4 P446/EN/TM/E
Parallel Data Bus
Serial data link

Output relay contacts
Figure 1: Hardware functional diagram Digital inputs
P446/EN/TM/E 3-5
3 HOUSING VARIANTS
The products of the MiCOM Px40 series can be implemented in a range of case sizes and types.
There are two main housing categories: standalone and rack-mounted. Each product can be
implemented in either case type.
Case dimensions for industrial products usually follow modular measurement units based on rack
sizes. These are: U for height and TE for width, where:
 1U = 1.75" = 44.45 mm
 1TE = 0.2 inches = 5.08 mm
The Px40 series of products are available in rack-mount or standalone versions. All products are
nominally 4U high to allow mounting in an IEC 60297 compliant 19” rack. The height of the front
panels are such that no significant gaps can be seen when they are mounted one above another in
the rack.
The case width depends on the product type and its hardware options. There are three different case
widths for the PX40 series of products: 40TE, 60TE and 80TE.
The widths in millimeters and inches for these case variants are shown below.
Case width (TE) Case width (mm) Case width (inches)
40TE 203.2 8
60TE 304.8 12
80TE 406.4 16
Table 2 Case Widths
The cases are pre-finished steel with a conductive covering of aluminum and zinc. This provides good
grounding at all joints, providing a low impedance path to earth that is essential for performance in the
presence of external noise.
3-6 P446/EN/TM/E
4 FRONT PANEL
Figure 2 shows the front panel of a typical 60TE unit. The front panels of the products based on 40TE and 80TE
cases have a lot of commonality, and differ only in the number of hotkeys and user-programmable
light-emitting diodes (LEDs). The hinged covers at the top and bottom of the front panel are shown
open. An optional transparent front cover physically protects the front panel.
Figure 2: Front panel (60TE)
The front panel of the unit comprises the following:
A top compartment with a hinged cover

This compartment contains labels for the:
 Serial number
 Current and voltage ratings.
A bottom compartment with a hinged cover

This compartment contains:
 A compartment for a 1/2 AA size backup battery (used for the real time clock and event, fault,
and disturbance records).
 A 9-pin female D-type front port for an EIA(RS)232 serial connection to a PC.
 A 25-pin female D-type parallel port for monitoring internal signals and downloading high-speed
local software and language text.
An alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)

The LCD is a monochrome display with resolution 16 characters by 3 lines.
P446/EN/TM/E 3-7
A Keypad
The keypad consists of the following keys:
4 arrow keys to navigate the menus
An enter key for executing the chosen option
A clear key for clearing the last command
A read key for viewing larger blocks of text (arrow keys

now used for scrolling)
2 hot keys for scrolling through the default display and
for control of setting groups
Function keys to
Depending on the model, up to ten programmable function keys are available for custom use.
The function keys are associated with programmable LEDs for local control. Factory default settings
associate specific functions with these direct-action keys and LEDs, but by using programmable
scheme logic, you can change the default functions of the keys and LEDs to fit specific needs.
Fixed Function LEDs

The fixed-function LEDs on the left-hand side of the front panel indicate the following conditions.
 Trip (Red) switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault
record is cleared from the front display. Also the trip LED can be configured as self-resetting.
 Alarm (Yellow) flashes when the IED registers an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event
or maintenance record. The LED flashes until the alarms have been accepted (read), then
changes to constantly ON. When the alarms are cleared, the LED switches OFF.
 Out of service (Yellow) is ON when the IED's protection is unavailable.
 Healthy (Green) is ON when the IED is in correct working order, and should be ON at all times.
It goes OFF if the unit’s self-tests show there is an error in the hardware or software. The state
of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contacts at the back of the unit.
Programmable Alarm LEDs

Depending on the model, the unit has up to eight programmable LEDs (numbers 1 to 8), which are
used for alarm indications. All of the programmable LEDs on the unit are tri-colour and can be set to
RED, YELLOW or GREEN.
Programmable Function LEDs

Depending on the model, the unit has up to ten further programmable LEDs (F1 to F10) to show the
status of the function keys. All of the programmable LEDs on the unit are tri-colour and can be set to
RED, YELLOW or GREEN.
4.1 Front panel ports

Front Serial port (SK1)
The front communication port is situated under the bottom hinged cover. It is a 9-pin female D-type
connector, providing RS232 serial data communication. This port is intended for temporary
connection during testing, installation and commissioning. It is not intended to be used for permanent
SCADA communications. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is a
3-8 P446/EN/TM/E
proprietary communication protocol to allow communication with a range of protection equipment, and
between the device and the Windows-based support software package.
You can connect the unit to a PC with a serial cable up to 15 m in length.
Figure 3: Front serial port connection
The port pin-out follows the standard for Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device with the
following pin connections on a 9-pin connector.
Pin number Description
2 Tx Transmit data
3 Rx Receive data
5 0 V Zero volts common
Table 3 DCE 9-pin serial port connections
You must use the correct serial cable, or the communication will not work. A straight-through serial
cable is required, connecting pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5.
Once the physical connection from the unit to the PC is made, the PC’s communication settings must
be set to match those of the IED. The following table shows the unit’s communication settings for the
front port.
Protocol Courier
Baud rate 19,200 bps
Courier address 1
Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit
Table 4 RS232 communication settings
The inactivity timer for the front port is set to 15 minutes. This controls how long the unit maintains its
level of password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15
minutes, any password access level that has been enabled is cancelled.
The front communication port supports the Courier protocol for one-to-one communication. It is
designed to be used for installing, commissioning or maintaining the unit and is not intended for
permanent connection.
P446/EN/TM/E 3-9
Note: The front serial port does not support automatic extraction of event and disturbance records,
although this data can be accessed manually.
Front Parallel Port (SK2)

This is a 25 pin D-type port. This port is used for commissioning, downloading firmware updates and
menu text editing.
3-10 P446/EN/TM/E
5 REAR PANEL
The MiCOM Px40 series is of a modular construction, most of the internal workings being
implemented on boards and modules, which fit into slots. Some of the boards plug into terminal
blocks, which are bolted onto the rear of the unit, whilst some boards such as the communications
boards have their own connectors. The rear panel consists of these terminal blocks, plus the rears of
the communications boards.
The back panel cut-outs and slot allocations vary according to the product and the type of boards and
terminal blocks needed to populate the case. The following figure shows a typical rear view of an
80TE case populated with various boards.
Figure 4: Rear view of populated 80TE case
Note: This diagram is just an example and may not show the exact product described in this manual. It
also does not show the full range of available boards, just a typical arrangement.
Not all slots are the same size. The slot width depends on the type of board or terminal block. For
example, HD (heavy duty) terminal blocks, as required for the analogue inputs, require a wider slot
size than MD (medium duty) terminal blocks. The board positions are not generally interchangeable.
Each slot is designed to house a particular type of board. Again this is model-dependent.
There are four types of terminal block: RTD/CLIO, MIDOS, HD and MD. The terminal blocks are
fastened to the rear panel with screws.
P446/EN/TM/E 3-11
HD Terminal Block MD Terminal Block Midos Terminal Block RTD/CLIO Terminal Block
P4522ENa .
Figure 5: Terminal block types
Note: Not all products use all types of terminal blocks. The product described in this manual may use one
or more of the above types.
3-12 P446/EN/TM/E
6 BOARDS AND MODULES

The figure below shows an exploded view of a typical product of the MiCOM Px40 series. Each
product comprises a selection of PCBs (Printed Circuit Boards), and sub-assemblies, depending on
the chosen configuration.
Figure 6: Exploded view of IED
PCBs
Each PCB is assigned a 9 character part number beginning with 'ZN'. This is followed by a 7-digit
number split into two parts as follows:
ZN<4digit number> <3 digit number>
where the 4-digit number is the main part number and the 3 digit number is the variation of that part
number. This is best illustrated by an example; in this case, the 3 power supply variations:
Component Description Part Number
Power Supply Module: 24/54 V DC ZN0021 001
Table 5 PCB numbering
A PCB typically consists of the components, a front connector for connecting into the main system
parallel bus via a ribbon cable, and an interface to the rear. This rear interface may be:
 Directly presented to the outside world (as is the case for communication boards such as
Ethernet Boards)
 Presented to a connector, which in turn connects into a terminal block bolted onto the rear of
the case (as is the case for most of the other board types)
P446/EN/TM/E 3-13
Figure 7: Rear connection to terminal block
Subassemblies
A sub-assembly consists of two or more boards connected together physically (bolted together with
spacers) and electrically (via electrical connectors). It may also have other special requirements such
as being encased in a metal housing for shielding against electromagnet radiation.
Boards are designated by a part number beginning with ZN, whereas preassembled sub-assemblies
are designated with a part number beginning with GN. Subassemblies, which are put together at the
production stage, do not have a separate part number.
The products in the Px40 series typically contain two subassemblies:
 The power supply assembly comprising:

 A power supply board
 An output relay board
 The input module comprising:

 One or more transformer boards, which contains the voltage and current transformers
(partially or fully populated).
 One or more input boards
 Metal protective covers for EM (electromagnetic) shielding
The input module is preassembled and is therefore assigned a GN number, whereas the power supply
module is assembled at production stage and does not therefore have an individual part number.
Connections
HD or MIDOS terminal blocks are used at the rear of the unit for the current and voltage signal
connections. MD terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts,
the power supply and the rear communication port.
3-14 P446/EN/TM/E
Grounding
The boards and modules use multi-point grounding to improve the immunity to external noise and
minimize the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and
spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork.
6.1 Main Processor Board
Figure 8: Main processor ZN0069
The main processor board is based around a floating point, 32-bit Digital Signal Processor (DSP). It
performs all calculations and controls the operation of all other modules in the IED, including the data
communication and user interfaces. This board is the only board that does not fit into one of the slots.
It resides in the front panel and is connected to the rest of the system via an internal ribbon cable.
The LCD and LEDs are mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication
ports. All serial communication is handled using a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA).
The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories, volatile and non-
volatile: the volatile memory is fast access SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the
processor software, and data storage as required during the processor’s calculations. The non-
volatile memory is sub-divided into two groups:
 Flash memory for non-volatile storage of software code, text and configuration data including
the present setting values
 Battery-backed SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data
P446/EN/TM/E 3-15
6.2 Power Supply Board
Figure 9: Power supply board
The power supply board provides power to the unit. One of three different configurations of the power
supply board can be fitted to the unit. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the
nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to it.
The three board versions are:
 ZN0021 001: 24/54 V DC

 ZN0021 002: 48/125 V DC
 ZN0021 003: 110/250 V DC
The power supply board connector plugs into a medium duty terminal block sliding in from the front of
the unit to the rear. This terminal block is always positioned on the right hand side of the unit looking
from the rear.
The power supply board is usually assembled together with the relay output board to form a complete
subassembly, as shown below.
3-16 P446/EN/TM/E
P4551ENa
Figure 10: Power Supply Assembly
The power supply outputs are used to provide isolated power supply rails to the various modules
within the unit. Three voltage levels are used by the unit’s modules:
 5.1 V for all of the digital circuits

 +/- 16 V for the analogue electronics such as on the input board
 22 V for driving the output relay coils.
All power supply voltages including the 0 V earth line are distributed around the unit by means of the
64-way ribbon cable.
An additional 48 V supply is provided by the power supply board for the field voltage. This is brought
out to terminals on the back of the unit so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital
inputs.
The power supply board incorporates inrush current limiting. This limits the peak inrush current to
approximately 10 A.
Power is applied to pins 1 and 2 of the terminal block, where pin 1 is negative and pin 2 is positive.
The pin numbers are clearly marked on the terminal block as show below.
P446/EN/TM/E 3-17
Power: Terminals 1 + 2 of
PSU terminal block.
1 T1 = -ve
2
T2 = +ve
16
17
18
P4538ENa
Figure 11: Power Supply Terminals
Watchdog Facility
The power supply board also provides a Watchdog facility. This Watchdog facility provides two output
relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed. These are used to indicate the health of
the unit processor board. They are driven by the main processor board.
1
2
Watchdog contacts: Terminals 11, 12, 13 and 14

of PSU terminal block
11 12 T11 = NC
T12 = NC
13
T13 = NO
14
T14 = NO
P4550ENa
Figure 12: Watchdog contact terminals
3-18 P446/EN/TM/E
Rear Serial Port

The rear serial port (RP1) is a three-terminal serial communications port, housed on the power supply
board. It is intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote control centre. The
physical connectivity is achieved using three screw terminals; two for the signal connection, and the
third for the earth shield of the cable. These are located on pins 16, 17 and 18 of the power supply
terminal block, which is on the far right looking from the rear. The interface can be selected between
RS485 and K-bus. When the K-Bus option is selected, the two signal connections are not polarity
conscious.
Note: The polarity independent K-bus can only be used for the Courier data protocol. The polarity
conscious MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 protocols need RS485.
The rear serial port is shown in Figure 13. The pin assignments are as follows:
 Pin 16: Ground shield

 Pin 17: Negative signal
 Pin 18: Positive signal
1
2
RP1: Terminals 16, 17 and 18 of

16 PSU terminal block.
T16 = Ground
17
T17 = Negative
18 T18 = Positive
P4537ENa
Figure 13: Rear serial port terminals
Note: An additional serial port with D-type presentation is available as an optional board, if required.
The power supply board also provides a rear serial port. The rear serial port (RP1) is an EIA(RS)485
interface, which provides SCADA communication. The interface supports half-duplex communication
and provides optical isolation for the serial data being transmitted and received.
P446/EN/TM/E 3-19
6.3 Standard Output Relay Board
P4527ENa
Figure 14: Standard output relay board
There are two types of standard output relay board:
 ZN0019 xxx: 8 relays with 6 Normally Open contacts and 2 Changeover contacts
 ZN0031 xxx: 7 relays with 3 Normally Open contacts and 4 Changeover contacts
The board chosen depends on the model and its variation.

The output relays can drive any circuit requiring logical inputs such as circuit breakers, blocking
signals, and PSL schemes.
The output relay board can be provided together with the power supply board as a complete
assembly, or independently for the purposes of relay output expansion.
In the above figure, you can see the two cut-out locations in the board. These can be cut out to allow
power supply components to protrude when coupling the output relay board to the power supply
board. If the output relay board is to be used independently, these cut-out locations remain in tact.
Output Relay Pin-out (8-relay board)

The pin-out of the output relays on the 8-relay board are shown in the table below.
Terminal Number
Terminal 1 Relay 1 NO
3-20 P446/EN/TM/E
Terminal Number
Terminal 13 Relay 7 changeover
Terminal 14 Relay 7 common
Table 6: Pin-out of 8-relay board
Output Relay Pin-out (7-relay board)

The pin-out of the output relays on the 7-relay board are shown in the table below.
Terminal Number
Table 7: Pin-out of 7-relay board
P446/EN/TM/E 3-21
6.4 Input Module
Figure 15: Input module with one transformer board
Figure 16: Input module with two transformer boards
The input module consists of two or three PCBs; the main input board and one or two transformer
boards, depending on the model chosen. The transformer board contains the voltage and current
transformers, which isolate and scale the analogue input signals delivered by the system transformers.
The input board contains the A/D conversion and digital processing circuitry, as well as eight digital
optically isolated inputs (opto-inputs).
The boards are connected together physically (bolted together with spacers) and electrically (via
electrical connectors). The module is encased in a metal housing for shielding against electromagnet
radiation.
3-22 P446/EN/TM/E
6.4.1 Transformer Board
Figure 17: Typical Transformer board
The transformer board hosts the current and voltage transformers, which are used to step down the
currents and voltages originating from the power systems' current and voltage transformers to levels,
which can be used by the unit’s electronic circuitry. In addition to this, the on-board CT and VT
transformers provide electrical isolation between the unit and the power system.
The transformer board is connected physically and electrically to the input board to form a complete
input module.
Transformer Inputs
The CT and VT secondary windings provide differential input signals to the input board to reduce
noise. Up to 5 current transformers and 4 voltage transformers can be populated on one transformer
board. The current inputs will accept either 1 A or 5 A nominal current, depending on the tapping
chosen. The CT and VT inputs are presented to a HD or MiDOS terminal block.
The exact pin out is dependent on the model and its variant, but generally it follows a standard theme.
The following table shows a typical pin out of the first transformer board. The exact pin out details are
provided in the wiring diagrams in the Wiring Diagrams section near the end of this manual
Terminal Number
Terminal 1 IA 5A tapping
Terminal 2 IA common
Terminal 3 IA 1A tapping
Terminal 4 IB 5A tapping
Terminal 5 IB common
Terminal 6 IB 1A tapping
Terminal 7 IC 5A tapping
Terminal 8 IC common
Terminal 9 IC 1A tapping
P446/EN/TM/E 3-23
Terminal Number
Terminal 10 IN 5A tapping
Terminal 11 IN common
Terminal 12 IN 1A tapping
Terminal 13 IN sen 5A tapping
Terminal 14 IN sen common
Terminal 15 IN sen 1A tapping
Terminal 16
Terminal 17
Terminal 18
Terminal 19 VA
Terminal 20 VB
Terminal 21 VC
Terminal 22 VN
Terminal 23 VCS1
Terminal 24 VCS2
Table 8: Transformer input pin-out
6.4.2 Input board
Figure 18: Input board
The input board is used to convert the analogue signals delivered by the current and voltage
transformers into digital quantities used by the IED. This input board also has on-board opto-input
circuitry, providing eight optically-isolated digital inputs and associated noise filtering and buffering.
These opto-inputs are presented to the user by means of a MD terminal block, which sits adjacent to
the analogue inputs terminal block.
3-24 P446/EN/TM/E
The input board is connected physically and electrically to the transformer board to form a complete
input module.
A schematic of the input module comprising two boards is shown in Figure 19 .
Optical 8 digital inputs Optical

Isolator Isolator
Noise Noise
filter filter
Parallel Bus
Buffer
Transformer
board
VT Low
or pass
CT filter
16 bit Serial Serial Link

Mux Buffer
ADC interface
VT Low
or pass
CT filter
P4552ENa
Figure 19: Input module schematic
A/D Conversion
The differential analogue inputs from the unit’s CT and VT transformers are presented to the main
input board as shown. Each differential input is first converted to a single input quantity referenced to
the input board’s ground potential. The signals are then passed through low pass filters to attenuate
the high frequency components before being presented to a multiplexer. The sample stream output
from the multiplexer is buffered before being presented to the 16 bit ADC, where the samples are
converted into digital quantities with 16 bit resolution. The digital sample stream is passed through a
serial interface module and then presented to the unit’s processing boards in the form of a serial
sample data bus.
The calibration coefficients are stored in non-volatile memory. These are used by the processor board
to correct for any amplitude or phase errors introduced by the transformers and analogue circuitry.
Opto-isolated inputs
The other function of the input board is to read in the digital inputs. As with the analogue inputs, the
digital inputs must be electrically isolated from the power system. This is achieved by means of the 8
on-board optical isolators for connection of up to 8 digital signals. The digital signals are passed
P446/EN/TM/E 3-25
through an optional noise filter before being buffered and presented to the unit’s processing boards in
the form of a parallel data bus.
This selectable filtering allows the use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to
induced power-system noise on the wiring. Although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly
for inter-tripping. This can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter in which case one of the
following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered.
 Use double pole switching on the input

 Use screened twisted cable on the input circuit.
The opto-isolated logic inputs can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of
which they are a part, allowing different voltages for different circuits such as signaling and tripping.
They can also be programmed to 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% pickup to dropoff ratio of the nominal
battery voltage in order to satisfy different operating constraints.
The threshold levels are as follows:
Nominal Battery voltage Logic levels: 60-80% DO/PU Logic Levels: 50-70% DO/PU
24/27 V Logic 0 < 16.2 V : Logic 1 > 19.2 V Logic 0 <12.0 V : Logic 1 > 16.8
30/34 Logic 0 < 20.4 V : Logic 1 > 24.0 V Logic 0 < 15.0 V : Logic 1 > 21.0 V
220/250 Logic 0 < 150 V : Logic 1 > 176.0 V Logic 0 < 110 V : Logic 1 > 154.0 V
Table 9: Opto-input thresholds
The lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray
capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input.
Note: The opto-input circuitry can be provided without the A/D circuitry as a separate board, which can
provide supplementary opto-inputs. The board number for this separate opto-input board is
ZN0017-012.
Opto-Inputs
The pin-out of the opto-inputs are shown in the table below.
Terminal Number
Terminal 1 Opto 1 -ve
Terminal 2 Opto 1 +ve
Terminal 13 Opto 7 –ve
Terminal 15 Opto 8 –ve
3-26 P446/EN/TM/E
Terminal Number
Terminal 17 Common
Terminal 18 Common
Table 10: Opto-input pin-out
6.5 Coprocessor board
Figure 20: Coprocessor board with communication interfaces
Note: The above figure shows a coprocessor complete with GPS input and 2 fibre-optic serial data
interfaces. These interfaces will not be present on boards that do not require them.
Where applicable, a second processor board is used to process the special algorithms associated with
the device. This second processor board provides fast access (zero wait state) SRAM for use with
both program and data memory storage. This memory can be accessed by the main processor board
via the parallel bus. This is how the software is transferred from the flash memory on the main
processor board to the coprocessor board on power up. Further communication between the two
processor boards is achieved via interrupts and the shared SRAM. The serial bus carrying the sample
data is also connected to the co-processor board, using the processor’s built-in serial port, as on the
main processor board.
Fibre-optic serial data links

Where applicable, the coprocessor board can be equipped with up to two daughter boards, each
containing a fibre-optic interface for a serial data link. BFOC 2.5 ST connectors are used for this
purpose. One or two channels are provided, each channel comprising a fibre pair for transmitting and
receiving (Rx Tx). These channels are labelled Ch1 and Ch2. These serial data links are used to
transfer information between two or three IEDs.
P446/EN/TM/E 3-27
6.6 IRIG-B board
Figure 21: IRIG-B board
The IRIG-B board can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the device. The IRIG-B
signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector. The timing information is used to synchronize
the IED's internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1 ms. The internal clock is then used for time
tagging events, fault maintenance and disturbance records.
The IRIG-B interface is available in modulated or demodulated formats. The two board variants are as
follows:
 ZN0007 001: Modulated IRIG-B input

 ZN0049 004: Demodulated IRIG-B input
Due to slot limitations the IRIG-B facility is also provided in combination with other functionality on a
number of additional boards, such as:
 Fibre board with IRIG-B

 Second rear communications board with IRIG-B
 Ethernet board with IRIG-B
 Redundant Ethernet board with IRIG-B
Each of these boards is also available with either modulated or demodulated IRIG-B.
Notes: The IRIG-B signal is sometimes supplied by a P594 device.
The IRIG-B signal is used for setting the IEDs internal real time clock. It is not used to time
synchronize devices.
3-28 P446/EN/TM/E
6.7 Ethernet board
Figure 22: Ethernet board with IRIG-B
This is a communications board that provides a standard 100-Base Ethernet interface. This board
supports one electrical copper connection and one fibre-pair connection.
There are three variants for this product as follows:
 ZN0049 001: 100 MHz Ethernet board

 ZN0049 002: 100 MHz Ethernet with on-board modulated IRIG-B input
 ZN0049 003: 100 MHz Ethernet with on-board demodulated IRIG-B input
Two of the variants provide an IRIG-B interface. IRIG-B provides a timing reference for the unit – one
board for modulated IRIG-B and one for demodulated. The IRIG B signal is connected to the board
with a BNC connector.
P446/EN/TM/E 3-29
6.8 Redundant Ethernet with IRIG-B input
Figure 23: Redundant Ethernet board with IRIG-B
This board provides dual redundant Ethernet (supported by two fibre pairs) together with an IRIG-B
interface for timing.
Alstom Grid supply six different board variants depending on the redundancy protocol and the type of
IRIG-B signal (demodulated or modulated). The available redundancy protocols are:
 SHP (Self healing Protocol)

 RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
 DHP (Dual Homing Protocol)
The six variants for this product are as follows:
 ZN0071 001: 100 MHz redundant Ethernet running RSTP, with on-board modulated IRIG-B
 ZN0071 002: 100 MHz redundant Ethernet running RSTP, with on-board demodulated IRIG-B
 ZN0071 005: 100 MHz redundant Ethernet running SHP, with on-board modulated IRIG-B
 ZN0071 006: 100 MHz redundant Ethernet running SHP, with on-board demodulated IRIG-B
 ZN0071 007: 100 MHz redundant Ethernet running DHP, with on-board modulated IRIG-B
 ZN0071 008: 100 MHz redundant Ethernet running DHP, with on-board demodulated IRIG-B
3-30 P446/EN/TM/E
6.9 Rear Communications Board
P4547ENa
Figure 24: Rear communications board
The optional communications board containing the secondary communication ports provide two serial
interfaces presented on 9 pin D-type connectors. These interfaces are known as SK4 and SK5.
SK4 can be used with RS232 RS485 and K-bus.
SK5 can only be used with RS232 and is used for InterMiCOM communication.
The second rear communications board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use the
same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of the second rear communications board are
available; one with an IRIG-B input and one without:
The board comes in two varieties; one with an IRIG-B input and one without:
 ZN0025 001: Second rear communications board

 ZN0025 002: Second rear communications board with IRIG-B input
P446/EN/TM/E 3-31
6.10 Fibre Board
Figure 25: Fibre board
This board provides an interface for communicating with a master station. This communication link can
use all compatible protocols (Courier, IEC 60870-5-103, MODBUS and DNP 3.0). It is a fibre-optic
alternative to the metallic RS485 port presented on the power supply terminal block, and as such is
mutually exclusive with it.
It uses BFOC 2.5 ST connectors
The board comes in two varieties; one with an IRIG-B input and one without:
 ZN0007 002: Fibre board without IRIG-B

 ZN0007 003: Fibre board with IRIG-B input
3-32 P446/EN/TM/E
6.11 High Break Relay Output Board
P4554ENa
Figure 26: High break relay output board
A High Break output relay board is available as an option. It comprises four normally open output
contacts, which are suitable for high breaking loads.
A High Break contact consists of a high capacity relay with a MOSFET in parallel with it. The
MOSFET has a varistor placed across it to provide protection, which is required when switching off
inductive loads. This is because the stored energy in the inductor causes a high reverse voltage that
could damage the MOSFET, if not protected.
When there is a control input command to operate an output contact the miniature relay is operated at
the same time as the MOSFET. The miniature relay contact closes in nominally 3.5 ms and is used to
carry the continuous load current. The MOSFET operates in less than 0.2 ms, but is switched off after
7.5 ms.
When the control input is reset, the MOSFET is again turned on for 7.5 mS. The miniature relay
resets in nominally 3.5 ms before the MOSFET. This means the MOSFET is used to break the load.
The MOSFET absorbs the energy when breaking inductive loads and so limits the resulting voltage
surge. This contact arrangement is for switching DC circuits only.
The following figure shows the timing diagram for High Break contact operation
P446/EN/TM/E 3-33
databus on off
control input
MOSFET operate 7ms 7ms

on on
MOSFET reset
relay contact
closed
3.5ms + contact bounce 3.5ms
load current
Figure 27: High break contact operation
High Break Contact Applications

 Efficient scheme engineering
In traditional hardwired scheme designs, High Break capability could only be achieved using
external electromechanical trip relays. Instead, these internal High Break contacts can be used
thus reducing space requirements.
 Accessibility of CB auxiliary contacts

It is common practice to use circuit breaker 52a (CB Closed) auxiliary contacts to break the trip
coil current on breaker opening, thereby easing the duty on the protection contacts. In some
cases (such as operation of disconnectors, or retrofitting), it may be that 52a contacts are either
unavailable or unreliable. In such cases, High Break contacts can be used to break the trip coil
current in these applications.
 Breaker fail
In the event of failure of the local circuit breaker (stuck breaker), or defective auxiliary contacts
(stuck contacts), it is incorrect to use 52a contact action. The interrupting duty at the local
breaker then falls on the relay output contacts, which may not be rated to perform this duty.
High Break contacts should be used in this case to avoid the risk of burning out relay contacts.
 Initiation of teleprotection
The High Break contacts also offer fast making, which results in faster tripping. In addition, fast
keying of teleprotection is a benefit. Fast keying bypasses the usual contact operation time,
such that permissive, blocking and intertrip commands can be routed faster.
Warning: These relay contacts are POLARITY SENSITIVE. External wiring must comply with the
polarity requirements described in the external connection diagram to ensure correct
operation.
3-34 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 4 Software Design
SOFTWARE DESIGN
CHAPTER 4
P446/EN/TM/E 4-1
4 Software Design MiCOMho P446
4-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The Software Design chapter describes the design of the product's software platform. It consists of the
following sections:
1 Chapter Overview
2 Software Design Overview
3 System Level Software
3.1 Real Time Operating system
3.2 System Services Software
3.3 Self-diagnostic Software
3.3.1 Start-up Self-Testing
3.3.1.1 System Boot
3.3.1.2 Initialization Software
3.3.1.3 Platform Software Initialization & Monitoring
3.3.2 Continuous Self-testing
4 Platform Software
4.1 Record Logging
4.2 Settings Database
4.3 Interfaces
5 Protection and Control Functions and Software

5.1 Protection and Control Scheduling
5.2 Acquisition of Samples
5.3 Signal Processing
5.4 Programmable Scheme Logic
5.5 Event Recording
5.6 Disturbance Recorder
5.7 Fault Locator
5.8 Function Key Interface
6 Coprocessor Software
6.1 Distance Protection
P446/EN/TM/E 4-3
2 SOFTWARE DESIGN OVERVIEW

The product's software can be conceptually categorized into several elements as follows:
 The system level software

 The platform software
 The protection and control software
 Optional coprocessor software (not applicable to all products)
These elements are not distinguishable to the user, and the distinction is made purely for the purposes
of explanation. Figure 1 shows the software structure.
Protection and control software Coprocessor software

(not all products)
Fault locator Disturbance
Distance
task recorder task
Current differential
Protection Task Phase comparison
Programmable & InterMiCOM 64
fixed scheme
logic
Platform software
Fourier signal Protection Records Event, fault,
processing algorithms Remote
disturbance,
communications
maintenance
interfaces
record logging
Protection and
Supervisor task
control settings
Settings database
Control of output
contacts and
Sampling programmable LEDs
function Front panel Local
interface communications
(LCD + Keypad) interfaces
Sample data + Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD,

digital logic inputs LEDs, front & rear comms ports.
Self-checking maintenance records
System Level Software

System services software / Real time operating system / Self-diagnostic software
Hardware
P4553ENa
Figure 1: Software structure
The software, which executes on the main processor, can be divided into a number of functions as
illustrated above. Each function is further broken down into a number of separate tasks. These tasks
are then run according to a scheduler. They are run at either a fixed rate or they are event driven. The
tasks communicate with each other as required.
4-4 P446/EN/TM/E
3 SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE
3.1 Real Time Operating system

The real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the various tasks. This ensures
that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system
also plays a part in controlling the communication between the software tasks.
3.2 System Services Software

The system services software provides the layer between the unit’s hardware and the higher-level
functionality of the platform software and the protection & control software. For example, the system
services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote
communication ports. It also controls things like the booting of the processor and the downloading of
the processor code into SRAM from Flash memory at startup.
3.3 Self-diagnostic Software

The IED includes several self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software
while in service. If there is a problem with the unit’s hardware or software, it should be able to detect
and report the problem, and attempt to resolve the problem by performing a reboot. In this case, the
unit would be out of service for a short time, during which the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the unit is
switched OFF and the watchdog contact at the rear is ON. If the restart fails to resolve the problem,
the unit takes itself permanently out of service; the ‘Healthy’ LED stays OFF and watchdog contact
stays ON.
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the unit attempts to store a maintenance
record in battery-backed SRAM to allow the nature of the problem to be communicated to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is
performed when the unit is booted-up, and secondly a continuous self-checking operation which
checks the operation of the critical functions whilst it is in service.
3.3.1 Start-up Self-Testing

The self-testing takes a few seconds to complete, during which time the unit’s measurement,
recording, control, and protection functions are unavailable. On a successful start-up and self-test, the
‘health-state’ LED on the front of the unit is switched on. If a problem is detected during the start-up
testing, the unit remains out of service until it is manually restored to working order.
The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows:
3.3.1.1 System Boot

The integrity of the Flash memory is verified using a checksum before the program code and stored
data is loaded into SRAM for execution by the processor. When the loading has been completed, the
data held in SRAM is compared to that held in the Flash memory to ensure that no errors have
occurred in the data transfer and that the two are the same. The entry point of the software code in
SRAM is then called. This is the unit’s initialization code.
3.3.1.2 Initialization Software

The initialization process initializes the processor registers and interrupts, starts the watchdog timers
(used by the hardware to determine whether the software is still running), starts the real-time operating
system and creates and starts the supervisor task. In the initialization process the unit checks the
following:
P446/EN/TM/E 4-5
 The status of the battery

 The integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and disturbance
records
 The voltage level of the field voltage supply which can be used to drive the opto-isolated inputs
 The operation of the LCD controller
 The watchdog operation
At the conclusion of the initialization software the supervisor task begins the process of starting the
platform software.
For products using a coprocessor, the startup checks are as follows:
 A check is made for the presence of the co-processor board, and if present a valid response
 The SRAM on the co-processor board is checked with a test bit pattern before the co-processor
code is transferred from the flash EPROM
If any of these checks produce an error, the co-processor board remains out of service.
Note: A coprocessor board is used only in products with Distance, phase comparison, or current
differential functionality.
3.3.1.3 Platform Software Initialization & Monitoring

When starting the platform software, the unit checks the following:
 The integrity of the data held in non-volatile memory (using a checksum)

 The operation of the real-time clock
 The optional IRIG-B function
 The presence and condition of the input board
 The analogue data acquisition system (by sampling the reference voltage)
At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the unit is entered into service and the application
software is started up.
3.3.2 Continuous Self-testing

When the unit is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of its hardware and
software. The checking is carried out by the system services software and the results are reported to
the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows:
 The flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified by a checksum
 The code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding data in flash
EPROM to check for data corruption
 The SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified with a
checksum
 The battery status
 The level of the 48 V field voltage
 The integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the output relay coils
is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is executed.
4-6 P446/EN/TM/E
 The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is continuously checked by the
acquisition function every time it is executed. This is done by sampling the reference voltages
 The operation of the optional Ethernet board is checked by the software on the main processor
card. If the Ethernet board fails to respond an alarm is raised and the card is reset in an
attempt to resolve the problem.
 The operation of the optional IRIG-B function is checked by the software that reads the time and
date from the board
In the event that one of the checks detects an error in any of the unit’s subsystems, the platform
software is notified and it attempts to log a maintenance record in battery-backed SRAM.
If the problem is with the battery status or the IRIG-B board, the unit continues in operation. For
problems detected in any other area, the unit initiates a shutdown and re-boot, resulting in a period of
up to 10 seconds when the functionality is unavailable.
The complete restart of the unit including all initializations should clear most problems that may occur.
If, however, the diagnostic self-check detects the same problem that caused the unit to restart, it is
clear that the restart has not cleared the problem, and the unit takes itself permanently out of service.
This is indicated by the ‘’health-state’ LED on the front of the unit, which switches OFF, and the
watchdog contact which switches ON.
The start-up and continuous self test logic diagrams are shown below.
P446/EN/TM/E 4-7
Figure 2: Start-up self-test logic
4-8 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 3: Continuous self-test logic
P446/EN/TM/E 4-9
4 PLATFORM SOFTWARE
The platform software has three main functions:
 To control the logging of records generated by the protection software, including alarms, events,
faults, and maintenance records
 To store and maintain a database of all of the settings in non-volatile memory
 To provide the internal interface between the Settings database and the unit’s user interfaces,
using the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports.
4.1 Record Logging

The logging function is used to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records
are stored in battery-backed SRAM to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The unit
maintains four types of log on a first in first out basis (FIFO). These are:
 Alarms
 Event records
 Fault records
 Security records
 Maintenance records
The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging
function can be initiated from the protection software. The platform software is responsible for logging
a maintenance record in the event of an IED failure. This includes errors that have been detected by
the platform software itself or errors that are detected by either the system services or the protection
software function. See the Settings and Records chapter for further details on record logging.
4.2 Settings Database

The settings database contains all the settings and data, which are stored in non-volatile memory.
The platform software manages the settings database and ensures that only one user interface can
modify the settings at any one time. This is a necessary restriction to avoid conflict between different
parts of the software during a setting change.
Changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, are first written to a temporary
location SRAM memory. This is sometimes called 'Scratchpad' memory. These settings are not written
into non-volatile memory immediately. This is because a batch of such changes should not be
activated one by one, but as part of a complete scheme. Once the complete scheme has been stored
in SRAM, the batch of settings can be committed to the non-volatile memory where they will become
active.
4.3 Interfaces
The settings and measurements database must be accessible from all of the interfaces to allow read
and modify operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each of
the interfaces (LCD display, keypad and all the communications interfaces).
4-10 P446/EN/TM/E
5 PROTECTION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS AND SOFTWARE

The protection and control software processes all of the protection elements and measurement
functions. To achieve this it has to communicate with the system services software, the platform
software and, if applicable, the coprocessor software, as well as organize its own operations.
The protection task software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the main processor
board. This ensures the fastest possible protection response.
The protection and control software provides a supervisory task, which controls the start-up of the task
and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software.
5.1 Protection and Control Scheduling

For products that use a coprocessor, the protection and control task on the main processor board is
suspended until the co-processor board starts. The protection task is restarted at a rate that is
dependent on the product (typically between two times and sixteen times per cycle).
5.2 Acquisition of Samples

The acquisition of samples on the main processor board is controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is
called by the system services software. This sampling function takes each set of new samples from
the input module and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. For products that use a coprocessor, these
samples are also stored concurrently by the co-processor.
5.3 Signal Processing

The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators and
frequency tracking of the analogue signals.
The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm
which is applied to one of the input signals. It works by detecting a change in the signal’s measured
phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by
the input module, in order to achieve a constant sample rate per cycle of the power waveform. The
value of the tracked frequency is also stored for use by the protection and control task.
When the protection and control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier
components for the analogue signals. With the exception of the RMS measurements, all other
measurements and protection functions are based on the Fourier derived fundamental component.
The Fourier components are calculated using a single-cycle, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The
DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent
data is used.
The DFT extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal to produce the
magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. This gives good
harmonic rejection for frequencies up to the 23rd harmonic. The 23rd is the first predominant
harmonic that is not attenuated by the Fourier filter and this is known as ‘Alias’. However, the Alias is
attenuated by approximately 85% by an additional, analogue anti-aliasing filter (low pass filter). The
combined affect of the anti-aliasing and Fourier filters is shown below:
P446/EN/TM/E 4-11
1.2
Power frequency (eg 50/60 Hz)
Ma gnitude (per unit)
1
Combined response of fourier
and anti-aliasing filters
0.8
0.6
Anti-aliasing filter response
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Harmonic
P4563ENa
Figure 4: Frequency response
The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they
can be accessed by all of the protection elements’ algorithms. The disturbance recorder also uses the
samples from the input module, in an unprocessed form. This is for waveform recording and the
calculation of true RMS values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes.

The Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) allows you to configure an individual protection scheme to
suit your own application. It may be part of any of the four Protection Setting groups.
The input to the PSL can be any combination of the following:
 Digital input signals (from the opto-isolated inputs on the input board)
 Outputs of the protection elements (for example, protection starts and trips)
 Outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic (the fixed scheme logic is the standard set of
protection schemes provided by default)
 InterMiCOM (IM), InterMiCOM64 (IM64) signals and Control Inputs
 IEC61850 GOOSE inputs (optional)
 Function keys (this option is not applicable to all products)
The PSL consists of programmable logic gates, latches and delay timers. The logic gates can be
programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The
timers are used either to create a programmable delay, or to condition the logic outputs such as
creating pulses of fixed duration. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel, the output
contacts at the rear of the unit, IM and IM64 signals and GOOSE outputs.
The execution of the PSL logic is event driven, i.e. it only runs when an input changes state. This
reduces the amount of processing time used by the PSL. The output of the latches, timers and relay
contacts are updated at the end of the protection and control task.
4-12 P446/EN/TM/E
The PSL allows you to design your own logic scheme. This means that it can be configured to form
very complex systems. Because of this, the PSL can only be configured using the PSL Editor, which
is a component of the PC support package MiCOM S1 Studio.
When you transfer a PSL file from the PSL editor to the IED, you can specify the Group to which it is
downloaded, together with a 32-character reference description. This PSL reference is shown in the
Grp1/2/3/4 PSL Ref cell in the PSL DATA column. The download date and time and file checksum for
each of the group’s PSL file is also shown in the cells Date/Time and Grp 1/2/3/4 PSL ID in the PSL
DATA column. The PSL data can be used to indicate whether a PSL has been changed and thus be
useful in providing information for version control of PSL files.
The default PSL Reference description is Default PSL followed by the model number, for example,
“Default PSL PXXX??????0yy0?” where XXX refers to the product and yy refers to the software
version. This is the same for all protection setting groups since the default PSL is the same for all
groups. Since the LCD display (bottom line) only has space for 16 characters the display must be
scrolled to see all 32 characters of the PSL Reference description.
Note: The PSL DATA column information is visible using the front panel interface or over the Courier
communications protocol.
5.5 Event Recording

A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal causes an event record to be
created. These events are generated by the protection software and immediately time stamped. They
are then transferred to battery-backed SRAM for non-volatile storage. It is possible for the fast buffer
to overflow under avalanche conditions. If this occurs, a maintenance record is generated to indicate
this loss of information.
5.6 Disturbance Recorder

The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can
record the waveforms of the calibrated analogue channels, plus the values of the digital signals. The
recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is
supplied with data by the protection and control task once per cycle, and collates the received data
into the required length disturbance record. The disturbance records can be extracted using MiCOM
S1 Studio or the SCADA system, which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, allowing the
use of other packages to view the recorded data.
5.7 Fault Locator

The fault locator uses 12 cycles of the analogue input signals to calculate the fault location. The result
is returned to the protection and control task, which includes it in the fault record. The pre-fault and
post-fault voltages are also presented in the fault record. When the fault record is complete, including
the fault location, the protection and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to log the
fault record.
5.8 Function Key Interface

The ten function keys interface directly into the PSL as digital input signals. A change of state is only
recognized when a key press is executed on average for longer than 200 ms. The time to register a
change of state depends on whether the function key press is executed at the start or the end of a
protection task cycle, with the additional hardware and software scan time included. A function key
press can provide a latched (toggled mode) or output on key press only (normal mode) depending on
how it is programmed. It can be configured to individual protection scheme requirements. The latched
state signal for each function key is written to non-volatile memory and read from non-volatile memory
P446/EN/TM/E 4-13
during relay power up thus allowing the function key state to be reinstated after power-up, should
power be inadvertently lost.
4-14 P446/EN/TM/E
6 COPROCESSOR SOFTWARE
For distance protection, phase comparison and differential protection functionality, a coprocessor
software module, which runs on a coprocessor board, is required. There are three types, depending
on the required functionality:
 Distance only (e.g. P443, P445, P446)

 Distance + Phase Comparison (e.g. P547)
 Distance + Current Differential (e.g. P543/5, P544/6)
All of the processing for the Differential, Phase Comparison, Distance and DEF protection algorithms
is performed on the co-processor board.
The co-processor is also responsible for managing inter-tripping commands IM64 via the
communication link.
Data exchange between the co-processor board and the main processor board is achieved through
the use of shared memory on the co-processor board. When the main processor accesses this
memory, the co-processor is temporarily halted. After the co-processor code has been copied onto
the board at initialization, the main traffic between the two boards consists of setting change
information, commands from the main processor, differential protection measurements and output
data.

The current and voltage inputs are filtered, using finite impulse response (FIR) digital filters to reduce
the effects of non-power frequency components in the input signals, such as DC offsets in current
waveforms, and capacitor voltage transformer (CVT) transients in the voltages. The device uses a
combination of a 1/4 cycle filter using 12 coefficients, a 1/2 cycle filter using 24 coefficients, and a one
cycle filter using 48 coefficients. The relay automatically performs intelligent switching in the
application of the filters, to select the best balance of removal of transients with fast response.
Note: The protection elements perform additional filtering, for example implemented by the trip count
strategy.
Figure 5 shows the frequency response of the 12, 24 and 48 coefficient filters, noting that all have a
gain of unity at the fundamental.
P446/EN/TM/E 4-15
Figure 5: Filter frequency response
4-16 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 5 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
CHAPTER 5
P446/EN/TM/E 5-1
5 Configuration MiCOMho P446
5-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 OVERVIEW
Each product has different configuration parameters according to the functions it has been designed to
perform. There is, however, a common methodology used across the entire Px40 product series to set
these parameters.
This chapter describes an overview of this common methodology, as well as providing concise
instructions of how to configure the device.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
1 Overview
2 Using the HMI Panel
2.1 Navigating the HMI Panel
2.2 Getting started
2.3 Default display
2.4 Password Entry
2.5 Reading and Clearing of Alarms and Fault Records
2.6 Menu Structure
2.7 Changing the Settings
2.8 Direct Access (The Hotkey Menu)
2.9 Function keys
3 Using MiCOM S1 Studio

3.1 Platform Requirements
3.2 Connecting to the Unit using MiCOM S1 Studio
3.3 Off-line use of MiCOM S1 Studio
3.4 Importing Device Data Models
4 Configuring the Ethernet Interface

4.1 Configuring the Ethernet Interface for IEC 61850
4.2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface for DNP3.0
5 Configuring the Redundant Ethernet Board

5.1 Configuring the IED IP address
5.2 Configuring the Board IP Address
5.3 RSTP Configuration
6 Configuring the Data Protocols

6.1 Courier Configuration
6.2 DNP3.0 configuration
6.3 IEC 60870-5-103 Configuration
6.4 IEC 61850 Configuration
6.5 DNP3.0 configuration using MiCOM S1 Studio
6.6 IEC 61850 configuration
6.6.1 IEC 61850 Configuration banks
6.6.2 IEC 61850 Network connectivity
P446/EN/TM/E 5-3
2 USING THE HMI PANEL
2.1 Navigating the HMI Panel

Using the HMI, you can:
 Display and modify settings

 View the digital I/O signal status
 Display measurements
 Display fault records
 Reset fault and alarm indications
The keypad provides full access to the device functionality by means of a range of menu options. The
information is displayed on the LCD.
Keys Description Function
To change the menu level or change

Up and down Cursor keys between settings in a particular column,
or changing values within a cell
To change default display, change

Left and right cursor keys between column headings, or changing
values within a cell
ENTER key For changing and executing settings
For executing commands and settings for

Hotkeys
which shortcuts have been defined
C Cancel key
To return to column header from any
menu cell
To return to column header from any

Read key
menu cell
F1
For executing user programmable
Function keys
functions
Table 1: Key descriptions
Note: As the LCD display has a resolution of 16 characters by 3 lines, some of the information is in a
condensed mnemonic form.
5-4 P446/EN/TM/E
The cursor keys are used to navigate the menus. These keys have an auto-repeat function if held
down continuously. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes and menu navigation.
The longer the key is held pressed, the faster the rate of change or movement.
Figure 1 shows how to navigate the menu items in the form of a menu navigation map.
Default display Default display

option option
Alarm message
Default display options

C
Column 00 Subsequent column headings Column B8

System data User curves
Vertical cursor keys move

Horizontal cursor
between setting rows
Row 01 keys move Row 01
Language C between values
within a cell
Curve 1 name
The Cancel key

returns to
column header
Subsequent rows Subsequent rows
P4565ENa
Figure 1: Menu Navigation
2.2 Getting started

When you first start the IED, it will go through its power up procedure. After a few seconds it will settle
down into one of the top level menus. There are two menus at this level:
 The Alarms menu for when there are alarms present

 The default display menu for when there are no alarms present.
If there are alarms present, the yellow Alarms LED will be flashing and the menu display will read as
follows:
P446/EN/TM/E 5-5
Alarms / Faults
Present
HOTKEY
Even though the device itself should be in full working order when you first start it, an alarm could still
be present, for example, if there is no network connection for a device fitted with a network card. If this
is the case, you can read the alarm by pressing the 'Read' key.
ALARMS
NIC Link Fail
The only way you will be able to completely clear this alarm will be by connecting the device into an
Ethernet network. This is also the only way you will be able to get into the default display menu.
If there are other alarms present, these must also be cleared before you can get into the default
display menu options
2.3 Default display

The default display menu contains a range of possible options that you can choose to be the default
display. The options available are:
NERC Compliant banner
ACCESS ONLY FOR

AUTHORISED USERS
HOTKEY
Date and time

For example:
11:09:15
23 Nov 2010
HOTKEY
Description (user-defined)
For example:
Description
MiCOM P543
HOTKEY
5-6 P446/EN/TM/E
Plant reference (user-defined)

For example:
Plant Reference
MiCOM
HOTKEY
Access Level
For example:
Access Level
3
HOTKEY
In addition to the above, there are also displays for the system voltages, currents, power and
frequency.
Figure 2 depicts the navigation between default displays.
Figure 2: Default display navigation
The right cursor key takes you to the next menu option in a clockwise direction, whereas the left cursor
key takes you to the next menu option in an anti-clockwise direction.
If the device is not yet configured for NERC compliance (see cyber Security chapter) a warning will
appear when moving from the "NERC compliant" banner. The warning message is as follows:
P446/EN/TM/E 5-7
DISPLAY NOT NERC

COMPLIANT. OK?
You will have to confirm with the ENTER button before you can go any further.
Note: The unit is delivered with the NERC-compliant default display. Please see the Cyber Security
chapter for further details
Note: Whenever the unit has an uncleared alarm the default display is replaced by the text Alarms/ Faults
present. You cannot override this default display. However, you can enter the menu structure from
the default display, even if the display shows the Alarms/Faults present message.
2.4 Password Entry

Configuring the default display (in addition to modification of other settings) requires level 3 access. .
You will be prompted for a password before you can make any changes, as follows. The default level
3 password is AAAA.
Enter Password
1. A flashing cursor shows which character field of the password can be changed. Press the up
or down cursor keys to change each character (tip: pressing the up arrow once will return an
upper case "A" as required by the default level 3 password).
2. Use the left and right cursor keys to move between the character fields of the password.
3. Press the Enter key to confirm the password. If you enter an incorrect password, an invalid
password message is displayed then the display reverts to Enter password. Upon entering a
valid password a message appears indicating that the password is correct and if so what level
of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting, the display
returns to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has not
been entered, the password prompt page appears again.
4. To escape from this prompt press the Clear key. Alternatively, enter the password using
System data > Password. If the keypad is inactive for 15 minutes, the password protection of
the front panel user interface reverts to the default access level.
5. To manually reset the password protection to the default level, select System data >
Password, then press the clear key instead of entering a password.
2.5 Reading and Clearing of Alarms and Fault Records

If there are any alarm messages, they will appear on the default display and the yellow alarm LED
flashes. The alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched. If they are latched, they must be
cleared manually.
1. To view the alarm messages, press the "Read" key. When all alarms have been viewed but
not cleared, the alarm LED changes from flashing to constantly on, and the latest fault record
appears (if there is one).
2. Scroll through the pages of the latest fault record, using the cursor keys. When all pages of the
fault record have been viewed, the following prompt appears.
5-8 P446/EN/TM/E
Press Clear To
Reset Alarms
3. To clear all alarm messages, press the Clear key. To return to the display showing alarms or
faults present, and leave the alarms uncleared, press the "Read" key.
4. Depending on the password configuration settings, you may need to enter a password before
the alarm messages can be cleared.
5. When all alarms are cleared, the yellow alarm LED switches off. If the red LED was on, this
will also be switched off.
Note: To speed up the procedure, you can enter the alarm viewer using the Read key and subsequently
pressing the Clear key. This goes straight to the fault record display. Press the Clear key again to
move straight to the alarm reset prompt, then press the Clear key again to clear all alarms.
2.6 Menu Structure

Settings, commands, records and measurements are stored inside the unit in non-volatile memory in a
local database. When using the Human Machine Interface (HMI) it is convenient to visualize the menu
navigation system as a table. Each item in the menu is known as a cell, which is accessed by
reference to a column and row address. Each column and row is assigned a 2-digit hexadecimal
numbers, resulting in a unique 4-digit cell address for every cell in the database. The main menu
groups are allocated columns and the items within the groups are allocated rows, meaning a particular
item within a particular group is a cell.
Each column contains all related items, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings and
records are in the same column.
There are three types of cell:
 Settings: This is for parameters that can be set to different values

 Commands: This is for commands to be executed
 Data: this is for measurements and records to be viewed, which are not settable
Note: Sometimes the term "Setting" is used generically to describe all of the three types
Table 2 provides an example of the menu structure.

SYSTEM DATA (Col 00) VIEW RECORDS (Col 01) MEASUREMENTS 1 (Col 02) …
Language (Row 01) "Select Event [0...n]" (Row 01) IA Magnitude (Row 01) …
Password (Row 02) Menu Cell Ref (Row 02) IA Phase Angle (Row 02) …
Sys Fn Links Row 03) Time & Date (Row 03) IB Magnitude (Row 03) …
… … … …
Table 2: Menu structure
It is more convenient to specify all the settings in a single column, detailing the complete Courier
address for each setting. The above table may therefore be represented as follows:
Setting Column Row Description
SYSTEM DATA 00 00 First Column definition
Language (Row 01) 00 01 First setting within first column
P446/EN/TM/E 5-9

Password (Row 02) 00 02 Second setting within first column
Sys Fn Links Row 03) 00 03 Third setting within first column
… … …
VIEW RECORDS 01 00 Second Column definition
Select Event [0...n] 01 01 First setting within second column
Menu Cell Ref 01 02 Second setting within second column
Time & Date 01 03 Third setting within second column
… … …
MEASUREMENTS 1 02 00 Third Column definition
IA Magnitude 02 01 First setting within third column
IA Phase Angle 02 02 Second setting within third column
IB Magnitude 02 03 Third setting within third column
… … …
Table 3: Settings table example
The first three column headers are common throughout the entire Px40 series. However the rows
within each of these column headers may differ according to the product type. Many of the column
headers are the same for all products within the Px40 series. However, there is no guarantee that the
addresses will be the same for a particular column header. Therefore you should always refer to the
product documentation and not make any assumptions
2.7 Changing the Settings

1. Starting at the default display, press the down cursor key to show the first column heading.
2. Use the horizontal cursor keys to select the required column heading.
3. Use the vertical cursor keys to view the setting data in the column.
4. To return to the column header, either press the up cursor key for a second or so, or press the
Cancel key once. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level.
5. To return to the default display, press the up cursor key or the Cancel key from any of the
column headings. If you use the auto-repeat function of the up cursor key, you cannot go
straight to the default display from one of the column cells because the auto-repeat stops at
the column heading.
6. To change the value of a setting, go to the relevant cell in the menu, then press the Enter key
to change the cell value. A flashing cursor on the LCD shows that the value can be changed.
You may be prompted for a password first.
7. To change the setting value, press the up and down cursor keys. If the setting to be changed
is a binary value or a text string, select the required bit or character to be changed using the
left and right cursor keys.
8. Press the Enter key to confirm the new setting value or the Clear key to discard it. The new
setting is automatically discarded if it is not confirmed within 15 seconds.
9. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be
confirmed before they are used. When all required changes have been entered, return to the
column heading level and press the down cursor key. Before returning to the default display,
the following prompt appears.
5-10 P446/EN/TM/E
Update settings
ENTER or CLEAR
10. Press the Enter key to accept the new settings or press the Clear key to discard the new
settings.
Notes: If the menu time-out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed, the setting values are
also discarded.
Control and support settings are updated immediately after they are entered, without the Update
settings prompt
2.8 Direct Access (The Hotkey Menu)

It can be quite an onerous process to configure settings using the HMI panel, especially for settings
and commands that need to be executed on a regular basis. The IED provides a pair of keys directly
below the LCD display, which can be used to execute specified settings and commands directly.
The functions available for direct access via these direct access keys are:
 Setting group selection

 Control Inputs
 CB Control functions
Setting group selection

By default, only Setting group 1 is enabled. Other setting groups will only be available if they are
first enabled. To be able to select a different setting group, you must first enable them in the
CONFIGURATION column.
Control Inputs
The control inputs are user-assignable functions. You can use the CTRL I/P CONFIG column to
configure the control inputs for the hotkey menu. In order to do this, use the first setting Hotkey
Enabled cell to enable or disable any of the 32 control inputs. You can then set each control
input to latched or pulsed and set its command to 'On/Off', 'Set/Reset', 'In/Out', or
'Enabled/Disabled'.
By default, the hotkey is enabled for all 32 control inputs and they are set to "Set/Reset" and are
"Latched".
CB Control
You can open and close the controlled circuit breaker with the direct access key to the right, if
enabled as described above. By default direct access to the circuit breakers is disabled.
The availability of the above three functions is controlled by the Direct Access cell in the
CONFIGURATION column. There are four options: 'Disabled', 'Enabled', 'CB Ctrl only' and 'Hotkey
only'.
For the Setting Group selection and Control inputs, this cell must be set to either 'Enabled' or 'Hotkey
only'.
For CB Control functions, the cell must be set to 'Enabled' or 'CB Ctrl only'.
Hotkey display
In general, the layout of a typical display of the hotkey menu is as follows:
P446/EN/TM/E 5-11
 The top line shows the contents of the previous and next cells for easy menu navigation
 The centre line shows the function
 The bottom line shows the options assigned to the direct access keys
Accessing the Hotkey Menu

To access the hotkey menu from the default display, you press the key directly below the HOTKEY
text on the LCD. The following screen will appear
← User32 STG GP→
HOTKEY MENU
EXIT
Use the left and right cursor keys to scroll between the other available options, then use the hotkeys to
control the function currently displayed. If neither of the cursor keys is pressed within 20 seconds of
entering a hotkey sub menu, the unit reverts to the default display.
Press Clear key to return to the default menu from any page of the hotkey menu.
Note: More detailed information about the above three functions is available in the Operations chapter.
The CB control menu

If direct access to the circuit breakers has been enabled, the bottom right hand part of the display will
read "Open or Close" depending on whether the circuit breaker is closed or open respectively:
For example:
Plant Reference
MiCOM
HOTKEY CLOSE
To Close the circuit breaker (in this case), press the key directly below CLOSE. You will be given an
option to cancel or confirm
Execute
CB CLOSE
Cancel Confirm
2.9 Function keys

Most devices have 10 function keys for programming control functionality using the programmable
scheme logic (PSL).
Each function key has an associated programmable tri-colour LED that can be programmed to give
the desired indication on function key activation.
These function keys can be used to trigger any function that they are connected to as part of the PSL.
The function key commands are in the FUNCTION KEYS column.
The first cell down in the FUNCTION KEYS column is the Fn Key Status cell. This contains a 10 bit
word, which represents the 10 function key commands. Their status can be read from this 10 bit word.
5-12 P446/EN/TM/E
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key Status
0000000000
The next cell down (Fn Key 1) allows you to activate or disable the first function key (1). The Lock
setting allows a function key to be locked. This allows function keys that are set to ‘Toggled’ mode
and their DDB signal active ‘high’, to be locked in their active state, preventing any further key presses
from deactivating the associated function. Locking a function key that is set to the Normal mode
causes the associated DDB signals to be permanently off. This safety feature prevents any
inadvertent function key presses from activating or deactivating critical relay functions
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key 1
Unlocked
The next cell down (Fn Key 1 Mode) allows you to set the function key to 'Normal' or 'Toggled'. In the
Toggle mode the function key DDB signal output stays in the set state until a reset command is given,
by activating the function key on the next key press. In the Normal mode, the function key DDB signal
stays energized for as long as the function key is pressed then resets automatically. If required, a
minimum pulse width can be programmed by adding a minimum pulse timer to the function key DDB
output signal.
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key 1 Mode
Toggled
The next cell down (Fn Key 1 Label) allows you to change the label of the function. The default label is
"Function key 1" in this case. To change the label you need to press the enter key and then change
the text on the bottom line, character by character. This text is displayed when a function key is
accessed in the function key menu, or it can be displayed in the PSL
FUNCTION KEYS
Fn Key 1 Label
Function Key 1
Subsequent cells allow you to carry out the same procedure as above for the other function keys.
The status of the function keys is stored in battery backed memory. If the auxiliary supply is
interrupted, the status of all the function keys is restored. If the battery is missing or discharged, the
function key DDB signals are set to logic 0 once the auxiliary supply is restored. The IED only
recognizes a single function key press at a time and a minimum key press duration of approximately
200 ms is required before the key press is recognized in PSL. This feature avoids accidental double
presses.
P446/EN/TM/E 5-13
3 USING MICOM S1 STUDIO

MiCOM S1 Studio is application software specifically designed to interface with Alstom Grid protection
devices. This section provides a brief overview of MiCOM S1 Studio and is intended to get you up and
running.
For more detailed documentation, please refer to the demo included with the MiCOM S1 STUDIO
software package and the online help system. Further information is also available in the DNP3.0
Configurator Guide S1V2DNP/EN HI.
3.1 Platform Requirements

MiCOM S1 Studio requires the following hardware platform.
Minimum
 1 GHz processor
 256 MB RAM
 WindowsTM XP
 Resolution 800 x 600 (256 colors)
 1 GB free hard disk space
Recommended
 2 GHz processor
 1 GB RAM
 WindowsTM XP
 Resolution 1024 x 768
 5 GB free hard disk space
3.2 Connecting to the Unit using MiCOM S1 Studio

This section is intended as a quick start guide to using MiCOM S1 Studio and assumes you have a
copy installed on your PC. See the MiCOM S1 Studio program online help for more detailed
information.
1. Connect a serial cable between the port on the front panel of the IED and the PC.
2. To start MiCOM S1 Studio, select Programs > MiCOM S1 Studio > MiCOM S1 Studio.
3. Click Quick Connect and select Create a New System.
4. The new system file is placed in a default path in the Path to System field. You can change
this path if desired.
5. Enter the name of the system in the Name field (you can add a brief description of the system
using the Comment field, if required).
6. Click OK.
7. Select the device type Px40 Series
8. Select the communications port Front port, Rear port or Ethernet port.
9. Once connected, select the language for the settings file, the device name, then click Finish.
The configuration is updated.
10. In the Studio Explorer window, select Device > Supervise Device… to control the unit
functions directly.
5-14 P446/EN/TM/E
3.3 Off-line use of MiCOM S1 Studio

MiCOM S1 Studio can also be used as an off-line tool to prepare settings, without access to the unit.
1. If creating a new system, in the Studio Explorer, select Create new system.
2. Right click the new system and select New substation.
3. Right-click the new substation and select New voltage level.
4. Right-click the new voltage level and select New bay.
5. Right-click the new bay and select New device.
6. Select a device type from the list, and enter the unit type. Click Next.
7. Enter the full model number and click Next.
8. Select the Language and Model, then click Next.
9. Enter a unique device name, then click Finish.
10. Right-click the Settings folder and select New File. A default file 000 is added.
11. Right-click file 000 and select click Open. You can now edit the settings.
Notes: You can add a device at any level, whether it is a system, substation, voltage or bay.
If the device type you want doesn’t appear in the list, you will have to import a device data model.
Refer to section 3.4 for details.
3.4 Importing Device Data Models

To use MiCOM S1 Studio as an off-line tool to prepare settings etc., it is necessary to install the data
models for the products that you wish to work with. Data models are installed using the Data Model
Manager.
1. Before running the Data Model Manager, you must close MiCOM S1 Studio.
2. To start the Data Model Manager, select Programs > Alstom Grid > MiCOM S1 Studio >
Data Model Manager.
3. You will be prompted to add data models. A dialog provides a list of locations from where the
data models are to be retrieved.
4. You must now re-start MiCOM S1 Studio to use the new data models.
Note: Each product version has a number of data models, all of which are large, and hence download
times can be lengthy. We recommend that you select only the data models you need in order to
keep download times reasonable.
P446/EN/TM/E 5-15
4 CONFIGURING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE

The way in which you configure the Ethernet interface depends on the particular type of interface you
have. If you have a DNP3.0 interface, use the DNP setting file to configure the Ethernet interface.
Otherwise you should use the IED configurator tool in MiCOM S1 Studio.
To launch MiCOM S1 Studio you need to connect to the front serial port.
Note: Further information is available in the Communications chapter
4.1 Configuring the Ethernet Interface for IEC 61850

1. Open MiCOM S1 Studio:
2. Select Tools > IEC61850 IED Configurator
3. Select Device > Manage IED
4. Select Px40
5. Enter the address of the IED you want to manage (this will always be '1' if you are connected
via the front port)
6. Click Next. The following screen appears
7. Select Extract Configuration, Active Bank
5-16 P446/EN/TM/E
8. Select the model. The IP address data is then revealed:
9. To change the address values, select View > Enter Manual Editing Mode
10. Enter the required IP configuration and select the green download button:
P446/EN/TM/E 5-17
4.2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface for DNP3.0

11. Open MiCOM S1 Studio:
12. Select the device DNP3.0 file (which has been created by the DNP3.0 configurator)
13. Set the values, save them, and then send the DNP3.0 file to the device
5-18 P446/EN/TM/E
5 CONFIGURING THE REDUNDANT ETHERNET BOARD

An IP address is a logical address assigned to devices in a computer network that uses the Internet
Protocol (IP) for communication between nodes. IP addresses are stored as binary numbers but they
are represented using Decimal Dot Notation, whereby four sets of decimal numbers are delimited by
dots as follows:
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
For example: 10.86.254.85
An IP address within a network is usually associated with a subnet mask that defines which network
the device resides. A subnet mask takes the same form of an IP address.
For example: 255.255.255.0
A full explanation of IP addressing and subnet masking is beyond the scope of this guide. Further
information is available on application.
Both the IED and the REB (Redundant Ethernet Board) each have their own IP address. Figure 3
shows the IED as IP1 and the REB as IP2.
Note: IP1 and IP2 are different but use the same subnet mask.
The switch IP address must be configured through the network.
Figure 3: IED and REB IP address configuration
5.1 Configuring the IED IP address

The IP address of the IED is configured using the IED Configurator software in S1 Studio.
For IEC 61850, the IED IP address is set using the IED Configurator.
For DNP3 over Ethernet, the IED IP address is managed directly through the DNP3 file.
There are 254 addresses available, which are configurable in the last octet. These are within the
range 01 to 254 decimal, which is equivalent 01 to FE hexadecimal, or 00000001 to 11111110 binary.
As with all IP networks, the first and last addresses (00 and FF) should not be used as these are
reserved for the network address and broadcast address respectively.
Note: In the IED Configurator, ensure that the port type is set to "Copper" (even if redundant fibres
are being used)
P446/EN/TM/E 5-19
5.2 Configuring the Board IP Address

The IP address of the REB is configured in both software and hardware, as shown in Figure 3.
Therefore this must be configured before connecting the IED to the network to avoid an IP address
conflict.
Configuring the First Two Octets of the Board IP Address

If using SHP or DHP, the first two octets are configured using Switch Manager or an SNMP MIB
browser. An H35 (SHP) or H36 (DHP) network device is needed in the network to configure the Px40
redundant Ethernet board IP address using SNMP.
If using Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), the first two octets are configured using the RSTP
Configurator software tool or using an SNMP MIB browser.
Configuring the Third Octet of the Board IP Address

The third octet is fixed at 254 (FE hex, 11111110 binary, regardless of the protocol.
Configuring the Last Octet of the Board IP Address

The last octet is configured using the 8-way board address DIP switch SW2 on the REB.
Example address
decimal 85 1 + 4 + 16 + 64 = 85
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
Unused
ON
P4389ENb
SW2 Top view
Figure 4: REB address switches (SW2)
Details of how to access the switches on the REB are provided in the Installation chapter.
Caution This hardware configuration should ideally take place before the unit is
installed. If this is not possible, this must be carried out by authorized
installation engineers.
5-20 P446/EN/TM/E
5.3 RSTP Configuration

If you are using RSTP, you will need the RSTP configurator software. This is available from Alstom
Grid on request.
The RSTP Configurator software is used to identify a device, configure the IP address, configure the
SNTP IP address and configure RSTP settings.
Installing RSTP Configurator

1. Double click WinPcap_4_0.exe to install WinPcap.
2. Double click Alstom Grid-RSTP Configurator.msi to install the RSTP Configurator.
3. The setup wizard appears. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions to run the
installation.
Starting the RSTP Configurator

1. To start the RSTP Configurator, select Programs > RSTP Configurator > RSTP
Configurator.
2. The Login screen appears. For user mode login, enter the Login name as User and click OK
with no password.
3. If the login screen does not appear, check all network connections.
4. The main window of the RSTP Configurator appears. The Network Board drop-down list
shows the Network Board, IP Address and MAC Address of the PC in which the RSTP
Configurator is running.
Device Identification
1. To configure the REB, go to the main window and click Identify Device.
2. The REB connected to the PC is identified and its details are listed as shown below.
 Device address
P446/EN/TM/E 5-21
 MAC address
 Version number of the firmware
 SNTP IP address
 Date & time of the real-time clock, from the board.
Note: Due to the time needed to establish the RSTP protocol, it is necessary to wait 25 seconds between
connecting the PC to the IED and clicking the Identify Device button.
IP Address Configuration
1. To change the network address component of the IP address, go to the main window and click
the IP Config button. The Device setup screen appears. The first three octets of the board IP
address can be configured. Note: the last octet is set using the DIP switches (SW2) next to
the ribbon connector.
2. Enter the required board IP address and click OK. The board network address is updated and
displayed in the main window.
SNTP IP Address Configuration

1. To Configure SNTP server IP address, go to the main window and click the SNTP Config
button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required SNTP MAC and server IP address, then click OK. The updated SNTP
server IP address appears in the main screen.
Equipment
1. To view the MAC addresses learned by the switch, go to the main window and click the
Identify Device button. The selected device MAC address then appears highlighted.
2. Click the Equipment button. The list of MAC addresses learned by the switch and the
corresponding port number are displayed.
5-22 P446/EN/TM/E
RSTP Parameters
1. To view or configure the RSTP Bridge Parameters, go to the main window and click the device
address to select the device. The selected device MAC address appears highlighted.
2. Click the RSTP Config button. The RSTP Config screen appears.
3. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get RSTP
Parameters button.
P446/EN/TM/E 5-23
4. To set the configurable parameters such as Bridge Max Age, Bridge Hello Time, Bridge
Forward Delay, and Bridge Priority, modify the parameter values and click Set RSTP
Parameters as below:
Default value Minimum value Maximum value
S.No Parameter
(seconds) (seconds) (seconds)
1 Bridge Max Age 20 6 40
2 Bridge Hello Time 2 1 10
3 Bridge Forward Delay 15 4 30
4 Bridge Priority 32768 0 61440
Bridge Parameters
1. To read the RSTP bridge parameters from the board, go to the main window and click the
device address to select the device. The RSTP Config window appears and the default tab is
Bridge Parameters.
2. Click the Get RSTP Parameters button. This displays all the RSTP bridge parameters from
the Ethernet board.
3. To modify the RSTP parameters, enter the values and click Set RSTP Parameters.
4. To restore the default values, click Restore Default and click Set RSTP Parameters.
5. The grayed parameters are read-only and cannot be modified.
Port Parameters
This function is useful if you need to view the parameters of each port.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device and the RSTP Config
window appears.
2. Select the Port Parameters tab, then click Get Parameters to read the port parameters.
3. Alternatively, select the port numbers to read the parameters.
5-24 P446/EN/TM/E
Port States
This is used to see which ports of the board are enabled or disabled.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Config
window appears.
2. Select the Port States tab then click the Get Port States button. This lists the ports of the
Ethernet board. A tick shows they are enabled.
P446/EN/TM/E 5-25
6 CONFIGURING THE DATA PROTOCOLS

Depending on the model, various protocols can be used with the serial rear ports. However, only one
protocol can be configured at any one time on any one IED. The range of available communication
settings depend on which protocol has been chosen
6.1 Courier Configuration

To use the rear port with Courier, you can configure the settings using the HMI panel. Courier can be
used with either a copper connection or a fibre connection.
1. Select the CONFIGURATION column and check that the Comms settings cell is set to
Visible.
2. Select the COMMUNICATIONS column.
3. Move to the first cell down (RP1 protocol). This is a non settable cell, which shows the chosen
communication protocol – in this case Courier.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
Courier
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the address of the IED. Up to 32
IEDs can be connected to one spur. It is therefore necessary for each IED to have a unique
address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one IED only.
Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the IED address. It is important that
no two IEDs have the same address.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
255
5. Move down to the next cell (RP1 InactivTimer). This cell controls the inactivity timer. The
inactivity timer controls how long the IED waits without receiving any messages on the rear
port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was
enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Inactivtimer
10.00 mins.
6. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted, the RP1 PhysicalLink cell is visible. This cell
controls the physical media used for the communication (Copper or Fibre optic).
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
7. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Card Status). This cell is not settable. It just displays the
status of the chosen physical layer protocol for RP1.
5-26 P446/EN/TM/E
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Card Status
K-Bus OK
8. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Port Config). This cell controls the type of serial connection.
Select between K-Bus or RS485.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Port Config
K-Bus
9. If using EIA(RS)485, the next cell selects the communication mode. The choice is either
IEC 60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. If using K-Bus
this cell will not appear.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Comms Mode
IEC 60870 FT1.2
10. If using EIA(RS)485, the next cell down controls the baud rate. Three baud rates are
supported; 9600, 19200 and 38400. If using K-Bus this cell will not appear as the baud rate is
fixed at 64kbps.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
19200
Note: If you modify protection and disturbance recorder settings using an on-line editor such as PAS&T,
you must confirm them. To do this, from the Configuration column select the Save changes cell.
Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 Studio do not need this action for the setting changes to take
effect.
6.2 DNP3.0 configuration

To use the rear port with DNP3.0, you can configure the settings using the HMI panel. DNP3.0 can be
used with either a copper connection or a fibre connection.
Visible.
communication protocol – in this case DNP3.0.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
DNP3.0
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the DNP3.0 address of the IED.
Up to 32 IEDs can be connected to one spur, therefore it is necessary for each IED to have a
unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by only one
IED. DNP3.0 uses a decimal number between 1 and 65519 for the IED address. It is
important that no two IEDs have the same address.
P446/EN/TM/E 5-27
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Address
1
5. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Baud Rate). This cell controls the baud rate to be used. Six
baud rates are supported by the IED 1200bits/s, 2400bits/s, 4800bits/s, 9600bits/s,
19200bits/s and 38400bits/s. Make sure that the baud rate selected on the IED is the same as
that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
6. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Parity). This cell controls the parity format used in the data
frames. The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. Make sure that the parity
format selected on the IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Parity
None
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
8. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Time Sync). This cell sets the time synchronization request
from the master by the IED. It can be set to enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the
DNP3.0 master to synchronize the time.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Time sync
Enabled
6.3 IEC 60870-5-103 Configuration

To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103, you can configure the settings using the HMI panel.
IEC 60870-5-103 can be used with either a copper connection or a fibre connection.
The device operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station.
Visible.
communication protocol – in this case IEC 60870-5-103.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
4. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Address). This cell controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of
the IED. Up to 32 IEDs can be connected to one spur. It is therefore necessary for each IED to
5-28 P446/EN/TM/E
have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one
IED only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the IED address.
It is important that no two IEDs have the same IEC 60870 5 103 address. The IEC 60870-5-
103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the IED.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 address
162
5. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Baud Rate). This cell controls the baud rate to be used. Two
baud rates are supported by the IED, ‘9600 bits/s’ and ‘19200 bits/s’. Make sure that the baud
rate selected on the IED is the same as that set on the master station.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s
6. Move down to the next cell (RP1 Meas. period). The next cell down controls the period
between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the IED to
supply measurements at regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled
by this cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 Meas. Period
30.00 s
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 PhysicalLink
Copper
8. The next cell down can be used for monitor or command blocking.
COMMUNICATIONS
RP1 CS103Blcking
Disabled
9. There are three settings associated with this cell; these are:
Setting: Description:
Disabled No blocking selected.
When the monitor blocking DDB Signal is active high, either by energizing an opto
input or control input, reading of the status information and disturbance records is
Monitor Blocking
not permitted. When in this mode the device returns a “Termination of general
interrogation” message to the master station.
When the command blocking DDB signal is active high, either by energizing an
opto input or control input, all remote commands will be ignored (i.e. CB
Command Blocking
Trip/Close, change setting group etc.). When in this mode the device returns a
“negative acknowledgement of command” message to the master station.

The only IEC61850 configuration changes you can make with the HMI panel is to turn GOOSE on or
off.
P446/EN/TM/E 5-29
6.5 DNP3.0 configuration using MiCOM S1 Studio

A PC support package for DNP3.0 is available as part of MiCOM S1 Studio to allow configuration of
the device's DNP3.0 response. The configuration data is uploaded from the device to the PC in a
block of compressed format data and downloaded in a similar manner after modification. The new
DNP3.0 configuration takes effect after the download is complete. To restore the default configuration
at any time, from the CONFIGURATION column, select the Restore Defaults cell then select 'All
Settings'.
In MiCOM S1 Studio, the DNP3.0 data is shown in three main folders, one folder each for the point
configuration, integer scaling and default variation (data format). The point configuration also includes
screens for binary inputs, binary outputs, counters and analogue input configuration.
6.6 IEC 61850 configuration

You cannot configure the device for IEC 61850 using the HMI panel on the product. For this you must
use the IED Configurator.
IEC 61850 allows IEDs to be directly configured from a configuration file. The IED’s system
configuration capabilities are determined from an IED Capability Description file (ICD), supplied with
the product. By using ICD files from the products to be installed, you can design, configure and even
test (using simulation tools), a substation’s entire protection scheme before the products are even
installed into the substation.
To help with this process, MiCOM S1 Studio provides an IED Configurator tool, which allows the pre-
configured IEC 61850 configuration file to be imported and transferred to the IED. As well as this, you
can manually create configuration files for MiCOM IEDs, based on their original IED capability
description (ICD file).
Other features include:
 The extraction of configuration data for viewing and editing.

 A sophisticated error checking sequence to validate the configuration data before sending to the
IED.
Note: To help the user, some configuration data is available in the IED CONFIGURATOR column,
allowing read-only access to basic configuration data.
6.6.1 IEC 61850 Configuration banks

To help version management and minimize down-time during system upgrades and maintenance, the
MiCOM IEDs have incorporated a mechanism consisting of multiple configuration banks. These
configuration banks fall into two categories:
 Active Configuration Bank

 Inactive Configuration Bank
Any new configuration sent to the IED is automatically stored in the inactive configuration bank,
therefore not immediately affecting the current configuration.
When the upgrade or maintenance stage is complete, the IED Configurator tool can be used to
transmit a command, which authorizes activation of the new configuration contained in the inactive
configuration bank. This is done by switching the active and inactive configuration banks. The
capability of switching the configuration banks is also available using the IED CONFIGURATOR
column of the HMI.
The SCL Name and Revision attributes of both configuration banks are also available in the IED
CONFIGURATOR column of the HMI.
5-30 P446/EN/TM/E
6.6.2 IEC 61850 Network connectivity

Configuration of the IP parameters and SNTP time synchronization parameters is performed by the
IED Configurator tool. If these parameters are not available using an SCL file, they must be configured
manually.
As the IP addressing will be completely detached and independent from any public network, it is up to
the company’s system administrator to establish the IP addressing strategy. Every IP address on the
network must be unique. This applies to all devices on the network. Duplicate IP addresses will result
in conflict and must be avoided. The IED will check for a conflict on every IP configuration change and
at power up. An alarm will be raised if an IP conflict is detected.
The IED can be configured to accept data from other networks using the Gateway setting. If multiple
networks are used, the IP addresses must be unique across networks.
P446/EN/TM/E 5-31
5-32 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 6 Settings and Records
SETTINGS AND RECORDS
CHAPTER 6
P446/EN/TM/E 6-1
6 Settings and Records MiCOMho P446
6-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 OVERVIEW
The product is an intelligent electronic device (IED) that must be configured to the system and
application using appropriate settings. The IED is supplied preconfigured with factory default settings,
but you need to set the parameters according to your application. The IED also supplies
measurements of system parameters, which are not settable.
This chapter contains tables and descriptions of all the unit’s settings and measurement parameters.
It consists of the following sections:
1 Overview
2 Settings Descriptions
2.1 Setting Categories
2.2 Menu Structure
2.3 Rationalizing the Unit Configuration
3 Control and support settings

3.1 Setting and Viewing System Data
3.2 Viewing Event and Fault Records
3.3 Measurements 1
3.4 Measurements 2
3.5 Measurements 4
3.6 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
3.7 Circuit Breaker Control
3.8 Date and Time
3.9 Configuration
3.10 CT and VT Ratios
3.11 Record Control
3.12 Disturbance Recorder Settings (Oscillography)
3.13 Measurement Setup
3.14 Communications Settings
3.15 Commissioning Tests
3.16 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitor Setup
3.17 Opto-input Configuration
3.18 Control Inputs
3.19 Control Input Configuration
3.20 Serial InterMiCOM Communications
3.21 Serial InterMiCOM Configuration
3.22 Function Keys
3.24 Fibre Teleprotection
3.25 Cyber Security Configuration
3.26 Control Input Labels
3.27 PSL Data
3.28 User Curves Data
4 Protection GROUP settings

4.1 Line Parameters
4.2 Distance Setup
4.3 Distance Elements
P446/EN/TM/E 6-3
4.4 Scheme Logic (Basic and Aided Scheme Logic)

4.5 Phase Overcurrrent Protection
4.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
4.7 Broken Conductor
4.8 Earth Fault
4.9 Aided DEF
4.10 Sensitive Earth Fault
4.11 Thermal Overload
4.12 Power Swing Blocking
4.13 Voltage Protection
4.14 Frequency Protection
4.15 Independent Rate of Change of Frequency Protection
4.16 Circuit Breaker Fail and Pole Dead Detection Function
4.17 Supervision
4.18 System Checks (Check Sync. Function)
4.19 Auto-Reclose Function
4.20 Input Labels
4.21 Output Labels
6-4 P446/EN/TM/E
2 SETTINGS DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 Setting Categories

Due to the complex functionality of the unit, it contains a large number of settings, which can be
configured using the buttons and the liquid crystal display (LCD) on the front panel of the unit, or by
the supplied application software, which can be accessed by connecting the unit to a PC. These
settings are arranged in a hierarchical menu structure.
There are two categories of menu settings relevant to the user:
• Control and Support Settings

• Protection Group Settings
Wit the exception of the Disturbance Recorder, Control and Support settings are stored and used by
the unit immediately after they are entered.
For Protection Group Settings and the Disturbance Recorder, the IED stores the new setting values in
a temporary ‘scratchpad’ memory. Once the new settings have been confirmed, the device activates
all the new settings together. This provides extra security so that several setting changes, made in a
group of protection settings, all take effect at the same time.
2.2 Menu Structure

Settings, commands, records and measurements are stored inside the unit in non-volatile memory in a
local database. When using the Human Machine Interface (HMI) it is convenient to visualize the menu
navigation system as a table. Each item in the menu is known as a cell, which is accessed by
reference to a column and row address. Each column and row is assigned a 2-digit hexadecimal
numbers, resulting in a unique 4-digit cell address for every cell in the database. The main menu
groups are allocated columns and the items within the groups are allocated rows, meaning a particular
item within a particular group is a cell.
Each column contains all related items, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings and
records are in the same column.
There are three types of cell:
• Settings: This is for parameters that can be set to different values

• Commands: This is for commands to be executed
• Data: this is for measurements and records to be viewed, which are not settable
Note: Sometimes the term "Setting" is used generically to describe all of the three types
Table 1 provides an example of the menu structure.

SYSTEM DATA (Col 00) VIEW RECORDS (Col 01) MEASUREMENTS 1 (Col 02) …
Language (Row 01) "Select Event [0...n]" (Row 01) IA Magnitude (Row 01) …
Password (Row 02) Menu Cell Ref (Row 02) IA Phase Angle (Row 02) …
Sys Fn Links Row 03) Time & Date (Row 03) IB Magnitude (Row 03) …
… … … …
Table 1: Menu structure
It is more convenient to specify all the settings in a single column, detailing the complete Courier
address for each setting. The above table may therefore be represented as follows:
P446/EN/TM/E 6-5

SYSTEM DATA 00 00 First Column definition
Language (Row 01) 00 01 First setting within first column
Password (Row 02) 00 02 Second setting within first column
Sys Fn Links Row 03) 00 03 Third setting within first column
… … …
VIEW RECORDS 01 00 Second Column definition
Select Event [0...n] 01 01 First setting within second column
Menu Cell Ref 01 02 Second setting within second column
Time & Date 01 03 Third setting within second column
… … …
MEASUREMENTS 1 02 00 Third Column definition
IA Magnitude 02 01 First setting within third column
IA Phase Angle 02 02 Second setting within third column
IB Magnitude 02 03 Third setting within third column
… … …
Table 2: Settings table example
The first three column headers are common throughout the entire Px40 series. However the rows
within each of these column headers may differ according to the product type. Many of the column
headers are the same for all products within the Px40 series. However, there is no guarantee that the
addresses will be the same for a particular column header. Therefore you should always refer to the
product documentation and not make any assumptions
2.3 Rationalizing the Unit Configuration

The unit is a multi-function device that supports numerous different protection, control and
communication features. To simplify the setting of the unit, there is a CONFIGURATION settings
column, which can be used to enable or disable many of the unit’s functions. The settings associated
with any disabled function do not appear in the menu. To disable a function, you change the relevant
cell in the CONFIGURATION column from Enabled to Disabled.
The CONFIGURATION column controls which of the four protection settings groups is selected as
active through the Active Settings cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the
configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group
cannot be set as the active group.
It is possible to copy the contents of one of the setting groups to that of another group. To do this, set
the Copy from cell to the setting group to be copied then set the Copy to cell to the protection group
where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad
and are only used after they have been confirmed.
6-6 P446/EN/TM/E
3 CONTROL AND SUPPORT SETTINGS

These settings are used to configure the control and support features that do not need to adapt
according to changing system conditions. These settings are part of the main menu and are used to
configure the global configuration. This category of settings includes the following Courier columns:
Column Header Column No.
SYSTEM DATA 00
VIEW RECORDS 01
MEASUREMENTS 1 02
MEASUREMENTS 2 03
MEASUREMENTS 4 05
CB CONDITION 06
CB CONTROL 07
DATE AND TIME 08
CONFIGURATION 09
CT AND VT RATIOS 0A
RECORD CONTROL 0B
DISTURB RECORDER 0c
MEASURE'T SETUP 0D
COMMUNICATIONS 0E
COMMISSION TESTS 0F
CB MONITOR SETUP 10
OPTO CONFIG 11
CONTROL INPUTS 12
CTRL I/P CONFIG 13
INTERMICOM COMMS 15
INTERMICOM CONF 16
FUNCTION KEYS 17
IED CONFIGURATOR 19
PROT COMMS/ IM64 20
SECURITY CONFIG 25
CTRL I/P LABELS 29
PSL DATA B7
USER CURVES DATA B8
Table 3: Control and support settings columns
3.1 Setting and Viewing System Data

The SYSTEM DATA column provides general system settings and status information.
MENU TEXT Col Row Default Setting Available Setting
Description
SYSTEM DATA 0 0 0
This column contains general system settings
P446/EN/TM/E 6-7

Description
0 = English, 1 = Francais, 2 = Deutsch, 3 = Espanol OR
Language 0 1 English 0 = English, 1 = Francais, 2 = Deutsch, 3 = Russian OR
0 = English, 1 = Francais, 2 = Chinese
Sets the required language to be used by the device
Password 0 2 0 ASCII 33 to 122
Plain text password entry cell
Bit 0 = Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset), Bit 1 =
Not Used, Bit 2 = Not Used, Bit 3 = Not Used, Bit 4 =
Sys Fn Links 0 3 0
Not Used, Bit 5 = Not Used, Bit 6 = Not Used or Bit 7 =
Not Used
Setting to allow the fixed function trip LED to be self resetting (set to 1 to extinguish the LED after a period of healthy restoration of load current).
Description 0 4 MiCOMho P446 32 to 163 step 1
Editable 16 character description of the unit
Plant Reference 0 5 MiCOM 32 to 163 step 1
Editable 16 character plant description
Model Number 0 6 Model Number <Model number>
Displays the model number
Serial Number 0 8 Serial Number <Serial number>
Displays the serial number
Frequency 0 9 50 50 to 60 step 10
Sets the nominal system frequency
Comms Level 0 0A 1 <conformance level displayed>
Displays the conformance of the IED to the Courier Level 2 comms.
Relay Address 0 0B 255 0 to 255 step 1
Sets the first rear port IED address.
Plant Status 0 0C 0 16-bit binary flag
Displays the circuit breaker plant status.
Control Status 0 0D 0 Not used
Not used
Active Group 0 0E 1 1 to 4 step 1
Displays the active settings group
0 = No Operation, 1 = Trip, 2 = Close, 3 = No Operation,
4 = No Operation, 5 = No Operation, 6 = No Operation, 7
CB Trip/Close 0 10 No Operation
= No Operation, 8 = No Operation, 9 = Trip CB2, 10 =
Close CB2
Supports trip and close commands if enabled in the Circuit Breaker Control menu. Visible to LCD+Front Port
0 = No Operation, 1 = Trip, 2 = Close, 3 = No Operation,
4 = No Operation, 5 = No Operation, 6 = No Operation, 7
CB Trip/Close 0 10 No Operation
= No Operation, 8 = No Operation, 9 = Trip CB2, 10 =
Close CB2
Supports trip and close commands if enabled in the Circuit Breaker Control menu. Visible to Rear Port
Software Ref. 1 0 11 0 <Software Ref. 1>
Displays the IED software version including protocol and IED model.
Software Ref. 2 0 12 0 <Software Ref. 2>
Displays the software version of the Ethernet card
Opto I/P Status 0 20 0 32-bit binary flag: 0 = energized, 1 = de-energized
Displays the status of all available opto inputs fitted.
6-8 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
32-bit binary flag: 0 = operated state 1 = non-operated
Relay O/P Status 0 21 0
state
Displays the status of all available output relays fitted.
0=Setting Group via opto invalid,
1=Test Mode Enabled,
2=Static Test Mode,
3=Loop Back Test Enabled,
4=IM64 Test Enabled,
5=VTS Indication,
6=CTS Alarm,
7=CT2S Alarm,
8=Remote CTS Alarm,
9=Power Swing,
10=BF Block AR,
11=CB Monitor Alarm,
12=CB Lockout Alarm ,
13=CB Status Alarm,
14=CB Failed to Trip,
15=CB Failed to Close,
Alarm Status 0 22 0
16=Control CB Unhealthy,
17=Control No Checksync,
18=Autoclose Lockout/RLY BAR,
19=No Healthy (AR),
20=No Check Sync / AR Fail,
21=System Split Alarm,
22=GPS Alarm,
23=Signaling failure alarm,
24=Signaling Propagation Delay Alarm,
25=Differential protection failure alarm,
26=IM64 Scheme Fail alarm,
27=IEEE C37.94 Communications Alarms,
28=Diff Protection inhibited,
29=Aid1 Channel Out,
31=Frequency out of range
Displays the status of the first 32 alarms as a binary string. Includes fixed and user settable alarms. Data type G96
P446/EN/TM/E 6-9

Description
0=Setting Group via opto invalid,
1=Test Mode Enabled,
2=Static Test Mode,
3=Loop Back Test Enabled,
4=IM64 Test Enabled,
5=VTS Indication,
6=CTS Alarm,
7=CT2S Alarm,
8=Remote CTS Alarm,
9=Power Swing,
10=BF Block AR,
11=CB Monitor Alarm,
12=CB Lockout Alarm ,
13=CB Status Alarm,
14=CB Failed to Trip,
Alarm Status 15=CB Failed to Close,
0 50 0
(Copy of 0022) 16=Control CB Unhealthy,
19=No Healthy (AR),
21=System Split Alarm,
22=GPS Alarm,
23=Signaling failure alarm,
24=Signaling Propagation Delay Alarm,
25=Differential protection failure alarm,
26=IM64 Scheme Fail alarm,
27=IEEE C37.94 Communications Alarms,
28=Diff Protection inhibited,
31=Frequency out of range
32 bit field gives status of first 32 alarms. Includes fixed and user settable alarms.
6-10 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0=BF Block AR 2,
1=CB2 Monitor Alarm,
2=CB2 Lockout Alarm,
3=CB2 Status Alarm,
4=CB2 Failed to Trip,
5=CB2 Failed to Close,
6=Control CB2 Unhealthy,
9=No Healthy (AR),
11=Invalid AR Mode,
12=Incompatible relays,
13=In Valid Message Format,
14=Copro Main Prot. Fail,
15=Configuration Error,
Alarm Status 2 0 51 0
16=Re-Configuration Error,
17=C Diff Protection Comms Mode,
18=Max Prop Delay Alarm,
19=Unused,
20=Unused,
21=Unused,
22=Unused,
23=Unused,
24=SR User Alarm 1,
25=SR User Alarm 2,
26=SR User Alarm 3,
27=SR User Alarm 4,
28=MR User Alarm 5,
29=MR User Alarm 6,
30=MR User Alarm 7,
31=MR User Alarm 8
Displays the status of the next 32 alarms as a binary string. Data type G128
0=Battery Fail,
1=Field Volt Fail,
2=Rear Comm 2 Fail,
3=GOOSE IED Absent,
4=NIC Not Fitted,
5=NIC No Response,
6=NIC Fatal Error,
7=NIC Soft. Reload,
8=Bad TCP/IP Cfg.,
9=Bad OSI Config.,
Alarm Status 3 0 52 0 10=NIC Link Fail,
11=NIC SW Mis-Match,
12=IP Addr Conflict,
13=IM Loopback,
14=IM Message Fail,
15=IM Data CD Fail,
16=IM Channel Fail,
17=Backup Setting,
18=Unused,
19=Backup Curve,
20 to 31= Unused
Displays the status of the next 32 alarms as a binary string. Data type G228
P446/EN/TM/E 6-11

Description
0 = Read Some, 1 = Read All, 2 = Read All + Write
Access Level 0 D0 0
Some, 3 = Read All + Write All
Displays the current access level.
Level 0 - No password required - Read access to Security features, Model Number, Serial Number, S/W version, Description, Plant reference, Security
code (UI Only), Encryption key (UI Only), User Banner and security related cells (BF12 - BF14).
Level 1 - Password 1, 2 or 3 required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to Primary/Secondary selector, Level 1 password setting,
Password reset cell and log extraction cells (record selector)
Level 2 - Password 2 or 3 required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to Reset demands and counters and Level 2 password setting.
Level 3 - Password 3 required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to All settings including Level 3 password setting, PSL, IED Config,
Security settings (port disabling etc)
Password Level 1 0 D2 0 ASCII 33 to 122
Allows user to change password level 1. (8 characters)
Password Level 2 0 D3 AAAA ASCII 33 to 122
Password Level 3 0 D4 AAAA ASCII 33 to 122
Security Feature 0 DF 1 1
Displays the level of cyber security implemented, 1 = phase 1.
Password 0 E1 0 ASCII 33 to 122
Encrypted password entry cell. Not visible via UI
Password Level 1 0 E2 0 ASCII 33 to 122
Allows user to change Encrypted password level 1. (8 characters)
Not visible via UI
Not visible via UI
Not visible via UI
Table 4: SYSTEM DATA column
3.2 Viewing Event and Fault Records

The device records and time tags events (1024) and stores them in battery-backed memory. This lets
you establish the sequence of events that occurred following a particular power system condition,
switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically
overwritten by the new one.
The VIEW RECORDS column displays details of these Event, Fault and Maintenance records. Most of
the items in this column are for information purposes and cannot be set, however there are settings,
which allow you to select the records to be viewed.
Description
VIEW RECORDS 1 0 0
This column contains record configuration
Select Event
1 1 0 0 to 1023 step 1
[0...n]
This selects the required event record. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest event and so on.
6-12 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Menu Cell Ref 1 2 (From Record)
Indicates the type of event
Time & Date 1 3 (From Record)
Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal Real Time Clock.
Event Text 1 4 0
Up to 32 Character description of the Event (refer to following sections).
Event Value 1 5 0
Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag or integer representative of the Event (refer to following sections).
Select Fault
1 6 0 0 to 14 step 1
[0...n]
Setting range from 0 to 14. This selects the required fault record from the possible 15 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and
so on.
0x0001 = Start A, 0x0002 = Start B, 0x0004 = Start C,
Faulted Phase 1 7 0 0x0008 = Start N, 0x0010 = Trip A, 0x0020 = Trip B,
0x0040 = Trip C, 0x0080 = Trip N
Displays the faulted phase. Started phases + tripped phases
0x0000,0x0001=General Start,
0x0000,0x0002=Start I Diff,
0x0000,0x0004=Start Z1,
0x0000,0x0008=Start Z2,
0x0000,0x0010=Start Z3,
0x0000,0x0020=Start ZP,
0x0000,0x0040=Start Z4,
0x0000,0x0080=Start I>1,
0x0000,0x0100=Start I>2,
0x0000,0x0200=Start I>3,
0x0000,0x0400=Start I>4,
0x0000,0x0800=Start IN1>1,
0x0000,0x1000=Start IN1>2,
0x0000,0x2000=Start IN1>3,
0x0000,0x4000=Start IN1>4,
0x0000,0x8000=Start ISEF>1,
Start Elements 1 1 8 0
0x0008,0x0000=Thermal Alarm,
0x0010,0x0000=Start NVD 1,
0x0020,0x0000=Start NVD 2,
0x0040,0x0000=Start I2>1,
0x0080,0x0000=Start I2>2,
0x0100,0x0000=Start I2>3,
0x0200,0x0000=Start I2>4,
0x0400,0x0000=Start F<1,
0x0800,0x0000=Start F<2,
0x1000,0x0000=Start F<3,
0x2000,0x0000=Start F<4,
0x4000,0x0000=Start F>1,
0x8000,0x0000=Start F>2
Displays the status of the first 32 start signals.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-13

Description
0x0000,0x0001=Start V<1,
0x0000,0x0002=Start V<2,
0x0000,0x0004=Start V<A,
0x0000,0x0008=Start V<B,
0x0000,0x0010=Start V<C,
0x0000,0x0020=Start V>1,
0x0000,0x0040=Start V>2,
Start Elements 2 1 9 0
0x0000,0x0080=Start V>A,
0x0000,0x0100=Start V>B,
0x0000,0x0200=Start V>C,
0x0000,0x0400=Start df/dt>1,
0x0000,0x0800=Start df/dt>2,
0x0000,0x1000=Start df/dt>3,
0x0000,0x2000=Start df/dt>4,
Displays the status of the second 32 start signals.
0x0000,0x0001=Any Trip,
0x0000,0x0002=Trip I Diff,
0x0000,0x0004=InterTrip I Diff,
0x0000,0x0008=PIT,
0x0000,0x0010=Trip Z1,
0x0000,0x0020=Trip Z2,
0x0000,0x0040=Trip Z3,
0x0000,0x0080=Trip ZP,
0x0000,0x0100=Trip Z4,
0x0000,0x0200=Aid 1 Dist Trip,
0x0000,0x0400=Aid 1 Delta Trip,
0x0000,0x0800=Aid 1 DEF Trip,
0x0000,0x1000=Aided 1 WI,
0x0000,0x2000=Aid 2 Dist Trip,
0x0000,0x4000=Aid 2 Delta Trip,
0x0000,0x8000=Aid 2 DEF Trip,
Trip Elements(1) 1 0A 0
0x0001,0x0000=Aided 2 WI,
0x0002,0x0000=TOR,
0x0004,0x0000=SOTF,
0x0008,0x0000=LOL,
0x0010,0x0000=Stub Bus Trip,
0x0020,0x0000=Trip F<1,
0x0040,0x0000=Trip F<2,
0x0080,0x0000=Trip F<3,
0x0100,0x0000=Trip F<4,
0x0200,0x0000=Trip F>1,
0x0400,0x0000=Trip F>2,
0x0800,0x0000=Trip df/dt>1,
0x1000,0x0000=Trip df/dt>2,
0x2000,0x0000=Trip df/dt>3,
0x4000,0x0000=Trip df/dt>4,
0x8000,0x0000=Phase Comparison
Displays the status of the first 32 trip signals.
6-14 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0x0000,0x0001=Trip I>1,
0x0000,0x0002=Trip I>2,
0x0000,0x0004=Trip I>3,
0x0000,0x0008=Trip I>4,
0x0000,0x0010=Trip Broken Line,
0x0000,0x0020=Trip IN1>1,
0x0000,0x0040=Trip IN1>2,
0x0000,0x0080=Trip IN1>3,
0x0000,0x0100=Trip IN1>4,
0x0000,0x0200=Trip ISEF>1,
0x0000,0x0400=Trip ISEF>2,
0x0000,0x0800=Trip ISEF>3,
0x0000,0x1000=Trip ISEF>4,
0x0000,0x2000=Trip Thermal,
0x0000,0x4000=Trip NVD 1,
0x0000,0x8000=Trip NVD 2,
Trip Elements(2) 1 0B 0
0x0001,0x0000=Trip I2>1,
0x0002,0x0000=Trip V< 1,
0x0004,0x0000=Trip V< 2,
0x0008,0x0000=Trip V< A,
0x0010,0x0000=Trip V< B,
0x0020,0x0000=Trip V< C,
0x0040,0x0000=Trip V> 1,
0x0080,0x0000=Trip V> 2,
0x0100,0x0000=Trip V> A,
0x0200,0x0000=Trip V> B,
0x0400,0x0000=Trip V> C,
0x0800,0x0000=Pred. OST,
0x1000,0x0000=OST,
0x2000,0x0000=Trip I2>2,
0x4000,0x0000=Trip I2>3,
0x8000,0x0000=Trip I2>4
Displays the status of the second 32 trip signals.
0x0000,0x0001=CB Fail 1,
0x0000,0x0002=CB Fail 2,
0x0000,0x0004=A/R Trip 1,
0x0000,0x0008=A/R Trip 2,
0x0000,0x0010=A/R Trip 3,
0x0000,0x0020=A/R Trip 4,
0x0000,0x0040=A/R Trip 5,
Fault Alarms 1 0C 0
0x0000,0x0080=VTS,
0x0000,0x0100=PSB,
0x0000,0x0200=CB2 Fail 1,
0x0000,0x0400=CB2 Fail 2,
0x0000,0x0800=CTS1,
0x0000,0x1000=CTS2,
0x0000,0x2000=Remote CTS
Displays the status of the fault alarm signals.
Fault Time 1 0D 0
Displays fault time and date.
Active Group 1 0E 0
Displays active setting group
System Frequency 1 0F 0
Displays the system frequency
Fault Duration 1 10 0
Displays time from the start or trip until the undercurrent elements indicate the CB is open
P446/EN/TM/E 6-15

Description
CB Operate Time 1 11 0
Displays time from protection trip to undercurrent elements indicating the CB is open
Relay Trip Time 1 12 0
Displays time from protection start to protection trip
Fault Location 1 13 0
Displays fault location in metres.
Displays fault location in miles.
Displays fault location in ohms.
Displays fault location in percentage.
CB2 Operate Time 1 17 0
Displays time from protection trip to undercurrent elements indicating the CB2 is open
0x0000,0x0001 = V1>1 Cmp Start,
0x0000,0x0002 = V1>2 Cmp Start,
0x0000,0x0004 = Start I>>Diff,
Start Elements 3 1 1A 0
0x0000,0x0008 = Start IN>NDiff,
0x0000,0x0010 = Not Used
0x0000,0x0020 = StubBus Start
Displays the status of the third 32 start signals.
0x0000,0x0001 = V1>1 Cmp Trip,
0x0000,0x0002 = V1>2 Cmp Trip,
Trip Elements(3) 1 1C 0 0x0000,0x0004 = Trip I>>Diff,
0x0000,0x0008 = Trip IN Diff,
0x0000,0x0010 = Intertrp IN Diff
Displays the status of the third 32 trip signals.
IA Prefault Mag 1 20 0
Measured parameter
IA Prefault Ang 1 21 0
Measured parameter
IB Prefault Mag 1 22 0
Measured parameter
IB Prefault Ang 1 23 0
Measured parameter
IC Prefault Mag 1 24 0
Measured parameter
IC Prefault Ang 1 25 0
Measured parameter
IN Prefault Mag 1 26 0
Measured parameter
IN Prefault Ang 1 27 0
Measured parameter
IM Prefault Mag 1 28 0
Measured parameter
6-16 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
IM Prefault Ang 1 29 0
Measured parameter
VA Prefault Mag 1 30 0
Measured parameter
VA Prefault Ang 1 31 0
Measured parameter
VB Prefault Mag 1 32 0
Measured parameter
VB Prefault Ang 1 33 0
Measured parameter
VC Prefault Mag 1 34 0
Measured parameter
VC Prefault Ang 1 35 0
Measured parameter
VN Prefault Mag 1 36 0
Measured parameter
VN Prefault Ang 1 37 0
Measured parameter
IA Fault Mag 1 40 0
Measured parameter
IA Fault Ang 1 41 0
Measured parameter
IB Fault Mag 1 42 0
Measured parameter
IB Fault Ang 1 43 0
Measured parameter
IC Fault Mag 1 44 0
Measured parameter
IC Fault Ang 1 45 0
Measured parameter
IN Fault Mag 1 46 0
Measured parameter
IN Fault Ang 1 47 0
Measured parameter
IM Fault Mag 1 48 0
Measured parameter
IM Fault Ang 1 49 0
Measured parameter
VA Fault Mag 1 50 0
Measured parameter
VA Fault Ang 1 51 0
Measured parameter
P446/EN/TM/E 6-17

Description
VB Fault Mag 1 52 0
Measured parameter
VB Fault Ang 1 53 0
Measured parameter
VC Fault Mag 1 54 0
Measured parameter
VC Fault Ang 1 55 0
Measured parameter
VN Fault Mag 1 56 0
Measured parameter
VN Fault Ang 1 57 0
Measured parameter
Ch 1 Prop Delay 1 73 0
Measured parameter
Ch 2 Prop Delay 1 74 0
Measured parameter
V1 Rem Magnitude 1 98 0
Measured parameter
V1 Rem Phase Ang 1 99 0
Measured parameter
Select Maint
1 F0 0 0 to 9 step 1
[0...n]
This selects the required maintenance report from those stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest report and so on.
Maint Text 1 F1 0
Up to 16 Character description of the occurrence (refer to following sections).
Maint Type 1 F2 0
These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence. They form a specific error code which should be quoted in any related correspondence to
Report Data.
Maint Data 1 F3 0
These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence. They form a specific error code which should be quoted in any related correspondence to
Report Data.
Evt Iface Source 1 FA 0 0
Interface on which the event was logged
Evt Access Level 1 FB 0 0
Any security event that indicates that it came from an interface action, such as disabling a port, will also record the access level of the interface that initiated
the event. This will be recorded in the ‘Event State’ field of the event.
Evt Extra Info 1 FC 0 0
This cell provides supporting information for the event and can vary between the different event types.
Evt Unique Id 1 FE 0 0
Each event will have a unique event id. The event id is a 32 bit unsigned integer that is incremented for each new event record and is stored in the record
in battery-backed memory (BBRAM). The current event id must be non-volatile so as to preserve it during power cycles, thus it too will be stored in
BBRAM. The event id will wrap back to zero when it reaches its maximum (4,294,967,295). The event id will be used by PC based utilities when organising
extracted logs from IED's.
6-18 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Reset Indication 1 FF No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
This serves to reset the trip LED indications provided that the relevant protection element has reset.
Table 5: VIEW RECORDS column
3.3 Measurements 1
The MEASUREMENTS 1 column lets you view the measurement quantities. These may include
various Magnitudes, Phase Angles, RMS values and Frequencies.
Description
MEASUREMENTS 1 2 0 0
This column contains measurement parameters
IA Magnitude 2 1 0 Not Settable
IA Magnitude
IA Phase Angle 2 2 0 Not Settable
IA Phase Angle
IB Magnitude 2 3 0 Not Settable
IB Magnitude
IB Phase Angle 2 4 0 Not Settable
IB Phase Angle
IC Magnitude 2 5 0 Not Settable
IC Magnitude
IC Phase Angle 2 6 0 Not Settable
IC Phase Angle
IN Derived Mag 2 9 0 Not Settable
IN Derived Mag
IN Derived Angle 2 0A 0 Not Settable
IN Derived Angle
ISEF Magnitude 2 0B 0 Not Settable
ISEF Magnitude
ISEF Angle 2 0C 0 Not Settable
ISEF Angle
I1 Magnitude 2 0D 0 Not Settable
I1 Magnitude
I2 Magnitude 2 0E 0 Not Settable
I2 Magnitude
I0 Magnitude 2 0F 0 Not Settable
I0 Magnitude
IA RMS 2 10 0 Not Settable
IA RMS
IB RMS 2 11 0 Not Settable
IB RMS
P446/EN/TM/E 6-19

Description
IC RMS 2 12 0 Not Settable
IC RMS
VAB Magnitude 2 14 0 Not Settable
VAB Magnitude
VAB Phase Angle 2 15 0 Not Settable
VAB Phase Angle
VBC Magnitude 2 16 0 Not Settable
VBC Magnitude
VBC Phase Angle 2 17 0 Not Settable
VBC Phase Angle
VCA Magnitude 2 18 0 Not Settable
VCA Magnitude
VCA Phase Angle 2 19 0 Not Settable
VCA Phase Angle
VAN Magnitude 2 1A 0 Not Settable
VAN Magnitude
VAN Phase Angle 2 1B 0 Not Settable
VAN Phase Angle
VBN Magnitude 2 1C 0 Not Settable
VBN Magnitude
VBN Phase Angle 2 1D 0 Not Settable
VBN Phase Angle
VCN Magnitude 2 1E 0 Not Settable
VCN Magnitude
VCN Phase Angle 2 1F 0 Not Settable
VCN Phase Angle
VN Measured Mag 2 20 0 Not Settable
VN Measured Mag
VN Measured Ang 2 21 0 Not Settable
VN Measured Ang
VN Derived Mag 2 22 0 Not Settable
VN Derived Mag
VN Derived Ang 2 23 0 Not Settable
VN Derived Ang
V1 Magnitude 2 24 0 Not Settable
V1 Magnitude
V2 Magnitude
V0 Magnitude
VAN RMS 2 27 0 Not Settable
VAN RMS
6-20 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
VBN RMS 2 28 0 Not Settable
VBN RMS
VCN RMS 2 29 0 Not Settable
VCN RMS
Frequency 2 2D 0 Not Settable
Frequency
C/S Voltage Mag 2 2E 0 Not Settable
C/S Voltage Mag
C/S Voltage Ang 2 2F 0 Not Settable
C/S Voltage Ang
C/S Bus-Line Ang 2 30 0 Not Settable
C/S Bus-Line Ang
Slip Frequency 2 31 0 Not Settable
Slip Frequency
IM Magnitude 2 32 0 Not Settable
IM Magnitude
IM Phase Angle 2 33 0 Not Settable
IM Phase Angle
I1 Magnitude 2 40 0 Not Settable
I1 Magnitude
I1 Phase Angle 2 41 0 Not Settable
I1 Phase Angle
I2 Magnitude
I2 Phase Angle
I0 Magnitude
I0 Phase Angle
V1 Magnitude
V1 Phase Angle 2 47 0 Not Settable
V1 Phase Angle
V2 Magnitude
V2 Phase Angle 2 49 0 Not Settable
V2 Phase Angle
V0 Magnitude 2 4A 0 Not Settable
V0 Magnitude
V0 Phase Angle 2 4B 0 Not Settable
V0 Phase Angle
P446/EN/TM/E 6-21

Description
CB2 CS Volt Mag 2 4C 0 Not Settable
CB2 CS Volt Mag
CB2 CS Volt Ang 2 4D 0 Not Settable
CB2 CS Volt Ang
CB2 Bus-Line Ang 2 4E 0 Not Settable
CB2 Bus-Line Ang
CB2 CS Slip Freq 2 4F 0 Not Settable
CB2 CS Slip Freq
V1 Rem Magnitude 2 50 0 Not Settable
V1 Rem Magnitude
V1 Rem Phase Ang 2 51 0 Not Settable
V1 Rem Phase Ang
IA CT1 Magnitude 2 52 0 Not Settable
IA CT1 Magnitude
IA CT1 Phase Ang 2 53 0 Not Settable
IA CT1 Phase Ang
IB CT1 Magnitude 2 54 0 Not Settable
IB CT1 Magnitude
IB CT1 Phase Ang 2 55 0 Not Settable
IB CT1 Phase Ang
IC CT1 Magnitude 2 56 0 Not Settable
IC CT1 Magnitude
IC CT1 Phase Ang 2 57 0 Not Settable
IC CT1 Phase Ang
IA CT2 Magnitude 2 58 0 Not Settable
IA CT2 Magnitude
IA CT2 Phase Ang 2 59 0 Not Settable
IA CT2 Phase Ang
IB CT2 Magnitude 2 5A 0 Not Settable
IB CT2 Magnitude
IB CT2 Phase Ang 2 5B 0 Not Settable
IB CT2 Phase Ang
IC CT2 Magnitude 2 5C 0 Not Settable
IC CT2 Magnitude
IC CT2 Phase Ang 2 5D 0 Not Settable
IC CT2 Phase Ang
Table 6: MEASUREMENTS 1 column
3.4 Measurements 2
The MEASUREMENTS 2 column works in a similar manner to the Measurements 1 settings, but may
provide a different choice of measurement settings.
6-22 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
A Phase Watts 3 1 0 Not Settable
A Phase Watts
B Phase Watts 3 2 0 Not Settable
B Phase Watts
C Phase Watts 3 3 0 Not Settable
C Phase Watts
A Phase VArs 3 4 0 Not Settable
A Phase VArs
B Phase VArs 3 5 0 Not Settable
B Phase VArs
C Phase VArs 3 6 0 Not Settable
C Phase VArs
A Phase VA 3 7 0 Not Settable
A Phase VA
B Phase VA 3 8 0 Not Settable
B Phase VA
C Phase VA 3 9 0 Not Settable
C Phase VA
3 Phase Watts 3 0A 0 Not Settable
3 Phase Watts
3 Phase VArs 3 0B 0 Not Settable
3 Phase VArs
3 Phase VA 3 0C 0 Not Settable
3 Phase VA
3Ph Power Factor 3 0E 0 Not Settable
3Ph Power Factor
APh Power Factor 3 0F 0 Not Settable
APh Power Factor
BPh Power Factor 3 10 0 Not Settable
BPh Power Factor
CPh Power Factor 3 11 0 Not Settable
CPh Power Factor
3Ph WHours Fwd 3 12 0 Not Settable
3 Phase Watt - Hours (Forward)
3Ph WHours Rev 3 13 0 Not Settable
3 Phase Watts - Hours (Reverse)
3Ph VArHours Fwd 3 14 0 Not Settable
3 Phase VAr - Hours (Forward)
3Ph VArHours Rev 3 15 0 Not Settable
3 Phase VAr - Hours (Reverse)
P446/EN/TM/E 6-23

Description
3Ph W Fix Demand 3 16 0 Not Settable
3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand
3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3 17 0 Not Settable
3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand
IA Fixed Demand 3 18 0 Not Settable
IA Fixed Demand
IB Fixed Demand 3 19 0 Not Settable
IB Fixed Demand
IC Fixed Demand 3 1A 0 Not Settable
IC Fixed Demand
3Ph W Roll Dem 3 1B 0 Not Settable
3 Phase Watts - Rolling Demand
3Ph VArs RollDem 3 1C 0 Not Settable
3 Phase VArs - Rolling Demand
IA Roll Demand 3 1D 0 Not Settable
IA Roll Demand
IB Roll Demand 3 1E 0 Not Settable
IB Roll Demand
IC Roll Demand 3 1F 0 Not Settable
IC Roll Demand
3Ph W Peak Dem 3 20 0 Not Settable
3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand
3Ph VAr Peak Dem 3 21 0 Not Settable
3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
IA Peak Demand 3 22 0 Not Settable
IA Peak Demand
IB Peak Demand 3 23 0 Not Settable
IB Peak Demand
IC Peak Demand 3 24 0 Not Settable
IC Peak Demand
Reset Demand 3 25 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
Reset Demand
Thermal State 3 26 0
Thermal State
Reset Thermal 3 27 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
Reset Thermal
df/dt 3 29 0 Not Settable
df/dt
3.5 Measurements 4
The MEASUREMENTS 4 column works in a similar manner to the Measurements 1 settings, but may
provide a different choice of measurement settings.
6-24 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Ch 1 Prop Delay 5 1 0 Not Settable

Channel 1 propagation time is displayed in seconds. These times are the ones calculated with asynchronous sampling (some times called “ping pong”
method).
Ch 2 Prop Delay 5 2 0 Not Settable
Same as for channel 1
Bit 0=Rx,
Bit 1=Tx,
Bit 2=Local GPS,
Bit 3=Remote GPS,
Bit 4=Mux Clk F Error,
Bit 5=Signal Lost,
Bit 6=Path Yellow,
Channel 1 Status 5 7 0
Bit 7=Mismatch RxN,
Bit 8=Timeout,
Bit 9=Message Level,
Bit 10=Passthrough,
Bit 11=H/W B to J mode,
Bit 12=Max PropDelay,
Bit 13=Max Tx-RxTime
‘Channel Status 1’ is a diagnostics flag associated with Channel 1 condition. See Channel 1 DDB descriptions
Bit 0=Rx,
Bit 1=Tx,
Bit 2=Local GPS,
Bit 3=Remote GPS,
Bit 4=Mux Clk F Error,
Bit 5=Signal Lost,
Bit 6=Path Yellow,
Channel 2 Status 5 8 0
Bit 7=Mismatch RxN,
Bit 8=Timeout,
Bit 9=Message Level,
Bit 10=Passthrough,
Bit 11=H/W B to J mode,
Bit 12=Max PropDelay,
Bit 13=Max Tx-RxTime
‘Channel Status 2’ is a diagnostics flag associated with Channel 2 condition. See Channel 2 DDB descriptions
IM64 Rx Status 5 9 0 Not Settable
‘IM64 Rx Status’ is a 16 bit word that displays the status of received commands as 1 or 0.
STATISTICS 5 10 0 0
0
STATS RESET ON 5 11 0 0
0
Date/Time 5 12 0 Not Settable
Displays the time and date of last statistics reset.
Ch1 No.Vald Mess 5 13 0 Not Settable
Displays the number of received valid messages over channel 1 since last statistics reset.
Ch1 No.Err Mess 5 14 0 Not Settable
Displays the number of received errored messages over channel 1 since last statistics reset. The number of errored messages complies with ITU- G8.21
and detailed in following cells
P446/EN/TM/E 6-25

Description
Ch1 No.Errored s 5 15 0 Not Settable
Displays the number of seconds containing 1 or more errored or lost messages over channel 1
Ch1 No.Sev Err s 5 16 0 Not Settable
Displays the number of seconds containing 31 or more errored or lost messages over channel 1. Any severely errored seconds are ignored when working
out the minutes intervals
Ch1 No.Dgraded m 5 17 0 Not Settable
Displays the number of minutes containing 2 or more errored or lost messages over channel 1
Ch2 No.Vald Mess 5 18 0 Not Settable
Ch2 No.Err Mess 5 19 0 Not Settable
Ch2 No.Errored s 5 1A 0 Not Settable
Ch2 No.Sev Err s 5 1B 0 Not Settable
Ch2 No.Dgraded m 5 1C 0 Not Settable
Max Ch 1 Prop Delay 5 26 0 Not Settable
Displays the maximum value of the channel 1 overall propagation delay divided by 2 when the protection communications are enabled.
Max Ch 2 Prop Delay 5 27 0 Not Settable
Clear Statistics 5 30 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
The error statistics are automatically cleared on power-up. They can also be cleared using the Clear Statistics setting in Measurements column of the
menu.
3.6 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

The device records statistics for each circuit breaker trip operation. The cells within the CB
CONDITION column display statistics such as the number of trips, the total amount of broken current
and the circuit breaker operate times. Most of these cells shown are counter values only, and cannot
be set. The only settings possible are those that reset the counters back to zero.
Description
CB CONDITION 6 0 0
This column contains CB Condition Monitoring Measured Parameters
CB1 A Operations 6 2 0 Not Settable

Displays the total number of A phase trips issued by the IED for CB1.
CB1 B Operations 6 3 0 Not Settable
Displays the total number of B phase trips issued by the IED for CB1.
CB1 C Operations 6 4 0 Not Settable
Displays the total number of C phase trips issued by the IED for CB1.
6-26 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
CB1 IA Broken 6 5 0 Not Settable
Displays the total fault current interrupted by the IED for the A phase for CB1.
CB1 IB Broken 6 6 0 Not Settable
Displays the total fault current interrupted by the IED for the B phase for CB1.
CB1 IC Broken 6 7 0 Not Settable
Displays the total fault current interrupted by the IED for the C phase for CB1.
CB1 Operate Time 6 8 0 Not Settable
Displays the calculated CB1 operating time.
Reset CB1 Data 6 9 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
Reset the CB1 condition counters.
0=I^ Maint Alarm
1=I^ Lockout Alarm
2=CB OPs Maint
3=CB OPs Lock
4=CB Time Maint
5=CB Time Lockout
6=Fault Freq Lock
CB Monitoring 6 10 0
7=I^ Maint Alarm
8=I^ Lockout Alarm
9=CB2 OPs Maint
10=CB2 OPs Lock
11=CB2 Time Maint
12=CB2 Time Lockout
13=Fault Freq Lock
Displays the status of the CB Condition monitoring alarms
CB2 A Operations 6 12 0 Not Settable
CB2 B Operations 6 13 0 Not Settable
CB2 C Operations 6 14 0 Not Settable
CB2 IA Broken 6 15 0 Not Settable
CB2 IB Broken 6 16 0 Not Settable
Displays the total fault current interrupted by the IED for the B phase for CB2.
CB2 IC Broken 6 17 0 Not Settable
Displays the total fault current interrupted by the IED for the C phase for CB2.
CB2 OperateTime 6 18 0 Not Settable
Reset CB2 Data 6 19 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
Table 9: CB CONDITION column
3.7 Circuit Breaker Control

The CB CONTROL column contains settings for controlling the Circuit Breaker and monitoring its
state. It also contains various statistics relating to the autoreclose function, and settings for controlling
them and resetting from lockout conditions.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-27

Description
CB CONTROL 7 0 0
This column controls the circuit Breaker Control configuration
0 = Disabled, 1 = Local, 2 = Remote, 3 =

CB Control by 7 1 Disabled Local+Remote, 4 = Opto, 5 = Opto+local, 6 =
Opto+Remote, 7 = Opto+Rem+local
Selects the type of circuit breaker control to be used.
This setting is common to both CB1 and CB2. It determines which manual trip and close controls can be used to control both circuit breakers.
Close Pulse Time 7 2 0.5 0.1s to 50s step 0.01s
Defines the duration of the close pulse within which CB should close when close command is issued. If CB fails to close after elapse of this time, CB close
fail alarm is set.
Trip Pulse Time 7 3 0.5 0.1s to 50s step 0.01s
Defines the duration of the trip pulse within which CB should trip when manual or protection trip command is issued. If CB does not trip within set Trip Pulse
Time, CB failed to trip alarm is set.
Man Close Delay 7 5 10 0.01s to 600s step 0.01s
This defines the delay time before the close pulse is executed.
CB Healthy Time 7 6 5 0.01s to 9999s step 0.01s
Settable time delay for manual closure with this circuit breaker check. If the circuit breaker does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following
a close command then the IED will lockout and alarm. CB Healthy is required for manual and auto reclosure.
Check Sync Time 7 7 5 0.01s to 9999s step 0.01s
A user settable time delay is included for manual closure with System Check Synchronizing. If the System Check Synchronizing criteria are not satisfied in
this time period following a close command the IED will lockout and alarm.
CB mon LO reset 7 8 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
Command to reset the CB monitoring Lockout Alarm
Rst CB mon LO by 7 9 CB Close 0 = User Interface or 1 = CB Close
This setting is used to decide preferred option to reset a lockout condition caused by CB monitoring conditions either by a manual circuit breaker close
command or via the user interface.
CB mon LO RstDly 7 0A 5 0.1s to 600s step 0.01s
If Rst CB mon LO by is set to CB close then CB mon LO RstDly timer allows reset of CB lockout state after set time delay
Autoreclose Mode 7 0B No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = In Service, 2 = Out of Service
Command to changes state of Auto-Reclose, In Service or Out of Service
AR Status 7 0E 0 0 = Out of Service or 1 = In Service
Status of the Auto Reclose - In Service / Out of service
0 = None
1 = 52A 3 pole
2 = 52B 3 pole
CB1 Status Input 7 11 52B 1 pole 3 = 52A & 52B 3 pole
4 = 52A 1 pole
5 = 52B 1 pole
6 = 52A & 52B 1 pole
Setting to define the type of circuit breaker contacts that will be used for the circuit breaker 1 control logic. Form A contacts match the status of the circuit
breaker primary contacts, form B are opposite to the breaker status.
When 1 pole is selected, individual contacts must be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic for phase A, phase B, and phase C. Setting 3 pole
means that only a single contact is used, common to all 3 poles.
CB Status Time 7 7F 5 0.1s to 5s step 0.01s
Under healthy conditions the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts will be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open or closed, it indicates that
either the contacts, or the wiring, or the circuit breaker are defective and an alarm will be issued after CB Status Time delay. The time delay is set to avoid
unwanted operation during normal switching duties.
6-28 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0 = None
1 = 52A 3 pole
2 = 52B 3 pole
CB2 Status Input 7 80 52B 1 pole 3 = 52A & 52B 3 pole
4 = 52A 1 pole
5 = 52B 1 pole
6 = 52A & 52B 1 pole
Setting to define the type of circuit breaker contacts that will be used for the circuit breaker 2 control logic. Form A contacts match the status of the circuit
breaker primary contacts, form B are opposite to the breaker status.
When 1 pole is selected, individual contacts must be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic for phase A, phase B, and phase C. Setting 3 pole
means that only a single contact is used, common to all 3 poles.
CTRL CB2 Lead 7 81 Reset 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set or 2 = Reset
If Leader Select By is set to Control, this user control determines the preferred leader: Set / Reset (Reset = CB1 lead; Set = CB2 lead). This command is
NON VOLATILE
Reset AROK Ind 7 82 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
If Res AROK by UI is set to Enabled, this command provides a pulse to reset the successful AR indication for both CB's
Reset CB1 LO 7 83 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
If Res LO by UI is set to Enabled, this command provides a pulse to reset the lockout for CB1.
Note: This requires the condition that caused the lockout to have been cleared.
Reset CB2 LO 7 84 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
If Res LO by UI is set to Enabled, this command provides a pulse to reset the lockout for CB2.
Note: This requires the condition that caused the lockout to have been cleared.
CB1 Total Shots 7 85 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB1 reclosures
CB1 SUCC SPAR 7 86 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB1 successful 1 pole reclosures
CB1SUCC3PARShot1 7 87 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB1 successful 3 pole reclosures at 1st shot
Indicates the total number of CB1 successful 3 pole reclosures at 2nd shot
Indicates the total number of CB1 successful 3 pole reclosures at 3rd shot
CB1SUCC3PARShot4 7 8A 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB1 successful 3 pole reclosures at 4th shot
CB1 Failed Shots 7 8B 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB1 failed reclose cycles
Reset CB1 Shots 7 8C No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
This command resets all CB1 shots counters to zero
CB2 Total Shots 7 8D 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB2 reclosures
CB2 SUCC SPAR 7 8E 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB2 successful 1 pole reclosures
CB2SUCC3PARShot1 7 8F 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB2 successful 3 pole reclosures at 1st shot
Indicates the total number of CB2 successful 3 pole reclosures at 2nd shot
P446/EN/TM/E 6-29

Description
Indicates the total number of CB2 successful 3 pole reclosures at 3rd shot
Indicates the total number of CB2 successful 3 pole reclosures at 4th shot
CB2 Failed Shots 7 93 0 Not Settable
Indicates the total number of CB2 failed reclose cycles
Reset CB2 Shots 7 94 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
This command resets all CB2 shots counters to zero
Res AROK by UI 7 96 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, this allows the successful auto-reclose signal to be reset by user interface command Reset AROK Ind.
Res AROK by NoAR 7 97 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows the successful autoreclose signal to be reset by autoreclosing being disabled
Res AROK by Ext 7 98 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows successful autoreclose signal reset by external DDB input Ext Rst CBx AROK via PSL.
Res AROK by TDly 7 99 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows successful autoreclose signal to reset after time AROK Reset Time
Res AROK by TDly 7 9A 1 1s to 9999s step 1s
Reset time for successful autoreclose signal if Res AROK by TDly is set to Enabled
Res LO by CB IS 7 9B Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows reset of CB lockout state when CB is "In Service" (i.e. CB is closed for time > CB IS Time)
Res LO by UI 7 9C Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows reset of each CB lockout state by UI command
Res LO by NoAR 7 9D Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows reset of CB lockout state by selecting autoreclosing disabled
Res LO by ExtDDB 7 9E Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows reset of CB lockout state by external DDB input Ext Rst CBx AROK via PSL.
Res LO by TDelay 7 9F Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, allows reset of CB lockout state after time LO Reset Time
LO Reset Time 7 A0 1 1s to 9999s step 1s
Reset time for CB lockout if Res LO by TDelay is set to Enabled
Table 10: CB CONTROL column
3.8 Date and Time

The DATE AND TIME column displays all the settings and data relating to the date and time, as well
as battery status.
Description
DATE AND TIME 8 0 0
This column contains Date and Time stamp settings
Date/Time 8 1 0
Displays the IED’s current date and time.
6-30 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Date 8 N/A 1 Jan 1994
Displays the date. Front Panel Menu only
Time 8 N/A 00:00
Displays the time. Front Panel Menu only
IRIG-B Sync 8 4 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable IRIG-B time synchronization.
0 = Card Not Fitted, 1 = Card Failed, 2 = Signal Healthy,
IRIG-B Status 8 5 0
3 = No Signal
Displays the status of IRIG-B
Battery Status 8 6 0 0 = Dead or 1 = Healthy
Displays whether the battery is healthy or not
Battery Alarm 8 7 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enables or disables battery alarm. The battery alarm needs to be disabled when a battery is removed or not used
0 = Disabled,
1 = Trying server 1,
2 = Trying server 2,
SNTP Status 8 13 0 3 = Server 1 OK,
4 = Server 2 OK,
5 = No response,
6 = No valid clock
IEC61850 or DNP3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Displays information about the SNTP time synchronization status
LocalTime Enable 8 20 Flexible 0 = Disabled, 1 = Fixed or 2 = Flexible
Setting to turn on/off local time adjustments.
Disabled - No local time zone will be maintained. Time synchronization from any interface will be used to directly set the master clock and all displayed (or
read) times on all interfaces will be based on the master clock with no adjustment.
Fixed - A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the LocalTime offset setting and all interfaces will use local time except SNTP time
synchronization and IEC 61850 timestamps.
Flexible - A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the LocalTime offset setting and each interface can be assigned to the UTC zone or local time
zone with the exception of the local interfaces which will always be in the local time zone and IEC 61850/SNTP which will always be in the UTC zone.
LocalTime Offset 8 21 0 -720 to 720 step 15
Setting to specify an offset of -12 to +12 hrs in 15 minute intervals for local time zone. This adjustment is applied to the time based on the master clock
which is UTC/GMT
DST Enable 8 22 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to turn on/off daylight saving time adjustment to local time.
DST Offset 8 23 60 30 to 60 step 30
Setting to specify daylight saving offset which will be used for the time adjustment to local time.
DST Start 8 24 Last 0 = First, 1 = Second, 2 = Third, 3 = Fourth or 4 = Last
Setting to specify the week of the month in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
0 = Sunday, 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday,
DST Start Day 8 25 Sunday
4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday or 6 = Saturday
Setting to specify the day of the week in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
0 = January, 1 = February, 2 = March, 3 = April, 4 =
DST Start Month 8 26 March May, 5 = June, 6 = July, 7 = August, 8 = September, 9 =
October, 10 = November or 11 = December
Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
DST Start Mins 8 27 60 0 to 1425 step 15
Setting to specify the time of day in which daylight saving time adjustment starts. This is set relative to 00:00 hrs on the selected day when time adjustment
is to start
P446/EN/TM/E 6-31

Description
DST End 8 28 Last 0 = First, 1 = Second, 2 = Third, 3 = Fourth or 4 = Last
Setting to specify the week of the month in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
0 = Sunday, 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday,
DST End Day 8 29 Sunday
4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday or 6 = Saturday
Setting to specify the day of the week in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
0 = January, 1 = February, 2 = March, 3 = April, 4 =
DST End Month 8 2A October May, 5 = June, 6 = July, 7 = August, 8 = September, 9 =
October, 10 = November or 11 = December
Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
DST End Mins 8 2B 60 0 to 1425 step 15
Setting to specify the time of day in which daylight saving time adjustment ends. This is set relative to 00:00 hrs on the selected day when time adjustment
is to end
RP1 Time Zone 8 30 UTC 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
Setting for the rear port 1 interface to specify if time synchronization received will be local or universal time co-ordinated
RP2 Time Zone 8 31 UTC 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
Setting for the rear port 2 interface to specify if time synchronization received will be local or universal time co-ordinated
DNPOE Time Zone 8 32 UTC 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
DNP3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Setting to specify if time synchronisation received will be local or universal time
co-ordinated.
Tunnel Time Zone 8 33 UTC 0 = UTC or 1 = Local
Ethernet versions only for tunnelled courier. Setting to specify if time synchronization received will be local or universal time co-ordinated
Table 11: DATE AND TIME column
3.9 Configuration
The settings in this column are mainly concerned with switching on or off the protection functions. If a
protection function is enabled, the settings associated with this function will appear in the HMI panel
menu. If it is disabled, the settings associated with that function are not shown in the HMI panel menu.
The CONFIGURATION column is also used to enabling, disabling and activating Protection Setting
Groups and controlling the visibility/invisibility of columns such as Control Inputs in order to simplify the
menu.
Description
CONFIGURATION 9 0 0
This column contains all the general configuration options
0 = No Operation, 1 = All Settings, 2 = Setting Group 1,
Restore Defaults 9 1 No Operation 3 = Setting Group 2, 4 = Setting Group 3, 5 = Setting
Group 4
Setting to restore a setting group to factory default settings.
To restore the default values to the settings in any Group settings, set the ‘restore defaults’ cell to the relevant Group number. Alternatively it is possible to
set the ‘restore defaults’ cell to ‘all settings’ to restore the default values to all of the IED’s settings, not just the Group settings.
The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the IED after they have been confirmed by the user.
Note: Restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if
the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
Setting Group 9 2 Select via Menu 0 = Select via Menu or 1 = Select via PSL
Allows setting group changes to be initiated via Opto Input or via Menu
6-32 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Active Settings 9 3 Group 1 0 = Group 1, 1 = Group 2, 2 = Group 3, 3 = Group 4
Selects the active setting group.
Save Changes 9 4 No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Save, 2 = Abort
Saves all IED settings.
Copy From 9 5 Group 1 0 = Group 1, 1 = Group 2, 2 = Group 3, 3 = Group 4
Allows displayed settings to be copied from a selected setting group
0 = No Operation, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group
Copy To 9 6 No Operation
3
Allows displayed settings to be copied to a selected setting group
Setting Group 1 9 7 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Settings Group 1. If the setting group is disabled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this
setting.
Setting Group 2 9 8 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
setting.
Setting Group 3 9 9 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
setting.
Setting Group 4 9 0A Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
setting.
Distance 9 0B Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Only in models with Distance option. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Distance Protection: ANSI 21/21N.
Directional E/F 9 0C Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Only in models with Distance option. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Directional Earth Fault (DEF) Protection used in a pilot aided scheme.
This protection is independent from back up Earth fault protection described below.: ANSI 67N.
Overcurrent 9 10 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Phase Overcurrent Protection function. I> stages: ANSI 50/51/67
Neg Sequence O/C 9 11 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection function. I2> stages: ANSI 46/67
Broken Conductor 9 12 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Broken Conductor function. I2/I1> stage: ANSI 46
Earth Fault 9 13 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the back up Earth Fault Protection function. IN >stages: ANSI 50N/51N/67N
SEF/REF Prot'n 9 15 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Sensitive Earth Fault/Restricted Earth fault Protection function.
ISEF >stages: ANSI 50N/51N/67N. IREF>stage: ANSI 64.
Residual O/V NVD 9 16 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Residual Overvoltage Protection function. VN>stages: ANSI 59N
Thermal Overload 9 17 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Thermal Overload Protection function. ANSI 49.
PowerSwing Block 9 18 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Only in models with Distance option. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the power swing blocking/out of step: ANSI 68/78.
Volt Protection 9 1D Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Voltage Protection (under/overvoltage/remote) function. V<, V>, Cp V> stages: ANSI 27/59/59R.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-33

Description
Freq Protection 9 1E Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Frequency Protection (under/over frequency) function. F<, F> stages: ANSI 81.
df/dt Protection 9 1F Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Rate of change of Frequency Protection function. df/dt> stages: ANSI 81.
CB Fail 9 20 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Circuit Breaker Fail Protection function: ANSI 50BF.
Supervision 9 21 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Supervision (VTS & CTS) functions: ANSI 47/27/46.
System Checks 9 23 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the System Checks (Check Sync. and Voltage Monitor) function: ANSI 25.
Auto-Reclose 9 24 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Auto-reclose function. ANSI 79.
Input Labels 9 25 Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Input Labels menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
Output Labels 9 26 Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Output Labels menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
CT & VT Ratios 9 28 Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Current & Voltage Transformer Ratios menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
Record Control 9 29 Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Record Control menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
Disturb Recorder 9 2A Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Disturbance Recorder menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
Measure't Setup 9 2B Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Measurement Setup menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
Comms Settings 9 2C Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Communications Settings menu visible further on in the IED settings menu. These are the settings associated with the 1st and 2nd rear
communications ports
Commission Tests 9 2D Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Commissioning Tests menu visible further on in the IED settings menu.
Setting Values 9 2E Primary 0 = Primary or 1 = Secondary
This affects all protection settings that are dependent upon CT and VT ratios. All subsequent settings input must be based in terms of this reference.
Control Inputs 9 2F Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Activates the Control Input status and operation menu further on in the IED setting menu.
Control I/P Config 9 35 Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Control Input Configuration menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
Ctrl I/P Labels 9 36 Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Control Input Labels menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
0= Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Hotkey only, or 3 = CB
Direct Access 9 39 Enabled
Ctrl Only
Defines what CB control direct access is allowed. The front direct access keys that are used as a short cut function of the menu may be:
Disabled – No function visible on the LCD.
Enabled – All control functions mapped to the Hotkeys and Control Trip/Close are available.
Hotkey Only – Only control functions mapped to the Hotkeys are available on the LCD.
CB Ctrl Only – Only Control Trip/Control Close command will appear on the IED’s LCD.
6-34 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
InterMiCOM 9 40 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) EIA (RS) 232 InterMiCOM (integrated teleprotection).
InterMiCOM 64 9 41 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) InterMiCOM64 (integrated 56/64kbit/s teleprotection).
Function Key 9 50 Visible 0 = Invisible or 1 = Visible
Sets the Function Key menu visible further on in the IED setting menu.
RP1 Read Only 9 FB Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Read Only Mode of Rear Port 1.
RP2 Read Only 9 FC Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Read Only Mode of Rear Port 2.
NIC Read Only 9 FD Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Ethernet versions only. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Read Only Mode of Network Interface Card.
LCD Contrast 9 FF 11 0 to 31 step 1
Sets the LCD contrast.
Table 12: CONFIGURATION column
Note: When you select 'restore defaults to all settings', this includes the rear communication port settings.
This will result disrupt communication via the rear port if the new (default) settings do not match
those of the master station.
3.10 CT and VT Ratios

The CT AND VT RATIOS column contains the settings for defining the main system current and
voltage transformers, such as the primary and secondary voltage and current ratings.
Description
CT AND VT RATIOS 0A 0 0
This column contains settings for Current and Voltage Transformer ratios
Main VT Primary 0A 1 110 100 V to 1 MV step 1 V
Sets the main voltage transformer input primary voltage.
Main VT Sec'y 0A 2 110 80 V to 140 V step 1 V
Sets the main voltage transformer input secondary voltage.
CB1 CS VT Prim'y 0A 3 110 100 V to 1 MV step 1 V
Sets the CB1 System Check Synchronism voltage transformer input primary voltage.
CB1 CS VT Sec'y 0A 4 110 80 V to 140 V step 1 V
Sets the CB1 System Check Synchronism voltage transformer input secondary voltage.
CB2 CS VT Prim'y 0A 5 110 100 V to 1 MV step 1 V
Sets the CB2 System Check Synchronism voltage transformer input primary voltage.
CB2 CS VT Sec'y 0A 6 110 80 V to 140 V step 1 V
Sets the CB2 System Check Synchronism voltage transformer input secondary voltage.
Phase CT1 Primary 0A 7 1 1A to 30kA step 1A
Sets the phase current transformer input primary current rating. Note: Phase CT1 Primary must be the largest of the two Primary CT's. This setting will
also limit the maximum range of Phase CT2 Primary.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-35

Description
Phase CT1 Sec'y 0A 8 1 1A or 5A
Sets the phase current transformer input secondary current rating.
Phase CT2 Primary 0A 9 1 1A to Phase CT1 Primary (max 30kA) step 1A
Sets the second phase current transformer input primary current rating. Note: Phase CT2 Primary maximum setting is limited to the set value of Phase
CT1 Primary. Also, if both Phase CT1 Primary and Phase CT2 Primary are changed from default, then Phase CT1 Primary is changed so that it is now
smaller than Phase CT2 Primary, Phase CT2 Primary reverts back to default setting of 1A.
Phase CT2 Sec'y 0A 0A 1 1A or 5A
Sets the second phase current transformer input secondary current rating.
SEF CT Primary 0A 0B 1 1A to 30kA step 1A
Sets the sensitive earth fault current transformer input primary current rating.
SEF CT Secondary 0A 0C 1 1A or 5A
Sets the sensitive earth fault current transformer input secondary current rating.
MComp CT Primary 0A 0D 1 1A to 30kA step 1A
Sets the mutual compensation current transformer input primary current rating.
MComp CT Sec'y 0A 0E 1 1A or 5A
Sets the mutual compensation current transformer input secondary current rating.
0 = AN,
1 = BN,
2 = CN,
CS Input 0A 0F AN
3 = AB,
4 = BC,
5 = CA
Selects the System Check Synchronism Input voltage measurement.
CT2 Polarity 0A 12 Standard 0 = Standard or 1 = Inverted
To invert polarity (180 °) of the CT2
SEF CT Polarity 0A 13 Standard 0 = Standard or 1 = Inverted
To invert polarity (180 °) of the SEF CT
M CT Polarity 0A 14 Standard 0 = Standard or 1 = Inverted
To invert polarity (180 °) of the Mutual CT
VT2 Allocation 0A 19 0 0= Check sync or 1= Broken Delta
To indicate if the original Check sync2 voltage transformer is allocted to Broken Delta voltage input.If set to 'Check Sync',the CB2 system check will be
available as before;if set to'Broken Delat',the CB2 system check will be unavailable,but our relay can get the measured zero sequence voltage from the
broke delta connection.it is only visible on these P540D relay model with dual CT input.
VN VT Primary 0A 1A 110 100 V to 1 MV step 1 V
Sets the Broken Delta voltage transformer input primary voltage.
VN VT Secondary 0A 1B 110 80 V to 140 V step 1 V
Sets the Broken Delta voltage transformer input secondary voltage.
CB1 CS VT PhShft 0A 21 0 -180 to 180 step 5
Phase angle difference between selected phase ("C/S Input" 0A 0F) of Line VT input and applied "CB1 CS" VT input voltage under healthy system
conditions
CB1 CS VT Mag 0A 22 1 0.2 to 3 step 0.01
Ratio of voltage magnitudes of selected phase ("C/S Input" 0A 0F) of Line VT input and applied "CB1 CS" VT input voltage under healthy system conditions
CB2 CS VT PhShft 0A 23 0 -180 to 180 step 5
Phase angle difference between selected phase ("C/S Input" 0A 0F) of Line VT input and applied "CB2 CS" VT input voltage under healthy system
conditions
6-36 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
CB2 CS VT Mag 0A 24 1 0.2 to 3 step 0.01
Ratio of voltage magnitudes of selected phase ("C/S Input" 0A 0F) of Line VT input and applied "CB2 CS" VT input voltage under healthy system conditions
Table 13: CT AND VT RATIOS column
3.11 Record Control

The RECORD CONTROL column contains settings that enable or disable the recording of events and
faults. You can also allow or disallow individual Digital Data Bus signals (DDB lines) from being
included as a recorded event.
Description
RECORD CONTROL 0B 0 0
This column contains settings for Record Controls
Alarm Event 0B 4 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Disabling this setting means that no event is generated for alarms
Relay O/P Event 0B 5 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Disabling this setting means that no event will be generated for any change in logic output state.
Opto Input Event 0B 6 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Disabling this setting means that no event will be generated for any change in logic input state.
General Event 0B 7 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Disabling this setting means that no General Events are generated
Fault Rec Event 0B 8 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Disabling this setting means that no event will be generated for any fault that produces a fault record
Maint Rec Event 0B 9 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Disabling this setting means that no event will be generated for any occurrence that produces a maintenance record.
Protection Event 0B 0A Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Disabling this setting means that any operation of protection elements will not be logged as an event
32-bit binary setting: 1 = event recording Enabled, 0 =
DDB 31 - 0 0B 40 0xFFFFFFFF
event recording Disabled
Chooses whether any individual DDB's should be deselected as a stored event, by setting the relevant bit to 0 (zero). Typically used for repetitive recurrent
changes such as an Opto input assigned for Minute Pulse clock synchronizing.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-37

Description
DDB 351 - 320 0B 4A 0xFFFFFFFF
DDB 383 - 352 0B 4B 0xFFFFFFFF
DDB 415 - 384 0B 4C 0xFFFFFFFF
DDB 447 - 416 0B 4D 0xFFFFFFFF
DDB 479 - 448 0B 4E 0xFFFFFFFF
DDB 511 - 480 0B 4F 0xFFFFFFFF
DDB 543 - 512 0B 50 0xFFFFC7FF
6-38 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
DDB 607 - 576 0B 52 0xFFFFFBBF
DDB 639 - 608 0B 53 0xFFEF7BDE
DDB 671 - 640 0B 54 0xF7777FFF
DDB 703 - 672 0B 55 0xFF7777FF
DDB 767 - 736 0B 57 0xDC00001D
DDB 799 - 768 0B 58 0xEEEFFFDD
DDB 831 - 800 0B 59 0xFFFFFFFE
DDB 863 - 832 0B 5A 0xFFDFFFFF
DDB 895 - 864 0B 5B 0xF7FFFFFF
DDB 927 - 896 0B 5C 0xFF8787FF
P446/EN/TM/E 6-39

Description
DDB 1183 - 1152 0B 64 0x00FFFFFF
6-40 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
DDB 1439 - 1408 0B 6C 0xD3FFFFFF
DDB 1471 - 1440 0B 6D 0xFFFFF9F3
DDB 1567 - 1536 0B 70 0x990CF27F
DDB 1599 - 1568 0B 71 0xFFFFFFFA
DDB 1631 - 1600 0B 72 0xFFFFFFF1
P446/EN/TM/E 6-41

Description
DDB 1759 - 1728 0B 76 0x00000000
DDB 1760 - 1791 0B 77 0x00000000
DDB 1920 - 1951 0B 7C 0xFFFFFFFF
Table 14: RECORD CONTROL column
3.12 Disturbance Recorder Settings (Oscillography)

The DISTURB RECORDER column is used to set the parameters for the Disturbance Recorder,
including the record duration and trigger position, selection of analogue and digital signals to record,
and the signal sources that trigger the recording.
6-42 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
DISTURB RECORDER 0C 0 0
This column contains settings for the Disturbance Recorder
Duration 0C 1 1.5 0.1s to 10.5s step 0.01s
This sets the overall recording time.
Trigger Position 0C 2 33.3 0 to 100 step 0.1
This sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5 s with the
trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5 s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times.
Trigger Mode 0C 3 Single 0 = Single or 1 = Extended
If set to single mode, if a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore the trigger. However, if this has been set to
Extended, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the recording time.
0=IA, 1=IB, 2=IC, 3=IN, 4=IN Sensitive, 5=VA, 6=VB,
Analog Channel 1 0C 4 VA 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
13=IN2, 14=V Checksync2, 15=Max Ih(2), 16=Unused
Selects any available analogue input to be assigned to this channel (including derived IN residual current).
Analog Channel 2 0C 5 VB 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 3 0C 6 VC 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 4 0C 7 IA 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 5 0C 8 IB 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 6 0C 9 IC 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 7 0C 0A IN 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 8 0C 0B IN Sensitive 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Digital Input 1 0C 0C Relay 1 See Data Types in the Menu Database - G32
The digital channels may monitor any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal IED digital signals, such as
protection starts, LEDs etc.
Input 1 Trigger 0C 0D No Trigger 0 = No Trigger, 1 = Trigger L/H, 2 = Trigger H/L
Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-43

Description
Digital Input 2 0C 0E Relay 2 See Data Types - G32
Input 2 Trigger 0C 0F No Trigger 0 = No Trigger, 1 = Trigger L/H, 2 = Trigger H/L
Digital Input 3 0C 10 Relay 3 See Data Types - G32
Input 3 Trigger 0C 11 Trigger L/H 0 = No Trigger, 1 = Trigger L/H, 2 = Trigger H/L
Input 4 Trigger 0C 13 No Trigger 0 = No Trigger, 1 = Trigger L/H, 2 = Trigger H/L
Digital Input 8 0C 1A Relay 8 See Data Types - G32
Input 8 Trigger 0C 1B No Trigger 0 = No Trigger, 1 = Trigger L/H, 2 = Trigger H/L
Digital Input 9 0C 1C Relay 9 See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 10 0C 1E Relay 10 See Data Types - G32
6-44 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Digital Input 15 0C 28 Opto Input 1 See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 16 0C 2A Opto Input 2 See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 17 0C 2C Opto Input 3 See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 18 0C 2E Opto Input 4 See Data Types - G32
P446/EN/TM/E 6-45

Description
Digital Input 24 0C 3A Opto Input 10 See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 25 0C 3C Opto Input 11 See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 26 0C 3E Opto Input 12 See Data Types - G32
6-46 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Digital Input 31 0C 48 Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 32 0C 4A Not Used See Data Types - G32
Analog Channel 9 0C 50 V Checksync 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 10 0C 51 IM 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 11 0C 52 IA2 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 12 0C 53 IB2 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 13 0C 54 IC2 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 14 0C 55 IN2 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Analog Channel 15 0C 56 V check sync2 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
P446/EN/TM/E 6-47

Description
Analog Channel 16 0C 57 Max Ih(2) 7=VC, 8=V Checksync, 9=IM, 10=IA2, 11=IB2, 12=IC2,
Digital Input 44 0C 7B Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 45 0C 7C Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 46 0C 7D Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 47 0C 7E Not Used See Data Types - G32
6-48 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Digital Input 48 0C 7F Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 60 0C 8B Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 61 0C 8C Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 62 0C 8D Not Used See Data Types - G32
Digital Input 63 0C 8E Not Used See Data Types - G32
P446/EN/TM/E 6-49

Description
Digital Input 64 0C 8F Not Used See Data Types - G32
Table 15: DISTURB RECORDER column
3.13 Measurement Setup

The MEASURE'T SETUP column allows you to set up the way quantities are measured displayed. For
example, whether they are displayed as primary or secondary quantities, how monitoring periods are
defined and how distance units are selected.
Description
MEASURE'T SETUP 0D 0 0
This column contains settings for the measurement setup
0 = User Banner, 1 = 3Ph + N Current, 2 = 3Ph Voltage,
Default Display 0D 1 Description 3 = Power, 4 = Date and Time, 5 = Description, 6 =
Plant Reference, 7 = Frequency, 8 = Access Level
This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the
default level using the left and right cursor keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the default display will revert to that selected by this setting.
Local Values 0D 2 Primary 0 = Primary or 1 = Secondary
This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and the front courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
Remote Values 0D 3 Primary 0 = Primary or 1 = Secondary
This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
Measurement Ref 0D 4 VA 0 = VA, 1 = VB, 2 = VC, 3 = IA, 4 = IB, 5 = IC
Using this setting the phase reference for all angular measurements by the IED can be selected. This reference is for Measurements 1. Measurements 3
uses always IA local as a reference
Measurement Mode 0D 5 0 0 to 3 step 1
This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power quantities.
Fix Dem Period 0D 6 30 1 to 99 step 1
This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window
Roll Sub Period 0D 7 30 1 to 99 step 1
These two settings are used to set the length of the window used for the calculation of rolling demand quantities
Num Sub Periods 0D 8 1 1 to 15 step 1
This setting is used to set the resolution of the rolling sub window
Distance Unit 0D 9 Miles 0 = Kilometres or 1 = Miles
This setting is used to select the unit of distance for fault location purposes, note that the length of the line is preserved when converting from km to miles
and vice versa
Fault Location 0D 0A Distance 0 = Distance, 1 = Ohms, 2 = % of Line
The calculated fault location can be displayed using one of several options selected using this setting
Remote 2 Values 0D 0B Primary 0 = Primary or 1 = Secondary
The setting defines whether the values measured via the Second Rear Communication port are displayed in primary or secondary terms.
Table 16: MEASURE'T SETUP column
6-50 P446/EN/TM/E
3.14 Communications Settings

The settings in the COMMUNICATIONS column are used to set the serial communication parameters
for the rear serial port(s). It cannot be used to set Ethernet parameters, although some Ethernet-
related information, such as the NIC MAC and IP addresses are displayed.
Further details are given in the Communications chapter.
Description
COMMUNICATIONS 0E 0 0
This column contains general communications settings
RP1 Protocol 0E 1 0 0 = Courier, 1 = IEC870-5-103, 3 = DNP3.0
Indicates the communications protocol that will be used on the rear communications port.
RP1 Address 0E 2 255 0 to 255 step 1
Courier or IEC60870-5-103 versions only. Sets the address of Rear Port 1
DNP3.0 versions only. Sets the address of Rear Port 1
RP1 InactivTimer 0E 3 15 1 to 30 step 1
Defines the period of inactivity before IED reverts to its default state
RP1 Baud Rate 0E 4 19200 bits/s 0 = 9600 bits/s or 1 = 19200 bits/s
IEC60870-5-103 versions only. This cell controls the communication speed between IED and master station. It is important that both IED and master
station are set at the same speed setting.
0 = 1200 bits/s, 1 = 2400 bits/s, 2 = 4800 bits/s, 3 =
RP1 Baud Rate 0E 4 19200 bits/s
9600 bits/s, 4 = 19200 bits/s, 5 = 38400 bits/s
DNP3.0 versions only. This cell controls the communication speed between IED and master station. It is important that both IED and master station are set
at the same speed setting.
RP1 Parity 0E 5 None 0 = Odd, 1 = Even, 2 = None
DNP3.0 versions only. This cell controls the parity format used in the data frames. It is important that both IED and master station are set with the same
parity setting.
RP1 Meas Period 0E 6 10 1s to 60s step 1s
IEC60870-5-103 versions only. This cell controls the time interval that the IED will use between sending measurement data to the master station.
RP1 PhysicalLink 0E 7 Copper 0 = Copper or 1 = Fibre Optic
This cell defines whether an electrical EIA(RS) 485 or fiber optic connection is being used for communication between the master station and IED. This cell
is only visible if a fibre optic board is fitted.
RP1 Time Sync 0E 8 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
DNP3.0 versions only. If set to Enabled the master station can be used to synchronize the time on the IED. If set to Disabled either the internal free
running clock or IRIG-B input are used.
0 = Disabled, 1 = Monitor Blocking or 2 = Command
RP1 CS103Blocking 0E 0A Disabled
Blocking
IEC60870-5-103 versions only. There are three settings associated with this cell:
Disabled - No blocking selected.
Monitor Blocking - When the monitor blocking DDB Signal is active high, either by energizing an opto input or control input, reading of the status information
and disturbance records is not permitted. When in this mode the IED returns a “termination of general interrogation” message to the master station.
Command Blocking - When the command blocking DDB signal is active high, either by energizing an opto input or control input, all remote commands will
be ignored (i.e. CB Trip/Close, change setting group etc.). When in this mode the IED returns a “negative acknowledgement of command” message to the
master station.
RP1 Card Status 0E 0B 0 0 = K Bus OK, 1 = EIA485 OK or 2 = Fibre Optic OK
Displays the status of the card in RP1
RP1 Port Config 0E 0C K Bus 0 = K Bus or 1 = EIA485 (RS485)
Courier versions only. This cell defines whether an electrical KBus or EIA(RS)485 is being used for communication between the master station and IED.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-51

Description
0 = IEC60870 FT1.2 Frame or
RP1 Comms Mode 0E 0D IEC60870 FT1.2
1 = 10-bit no parity
Courier versions only. The choice is either IEC 60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity.
RP1 Baud Rate 0E 0E 19200 bits/s 0 = 9600 bits/s, 1 = 19200 bits/s, 2 = 38400 bits/s
Courier versions only. This cell controls the communication speed between IED and master station. It is important that both IED and master station are set
at the same speed setting.
Meas Scaling 0E 0F Normalised 0 = Normalised, 1 = Primary, 2 = Secondary
DNP 3.0 versions only. Setting to report analogue values in terms of primary, secondary or normalized (with respect to the CT/VT ratio setting) values.
Message Gap 0E 10 0 0 to 50 step 1
DNP 3.0 versions only. This setting allows the master station to have an interframe gap.
DNP Need Time 0E 11 10 1 to 30 step 1
DNP 3.0 versions only. The duration of time waited before requesting another time sync from the master.
DNP App Fragment 0E 12 2048 100 to 2048 step 1
DNP 3.0 versions only. The maximum message length (application fragment size) transmitted by the IED.
DNP App Timeout 0E 13 2 1s to 120s step 1s
DNP 3.0 versions only. Duration of time waited, after sending a message fragment and awaiting a confirmation from the master.
DNP SBO Timeout 0E 14 10 1s to 10s step 1s
DNP 3.0 versions only. Duration of time waited, after receiving a select command and awaiting an operate confirmation from the master.
DNP Link Timeout 0E 15 0 0s to 120s step 1s
DNP 3.0 versions only. Duration of time that the IED will wait for a Data Link Confirm from the master. A value of 0 means data link support disabled and 1
to 120 seconds is the timeout setting.
NIC Protocol 0E 1F IEC61850 IEC61850 or DNP3.0
IEC61850 versions only. Indicates that IEC 61850 will be used on the rear Ethernet port.
NIC Mac Address 0E 22 0
IEC61850 versions only. Indicates the MAC address of the rear Ethernet port.
NIC Tunl Timeout 0E 64 5 1 to 30 step 1
IEC61850 versions only. Duration of time waited before an inactive tunnel to MiCOM S1 Studio is reset.
NIC Link Report 0E 6A Alarm 0 = Alarm, 1 = Event, 2 = None
IEC61850 versions only.
Configures how a failed/unfitted network link (copper or fiber) is reported:
Alarm - an alarm is raised for a failed link
Event - an event is logged for a failed link
None - nothing reported for a failed link
REAR PORT2 (RP2) 0E 80 0
RP2 versions only.
RP2 Protocol 0E 81 Courier 0
RP2 versions only. Indicates the communications protocol that will be used on the rear communications port.
0 = Unsupported,
1 = Card Not Fitted,
RP2 Card Status 0E 84 0 2 = EIA232 OK,
3 = EIA485 OK,
4 = K Bus OK
RP2 versions only. Displays the status of the card in RP2
0 = EIA232 (RS232),
RP2 Port Config 0E 88 EIA232 (RS232) 1 = EIA485 (RS485),
2 = K-Bus
RP2 versions only. This cell defines whether an electrical EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485 or KBus is being used for communication.
6-52 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
RP2 Comms Mode 0E 8A IEC60870 FT1.2 0 = IEC60870 FT1.2 Frame or 1 = 10-bit no parity
RP2 versions only. The choice is either IEC 60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity.
RP2 versions only. This cell sets the unique address for the IED such that only one IED is accessed by master station software.
RP2 InactivTimer 0E 92 15 1 to 30 step 1
RP2 versions only. This cell controls how long the IED will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state,
including resetting any password access that was enabled.
RP2 Baud Rate 0E 94 19200 bits/s 0 = 9600 bits/s, 1 = 19200 bits/s, 2 = 38400 bits/s
RP2 versions only. This cell controls the communication speed between IED and master station. It is important that both IED and master station are set at
the same speed setting.
NIC Protocol 0E A0 DNP 3.0 IEC61850 or DNP3.0
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Indicates that DNP 3.0 will be used on the rear Ethernet port.
IP Address 0E A1 0.0.0.0
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Indicates the IP address of the IED
Subnet Mask 0E A2 0.0.0.0
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Indicates the Subnet address
NIC MAC Address 0E A3 Ethernet MAC Address
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Indicates the MAC address of the rear Ethernet port.
Gateway 0E A4 0.0.0.0
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Indicates the Gateway address
DNP Time Sync 0E A5 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. If set to ‘Enabled’ the DNP3.0 master station can be used to synchronize the time on the IED. If set to ‘Disabled’
either the internal free running clock, or IRIG-B input are used.
Meas Scaling 0E A6 Primary 0 = Normalised, 1 = Primary, 2 = Secondary
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Setting to report analogue values in terms of primary, secondary or normalized (with respect to the CT/VT ratio
setting) values.
NIC Tunl Timeout 0E A7 5 1 to 30 step 1
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Duration of time waited before an inactive tunnel to MiCOM S1 Studio is reset.
NIC Link Report 0E A8 Alarm 0 = Alarm, 1 = Event, 2 = None
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only.
Configures how a failed/unfitted network link (copper or fiber) is reported:
Alarm - an alarm is raised for a failed link
Event - an event is logged for a failed link
None - nothing reported for a failed link
SNTP PARAMETERS 0E AA 0
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only
SNTP Server 1 0E AB 0.0.0.0
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Indicates the SNTP Server 1 address.
SNTP Server 2 0E AC 0.0.0.0
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Indicates the SNTP Server 2 address.
SNTP Poll Rate 0E AD 64
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet versions only. Duration of SNTP poll rate in seconds.
DNP Need Time 0E B1 10 1 to 30 step 1
DNP 3.0 versions only. The duration of time waited before requesting another time sync from the master.
DNP App Fragment 0E B2 2048 100 to 2048 step 1
DNP 3.0 versions only. The maximum message length (application fragment size) transmitted by the IED.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-53

Description
DNP App Timeout 0E B3 2 1s to 120s step 1s
DNP 3.0 versions only. Duration of time waited, after sending a message fragment and awaiting a confirmation from the master.
DNP SBO Timeout 0E B4 10 1s to 10s step 1s
DNP 3.0 versions only. Duration of time waited, after receiving a select command and awaiting an operate confirmation from the master.
Table 17: COMMUNICATIONS column
3.15 Commissioning Tests

The COMMISSION TESTS column contains cells that allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs,
output relay contacts, internal digital data bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be
monitored. Additionally there are settings to test the operation of the output contacts, user-
programmable LEDs and, where available, the auto-reclose cycles.
Description
COMMISSION TESTS 0F 0 0
This column contains commissioning test settings
Opto I/P Status 0F 1 0

This menu cell displays the status of the available IED’s opto-isolated inputs as a binary string, a ‘1’ indicating an energized opto-isolated input and a ‘0’ a
de-energized one.
Relay O/P Status 0F 2 0
This menu cell displays the status of the digital data bus (DDB) signals that result in energization of the available output relays as a binary string, a ‘1’
indicating an operated state and ‘0’ a non-operated state.
When the ‘Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enabled’ the ‘Relay O/P Status’ cell does not show the current status of the output relays and hence can not be used to
confirm operation of the output relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor the state of each contact in turn.
Test Port Status 0F 3 0
This menu cell displays the status of the eight digital data bus (DDB) signals that have been allocated in the ‘Monitor Bit’ cells.
Monitor Bit 1 0F 5 1060 0 to 2047 step 1
The eight ‘Monitor Bit’ cells allow the user to select the status of which digital data bus signals can be observed in the ‘Test Port Status’ cell or via the
monitor/download port.
Monitor Bit 6 0F 0A 1070 0 to 2047 step 1
6-54 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Monitor Bit 7 0F 0B 1072 0 to 2047 step 1
Monitor Bit 8 0F 0C 1074 0 to 2047 step 1
Test Mode 0F 0D Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Test Mode, 2 = Contacts Blocked
The Test Mode menu cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the IED without operation of the trip contacts. It also enables a
facility to directly test the output contacts by applying menu controlled test signals.
To select test mode the Test Mode menu cell should be set to ‘Test Mode’, which takes the IED out of service . It also causes an alarm condition to be
recorded and the yellow ‘Out of Service’ LED to illuminate and an alarm message ‘Prot’n. Disabled’ is given. In IEC 60870-5-103 builds changes the Cause
of Transmission, COT, to Test Mode.
To enable testing of output contacts the Test Mode cell should be set to Contacts Blocked. This blocks the protection from operating the contacts and
enables the test pattern and contact test functions which can be used to manually operate the output contacts. This mode also blocks maintenance,
counters and freezes any information stored in the Circuit Breaker Condition column. Also in IEC 60870-5-103 builds changes the Cause of Transmission,
COT, to Test Mode.
Once testing is complete the cell must be set back to ‘Disabled’ to restore the IED back to servi
Test Pattern 0F 0E 0x0 0=Not Operated or 1=Operated
This cell is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested when the ‘Contact Test’ cell is set to ‘Apply Test’.
Contact Test 0F 0F No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Apply Test, 2 = Remove Test
When the ‘Apply Test’ command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation (set to ‘1’) in the ‘Test Pattern’ cell change state. After the test has been
applied the command text on the LCD will change to ‘No Operation’ and the contacts will remain in the Test State until reset issuing the ‘Remove Test’
command. The command text on the LCD will again revert to ‘No Operation’ after the ‘Remove Test’ command has been issued.
Note: When the ‘Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enabled’ the ‘Relay O/P Status’ cell does not show the current status of the output relays and hence can not be
used to confirm operation of the output relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor the state of each contact in turn.
Test LEDs 0F 10 No Operation 0 = No Operation or 1 = Apply Test
When the ‘Apply Test’ command in this cell is issued, the eighteen user-programmable LEDs will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds before they
extinguish and the command text on the LCD reverts to ‘No Operation’.
0 = No Operation, 1 = Trip 3 Pole, 2 = Trip Pole A, 3 =
Test Autoreclose 0F 11 No Operation
Trip Pole B, 4 = Trip Pole C
This is a command used to simulate a single or three pole tripping in order to test Auto-reclose cycle.
Static Test Mode 0F 12 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
When Static test is Enabled, delta phase selectors and the delta directional line are bypassed to allow the user to test the IED with older injection test sets
that are incapable of simulating real dynamic step changes in current and voltage. Resulting trip times will be slower, as extra filtering of distance
comparators is also switched-in.
Loopback Mode 0F 13 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = External, 2 = Internal
Setting that allows communication loopback testing.
IM64 TestPattern 0F 14 0 0 to 16 step 1
This cell is used to set the DDB signals included in the User Defined Inter-IED Commands IM64 when the ‘IM64 Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enable’.
IM64 Test Mode 0F 15 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
When the Enable command in this cell is issued the DDB set for operation (set to ‘1’) in the ‘Test Pattern’ cell change state.
Red LED Status 0F 1A 0
This cell is an eighteen bit binary string that indicates which of the user-programmable LEDs on the IED are illuminated with the Red LED input active when
accessing the IED from a remote location, a ‘1’ indicating a particular LED is lit and a ‘0’ not lit.
Green LED Status 0F 1B 0
This cell is an eighteen bit binary string that indicates which of the user-programmable LEDs on the IED are illuminated with the Green LED input active
when accessing the IED from a remote location, a ‘1’ indicating a particular LED is lit and a ‘0’ not lit.
DDB 31 - 0 0F 20 0
Displays the status of DDB signals
P446/EN/TM/E 6-55

Description
DDB 63 - 32 0F 21 0
DDB 95 - 64 0F 22 0
DDB 127 - 96 0F 23 0
DDB 159 - 128 0F 24 0
DDB 191 - 160 0F 25 0
DDB 223 - 192 0F 26 0
DDB 255 - 224 0F 27 0
DDB 287 - 256 0F 28 0
DDB 319 - 288 0F 29 0
DDB 351 - 320 0F 2A 0
DDB 383 - 352 0F 2B 0
DDB 415 - 384 0F 2C 0
DDB 447 - 416 0F 2D 0
DDB 479 - 448 0F 2E 0
DDB 511 - 480 0F 2F 0
DDB 543 - 512 0F 30 0
DDB 575 - 544 0F 31 0
DDB 607 - 576 0F 32 0
DDB 639 - 608 0F 33 0
DDB 671 - 640 0F 34 0
DDB 703 - 672 0F 35 0
6-56 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
DDB 735 - 704 0F 36 0
DDB 767 - 736 0F 37 0
DDB 799 - 768 0F 38 0
DDB 831 - 800 0F 39 0
DDB 863 - 832 0F 3A 0
DDB 895 - 864 0F 3B 0
DDB 927 - 896 0F 3C 0
DDB 959 - 928 0F 3D 0
DDB 991 - 960 0F 3E 0
DDB 1023 - 992 0F 3F 0
DDB 1055 - 1024 0F 40 0
DDB 1087 - 1056 0F 41 0
DDB 1119 - 1088 0F 42 0
DDB 1151 - 1120 0F 43 0
DDB 1183 - 1152 0F 44 0
DDB 1215 - 1184 0F 45 0
DDB 1247 - 1216 0F 46 0
DDB 1279 - 1248 0F 47 0
DDB 1311 - 1280 0F 48 0
DDB 1343 - 1312 0F 49 0
DDB 1375 - 1344 0F 4A 0
P446/EN/TM/E 6-57

Description
DDB 1407 - 1376 0F 4B 0
DDB 1439 - 1408 0F 4C 0
DDB 1471 - 1440 0F 4D 0
DDB 1503 - 1472 0F 4E 0
DDB 1535 - 1504 0F 4F 0
DDB 1567 - 1536 0F 50 0
DDB 1599 - 1568 0F 51 0
DDB 1631 - 1600 0F 52 0
DDB 1663 - 1632 0F 53 0
DDB 1695 - 1664 0F 54 0
DDB 1727 - 1696 0F 55 0
DDB 1759 - 1728 0F 56 0
DDB 1791 - 1760 0F 57 0
Table 18: COMMISSION TESTS column
3.16 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitor Setup

The CB MONITOR SETUP column contains settings for defining the way the CB condition monitoring
is set up. It includes the setup of the ruptured current facility and those features that can be set to
raise an alarm, or lockout the CB.
Description
CB MONITOR SETUP 10 0 0
This column contains Circuit Breaker monitoring parameters
CB1 Broken I^ 10 1 2 1 to 2 step 0.1

This sets the factor to be used for the cumulative I^ counter calculation that monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter. This
factor is set according to the type of Circuit Breaker used
CB1 I^ Maintenance 10 2 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting which determines if an alarm will be raised or not when the cumulative I^ maintenance counter threshold is exceeded.
6-58 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
CB1 I^ Maintenance 10 3 1000 1 to 25000 step 1
Setting that determines the threshold for the cumulative I^ maintenance counter monitors.
CB1 I^ Lockout 10 4 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting which determines if an alarm will be raised or not when the cumulative I^lockout counter threshold is exceeded.
CB1 I^ Lockout 10 5 2000 1 to 25000 step 1
Setting that determines the threshold for the cumulative I^ lockout counter monitor. Set that should maintenance not be carried out, the IED can be set to
lockout the auto-reclose function on reaching a second operations threshold.
No.CB1 Ops Maint 10 6 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the number of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm.
No.CB1 Ops Maint 10 7 10 1 to 10000 step 1
Sets the threshold for number of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm, indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
No.CB1 Ops Lock 10 8 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the number of circuit breaker operations lockout alarm.
No.CB1 Ops Lock 10 9 20 1 to 10000 step 1
Sets the threshold for number of circuit breaker operations lockout. The IED can be set to lockout the auto-reclose function on reaching a second
operations threshold.
CB1 Time Maint 10 0A Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm.
CB1 Time Maint 10 0B 0.1 0.005s to 0.5s step 0.001s
Setting for the circuit operating time threshold which is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
CB1 Time Lockout 10 0C Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm.
CB1 Time Lockout 10 0D 0.2 0.005s to 0.5s step 0.001s
Setting for the circuit breaker operating time threshold which is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker. The IED can be set to
CB1FltFreqLock 10 0E Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Enables the excessive fault frequency alarm.
CB1FltFreqCount 10 0F 10 1 to 9999 step 1
Sets a circuit breaker frequent operations counter that monitors the number of operations over a set time period
CB1FltFreqTime 10 10 3600 0s to 9999s step 1s
Sets the time period over which the circuit breaker operations are to be monitored. Should the set number of trip operations be accumulated within this
time period, an alarm can be raised. Excessive fault frequency/trips can be used to indicate that the circuit may need maintenance attention (e.g. Tree-
felling or insulator cleaning).
CB2 Broken I^ 2 10 21 2 1 to 2 step 0.1
This sets the factor to be used for the cumulative I^ counter calculation that monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter. This
factor is set according to the type of Circuit Breaker used
CB2 I^ Maint 10 22 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting which determines if an alarm will be raised or not when the cumulative I^ maintenance counter threshold is exceeded.
CB2 I^ Maint 10 23 1000 1 to 25000 step 1
Setting that determines the threshold for the cumulative I^ maintenance counter monitors.
CB2 I^ Lockout 10 24 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting which determines if an alarm will be raised or not when the cumulative I^lockout counter threshold is exceeded.
CB2 I^ Lockout 10 25 2000 1 to 25000 step 1
Setting that determines the threshold for the cumulative I^ lockout counter monitor. Set that should maintenance not be carried out, the IED can be set to
P446/EN/TM/E 6-59

Description
No.CB2 OPs Maint 10 26 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the number of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm.
No.CB2 OPs Maint 10 27 10 1 to 10000 step 1
Sets the threshold for number of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm, indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
No.CB2 OPs Lock 10 28 Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the number of circuit breaker operations lockout alarm.
No.CB2 OPs Lock 10 29 20 1 to 10000 step 1
Sets the threshold for number of circuit breaker operations lockout. The IED can be set to lockout the auto-reclose function on reaching a second
operations threshold.
CB2 Time Maint 10 2A Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm.
CB2 Time Maint 10 2B 0.1 0.005s to 0.5s step 0.001s
Setting for the circuit operating time threshold which is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
CB2 Time Lockout 10 2C Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Setting to activate the circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm.
CB2 Time Lockout 10 2D 0.2 0.005s to 0.5s step 0.001s
Setting for the circuit breaker operating time threshold which is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker. The IED can be set to
CB2FltFreqLock 10 2E Alarm Disabled 0 = Alarm Disabled or 1 = Alarm Enabled
Enables the excessive fault frequency alarm.
CB2FltFreqCount 10 2F 10 1 to 9999 step 1
Sets a circuit breaker frequent operations counter that monitors the number of operations over a set time period
CB2FltFreqTime 10 30 3600 0s to 9999s step 1s
Sets the time period over which the circuit breaker operations are to be monitored. Should the set number of trip operations be accumulated within this
time period, an alarm can be raised. Excessive fault frequency/trips can be used to indicate that the circuit may need maintenance attention (e.g. Tree-
felling or insulator cleaning).
Table 19: CB MONITOR SETUP column
3.17 Opto-input Configuration

The OPTO CONFIG is column lets you define the opto-input configuration settings, including setting
nominal voltage values for each opto-input, setting filters to reduce wiring noise as well as pick-up and
drop-off characteristics for the opto-inputs.
Description
OPTO CONFIG 11 0 0
This column contains opto-input configuration settings
0 = 24-27V, 1 = 30-34V, 2 = 48-54V, 3 = 110-125V, 4
Global Nominal V 11 1 24/27V
= 220-250V or 5 = Custom
Sets the nominal battery voltage for all opto inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global Nominal V settings. If Custom is selected then
each opto input can individually be set to a nominal voltage value.
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 1 11 2 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
Each opto input can individually be set to a nominal voltage value if custom is selected for the global setting. The number of inputs may be up to 32,
depending on the IED and I/O configuration.
6-60 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 9 11 0A 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 10 11 0B 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 11 11 0C 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 12 11 0D 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 13 11 0E 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
P446/EN/TM/E 6-61

Description
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 14 11 0F 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 15 11 10 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 16 11 11 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 17 11 12 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 18 11 13 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 19 11 14 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 20 11 15 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 21 11 16 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 22 11 17 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 23 11 18 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
0 = 24/27V, 1 = 30/34V, 2 = 48/54V, 3 = 110/125V or
Opto Input 24 11 19 24/27V
4 = 220/250V
Opto Filter Cntl 11 60 0xFEB7FB 32-bit binary setting: 0 = Off, 1= Energized
Selects each input with a pre-set filter of ½ cycle that renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring. The number of available bits may be 16, 24
or 32, depending on the I/O configuration.
6-62 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0 = Standard 60% to 80% or
Characteristic 11 80 Standard 60%-80%
1 = 50% to 70%
Selects the pick-up and drop-off characteristics of the opto's. Selecting the standard setting means they nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for
Voltages ≥80% of the set lower nominal voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages ≤60% of the set higher nominal voltage.
Table 20: OPTO CONFIG column
3.18 Control Inputs

The control inputs are logical switches internal to the IED, which can be used to trigger any function to
which they are connected as part of the PSL. The CONTROL INPUT column contains commands that
set or reset these control inputs.
Description
CONTROL INPUTS 12 0 0
This column contains settings for the type of control input (32 in all)
Ctrl I/P Status 12 1 0 Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
Cell that is used to set (1) and reset (0) the selected Control Input by simply scrolling and changing the status of selected bits. This command will be then
recognized and executed in the PSL. Alternatively, each of the 32 Control input can also be set and reset using the individual menu setting cells as follows:
Control Input 1 12 2 No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Setting to allow Control Inputs 1 set/ reset.
Control Input 9 12 0A No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 10 12 0B No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 11 12 0C No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 12 12 0D No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 13 12 0E No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
P446/EN/TM/E 6-63

Description
Control Input 14 12 0F No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 25 12 1A No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 26 12 1B No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 27 12 1C No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 28 12 1D No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 29 12 1E No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Control Input 30 12 1F No Operation 0 = No Operation, 1 = Set , 2 = Reset
Table 21: CONTROL INPUTS column
6-64 P446/EN/TM/E
3.19 Control Input Configuration

The CONTROL I/P CONFIG column contains a setting to allow the control inputs to be individually
assigned to Hotkeys and allows you to define the operating mode for each of the Control Inputs. There
are four possible operating modes; On/Off, Set/Reset, In/Out, and Enabled/Disabled.
Description
CTRL I/P CONFIG 13 0 0
This column contains settings for the type of control input (32 in all)
Hotkey Enabled 13 1 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF to 32 step 1
Setting to allow the control inputs to be individually assigned to the Hotkey menu by setting ‘1’ in the appropriate bit in the Hotkey Enabled cell. The hotkey
menu allows the control inputs to be set, reset or pulsed without the need to enter the CONTROL INPUTS column.
Control Input 1 13 10 Latched 0 = Latched or 1 = Pulsed
Configures the control inputs as either ‘latched’ or ‘pulsed’. A latched control input will remain in the set state until a reset command is given, either by the
menu or the serial communications. A pulsed control input, however, will remain energized for 10 ms after the set command is given and will then reset
automatically (i.e. no reset command required).
0 = On/Off, 1 = Set/Reset, 2 = In/Out, 3 =
Ctrl Command 1 13 11 Set/Reset
Enabled/Disabled
Allows the SET / RESET text, displayed in the hotkey menu, to be changed to something more suitable for the application of an individual control input,
such as ON / OFF, IN / OUT etc.
Configures the control inputs as either ‘latched’ or ‘pulsed’.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Control Input 4 13 1C Latched 0 = Latched or 1 = Pulsed
Ctrl Command 4 13 1D Set/Reset
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
P446/EN/TM/E 6-65

Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
6-66 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
P446/EN/TM/E 6-67

Description
Enabled/Disabled
0 = On/Off or 1 = Set/Reset or 2 = In/Out or 3 =
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
6-68 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Table 22: CONTROL I/P CONFIG column
3.20 Serial InterMiCOM Communications

The INTERMICOM COMMS column is used to set up the physical RS485 serial communication link
for interMiCOM communications and to display status and statistical information relating to the
communication. This column is only applicable to copper transmission media.
Description
INTERMICOM COMMS 15 0 0
This column is only visible if the model number supports InterMiCOM and second rear comms board is fitted.
IM Output Status 15 1 Data
Displays the status of each InterMiCOM output signal.
IM Input Status 15 2 Data
Displays the status of each InterMiCOM input signal, with IM1 signal starting from the right. When loop back mode is set, all bits will display zero.
Source Address 15 10 1 0 to 10 step 1
Setting for the unique IED address that is encoded in the InterMiCOM sent message.
Received Address 15 11 2 0 to 10 step 1
The aim of setting addresses is to establish pairs of IED's which will only communicate with each other. Should an inadvertent channel misrouting or
spurious loopback occur, an error will be logged, and the erroneous received data will be rejected.
As an example, in a 2 ended scheme the following address setting would be correct:
Local IED: Source Address = 1, Receive Address = 2
Remote IED: Source Address = 2, Receive Address = 1
0 = 600, 1 = 1200, 2 = 2400, 3 = 4800, 4 = 9600 or 5
Baud Rate 15 12 9600
= 19200
Setting of the signalling speed in terms of number of bits per second. The speed will match the capability of the MODEM or other characteristics of the
channel provided.
Ch Statistics 15 20 Invisible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Settings that makes visible or invisible Channel Statistics on the LCD. The statistic is reset by either IED’s powering down or using the ‘Reset Statistics’
cell.
Rx Direct Count 15 21 0
Displays the number of valid Direct Tripping messages since last counter reset.
Rx Perm Count 15 22 0
Displays the number of valid Permissive Tripping messages since last counter reset.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-69

Description
Rx Block Count 15 23 0
Displays the number of valid Blocking messages since last counter reset.
Rx NewDataCount 15 24 0
Displays the number of different messages (change events) since last counter reset.
Rx ErroredCount 15 25 0
Displays the number of invalid received messages since last counter reset.
Lost Messages 15 26 0
Displays the difference between the number of messages that were supposed to be received (based on set Baud Rate) and actual valid received
messages since last reset.
Elapsed Time 15 30 0
Displays the time in seconds since last counter reset.
Reset Statistics 15 31 No 0 = No, 1 = Yes
Command that allows all Statistics and Channel Diagnostics to be reset.
Ch Diagnostics 15 40 Invisible 0 = Invisible, 1 = Visible
Setting that makes visible or invisible Channel Diagnostics on the LCD. The diagnostic is reset by either IED’s powering down or using the ‘Reset Statistics’
cell.
Data CD Status 15 41 0 0 = OK, 1 = Fail, 2 = SCC Absent
Indicates when the DCD line (pin 1 on EIA232 Connector) is energized.
OK = DCD is energized
FAIL = DCD is de-energized
Absent = 2nd Rear port board is not fitted
FrameSync Status 15 42 0 0 = OK, 1 = Fail, 2 = SCC Absent
Indicates when the message structure and synchronization is valid.
OK = Valid message structure and synchronization
FAIL = Synchronization has been lost
Unavailable = Hardware error present
Message Status 15 43 0 0 = OK, 1 = Fail, 2 = SCC Absent
Indicates when the percentage of received valid messages has fallen below the ‘IM Msg Alarm Lvl’ setting within the alarm time period.
OK = Acceptable ratio of lost messages
FAIL = Unacceptable ratio of lost messages
Channel Status 15 44 0 0 = OK, 1 = Fail, 2 = SCC Absent
Indicates the state of the InterMiCOM communication channel.
OK = Channel healthy
FAIL = Channel failure
0 = OK, 1 = Fail, 2 = SCC Absent, 3 = SCC Read Error,
IM H/W Status 15 45 0
4 = SCC Write Error
Indicates the state of InterMiCOM hardware
OK = InterMiCOM hardware healthy
Read or Write Error = InterMiCOM failure
Absent = 2nd Rear port is not fitted or failed to initialize.
Loopback Mode 15 50 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Internal or 2 = External
Setting to allow testing of the InterMiCOM channel. When ‘Internal’ is selected, only the local InterMiCOM software functionality is tested, whereby the IED
will receive its own sent data. ‘External’ setting allows a hardware and software check, with an external link required to jumper the sent data onto the
receive channel.
During normal service condition Loopback mode must be disabled.
6-70 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Test Pattern 15 51 0xFF 8 bits
Allows specific bit statuses to be inserted directly into the InterMiCOM message, to substitute real data. This is used for testing purposes.
Loopback Status 15 52 0 0 = OK, 1 = Fail, 2 = SCC Absent
Indicates the status of the InterMiCOM loopback mode
OK = Loopback software (and hardware) is working correctly
FAIL = Loopback mode failure
Unavailable = Hardware error present.
Table 23: INTERMICOM COMMS column
3.21 Serial InterMiCOM Configuration

The INTERMICOM CONF column contains settings to configure parameters relating to the operating
mode and the way in which the IED handles the messages transferred over the serial link. This
column is only applicable to copper transmission media.
Description
INTERMICOM CONF 16 0 0
This column is only visible if the model number supports InterMiCOM and second rear comms board is fitted.
IM Msg Alarm Lvl 16 1 25 0 to 100 step 0.1

Setting that is used to alarm for poor channel quality. If during the fixed 1.6s window the ratio of invalid messages to the total number of messages that
should be received (based upon the ‘Baud Rate’ setting) exceeds the above threshold, a ‘Message Fail’ alarm will be issued.
IM1 Cmd Type 16 10 Blocking 0 = Disabled, 1 = Direct or 2 = Blocking
Setting that defines the operative mode of the InterMiCOM_1 signal.
Selecting the channel response for this bit to Blocking allows fastest signalling, whereas setting to Direct offers higher security at the expense of speed.
Selecting the channel response for this bit to Permissive offers higher dependability
IM1 FallBackMode 16 11 Default 0 = Default or 1 = Latched
Setting that defines the status of IM1 signal in case of heavy noise and message synchronization being lost.
If set to ‘Latching’ the last valid IM1 status will be maintained until the new valid message is received.
If set to ‘Default’, the IM1 status, pre-defined by the user in ‘IM1 DefaultValue’ cell will be set. A new valid message will replace ‘IM1 DefaultValue’, once
the channel recovers.
IM1 DefaultValue 16 12 1 0 to 1 step 1
Setting that defines the IM1 fallback status.
IM1 FrameSyncTim 16 13 1.5 0.01s to 1s step 0.001s
Time delay after which ’IM1 DefaultValue’ is applied, providing that no valid message is received in the meantime.
IM2 DefaultValue 16 1A 1 0 to 1 step 1
IM2 FrameSyncTim 16 1B 1.5 0.01s to 1s step 0.001s
P446/EN/TM/E 6-71

Description
IM5 Cmd Type 16 30 Direct 0 = Disabled, 1 = Direct or 2 = Blocking
Time delay after which ‘IM5 DefaultValue’ is applied.
6-72 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Table 24: INTERMICOM CONF column
3.22 Function Keys

The function keys produce logical inputs that are fed into the unit's PSL. These inputs can be used to
trigger any function to which they are connected as part of the PSL. The settings in the FUNCTION
KEYS column allow you to enable or disable each function key, to set internal labels, and to set the
operating mode to Normal or Toggled.
Description
FUNCTION KEYS 17 0 0
This column contains the function key definitions
Fn Key Status 17 1 0
Displays the status of each function key.
Fn Key 1 17 2 Unlocked 0 = Disabled, 1 = Unlocked (Enabled), 2 = Locked
Setting to activate function key. The ‘Lock’ setting allows a function key output that is set to toggle mode to be locked in its current active state.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-73

Description
Fn Key 1 Mode 17 3 Normal 0 = Normal or 1 = Toggled
Sets the function key in toggle or normal mode. In ‘Toggle’ mode, a single key press will set/latch the function key output as ‘high’ or ‘low’ in programmable
scheme logic. This feature can be used to enable/disable IED functions. In the ‘Normal’ mode the function key output will remain ‘high’ as long as key is
pressed.
Fn Key 1 Label 17 4 Function Key 1 32 to 163 step 1
Allows the text of the function key to be changed to something more suitable for the application.
Setting to activate function key. The ‘Lock’ setting allows a function key output that is set to toggle mode to be locked in its current active position.
pressed.
pressed.
Fn Key 3 Label 17 0A Function Key 1 32 to 163 step 1
Fn Key 4 17 0B Unlocked 0 = Disabled, 1 = Unlocked (Enabled), 2 = Locked
Fn Key 4 Mode 17 0C Normal 0 = Normal or 1 = Toggled
pressed.
Fn Key 4 Label 17 0D Function Key 1 32 to 163 step 1
Fn Key 5 17 0E Unlocked 0 = Disabled, 1 = Unlocked (Enabled), 2 = Locked
Fn Key 5 Mode 17 0F Normal 0 = Normal or 1 = Toggled
pressed.
pressed.
6-74 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
pressed.
pressed.
Fn Key 9 17 1A Unlocked 0 = Disabled, 1 = Unlocked (Enabled), 2 = Locked
Fn Key 9 Mode 17 1B Normal 0 = Normal or 1 = Toggled
pressed.
Fn Key 9 Label 17 1C Function Key 1 32 to 163 step 1
Fn Key 10 17 1D Unlocked 0 = Disabled, 1 = Unlocked (Enabled), 2 = Locked
Fn Key 10 Mode 17 1E Normal 0 = Normal or 1 = Toggled
pressed.
Fn Key 10 Label 17 1F Function Key 1 32 to 163 step 1
Table 25: FUNCTION KEYS column

The contents of the IED CONFIGURATOR column are mostly data cells, which display information
relating to the IEC61850 configuration. In order to edit the configuration, you need to use the IED
Configurator tool in the MiCOM S1 Studio application software. There are however two commands to
switch the configuration banks and to restore the MCL (MiCOM Configuration Language). There is
also a setting to switch GOOSE on or off.
Description
IED CONFIGURATOR 19 0 0
This column contains IED Configurator settings
P446/EN/TM/E 6-75

Description
Switch Conf.Bank 19 5 No Action 0 = No Action or 1 = Switch banks
Setting which allows the user to switch between the current configuration, held in the Active Memory Bank (and partly displayed below), to the configuration
sent to and held in the Inactive Memory Bank.
Restore MCL 19 0A No Action 0 = No Action or 1 = Restore MCL
Setting which allows the user to restore MCL or no action.
Active Conf.Name 19 10 0
IEC61850 versions only. The name of the configuration in the Active Memory Bank, usually taken from the SCL file.
Active Conf.Rev 19 11 0
IEC61850 versions only. Configuration Revision number of the configuration in the Active Memory Bank, usually taken from the SCL file.
Inact.Conf.Name 19 20 0
IEC61850 versions only. The name of the configuration in the Inactive Memory Bank, usually taken from the SCL file.
Inact.Conf.Rev 19 21 0
IEC61850 versions only. Configuration Revision number of the configuration in the Inactive Memory Bank, usually taken from the SCL file.
IP PARAMETERS 19 30 0
IP address 19 31 0
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the unique network IP address that identifies the IED.
Subnet mask 19 32 0
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the sub-network the IED is connected to.
Gateway 19 33 0
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the IP address of the gateway (proxy) that the IED is connected to, if any.
SNTP PARAMETERS 19 40 0
SNTP Server 1 19 41 0
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the IP address of the primary SNTP server.
SNTP Server 2 19 42 0
IEC61850 versions only. Displays the IP address of the secondary SNTP server.
IEC61850 SCL 19 50 0
IED Name 19 51 0
IEC61850 versions only. 8 character IED name, which is the unique name on the IEC 61850 network for the IED, usually taken from the SCL file.
IEC61850 GOOSE 19 60 0
GoEna 19 70 0x00000000 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
IEC61850 versions only. Setting to enable GOOSE publisher settings.
Test Mode 19 71 0x00000000 0 = Disabled, 1 = Pass Through, 2 = Forced
IEC61850 versions only. The Test Mode cell allows the test pattern to be sent in the GOOSE message, for example for testing or commissioning. When
‘Disabled’ is selected, the test flag is not set. When ‘Pass Through’ is selected, the test flag is set, but the data in the GOOSE message is sent as normal.
When ‘Forced’ is selected, the test flag is set, and the data sent in the GOOSE message is as per the ‘VOP Test Pattern’ setting below. Once testing is
complete the cell must be set back to ‘Disabled’ to restore the GOOSE scheme back to normal service.
6-76 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Ignore Test Flag 19 73 No 0 = No or 1 = Yes
IEC61850 versions only. The Test Mode cell allows the test pattern to be sent in the GOOSE message, for example for testing or commissioning. When
‘Disabled’ is selected, the test flag is not set. When ‘Pass Through’ is selected, the test flag is set, but the data in the GOOSE message is sent as normal.
When ‘Forced’ is selected, the test flag is set, and the data sent in the GOOSE message is as per the ‘VOP Test Pattern’ setting below. Once testing is
complete the cell must be set back to ‘Disabled’ to restore the GOOSE scheme back to normal service.
Table 26: IED CONFIGURATOR column
3.24 Fibre Teleprotection

The settings in the PROT COMMS/IM64 column are used to configure InterMiCOM64 (IM64)
Teleprotection. InterMiCOM64 is a fibre-based teleprotection scheme, described in detail in the
Operation and Application chapters of this service manual.
Description
PROT COMMS/ IM64 20 0 0
This column contains settings for Current Differential/IM64 Configuration
0 = 3 Terminal,
Scheme Setup 20 1 2 Terminal 1 = 2 Terminal,
2 = Dual Redundant
Settings to determine how many IED ends are connected in the differential zone or how many IED's are connected to the teleprotection scheme for the
protected line, with two or three ends possible.
For a plain two terminal line, there is an additional option to use dual communication channels, to implement redundancy (i.e. employ a parallel “hot-
standby” path).
0=0-0, 1=1-A, 2=2-A, 3=3-A, 4=4-A, 5=5-A, 6=6-A, 7=7-
A, 8=8-A, 9=9-A, 10=10-A, 11=11-A, 12=12-A, 13=13-A,
14=14-A, 15=15-A, 16=16-A, 17=17-A, 18=18-A, 19=19-
A, 20=20-A, 21=21-A, 22=22-A, 23=23-A, 24=24-A,
25=25-A, 26=26-A, 27=27-A, 28=28-A, 29=29-A, 30=30-
A, 31=31-A, 32=32-A, 33=1-B, 34=2-B, 35=3-B, 36=4-B,
37=5-B, 38=6-B, 39=7-B, 40=8-B, 41=9-B, 42=10-B,
43=11-B, 44=12-B, 45=13-B, 46=14-B, 47=15-B, 48=16-
Address 20 2 0-0 B, 49=17-B, 50=18-B, 51=19-B, 52=20-B, 53=21-B,
4=22-B, 55=23-B, 56=24-B, 57=25-B, 58=26-B, 59=27-
B, 60=28-B, 61=29-B, 62=30-B, 63=31-B, 64=32-B,
65=1-C, 66=2-C, 67=3-C, 68=4-C, 69=5-C, 70=6-C,
71=7-C, 72=8-C, 73=9-C, 74=10-C, 75=11-C, 76=12-C,
77=13-C, 78=14-C, 79=15-C, 80=16-C, 81=17-C,
82=18-C, 83=19-C, 84=20-C, 85=21-C, 86=22-C,
87=23-C, 88=24-C, 89=25-C, 90=26-C, 91=27-C,
92=28-C, 93=29-C, 94=30-C, 95=31-C, 96=32-C
In 3 terminal schemes, communicating groups of three IED's may be configured. See below.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-77

Description
0=0-0, 1=1-A, 2=2-A, 3=3-A, 4=4-A, 5=5-A, 6=6-A, 7=7-
A, 8=8-A, 9=9-A, 10=10-A, 11=11-A, 12=12-A, 13=13-A,
14=14-A, 15=15-A, 16=16-A, 17=17-A, 18=18-A, 19=19-
A, 20=20-A, 21=21-A, 22=22-A, 23=23-A, 24=24-A,
25=25-A, 26=26-A, 27=27-A, 28=28-A, 29=29-A, 30=30-
Address 20 3 0-0 A, 31=31-A, 32=32-A, 33=1-B, 34=2-B, 35=3-B, 36=4-B,
37=5-B, 38=6-B, 39=7-B, 40=8-B, 41=9-B, 42=10-B,
43=11-B, 44=12-B, 45=13-B, 46=14-B, 47=15-B, 48=16-
B, 49=17-B, 50=18-B, 51=19-B, 52=20-B, 53=21-B,
54=22-B, 55=23-B, 56=24-B, 57=25-B, 58=26-B, 59=27-
B, 60=28-B, 61=29-B, 62=30-B, 63=31-B, 64=32-B,
Setting for the unique IED address that is encoded in the InterMiCOM64 sent message. The aim of setting the address is to establish pairs of IED's which
will only communicate with each other. Should an inadvertent fiber/MUX misrouting or spurious loopback occur, an error will be logged, and the erroneous
received data will be rejected.
As an example, in a 2 ended scheme the following address setting would be correct:
Local IED: 1-A
Remote IED: 1-B
Address 0-0 is a universal address, whereby any IED will be free to communicate with any other (equivalent to disabling of the unique addressing). When
PROT COMMS/IM64 is set to loop back mode, the address 0-0 will replace any existing address in the IED.
Comms Mode 20 10 Standard 0 = Standard or 1 = IEEE C37.94
Setting that defines the data format that will be transmitted on the fiber outputs from the IED.
If the Multiplexer accepts direct fiber inputs according to IEEE C37.94, the ‘IEEE C37.94’ setting is selected.
For a direct fiber link between IED's, and where the MUX connection is in electrical format (G.703 or V.35 or X.21), the ‘Standard’ message format needs to
be set.
For a setting change to take effect, rebooting of the IED will be required. The Comm Mode setting applies to both channels.
Baud Rate Ch1 20 11 64kbits/s 0 = 64kbits/s or 1 = 56kbits/s
Channel 1 data rate setting for signalling between ends. The setting will depend on the MUX electrical interface, set 64kbit/s for G.703 and X.21, or
generally 56kbit/s for V.35.
For direct fiber connection between IED's, 64kbit/s will offer slightly faster data transmission.
The setting is invisible when IEEE C37.94 Comm Mode is selected.
Baud Rate Ch2 20 12 64kbits/s 0 = 64kbits/s or 1 = 56kbits/s
Channel 2 data rate setting for signalling between ends. The setting will depend on the MUX electrical interface, set 64kbit/s for G.703 and X.21, or
generally 56kbit/s for V.35.
For direct fiber connection between IED's, 64kbit/s will offer slightly faster data transmission.
The setting is invisible when IEEE C37.94 Comm Mode is selected.
Clock Source Ch1 20 13 Internal 0 = Internal or 1 = External
Setting that defines which clock source is used to synchronize data transmissions over channel 1. The setting will depend on communications
configuration and external clock source availability. If IED's are connected direct fiber over channel 1, ‘Internal’ setting should be selected. If channel 1 is
routed via a multiplexer, either setting may be required (see Application Notes).
Clock Source Ch2 20 14 Internal 0 = Internal or 1 = External
Setting that defines which clock source is used to synchronize data transmissions over channel 2. The setting will depend on communications
configuration and external clock source availability. If IED's are connected direct fiber over channel 2, ‘Internal’ setting should be selected. If channel 2 is
routed via a multiplexer, either setting may be required (see Application Notes).
0 = Auto, 1 = 1, 2 = 2, 3 = 3, 4 = 4, 5 = 5, 6 = 6, 7 = 7, 8
Ch1 N*64kbits/s 20 15 1
= 8, 9 = 9, 10 = 10, 11 = 11 or 12 = 12
Setting for channel 1 when connected to MUX. When set to ‘Auto’ IED will configure itself to match the multiplexer.
The setting is visible only when IEEE C37.94 Comm Mode is selected.
0 = Auto, 1 = 1, 2 = 2, 3 = 3, 4 = 4, 5 = 5, 6 = 6, 7 = 7, 8
Ch2 N*64kbits/s 20 16 1
= 8, 9 = 9, 10 = 10, 11 = 11 or 12 = 12
Setting for channel 2 when connected to MUX. When set to ‘Auto’ IED will configure itself to match the multiplexer.
The setting is visible only when IEEE C37.94 Comm Mode is selected.
Comm Fail Timer 20 18 10 0.1s to 600s step 0.1s
Time delay after which the ‘Channel Fail Alarm’ will be issued providing that no messages were received during the ‘Channel Timeout’ period or the ‘Alarm
Level’ is exceeded.
6-78 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0 = Ch 1 Failure
1 = Ch 2 Failure
Comm Fail Mode 20 19 Ch 1 or 2 Fail
2 = Ch 1 or 2 Fail
3 = Ch 1 and 2 Fail
Fail mode setting that triggers the ‘Channel Fail Alarm’, providing that the Dual Redundancy or 3 ended scheme is set.
Normally the alarm would be raised for any loss of an operational channel (logical OR combination). However, when IED's in a 3 ended scheme are
deliberately operated in Chain topology AND logic may be used, for indication when the scheme becomes finally inoperative, with no self-healing (signal
rerouting) mode possible.
Channel Timeout 20 1E 0.1 0.1s to 10s step 0.1s
A rolling time window beyond which any of the 8 IM signals that are set to ‘Default’ will be replaced by the corresponding ‘IM_X Default Value’ setting,
providing that no valid message is received on that channel in the meantime. The ‘Chnl Fail Alarm’ timer will be also initiated.
If only one channel is used, each out of 16 IM signals available that is set to ‘Default’ will convert to corresponding ‘IM_X Default Value’
If a Dual redundant or 3 ended scheme is selected, each out of 8 IM signals available that is set to ‘Default’ will convert to corresponding ‘IM_X Default
Value’, but only for the affected channel.
IM Msg Alarm Lvl 20 1F 25 0 to 100 step 0.1
Setting that is used to alarm for poor channel quality. If during a fixed 100 ms rolling window the number of invalid messages divided by the total number of
messages that should be received (based upon the ‘Baud Rate’ setting) increase above the threshold, a ‘Channel Fail Alarm’ timer will be initiated.
Prop Delay Stats 20 20 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the alarms of Maximum propagation delay time
MaxCh 1 PropDelay 20 21 0.015 0.001s to 0.05s step 0.001s
When the protection communications are enabled, the overall propagation delay divided by 2 is calculated and the maximum value is determined and
displayed in Measurements 4 column. This value is displayed and compared against this setting. If the setting is exceeded, an alarm MaxCh1 PropDelay
(DDB 1386) is raised.
MaxCh 2 PropDelay 20 22 0.015 0.001s to 0.05s step 0.001s
When the protection communications are enabled, the overall propagation delay divided by 2 is calculated and the maximum value is determined and
displayed in Measurements 4 column. This value is displayed and compared against this setting. If the setting is exceeded, an alarm MaxCh2 PropDelay
(DDB 1387) is raised.
IM1 Cmd Type 20 30 Permissive 0 = Direct or 1 = Permissive
Setting that defines the operative mode of the received InterMiCOM_1 signal.
When ‘Direct’ tripping is chosen, for security reasons 2 consecutive valid messages have to be received before a change in the signal status will be
acknowledged. That will impose an additional 1-2 ms delay comparing to ‘Permissive’ mode.
Set ‘Direct’ in Direct Transfer Tripping (Intertripping) applications.
Set ‘Permissive’ to accommodate any Permissive or Blocking scheme.
If set to Latching the last valid IM1 status will be maintained until the new valid message is received.
If set to Default, the IM1 status, pre-defined by the user in IM1 Default Value cell will be set. A new valid message will replace IM1 Default Value, once the
channel recovers.
channel recovers.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-79

Description
channel recovers.
IM4 Cmd Type 20 3C Permissive 0 = Direct or 1 = Permissive
IM4 FallBackMode 20 3D Default 0 = Default or 1 = Latched
channel recovers.
IM4 DefaultValue 20 3E 0 0 to 1 step 1
channel recovers.
channel recovers.
6-80 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
channel recovers.
IM8 Cmd Type 20 4C Permissive 0 = Direct or 1 = Permissive
IM8 FallBackMode 20 4D Default 0 = Default or 1 = Latched
channel recovers.
IM8 DefaultValue 20 4E 0 0 to 1 step 1
Table 27: PROT COMMS/IM64 column
3.25 Cyber Security Configuration

The SECURITY CONFIG column contains all settings related to the NERC-compliant cyber security
features. These include settings to do with password control as well as settings to allow the possibility
of disabling physical ports.
Description
SECURITY CONFIG 25 0 0 0
This is a sub heading
User Banner 25 1 ACCESS ONLY FOR AUTHORISED USERS ASCII 32 to 234
NERC compliant user IED description
Attempts Limit 25 2 3 0 to 3 step 1
Defines the maximum number of failed password attempts.
Attempts Timer 25 3 2 1 to 3 step 1
Defines the time duration used for detection of maximum failed password attempts
Blocking Timer 25 4 5 1 to 30 step 1
Defines the time duration for which the user is blocked after exceeding the maximum attempts limit
P446/EN/TM/E 6-81

Description
Front Port 25 5 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable/disable of Physical Front Port
Rear Port 1 25 6 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable/disable of Physical Rear Port 1
Rear Port 2 25 7 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable/disable of Physical Rear Port 2
Ethernet Port 25 8 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable/disable of Physical Ethernet Port
Courier Tunnel 25 9 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable/disable of Logical Tunnelled courier Port
IEC61850 25 0A Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable/disable of Logical IEC61850 Port
DNP3 OE 25 0B Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enable/disable of Logical DNP3 OverEthernet Port
Attempts Remain 25 11 0 0
Number of password attempts remaining
Blk Time Remain 25 12 0 0
Blocking time remaining
0 = Password Level 0, 1 = Password Level 1, 2 =
Fallback Level 25 20 0
Password Level 2, 3 = Password Level 3
The password level adopted by the IED after an inactivity timeout, or after the user logs out. This will be either the level of the highest level password that is
blank, or level 0 if no passwords are blank.
Security Code 25 FF 0 0
16 character security code required when requesting a recovery password.
Table 28: SECURITY CONFIG column
3.26 Control Input Labels

Each control input may have a 16 character label associated with it. The CTRL I/P LABELS column
contains settings that allow you to specify these labels.
Description
CTRL I/P LABELS 29 0 0
This column contains settings for Control Input Labels
Control Input 1 29 1 Control Input 1 32 to 163 step 1
Text label to describe each individual control input. This text is displayed when a control input is accessed by the hotkey menu. It is displayed in the
programmable scheme logic description of the control input
6-82 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Control Input 10 29 0A Control Input 10 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 11 29 0B Control Input 11 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 12 29 0C Control Input 12 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 13 29 0D Control Input 13 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 14 29 0E Control Input 14 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 15 29 0F Control Input 15 32 to 163 step 1
P446/EN/TM/E 6-83

Description
Control Input 26 29 1A Control Input 26 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 27 29 1B Control Input 27 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 28 29 1C Control Input 28 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 29 29 1D Control Input 29 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 30 29 1E Control Input 30 32 to 163 step 1
Control Input 31 29 1F Control Input 31 32 to 163 step 1
Table 29: CTRL I/P LABELS column
3.27 PSL Data

The PSL DATA column contains cells that display information relating to the PSL scheme used in
each of the settings groups. The items that can be displayed are the PSL reference, ID, and the Date
and Time that the scheme was downloaded to the device or the default was restored.
6-84 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
PSL DATA B7 0 0
Grp1 PSL Ref B7 1 0
User settable PSL reference during PSL file download
Date/Time B7 2 0
Date and Time of when PSL file was downloaded or when firmware was downloaded/default settings restored
Grp1 PSL ID B7 3 0
CRC of Group 1 PSL file
Grp2 PSL Ref B7 11 0
Date/Time 12 0
Grp2 PSL ID B7 13 0
Date/Time B7 22 0
Grp3 PSL ID B7 23 0
Date/Time B7 32 0
Grp4 PSL ID B7 33 0
Table 30: PSL DATA column
3.28 User Curves Data

The USER CURVES DATA column contains cells that display information relating to the user curves.
The items that can be displayed are the curve name and version and the date and time it was created.
The only settable items are the curve versions (1.0 for Operate and 1.1 for Reset) and a command for
restoring the default curve.
Description
USER CURVES DATA B8 0 0
This column contains settings for User Curve Data
Curve 1 Name B8 1 Default Curve 1
Name entered when curve downloaded
Date & Time B8 2 0
Date and Time of when curve was downloaded or when firmware was downloaded/default settings restored
Curve 1 ID B8 3 0
CRC of curve 1
P446/EN/TM/E 6-85

Description
UserCurve 1 Type B8 4 Operate 1.0 0 = Operate 1.0 or 1 = Reset 1.1
Defines the user curve template, either operate or reset
Date & Time 12 0
Curve 2 ID B8 13 0
CRC of curve 2
UserCurve 2 Type B8 14 Operate 1.0 0 = Operate 1.0 or 1 = Reset 1.1
Date & Time B8 22 0
Curve 3 ID B8 23 0
CRC of curve 3
UserCurve 3 Type B8 24 Reset 1.1 0 = Operate 1.0 or 1 = Reset 1.1
Date & Time B8 32 0
Curve 4 ID B8 33 0
CRC of curve 4
UserCurve 4 Type B8 34 Reset 1.1 0 = Operate 1.0 or 1 = Reset 1.1
0 = No Operation, 1 = Default Curve 1, 2 = Default
Restore Def Crv B8 F0 0
Curve 2, 3 = Default Curve 3, 4 = Default Curve 4
Table 31: USER CURVES DATA column
6-86 P446/EN/TM/E
4 PROTECTION GROUP SETTINGS

There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. This
allows you to have four different configuration schemes. Only one group of protection settings can be
selected as the active group. The active group is used by the protection elements. GROUP 1 is the
default group.
The protection settings can be enabled or disabled by a setting in the CONFIGURATION column. This
acts like a master switch, so if a setting is disabled, it is made invisible on the HMI panel and can no
longer be set. The setting cells that are enabled in the CONFIGURATION column are visible in all
GROUP settings.
Column Header Column No.
GROUP 1 LINE PARAMETERS 30
GROUP 1 DISTANCE SETUP 31
GROUP 1 DIST. ELEMENTS 32
GROUP 1 SCHEME LOGIC 34
GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT 35
GROUP 1 NEG SEQ O/C 36
GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 37
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT 38
GROUP 1 AIDED DEF 39
GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROT'N 3A
GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD 3B
GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD 3C
GROUP 1 POWER SWING BLK. 3D
GROUP 1 VOLTAGE PROTECTION 42
GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION 43
GROUP 1 DF/DT PROTECTION 44
GROUP1 CB FAIL & P.DEAD 45
GROUP 1 SUPERVISION 46
GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS 48
GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE 49
GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS 4A
GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS 4B
Table 32: Protection Group settings columns
The above columns are also applicable to Settings Groups 2, 3 and 4 but with the addresses as
follows:
• GROUP 2: Column address starts at 50

4.1 Line Parameters

The GROUP 1 LINE PARAMETERS column is used to enter the settings used by the fault locator as
the base data for input to the distance to fault algorithm, and also as the reference for all distance
zones when the Distance set up is preferred in the ‘Simple’ setting mode. It also accommodates the
system phase rotation and defines the single or three pole tripping mode.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-87

Description
GROUP 1
30 0 0
LINE PARAMETERS
This column contains settings for Line Parameters
Line Length (metres) 30 1 100000 300 to 1000000 step 10
Setting of the protected line/cable length in km. This setting is available if MEASURE’T SETUP column is selected as Visible in the CONFIGURATION
column and if Distance unit in the MEASURE’T SETUP column is selected as kilometres
Line Length (miles) 30 2 62.1 0.2 to 625 step 0.005 / 0.01
Setting of the protected line/cable length in miles. This setting is available if Distance unit in the MEASURE’T SETUP column is selected as miles. Dual
step size is provided, for cables/short lines up to 10 miles the step size is 0.005 miles, 0.01 miles otherwise
Line Impedance 30 3 10 0.05/In to 500/(In*% reach) step 0.01/In (Ohms)
Setting for protected line/cable positive sequence impedance in either primary or secondary terms, depending on the Setting Values reference chosen in
the CONFIGURATION column. The set value is used for Fault locator, and for all distance zone reaches calculation if ‘Simple’ setting mode under GROUP
x DISTANCE SETUP is selected.
Line Angle 30 4 70 20 to 90 step 1
Setting of the line angle (line positive sequence impedance angle).
Residual Comp 30 5 1 0 to 10 step 0.01
Setting of the residual compensation factor magnitude, used to extend the ground loop reach by a multiplication factor of (1+ kZN), is calculated as ratio:
│kZN│ = (Z0 – Z1)/3Z1 where,
Z1 = positive sequence impedance for the protected line or cable.
Z0 = zero sequence impedance for the protected line or cable.
This setting is a used for Distance protection (when set to simple mode) . If Distance protection is set to Advanced mode, there are individual settings per
Zone in the GROUP x DISTANCE ELEMENTS settings.
Residual Angle 30 6 0 -180 to 90 step 1
Setting of the residual compensation factor angle (in degrees) is calculated as:
ÐkZN = Ð (Z0 – Z1)/3Z1 where,
Z0 = zero sequence impedance for the protected line or cable.
This setting is a used for Distance protection (when set to simple mode) . If Distance protection is set to Advanced mode, there are individual settings per
Zone in the GROUP x DISTANCE ELEMENTS settings.
Mutual Comp 30 7 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Mutual compensation replica used in both, Distance and Fault locator ground fault loops.
KZm Mutual Set. 30 8 1 0 to 10 step 0.01
Setting of the mutual compensation factor kZm magnitude is calculated as a ratio:
|kZm| = ZM0/3Z1 where,
ZM0 = zero sequence mutual impedance for the protected line or cable.
Setting kZm is visible if ‘Mutual Comp’ is enabled. This setting is a used for fault locator and Distance protection (when set to simple mode) . If Distance
protection is set to Advanced mode, there are individual settings per Zone in the GROUP x DISTANCE ELEMENTS settings.
KZm Mutual Angle 30 9 0 -180 to 90 step 1
Setting of the mutual compensation angle (in degrees) is calculated as:
ÐkZm = Ð ZM0/3Z1
Angle setting ÐkZm is visible if ‘Mutual Comp’ is enabled. This setting is a used for fault locator and Distance protection (when set to simple mode) . If
Distance protection is set to Advanced mode, there are individual settings per Zone in the GROUP x DISTANCE ELEMENTS settings.
Mutual cut-off (k) 30 0A 0 0 to 2 step 0.1
Only in models with Distance option. Setting used to eliminate the mutual compensation replica in case when the ratio of neutral current of the parallel line
to the neutral current of the protective line (IMUTUAL/IN) exceeds the setting. This setting is visible only if ‘Mutual Comp’ is enabled.
Phase Sequence 30 0B Standard ABC 0 = Standard ABC or 1 = Reverse ACB
This setting is used to select whether the 3 phase quantities (V and I) are rotating in the standard ABC sequence, or whether the rotation is in reverse ACB
order. The appropriate selection is required to ensure that all derived sequence components and faulted phase flagging/targeting are correct.
6-88 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0 = 3 Pole,
CB1Tripping Mode 30 0C 3 Pole
1 = 1 and 3 Pole
This setting is used to select the tripping mode. The selection 1 and 3 pole allows single pole tripping for single phase to ground faults, whilst selection 3
pole converts any trip command(s) to three pole tripping.
0 = 3 Pole,
CB2Tripping Mode 30 0E 3 Pole
1 = 1 and 3 Pole
This setting is used to select the tripping mode. The selection 1 and 3 pole allows single pole tripping for single phase to ground faults, whilst selection 3
pole converts any trip command(s) to three pole tripping.
Line Charging Y 30 10 0.002 0*I2 to 0.01*I2 step 0.0001
Setting for protected lines’ total susceptance in either primary or secondary terms, depending on the Setting Values reference chosen in the
CONFIGURATION column. The set value is used to calculate the compensated overvoltage if ‘V1>1 Cmp Funct’ setting is enabled under GROUP x VOLT
PROTECTION.
Table 33: GROUP 1 LINE PARAMETERS column
4.2 Distance Setup

The GROUP 1 DISTANCE SETUP column is used to set up the parameters required for distance
protection, where applicable.
Description
GROUP 1
31 0 0
DISTANCE SETUP
This column contains settings for Distance Setup
Setting Mode 31 0C Simple 0 = Simple or 1 = Advanced
Setting to select setting mode for Distance protection, depending on type of application and user preferences.
‘Simple’ mode:
‘Simple’ setting mode is the default setting mode, suitable for the majority of applications. Instead of entering distance zone impedance reaches in ohms,
zone settings are simply entered in terms of percentage of the protected line data specified in the ‘GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS/Line Impedance’ setting.
The setting assumes that the residual compensation factor is equal for all zones. The IED auto calculates the required reaches from the percentages. The
calculated zone reaches are available for viewing but a user can not alter/change the value as long as ‘Simple’ mode setting remains active.
Advanced setting mode:
‘Advanced’ setting mode allows individual distance ohmic reaches and residual compensation factors to be entered for each zone. When ‘Advanced’ mode
is selected, all ‘percentage’ settings that are associated to ‘Simple’ setting mode in the column GROUP x DISTANCE SETUP will be hidden and the
Distance zone settings need to be entered for each zone in the ‘GROUP x DIST. ELEMENTS’ column.
PHASE DISTANCE 31 10 0
Phase Chars. 31 11 Mho 0 = Disabled, 1 = Mho, 2 = Quadrilateral
Setting to disable (turn off) phase distance protection or to set Mho or Quad operating characteristic: ANSI 21.
The chosen setting is applicable to all phase distance zones.
Quad Resistance 31 12 Proportional 0 = Common or 1 = Proportional
Setting to define the mode of resistive reach coverage. If ‘Common’ mode is selected, all phase distance zones will have the equal resistive coverage. If
‘Proportional’ mode is selected, the zones will have resistive coverage according to the % reach set for the zone, multiplied by the ‘Fault Resistance’ RPH
setting.
This setting is visible only when ‘Simple’ setting mode and quad characteristic are set.
Fault Resistance 31 13 10 0.1/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting used to specify the fault arc resistance that can be detected for faults between phases. The set value determines the right hand side of the
quadrilaterals.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-89

Description
Zone 1 Ph Status 31 20 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Zone 1 for phase faults.
This setting is invisible if ‘Phase Char.’ is disabled.
Zone 1 Ph Reach 31 21 80 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone 1 reach in ohms.
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone 3 forward or reverse reach in ohms.
Zone 3 Ph Dir. 31 42 Offset 0 = Forward, 1 = Offset, 2 = Reverse
To directionalize Zone 3, forward, offset or reverse, for phase faults.
By default, Zone 3 Mho phase characteristic is offset (partly reverse directional), thus self polarized. If set forward or reverse, Zone 3 Mho characteristic
becomes memory/cross polarized like all other zones.
Zone 3 Ph Offset 31 43 10 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone 3 reverse offset reach in ohms. Only visible when set offset.
Zone P Ph Status 31 50 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Zone P for phase faults.
Zone P Ph Dir. 31 51 Forward 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse, 2 = Offset
To directionalize Zone P, forward, reverse or offset, for phase faults.
By default, Zone P Mho phase characteristic is Forward, thus memory/cross polarized like all other zones. Likewise if set reverse. If Zone P Mho phase
characteristic is offset (partly reverse directional), self polarization is used.
Zone P Ph Reach 31 52 200 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone P forward or reverse reach in ohms.
Zone P Ph Offset 31 53 10 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone P reverse offset reach in ohms. Only visible when set offset
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets reverse Zone 4 reach in ohms.
GROUND DISTANCE 31 70 0
Ground Chars. 31 71 Mho 0 = Disabled, 1 = Mho, 2 = Quadrilateral
Setting to disable (turn off) ground distance protection or to set Mho or Quad operating characteristic: ANSI 21N.
The chosen setting is applicable to all ground distance zones.
Quad Resistance 31 72 Proportional 0 = Common or 1 = Proportional
Setting to define the mode of resistive reach coverage. If ‘Common’ mode is selected, all ground distance zones will have the equal resistive coverage. If
‘Proportional’ mode is selected, the zones will have resistive coverage according to the % reach set for the zone, multiplied by the ‘Fault Resistance’ RG
setting.
6-90 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Fault Resistance 31 73 10 0.1/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting used to specify the fault arc resistance that can be detected for faults phase - ground. The set value determines the right hand side of the
quadrilaterals.
Zone 1 Gnd Stat. 31 80 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Zone 1 for ground faults.
This setting is invisible if ‘Ground Char.’ is disabled.
Zone 1 Gnd Reach 31 81 80 10 to 1000 step 1
Zone 2 Gnd Stat. 31 90 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Zone 2 Gnd Reach 31 91 150 10 to 1000 step 1
Zone 3 Gnd Stat. 31 A0 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Zone 3 Gnd Reach 31 A1 250 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone 3 forward or reverse reach in ohms.
Zone 3 Gnd Dir. 31 A2 Offset 0 = Forward, 1 = Offset, 2 = Reverse
To directionalize Zone 3, forward, offset or reverse, for ground faults.
By default, Zone 3 Mho ground characteristic is offset (partly reverse directional), thus self polarized. If set forward or reverse, Zone 3 Mho characteristic
becomes memory/cross polarized like all other zones.
Zone3 Gnd Offset 31 A3 10 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone 3 reverse offset reach in ohms. Only visible when set offset.
Zone P Gnd Stat. 31 B0 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Zone P for ground faults.
Zone P Gnd Dir. 31 B1 Forward 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse, 2 = Offset
To directionalize Zone P, forward, reverse or offset, for ground faults.
By default, Zone P Mho ground characteristic is Forward, thus memory/cross polarized like all other zones. Likewise if set reverse. If Zone P Mho phase
characteristic is offset (partly reverse directional), self polarization is used.
Zone P Gnd Reach 31 B2 200 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone P forward or reverse reach in ohms.
ZoneP Gnd Offset 31 B3 10 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone P reverse offset reach in ohms. Only visible when set offset
Zone 4 Gnd Stat. 31 C0 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Zone 4 Gnd Reach 31 C1 150 10 to 1000 step 1
Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets reverse Zone 4 reach in ohms.
Digital Filter 31 D0 Standard 0 = Standard or 1 = Special Applics.
Setting to enable (activate) ‘Standard’ or ‘Special Application’ filters. ‘Standard’ filters are the default setting and should be applied in the majority of
applications. It is only the case when the fault currents and voltages may become very distorted by non-fundamental harmonics that extra filtering is
necessary to avoid transient over-reach. In such system conditions the ‘Special Applications’ setting should be applied.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-91

Description
CVT Filters 31 D1 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Passive, 2 = Active
Setting that accommodates the type of voltage transformer being used to prevent transient over-reach and preserve sub-cycle operating time whenever
possible.
In case of conventional wound VTs, the transients due to voltage collapse during faults are very small and no extra filtering is required, therefore the setting
should be ‘Disabled’ as per default.
For a CVT with active Ferro resonance damping, the voltage distortions may be severe and risk transient over-reach. For that reason, the ‘CVT Filters’
should be set to ‘Active’. Trip times increase proportionally (subcycle up to SIR = 2, gradually lengthening for SIR up to 30).
For a CVT with passive Ferro resonance damping, the voltage distortions are generally small up to SIR of 30. For such applications, ‘CVT Filters’ should
be set ‘Passive’. The IED calculates the SIR and will take marginally longer to trip if the infeed is weak (exceeds the IED’s SIR setting).
SIR Setting 31 D2 30 5 to 60 step 1
Setting that determines when extra filtering will be applied. If on fault inception the calculated SIR exceeds the ‘SIR Setting’ the IED will marginally slow
down, as otherwise there would be a risk of over-reach.
This setting is visible only when ‘CVT Filters’ is set to ‘Passive’.
Load Blinders 31 D3 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting used to activate (enable) or turn off (disable) load blinders.
Load blinders, when enabled, have two main purposes: to prevent tripping due to load encroachment under heavy load condition and detect very slow
moving power swings.
Z< Blinder Imp 31 D4 15 0.1/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting of radius of under-impedance circle.
Load/B Angle 31 D5 45 15 to 65 step 1
Angle setting for the two blinder lines boundary with the gradient of the rise or fall with respect to the resistive axis.
Load Blinder V< 31 D6 15 1V to 70V step 0.5V
Load blinder phase to ground under-voltage setting that overrides the blinder if the measured voltage in the affected phase falls below setting. Also
overrides blinding of phase-phase loops where the phase-phase voltage falls below √3 x (V< setting).
Dist. Polarizing 31 D7 1 0.2 to 5 step 0.1
The setting defines the composition of polarizing voltage as a mixture of ‘Self’ and ‘Memory’ polarizing voltage. ‘Self’ polarized voltage is fixed to 1pu and
could be mixed with ‘Memory’ polarizing voltage ranging from 0.2pu up to 5pu. The default setting of 1 means that half of the polarizing voltage is made up
from ‘Self’ and the other half from clean ‘Memory’ voltage. Adding more ‘Memory’ voltage will enhance the resistive coverage of Mho characteristics, whose
expansion is defined as:
Mho expansion = [(Dist. Polarizing)/ (Dist. Polarizing + 1)] x Zs
Where Zs is the source impedance.
DELTADIRECTIONAL 31 E0 0
Dir. Status 31 E1 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting used to enable or disable Delta Direction :ANSI 78DCB/78DCUB.
To enable or disable the delta direction decision used by distance elements. If disabled, the IED uses conventional (non delta) directional lines.
0 = Disabled, 1 = Phase only, 2 = Ground only, 3 =
AidedDeltaStatus 31 E2 Phase and Ground
Phase + Ground
This setting is only used for channel aided schemes, and is used to select which types of fault Delta Directional Comparison protection to apply.
When this setting is disabled, Delta V Fwd, Delta V Rev, Delta I Fwd and Delta I Rev are invisible.
This setting is invisible if the Dir. Status setting is disabled.
Dir. Char Angle 31 E3 60 0 to 90 step 1
Setting for the IED characteristic angle used for the delta directional decision.
Dir. V Fwd 31 E4 5 1V to 30V step 0.1V
Setting for the minimum delta voltage change to permit the directional forward decision.
Dir. V Rev 31 E5 4 0.5V to 30V step 0.1V
Setting for the minimum delta voltage change to permit the directional reverse decision.
Dir. I Fwd 31 E6 0.1 0.1*In to 10*In step 0.01*In
Setting for the minimum delta current change to permit the directional forward decision.
6-92 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Dir. I Rev 31 E7 0.08 0.05*In to 0*In step 0.01*In
Setting for the minimum delta current change to permit the directional reverse decision.
DIST STUB BUS 31 F0 0
Dist Stub Bus 31 F1 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable/disable the single stage Stub Bus I> function.
If Dist Stub Bus is enabled, DDB input signal Stub Bus Enabled is energised and phase current is measured above Stub Bus I> setting, the IED will issue a
Stub Bus Trip
Stub Bus I> 31 F2 2.0*In 0.1 *In to 12*In step 0.01*In
Pickup setting for Stub Bus I> element.
Stub Bus Time 31 F3 0 0 to 100 step 0.1
Time delay setting for Stub Bus I> element.
Table 34: GROUP 1 DISTANCE SETUP column
4.3 Distance Elements

In advanced mode, the GROUP 1 DIST. ELEMENTS column is used to individually set parameters
such as the reaches, line angles and compensation factors:
There are two setting modes; 'simple' and 'advanced' .In ‘Simple’ setting mode, these distance
Elements setting can be viewed, but not edited.
Description
GROUP 1
32 0 0
DIST. ELEMENTS
This column contains settings for Distance Elements
PHASE DISTANCE 32 1 0
Z1 Ph. Reach 32 2 8 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for Z1 reach.
Z1 Ph. Angle 32 3 70 20 to 90 step 1
Setting of line angle for zone 1.
R1 Ph. Resistive 32 7 8 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for Z1 resistive reach. This setting is only visible if Quad is selected.
Z1 Tilt Top Line 32 8 -3 -30 to 30 step 1
Setting of Z1 top reactance line gradient to avoid over-reach for resistive phase faults under heavy load. Minus angle tilts the reactance line downwards.
Z1 Sensit. Iph>1 32 9 0.075 0.05*In to 2*In step 0.005*In
Current sensitivity setting for Z1 that must be exceeded in faulted phases if Z1 is to operate.
Z2 Ph. Angle 32 11 70 20 to 90 step 1
Setting for Z2 resistive reach.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-93

Description
Setting of Z2 top reactance line gradient.
Zone 2 current sensitivity.
Z3 Ph. Angle 32 21 70 20 to 90 step 1
Z3' Ph Rev Reach 32 22 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for Z3 offset (reverse) reach. This setting is only visible if ‘Z3 Offset’ is enabled in ‘GROUP x DISTANCE SETUP’.
Setting for Z3 resistive reach that defines Quad’s right hand line.
R3' Ph. Res. Rev 32 26 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for Z3 resistive reach that defines Quad’s left hand line. This is settable only if Phase Chars. is Quad and Z3 offset is enabled otherwise is fixed to
25% of the right hand blinder.
ZP Ph. Reach 32 30 20 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for ZP reach.
ZP Ph. Angle 32 31 70 20 to 90 step 1
Setting of line angle for zone P.
ZP' Ph Rev Reach 32 32 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
RP' Ph. Res. Rev 32 33 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
RP Ph Resistive 32 35 20 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for ZP resistive reach.
ZP Tilt Top Line 32 36 -3 -30 to 30 step 1
Setting of ZP top reactance line gradient.
ZP Sensit. Iph>P 32 37 0.05 0.05*In to 2*In step 0.005*In
Zone P current sensitivity.
Setting for Z4 reach. This is a common setting for Z4 time delayed and Z4 high speed elements used in blocking schemes and for current reversal guard.
Z4 Ph. Angle 32 41 70 20 to 90 step 1
Setting for ZP resistive reach.
6-94 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
GROUND DISTANCE 32 50 0
Z1 Gnd. Reach 32 51 8 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Z1 Gnd. Angle 32 52 70 20 to 90 step 1
Setting of line angle (positive sequence) for zone 1.
Z1 Dynamic Tilt 32 53 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting that enables or disables zone 1 top reactance line dynamic tilting. If set enabled, the top line angle will be automatically shifted by the angle
difference between the fault current and negative sequence current, starting from the ‘Z1 Tilt top line’ angle setting – see the next cell. The zone 1 is
allowed only to tilt down. If Dynamic tilting is disabled, the top line will be shifted by the ‘Z1 Tilt top line’ setting (Predetermined tilting by fixed angle).
This setting is visible only when ground characteristic is set to ‘Quad’.
Setting of the zone 1 tilt angle. Minus angle tilts the reactance line downwards This setting is visible only when the above setting is visible.
kZN1 Res. Comp. 32 55 1 0 to 10 step 0.01
Setting of Z1 residual compensation magnitude.
kZN1 Res. Angle 32 56 0 -180 to 90 step 0.1
Setting of Z1 residual compensation angle.
kZm1 Mut. Comp. 32 57 1 0 to 10 step 0.01
Setting of Z1 mutual compensation magnitude.
kZm1 Mut. Angle 32 58 0 -180 to 90 step 0.1
Setting of Z1 mutual compensation angle.
R1 Gnd Resistive 32 59 8 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for Z1 ground resistive reach. This setting is only visible if Quad is selected.
Z1 Sensit Ignd>1 32 5B 0.075 0.05*In to 2*In step 0.005*In
Current sensitivity setting for Z1 that must be exceeded in faulted phase and the neutral if Z1 is to operate.
Setting that enables or disables zone 2 top reactance line dynamic tilting. If set enabled, the top line angle will be automatically shifted by the angle
difference between the fault current and negative sequence current, starting from the ‘Z2 Tilt top line’ angle setting – see the next cell. The zone 2, as over-
reaching zone, is allowed only to tilt up. If Dynamic tilting is disabled, the top line will be shifted by the ‘Z2 Tilt top line’ setting (Predetermined tilting by fixed
angle).
Setting of the zone 2 tilt angle. Minus angle tilts the reactance line downwards This setting is visible only when the above setting is visible.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-95

Description
Setting for Z2 ground resistive reach.
Z3' Gnd Rev Rch 32 72 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for Z3 offset (reverse) reach. This setting is only visible if ‘Z3 Offset’ is enabled in ‘GROUP x DISTANCE SETUP’.
Setting that enables or disables Z3 top reactance line dynamic tilting. If set enabled, the top line angle will be automatically shifted by the angle difference
between the fault current and negative sequence current, starting from the ‘Z3 Tilt top line’ angle setting – see the next cell. The ZP, as over-reaching zone,
is allowed only to tilt up. If Dynamic tilting is disabled, the top line will be shifted by the ‘ZP Tilt top line’ setting (Predetermined tilting by fixed angle).
This setting is visible only when ground characteristic is set to ‘Quad’ and Z3 offset disabled.
Setting of the Z3 tilt angle. Minus angle tilts the reactance line downwards This setting is visible only when the above setting is visible.
Setting for Z3 resistive reach that defines Quad’s right hand line.
R3' Gnd Res. Rev 32 7A 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for Z3 resistive reach that defines Quad’s left hand line. This is settable only if Ground Chars. is Quad and Z3 offset is enabled otherwise is fixed to
Z3 Sensit Ignd>3 32 7C 0.05 0.05*In to 2*In step 0.005*In
ZP Gnd. Reach 32 80 20 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
ZP Gnd. Angle 32 81 70 20 to 90 step 1
Setting of line angle (positive sequence) for zone P.
ZP' Gnd Rev Rch 32 82 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
ZP Dynamic Tilt 32 83 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting that enables or disables ZP top reactance line dynamic tilting. If set enabled, the top line angle will be automatically shifted by the angle difference
between the fault current and negative sequence current, starting from the ‘ZP Tilt top line’ angle setting – see the next cell. The ZP, as over-reaching
zone, is allowed only to tilt up. If Dynamic tilting is disabled, the top line will be shifted by the ‘ZP Tilt top line’ setting (Predetermined tilting by fixed angle).
ZP Tilt Top Line 32 84 -3 -30 to 30 step 1
Setting of the ZP tilt angle. Minus angle tilts the reactance line downwards This setting is visible only when the above setting is visible.
6-96 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
kZNP Res. Comp. 32 85 1 0 to 10 step 0.01
Setting of ZP residual compensation magnitude.
kZNP Res. Angle 32 86 0 -180 to 90 step 0.1
Setting of ZP residual compensation angle.
kZmP Mut. Comp. 32 87 1 0 to 10 step 0.01
Setting of ZP mutual compensation magnitude.
kZmP Mut. Angle 32 88 0 -180 to 90 step 0.1
Setting of ZP mutual compensation angle.
RP Gnd Resistive 32 89 20 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
Setting for ZP ground resistive reach.
RP' Gnd Res. Rev 32 8A 1 0.05/In Ω to 500/In Ω step 0.01/In Ω
ZP Sensit Ignd>P 32 8B 0.05 0.05*In to 2*In step 0.005*In
Setting for Z4 reach. This is a common setting for Z4 time delayed and Z4 high speed elements used in blocking schemes and for current reversal guard.
Setting that enables or disables Z4 top reactance line dynamic tilting. If set enabled, the top line angle will be automatically shifted by the angle difference
between the fault current and negative sequence current, starting from the ‘Z4 Tilt top line’ angle setting – see the next cell. The Z4, as over-reaching zone,
is allowed only to tilt up. If Dynamic tilting is disabled, the top line will be shifted by the ‘Z4 Tilt top line’ setting (Predetermined tilting by fixed angle).
Setting of the Z4 tilt angle. Minus angle tilts the reactance line downwards This setting is visible only when the above setting is visible.
Setting for Z4 ground resistive reach.
Mem Volt Dura 32 B0 16 16 to 32 step 1
This setting sets the length of the voltage memory in cycles
Table 35: GROUP 1 DIST. ELEMENTS column
4.4 Scheme Logic (Basic and Aided Scheme Logic)

The GROUP 1 SCHEME LOGIC column is used to:
P446/EN/TM/E 6-97
• Set operating mode and associated timers for each distance zone when distance operates in
the basic scheme
• Select aided schemes via one or two available signalling channels
• Define operating zones during Trip On Close (TOC)

Description
GROUP 1
34 0 0
SCHEME LOGIC
This column contains settings for Distance Scheme Logic
BASIC SCHEME 34 1 0
BasicScheme Mode 34 2 Standard 0 = Standard or 1 = Alternative
If set to Alternative, all enabled zone timers will start when fault impedance enters any enabled zone resulting in Improved operating times for evolving
faults. If set to Standard, only the zones detecting the fault would start their own timers.
Zone 1 Tripping 34 8 Phase And Ground
Phase And Ground
Setting to select for which types of fault Zone 1 elements will be applied.
Zone 1 Ph Delay 34 9 0 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Time delay for Z1 phase element.
Zone 1 Gnd Delay 34 0A 0 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Time delay for Z1 ground element.
Phase And Ground
Zone 2 Ph Delay 34 11 0.2 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Zone 2 Gnd Delay 34 12 0.2 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Phase And Ground
Zone 3 Ph Delay 34 19 0.6 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Zone 3 Gnd Delay 34 1A 0.6 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Zone P Tripping 34 20 Phase And Ground
Phase And Ground
Setting to select for which types of fault Zone P elements will be applied.
Zone P Ph Delay 34 21 0.4 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Time delay for ZP phase element.
Zone P Gnd Delay 34 22 0.4 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Time delay for ZP ground element.
Phase And Ground
Zone 4 Ph Delay 34 29 1 0s to 10s step 0.01s
6-98 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Zone 4 Gnd Delay 34 2A 1 0s to 10s step 0.01s
AIDED SCHEME 1 34 40 0
0 = Disabled,
1 = PUR,
2 = PUR Unblocking,
3 = POR,
Aided 1 Selection 34 41 Disabled 4 = POR Unblocking,
5 = Blocking 1,
6 = Blocking 2,
7 = Prog. Unblocking,
8 = Programmable
Selection of the generic scheme type for aided channel 1.
Note: POR is equivalent to POTT (permissive overreach transfer trip), PUR is
equivalent to PUTT (permissive underreach transfer trip).
Aided 1 Distance 34 42 Phase And Ground
Phase And Ground
Setting to select whether distance elements should key the scheme selected as per the previous setting. If set to Disabled, no distance zones interact with
this aided scheme, and basic scheme tripping only applies.
Aided 1 Dist dly 34 43 0 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Trip time delay for Aided 1 Distance schemes.
Aided 1 DEF 34 44 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to select whether a DEF scheme should be mapped to Aided scheme 1.
(Not applicable where a Permissive Underreaching scheme selection has been made).
Aided 1 DEF dly 34 45 0 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Time delay for Aided 1 DEF tripping.
0 = 3 Pole,
Aided 1 DEF Trip 34 46 3 Pole
1 = 1 and 3 Pole
Setting that defines the tripping mode for Aided 1 DEF.
This setting is visible only if tripping mode under GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS/Trip Mode is set to 1 and 3 pole.
Aided 1 Delta 34 47 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to select whether a Delta directional comparison scheme should be mapped to Aided scheme 1.
Aided1 Delta dly 34 48 0 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Time delay for Aided 1 Delta tripping.
0 = 3 Pole,
Aided1 DeltaTrip 34 49 3 Pole
1 = 1 and 3 Pole
Setting that defines tripping mode for Aided 1 Delta.
This setting is visible only if tripping mode under GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS/ Trip Mode is set to 1 and 3 pole.
tReversal Guard 34 4A 0.02 0s to 0.15s step 0.002s
Setting for the current reversal guard timer. Intended to keep stability on a healthy line, whilst breakers open on a faulted parallel line to clear the fault.
This setting is visible only when over-reaching or Blocking schemes are selected.
Unblocking Delay 34 4B 0.05 0s to 0.1s step 0.002s
Time delay after Loss of Guard until unblocking occurs. After the set delay, the IED will respond as though an aided signal has been received from the
remote end.
This setting is visible only when PUR Unblocking, POR Unblocking or Programmable Unblocking schemes are chosen.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-99

Description
Send on Trip 34 4C Aided / Z1 0 = Aided / Z1, 1 = Any Trip, 2 = None
Setting that defines the reinforced trip signal for POR Aided 1 scheme.
If selected to:
None: No reinforced signal is issued
Aided/Z1: The reinforced signal is issued with aided trip or with Z1 if aided distance scheme is enabled
Any Trip: Signal is reinforced with Any trip (DDB 522)
Weak Infeed 34 50 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Echo, 2 = Echo and Trip
Setting that defines Aided 1 scheme operation in case of weak infeed conditions, where no protection elements detect the fault at the local end, but an
aided channel has been received from the remote end. Setting “Echo” will allow the received signal to be returned to the remote IED, “Trip” will allow local
end tripping after a set delay.
WI Single Pole Trip 34 51 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting that defines the Weak Infeed tripping mode. When disabled, any WI trip will be converted to a 3 phase trip.
WI V< Threshold 34 52 45 10V to 70V step 5V
Setting of Weak Infeed level detector. If phase - ground voltage in any phase drops below the threshold and with insufficient phase current for the
protection to operate, the end is declared as a weak infeed terminal.
WI Trip Delay 34 53 0.06 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Setting for the weak infeed trip time delay.
0 = Z1 Gnd.,
1 = Z2 Gnd.,
2 = Z4 Gnd.,
3 = Z1 Ph.,
4 = Z2 Ph.,
Custom Send Mask 34 58 1
5 = Z4 Ph.,
6 = DEF Fwd.,
7 = DEF Rev.,
8 = Dir Comp Fwd.,
9 = Dir Comp Rev
Logic Settings that determine the element or group of elements that are sending a permissive signal to the other line end. For the signal to be sent, the
element must operate and a corresponding bit in the matrix must be set to 1 (High).
The above mapping is part of a custom made Aided 1 scheme, and unlike all other schemes that are factory tested, the customer must take the
responsibility for testing and the operation of the scheme.
This setting is visible only if a Programmable or Prog. Unblocking scheme is selected.
Custom Time PU 34 59 0 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Pick up time delay of DDB signal ‘Aid1 CustomT in’, available in the PSL logic. Once the time delay elapses, the DDB signal ‘Aid1 CustomT out’ will
become high.
Custom Time DO 34 5A 0 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Drop off time delay of DDB signal ‘Aid1 CustomT in’. Once the time delay elapses, the DDB signal ‘Aid1 CustomT out’ will become low.
Note: The timer is a combined hard coded PU/DO timer for Custom Aided scheme 1.
AIDED SCHEME 2 34 60 0
0
0 = Disabled,
1 = PUR,
2 = PUR Unblocking,
3 = POR,
Aided 2 Selection 34 61 Disabled 4 = POR Unblocking,
5 = Blocking 1,
6 = Blocking 2,
7 = Prog. Unblocking,
8 = Programmable
Selection of the generic scheme type for aided channel 2.
Note: POR is equivalent to POTT (permissive overreach transfer trip), PUR is
equivalent to PUTT (permissive underreach transfer trip).
6-100 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Aided 2 Distance 34 62 Disabled
Phase And Ground
Setting to select whether distance elements should key the scheme selected as per the previous setting. If set to Disabled, no distance zones interact with
this aided scheme, and basic scheme tripping only applies.
Aided 2 Dist dly 34 63 0.02 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Trip time delay for Aided 2 Distance schemes.
Aided 2 DEF 34 64 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to select whether a DEF scheme should be mapped to Aided scheme 2.
Aided 2 DEF dly 34 65 0.02 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Time delay for Aided 2 DEF tripping.
0 = 3 Pole,
Aided 2 DEF Trip 34 66 3 Pole
1 = 1 and 3 Pole
Setting that defines the tripping mode for Aided 2 DEF.
This setting is visible only if tripping mode under GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS/Trip Mode is set to 1 and 3 pole.
Aided 2 Delta 34 67 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to select whether a Delta directional comparison scheme should be mapped to Aided scheme 2.
Aided2 Delta dly 34 68 0.02 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Time delay for Aided 2 Delta tripping.
0 = 3 Pole,
Aided2 DeltaTrip 34 69 3 Pole
1 = 1 and 3 Pole
Setting that defines tripping mode for Aided 2 Delta.
This setting is visible only if tripping mode under GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS/ Trip Mode is set to 1 and 3 pole.
tReversal Guard 34 6A 0.02 0s to 0.15s step 0.002s
Setting for the current reversal guard timer. Intended to keep stability on a healthy line, whilst breakers open on a faulted parallel line to clear the fault.
This setting is visible only when over-reaching or Blocking schemes are selected.
Unblocking Delay 34 6B 0.05 0s to 0.1s step 0.002s
Time delay after Loss of Guard until unblocking occurs. After the set delay, the IED will respond as though an aided signal has been received from the
remote end.
This setting is visible only when PUR Unblocking, POR Unblocking or Programmable Unblocking schemes are chosen.
Send on Trip 34 6C Aided / Z1 0 = Aided / Z1, 1 = Any Trip, 2 = None
Setting that defines the reinforced trip signal for POR Aided 2 scheme.
If selected to:
None: No reinforced signal is issued
Aided/Z1: The reinforced signal is issued with aided trip or with Z1 if aided distance scheme is enabled
Any Trip: Signal is reinforced with Any trip (DDB 522)
Weak Infeed 34 70 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Echo, 2 = Echo and Trip
Setting that defines Aided 2 scheme operation in case of weak infeed conditions, where no protection elements detect the fault at the local end, but an
aided channel has been received from the remote end. Setting “Echo” will allow the received signal to be returned to the remote IED, “Trip” will allow local
end tripping after a set delay.
WI Single Pole Trip 34 71 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting that defines the Weak Infeed tripping mode. When disabled, any WI trip will be converted to a 3 phase trip.
WI V< Threshold 34 72 45 10V to 70V step 5V
Setting of Weak Infeed level detector. If phase - ground voltage in any phase drops below the threshold and with insufficient phase current for the
protection to operate, the end is declared as a weak infeed terminal.
WI Trip Delay 34 73 0.06 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Setting for the weak infeed trip time delay.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-101

Description
0 = Z1 Gnd.,
1 = Z2 Gnd.,
2 = Z4 Gnd.,
3 = Z1 Ph.,
4 = Z2 Ph.,
Custom Send Mask 34 78 1
5 = Z4 Ph.,
6 = DEF Fwd.,
7 = DEF Rev.,
8 = Dir Comp Fwd.,
9 = Dir Comp Rev
Logic Settings that determine the element or group of elements that are sending a permissive signal to the other line end. For the signal to be sent, the
element must operate and a corresponding bit in the matrix must be set to 1 (High).
The above mapping is part of a custom made Aided 2 scheme, and unlike all other schemes that are factory tested, the customer must take the
responsibility for testing and the operation of the scheme.
This setting is visible only if a Programmable or Prog. Unblocking scheme is selected.
Custom Time PU 34 79 0 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Pick up time delay of DDB signal ‘Aid2 CustomT in’, available in the PSL logic. Once the time delay elapses, the DDB signal ‘Aid2 CustomT out’ will
become high.
Custom Time DO 34 7A 0 0s to 1s step 0.002s
Drop off time delay of DDB signal ‘Aid2 CustomT in’. Once the time delay elapses, the DDB signal ‘Aid2 CustomT out’ will become low.
Note: The timer is a combined hard coded PU/DO timer for Custom Aided scheme 2.
TRIP ON CLOSE 34 80 0
0
0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled PoleDead,
SOTF Status 34 81 Enabled PoleDead
2 = Enabled ExtPulse,
3 = En Pdead + Pulse
Setting that enables note (turns on) or disables (turns off) a special protection logic which can apply upon line energization. SOTF = Switch on to Fault.
Note: SOTF can be enabled in three different manners:
1. Enabled Pole Dead. By using pole dead logic detection logic
2. Enabled ExtPulse. By using an external pulse
3. En Pdead + Pulse. By using both
SOTF Delay 34 82 110 0.2s to 1000s step 0.05s
The SOTF Delay is a pick up time delay that starts after opening all 3 poles of a CB. If the CB is then closed after the set time delay has expired, SOTF
protection will be active. SOTF provides enhanced protection for manual closure of the breaker (not for auto-reclosure).
This setting is visible only if Pole Dead or Pdead + Pulse are selected to enable SOTF.
0 = Zone 1, 1 = Zone 2, 2 = Zone 3, 3 = Zone 4, 4 =
SOTF Tripping 34 83 1
Zone 5 or 5 = CNV
Logic Settings that determine the Distance zones that are allowed to operate instantaneously upon line energization. If, for example, Bit 1 is set to 1 (High),
Z2 will operate without waiting for the usual tZ2 time delay should a fault lie within Z2 upon CB closure. It also allows a user to map ‘Currents No Volt’
option for fast fault clearance upon line energization. SOTF tripping is 3 phase and auto-reclose will be blocked.
TOR Status 34 84 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting that enables (turns on) or disables (turns off) special protection following
auto-reclosure. When set Enabled, TOR will be activated after the ‘TOC Delay’ has expired, ready for application when an auto-reclose shot occurs. TOR
= Trip on (auto)Reclose.
0 = Zone 1, 1 = Zone 2, 2 = Zone 3, 3 = Zone 4, 4 =
TOR Tripping 34 85 1
Zone 5 or 5 = CNV
Logic Settings that determine the Distance zones that are allowed to operate instantaneously upon line energization. If, for example, Bit 1 is set to 1 (High),
Z2 will operate without waiting for the usual tZ2 time delay should a fault lie within Z2 upon CB closure. It also allows a user to map ‘Currents No Volt’
option for fast fault clearance upon line reclosure on a permanent fault. TOR tripping is 3 phase and auto-reclose will be blocked.
TOC Reset Delay 34 86 0.5 0.1s to 2s step 0.1s
The TOC Reset Delay is a user settable time window during which TOC protection is available. The time window starts timing upon CB closure and it is
common for SOTF and TOR protection. Once this timer expires after a successful (re)closure, all protection reverts to normal.
6-102 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
SOTF Pulse 34 87 0.5 0.1s to 10s step 0.01s
The SOTF Pulse is a user settable time window during which the SOTF protection is available. This setting is visible only if ExtPulse or Pdead + Pulse are
selected to enable SOTF
TOC Delay 34 88 0.2 0.05s to 0.2s step 0.01s
The TOC Delay is a user settable time delay following the CB opening after which the TOR becomes active (enabled). The time must be set in conjunction
with the Dead Time setting of the Auto-reclose so that the setting must not exceed the minimum Dead Time setting since both timers start instantaneously.
Z1 EXTENSION 34 B0 0
0
0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled,
2 = En. on Ch1 Fail,
Zone 1Ext Status 34 B1 Disabled
4 = En. All Ch Fail,
5 = En. Any Ch Fail
Setting that enables (turns on) or disables (turns off) the Zone 1 Extension scheme. When Enabled, extended Zone 1 will apply unless the Reset Zone 1
Extension DDB signal is energized. Otherwise, it is possible to enable Z1X when aided scheme channel(s) fail.
Zone1 Ext Phs 34 B2 150 100 to 200 step 1
Extended Z1X phase reach as a percentage of the Z1 phase reach. (Phase resistive reach for Z1X is the same as for Zone 1.)
Zone1 Ext Gnd 34 B3 150 100 to 200 step 1
Extended Z1X ground reach as a percentage of Z1 ground reach. (Ground resistive reach and residual compensation for Z1X is the same as for Zone 1.)
LOSS OF LOAD 34 C0 0
0
0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled,
LoL Mode Status 34 C1 Disabled
4 = En. All Ch Fail,
5 = En. Any Ch Fail
Setting that enables (turns on) or disables (turns off) the Loss of Load scheme. When Enabled, accelerated tripping can apply as the remote end opens (3-
pole trip applications only). Otherwise, it is possible to enable Z1X when aided scheme channel(s) fail.
Lol I< 34 C3 0.5 0.05*In to 1*In step 0.05In
LOL undercurrent detector that indicates a loss of load condition on the unfaulted phases, indicating that the remote end has just opened.
LoL Window 34 C4 0.04 0.01s to 0.1s step 0.01s
Length of LOL window - the time window in which Zone 2 accelerated tripping can occur following LOL undercurrent detector operation.
Table 36: GROUP 1 SCHEME LOGIC column
4.5 Phase Overcurrrent Protection

The device provides four stage non-directional and directional phase segregated overcurrent
protection with independent time delay characteristics. The GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT column is
used to set the associated parameters.
Description
GROUP 1
35 0 0
OVERCURRENT
This column contains settings for Overcurrent
P446/EN/TM/E 6-103

Description
I>1 Status 35 1 Enabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines first stage overcurrent operating status. Depending on this setting, I>1 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage Transformer
Supervision (fuse fail) operation
0 = DT, 1 = IEC S Inverse, 2 = IEC V Inverse, 3 = IEC E
Inverse, 4 = UK LT Inverse, 5 = IEEE M Inverse, 6 =
I>1 Function 35 2 IEC S Inverse IEEE V Inverse, 7 = IEEE E Inverse, 8 = US Inverse, 9
= US ST Inverse, 10=Default Curve 1, 11=Default
Curve 2, 12=Default Curve 3, 13=Default Curve 4
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element.
0 = Non-Directional, 1 = Directional Fwd, 2 = Directional
I>1 Directional 35 3 Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for first stage element.
I>1 Current Set 35 4 1 0.08*In to 4*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for first stage overcurrent element.
I>1 Time Delay 35 5 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage element. The setting is visible only when DT function is selected.
I>1 TMS 35 6 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic.
I>1 Time Dial 35 7 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves. The Time Dial (TD) is a multiplier on the standard curve
equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on TD = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer's use a mid-range value of TD = 5 or 7, so it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
I>1 Reset Char 35 8 DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
I>1 tRESET 35 9 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>2 Status 35 0A Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines second stage overcurrent operating status. Depending on this setting, I>2 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage
Transformer Supervision (fuse fail) operation
I>2 Function 35 0B IEC S Inverse IEEE V Inverse, 7 = IEEE E Inverse, 8 = US Inverse, 9
= US ST Inverse, 10=Default Curve 1, 11=Default
Curve 2, 12=Default Curve 3, 13=Default Curve 4
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the second stage overcurrent element.
I>2 Directional 35 0C Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for second stage element.
I>2 Current Set 35 0D 1 0.08*In to 4*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for second stage overcurrent element.
I>2 Time Delay 35 0E 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for second stage element. The setting is visible only when DT function is selected.
I>2 TMS 35 0F 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
I>2 Time Dial 35 10 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
6-104 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
I>2 Reset Char 35 11 DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
I>2 tRESET 35 12 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic
I>3 Status 35 13 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines third stage overcurrent operating status. Depending on this setting, I>3 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage Transformer
I>3 Directional 35 14 Directional Fwd
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the third stage overcurrent element.
I>3 Current Set 35 15 10 0.08*In to 32*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for third stage overcurrent element.
I>3 Time Delay 35 16 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for third stage overcurrent element.
I>4 Status 35 18 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines fourth stage overcurrent operating status. Depending on this setting, I>4 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage Transformer
I>4 Directional 35 19 Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the fourth stage overcurrent element.
I>4 Current Set 35 1A 10 0.08*In to 32*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for fourth stage overcurrent element.
I>4 Time Delay 35 1B 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for fourth stage overcurrent element.
I> Char Angle 35 1C 30 -95 to 95 step 1
Setting for the IED characteristic angle used for the directional decision. The setting is visible only when ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ is set.
0 = VTS Blocks I>1,
1 = VTS Blocks I>2,
I> Blocking 35 1D 0xF
2 = VTS Blocks I>3,
3 = VTS Blocks I>4
Logic Settings that determine whether blocking signals from VT supervision affect certain overcurrent stages.
VTS Block – only affects directional overcurrent protection. With the relevant bit set to 1, operation of the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS), will
block the stage. When set to 0, the stage will revert to Non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
If I> Status is set ‘Enabled VTS’, no blocking should be selected in order to provide fault clearance by overcurrent protection during the VTS condition.
0 = DT, 1=Default Curve 1, 2=Default Curve 2,
I>1 Usr Rst Char 35 20 DT
3=Default Curve 3, 4=Default Curve 4
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the User defined curves.
I>2 Usr Rst Char 35 25 DT
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the User defined curves.
Table 37: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT column

The device provides four stage non-directional/ directional phase segregated negative sequence
overcurrent protection with independent time delay characteristics. The GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT
column is used to set the associated parameters.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-105

Description
GROUP 1
36 0 0
NEG SEQ O/C
This column contains settings for Negative Sequence overcurrent
I2>1 Status 36 10 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage negative sequence element.
I2>1 Function 36 11 DT
IEEE V Inverse, 7 = IEEE E Inverse, 8 = US Inverse or
9 = US ST Inverse
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
I2>1 Directional 36 12 Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for this element.
I2>1 Current Set 36 15 0.2 0.08*In to 4*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for the first stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
I2>1 Time Delay 36 17 10 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for the first stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
I2>1 TMS 36 18 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
I2>1 Time Dial 36 19 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
I2>1 Reset Char 36 1C DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
I2>1 tRESET 36 1D 0 0 to 100 step 0.01
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
Setting to enable or disable the second stage negative sequence element.
I2>2 Function 36 21 DT
IEEE V Inverse, 7 = IEEE E Inverse, 8 = US Inverse or
9 = US ST Inverse
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the second stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
Rev
Pick-up setting for the second stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
Setting for the operating time-delay for the second stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
I2>2 TMS 36 28 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
I2>2 Time Dial 36 29 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
I2>2 Reset Char 36 2C DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
6-106 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
I2>2 tRESET 36 2D 0 0 to 100 step 0.01
Setting to enable or disable the third stage negative sequence element.
Rev
I2>3 Current Set 36 35 0.2 0.08*I1 to 32*I1 step 0.01*I1
Pick-up setting for the third stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
Setting for the operating time-delay for the third stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage negative sequence element.
Rev
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
Setting for the operating time-delay for the fourth stage negative sequence overcurrent element.
0 = VTS Blocks I2>1,
I2> VTS Blocking 36 50 0x0F
3 = VTS Blocks I2>4
Logic settings that determine whether VT supervision blocks selected negative sequence overcurrent stages. Setting ‘0’ will permit continued non-
directional operation.
I2> Char Angle 36 51 -60 -95 to 95 step 1
Setting for the IED characteristic angle used for the directional decision.
IN> V2pol Set 36 52 5 0.5V to 25V step 0.5V
Setting determines the minimum negative sequence voltage threshold that must be present to determine directionality.
Table 38: GROUP 1 NEG SEQ O/C column
4.7 Broken Conductor

The GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR column is used to set the parameters required for broken
conductor protection
Description
GROUP 1
37 0 0
BROKEN CONDUCTOR
This column contains settings for Broken Conductor
Broken Conductor 37 1 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Enables or disables the broken conductor function.
I2/I1 Setting 37 2 0.2 0.2 to 1 step 0.01
Setting to determine the pick- up level of the negative to positive sequence current ratio.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-107

Description
I2/I1 Time Delay 37 3 60 0s to 100s step 0.1s
Setting for the function operating time delay.
Table 39: GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR column
4.8 Earth Fault

The device provides four stage non-directional/ directional earth fault protection with independent time
delay characteristics. The GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT column is used to set the associated parameters.
Description
GROUP 1
38 0 0
EARTH FAULT
This column contains settings for Earth Fault
IN>1 Status 38 1 Enabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines first stage overcurrent operating status. Depending of this setting, IN>1 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage Transformer
0 = DT, 1 = IEC S Inverse, 2 = IEC V Inverse, 3 = IEC
E Inverse, 4 = UK LT Inverse, 5 = IEEE M Inverse, 6 =
IEEE V Inverse, 7 = IEEE E Inverse, 8 = US Inverse,
IN>1 Function 38 25 IEC S Inverse
9 = US ST Inverse or 10 = IDG, 11=Default Curve 1,
12=Default Curve 2, 13=Default Curve 3, 14=Default
Curve 4
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage earth fault overcurrent element.
IN>1 Directional 38 26 Non-Directional
Rev
IN>1 Current Set 38 29 0.2 0.08*In to 4*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for first stage overcurrent element
IN1>1 IDG Is 38 2A 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
This setting is set as a multiple of “IN>” setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavian) and determines the actual IED current threshold at which the element
starts.
IN>1 Time Delay 38 2C 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage element. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
IN>1 TMS 38 2D 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
IN>1 Time Dial 38 2E 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
IN1>1 IDG Time 38 30 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
Setting for the IDG curve used to set the minimum operating time at high levels of fault current.
IN>1 Reset Char 38 32 DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
IN>1 tRESET 38 33 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
6-108 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
IN>2 Status 38 35 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines secondstage overcurrent operating status. Depending of this setting, IN>2 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage
0 = DT, 1 = IEC S Inverse, 2 = IEC V Inverse, 3 = IEC
E Inverse, 4 = UK LT Inverse, 5 = IEEE M Inverse, 6 =
IN>2 Function 38 36 IEC S Inverse IEEE V Inverse, 7 = IEEE E Inverse, 8 = US Inverse,
9 = US ST Inverse or 10 = IDG, 11=User Curve 1,
12=User Curve 2, 13=User Curve 3, 14=User Curve 4
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the second stage earth fault overcurrent element.
IN>2 Directional 38 37 Non-Directional
Rev
IN>2 Current Set 38 3A 0.2 0.08*In to 4*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for second stage overcurrent element
IN2>1 IDG Is 38 3B 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
This setting is set as a multiple of “IN>” setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavian) and determines the actual IED current threshold at which the element
starts.
IN>2 Time Delay 38 3D 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for second stage element. The setting is available only when DT function is selected.
IN>2 TMS 38 3E 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
IN>2 Time Dial 38 3F 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
IN2>1 IDG Time 38 41 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
IN>2 Reset Char 38 43 DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
IN>2 tRESET 38 44 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
IN>3 Status 38 46 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines third stage overcurrent operating status. Depending of this setting, IN>3 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage Transformer
IN>3 Directional 38 47 Directional Fwd
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the earth fault overcurrent element.
IN>3 Current Set 38 4A 10 0.08*In to 32*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for third stage earth fault overcurrent element.
IN>3 Time Delay 38 4B 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for third stage earth fault overcurrent element.
IN>4 Status 38 4D Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled VTS
Setting that defines fourth stage overcurrent operating status. Depending of this setting, IN>4 will be enabled permanently or in case of Voltage
IN>4 Directional 38 4E Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the earth fault overcurrent element.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-109

Description
IN>4 Current Set 38 51 10 0.08*In to 32*In step 0.01In
Pick-up setting for fourth stage earth fault overcurrent element.
IN>4 Time Delay 38 52 0 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for fourth stage earth fault overcurrent element.
Bit 0 = VTS Blocks IN>1,
IN> Blocking 38 54 0x00F
Bit 4 = Not used,
Bit 5 = Not used,
Bit 6 = Not Used,
Bit 7 = Not Used
Logic Settings that determine whether blocking signals from VT supervision affect certain earth fault overcurrent stages.
VTS Block - only affects directional earth fault overcurrent protection. With the relevant bit set to 1, operation of the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS),
will block the stage. When set to 0, the stage will revert to Non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
If IN> Status is set ‘Enabled VTS’, no blocking should be selected in order to provide earth fault clearance by earth fault overcurrent protection during VTS
condition.
IN> DIRECTIONAL 38 55 0
IN> Char Angle 38 56 -60 -95 to 95 step 1
Setting for the IED characteristic angle used for the directional decision. The setting is visible only when ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ is set.
IN> Polarisation 38 57 Zero Sequence 0 = Zero Sequence or 1 = Neg Sequence
Setting that determines whether the directional function uses zero sequence or negative sequence voltage polarizing.
IN> Voltage Pol 38 58 Derived 0 = Measured or 1 = Derived
Setting determines which will be selected as the input source of polarizing voltage for directional decision,'derived' or 'measured'.
IN> VNpol Set 38 59 1 0.5V to 80V step 0.5V
Setting for the minimum zero sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision. Setting is visible only when ‘Zero Sequence’ polarization is set.
IN> V2pol Set 38 5A 1 0.5V to 25V step 0.5V
Setting for the minimum negative sequence voltage polarizing quantity for directional decision. Setting is visible only when ‘Negative Sequence’ polarization
is set.
IN> I2pol Set 38 5B 0.08 0.08*In to 1*In step 0.01In
Setting for the minimum negative sequence current polarizing quantity for directional decision. Setting is visible only when ‘Negative Sequence’ polarization
is set.
IN>1 Usr RstChar 38 60 DT
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the user defined curves.
IN>2 Usr RstChar 38 65 DT
Table 40: GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT column
4.9 Aided DEF

The GROUP 1 AIDED DEF column is used to set the parameters for DEF (Directional Earth Fault
aided scheme thresholds).
Note: As this configuration merely assigns pick-up at the local end only, they need to be further configured
to a selected Aided channel scheme under GROUP 1 SCHEME LOGIC to provide unit protection.
6-110 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
GROUP 1
39 0 0
AIDED DEF
This column contains settings for Aided DEF
DEF> Vnpol Input 39 1 1 0= Measured or 1 = Derived
Setting determines which will be selected as input source of polarizing voltage for directional, Measured or Derived.
DEF Status 39 2 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Directional Earth Fault element that is used in an aided scheme (= ground overcurrent pilot scheme). This
setting is invisible if disabled in ‘CONFIGURATION’ column.
DEF Polarizing 39 3 Zero Sequence 0 = Zero Sequence or 1 = Neg Sequence
Setting that defines the method of DEF polarization. Either zero, or negative sequence voltage can be taken as the directional reference. When Zero
Sequence is selected, this arms the Virtual Current Polarizing.
DEF Char. Angle 39 4 -60 -95 to 95 step 1
DEF VNpol Set 39 5 1 0.5V to 40V step 0.5V
Setting that must be exceeded by generated neutral displacement voltage VN (= 3.Vo) in order for the DEF function to be operational.
As Virtual Current Polarizing will be in force when Zero sequence polarizing is used, this setting will normally have no relevance. If the IED phase selector
(delta sensitivity typically 4% In) detects the faulted phase, this will artificially generate a large VNpol, typically equal to Vn (phase-ground). Only if the
phase selector cannot phase select will this setting be relevant, as VNpol will then measure true VN.
The setting is invisible if ‘Neg. Sequence’ polarization is set.
DEF V2pol Set 39 6 1 0.5V to 25V step 0.5V
Setting that must be exceeded by generated negative sequence voltage V2 in order for the DEF function to be operational.
The setting is invisible if ‘Zero Sequence’ polarization is set.
DEF FWD Set 39 7 0.08 0.05*In to 1*In step 0.01In
Setting the forward pickup current sensitivity for residual current (= 3.Io).
DEF REV Set 39 8 0.04 0.03*In to 1*In step 0.01In
Setting the reverse pickup current sensitivity for residual current (= 3.Io).
Virtual I Pol 39 9 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Virtual Current Polarizing if it has been armed by the DEF Polarizing setting The setting is invisible if ‘Neg.
Sequence’ polarization is set.
Table 41: GROUP 1 AIDED DEF column
4.10 Sensitive Earth Fault

If a system is earthed through a high impedance, or is subject to high ground fault resistance, the
earth fault level will be severely limited. Consequently, the applied earth fault protection requires both
an appropriate characteristic and a suitably sensitive setting range in order to be effective. A separate
four-stage sensitive earth fault element with a dedicated input is provided for this purpose. The
GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROT'N column is used to set the appropriate parameters.
Description
GROUP 1
3A 0 0
SEF/REF PROT'N
This column contains settings for SEF/REF
Sens E/F Options 3A 1 SEF Enabled 0 = SEF Enabled, 1 = Wattmetric SEF, 2 = Hi Z REF
Setting to select the type of sensitive earth fault protection function and the type of high-impedance function to be used.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-111

Description
0 = Disabled, 1 = DT, 2 = IEC S Inverse, 3 = IEC V
Inverse, 4 = IEC E Inverse, 5 = UK LT Inverse, 6 = IEEE
M Inverse, 7 = IEEE V Inverse, 8 = IEEE E Inverse, 9 =
ISEF>1 Function 3A 2A DT
US Inverse, 10 = US ST Inverse or 11 = IDG,
12=Default Curve 1, 13=Default Curve 2, 14=Default
Curve 3, 15=Default Curve 4
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>1 Direction 3A 2B Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the first stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>1 Current 3A 2E 0.05 0.005*InSef to 0.1*InSef step 0.00025*InSef
Pick-up setting for the first stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>1 IDG Is 3A 2F 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
This setting is set as a multiple of ISEF> setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavian) and determines the actual IED current threshold at which the element
starts.
ISEF>1 Delay 3A 31 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the first stage definite time element.
ISEF>1 TMS 3A 32 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic.
ISEF>1 Time Dial 3A 33 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
ISEF>1 IDG Time 3A 34 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
ISEF>1 Reset Chr 3A 36 DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
ISEF>1 tRESET 3A 37 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting to determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
0 = Disabled, 1 = DT, 2 = IEC S Inverse, 3 = IEC V
Inverse, 4 = IEC E Inverse, 5 = UK LT Inverse, 6 = IEEE
M Inverse, 7 = IEEE V Inverse, 8 = IEEE E Inverse, 9 =
ISEF>2 Function 3A 3A Disabled
US Inverse, 10 = US ST Inverse, 11 = IDG, 12=Default
Curve 1, 13=Default Curve 2, 14=Default Curve 3,
15=Default Curve 4
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the second stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>2 Direction 3A 3B Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the second stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>2 Current 3A 3E 0.05 0.005*InSef to 0.1*InSef step 0.00025*InSef
Pick-up setting for the second stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>2 IDG Is 3A 3F 1.5 1 to 4 step 0.1
This setting is set as a multiple of ISEF> setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavian) and determines the actual IED current threshold at which the element
starts.
ISEF>2 Delay 3A 41 1 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the time delay for the second stage definite time element.
ISEF>2 TMS 3A 42 1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic.
ISEF>2 Time Dial 3A 43 1 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
6-112 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
ISEF>2 IDG Time 3A 44 1.2 1s to 2s step 0.01s
ISEF>2 Reset Chr 3A 46 DT 0 = DT or 1 = Inverse
ISEF>2 tRESET 3A 47 0 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting to determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
ISEF>3 Status 3A 49 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the third stage definite time sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>3 Direction 3A 4A Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the third stage element.
ISEF>3 Current 3A 4D 0.4 0.005*InSef to 0.8*InSef step 0.001*InSef
Pick-up setting for the third stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>3 Delay 3A 4E 0.5 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time delay for third stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>4 Status 3A 50 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage definite time sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>4 Direction 3A 51 Non-Directional
Rev
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the fourth stage element.
ISEF>4 Current 3A 54 0.6 0.005*InSef to 0.8*InSef step 0.001*InSef
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage sensitive earth fault element.
ISEF>4 Delay 3A 55 0.25 0s to 200s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time delay for fourth stage sensitive earth fault element.
Bit 0 = VTS Blks ISEF>1,
ISEF> Blocking 3A 57 0x00F
Bit 4 = A/R Blks ISEF>3,
Bit 5 = A/R Blks ISEF>4,
Bit 6 = Not Used,
Bit 7 = Not Used
Logic Settings that determine whether blocking signals from VT supervision affect certain earth fault overcurrent stages.
VTS Block - only affects sensitive earth fault protection. With the relevant bit set to 1, operation of the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS), will block the
stage. When set to 0, the stage will revert to Non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
ISEF DIRECTIONAL 3A 58 0
0
ISEF> Char Angle 3A 59 90 -95 to 95 step 1
ISEF> Vpol Input 3A 5A Derived 0 = Measured or 1 = Derived
Setting determines which will be selected as the input source of polarizing voltage for directional decision,'derived' or 'measured'.
ISEF> VNpol Set 3A 5B 5 0.5V to 88V step 0.5V
Setting for the minimum zero sequence voltage polarizing quantity required for directional decision.
WATTMETRIC SEF 3A 5D 0
P446/EN/TM/E 6-113

Description
PN> Setting 3A 5E 9 0*InSef W to 20OnSef W step 0.05InSef W
Setting for the threshold for the wattmetric component of zero sequence power. The power calculation is as follows:
The PN> setting corresponds to:
Vres x Ires x Cos (φ – φc) = 9 x Vo x Io x Cos (φ– φc)
Where; φ = Angle between the Polarizing Voltage (-Vres) and the Residual Current
φc = IED Characteristic Angle (RCA) Setting (ISEF> Char Angle)
Vres = Residual Voltage
Ires = Residual Current
Vo = Zero Sequence Voltage
Io = Zero Sequence Current
RESTRICTED E/F 3A 60 0
0
IREF> Is 3A 65 0.2 0.05*InSef to 1*InSef step 0.01*InSef
Pick-up setting for the High Impedance restricted earth fault element.
ISEF>1 UsrRstChr 3A 70 DT
ISEF>2 UsrRstChr 3A 75 DT
Table 42: GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROT'N column

The GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD column is used to set the thermal overload protection
parameters. The thermal overload function can be selected as a single time constant or dual time
constant characteristic, dependent on the type of plant to be protected.
Description
GROUP 1
3C 0 0
THERMAL OVERLOAD
This column contains settings for Thermal Overload
Characteristic 3C 1 Single 0 = Disabled, 1 = Single, 2 = Dual
Setting for the operating characteristic of the thermal overload element.
Thermal Trip 3C 2 1 0.08*In to 4*In step 0.01In
Sets the maximum full load current allowed and the pick-up threshold of the thermal characteristic.
Thermal Alarm 3C 3 70 50 to 100 step 1
Setting for the thermal state threshold corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold at which an alarm will be generated.
Time Constant 1 3C 4 10 1 to 200 step 1
Setting for the thermal time constant for a single time constant characteristic or the first time constant for the dual time constant characteristic.
Time Constant 2 3C 5 5 1 to 200 step 1
Setting for the second thermal time constant for the dual time constant characteristic.
Table 43: GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD column
6-114 P446/EN/TM/E
4.12 Power Swing Blocking

The GROUP 1 POWER SWING Blk column is used to configure the power swing detection and the
Out of Step tripping protection.
Description
GROUP 1
3D 0 0
POWER SWING BLK.
This column contains settings for Power Swing Blocking/Out of Step Tripping
Power Swing 3D 1 Blocking 0 = Blocking or 1 = Indication
To enable (activate) Indication or Blocking mode. This setting is invisible if disabled in ‘CONFIGURATION’ column.
If Indication status is selected, the alarm will be issued but tripping by distance protection will be unaffected. When Blocking status is selected, the user is
presented with further options as to which zones do/do not require blocking.
Zone 1 Ph PSB 3D 3 Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Setting that defines the Z1 phase element operation should any swing impedance enter and remains inside the Z1 phase characteristic for more then ‘tZ1
Ph. Delay’.
If Blocking is selected, the Z1 phase element operation will be disabled for the duration of the swing.
If Unblocking is chosen, the Z1 phase element block will be removed after drop off timer ‘PSB Unblocking Dly’ has expired, even if the swing is still present.
This allows system separation when swings fail to stabilize.
In ‘Allow trip’ mode, the Z1 phase element is unaffected by PSB detection.
Ph. Delay’.
Ph. Delay’.
Zone P Ph PSB 3D 9 Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Setting that defines the ZP phase element operation should any swing impedance enter and remains inside the ZP phase characteristic for more then ‘tZP
Ph. Delay’.
If Blocking is selected, the ZP phase element operation will be disabled for the duration of the swing.
If Unblocking is chosen, the ZP phase element block will be removed after drop off timer ‘PSB Unblocking Dly’ has expired, even if the swing is still present.
In ‘Allow trip’ mode, the ZP phase element is unaffected by PSB detection.
Zone 4 Ph PSB 3D 0B Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Ph. Delay’.
Zone 1 Gnd PSB 3D 0D Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Setting that defines the Z1 ground element operation should any swing impedance enter and remains inside the Z1 ground characteristic for more then ‘tZ1
Gnd. Delay’.
If Blocking is selected, the Z1 ground element operation will be disabled for the duration of the swing.
If Unblocking is chosen, the Z1 ground element block will be removed after drop off timer ‘PSB Unblocking Dly’ has expired, even if the swing is still
present. This allows system separation when swings fail to stabilize.
In ‘Allow trip’ mode, the Z1 ground element is unaffected by PSB detection.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-115

Description
Zone 2 Gnd PSB 3D 0F Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Gnd. Delay’.
Zone 3 Gnd PSB 3D 11 Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Gnd. Delay’.
Zone P Gnd PSB 3D 13 Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Setting that defines the ZP ground element operation should any swing impedance enter and remains inside the ZP ground characteristic for more then
‘tZP Gnd. Delay’.
If Blocking is selected, the ZP ground element operation will be disabled for the duration of the swing.
If Unblocking is chosen, the ZP ground element block will be removed after drop off timer ‘PSB Unblocking Dly’ has expired, even if the swing is still
In ‘Allow trip’ mode, the ZP ground element is unaffected by PSB detection.
Zone 4 Gnd PSB 3D 15 Blocking 0 = Allow Trip, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Delayed Unblock
Gnd. Delay’.
WI Trip PSB 3D 16 Inhibit Trip 0 = Inhibit Trip, 1 = Allow Trip
Setting that defines the WI Trip operation should any WI condition be detected for more then ‘WI Trip Delay’.
If Blocking is selected, the WI Trip operation will be disabled for the duration of the swing.
If Unblocking is chosen, the WI Trip element block will be removed after drop off timer ‘PSB Unblocking Dly’ has expired, even if the swing is still present.
In ‘Allow trip’ mode, the WI Trip element is unaffected by PSB detection.
PSB Unblocking 3D 20 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the PSB Unblocking delay timer.
This setting is common to all zones and it is visible if any distance zone is set to ‘PSB Unblocking Dly’. For swing durations longer than this setting,
blocking can be selectively removed.
PSB Unblock dly 3D 21 2 0.1s to 10s step 0.1s
Unblock timer setting - on expiry, power swing blocking can optionally be removed.
PSB Reset Delay 3D 22 0.2 0.05s to 2s step 0.05s
Setting to maintain the power swing detection for a period after the delta current detection has reset. ΔI will naturally reset momentarily twice in each swing
cycle, and a short setting ensures continued PSB pick-up, to ride through the gaps.
0 = OST Disabled, 1 = OST Predictive Trip, 2 = OST
OST Mode 3D 23 OST Disabled
Trip
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Out of Step protection. This setting (and all related settings below) is invisible if PowerSwing Block is disabled in
‘CONFIGURATION’ column.
If ‘OST Trip’ is selected, IED will operate after Tost time delay if the measured positive sequence impedance has passed the Z6-Z5 region slower than 25
ms (@ 50 or 60 Hz) and if the polarity of the resistive component has changed between entering and exiting zone 5.
If ‘Predictive OST Trip’ is selected, IED will operate after Tost time delay if the positive sequence impedance has passed the Z6-Z5 region faster than 25ms
but slower than ‘Delta t’ set time.
If ‘Predictive & OST Trip’ is selected, it will operate if any of two above criteria is satisfied.
OST Z5 3D 24 30 0.1 to 500 step 0.01
Setting for Z5 forward reactance reach.
6-116 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
OST Z6 3D 25 32 0.1 to 500 step 0.01
OST Z5' 3D 26 -30 -500 to -0.1 step 0.01
Setting for Z5 reverse reactance reach.
OST Z6' 3D 27 -32 -500 to -0.1 step 0.01
OST R5 3D 28 20 0.1 to 200 step 0.01
Setting for Z5 positive resistive reach.
OST R6 3D 29 22 0.1 to 200 step 0.01
OST R5' 3D 2A -20 -0.1 to -200 step 0.01
Setting for Z5 negative resistive reach.
OST R6' 3D 2B -22 -0.1 to -200 step 0.01
Blinder Angle 3D 2C 80 20 to 90 step 1
Setting of blinder angle, common for both Z5 and Z6.
delta T 3D 2D 0.04 0.04s to 1s step 0.001s
Time setting that is compared with the measured time between positive sequence impedance entering Z6 and entering Z5.
Tost 3D 2E 0 0s to 1s step 0.01s
Tripping time delay common for any OST setting option.
Slow Swing 3D 40 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable the slow swing detection
PSB Z7 3D 41 30 0.1 to 500 step 0.01
PSB Z8 3D 42 32 0.1 to 500 step 0.01
PSB Z7' 3D 43 -30 -500 to -0.1 step 0.01
PSB Z8' 3D 44 -32 -500 to -0.1 step 0.01
PSB R7 3D 45 20 0.1 to 200 step 0.01
PSB R8 3D 46 22 0.1 to 200 step 0.01
PSB R7' 3D 47 -20 -0.1 to -200 step 0.01
PSB R8' 3D 48 -22 -0.1 to -200 step 0.01
Alpha 3D 49 80 20 to 90 step 1
Setting of angle Alpha, common for both Z7 and Z8.
PSB Timer 3D 4A 0.05 0.03s to 1s step 0.001s
Time setting that is compared with the measured time between positive sequence impedance entering Z8 and entering Z7.
Table 44: GROUP 1 POWER SWING BLK.column
P446/EN/TM/E 6-117
4.13 Voltage Protection

The GROUP 1 VOLT PROTECTION column is used to set the parameters for overvoltage,
undervoltage, and compensated overvoltage protection. There are two stages, which can be
configured separately, allowing completely independent operation for each stage.
Description
GROUP 1
42 0 0
VOLT PROTECTION
This column contains settings for Voltage protection
UNDER VOLTAGE 42 1 0
0 = V<1 & V<2 Ph-Ph,
1 = V<1 & V<2 Ph-N,
V< Measur't Mode 42 2 V<1 & V<2 Ph-Ph
2 = V<1Ph-Ph V<2Ph-N,
3 = V<1Ph-N V<2Ph-Ph
Sets the combination of measured input voltage that will be used for the undervoltage elements.
Note: If any stage is disabled, the associated text in the setting menu cell setting will remain visible but will not affect the operation of the stage that is
enabled.
0 = V<1 & V<2 Any Ph,
1 = V<1 & V<2 3Phase,
V< Operate Mode 42 3 V<1 & V<2 Any Ph
2 = V<1AnyPh V<2 3Ph,
3 = V<1 3Ph V<2AnyPh
Setting that determines whether any phase or all three phases has to satisfy the undervoltage criteria before a decision is made.
enabled.
V<1 Function 42 4 DT 0 = Disabled, 1 = DT or 2 = IDMT
Setting for the tripping characteristic of the first stage undervoltage element.
V<1 Voltage Set 42 5 80 10V to 120V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for first stage undervoltage element.
V<1 Time Delay 42 6 10 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for the first stage definite time undervoltage element.
V<1 TMS 42 7 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IDMT characteristic.
V<1 Poledead Inh 42 8 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If the cell is enabled, the relevant stage will become inhibited by the pole dead logic. This logic produces an output when it detects either an open circuit
breaker via auxiliary contacts feeding the IED opto inputs or it detects a combination of both undercurrent and undervoltage on any one phase. It allows
the undervoltage protection to reset when the circuit breaker opens to cater for line or bus side VT applications.
V<2 Status 42 9 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage undervoltage element.
V<2 Voltage Set 42 0A 60 10V to 120V step 1V
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second stage undervoltage element.
V<2 Time Delay 42 0B 5 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for the second stage definite time undervoltage element.
V<2 Poledead Inh 42 0C Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If the cell is enabled, the relevant stage will become inhibited by the pole dead logic. This logic produces an output when it detects either an open circuit
breaker via auxiliary contacts feeding the IED opto inputs or it detects a combination of both undercurrent and undervoltage on any one phase. It allows
the undervoltage protection to reset when the circuit breaker opens to cater for line or bus side VT applications.
OVERVOLTAGE 42 0D 0
6-118 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0 = V>1 & V>2 Ph-Ph,
1 = V>1 & V>2 Ph-N,
V> Measur't Mode 42 0E V>1 & V>2 Ph-Ph
2 = V>1Ph-Ph V>2Ph-N,
3 = V>1Ph-N V>2Ph-Ph
Sets the combination of measured input voltage that will be used for the overvoltage elements.
enabled.
0 = V>1 & V>2 Any Ph,
1 = V>1 & V>2 3Phase,
V> Operate Mode 42 0F V>1 & V>2 Any Ph
2 = V>1AnyPh V>2 3Ph,
3 = V>1 3Ph V>2AnyPh
Setting that determines whether any phase or all three phases has to satisfy the overvoltage criteria before a decision is made.
enabled.
V>1 Function 42 10 DT 0 = Disabled, 1 = DT or 2 = IDMT
Setting for the tripping characteristic of the first stage overvoltage element.
V>1 Voltage Set 42 11 130 60V to 185V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for first stage overvoltage element.
V>1 Time Delay 42 12 10 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for the first stage definite time overvoltage element.
V>1 TMS 42 13 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
V>2 Status 42 14 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage overvoltage element.
V>2 Voltage Set 42 15 150 60V to 185V step 1V
This setting determines the pick-up setting for the second stage overvoltage element.
V>2 Time Delay 42 16 0.5 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for the second stage definite time overvoltage element.
COMPENSATED OV 42 20 0
Cp V>1 Function 42 23 Disabled 0 = Disabled, 1 = DT or 2 = IDMT
Tripping characteristic setting for the first stage compensated overvoltage element.
Cp V>1 Volt Set 42 24 75 60V to 110V step 1V
Sets the pick-up setting for first stage overvoltage element. This is set in terms of the phase to neutral voltage.
Cp V>1 Tim Delay 42 25 10 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for the first stage definite time compensated overvoltage element.
Cp V>1 TMS 42 26 1 0.5 to 100 step 0.5
Cp V>2 Status 42 27 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage compensated overvoltage element.
Cp V>2 Volt Set 42 28 85 60V to 110V step 1V
This setting determines the pick-up setting for the second stage overvoltage element.
Cp V>2 Tim Delay 42 29 0.5 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the operating time-delay for the second stage definite time compensated overvoltage element.
Table 45: GROUP 1 VOLT PROTECTION column
P446/EN/TM/E 6-119
4.14 Frequency Protection

The GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION column is used to set the frequency protection parameters. The
device includes 4 stages of underfrequency and 2 stages of overfrequency protection to facilitate load
shedding and subsequent restoration. The underfrequency stages may be optionally blocked by a pole
dead (CB Open) condition.
Description
GROUP 1
43 0 0
FREQ PROTECTION
This column contains settings for Frequency
UNDER FREQUENCY 43 1 0
F<1 Status 43 2 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage underfrequency element.
F<1 Setting 43 3 49.5 45 to 65 step 0.01
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the first stage underfrequency element.
F<1 Time Delay 43 4 4 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the first stage underfrequency element.
F<2 Status 43 5 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage underfrequency element.
F<2 Setting 43 6 49 45 to 65 step 0.01
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the second stage underfrequency element.
F<2 Time Delay 43 7 3 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the second stage underfrequency element.
F<3 Status 43 8 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the third stage underfrequency element.
F<3 Setting 43 9 48.5 45 to 65 step 0.01
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the third stage underfrequency element.
F<3 Time Delay 43 0A 2 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the third stage underfrequency element.
F<4 Status 43 0B Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage underfrequency element.
F<4 Setting 43 0C 48 45 to 65 step 0.01
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the fourth stage underfrequency element.
F<4 Time Delay 43 0D 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the fourth stage underfrequency element.
Bit 0 = F<1 U/V Block,
F< Function Link 43 0E 0x0
Bit 4 = Not Used,
Bit 5 = Not Used,
Bit 6 = Not Used,
Bit 7 = Not Used
Settings that determines whether undervoltage level (setting CB FAIL & P.DEAD/POLEDEAD VOLTAGE/V< ) signal block the underfrequency elements.
OVER FREQUENCY 43 0F 0
6-120 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
F>1 Status 43 10 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage overfrequency element.
F>1 Setting 43 11 50.5 45 to 65 step 0.01
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the first stage overfrequency element.
F>1 Time Delay 43 12 2 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the first stage overfrequency element.
F>2 Status 43 13 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage overfrequency element.
F>2 Setting 43 14 51 45 to 65 step 0.01
Setting that determines the pick-up threshold for the second stage overfrequency element.
F>2 Time Delay 43 15 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the minimum operating time-delay for the second stage overfrequency element.
Table 46: GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION column
4.15 Independent Rate of Change of Frequency Protection

The GROUP 1 DF/DT column is used to set the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) parameters. The
device provides four independent stages. Depending upon whether the rate of change of frequency
setting is set positive or negative, the element will react to rising or falling frequency conditions
respectively.
Description
GROUP 1
44 0 0
DF/DT PROTECTION
This column contains settings for rate of change of Frequency
df/dt Avg.Cycles 44 1 6 6 to 12 step 6
This setting is available for calculating the rate of change of frequency measurement over a fixed period of either 6 or 12 cycles.
df/dt>1 Status 44 4 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage df/dt element.
df/dt>1 Setting 44 5 2 0.1 to 10 step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the first stage df/dt element.
df/dt>1 Dir'n 44 6 Negative 0 = Negative, 1 = Positive, 2 = Both
This setting determines whether the element will react to rising or falling frequency conditions respectively, with an incorrect setting being indicated if the
threshold is set to zero.
df/dt>1 Time 44 7 0.5 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Minimum operating time-delay setting for the first stage df/dt element.
df/dt>2 Status 44 0B Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage df/dt element.
df/dt>2 Setting 44 0C 2 0.1 to 10 step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the second stage df/dt element.
df/dt>2 Dir'n 44 0D Negative 0 = Negative, 1 = Positive, 2 = Both
P446/EN/TM/E 6-121

Description
df/dt>2 Time 44 0E 1 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Minimum operating time-delay setting for the second stage df/dt element.
Setting to enable or disable the third stage df/dt element.
df/dt>3 Setting 44 13 2 0.1 to 10 step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the third stage df/dt element.
df/dt>3 Dir'n 44 14 Negative 0 = Negative, 1 = Positive, 2 = Both
df/dt>3 Time 44 15 2 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Minimum operating time-delay setting for the third stage df/dt element.
Setting to enable or disable the fourth stage df/dt element.
df/dt>4 Setting 44 1A 2 0.1 to 10 step 0.1
Pick-up setting for the fourth stage df/dt element.
df/dt>4 Dir'n 44 1B Negative 0 = Negative, 1 = Positive, 2 = Both
df/dt>4 Time 44 1C 3 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Minimum operating time-delay setting for the fourth stage df/dt element.
Table 47: GROUP 1 DF/DT column
4.16 Circuit Breaker Fail and Pole Dead Detection Function

The GROUP 1 CB FAIL & P. DEAD column is used to set the parameters for Circuit Breaker Failure
and Pole Dead detection.
Description
GROUP 1
45 0 0
CB FAIL & P.DEAD
This column contains settings for Circuit Fail and Under Current
BREAKER FAIL CB1 45 1 0
CB1 Fail1 Status 45 2 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage of the circuit breaker function.
CB1 Fail1 Timer 45 3 0.2 0s to 100s step 0.01s
Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage 1, during which breaker opening must be detected. There are timers per phase to cope with evolving faults,
but the timer setting is common.
CB1 Fail2 Status 45 4 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage of the circuit breaker function.
Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage 2, during which breaker opening must be detected.
CB1 NonIProt Rst 45 6 Prot Reset & I< 0 = I< Only, 1 = CB Open & I<, 2 = Prot Reset & I<
Setting which determines the elements that will reset the circuit breaker fail time for voltage protection function initiated circuit breaker fail conditions.
6-122 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
0 = I< Only, 1 = CB Open & I<, 2 = Prot Reset & I<, 3 =
CB1 Ext Prot Rst 45 7 Prot Reset & I<
Prot Reset or I<, 4 = Rst or CBOp & I<
Setting which determines the elements that will reset the circuit breaker fail time for external protection function initiated circuit breaker fail conditions.
WI Prot Reset 45 8 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
When Enabled, CB Fail timers will be reset by drop off of a weak infeed trip condition, providing that WI trip logic is activated.
ExtTrip Only Init 45 9 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
When Enabled, CB Fail timers will only be initiated by External Trip inputs.
UNDER CURRENT 45 0A 0
CB1 I< Set 45 0B 0.05 0.02*In to 3.2*In step 0.01*In
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for overcurrent based protection circuit breaker fail initiation. This setting is also used in
the pole dead logic to determine the status of the pole (dead or live).
CB2 I< Set 45 0C 0.05 0.02*In to 3.2*In step 0.01*In
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for overcurrent based protection circuit breaker fail initiation. This setting is also used in
the pole dead logic to determine the status of the pole (dead or live).
ISEF< Current 45 0D 0.02 0.001*InSef to 0.8*InSef step 0.0005*InSef
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for Sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection circuit breaker fail initiation.
POLEDEAD VOLTAGE 45 0E 0
V< 45 10 38.1 10V to 40V step 0.1V
Under voltage level detector for pole dead detection
BREAKER FAIL CB2 45 21 0
CB2 Fail1 Status 45 22 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the first stage of the circuit breaker function.
Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage 1, during which breaker opening must be detected. There are timers per phase to cope with evolving faults,
but the timer setting is common.
CB2 Fail2 Status 45 24 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the second stage of the circuit breaker function.
Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage 2, during which breaker opening must be detected.
CB2 NonIProt Rst 45 26 Prot Reset & I< 0 = I< Only, 1 = CB Open & I<, 2 = Prot Reset & I<
Setting which determines the elements that will reset the circuit breaker fail time for voltage protection function initiated circuit breaker fail conditions.
0 = I< Only, 1 = CB Open & I<, 2 = Prot Reset & I<, 3 =
CB2 Ext Prot Rst 45 27 Prot Reset & I<
Prot Reset or I<, 4 = Rst or CBOp & I<
Setting which determines the elements that will reset the circuit breaker fail time for external protection function initiated circuit breaker fail conditions.
Table 48: GROUP 1 CB FAIL & P.DEAD column
4.17 Supervision
The GROUP 1 SUPERVISION column is used to set the parameters for the Supervision functions.
The Supervision column includes Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS), Current Transformer
Supervision (CTS), Inrush Detection and special Weak Infeed Blocking.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-123

Description
GROUP 1
46 0 0
SUPERVISION
This column contains settings for Voltage and Current Supervision
0 = Measured + MCB,
VTS Mode 46 1 Measured + MCB 1 = Measured Only,
2 = MCB Only
Setting that determines the method to be used to declare VT failure.
VTS Status 46 2 Blocking 0 = Disabled, 1 = Blocking, 2 = Indication
This setting determines whether the following operations will occur upon detection of VTS.
• VTS set to provide alarm indication only.
• Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements.
• Optional conversion of directional overcurrent elements to non-directional protection
(available when set to blocking mode only). These settings are found in the function links cell of the relevant protection element columns in the menu.
VTS Reset Mode 46 3 Auto 0 = Manual or 1 = Auto
The VTS block will be latched after a user settable time delay ‘VTS Time Delay’. Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available.
The first is manually via the front panel interface (or remote communications) and secondly, when in ‘Auto’ mode, provided the VTS condition has been
removed and the 3 phase voltages have been restored above the phase level detector settings for more than 240 ms.
VTS Time Delay 46 4 5 1s to 10s step 0.1s
Setting that determines the operating time-delay of the element upon detection of a voltage supervision condition.
VTS I> Inhibit 46 5 10 0.08*In to 32*In step 0.01In
The setting is used to override a voltage supervision block in the event of a phase fault occurring on the system that could trigger the voltage supervision
logic.
VTS I2> Inhibit 46 6 0.05 0.05*In to 0.5*In step 0.01*In
The setting is used to override a voltage supervision block in the event of a fault occurring on the system with negative sequence current above this setting
which could trigger the voltage supervision logic.
Inrush Detection 46 0E Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting is to enable/disable the Inrush Detection used for the Distance protection.
I>2nd Harmonic 46 0F 20 10 to 100 step 5
If the level of second harmonic in any phase current or neutral current exceeds the setting, inrush conditions will be recognized by changing the status of
four DDB signals from low to high in the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL). The user then has a choice to use them further in the PSL in accordance
with the application.
WEAK INFEED BLK 46 10 0
WI Inhibit 46 11 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables (turns on) or disables (turns off) a special feature to cover scenarios when there is a very weak positive or negative sequence source
behind the IED, but the zero sequence infeed is large. Special to stub-end transformer feeding, where the stub end has no generation, but has solid
earthing at a Yd transformer neutral.
I0/I2 Setting 46 12 3 2 to 3 step 0.2
If the ratio of zero sequence current to negative sequence current exceeds the setting, all protection elements such as Distance, DEF and Delta that could
potentially operate during a genuine weak infeed condition will be inhibited. This setting will be visible only if ‘WI Inhibit’ is enabled.
CT SUPERVISION 46 30 0
0
CTS Mode 46 31 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to disable, enable the standard (voltage dependant) CTS element
CTS Status 46 32 Restrain 0 = Restrain or 1 = Indication
This setting determines whether the following operations will occur upon detection of CTS.
• CTS set to provide alarm indication only.
• CTS set to restrain local protection
The settings are visible if CTS Mode is not disabled.
6-124 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
CTS Reset Mode 46 33 Manual 0 = Manual, 1 = Auto
The CTS block will be latched after a user settable time delay ‘CTS Time Delay’. Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available.
The first is manually via the front panel interface (or remote communications) and secondly, when in ‘Auto’ mode, provided the CTS condition has been
removed. The setting is visible if CTS Mode is not disabled.
CTS Time Delay 46 34 5 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Setting that determines the operating time-delay of the element upon detection of a current transformer supervision condition. The setting is visible if CTS
Mode is not disabled
CTS VN< Inhibit 46 35 5 0.5V to 22V step 0.5V
This setting is used to inhibit the current transformer supervision element should the zero sequence voltage exceed this setting. The setting is visible if
CTS Mode is not disabled
CTS IN> Set 46 36 0.1 0.08*In to 4*In step 0.01In
This setting determines the level of zero sequence current that must be present for a valid current transformer supervision condition. The setting is visible if
CTS Mode is not disabled
Table 49: GROUP 1 SUPERVISION column
4.18 System Checks (Check Sync. Function)

The GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS column is used to set the parameters for the Check Synchronism
function. It contains settings to configure Voltage Monitoring, System Checks and Manual System
Checks for manual closure of the Circuit Breaker.
Description
GROUP 1
48 0 0
SYSTEM CHECKS
This column contains settings for System Checks
VOLTAGE MONITORS 48 14 0
Live Line 48 85 32 5 to 132 step 0.5
Line is considered Live with voltage above this setting.
Dead Line 48 86 13 5 to 132 step 0.5
Line is considered Dead with voltage below this setting.
Live Bus 1 48 87 32 5 to 132 step 0.5
Bus 1 is considered Live with voltage above this setting.
Dead Bus 1 48 88 13 5 to 132 step 0.5
Bus 1 is considered Dead with voltage below this setting.
Live Bus 2 48 89 32 5 to 132 step 0.5
Bus 2 is considered Live with voltage above this setting.
Dead Bus 2 48 8A 13 5 to 132 step 0.5
Bus 2 is considered Dead with voltage below this setting.
CS UV 48 8B 54 5 to 120 step 0.5
Check Synch Undervoltage setting decides that System Check Synchronism logic for CB1 will be blocked if V< is one of the selected options in setting CB1
CS Volt.Blk (48 8E), and either line or bus voltage is below this setting.
System Check Synchronism for CB2 will be blocked if V< is one of the selected options in setting CB2 CS Volt. Blk (48 9C), and either line or bus voltage is
below this setting.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-125

Description
CS OV 48 8C 130 60 to 200 step 0.5
Check Synch Overvoltage setting decides that System Check Synchronism logic for CB1 is blocked if V> is one of the selected options in setting CB1 CS
Volt.Blk (48 8E), and either line or bus voltage is above this setting.
System Check Synchronism for CB2 is blocked if V> is one of the selected options in setting CB2 CS Volt. Blk (48 9C), and either line or bus voltage is
above this setting.
Sys Checks CB1 48 8D Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable both stages of system checks for reclosing CB1
If Sys Checks CB1 is set to Disabled, all other menu settings associated with synchronism checks for CB1 become invisible, and a DDB (880) signal
SChksInactiveCB1 is set.
0 = None,
1 = V<,
2 = V>,
3 = Vdiff>,
CB1 CS Volt. Blk 48 8E V<
4 = V< and V>,
5 = V< and Vdiff>,
6 = V> and Vdiff>,
7 = V< V> and Vdiff>
Setting to determine which, if any, conditions should block synchronism check for CB1 (undervoltage V<, overvoltage V>, and/or voltage differential Vdiff
etc) for the line and bus voltages.
CB1 CS1 Status 48 8F Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable the stage 1 synchronism check elements for auto-reclosing and manual closing CB1.
CB1 CS1 Angle 48 90 20 0 to 90 step 1
Maximum permitted phase angle between Line and Bus 1 voltages for first stage synchronism check element to reclose CB1.
CB1 CS1 VDiff 48 91 6.5 1 to 120 step 0.5
Check Synch Voltage differential setting decides that stage 1 System Check Synchronism logic for CB1 is blocked if Vdiff> is one of the selected options in
setting CB1 CS Volt. Blk (48 8E), and voltage magnitude difference between line and bus 1 voltage is above this setting.
CB1 CS1 SlipCtrl 48 92 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable blocking of synchronism check stage 1 for reclosing CB1 by excessive frequency difference (slip) between line and bus
voltages
(refer to setting CB1 CS1 SlipFreq).
CB1 CS1 SlipFreq 48 93 0.05 0.005 to 2 step 0.005
If CB1 CS1 SlipCtrl is enabled, synchronism check stage 1 is blocked for reclosing CB1 if measured frequency difference between line and bus voltages is
greater than this setting.
CB1 CS2 Status 48 94 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
CB1 CS2 Angle 48 95 20 0 to 90 step 1
Maximum permitted phase angle between Line and Bus 1 voltages for second stage synchronism check element to reclose CB1
CB1 CS2 VDiff 48 96 6.5 1 to 120 step 0.5
setting CB1 CS Volt.Blk (48 8E), and voltage magnitude difference between line and bus 1 voltage is above this setting.
CB1 CS2 SlipCtrl 48 97 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
voltages (refer to setting CB1 CS2 SlipFreq)
CB1 CS2 SlipFreq 48 98 0.05 0.005 to 2 step 0.005
CB1 CS2 Adaptive 48 99 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable Adaptive CB closing with System Check Synchronism stage 2 closing for CB1: logic uses set CB1 CI Time to issue CB1 close
command at such a time that the predicted phase angle difference when CB1 main contacts touch is as close as possible to 0 degrees. If Adaptive closing
is disabled, the logic issues CB1 close command as soon as phase angle comes within set limit at CB1 CS2 Angle .
6-126 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
CB1 Cl Time 48 9A 0.05 0.01 to 0.5 step 0.001
This sets CB1 closing time, from receipt of CB1 close command until main contacts touch.
Sys Checks CB2 48 9B Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable both stages of system checks for reclosing CB2.
If Sys Checks CB2 is set to Disabled, all other menu settings associated with synchronism checks for CB2 become invisible, and a DDB (1484) signal
0 = None,
1 = V<,
2 = V>,
3 = Vdiff>,
CB2 CS Volt. Blk 48 9C V<
4 = V< and V>,
5 = V< and Vdiff>,
6 = V> and Vdiff>,
7 = V< V> and Vdiff>
Setting to determine which, if any, conditions should block synchronism check for CB2 (undervoltage V<, overvoltage V>, and/or voltage differential Vdiff
etc) for the line and bus voltages.
CB2 CS1 Status 48 9D Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
CB2 CS1 Angle 48 9E 20 0 to 90 step 1
Maximum permitted phase angle between Line and Bus 2 voltages for first stage synchronism check element to reclose CB2.
CB2 CS1 VDiff 48 9F 6.5 1 to 120 step 0.5
setting CB2 CS Volt. Blk (48 9C), and voltage magnitude difference between line and bus 2 voltage is above this setting.
CB2 CS1 SlipCtrl 48 A0 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
voltages (refer to setting CB2 CS1 SlipFreq).
CB2 CS1 SlipFreq 48 A1 0.05 0.005 to 2 step 0.005
CB2 CS2 Status 48 A2 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
CB2 CS2 Angle 48 A3 20 0 to 90 step 1
Maximum permitted phase angle between Line and Bus 2 voltages for second stage synchronism check element to reclose CB2.
CB2 CS2 VDiff 48 A4 6.5 1 to 120 step 0.5
setting CB2 CS Volt. Blk (48 9C), and voltage magnitude difference between line and bus 2 voltage is above this setting.
CB2 CS2 SlipCtrl 48 A5 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
voltages (refer to setting CB2 CS2 SlipFreq)
CB2 CS2 SlipFreq 48 A6 0.05 0.005 to 2 step 0.005
CB2 CS2 Adaptive 48 A7 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Setting to enable or disable Adaptive CB closing with System Check Synchronism stage 2 closing for CB2: logic uses set CB2 CI Time to issue CB2 close
command at such a time that the predicted phase angle difference when CB2 main contacts touch is as close as possible to 0 degrees. If adaptive closing
is disabled, the logic issues CB2 close command as soon as phase angle comes within set limit at CB2 CS2 Angle.
CB2 Cl Time 48 A8 0.05 0.01 to 0.5 step 0.001
This sets CB2 closing time, from receipt of CB2 close command until main contacts touch
P446/EN/TM/E 6-127

Description
MAN SYS CHECKS 48 B0 0
Num CBs 48 B1 CB1 Only 0 = CB1 Only, 1 = CB2 Only or 2 = CB1 & CB2
This setting is only visible if the CB Control by cell (Cell 0701 under CB CONTROL column) is ‘Enabled’.
If visible, the setting dictates which of the circuit breakers (CB1 only, CB2 only, or both CB1 & CB2) can be manually closed.
CB1M SC required 48 B2 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for any manual (operator-controlled) closure of CB1. If Enabled,
system check is required for closure. If Disabled, system check is not required.
CB1M SC CS1 48 B3 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to close by manual control when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 1 conditions as listed under the
setting CB1 CS1 Status in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
This setting enables CB1 to close by manual control when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 2 conditions as listed under the
CB1M SC DLLB 48 B5 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to close by manual control when the dead line & live bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1M SC LLDB 48 B6 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to close by manual control when the live line & dead bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1M SC DLDB 48 B7 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to close by manual control when the dead line & dead bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2M SC required 48 B8 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for any manual (operator-controlled) closure of CB2. If Enabled,
system check is required for closure. If Disabled, system check is not required.
This setting enables CB2 to close by manual control when system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 1 conditions as listed under the
CB2M SC CS2 48 BA Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to close by manual control when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 2 conditions as listed under
setting CB2 CS2 status in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2M SC DLLB 48 BB Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to close by manual control when the dead line & live bus2 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2M SC LLDB 48 BC Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to close by manual control when the live line & dead bus2 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2M SC DLDB 48 BD Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to close by manual control when the dead line & dead bus2 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
Table 50: GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS column
4.19 Auto-Reclose Function

The GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE column is used to set the parameters for the Autoreclose function.
Auto reclose is provided for both single and dual circuit breaker variants.
Description
GROUP 1
49 0 0
AUTORECLOSE
This column contains settings for Autoreclose
6-128 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Num CBs 49 50 CB1 Only 0 = CB1 Only, 1 = CB2 Only or 2 = CB1 & CB2
Setting defines which CB(s) are active for the specific installation: CB1 only, CB2 only or both CB1 & CB2.
AR Mode 49 51 AR 3P 0 = AR 1P, 1 = AR 1/3P, 2 = AR 3P or 3 = AR Opto
If the Num CBs setting (cell 4950 {above} in the AUTORECLOSE column) is set to CB1 Only, or CB2 Only, then this setting determines which auto-reclose
modes are permitted for the circuit breaker : single phase (AR 1P) only, both single phase and three phase (AR 1/3P), three phase only (AR 3P), or the
auto-reclosing mode is controlled by opto input signals (AR Opto) mapped via DDB's (1497) AR Mode 1P and (1498) AR Mode 3P.
0 = L 1P, F 1P,
1 = L 1P, F 3P,
2 = L 3P, F 3P,
Lead/Foll ARMode 49 53 L 3P, F 3P
3 = L 1/3P, F 1/3P,
4 = L 1/3P, F 3P,
5 = AR Opto
Setting determines which auto-reclose modes are permitted for leader /follower circuit breakers.
The auto-reclose scheme provides single phase or three phase auto-reclosing of a feeder switched by two circuit breakers. The two circuit breakers are
normally arranged to reclose sequentially with one, designated the ‘Leader’ circuit breaker, reclosing after a set dead time followed, if the leader CB
remains closed, by the second circuit breaker, designated the ‘Follower’ circuit breaker after a further delay (follower time).
L1P F1P : both leader and follower are configured for single phase auto-reclosing.
L1P F3P : the leader is configured for single phase auto-reclosing, whilst the follower is configured for three phase auto-reclosing.
L3P F3P : both leader and follower are configured for three phase auto-reclosing.
L1/3P F1/3P : both leader and follower are configured for either single phase or three phase auto-reclosing.
L1/3P F3P : the leader is configured for single phase or three phase auto-reclosing, while the follower is configured for three phase auto-reclosing only.
AR Opto : the auto-reclosing mode of the leader and follower are controlled by opto input signals (Opto) mapped via DDBs (1497) Lead AR 1P, (1498)
Lead AR 3P, (1409) Follower AR 1P, and (1410) Follower AR 3P.
Leader Select By 49 55 Menu 0 = Menu, 1 = Opto, 2 = Control
Setting which determines how the preferred leader CB is selected - can be by menu setting, HMI command or by designated opto input.
If Leader Select By: is set to Leader by Opto, then preferred leader CB is :-
• CB1 if input DDB(1408) CB2 Lead is low, or
• CB2 if input DDB (1408) CB2 Lead is high.
If Leader Select By: is set to Leader by Control, then user control setting CTRL CB2 Lead under CB CONTROL in the IED menu determines the preferred
leader by applying set/reset commands (If Set then CB2 is leader ,If Reset then CB1 is leader).
Select Leader 49 56 CB1 0 = CB1 or 1 = CB2
If Leader Select By is set to Leader by Menu in the previous cell, then setting Select Leader becomes visible, and determines which CB is the preferred
leader.
BF if LFail Cls 49 57 Enabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
BF if L Fail Cls = Block Follower reclose if Leader CB Fails to close. This setting determines whether a follower CB should lock out without reclosing, or
continue to reclose, if the leader CB fails to reclose when the leader CB close command is given.
If BF if L Fail Cls is set to Enable, follower CB reclosing is locked out if the leader fails to close.
If BF if L Fail Cls is set to Disable, the follower CB can continue its reclose cycle if the leader CB fails to close. (See also setting Dynamic F/L).
Dynamic F/L 49 58 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
Dynamic F/L = Dynamic change from follower to leader status during an auto-reclose cycle if the leader CB fails to close.
If setting BF if Lfail Cls is set to Disabled, then setting Dynamic F/L becomes visible and determines whether the follower CB should assume leader status
and reclose immediately if the leader CB should fail to close, or whether it should continue as follower and reclose after the Follower Time delay.
Dynamic F/L set to Enabled selects immediate follower reclose if the leader CB fails to close;
Dynamic F/L set to Disabled selects the follower to reclose after the Follower Time if leader CB fails to close.
AR Shots 49 59 1 1 to 4 step 1
This setting determines how many reclose attempts (shots) are permitted for any single fault incident before it is treated as persistent and auto-reclosing is
locked out. For example if AR Shots = 2, a second reclose attempt is initiated if the protection retrips during the reclaim time following one reclose attempt,
but locks out if the protection retrips during the reclaim time after a second reclose attempt.
AR Skip Shot 1 49 5A Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If set to “Enable”, allows the first programmed reclose attempt (“shot”) to be omitted if the “Skip Shot 1” input is high when the Increment is triggered at the
start of an autoreclose cycle:
P446/EN/TM/E 6-129

Description
0 = Allow Autoclose,
Multi Phase AR 49 5C Allow Autoclose 1 = BAR 2 and 3Ph,
2 = BAR 3 Phase
This setting determines whether auto-reclosing is permitted or blocked for two phase or three phase faults.
Discrim Time 49 5D 0.1 0.005s to 5s step 0.005s
Discrim Time = Discriminating Time. This is a setting which determines whether a fault on another phase (evolving or developing fault) after single phase
trip and
auto-reclose has been initiated by a single phase fault stops the single phase cycle and starts a three phase auto-reclose cycle provided this second fault
(evolving fault) occurs BEFORE the Discrimination Time elapsed. It forces a lockout if second fault (evolving fault) occurs AFTER Discrimination Time has
elapsed but before Single Phase Dead Time elapses.
CB IS Time 49 60 5 0.1s to 200s step 0.1s
CB IS Time = CB In Service Time. This is a timer setting for which a CB must remain closed (and optionally the line be live) before it is considered to be In
Service.
CB IS MemoryTime 49 61 0.5 0.01s to 1s step 0.01s
CB IS Memory Time is a timer setting which allows a CB In Service state to be remembered for a short period following changeover of the CB auxiliary
switch contacts to a CB Open state. This may occasionally be necessary for a few types of CB with exceptionally fast acting auxiliary switch contacts which
allow the auto-reclose scheme logic to detect the CB opening before it detects an associated protection operation.
DT Start by Prot 49 62 Protection Reset 0 = Protection Reset, 1 = Protection Op or 2 = Disable
DT Start by Prot = Dead Time Start By Protection action. If DT Start by Prot is set to Disable, a dead time start is not directly affected by protection
operation or reset, but is enabled by other conditions or events (see settings: 3PDTStart WhenLD and
DTStart by CB Op).
If DT Start by Prot is set to Protection Op, the dead time starting is enabled when the auto-reclose initiation signal is received from the protection. If DT
Start by Prot is set to Protection Reset, the dead time starting is inhibited until the auto-reclose initiation signal from the protection resets.
3PDTStart WhenLD 49 63 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
3PDTStart When LD = three phase auto-reclose dead time starts when the line has gone dead. If Enabled, the line is required to go dead before a 3 phase
auto-reclose dead time can start. If Disabled, dead time can start when other selected conditions are satisfied, irrespective of line volts.
DTStart by CB Op 49 64 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If Enabled, a dead time start is permitted only when the CB has tripped. If Disabled, a dead time start is permitted when other selected conditions are
satisfied, irrespective of the CB position.
Dead Line Time 49 66 5 1s to 9999s step 1s
When 3PDTStart When LD is Enabled, and the line does not go dead within the set Dead Line Time period, then the logic will force the auto-reclose
sequence to lockout after expiry of this time.
SP AR Dead Time 49 67 0.5 0s to 10s step 0.01s
Dead time setting for single phase auto-reclose.
3P AR DT Shot 1 49 68 0.3 0.01s to 300s step 0.01s
Dead time setting for three phase auto-reclose (first shot).
3P AR DT Shot 2 49 69 60 1s to 9999s step 1s
Dead time setting for three phase auto-reclose (2nd shot).
3P AR DT Shot 3 49 6A 60 1s to 9999s step 1s
Dead time setting for three phase auto-reclose (3rd shot).
3P AR DT Shot 4 49 6B 60 1s to 9999s step 1s
Dead time setting for three phase auto-reclose (4th shot).
Follower Time 49 6C 5 0.1s to 300s step 0.01s
Time delay setting for follower CB reclosing after leader CB has reclosed.
SPAR ReclaimTime 49 6D 60 1s to 600s step 1s
Reclaim time setting following single phase auto-reclosure.
3PAR ReclaimTime 49 6E 180 1s to 600s step 1s
Reclaim time setting following three phase auto-reclosure.
6-130 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
AR CBHealthyTime 49 6F 5 0.01s to 9999s step 0.01s
Settable time delay for autoreclosure with this circuit breaker check. If the circuit breaker does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following
an auto close command then the IED will lockout and alarm. CB Healthy is required for manual and auto reclosures.
AR CheckSyncTime 49 70 5 0.01s to 9999s step 0.01s
A user settable time delay is included for autoreclosure with System Check Synchronizing. If the System Check Synchronizing criteria are not satisfied in
this time period following a close command the IED will lockout and alarm.
Z1 AR 49 72 Initiate AR 0 = Initiate AR or 1 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of instantaneous zone 1 on AR operation. Set Initiate AR if the trip should initiate a cycle, and Block AR if an instantaneous
zone 1 trip should cause lockout. (Only in models with distance option)
Dist Aided AR 49 74 Initiate AR 0 = Initiate AR or 1 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of the aided distance schemes tripping on AR operation.
(Only in models with distance option)
Z2T AR 49 75 Block AR 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of time delayed zone 2 on AR operation. Set Initiate AR if the trip should initiate a cycle, and Block AR if a time delayed trip
should cause lockout. Set No action if Zone 2 tripping should exert no specific logic control on the recloser.
Setting that determines impact of the Zone 3 tripping on AR operation.
ZPT AR 49 77 Block AR 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of the Zone P tripping on AR operation.
Setting that determines impact of the Zone 4 tripping on AR operation.
DEF Aided AR 49 79 Block AR 0 = Initiate AR or 1 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of aided Directional Earth Fault protection (DEF) on AR operation.
Dir. Comp AR 49 7A Block AR 0 = Initiate AR or 1 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of aided Directional Comparison protection (DEF) on AR operation.
TOR AR 49 7B Block AR 0 = Initiate AR or 1 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of Trip On Reclose (TOR) on AR operation.
I>1 AR 49 7C No Action 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of first stage overcurrent protection on AR operation. Set Initiate AR if the trip should initiate a cycle, and Block AR if trip
should cause lockout. Set No action if trip should exert no specific logic control on the recloser.
I>2 AR 49 7D No Action 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of the second stage overcurrent protection on AR operation.
I>3 AR 49 7E No Action 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of the third stage overcurrent protection on AR operation.
I>4 AR 49 7F No Action 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of the fourth stage overcurrent protection on AR operation.
IN>1 AR 49 80 No Action 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of the first stage earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
Setting that determines impact of the second stage earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-131

Description
Setting that determines impact of the third stage earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
Setting that determines impact of the fourth stage earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
ISEF>1 AR 49 84 No Action 0 = No Action, 1 = Initiate AR or 2 = Block AR
Setting that determines impact of the first stage sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
Setting that determines impact of the second stage sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
Setting that determines impact of the third stage sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
Setting that determines impact of the fourth stage sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation.
AR SYS CHECKS 49 A5 0
CB1L SC all 49 A6 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for any auto-reclose of CB1 as leader. If Enabled, system check
is required for some or all reclosures. If Disabled, system check is not required for any reclosures.
CB1L SC Shot 1 49 A7 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for the first shot reclosure of CB1 as leader. If Enabled, system
check is required for the first shot reclosure. If Disabled, system check is not required for the first shot reclosure.
CB1L SC ClsNoDly 49 A8 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If CB1L SC ClsNoDly is Enabled, CB1 can reclose as leader as soon as the synchro check conditions are satisfied, without waiting for the dead time to
elapse.
This option is sometimes required for the second line end to reclose onto a line with delayed auto-reclosing (typical cycle: first line end recloses after the
dead time with
live bus & dead line, then the second line end recloses immediately with live bus & live line in synchronism).
CB1L SC CS1 49 A9 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as leader when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 1 criteria as defined under CB1
CS1 Status settings in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1L SC CS2 49 AA Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as leader when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 2 criteria as defined under the
setting CB1 CS2 status in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1L SC DLLB 49 AB Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as leader when the dead line & live bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1L SC LLDB 49 AC Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as leader when the live line & dead bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1L SC DLDB 49 AD Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as leader when the dead line & dead bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2L SC all 49 AE Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as leader when the dead line & dead bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2L SC Shot 1 49 AF Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for the first shot reclosure of CB2 as leader. If Enabled, system
6-132 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
CB2L SC ClsNoDly 49 B0 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
If CB2L SC ClsNoDly is Enabled, CB2 can reclose as leader as soon as the synchro check conditions are satisfied, without waiting for the dead time to
elapse.
This option is sometimes required for the second line end to reclose on a line with delayed auto-reclosing (typical cycle: the first line end recloses after the
dead time with live bus & dead line, then the second line end recloses immediately with live bus & live line in synchronism).
CB2L SC CS1 49 B1 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
CB2L SC CS2 49 B2 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
CB2L SC DLLB 49 B3 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as leader when the dead line & live bus 2 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2L SC LLDB 49 B4 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as leader when the live line & dead bus 2 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2L SC DLDB 49 B5 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as leader when the dead line & dead bus 2 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1F SC all 49 B6 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for any auto-reclose of CB1 as follower. If Enabled, system check
CB1F SC Shot 1 49 B7 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for the first shot reclosure of CB1 as follower. If Enabled, system
CB1F SC CS1 49 B8 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as follower when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 1 conditions as listed under
CB1F SC CS2 49 B9 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as follower when system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 2 conditions as listed under setting
CB1 CS2 Status in the SYSTEM CHECKS settings.
CB1F SC DLLB 49 BA Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as follower when the dead line & live bus1 conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1F SC LLDB 49 BB Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as follower when the live line & dead bus1 conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB1F SC DLDB 49 BC Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB1 to auto-reclose as follower when the “dead line” & “dead bus1” conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS settings.
CB2F SC all 49 BD Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for any auto-reclose of CB2 as follower. If Enabled, system check
CB2F SC Shot 1 49 BE Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for the first shot reclosure of CB2 as follower. If Enabled, system
CB2F SC CS1 49 BF Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as follower when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 1 conditions as listed under
CB2F SC CS2 49 C0 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as follower when system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 2 conditions as listed under setting
CB2 CS2 Status in the SYSTEM CHECKS settings.
P446/EN/TM/E 6-133

Description
CB2F SC DLLB 49 C1 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as follower when the dead line & live bus 2 conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2F SC LLDB 49 C2 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as follower when the live line & dead bus 2 conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
CB2F SC DLDB 49 C3 Disabled 0 = Disabled or 1 = Enabled
This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as follower when the dead line & dead bus 2 conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS settings.
Table 51: GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE column
4.20 Input Labels

The GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS column is used to individually label each opto-input. The text is
restricted to 16 characters and is available if ‘Input Labels’ are set to 'visible' in the CONFIGURATION
column.
Description
GROUP 1 INPUT
4A 0 0
LABELS
This column contains settings for Input Labels
Opto Input 1 4A 1 Input L1 32 to 163 step 1
Label for Opto Input 1
Opto Input 10 4A 0A Input L10 32 to 163 step 1
Opto Input 11 4A 0B Input L11 32 to 163 step 1
Opto Input 12 4A 0C Input L12 32 to 163 step 1
Opto Input 13 4A 0D Input L13 32 to 163 step 1
6-134 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Opto Input 14 4A 0E Input L14 32 to 163 step 1
Opto Input 15 4A 0F Input L15 32 to 163 step 1
Table 52: GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS column
4.21 Output Labels

The GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS column is used to individually label each output relay. The text is
restricted to 16 characters and is available if ‘Input Labels’ are set to 'visible' in the CONFIGURATION
column.
Description
GROUP 1 OUTPUT
4B 0 0
LABELS
This column contains settings for Output Relay Labels
Relay 1 4B 1 Output R1 16 character custom name
Label for output relay 1
P446/EN/TM/E 6-135

Description
Relay 10 4B 0A Output R10 16 character custom name
Relay 11 4B 0B Output R11 16 character custom name
Relay 12 4B 0C Output R12 16 character custom name
Relay 13 4B 0D Output R13 16 character custom name
Relay 14 4B 0E Output R14 16 character custom name
Relay 15 4B 0F Output R15 16 character custom name
Relay 26 4B 1A Output R26 16 character custom name
Relay 27 4B 1B Output R27 16 character custom name
6-136 P446/EN/TM/E

Description
Relay 28 4B 1C Output R28 16 character custom name
Relay 29 4B 1D Output R29 16 character custom name
Relay 30 4B 1E Output R30 16 character custom name
Relay 31 4B 1F Output R31 16 character custom name
Table 53: GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS column
P446/EN/TM/E 6-137
6-138 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 7 Operation
OPERATION
CHAPTER 7
P446/EN/TM/E 7-1
7 Operation MiCOMho P446
7-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 OVERVIEW
This chapter explains the principles of the IED’s individual protection functions. It
consists of the following sections:
1 Overview
2 Setting Groups
2.1 Setting groups selection
3 Line Parameters
3.1 Tripping mode - selection of single- or three-pole tripping
3.2 Residual compensation for earth faults
3.3 Mutual compensation for parallel lines
4 Distance Protection
4.1 Distance protection introduction
4.2 Phase selection
4.2.1 Theory of operation
4.2.2 Cross-country override logic
4.3 Biased neutral current detector
4.4 Measuring zones – theory of operation
4.4.1 Mho characteristic
4.4.1.1 Phase elements
4.4.1.2 Ground elements
4.4.1.3 Memory- or cross-polarisation
4.4.2 Quadrilateral characteristic
4.5 Distance elements zone settings
4.5.1 Directionality – Delta and Conventional
4.5.2 Phase fault zone settings
4.5.3 Ground fault zone settings
4.5.4 Distance zone sensitivities
4.6 Conventional voltage transformer and capacitor VT applications
4.6.1 CVTs with passive suppression of ferroresonance
4.6.2 CVTs with active suppression of ferroresonance
4.7 Load blinding (load avoidance)
4.8 Distance elements basic scheme setting
5 Delta Directional Protection

5.1 Delta directional comparison principle and setup
5.2 Delta directional decision
6 Communications Between IEDs

6.1 InterMiCOM
6.1.1 Protection signaling
6.1.2 InterMiCOM variants
6.1.3 InterMiCOM features
6.1.4 Definition of teleprotection commands
6.2 MODEM InterMiCOM, EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM or Copper
InterMiCOM
6.2.1 Communications media
6.2.2 General features and implementation
6.2.3 EIA(RS)232 physical connections
6.2.4 Direct connection
P446/EN/TM/E 7-3
6.2.5 EIA(RS)232 modem connection

6.2.6 RS422 connection
6.2.7 Fiber optic connection
6.2.8 InterMiCOM functional assignment
6.2.9 InterMiCOM statistics and diagnostics
6.3 InterMiCOM64 (“fiber InterMiCOM”)
6.3.2 Configuring InterMiCOM64
64
6.3.2.1 InterMiCOM scheme setup - application
64
6.3.2.2 InterMiCOM protection communications address
64
6.3.2.3 InterMiCOM communications mode setup
64
6.3.2.4 InterMiCOM communications baud rate
64
6.3.2.5 InterMiCOM communications clock source
64
6.3.2.6 InterMiCOM IEEE C37.94 channel selection
64
6.3.2.7 InterMiCOM communications fail timer
64
6.3.2.8 InterMiCOM communications failure mode
64
6.3.2.9 InterMiCOM channel timeout
64
6.3.2.10 InterMiCOM propagation delay statistics
64
6.3.2.11 InterMiCOM command type
64
6.3.2.12 InterMiCOM fallback mode
64
6.3.2.13 InterMiCOM communications alarm management
64
6.3.2.14 InterMiCOM DDB signal list
64
6.3.2.15 InterMiCOM communications alarm logic
64
6.3.2.16 InterMiCOM two ended scheme extended supervision
64
6.3.2.17 InterMiCOM three ended scheme extended supervision
6.3.3 InterMiCOM64 communications link options
64
6.3.3.1 InterMiCOM optical fiber communications link options
64
6.3.3.2 InterMiCOM connection via P590 series optical fiber to electrical interface
units
64
6.3.3.3 InterMiCOM connection over unconditioned pilot wires
7 Scheme Logic (Basic and Aided Scheme Logic)

7.1 Switch on to fault (SOTF) and trip on reclose (TOR)
7.1.1 Switch On To Fault (SOTF) mode
7.1.2 Trip On Reclose (TOR) mode
7.1.3 Polarization during circuit energization
7.2 Channel aided schemes
7.2.1 Distance scheme PUR - permissive underreach transfer trip
7.2.2 Distance scheme POR - permissive overreach transfer trip
7.2.3 Permissive overreach trip reinforcement
7.2.4 Permissive overreach scheme weak infeed features
7.2.5 Permissive scheme unblocking logic - loss of guard
7.2.6 Distance scheme BLOCKING
7.2.7 Distance schemes current reversal guard logic
7.2.8 Permissive overreach schemes current reversal guard
7.2.9 Blocking scheme 1 and 2 current reversal guard
7.2.10 Aided DEF ground fault scheme - permissive overreach
7.2.11 Aided DEF ground fault scheme – blocking
7.2.12 Delta scheme POR - permissive overreach transfer trip
7.2.13 Delta blocking scheme
7.3 Zone 1 extension and loss of load schemes
7.3.1 Zone 1 extension scheme
7.3.2 Loss of load accelerated tripping (LoL)
8 Phase Fault Overcurrrent Protection

8.1 Pick-up characteristics
7-4 P446/EN/TM/E
8.2 Reset characteristics

8.3 Directional overcurrent protection
8.4 Synchronous polarization
9 Negative Sequence Overcurrent

9.1 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS)
9.1.1 Directionalizing the negative phase sequence overcurrent element
10 Broken Conductor
10.1 Broken conductor detection
11 Earth Fault
11.1 Earth fault, Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) and Restricted Earth
Fault (REF) protection
11.1.1 IDG curve
11.2 Directional earth fault protection
11.2.1 Residual voltage polarization
11.2.2 Negative sequence polarization (Not for SEF)
12 Aided DEF
12.1 Directional function - setup of DEF and directional comparison
elements
12.1.1 DEF zero sequence polarization with virtual current polarizing
12.1.2 DEF negative sequence polarization
13 Restricted Earth Fault Protection (REF)

14 Residual Overvoltage (NVD) Protection
15 Thermal Overload Protection
15.1.1 Single time constant characteristic
15.1.2 Dual time constant characteristic (typically not applied for P446)
16 Power Swing Blocking and Out-of Step Protection

16.1 Power swing detection, alarming and blocking
16.1.1 Detection of power swings
16.1.2 Actions on power swing detection
16.1.3 Detection of a fault during a power swing
16.1.4 Actions on detection of a fault during a power swing
16.1.5 Power swing settings
16.2 Out of step detection and tripping
16.2.1 Out of step detection
16.2.1.1 Characteristic
16.2.1.2 Operating principle
17 Voltage Protection
17.1 Undervoltage protection
17.2 Overvoltage protection
17.2.1 Compensated overvoltage
18 Frequency Protection
18.1 Frequency protection
18.2 Independent rate of change of frequency protection [81R]
18.2.1 Basic functionality
19 Circuit Breaker Fail and Pole Dead Detection Function

19.1 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)
19.1.1 Initiation of circuit breaker failure protection
19.1.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
P446/EN/TM/E 7-5
19.2 Pole dead logic
20 Supervision (VTS, CTS, Inrush Detection and Infeed

Blocking)
20.1 Voltage transformer supervision - fuse fail
20.1.1 Loss of one or two phase voltages
20.1.2 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
20.1.3 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energization
20.1.4 VTS logic
20.2 Current transformer supervision
20.2.1 Standard CTS (voltage dependant CTS, no need of communications to
declare CTS)
20.2.2 CTS blocking
20.3 Transformer magnetizing inrush detector
20.4 Special weak infeed logic for stub end transformer terminals
21 System Checks
21.1 System voltage checks
21.1.1 System checks overview
21.1.2 System voltage checks logic diagrams
21.1.3 System voltage checks VT selection
21.1.4 System voltage synchronism checks
21.1.4.1 Slip control by timer
21.1.4.2 Check sync. 2
21.1.4.3 Predictive closure of circuit breaker
21.1.4.4 Voltage and phase angle correction
22 Circuit-Breaker Control: Operational Description

22.1 INTRODUCTION
22.2 Circuit breaker scheme designation
22.3 Circuit breaker status
22.4 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
22.4.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features
22.5 Circuit breaker control
22.5.1 Circuit breaker control using hotkeys
22.5.2 Circuit breaker control using function keys
22.6 Single and three phase auto-reclosing
22.6.1 Time delayed and high speed auto-reclosing
22.6.2 Auto-reclose logic inputs
22.6.2.1 Circuit breaker healthy
22.6.2.2 Inhibit auto-reclose
22.6.2.3 Block auto-reclose
22.6.2.4 Reset lockout
22.6.2.5 Pole discrepancy
22.6.2.6 External trip
22.6.3 Internal signals
22.6.3.1 Trip initiate signals
22.6.3.2 Circuit breaker status
22.6.3.3 Check synch ok and system check ok
22.6.4 Auto-reclose logic outputs
22.6.5 Auto-reclose logic operating sequence
22.6.6 Auto-reclose main operating features
22.6.6.1 Circuit breaker in service
22.6.6.2 Auto-reclose enable
22.6.6.3 Leader & follower circuit breaker selection
22.6.6.4 Auto-reclose mode for leader & follower circuit breaker
7-6 P446/EN/TM/E
22.6.6.5 Auto-reclose mode with one circuit breaker

22.6.6.6 Auto-reclose mode with two circuit breakers
22.6.6.7 Force three phase trip
22.6.6.8 Auto-reclose Initiation
22.6.6.9 Auto-reclose initiation by host IED protection function
22.6.6.10 Auto-reclose initiation by external protection equipment
22.6.6.11 Auto-reclose initiation and cycle by trip test
22.6.6.12 Sequence counter
22.6.6.13 Auto-reclose cycle selection
22.6.6.14 Dead time control
22.6.6.15 Follower circuit breaker enable and time control
22.6.6.16 CB1 and CB2 auto close
22.6.6.17 Reclaim time & successful auto-reclose
22.6.6.18 Circuit breaker healthy & system check timers
22.6.6.19 CB1 & CB2 auto-reclose shot counters
22.6.6.20 System checks for circuit breaker closing
22.6.6.21 CB1 & CB2 trip time monitor
22.6.6.22 Autoreclose lockout
22.6.6.23 Reset circuit breaker lockout
23 Measurements
23.1 Fault locator
23.1.1 Basic theory for ground faults
23.1.2 Data acquisition and buffer processing
23.1.3 Faulted phase selection
23.1.4 The fault location calculation
23.1.5 Obtaining the vectors
23.1.6 Solving the equation for the fault location
23.1.7 Mutual compensation
24 Communications Settings
24.1 Read Only mode
24.1.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol on rear port 1
24.1.2 Courier protocol on rear port 1 or 2 and Ethernet
24.1.3 IEC 61850
24.1.4 Courier database support
24.1.5 New DDB signals
25 Real Time Clock Synchronization via Opto-Inputs

26 Control Inputs
27 Circuit Breaker Control and Auto-Reclose Figures (AR
Figures)
28 Circuit Breaker Control and Auto-Reclose Logic (Internal
Signal Definitions)
P446/EN/TM/E 7-7
7-8 P446/EN/TM/E
2 SETTING GROUPS
There are four groups of protection settings, each group contains the same setting cells.
This allows four different sets of settings and PSL configurations. Only one group of
protection settings can be selected as the active group. The active group is the group
currently used by all protection elements. GROUP 1 is the default active group.
2.1 Setting groups selection

The setting groups can be changed using opto inputs, a menu selection, the hotkey menu
or function keys. In the Configuration column if Setting Group - Select via PSL is
selected, any opto input or function key can be programmed in PSL to select the setting
group as shown in Table 1. If Setting Group - Select via Menu is selected, in the
Configuration column the Active Settings – Group 1(2,3,4) can be used to select the
setting group, as long as the setting group is enabed.
The setting group can be changed using the hotkey menu, if Setting Group - Select via
Menu is selected.
Two DDB signals are available in PSL for selecting a setting group via an opto input or a
function key. Table 1 shows the setting group that is active when the relevant DDB
signals are activated.
DDB 542 DDB 543
Selected Setting Group
SG Select x1 SG Select 1x
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 4
Table 1: Setting group selection in PSL
Note: Each setting group has its own PSL. Once a PSL has been designed it can be sent to
any one of 4 setting groups in the IED. When downloading a PSL to the IED, enter
the setting group to which it will be sent. This is also the case when extracting a PSL
from the IED.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-9
3 LINE PARAMETERS
3.1 Tripping mode - selection of single- or three-pole tripping

This selects whether instantaneous trips are allowed as 1-pole or are always 3-pole.
Instantaneous protection elements are those normally set to trip with no intentional time
delay. For example, directional earth fault (DEF) aided scheme, distance Zone 1 and
distance channel-aided scheme (optional).
The 1 and 3 Pole setting allows single-pole tripping for single-phase-to-ground faults
(used in three-pole tripping applications). The selection 3 Pole converts any trip into
three-pole trip (used in three-pole tripping applications).
The tripping mode can be set independently for two circuit breakers.
Internal logic converts any double-phase fault or any evolving fault during a single pole
autoreclose dead-time into a three-phase trip. Two-phase tripping is never allowed.
This functionality is shown in AR Figure 63 (logic diagram supplement)
3.2 Residual compensation for earth faults

For a phase-to-ground fault such as AN, the total loop impedance Z LP  V A I A depends
on many factors, such as infeed currents and earthing arrangements. To overcome this
issue, distance measuring elements are usually calibrated in terms of the positive
sequence impedance. The positive sequence impedance Z F 1 between the relaying
point and the fault can be calculated using the following equation:
VA
Z F1 
I A  k ZN  I N
where
I N is the residual current (derived from phase currents),
I N  I A  I B  IC Equation 1
k ZN is the residual compensation coefficient (complex value):
Z L 0  Z L1
k ZN  Equation 2
3Z L1
where
Z L1 is the total positive sequence impedance of the line (a complex value),
Z L 0 is total zero sequence impedance of the line (a complex value).
The complex residual compensation coefficient is defined by two settings: kZN Res
Comp (the absolute value) and kZN Res Angle (the angle in degrees).
Caution: The kZN Res Angle is different to previous LFZP, SHNB, and LFZR IEDs:
When importing settings from these older products, subtract angle Z L1 .
3.3 Mutual compensation for parallel lines

When applied to parallel circuits, mutual flux coupling can alter the impedance seen by
the fault locator and distance zones. The effect on the ground distance elements and on
the fault locator of the zero sequence mutual coupling can be eliminated by using the
mutual compensation feature provided. This requires that the residual current on the
7-10 P446/EN/TM/E
parallel line is measured, as shown in the connection diagram. It is extremely important

that the polarity of connection for the mutual CT input is correct.
Considering two parallel lines, for a phase-to-ground fault such as AN on the protected
line, the positive sequence impedance Z F 1 between the relaying point and the fault can
be calculated using the following equation:
VA
Z F1  , Equation 3
I A  k ZN  I N  k Zm  I M
where
I N is the residual current of the protected line (derived from phase currents,
see Equation 1),
I M is the residual current of the parallel line (measured),
k ZN is the residual compensation coefficient (see Equation 3),
k Zm is the mutual compensation coefficient (complex value)

Z m0
k Zm  , Equation 4
3Z L1
where
Z L1 is the total positive sequence impedance of the protected line (complex
value),
Z m 0 is the zero sequence mutual impedance between the two circuits
(complex value).
The complex mutual compensation coefficient is defined by two settings: kZm Mutual
Set. (the absolute value) and kZm Mutual Angle (the angle in degrees).
The major disadvantage of standard mutual compensation is that faults on a parallel line
can cause maloperation of the healthy line protection. MiCOMho P446 uses fast dynamic
control of the mutual compensation. This prevents such maloperations while providing
correct mutual compensation for faults in the protected circuit. Dynamic control is
achieved by eliminating the mutual compensation above a set level of parallel line
residual current I M compared to the protected line residual current I N .
 If the ratio I M I N is less than the Mutual Cut Off setting, the mutual
compensation is applied to all distance zones and the fault locator.
 If the ratio I M I N is greater than the Mutual Cut Off setting, no mutual
compensation is applied.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-11
4 DISTANCE PROTECTION
4.1 Distance protection introduction

MiCOMho P446 has comprehensive distance protection that comprises:
 Phase fault distance protection

 Earth fault distance protection
 Power swing detection, alarm, and blocking
 Out-of-step detection and tripping
 Switch on to fault (SOTF) and trip on reclose (TOR)
 Directional Schemes
 Aided schemes
These features are described in the following sections.
Distance protection tripping decision

MiCOMho P446 needs several conditions to be satisfied for Distance protection to trip.
These are:
 The phase selector needs to identify the faulted phases and ensure that only the
correct distance measuring zones can issue a trip. Possible phase selections are
AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA, ABC. For double phase to ground faults, the selection is
AB, BC or CA, with N (neutral) for indication only.
 For the selected phase-to-ground elements the phase and the neutral currents
must exceed the minimum sensitivity threshold. For the selected phase-to-phase
elements the loop current must exceed the minimum sensitivity threshold. The
biased neutral current detector should be picked up for any ground fault distance
element to operate.
 The faulted phase impedance must appear within a tripping (measuring) zone,
corresponding to the phase selection. Five independent protection zones are
provided. The tripping zones are mho circles or quadrilateral and are selected
independently for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults. The ground fault
distance elements always uses residual compensation and mutual compensation if
one is enabled (see sections 3.2 and 3.3).
 For directional zones, the directionality element (see section 4.5.1) must agree with
the tripping zone. Zones 1, 2, 4 are always directional whereas Zone P and 3 are
only directional if set as directional. In directional zones the directionality element
must agree with the tripping zone. For example, Zone 1 is a forward directional
zone and must not trip for reverse faults. Therefore a Zone 1 trip is only allowed if
the directionality element issues a forward decision. Zone 4 is reverse-looking so
needs a reverse decision by the directionality element.
 The set time delay for the measuring zone must expire, with the fault impedance
measured inside the zone characteristic for the duration. Typically, Zone 1 has no
time delay (instantaneous), all other zones have time delays. Where channel-
aided distance schemes are used, the time delay tZ2 for overreaching Zone 2 may
be bypassed under certain conditions.
To achieve fast, sub-cycle operation, the phase selection, measuring zones and
directionality algorithms run in parallel, with their outputs combined with an AND-gate.
This helps to avoid sequential measurement which would slow the operation of the
protection.
7-12 P446/EN/TM/E
Phase fault distance protection

P446 has 5 zones of phase fault protection.
All zones can be set either with quadrilateral (polygon) characteristics or with mho
circles.
Each zone can be set independently to be permanently disabled or permanently enabled.
The protection elements are directionalized as follows:
 Zones 1 and 2 - Directional forward zones
Note: Zone 1 can be extended to Zone 1X when required in zone 1 extension schemes.
 Zones 3 and P (programmable) – Separately selectable as a directional (forward or

reverse) or offset zones.
 Zone 4 - Directional reverse zone.
Earth fault distance protection

MiCOMho P446 has 5 zones of earth (ground) fault protection. All zones can be set
either with quadrilateral characteristics or with mho circles. The choice of mho or
quadrilateral is independent of the general characteristic selection for the phase fault
elements. Each zone can be set independently to be permanently disabled, permanently
enabled or enabled if there is a protection communication channel failure.
The impedance plot in Figure 1: shows simplified mho characteristics based on default
distance settings and without dynamic expansion, while Figure 2: shows simplified
polygon (quad) characteristics.
Line Angle
+jX
Z3
(offset)
ZP
(forward)
Z2
Z1 Forward
+R
Reverse Directionality
(simplified)
Z4
P4900ENa
Figure 1: Simplified mho characteristics
P446/EN/TM/E 7-13
Line Angle
+jX
Z3 (offset)
ZP (forward)
Z2
Z1
Forward
+R
Reverse
Directionality
(simplified)
Z4
P4901ENa
Figure 2: Simplified polygon characteristics
4.2 Phase selection

Phase selection allows the IED to identify exactly which phases are involved in the fault
and allows the correct measuring zones to trip.
Operation of the distance elements is controlled by the Superimposed Current Phase
Selector. Only elements associated with the fault type selected by the phase selector are
allowed to operate during a period of two cycles following the phase selection. If these
elements do not operate, all elements are enabled for the following five cycles, before the
phase selector returns to its quiescent state.
Operation of an enabled distance element, during the two cycle or five cycle period,
causes the phase selector state to be maintained until the element resets. The one
exception to this is when the phase selector decision changes while an element is
operated. In this case, the selected elements are reset and the two cycle period restarts
with the new selection.
Note: Any existing trip decision is not reset under this condition. After the first cycle
following a selection, the phase selector is only permitted to change to a selection
involving additional phases.
On double phase to ground faults, only appropriate phase-phase elements are enabled.
This is because they are generally more accurate under these conditions than ground
elements. A biased neutral current level detector operates to indicate the involvement of
ground.
4.2.1 Theory of operation

The faulted phase or phases are selected by comparing the magnitudes of the three
phase-to-phase superimposed currents. A single phase-to-ground fault produces the
same superimposed current on two of these signals and zero on the third. A phase-to-
phase or double phase-to-ground fault produces one signal which is larger than the other
two. A three phase fault produces three superimposed currents which are the same size.
Figure 3 shows how the change in current can be used to select the faulted phases for a
CN fault.
7-14 P446/EN/TM/E
No
Change!
AB
Change!
BC
Change!
CA
Ground Fault,
P1134ENa P1179ENa
1 Cycle 1 Cycle Phase C
Comparison Comparison
Figure 3: Phase to phase currents showing change for CN fault
A superimposed current is large enough to be included in the selection if it is greater than

80% of the largest superimposed current.
A controlled decay of the superimposed threshold ensures that the phase selector resets
correctly on fault clearance.
Phase selection can only be made when any superimposed current exceeds 5% of
nominal current (In) as a default value.
Under normal power system conditions, the superimposed currents are made by
subtracting the phase-phase current sample taken 96 samples (2 cycles) earlier from the
present sample.
When a fault is detected, resulting in a phase selection being made, the previous
memorized sample used in the superimposed current calculation is taken from a recycled
buffer of previous samples. This ensures that, if the fault develops to include other
phases, the original selection is not lost. The recycling of the prefault buffers continues
until the phase selector resets, either because the fault is cleared or when the 5 cycle
period has expired and no element has operated.
Under conditions on load with high levels of sub-synchronous frequencies, it is necessary
to increase the I phase selector threshold from its default (5% In) to prevent sporadic
operation. This is automatically performed by the IED, which self-adjusts the threshold to
prevent operation due to noise signals, while still maintaining high sensitivity to faults.
To test the distance elements using test sets, which do not provide a dynamic model to
generate true fault delta conditions, select COMMISSIONING TESTS > Static Test
Mode. When set, this disables phase selector control and forces the IED to use a
conventional (non-delta) directional line.
4.2.2 Cross-country override logic

The IED has additional logic in the phase selector that allows a Zone 1 ground element to
operate for cross-country fault conditions.
A cross-country fault condition is considered to be multiple, simultaneous faults at
different locations of the network, for example on either side of a breaker. In the worst
case these faults involve different phases, for example phase A in the forward direction
and phase B in the reverse direction. In this case the cross-country override logic
prevents possible maloperation of the phase-to-phase distance elements and allows the
Zone1 AN ground element to trip.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-15
The cross-country override logic applies when the IED makes a multiple phase selection
(more than one phase is involved in the fault) and exactly one Zone 1 ground element
picks up, with no other ground elements. Only on-angle operation of the Zone 1 ground
element can activate the cross-country logic, which prevents incorrect operation due to
impedance encroachment.
The cross-country logic also only allows Zone 1 ground elements to operate for one of
the phases that were selected previously. For example, if the original phase selection
was A and B phases, it would only allow the override for Zone 1 AN or BN elements.
4.3 Biased neutral current detector

According to the phase selection algorithm, if the enabled distance elements do not
operate during two cycles following the phase selection, all elements are enabled for the
following five cycles. For an out-of-zone double-phase-to-ground fault, during these five
cycles one of the phase-to-ground elements could demonstrate significant overreach,
which may result in maloperation. The Biased Neutral Current Detector helps to prevent
such situation by enabling ground elements only if sufficient neutral current is detected.
I N  I A  I B  IC
Neutral current
K  10%
I BIAS  max  I A  I B , I B  I C , I C  I A 
Figure 4: Biased Neutral Current Detector Characteristic
The neutral current detector uses maximum of three phase current differences as a
biasing value. The slope of the characteristic is fixed at 10%.
Biasing the neutral current detector has distinct advantages. The detector is sensitive
enough to operate for any single-phase fault, without the risk of picking up on neutral spill
current during phase-to-phase faults. The neutral spill current might arise from
mismatched current transformers or CT saturation.
The biasing also ensures that the ground distance elements are generally disabled for
double-phase-to-ground faults with high resistance in the neutral. Such faults can occur in
resistively grounded systems, or in solidly grounded systems due to high arc resistance.
Given that these conditions are very similar to pure phase-to-phase faults, the ground
distance elements can exhibit high measuring errors.
4.4 Measuring zones – theory of operation

All distance zones in the IED are constructed with one (for mho characteristics) or several
(for quad characteristics) comparators. These comparators operate in the voltage
domain and compare phase angles of two voltage values: S1 and S 2 . Using these angle
comparators is significantly faster than calculating fault impedance and detecting if this
impedance is within a characteristic.
7-16 P446/EN/TM/E
4.4.1 Mho characteristic
Directional Self-polarised Mho characteristic
Note: The directional self-polarised mho characteristic is not used in the IED because it is
unable to operate for close-up zero voltage faults. The IED always uses partial
memory or cross-polarisation, see section 4.4.1.3. The self-polarised characteristic is
described here to show the concept of the mho angle comparators and
impedance/voltage domains for phase distance elements.
 jX
V IZ
V IZ
Z
IZ
R I
V I
Figure 5: Directional mho element construction – impedance and voltage domain
The following parameters are used in Figure 5.
Z is the impedance reach setting,

V is the distance protection voltage (i.e. V  V A  VB for A-B fault),
I is the distance protection current (i.e. I  I A  I B for A-B fault),
V I is the impedance measurement of the IED.
Since Z is the diameter of the circle, for all points inside this circle the following condition
is true in impedance domain:
90  V I   V I  Z   90 , Equation 5
The above condition can be converted into the voltage domain by multiplying all
parameters by the distance protection current I , see Figure 5.
90  V  V  I  Z   90 , Equation 6

The two signals provided to the comparator are:
S1  V , Equation 7
S2  V  I  Z . Equation 8
P446/EN/TM/E 7-17
Operation occurs when the angle between the signals is greater than 90°:
90  S1  S 2  90 . Equation 9
Offset mho characteristic – impedance and voltage domain
 jX
V IZ V IZ
Z
IZ
V I
V
V I  Z V  I  Z
R I
Z I  Z
Figure 6: Offset mho characteristic – impedance and voltage domain
where
Z is the forward impedance reach setting,
Z  is the reverse impedance reach setting.

S1  V  I  Z  ,
S2  V  I  Z .
90  S1  S 2  90 .
Self-polarized offset mho characteristic with 10% reverse reach is used for all zones
(including zones with original quadrilateral setting) during power swings to guarantee
maximum stability of the distance protection.
Directional Self-polarised Mho characteristic
Note: The directional self-polarised mho characteristic is not actually used in the IED
because it is unable to operate for close-up zero voltage faults. The IED always uses
partial memory- or cross-polarisation, see section 4.4.1.3. The self-polarised
characteristic is described to show the concept of the mho angle comparator and Z1 /
ZLP -plane representations in the context of the ground distance elements.
Characteristics of ground elements can be represented in two different complex planes:

positive sequence impedance plane ( Z1 -plane) and loop impedance plane ( Z LP -plane).
The reach impedance setting defines the IED reach in positive sequence impedance
terms, so the characteristic on Z1 -plane is static. The characteristic in Z LP -plane is
generally dynamic because it depends on fault currents. However, Z LP -plane
7-18 P446/EN/TM/E
representation is often more convenient, especially if an injection test kit is used which
can not apply the residual compensation to the impedance plot.
Directional mho
Z LP -plane
Z1 -plane jX Z  k ZN  I N I ph
 jX
V ph I ph  Z replica
V IZ
Z Z
Z replica
90°
90°
R R
V I V ph I ph
P4905ENa
Figure 7: Directional mho element construction – impedance domain
The following parameters are used in Figure 7:

V is the distance protection voltage (i.e. V  VA for AN fault),
I is the distance protection current (i.e. I  I A  kZN  I N for A-N fault, see section 3.2,
or I  I A  kZN  I N  kZm  I M if the mutual compensation is enabled, see section 3.3),
V I is the positive sequence impedance measurement of the IED.

After converting this characteristic into voltage domain (in the same way as shown in
Figure 5) the two signals provided to the comparator can be defined:
S1  V ,
S2  V  I  Z .
90  S1  S 2  90 .
To get a Z LP -plane representation of the characteristic, V and I must be replaced with
V ph and I ph  kZN  I N correspondingly (where V ph and I ph are the faulty phase voltage
and current):
S1  V ph
 
S2  V ph  I ph  Z  1  kZN  I N I ph .
Dividing S1 and S2 by I ph converts the characteristic into impedance domain, see

Figure 7.
The following parameters are used in Figure 7:
P446/EN/TM/E 7-19
Z replica is the replica impedance reach,

Z replica  Z  1  kZN  I N I ph 
or, if the mutual compensation is enabled,

Z replica  Z  1  kZN  I N I ph  kZm  I M I ph . 
where
kZN is the residual compensation coefficient,
I N is the residual current (derived),
k Zm is the mutual compensation coefficient,
I M is the residual current of the parallel line,
V ph is the faulty phase voltage ( VA for AN fault),
I ph is the faulty phase current ( I A for A-N fault),
V ph I ph is the loop impedance measurement of the IED.
If healthy phase currents are much less then the current of the faulty phase and the
mutual compensation is disabled,
I N  I ph (faulty phase current) and Z replica  Z  1  k ZN 
Therefore the Z LP -plane representation of the characteristic becomes static.
Offset mho characteristics
 jX Z1 -plane
V IZ
Z
90°
V I
V I  Z
R
Z
P4906ENa
Figure 8: Offset mho characteristics – impedance domain
Where:
Z is the forward impedance reach setting,
Z  is the reverse impedance reach setting,
V is the distance protection voltage (i.e. V  VA for AN fault),
I is the distance protection current ( I  I A  kZN  I N for A-N fault),
7-20 P446/EN/TM/E
V I is the positive sequence impedance measurement of the IED.

S1  V  I  Z  ,
S2  V  I  Z .
90  S1  S2  90 .
Z LP -plane
 jX Z  k ZN  I N I ph
Z Z replica
90°
I ph
V ph

Z replica R
Z

Z   k ZN  I N I ph
P4907ENa
Figure 9: Offset mho characteristics – voltage domain
where Z replica - replica forward reach,

Z replica  Z  1  kZN  I N I ph , 

where Z replica - replica reverse reach,

Z replica 
 Z   1  kZN  I N I ph . 
Note that if the healthy phase currents are much less then the current of the faulty phase,
then I N  I ph (faulty phase current) and Z replica  Z  1  k ZN  , Z replica
  Z   1  k ZN  .
If the mutual compensation is enabled, then


Z replica  Z  1  kZN  I N I ph  kZm  I M I ph , 

Z replica  Z   1  k ZN  I N I ph  kZm  I M I ph .
4.4.1.3 Memory- or cross-polarisation
Self-polarised directional mho characteristic requires sufficient polarising voltage to detect
the angle of S1  V . Therefore such characteristic is unable to operate for close-up zero
P446/EN/TM/E 7-21
voltage faults, where there would be no polarising voltage. To ensure correct mho
element response for zero-voltage faults the IED adds a percentage of voltage from the
memory to the main polarising voltage as a substitute phase reference.
This technique is called memory-polarising and it has the advantage of preserving and
enhancing the directional properties of the mho characteristic.
The IED does not allow directional mho characteristics to be purely self polarized or
purely memory polarized. The polarising voltage always contains the directly measured
self-polarized voltage, onto which a percentage of the prefault memory voltage is added.
The setting Dist. Polarising ( p ) defines the proportion between self-polarising voltage
V (i.e. V AB for AB fault or VA for AN fault) and memory-polarising voltage Vmem (the
prefault value of the same voltage). This percentage of additional memory can be set
from 0.2 (20%) to 5 (500%).
S1  V  p  Vmem .
If p  1 the characteristic is 50%-self and 50%-memory polarised. If p  5 the
characteristic is 16.7%-self and 83.3%-memory polarised.
The memory algorithm works as follows:
1. When a line is energized, there is no memory voltage measurement for two

cycles. After these two cycles the voltage is considered valid and the IED starts
recording it.
2. Once a fault is detected (phase voltage drops below 70% or phase selector picks
up), the IED uses a value recorded two cycles before as a memory voltage.
Therefore, the memory becomes valid after 4 cycles following the line
energization, which is 80 ms for a 50 Hz system.
3. This value is retained for a settable period (the setting Mem Volt Dura defines
the number of cycles between 16 and 32) following the detection of a fault. The
memory expires much faster (in 3.2 cycles, fixed time) if power swing condition is
detected.
4. If the fault is cleared within Mem Volt Dura time (phase selector and
undervoltage detector reset), the memory algorithm resets and starts 2 cycles of
the voltage validation again (p.1).
5. If no voltage memory is available, either because the time has expired, or
following breaker closure, it is replaced by cross-polarisation voltage.
The cross-polarisation voltage is generated using a phase or phases not otherwise used
for the particular Distance or Directional measurement. While one pole is dead, and the
memory is not available, the elements associated with the remaining phases are
polarised as shown in Table 2 and the remaining elements are disabled.
The following table shows the Vmem calculations for each loop under various operating
conditions:
Cross (memory Cross (memory Cross (memory
Loop Memory Valid invalid, no poles invalid, lagging invalid, leading
dead) pole dead) pole dead)
A-N V A mem 0.5  (VB   2VC ) V B  2VC

B-N VB mem 0.5  (VC   2V A ) VC  2V A
C-N VC mem 0.5  (V A   2VB ) V A  2VB
A-B V AB mem 3 VC  e  j 90 0
7-22 P446/EN/TM/E
Cross (memory Cross (memory Cross (memory

Loop Memory Valid invalid, no poles invalid, lagging invalid, leading
dead) pole dead) pole dead)
B-C VBC mem 3 V A  e  j 90 0
C-A VCA mem 3 V B  e  j 90 0
Table 2: Memory/cross polarisation
In the table,  and  2 denote phase rotation of 120° and 240° respectively, while e  j 90
denotes phase rotation of -90°. The values of a and a 2 are interchanged when reverse
phase rotation (ACB) is selected, to provide the correct cross polarising voltages and
negative sequence volts and current. If voltage transformer is at the line side and the
memory is invalid, phase-to-phase elements are self-polarised during single pole dead
condition.
The IED does not operate the distance elements if the polarising signal magnitude is less
than 1V, except for Zone 1 following breaker closure, which is allowed to operate as a
Mho characteristic with a reverse offset of 25%. This ensures operation when closing on
to a close-up three phase fault (SOTF/TOR condition). Also Z4 reverse operation is held
if it operates while memory is valid. Other zones may have their zone time delays
bypassed for SOTF/TOR condition, as detailed in the application notes.
One of the additional benefits of adding memory into the polarizing mix is that mho
characteristics offer dynamic expansion in the event of a forward fault, therefore covering
greater fault arc resistance.
Dynamic mho expansion

The signals provided to mho-comparators in case of memory-polarisation are:
S1  V  p  Vmem ,
S2  V  I  Z .
where
V is the self-polarisation voltage,
Vmem is the memory- (cross-) polarisation voltage.
Trip condition in the voltage domain:
90  V  p  Vmem   V  I  Z   90
The same condition in the impedance domain is
90  V I  p  Vmem I   V I  Z   90
The memory voltage Vmem is a pre-fault voltage, and the pre-fault voltage at the relaying
point is equal to the source voltage (assuming the pre-fault current is zero):
Vmem  VS
P446/EN/TM/E 7-23
IED
Dist
VS Bus I
Line
ZS ZF
V
P4908ENa
Figure 10: Simplified forward fault
For a fault condition we can write the following equation:

VS  V  I  Z S ,
90  (1  p)  V I  p  Z S   V I  Z   90
 
 Z S   V I  Z   90
p
90  V I 
 1 p 
 jX
V IZ
Z
V I
R
p
  ZS p
1 p V I  ZS
1 p
Figure 11: Mho expansion – forward fault
For the phase-to-ground loops, Figure 11 shows the impedance characteristic in the Z1 -
plane.
I VS
ZF ZL ZS
V
Figure 12: Simplified reverse fault
7-24 P446/EN/TM/E
VS  V  I  ( Z S  Z L )
 
 ( Z S  Z L )   V I  Z   90
p
90  V I 
 1 p 
p
V I  (ZS  ZL )
1 p
 jX
90°
V IZ
p
 (Z S  Z L )
1 p
V I
R
Self-polarised
P4911ENa
Figure 13: Mho contraction – reverse fault
For the phase-to-ground loops, Figure 13 shows the impedance characteristic in the Z1 -
plane.
From Figure 11 and Figure 13 the mho-expansion and mho-contraction is defined as
follows:
For forward faults:
p
MhoExpansion   ZS
1 p
where Z S is the impedance of the source behind the relaying point.
For reverse faults:

p
MhoContraction   (ZS  ZL )
1 p
where Z S  Z L is the impedance of the line and the source ahead of the relaying point.
Using the source and line impedances is a simple way of representing the mho-
expansion and mho-contraction on the impedance plot. The IED does not calculate Z S
or Z S  Z L internally, it only deals with the signals S1 and S 2 provided to mho-
comparators. In some cases the source and line impedances in Figure 11 and Figure 13
are different to their actual values used in various power system studies. This is mainly
P446/EN/TM/E 7-25
due to pre-fault current and the residual compensation for phase-to-ground loops. To plot
an accurate impedance characteristic, calculate the values of Z S or Z S  Z L as follows:
For forward faults:

Vmem  V
ZS 
I
For reverse faults:
V  Vmem
ZS  ZL 
I
4.4.2 Quadrilateral characteristic

Directional quadrilateral elements
The forward (reverse) quadrilateral directional elements consist of combinations of
quadrilateral impedance characteristics with a 25% reverse (forward) reach and a
separate directional element (see section 4.5.1).
Directional quadrilateral
This characteristic is used for Zones 1, 2, 3 (optionally reversed), P (optionally reversed),
and 4 (reversed).
+jX
Top reactance line
Left resistive blinder Z

Right resistive blinder
 0.25 R R
Forward
+R
Reverse Directionality
 0.25 Z (simplified)
Bottom reactance line

P4912ENa
Figure 14: Quadrilateral characteristics (directional line shown simplified)
The directional quadrilateral is formed from two parallel reactance lines, two parallel
resistive reach blinders, and is controlled by the delta or conventional directional line.
The bottom reactance line and the left hand reach blinder are automatically set to 25% of
the reactance reach and the right hand blinder respectively. The reactance line is
arranged to operate for faults below the line, the blinders for faults within the resistive
reach limits and the delta directional line for forward faults. The counter increments when
all of these conditions are satisfied.
Offset quadrilateral
This characteristic is used for Zone 3, Zone P when the offset is enabled.
7-26 P446/EN/TM/E
R R
Z
Figure 15: Offset quadrilateral for Zone 3, Zone P
The offset quadrilateral is formed from two reactance lines and two resistive reach
blinders. The upper reactance line is arranged to operate for faults below it and the lower
for faults above it. The right hand blinder is arranged to operate for faults to its left and
the left hand blinder for faults to its right.
Note: When Zone 3 or Zone P is set to offset in the Simple setting mode, the left hand
blinder and lower reactance line equal the offset percentage setting of the line
impedance and fault resistance respectively. In the advanced setting mode, both
lines can be set independently.
Reactance line - top line of quadrilateral
+jX
V IZ

Z V I
+R
P4914ENa
Figure 16: Reactance line - top line of quadrilateral
P446/EN/TM/E 7-27
For all V I vectors below the top reactance line the following condition is true:
V I  Z    .
The same condition in the voltage domain is:
 
V  I  Z    I  e j ,
where e j denotes phase rotation of the settable angle  .

The conversion from the impedance domain into the voltage domain is done in the same
way as for the Mho characteristic, see Figure 5
Finally, the two signals provided to the comparator are:
S1  V  I  Z ,
S 2  I  e j .
The impedance below the top reactance line is detected when the angle between the
signals is less than 0°:
S1  S 2  0 .
Reactance line - bottom line of quadrilateral

The tilting of the phase elements’ bottom line is fixed at minus three degrees (-3°).
Z V I
 3
V I  Z
Figure 17: Reactance line - bottom line of quadrilateral
For an offset zone Z  is a settable reverse reach . For a directional zone Z  is 25% of
the forward reach Z :
Z   0.25  Z
The signals provided to the comparator are:
S1  V  I  Z  ,
S2  I  e j 3 ,
where e  j 3 denotes phase rotation of -3°.
7-28 P446/EN/TM/E
The impedance above the bottom reactance line is detected when the angle between the
signals is greater than 0°:
S1  S 2  0 .
Right hand resistive reach line
+jX
V I
V IR
R Z +R
P4916ENa
Figure 18: Right hand resistive reach line
For all V I vectors which are on the left side of the right blinder the following condition is
true:
V I  R   Z .
V  I  R   I  Z  ,
The conversion from the impedance domain into the voltage domain is done in the same
way as for the Mho characteristic, see Figure 5.
Finally, the two signals provided to the comparator are:
S1  V  I  R ,
S2  I  Z .
The impedance on the left side of the right hand resistive line is detected when the angle
between the signals is greater than 0°:
S1  S 2  0 .
Quadrilateral phase resistive reaches

The setting Rx Ph. Resistive defines the complete loop resistive reach RLP of the
Distance Protection, see the following figure:
P446/EN/TM/E 7-29
IED
Dist V I  Half of the loop
Bus
A
ZF
R LP B
Network Line
P4917ENa
Figure 19: Resistive reach of phase elements
Since any phase-to-phase distance element measures half of the loop, the right-hand
resistive reach R of the characteristic shown in Figure 18 is equal to half of the setting:
1
R Rx Ph. Resistive
2
Left hand resistive reach line
+jX
Z
V I
V I  R +R
R
P4918ENa
Figure 20: Right hand resistive reach line
For an offset zone R is a settable reverse resistive reach …. For a directional zone R
is 25% of the forward resistive reach R :
R  0.25  R .
S1  V  I  R ,
S2  I  Z .
The impedance on the right side of the left hand resistive line is detected when the angle
between the signals is less than 0°:
7-30 P446/EN/TM/E
S1  S 2  0 .
Summary for phase quadrilateral characteristic
+jX
Z
V I
R R +R
Z
 3
P4919ENa
Figure 21: Phase quadrilateral summary
Comparators:
Forward or Offset Zone

Line S1 S2 Condition
Top Line V IZ I  e j S1  S 2  0

Bottom Line V  I  Z I  e  j 3 S1  S 2  0
Right Line V IR IZ S1  S 2  0
Left Line V  I  R IZ S1  S 2  0
Reverse Zone
Top Line V IZ  I  e j S1  S 2  0

Bottom Line V  I  Z  I  e  j 3 S1  S 2  0
Right Line V IR IZ S1  S 2  0
Left Line V  I  R IZ S1  S 2  0
Parameters
Parameter Forward or Reverse Zone Offset Zone
Zx Ph. Reach Zx Ph. Reach
Z
 Zx Ph. Angle  Zx Ph. Angle
P446/EN/TM/E 7-31

0.25 * Zx Ph. Reach Zx' Ph Rev Reach
Z
 Zx Ph. Angle + 180°  Zx Ph. Angle + 180°
0.5 * Rx Ph. Resistive 0.5 * Rx Ph. Resistive
R
 0°  0°
0.125 * Rx Ph. Resistive 0.5 * Rx' Ph. Res. Rev
R
 180°  180°
 Zx Tilt Top Line Zx Tilt Top Line
Reactance line - top line of quadrilateral

The ground loops measure the positive sequence fault impedance V I , where V is the
distance protection voltage (i.e. V  VA for AN fault), I is the distance protection current
( I  I A  k ZN  I N for A-N fault without the mutual compensation). To avoid over- (under-)
reaching due to the voltage drop in the arc resistance, the top line of the characteristic
should be ideally tilted by the following angle:
 I fault  I 
      fault  e j  ,
 I   I 
The distance protection can not measure the fault current directly because of the
unknown infeed from the remote end. Therefore one of two methods is used to estimate
the angle of I fault :
6. The “fixed” tilting, when the angle of I fault is assumed to be close to the angle of
I ph (the local phase current):
I fault  I ph
The quad characteristic is polarised by the fault phase current I ph .
I
7. The “dynamic” tilting, when the angle of fault is assumed to be close to the angle
of I 2 (the local negative sequence current):
I fault  I 2
The quad characteristic is polarised by the negative sequence current I 2 .
For both fixed and dynamic tilting the validity of current polarisation is controlled by the
following condition:
I 2  I ph  45 .
If this condition is not fulfilled, assumptions () and () are possibly too far from reality and
the current polarisation is considered invalid. Since the quad characteristic can
significantly over- or under-reach under such conditions, the IED automatically switches
from quad to mho characteristics to provide better stability.
FIXED TILTING (the setting Zx Dynamic Tilt is disabled):
7-32 P446/EN/TM/E
Z1-plane
 Iph j 
+jX  e 
 I 
V IZ
Z V I
+R
P4920ENa
For all V I vectors below the top reactance line, the following condition is true:
 I ph j  
V I  Z     e  .
 I 
V  I  Z   ( I ph  e j )
Since for a ground loop V  V ph and I  I ph  k ZN  I N provided that the mutual

compensation is disabled, the signals fed into comparator are:
S1  V ph  I ph  Z replica ,
S 2  I ph  e j ,
where Z replica is the replica forward reach

Z replica  Z  1  kZN  I N I ph , 
The impedance below the top reactance line is detected when the angle between the
signals is less than 0°:
S1  S 2  0 .

Z replica  Z  1  k ZN  I N I ph  k Zm  I M I ph . 
The following figure shows the Z LP -plane representation of the characteristic:
P446/EN/TM/E 7-33
Z LP -plane
+jX Z  k ZN  I N I ph V ph I ph  Z replica
Z replica
Z
V ph I ph
+R
P4921ENa
Note the following important points:
8. The top line tilting angle in Z LP -plane characteristic is fixed at setting  (Zx Tilt
Top Line).
9. The top line tilting angle in Z1 -plane characteristic is defined as follows:
 I ph   I ph 
TiltAngle         
  I ph  k ZN  I N 
 I   
If the healthy phase currents are much less than the current of the faulty phase, then
I N  I ph . The tilting angle in this case is fixed at the following value:
 1 
TiltAngle     
 1  k ZN 
If the mutual compensation is enabled, the tilting angle is:
 I ph 
TiltAngle    
 I ph  k ZN  I N  k ZM  I M 
 
10. The replica reach Z replica depends on the ratio of I N I ph . If I N  I ph then
Z replica  Z  1  k ZN  .
7-34 P446/EN/TM/E
+jX Z LP -plane
Z replica
V ph I ph

RLP RLP
+R
 3
 ica
Z repl
P4922ENa
Figure 24: General characteristic in Z LP -plane
Comparators:
Top Line V ph  I ph  Z replica I ph  e j S1  S 2  0
Bottom Line 
V ph  I ph  Z replica I ph  e  j 3 S1  S 2  0
Right Line V ph  I ph  RLP I ph  Z replica S1  S 2  0
Left Line 
V ph  I ph  RLP I ph  Z replica S1  S 2  0
Reverse Zone
Top Line V ph  I ph  Z replica  I ph  e j S1  S 2  0
Bottom Line 
V ph  I ph  Z replica  I ph  e  j 3 S1  S 2  0
Right Line V ph  I ph  RLP  I ph  Z replica S1  S 2  0
Left Line 
V ph  I ph  RLP  I ph  Z replica S1  S 2  0
Replica reach impedances calculation:


Z replica  Z  1  k ZN  I N I ph 

Z replica  Z   1  k ZN  I N I ph 
If the mutual compensation is enabled
P446/EN/TM/E 7-35

Z replica  Z  1  k ZN  I N I ph  k Zm  I M I ph , 

Z replica  Z   1  k ZN  I N I ph  k Zm  I M I ph 
Parameters
Zx Gnd. Reach Zx Gnd. Reach
Z
 Zx Gnd. Angle  Zx Gnd. Angle
0.25 * Zx Gnd. Reach Zx' Gnd Rev Rch
Z
 Zx Gnd. Angle + 180°  Zx Gnd. Angle + 180°
Rx Gnd Resistive Rx Gnd Resistive
RLP
 0°  0°
0.25 * Rx Gnd Resistive Rx' Gnd Res. Rev

RLP
 180°  180°
 Zx Tilt Top Line Zx Tilt Top Line
+jX Z1 -plane
 ( I ph I )  
Z
V I
R
+R
Z R
 ( I ph I )  3
P4923ENa
Figure 25: Generali characteristic in Z1 -plane
I ph I ph
R  RLP  , R  RLP
 
I I
I  I ph  k ZN  I N

I  I ph  k ZN  I N  k Zm  I M
If the healthy phase currents are much less than the current of the faulty phase and the
mutual compensation is disabled, then I N  I ph (the faulty phase current) and the
characteristic in the Z1 -plane is simplified:
7-36 P446/EN/TM/E
+jX Z1 -plane
 1 
   
 1  k ZN 
Z
1
 
RLP
1  k ZN 1
RLP 
1  k ZN

Rreach Rreach +R
Z
 1 
   3
 1  k ZN 
P4924ENa
Figure 26: Simplified characteristic in Z1 -plane
RLP sin Z   

Rreach   ,
1  k ZN sin Z 
R ' LP sin Z   

R 'reach   
1  k ZN sin Z 
1
where  is the angle of :
1  k ZN
 1 
    .
 1  k ZN 
Example:
k ZN  0.58  e  j 6 , Z  84
 1 
    j 6 
 2 .2 
 1  0.58  e 
sin Z    sin 84  2.2
  1.0033 Equation 10
sin Z  sin 84
RLP
Rreach   1.0033
1  k ZN

RLP

Rreach   1.0033
1  k ZN
In typical cases the sine ratio coefficient (Equation 10) is close to unity so the simplified
equations can be used:
RLP
Rreach 
1  k ZN
P446/EN/TM/E 7-37

RLP

Rreach 
1  k ZN
DYNAMIC TILTING (the setting Zx Dynamic Tilt is enabled):
When the user selects the Dynamic tilting, the top line of the ground distance
quadrilateral characteristic in Z1 -plane tilts for the angle difference between the negative
sequence current and the distance protection current plus the user-settable angle (default
angle is -3°):
I 
TiltAngle   2   
 I 
The default starting (initial) tilt angle of -3° is introduced to reduce the possibility of
overreach caused by any small differences between the negative sequence source
impedances, and general CT/VT angle tolerances.
Negative sequence current is used as a reference for ground faults since it provides a
better estimate of the current in the fault than either the faulted phase current or zero
sequence current (used in previous models). Therefore the reactance line follows the
fault resistance impedance and tilts up or down, starting from the set initial tilt angle to
avoid underreach or overreach.
The following additional constraints also exist to ensure the top/bottom line does not tilt
too far:
 The Zone 1 reactance top line can only dynamically tilt down to ensure that Zone 1
does not overreach. This maintains grading/selectivity with downstream protection.
 The Zones 1X, 2, 3, P, 4 reactance top lines can only dynamically tilt up to ensure
that these zones do not underreach. This is particularly important for Zone 2 or
other zones used to key channel-aided distance schemes.
 The reactance bottom line for all zones can only dynamically tilt down.
If any circuit breaker pole is open, the internal pole dead logic is used. The Dynamic
Tilting is disabled automatically and the IED uses the Fixed Tilting algorithm.
The IED uses the following algorithm for dynamic tilting:
11. If the angle between I 2 and I ph is more than 45°, the quadrilateral
characteristics are disabled and the mho characteristics are used instead.
12. The leading and lagging polarising currents are detected based on phase
relations between I 2 and I ph :
I LEAD  I ph I ph I LEAD  I 2
I LAG  I 2 I LAG  I ph
I2
I ph
I2
Figure 27: Phase relations between I 2 and I ph for lead and lag polarising currents
13. The comparators used for Zone 1 top and bottom lines are:
7-38 P446/EN/TM/E
Top Line V ph  I ph  Z replica I LAG  e j S1  S 2  0
Bottom Line 
V ph  I ph  Z replica I LAG  e  j 3 S1  S 2  0
If the lagging current I LAG is equal to the negative sequence current I 2 , the top and
bottom lines are dynamically tilted down.
If the lagging current I LAG is equal to the phase fault current I ph , the characteristic is the
same as for the Fixed Tilt.
14. The comparators used for Zones 1X, 2, 3, P, 4, top and bottom lines are:
Top Line V ph  I ph  Z replica I LEAD  e j S1  S 2  0
Bottom Line 
V ph  I ph  Z replica I LAG  e  j 3 S1  S 2  0
Reverse Zone
Top Line V ph  I ph  Z replica  I LEAD  e j S1  S 2  0
Bottom Line 
V ph  I ph  Z replica  I LAG  e  j 3 S1  S 2  0
Possible cases:
If the leading current I LEAD is equal to the negative sequence current I 2 , the top lines
are dynamically tilted up.
If the leading current I LEAD is equal to the phase fault current I ph , the top lines are the
same as for the Fixed Tilt.
If the lagging current I LAG is equal to the negative sequence current I 2 , the bottom lines
are dynamically tilted down.
If the lagging current I LAG is equal to the phase fault current I ph , the bottom lines are
the same as for the Fixed Tilt.
15. The left and right resistive reach lines are the same as for the Fixed Tilting.
If the dynamic tilting by the negative sequence current I 2 is used for both top and bottom
lines, the characteristic in the Z LP -plane is as follows (Zone 1 example):
P446/EN/TM/E 7-39
+jX Z LP -plane
 ( I 2 I ph )  
Z replica
V ph I ph
+R

Z replica
 ( I 2 I ph )  3
P4926ENa
Figure 28: Zone 1 example for dynamic tilting
The same characteristic in the Z1 -plane:
+jX Z1 -plane
(I2 I )  
Z
V I
+R
Z
 ( I 2 I )  3
P4927ENa
Figure 29: Zone 1 example for dynamic tilting
4.5 Distance elements zone settings

For most applications configure the IED in Simple setting mode so that all zone reaches
are based on the protected line impedance, scaled by a reach percentage. Then there is
no need to set the individual zone ohmic reaches and compensation factors because the
automatic calculation determines these settings. Therefore with Simple settings, the
menu column GROUP x DISTANCE ELEMENTS is just a list of what settings have been
automatically calculated and applied. This list is useful as a reference for commissioning
and periodic injection testing.
Using the Advanced setting mode, the user has decided to set all the zones and must
complete all the reach and residual/mutual compensation settings for each zone.
7-40 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: Distance zones are directionalized (where applicable) by a delta directional decision.
The characteristic angle for this decision is set along with the Delta Directional
configuration, in the GROUP x DISTANCE SETUP menu column. The default setting
is 60o.
4.5.1 Directionality – Delta and Conventional

The IED uses the delta directional technique whenever possible. If no decision can be
made by the delta directional algorithm, the distance protection switches to the
conventional directional technique with memory- (cross-) polarisation of the voltage.
The main reasons why the delta directional technique might not be able to make a
decision are:
 The delta directional algorithm is disabled or COMMISSIONING TESTS > Static
Test Mode is set
 The memory has elapsed or is not valid due to a SOTF condition
 There is no sufficient change in voltage and current (no delta measured)
The Conventional Directional technique uses the polarising signal from mho characteristic
calculations, see section 4.4.1.3:
S1  V  p  Vmem .
The second signal provided to the comparator is
S 2  I  e j 60 .
A forward fault is detected if the following condition is true:
 90  S1  S 2  90 .
The RCA (Relay Characteristic Angle) of the Conventional Directional element is fixed at
60°.
4.5.2 Phase fault zone settings

Each zone has additional settings that are not accessible in the Simple set mode. These
settings are:
 A minimum current sensitivity setting,

 A tilt angle on the top line of any quadrilateral set for phase faults.
By factory defaults, the top line of quadrilateral characteristics is not fixed as a horizontal
reactance line. To account for phase angle tolerances in the line CT, VT and IED, the
line is tilted downwards at a droop of -3o. This tilt down helps to prevent zone 1
overreach.
In Advanced setting mode, the top line tilt is settable.
The current sensitivity setting for each zone is used to set the minimum current that must
flow in each of the faulted phases before a trip can occur. For example, if a phase A-B
line fault is present, the IED must measure both currents Ia and Ib above the minimum
set sensitivity.
The default setting is 7.5% In for Zones 1 and 2, 5% In for other zones, ensuring that
distance element operation is not constrained, right through to an SIR ratio of 60.
4.5.3 Ground fault zone settings

The Ground reach settings (Reach and Angle) are set according to the positive sequence
line impedance, so are generally identical to the Phase reach settings.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-41
The top line of ground quadrilateral characteristics is not fixed as a horizontal reactance
line. To account for phase angle tolerances in the line CT, VT and the IED, the line is
tilted downwards at a “droop” of -3o. This tilt down helps to prevent zone 1 overreach. To
further improve performance this line incorporates an additional dynamic tilt, which
changes according to the phase angle between the faulted phase current and the
negative sequence current:
 Zone 1 is allowed to tilt down to avoid overreaching for prefault power export;
 Zones 2 and 3 are allowed to tilt up to avoid underreaching for prefault power
import.
In Advanced setting mode, the top line tilt is settable.

The current sensitivity setting for each zone is used to set the minimum current that must
flow in the faulted phase and the neutral before a trip can occur. For example, if an A-
ground fault is present, the IED must measure both currents Ia and Iresidual above the
minimum set sensitivity.
The default setting is 7.5% In for Zones 1 and 2, and 5% In for other zones, ensuring that
distance element operation is not constrained, right through to an SIR ratio of 60.
4.5.4 Distance zone sensitivities

In the Simple setting mode the minimum current sensitivity still applies but the value is
automatically calculated and applied based on the data entered in the Simple settings
fields. The criteria used to calculate the setting value are needed for a minimum value of
current flowing in the faulted loop and for the Zone reach point voltage. For Zones 3, P,
and 4, the minimum current must be greater than 5% of the rated current and the
minimum voltage at the Zone reach point must be 0.25 V. The current equating to the
reach point criteria can be expressed as 0.25/Zone reach and the sensitivity can be
expressed as:-
Sensitivity (Z3, ZP, Z4) = max (5%In, (0.25/Zone reach))
Zones 1 and 2 are set less sensitive than the reverse Zone 4. This ensures stability of
the IED in either an overreaching or a blocking scheme. For Zones 1 and 2, the same
criteria are applied as for Zones 3, P, and 4. Also a minimum sensitivity criterion is
applied, depending on the Zone 4 sensitivity. The sensitivity must exceed 1.5 x Zone 4
sensitivity and can be expressed as:-
Sensitivity (Z1, Z2) = max (5%In, (0.25/Zone reach), (1.5 x Zone 4 sensitivity))
Or
Sensitivity (Z1, Z2) = max (5%In, (0.25/Zone reach), (1.5 x (0.25/Zone 4 reach)))
The dependency on the Zone 4 element always applies, even if Zone 4 is disabled.
The default reach setting for Zones 1, 2, and 4 are 80%, 120%, and 150% respectively.
For these settings the zone-dependent terms can be reduced to:
0.25/Zone 1 reach = 0.25/(0.8 x line impedance)
0.25/Zone 2 reach = 0.25/(1.2 x line impedance)
1.5 x (0.25/Zone 4 reach) = 0.25/line impedance
In such cases, for Zone 1, the dominant Zone reach term is that of Zone 1 and the
equation can be reduced to:
Sensitivity (Z1) = max (5%In, (0.25/(0.8 x line impedance)))
For lines with an impedance of less than 6.25 Ω the Zone 1 reach term dominates and
the sensitivity is greater than 5% In. Above this line impedance the sensitivity is 5% In.
Similarly, for Zone 2, the dominant Zone reach term is that of Zone 4 and the equation
can be reduced to:
Sensitivity (Z2) = max (5%In, (0.25/line impedance))
7-42 P446/EN/TM/E
For lines with an impedance of less than 5 Ω the Zone reach term dominates and the
sensitivity is greater than 5% In. Above this line impedance the sensitivity is 5% In.
In Advanced mode the same restrictions as minimum sensitivity should be applied to
ensure distance element accuracy.
4.6 Conventional voltage transformer and capacitor VT applications

The IED achieves fast trip times due to an optimized counting strategy. For faults on
angle and up to 80% of the set reach of the zone, a counter increments quickly to reach
the level at which a trip is issued. Near the characteristic boundary, the count increments
more slowly to avoid transient overreach and to ensure boundary accuracy. This strategy
is entirely sufficient where conventional wound voltage transformers are used. Therefore
where capacitor-coupled voltage transformers (CVT) are not used, CVT Filters can be
set to Disabled.
Where capacitor-coupled voltage transformers are used, for a close-up fault, the transient
component can be very large in relation to the fundamental component of fault voltage.
The IED has setting options to allow additional filtering to be switched-in when required.
The filter options depend on the likely severity of the CVT transient. The two filtering
methods are:
 CVTs with passive suppression of ferroresonance.

 CVTs with active suppression of ferroresonance.
4.6.1 CVTs with passive suppression of ferroresonance

Passive suppression uses an anti-resonance design and the resulting transient distortion
is fairly small. Sometimes such suppression is classed as a type 2 CVT. In passive CVT
applications, the affect on characteristic accuracy is generally negligible for source to line
impedance ratios of less than 30 (SIR < 30). However, at high SIRs it is advisable to use
the slower count strategy. This is done by setting CVT Filters to Passive.
By enabling this filter, the IED is not slowed unless the SIR is above that set. If the line
terminal has an SIR below the setting, the IED can still trip subcycle. If the SIR is
estimated higher than the setting, the instantaneous operating time is increased by about
a quarter of a power frequency cycle. The IED estimates the SIR as the ratio of nominal
rated voltage Vn to the size of the comparator vector IZ (in volts):
SIR = Vn/IZ
Where:
Vn = Nominal phase to neutral voltage
I = Fault current
Z = Reach setting for the zone concerned
Therefore for slower counting I needs to be low, as restricted by a relatively weak infeed
and Z needs to be small, as for a short line.
4.6.2 CVTs with active suppression of ferroresonance

Active suppression uses a tuned L-C circuit in the CVT. The damping of transients is not
as efficient as for the passive designs. Such suppression is often termed a type 1 CVT.
In active CVT applications, to ensure reach point accuracy, CVT Filters is set to Active.
The IED then varies the count strategy according to the calculated SIR (= Vn / IZ).
Subcycle tripping is maintained for lower SIRs, up to a ratio of 2. The instantaneous
operating time is increased by about a quarter of a power frequency cycle at higher SIRs.
Transients caused by voltage dips, however severe, do not affect the IED’s directional
measurement because the IED uses voltage memory.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-43
4.7 Load blinding (load avoidance)

Load blinders are provided for both phase and ground fault distance elements, to prevent
misoperation (mal-tripping) for heavy load flow. The purpose is to configure a blinder
envelope which surrounds the expected worst case load limits, and to block tripping for
any impedance measured within the blinded region. Only a fault impedance which is
outside of the load area is allowed to cause a trip. The blinder characteristics are shown
in Figure 30.
Operate
Blind
Radius
Z
Load
Blind
b R
Blind
Blind
Operate
P1134ENa P1232ENa
Figure 30: Load blinder characteristics
In Figure 30:
 Z denotes the Load/B Impedance setting. This sets the radius of the
underimpedance circle.
  denotes the Load/B Angle setting. This sets the angle of the two blinder
boundary lines - the gradient of the rise or fall with respect to the resistive axis.
MiCOMho P446 can allow the load blinder to be bypassed any time the measured
voltage for the phase in question falls below an undervoltage V< setting. Under such
circumstances, the low voltage could not be explained by normal voltage excursion
tolerances on-load. A fault is definitely present on the phase in question, and it is
acceptable to override the blinder action and allow the distance zones to trip according to
the entire zone shape. The benefit is that the resistive coverage for faults near to the IED
location can be higher.
4.8 Distance elements basic scheme setting

The configuration of which zones will trip, and the zone time delays is set in the menu
column GROUP x SCHEME LOGIC (where x is the setting group). Phase and ground
elements may have different time delays if required. The operation of distance zones
according to their set time delays is called the Basic Scheme,. The basic scheme always
runs, regardless of any channel-aided acceleration schemes which may be enabled .
The setting BasicScheme Mode defines how zone timers are initiated when some zones
trip.
In the Standard mode a zone timer starts only when the corresponding distance zone
start occurs, see Figure 31.
In the Alternative mode, any enabled Distance element sets Any Distance Start DDB.
This starts all Zone timers (both Phase and Ground), see Figure 32. The timers are reset
if Any Distance Start signal resets. If a distance element operates and its zone timer
also operates, a trip is issued.
7-44 P446/EN/TM/E
The Alternative mode is epecially suitable for evolving faults where the ground timers
could reset and phase timers start.
Figure 31: Basic scheme delayed trip
tGroundZ1
Ground Elements Zone 1 t
DDB Zone x Gnd Scheme block tPhaseZ1 DDB Any Dist Start
1
Phase Elements Zone 1
t
SET Zone x Gnd Scheme Enabled
tGroundZ2 tGroundZx
DDB Zone x AN & t
Ground Elements Zone 2
Ground Elements
DDB Zone x Trip
& 1 Zone x
tPhaseZ2 & 1
DDB Zone x BN
Phase Elements Zone 2 t
& DDB Zone x Trip A

DDB Zone x CN & 1
tGroundZ3

& DDB Zone x Trip B
1
1
tPhaseZ3

tPhaseZx DDB Zone x Trip C
1
tGroundZ4
&
DDB Zone x Trip N
1
DDB Zone x Phs Scheme block tPhaseZ4 &

SET Zone x Phs Scheme Enabled
& Note:
tGroundZP In below, Zone x refers to
DDB Zone x AB & t zone 1,2,3,4,p.
Ground Elements Zone P
Phase Elements
Zone x
DDB Zone x BC & 1 tPhaseZP
Phase Elements Zone P t

DDB Zone x Start A
1
DDB Zone x CA &
DDB Zone x Start B

1
DDB Zone x Start C

1
Note:
In above, Zone x refers to
zone 1,2,3,4,p. DDB Zone x Start N
1
Figure 32: Alternative timer start scheme
By default distance start events are controlled by the inputs to the basic scheme,DDB
960-989. DDB 741-760 can also produce events but these are blocked by settings in the
P446/EN/TM/E 7-45
RECORD CONTROL column. The source of these start events can be referred
depending on the customer's preference.
Signal Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone P Zone 4

Zone x Ground Block 384 386 388 390 392
Zone x Phase Block 385 387 389 391 393
Zone x AN 960 966 972 978 984
Zone x BN 961 967 973 979 985
Zone x CN 962 968 974 980 986
Zone x AB 963 969 975 981 987
Zone x BC 964 970 976 982 988
Zone x CA 965 971 977 983 989
Zone x Trip 608 613 618 623 628
Zone x Trip A 609 614 619 624 629
Zone x Trip B 610 615 620 625 630
Zone x Trip C 611 616 621 626 631
Zone x Trip N 612 617 622 627 632
Zone x Start A 741 745 749 753 757
Zone x Start B 742 746 750 754 758
Zone x Start C 743 747 751 755 759
Zone x Start N 744 748 752 756 760
Note: The numbers in the table represent the DDB signals available in the PSL.
7-46 P446/EN/TM/E
5 DELTA DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION
5.1 Delta directional comparison principle and setup
Note: The characteristic angle set in this section is also used by the DISTANCE
PROTECTION. This is because distance zones are directionalized by the delta
decision.
Delta directional comparison looks at the relative phase angle of the superimposed
current I compared to the superimposed voltage V, at the instant of fault inception.
The delta is only present when a fault occurs and a step change from the prefault steady-
state load is generated by the fault. The element issues a forward or reverse decision
which can be input into an aided channel unit protection scheme.
Under healthy network conditions the system voltage is close to Vn nominal and load
current flows. Under such steady-state conditions, if the voltage measured on each
phase now is compared with a stored memory from exactly two power system cycles
previously (equal to 96 samples), the difference between them is zero. Zero voltage
change (V = 0) and zero current change (I = 0), except when there are changes in load
current.
When a fault occurs on the system, the delta changes measured are:
V = fault voltage (time “t”) - prefault healthy voltage (t-96 samples)
I = fault current (time “t”) - prefault load current (t-96 samples)
The delta measurements are a vector difference, resulting in a delta magnitude and
angle. Under healthy system conditions the prefault values are those measured 2 cycles
earlier. When a fault is detected the prefault values are retained for the duration of the
fault.
The changes in magnitude are used to detect the presence of the fault and the angles are
used to determine whether the fault is in the Forward or Reverse direction.
Figure 33 shows a single phase to ground fault.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-47
IF1
ZS1 I1 ZL1 ZR1
V1
IF/3
IF2
ZS2 I2 ZL2 ZR2
E
V2
voltage
generator
represents
IF0 voltage
change
ZS0 I0 ZL0 ZR0 at fault
location
V0
P1134ENa P1239ENa
Figure 33: Sequence networks connection for an internal A-N fault
The fault is shown near to the busbar at end R of the line, and results in a connection of
the positive, negative, and zero sequence networks in series. The delta diagram shows
that any fault is a generator of , connected at the location of the fault inception. The
characteristics are:
 The I generated by the fault is equal to the total fault arc current.
 The I splits into parallel paths, with part contribution from source “S” and part from
remote end “R” of the line. Therefore each IED measures a lower proportion of
delta I. Must be verified for all fault types Ph-G, Ph-Ph, Ph-Ph-G, and 3-phase.
 The V generated by the fault is equal to the fault arc voltage minus the prefault
voltage, so it is in antiphase with the prefault voltage.
 The V is generally smaller, measured at the IED location because the voltage
collapse is smaller near to the source than at the fault. The delta V measured by
an IED is the voltage drop across the source impedance behind the IED location.
Must be verified for all fault types Ph-G, Ph-Ph, Ph-Ph-G, and 3-phase.
If a fault occurs at any point on the protected line, the resulting I and V as measured at
the IED location must be greater than the Delta I Fwd and Delta V Fwd settings, so the
fault can be detected.
5.2 Delta directional decision

Delta quantities are generated when the fault starts. It is then simple for the IED to
determine the direction of the fault.
Forward fault. Delta V is a decrease in voltage, so it is in the negative sense. Delta I is
a forward current flow, so it is in the positive sense. Where delta I and delta V are
approximately in antiphase, the fault is forward. The exact angle relationship for the
forward fault is:
V / I = - (Source impedance, Zs)
7-48 P446/EN/TM/E
Reverse fault. Delta V is a decrease in voltage, so it is in the negative sense. Delta I is

an outfeed flowing in the reverse direction, so it is in the negative sense. Where delta I
and delta V are approximately in phase, the fault is reverse. The exact angle relationship
for the reverse fault is:
V / I = (Remote Source impedance Zs’ + ZL)
Where ZL is protected line impedance and Zs’ source impedance behind the IED.
An RCA angle setting in the IED allows the user to set the center of the directional
characteristic according to the amount the current which nominally lags the reference
delta voltage. The characteristic boundary is then  90 degrees either side of the set
centre.
Note: Distance zone directionalizing shares the same characteristic angle setting used for
Delta directional comparison protection but uses fixed operating thresholds: V=0.5 V
and I=5%In. In distance applications, if the fault V is below the setting of 0.5 V, a
conventional distance line ensures correct forward/reverse polarizing. This is not true
for Delta directional aided schemes where sufficient V must be present for tripping to
occur.
The directional criteria for delta directional decisions are as follows.
Directional forward
-90o < (angle(I) – angle(V+180o) – RCA) < 90o
Directional reverse
-90o > (angle(I) – angle(V+180o) – RCA) > 90o
To facilitate testing of the distance elements using test sets, which do not provide a
dynamic model to generate true fault delta conditions, select COMMISSIONING TESTS >
Static Test Mode. When set, this disables phase selector control and forces the IED to
use a conventional (non-delta) directional line.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-49
6 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN IEDS
6.1 InterMiCOM
6.1.1 Protection signaling

To achieve fast fault clearance and correct discrimination for faults anywhere in a high
voltage power network, it is necessary to signal between the points at which protection
relays are connected. The following two distinct types of protection signaling can be
identified.
Unit protection schemes
In these schemes the signaling channel is used to convey analog data representative of
the power system between relays. Typically current magnitude and/or phase information
is communicated between line ends to enable a unit protection scheme to be
implemented. These unit protection schemes are not covered by InterMiCOM or
InterMiCOM64. Instead, the MiCOM P54x range of current differential and phase
comparison relays are available for unit applications.
Teleprotection - channel aided schemes
In channel-aided schemes the signaling channel is used to convey simple ON/OFF
commands from a local protection device to a remote device to provide some additional
information to be used in the protection scheme operation. The commands can be used
to accelerate in-zone fault clearance or to prevent out-of-zone tripping, or both.
The InterMiCOM application is an effective replacement to the traditional hardwired logic
and communication schemes used by protection relays for such teleprotection signaling.
The MiCOM Px4x series products have a grouping of internal digital signals known as the
digital data bus, DDB, that are used to implement the protection scheme logic. A number
of these DDB signals are reserved as inputs and outputs for the InterMiCOM application.
These are mapped using the programmable scheme logic (PSL) support tool. The
InterMiCOM application provides a means of transferring the status of these mapped
DDB signals between the protection relays using dedicated full-duplex communications
channels.
6.1.2 InterMiCOM variants

There are two different types of integrated InterMiCOM teleprotection available in the
MiCOMho P446 relays:
 An optical fiber implementation, InterMiCOM64 - designed, primarily, to work over

fiber optic and multiplexed digital communications channels with data rates of
56/64 kbit/s. A total of 16 InterMiCOM64 commands (16 inputs and 16 outputs) are
available in the MiCOMho P446. These are arranged as two groups of 8 bits each,
and are referred to as Channel 1 and Channel 2. Three InterMiCOM64 scheme
arrangements are possible:
 Two-terminal with a single communications link
 Two-terminal with a dual redundant communications link (sometimes referred to
as ‘hot standby’)
 Three terminal (or triangulated) scheme
 An electrical implementation of InterMiCOM, realised over an EIA(RS)232 medium
typically for MODEM applications and referred to as MODEM InterMiCOM for ease
of differentiation with InterMiCOM64. MODEM InterMiCOM supports two-terminal
applications with a single communications channel. Eight MODEM InterMiCOM
commands can be transmitted between the line ends.
7-50 P446/EN/TM/E
Provided the correct hardware options have been specified, it is possible to configure the
P446 to operate using either InterMiCOM64 or MODEM InterMiCOM, or both. The
selection is made under the CONFIGURATION column of the menu software.
6.1.3 InterMiCOM features

The different requirements of applications that use teleprotection signaling for direct
acting, permissive, or blocking schemes are all catered for by InterMiCOM.
Communications are supervised and alarms and signal defaults can be defined to give
controlled actions in the event of communications signals being distorted or unavailable.
Communications statistics and loopback features are available to help with
commissioning and testing purposes.
Both InterMiCOM64 and MODEM InterMiCOM teleprotection provide the ideal means to
configure schemes using the MiCOMho P446. Selection between the two depends on
communications media availability, system configuration, distances, cost issues and utility
practice.
6.1.4 Definition of teleprotection commands

Three generic types of teleprotection command can be defined. These are Intertripping,
Permissive signaling, and Blocking. All teleprotection signals are initiated in a
transmitting relay but, according to the application, the receiving relay may condition the
signal according to the scheme requirements:
Intertripping In intertripping (also called direct or transfer tripping) applications, the
command is not supervised at the receiving end by any protection
relay and its receipt causes direct circuit breaker operation. Since no
checking of the received signal by another protection element is
performed, it is essential that any noise on the signaling channel is not
interpreted as being a valid signal when the command isn’t being
transmitted. For an intertripping scheme, therefore, the primary
requirement of the signaling channel is security.
Permissive In permissive applications, tripping is only permitted when the
command coincides with a protection operation at the receiving end.
Since the receiver applies a second independent check before
tripping, the signaling channel for a permissive scheme does not have
to be quite as secure as for an intertripping scheme, but it may need
to be faster.
Blocking In blocking applications, tripping occurs when a protection element
picks up in a receiving relay whilst no signal is received from a remote
relay. In such schemes, when the command is received, the
protection element is blocked even if a protection element picks up.
Since the signal is used to prevent tripping, it is a requirement that the
signal should be available whenever possible, and that it should be
received as quickly as possible. The requirements of a blocking
channel are, therefore, to be fast and to be dependable.
Figure 34 shows the requirements for the three channel types.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-51
Speed
Permissive
faster
Blocking
slower
low
high
Security Direct Dependability

Intertrip P1342ENa
Figure 34: Pictorial comparison of operating modes
This diagram shows that a blocking signal should be fast and dependable; a direct
intertrip signal should be very secure; and a permissive signal is an intermediate
compromise of speed, security and dependability.
In MODEM InterMiCOM applications, selected signaling bits within each message can be
conditioned to provide optimal characteristics for each of the three teleprotection
command types.
In InterMiCOM64 applications, the framing and error checking of a single command
message is sufficient to meet the security of a permissive application, while the speed is
sufficiently fast to meet the needs of a blocking scheme. Accordingly in InterMiCOM64
applications, there is no differentiation between blocking commands or permissive
commands, so that only signals being used for direct intertripping with higher security
requirements need to be differentiated from those in permissive (or blocking) schemes.
6.2 MODEM InterMiCOM, EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM or Copper InterMiCOM
6.2.1 Communications media

MODEM InterMiCOM is capable of transferring up to eight commands over one
communication channel. Due to recent expansions in communication networks, most
signaling channels are now digital schemes utilizing multiplexed communications links
and for this reason, MODEM InterMiCOM provides a standard EIA(RS)232 output using
digital signaling techniques. This digital signal can then be converted using suitable
devices to a range of different communications media as required. The EIA(RS)232
output may alternatively be connected to MODEMs for use over analogue links.
Regardless of whether analogue or digital systems are being used, all the requirements
of teleprotection commands are described by an international standard, IEC60834-
1:1999, and MODEM InterMiCOM is compliant with the essential requirements of this
standard. This standard describes the speed requirements of the commands as well as
the security (defined in terms of probability of unwanted commands being received) and
dependability (defined in terms of the probability of missing commands).

InterMiCOM provides eight commands over a single communications link, with the mode
of operation of each command being individually selectable within the IM# Cmd Type
cell. Blocking mode provides the fastest signaling speed (available on commands 1 - 4),
7-52 P446/EN/TM/E
Direct Intertrip mode provides the most secure signaling (available on commands 1 - 8)
and Permissive mode provides secure, dependable signaling (available on commands 5
- 8). Each command can also be disabled so that it has no effect in the logic of the relay.
Since many applications involve commands being sent over a multiplexed
communications channel, it is necessary to ensure that only data from the correct relay is
used. The relays in the scheme must be programmed with a unique pair of addresses
that correspond with each other in the Source Address and Receive Address cells. For
example, at the local end relay, if the Source Address is set to 1, the Receive Address
at the remote end relay must also be set to 1. Similarly, if the remote end relay has a
Source Address set to 2, the Receive Address at the local end must also be set to 2.
The two pairs of addresses should be set to be different in any scheme to avoid the
possibility of incorrect operation during inadvertent loopback connections, and any
schemes sharing the same communications services should be set to have different
address pairs to avoid any problems caused by inadvertent cross-channel connections.
Noise on the communications should not be interpreted as valid commands by the relay.
For this reason, InterMiCOM uses a combination of unique pair addressing described
above, basic signal format checking and an 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
according to the security requirements of the commands. The CRC calculation is
performed at both the sending and receiving end relays for each message and both must
match to assure the security of the Direct Intertrip commands.
An alarm is provided if noise on the communications channel becomes excessive.
During periods of excessive noise, it is possible that the synchronization of the message
structure will be lost and accurate decoding of the messages may not be possible.
Predictable operation of InterMiCOM is assured during such noisy periods by means of
the IM# FallBackMode cell. The status of the last received valid command can be
maintained until a new valid message is received by setting the IM# FallBackMode cell
to Latched. Alternatively, a known fallback state can be assigned to the command by
setting the IM# FallBackMode cell to Default. In this latter case, the time period
between communication disruption and the default state being restored will need to be
set in the IM# FrameSynTim cell and the default value will need to be set in
IM# DefaultValue cell. Upon subsequent receipt of a valid message, all the timer periods
will be reset and the new valid command states will be used.
If there is a total communications failure, the relay will use the fallback (failsafe) strategy
as described above. Total failure of the channel is considered when no message data is
received for four power system cycles or if there is a loss of the DCD line.
6.2.3 EIA(RS)232 physical connections

MODEM InterMiCOM on the Px4x relays is implemented using a 9-pin D-type female
connector (labeled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board.
This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as
shown in the following table.
Pin Acronym InterMiCOM Usage
Data Carrier Detect is only used when connecting to modems otherwise
1 DCD
this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4
2 RxD Receive Data
3 TxD Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready is permanently tied high by the hardware since
4 DTR
InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel
5 GND Signal Ground
6 Not used -
Ready To Send is permanently tied high by the hardware since
7 RTS
InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel
P446/EN/TM/E 7-53
Pin Acronym InterMiCOM Usage

8 Not used -
9 Not used -
Depending on whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the
scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described as follows.
6.2.4 Direct connection

EIA(RS)232 is only suitable for short transmission distances due to the signaling levels
used and the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. This limit may be
overcome by introducing suitable signal converters as described in the following sections:
Px40 Relay with Px40 Relay with

InterMiCOM InterMiCOM
DCD - 1 1 - DCD
RxD - 2 2 - RxD
TxD - 3 3 - TxD
DTR - 4 4 - DTR
GND - 5 5 - GND
6 6
RTS - 7 7 - RTS
8 8
9 9
P1150ENa
Figure 35: Direct connection within the local substation
The connection configuration shown in Figure 47 should also be used when connecting
to equipment that does not implement control the DCD line.
6.2.5 EIA(RS)232 modem connection

To achieve longer distance communication, modems may be used, in which the case the
following connections should be made.
Px40 Relay with Px40 Relay with

InterMiCOM InterMiCOM
DCD - 1 DCD DCD 1 - DCD
RxD - 2 RxD RxD 2 - RxD
Communication
TxD - 3 TxD Network TxD 3 - TxD
DTR - 4 4 - DTR
GND - 5 GND GND 5 - GND
6 6
RTS - 7 7 - RTS
8 8
9 9
P1341ENa
Figure 36: InterMiCOM teleprotection via a MODEM link
This type of connection should be used when connecting to multiplexers which provide an
EIA(RS)232 channel with the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection
it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem
should not exceed 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used
should be selected.
7-54 P446/EN/TM/E
6.2.6 RS422 connection

An RS232 to RS422 converter such as aCK212 may be employed to enable MODEM
InterMiCOM to be applied if 4-wire pilots are available for signaling as shown in the
example below.
Figure 37: MODEM InterMiCOM teleprotection via a RS422 protocol
Using an appropriate converter, pilots of up to 1.2km in length can be used, depending on

the converter performance.
In this case, the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the converter should not
exceed 15m.
6.2.7 Fiber optic connection

Although InterMiCOM64 is the recommended variant of InterMiCOM for use with optical
fiber connections, MODEM InterMiCOM may also be applied over optical fibers using
EIA(RS)232 to fiber optic converters. In this the case the following connections should be
made:
P446/EN/TM/E 7-55
Figure 38: MODEM InterMiCOM teleprotection via fiber optic
The overall fiber length that can be achieved depends on the converter performance.
In this case, the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the converter should not
exceed 15m.
6.2.8 InterMiCOM functional assignment

The settings to control the mode of the intertrip signals are made using the relay’s menu
software. In addition to this, it is necessary to assign InterMiCOM input and output
signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) editor. Two icons are provided
on the PSL editor of MiCOM S1 (S1 Studio) for Integral tripping In and Integral tripping
out which can be used to assign the eight intertripping commands. The example shown
inFigure 39 shows a Control Input_1 connected to the Intertrip O/P1 signal which would
then be transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, the Intertrip I/P1 signal would
then be assigned within the PSL. In this example, we can see that when intertrip signal 1
is received from the remote relay, the local end relay would operate an output contact,
R1.
Figure 39: Example assignment of signals within the PSL
7-56 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: when an InterMiCOM signal is sent from the local relay, only the remote end relay will
react to this command. The local end relay will only react to InterMiCOM commands
initiated at the remote end and received locally, and vice-versa. Therefore
InterMiCOM can be described as a duplex teleprotection system.
6.2.9 InterMiCOM statistics and diagnostics

MODEM InterMiCOM channel statistics and diagnostics are available via the menu
software. These can be hidden by setting the Ch Statistics cell or Ch Diagnostics cell,
or both, to Invisible. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by
user selection using the Reset Statistics cell.
6.3 InterMiCOM64 (“fiber InterMiCOM”)

InterMiCOM64 is an optional feature, offering very fast fault clearance in distance aided
schemes with a typical end-end delay of 5 ms for Permissive/Blocking signals and around
6 ms for Intertripping (adding the channel time delay where multiplexers are used).
InterMiCOM64 provides a direct fiber output from the relay’s co-processor board that can
be connected either directly to the protection at the remote end(s) or via appropriate
interfaces and multiplexed communications channels, similar to MiCOM P54x line
differential relays. InterMiCOM64 can use two channels for communication. The second
channel is used in dual redundant two-terminal scheme or three-terminal scheme
configurations. (Sometimes such schemes are termed “hot standby” and “triangulated”
schemes, respectively).
InterMiCOM64 is designed, primarily, to work over fiber optic and multiplexed digital
communications channels. A total of sixteen InterMiCOM64 commands (16 inputs and 16
outputs) are available in the MiCOMho P446. These are arranged as two groups of 8 bits
each, and are referenced as Channel 1 and Channel 2.
Note: InterMiCOM64 Channel 1 and 2 references are not the same as references to
communications Channels 1 and 2 and this can cause some confusion.
InterMiCOM64 communications can run using two different user settable Baud rates: 56
and 64 kbits/s, for ease of interfacing with standard public and private telecommunication
networks.
InterMiCOM64 also supports the IEEE C37.94 standard for direct optical fiber connection
to appropriately equipped multiplexers. In this case the data rate is matched to one of the
Nx64 channels supported by the multiplexer.
6.3.2 Configuring InterMiCOM64

InterMiCOM64 provides two groups of eight InterMiCOM64 commands. These groups of
InterMiCOM64 commands are referenced as Channel 1 and Channel 2. The mapping of
the InterMiCOM64 command signals is performed using the programmable scheme logic
(PSL) editor (which is part of the MiCOM S1/S1 Studio support tool) in a manner similar
to that described in section 6.2.8.
In addition to mapping the commands with the PSL editor, it is also necessary to
configure the InterMiCOM64 communications scheme. This configuration is made using
the settings found in the PROT COMMS/IM64 column of the menu software. These
settings are described in detail in the settings (ST) section of this manual, but to facilitate
understanding of InterMiCOM64 operation, they are also presented in the following
sections.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-57
The MiCOMho P446 can be equipped with either one or two fiber communications ports
to support InterMiCOM64. For the purposes of setting, labeling, etc., these
communications ports are referenced as protection communications Channels 1 and 2.
Although there is some association of the InterMiCOM64 signal groupings referenced
Channels 1 and 2, with communications Channels 1 and 2, they have subtly different
meanings and care needs to be taken to avoid confusion.
6.3.2.1 InterMiCOM64 scheme setup - application

Three InterMiCOM64 scheme arrangements are possible:
 Two-terminal with a single communications link

 Two-terminal with a dual redundant communications link (sometimes referred to as
‘hot standby’
 Three terminal (or triangulated) scheme
The selection is made using the Scheme Setup setting.

In the two-terminal configurations, the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands of both channel 1 and
channel 2 (i.e. all 16 commands) can be freely assigned within the scheme logic of the
two relays. So long as a communications link between the two terminals is functioning,
all 16 commands are usable. The advantage of a dual redundant scheme is the fact that
scheme integrity can be maintained in the event of a failure of one of the communications
links.
The triangulated scheme is designed such that the InterMiCOM64 communications can
self-heal in the event of a failure of a communication link between any two terminals. It
achieves this by routing the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands on Channel 1 for use by the relay
connected to communications channel 1 (remote 1), and the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands
on Channel 2 for use by the relay connected to communications channel 2 (remote 2). In
the event of a failure of communications between say the local relay and remote 1,
remote 2 will pass on the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands intended from local to remote1
using the second communications channel.
The recommended InterMiCOM64 connection for a three ended application is shown in
Figure 40.
P1735ENa
64
Figure 40: Triangulated InterMiCOM application
When one leg of the communication triangle fails, for example, channel A-C becomes
unavailable, the InterMiCOM64 will continue to provide the full teleprotection scheme
between all three ends in a degraded chain topology because of the way the 8 Channel 2
7-58 P446/EN/TM/E
InterMiCOM64 commands are passed on via the scheme logic. In this degraded ‘Chain’
topology, relays A and C will receive and transmit teleprotection commands via relay B.
The retransmitting done by relay B (A-B-C and C-B-A) provides the self-healing for the
lost links A-C and C-A).
This Chain topology may be employed as a means to save cost in implementing a
three-terminal scheme, since two legs may be cheaper to install than full triangulation, or
if a suitable communication link is not available between two of the line ends. It should
be noted, however, that the operating speed of teleprotection commands will increase by
approximately 7 ms (plus communications channel signaling delay) when retransmitted in
Chain topology, due to the extended path length.
6.3.2.2 InterMiCOM64 protection communications address

The InterMiCOM64 communication messages include an address field to ensure correct
scheme connection. There are twenty one address group selections available. These
addresses are provided to ensure that commands are communicated only between the
particular relays in the scheme. The address patterns are carefully designed to provide
maximum security for the application, and within the ranges given, they are freely
assignable.
The Universal Address can be useful during testing, but in deployment it should be
avoided to prevent the possibility of incorrect operation during inadvertent loopback
connections. In addition, and any schemes sharing the same communications services
should be set to have different address patterns to avoid any problems caused by
inadvertent cross-channel connection.
The groups of addresses available when a two-terminal or dual redundant InterMiCOM64
scheme is selected are as follows:
Relay A Relay B
Universal Address 0-0 0-0
Address Group 1 1-A 1-B
P446/EN/TM/E 7-59
Relay A Relay B
For two relays to communicate with one another, their addresses need to be in the same
address group. One relay should be assigned with address A and the other with address
B. For example, if the group 1 address is used, one relay should be given the address 1-
A, and the other relay should be given the address 1-B. The relay with address 1-A will
only accept messages with the 1-A address and will send out messages carrying address
1-B. The relay assigned with address 1-B will only accept messages with address 1-B
and will send out messages carrying address 1-A.
The groups of addresses available when a three-terminal InterMiCOM64 scheme is
selected are as follows:
Relay A Relay B Relay C
Address Group 1 1-A 1-B 1-C
7-60 P446/EN/TM/E
Relay A Relay B Relay C

Table 3: Groups of addresses available in 3 Terminal scheme
For three relays to work together as a protection system, their addresses must be in the
same group and they should be assigned separately with addresses A, B and C. They
must also have a fixed connection configuration, as shown in 0, in which channel 1 of one
relay is connected to channel 2 of another relay.
For example, if the group 1 address is used, addresses 1-A, 1-B and 1-C should be
assigned to relays A, B and C respectively. Relay A will only accept messages with
address 1-A and will send messages carrying addresses 1-B and 1-C to channel 1 and
channel 2 respectively. Relay B will only accept messages with address 1-B and will
send messages carrying addresses 1-C and 1-A to channel 1 and to channel 2
respectively. Similarly relay C will only accept messages with address 1-C and will send
messages carrying addresses 1-A and 1-B to channel 1 and to channel 2 respectively.
6.3.2.3 InterMiCOM64 communications mode setup

The Communications Mode setup configures the optical fiber ports either as Standard, or
IEEE C37.94. If connecting to a multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94 interface,
select IEEE C37.94, otherwise select standard. This setting applies to both
communications channels - they cannot be set independently. If this setting is changed,
the relay must be power cycled before it takes effect.
6.3.2.4 InterMiCOM64 communications baud rate

The baud rate for communication over channel 1 (and channel 2 where fitted) can be
selected (independently) between 56 kbits/s and 64 kbits/s. For direct fiber connection
64 kbits/s should be selected. If MiCOM P590 units are being used to interface to a
telecommunications network, the setting will be dictated by the network. In general,
56 kbits/s is only required when using the P592 V.35 interface. This setting is hidden if
the IEEE C37.94 mode has been selected.
6.3.2.5 InterMiCOM64 communications clock source

The clock source for communication channel 1 (and channel 2 where fitted) can be
selected (independently) between “internal” and “external”. For direct fiber connection
“internal” should be selected. If MiCOM P590 units are being used to interface to a
telecommunications network, the setting will be dictated by the network. In general, the
“external” setting will be used when connecting to a telecommunications network, since
the network will normally provide a clock master.
This setting is hidden if the IEEE C37.94 mode has been selected.
6.3.2.6 InterMiCOM64 IEEE C37.94 channel selection

This setting is only visible if the IEEE C37.94 mode has been selected. It allows the
channels to be assigned to a particular channel presented by the interface. Setting it to
Auto enables the relay to configure itself to match the multiplexer.
6.3.2.7 InterMiCOM64 communications fail timer

The “Comm Fail Timer” sets how long after a communications failure the alarm will be
issued. In this context, a communications failure is defined as no messages received
during the channel timeout period, or the alarm level being exceeded.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-61
6.3.2.8 InterMiCOM64 communications failure mode

The “Comm Fail Mode” setting applies only to relays configured for dual redundant or
three-terminal configuration. It prescribes what combination of failures on the two
communications channels is used to flag an alarm.
6.3.2.9 InterMiCOM64 channel timeout

If an InterMiCOM64 command has been set to revert to a default value after a
communications failure, this timer sets how long will elapse before the defaults are
applied.
6.3.2.10 InterMiCOM64 propagation delay statistics

The “Prop Delay Stats” setting can be either enabled or disabled. When enabled The
“Max Ch Prop Delay” settings for communications channel 1 (and 2 if fitted) become
visible. These are settings whereby, if InterMiCOM64 messages take longer to be
received than the setting value, the message can be rejected.
6.3.2.11 InterMiCOM64 command type

Each of the InterMiCOM64 commands can be set via the “IMn Cmd Type” setting (n=1-8)
to be conditioned for either direct transfer tripping (setting = “Direct”) or for use in a
blocking or permissive scheme (setting = “Permissive”).
Note: There are 8 of these settings, one for each of eight InterMiCOM64 commands. The 8
settings are applied the same to the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands on Channel 1 as to
the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands on Channel 2, so that if “IM1 Cmd Type” is set to
“Direct”, then IM1 channel 1 and IM1 channel2 with both be conditioned for direct
transfer tripping.
6.3.2.12 InterMiCOM64 fallback mode

Each of the InterMiCOM64 command can be set via the “IMn FallBackMode” setting (n=1-
8) to define its behavior under communications failure conditions. They can be
programmed to either latch the state of the last good command received, or they can
revert to a default state (either 1 or 0) defined in the “IMn DefaultValue” setting (n=1-8).
Note: There are 8 of each of these settings, one for each of eight InterMiCOM64 commands.
The 8 settings are applied the same to the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands on Channel 1
as to the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands on Channel 2.
6.3.2.13 InterMiCOM64 communications alarm management

Due to the criticality of InterMiCOM64 communications for correct scheme performance,
there is an extensive regime to monitor signal quality and integrity, generate and report
alarms. For most applications, the alarming supplied as standard should satisfy the
needs of the scheme. For some applications, however, it may be necessary to provide
additional qualifications using the programmable scheme logic. To do this, it is necessary
to understand the concepts behind the alarm signals and their implementation in the
MiCOMho P446 relay.
Fundamental to the implementation of scheme logic in the MiCOM Px4x series of relays
is the concept of the DDB introduced earlier. The complete list of DDB signals applicable
to InterMiCOM64 communications are described in section 6.3.2.14 below.
6.3.2.14 InterMiCOM64 DDB signal list

The DDB signals applicable to the optional InterMiCOM64 feature are tabulated below.
(For a complete list of all DDB signals applicable to the relay see Appendix C).
7-62 P446/EN/TM/E
DDB No. English Text Description

Indicates that the local relay has been selected to Loopback mode
291 Test Loopback
(internal or external) in the “Commission Tests” options.
Indicates that the local relay has been selected to Test mode in the
292 Test IM64
“Commission Tests” options.
Indicates when the local receive signal is totally lost, or exceeds the
311 Signaling Fail
alarm threshold, on either channel 1 or channel 2.
Indicates that the “Comms Mode” setting has been changed between
Standard and IEEEC37.94 or vice versa.
337 Comms Changed
The relay must be power-cycled to remove this alarm and activate the
new communication mode.
Indicates that one or more IEEE C37.94 communication alarms are
currently active. (IEEE C37.94 alarms are DDB # 1123 - 1126 and DDB
315 IEEE C37.94 # 1133 - 1136.
This signal is only used when the “Comms Mode” is selected to IEEE
C37.94.
Indicates when the communications between the relays has been
compromised and therefore IM64 doesn’t work. For 2-ended schemes,
this is functionally identical to the Signaling Fail DDB signal (DDB # 285).
314 IM64 Scheme Fail
For 3-ended schemes, this is only active when it is no longer possible to
provide communications even allowing for pass through mode i.e. more
than one link has failed.
Input DDB signal used in the PSL which is the receive signal for Channel
96 IM64 Ch1 Input 1
1, bit 1.
97 - 103 IM64 Ch1 Input 2 … 8
1, bit 2 to 8.
104 IM64 Ch2 Input 1
2, bit 1.
105 - 111 IM64 Ch2 Input 2 … 8
2, bit 2 to 8.
Output DDB signal used in the PSL which is the transmit signal for
112 IM64 Ch1 Output1
Channel 1, bit 1.
113 - 119 IM64 Ch1 Output2 … 8
Channel 1, bit 2 to 8.
120 IM64 Ch2 Output1
Channel 2, bit 1.
121 - 127 IM64 Ch2 Output 2 … 8
Channel 2, bits 2 to 8.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that the frequency of the signal on
Channel 1 is outside the frequency expected by the multiplexer.
1123 Ch1 Mux Clk
C37.94.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that the multiplexer has lost the
signal over channel 1. i.e. no receive information on Channel 1.
1124 Ch1 Signal Lost
C37.94.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that the multiplexer has detected one
way communication on Channel 1. i.e. the transmit information is not
1125 Ch1 Path Yellow being received by the remote end on Channel 1.
C37.94.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that there is a mismatch between the
communication settings on the InterMiCOM64 Channel 1 and the
1126 Ch1 Mismatch RxN multiplexer.
C37.94.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-63
DDB No. English Text Description

Output DDB signal used in the PSL to indicate that no valid messages
1127 Ch1 Timeout have been received on Channel 1 during the “Channel Timeout” period
(settable).
Output DDB signal used in the PSL to indicate poor channel quality on
Channel 1. This is determined by the percentage of bad messages
1128 Ch1 Degraded
received on Channel 1 exceeding the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” setting during
the previous 100 ms.
Output DDB signal used in the PSL to indicate when the Channel 1
signaling bits have been received through Channel 2 because of failure
1129 Ch1 Passthrough of channel 1.
This signal is only relevant for 3 ended signaling schemes and is part of
the “self-healing” capability.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that the frequency of the signal on
Channel 2 is outside the frequency expected by the multiplexer.
1133 Ch2 Mux Clk
C37.94.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that the multiplexer has lost the
signal over channel 2. i.e. no receive information on Channel 2.
1134 Ch2 Signal Lost
C37.94.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that the multiplexer has detected one
way communication on Channel 2. i.e. the transmit information is not
1135 Ch2 Path Yellow being received by the remote end on Channel 2.
C37.94.
Output DDB signal used to indicate that there is a mismatch between the
communication settings on the InterMiCOM64 Channel 2 and the
1136 Ch2 Mismatch RxN multiplexer.
C37.94.
Output DDB signal used in the PSL to indicate that no valid messages
1137 Ch2 Timeout have been received on Channel 2 during the “Channel Timeout” period
(settable).
Output DDB signal used in the PSL to indicate poor channel quality on
Channel 2. This is determined by the percentage of bad messages
1138 Ch2 Degraded
received on Channel 2 exceeding the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” setting during
the previous 100 ms.
Output DDB signal used in the PSL to indicate when the Channel 2
signaling bits have been received through Channel 1 because of failure
1139 Ch2 Passthrough of channel 2.
This signal is only relevant for 3 ended signaling schemes and is part of
the “self-healing” capability.
Output DDB set if the communications propagation delay on either
338 Max Prop Alarm
channel 1 or channel 2 exceeds its setting.
Output DDB set if the communications propagation delay on channel 1
1386 Max Ch1 PropDelay
exceeds its setting.
Output DDB set if the communications propagation delay on channel 2
1387 Max Ch2 PropDelay
exceeds its setting.
6.3.2.15 InterMiCOM64 communications alarm logic

The operation of the main alarm DDB signals associated with InterMiCOM64 are shown in
the conceptual diagrams below. It should be recognized that some of the signals are
setting/hardware dependent (for example, Channel 2 alarms will not be available on a
simple 2-terminal single communications link application).
7-64 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 41: InterMiCOM64 channel fail and scheme fail conceptual logic
The messages received on each channel are individually assessed for quality to ensure
that the InterMiCOM64 signaling scheme is available for use. In the event of no messages
being received for a period equal to the “Channel Timeout” setting, or the signal quality
falling below a defined value then DDB signals will be activated as shown in the figure.
Poor quality is indicated if the percentage of incomplete messages exceeds the “IM Msg
Alarm Lvl” setting within a 100 ms period (rolling window), or if the communications
propagation time of the InterMiCOM64 message exceeds the “Ch Max PropDelay” (if the
“Prop DelayStats” setting is enabled), or if (in IEEE C37.94 configuration only, and not
shown on the diagram) the “Ch Mux Clk” flag is set to indicate an incorrect baud rate.
If either the “Ch Timeout”, or the “Ch Degraded” signal persists in the alarmed state for
more than the duration of the “Comm Fail Timer” setting, then the “Signaling Fail” signal
will be raised and indicated on the relay according to the conditions set in the “Comm
Fail Mode” setting of the relay.
In the case of two-ended schemes (including dual redundant schemes), the “IM64
Scheme Fail” signal will be generated at the same time as the “Signaling Fail” signal.
However, for three-terminal applications, the “IM64 Scheme Fail” signal gives an
indication of when the full set of signaling bits cannot be processed by the scheme. Due
to the self-healing nature of the three-terminal application, this occurs when both
channels at any one end are not receiving good signals. This will generate a flag within
the InterMiCOM64 message structure which is passed to both remote ends, as well as
generating the local “IM64 Scheme Fail” signal. By this method, in three-terminal
applications the scheme fail indication will be raised at all three ends.
It should be noted that the scheme fail signaling is generated by the inability of the relays
to receive messages through communication failure. That is to say that a transmitting
relay will only know that its communication to a remote relay is in a failed state if it
receives notification from the remote relay that that is the case. If a relay in the scheme
is put into test mode, the communication failure information is not passed on to the
remote ends. In this instance then it might be that the communications are in a failed
state, but that there is no indication to the remote relays that this is the case. Should this
cause operational issues then it may be necessary to include other signals to enable
more precise indication of scheme failure, as described in the Application Examples
chapter.
In addition to the main InterMiCOM64 channel fail and scheme fail conceptual logic in the
figure above, there are number of additional alarm DDB signals associated with test
P446/EN/TM/E 7-65
modes, reconfiguration for 3-terminal schemes, and the communication mode (standard
vs IEEE C37.94). These are outlined in the two figures below:
Figure 42: InterMiCOM64 general alarm signals (conceptual logic)
Figure 43: InterMiCOM64 communications mode and IEEE C37.94 alarm signals
The majority of signals described in 0 are associated with the IEEE C37.94
communications mode and will not be activated if the standard communication mode is
selected. As can be seen from the “Comms Changed DDB” logic, switching between
the different communication modes requires a power-cycle to be performed.
6.3.2.16 InterMiCOM64 two ended scheme extended supervision

Referring to the logic in section 6.3.2.15, it may be seen that for two-ended applications,
the “Signaling Fail” and “IM64 Scheme Fail” signals operate together. As such, the
basic indications available on each relay should be considered as local-end indications
only. If remote indication is needed to assure scheme functionality, it is necessary to use
additional signals to communicate the status to the remote end. One method of
performing this is shown below:
7-66 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 44: InterMiCOM64 two ended scheme extended supervision
In this example scheme, a number of signals are used to permanently pass an

InterMiCOM64 signal to the remote end. These signals take account of the local ability to
receive InterMiCOM64 messages, local test/loopback modes and any other external
methods of switching the signaling scheme out of service. If any of these driving signals
are energized, then the InterMiCOM64 message is reset (a “0” sent on InterMiCOM64 bit
8), causing both ends to raise an alarm (LED 8) and/or switch the aided scheme out of
service due to loss of channel.
The logic presented above is intended only as an example. It is likely that some
customization would be required to suit actual application requirements.
6.3.2.17 InterMiCOM64 three ended scheme extended supervision

The example scheme shown in sub-clause 6.3.2.16 can be extended to cover 3-terminal
applications. In this case the “IM64 Scheme Fail” signal that is automatically
communicated to all ends of the scheme is incorporated rather than the “Signaling Fail”
of the previous example.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-67
Figure 45: Triangulated InterMiCOM64 application
In this example if both channels at any one end fail to receive information, then this will
be communicated to the other ends with an alarm raised and aided scheme switched out
of service. The example above takes into account the test modes and local switching,
such that the scheme will be signaled out of service at all ends if one end is locally
disabled.
The logic presented above is intended only as an example. It is likely that some
customization would be required to suit actual application requirements.
6.3.3 InterMiCOM64 communications link options

A number of communications options are available, for the communication channels
between MiCOMho P446 system ends. The various connection options are shown
below. Choosing between each of these options will depend on the type of
communications equipment that is available.
 Where existing suitable multiplexer communication equipment is installed for other

communication between substations, the 850 nm option together with an
appropriate ITU-T compatible electrical interface (P590 series unit) should be
selected to match the existing multiplexer equipment. Where an IEEE C37.94
compatible multiplexer is installed the 850 nm option should be configured to
interface directly to the multiplexer.
 Where no multiplexer is installed, a direct 1300 nm optical fiber connection can be
used. The type of fiber used (multi-mode or single-mode) will be determined by the
distance between the ends of the MiCOMho P446 relay scheme.
In any configuration, except the IEEE C37.94, the data rate may be selected as either
64 kbit/sec or 56 kbit/sec.
7-68 P446/EN/TM/E
6.3.3.1 InterMiCOM64 optical fiber communications link options

The list of all available fiber channel options is:
 850nm multi-mode - always two channels supplied as standard

 1300 nm multi-mode - one channel only
 1300 nm multi-mode - both channels (CH1 and CH2)
 1300 nm single-mode - one channel only
 1300 nm single-mode - both channels (CH1 and CH2)
6.3.3.1.1 Direct optical fiber link, 850 nm multi-mode fiber

It is possible to connect two MiCOMho P446 relays using 850 nm multi-mode fiber but
since the above configuration is typically suitable for connection only up to 1km, it is
unlikely that this application will ever be applied in practical applications. This interface
is, however, the most commonly supplied, since it is suitable for connection using the
P590 series of interface units and/or an interface compliant with the IEEE C37.94
standard described later.
6.3.3.1.2 Direct optical fiber link, 1300 nm multi-mode fiber
The relays are connected directly using two 1300 nm multi-mode fibers for each signaling
channel. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type
fiber optic connectors are used.
P443/P446 Optical fiber P443/P446

1300nm 1300nm
P2265ENd
This is typically suitable for connection up to approximately 50km.

6.3.3.1.3 Direct optical fiber link, 1300nm single-mode fiber
The relays are connected directly using two 1300nm single-mode fibers, type 9/125m for
each signaling channel. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used.
P443/P446 Optical fiber P443/P446

1300nm 1300nm
P2265ENd
This is typically suitable for connection up to approximately 100km.

6.3.3.1.4 IEEE C37.94 interface to multiplexer
A relay with 850 nm short haul optical interface is connected directly to the multiplexer by
850 nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m is
suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used.
The setting Comms Mode should be set to IEEE C37.94.
Note: The relay must be powered off and on before this setting change becomes effective.
The IEEE C37.94 standard defines an N*64 kbits/s standard where N can be 1 - 12.
N can be selected on the relay or alternatively set to Auto in which case the relay will
configure itself to match the multiplexer.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-69
6.3.3.2 InterMiCOM64 connection via P590 series optical fiber to electrical interface units
To connect the relays via a pulse code modulation (PCM) multiplexer network or digital
communication channel, Type P590 type interface units are required. The following
interface units are available:
 P591 interface to multiplexing equipment supporting ITU-T (formerly CCITT)

Recommendation G.703 co-directional electrical interface
 P592 interface to multiplexing equipment supporting ITU-T Recommendation V.35
electrical interface
 P593 interface to multiplexing or ISDN equipment supporting ITU-T
Recommendation X.21 electrical interface
The data rate for each unit can be 56 kbits/s or 64 kbits/s as required for the data
communications link.
One P590 unit is required per relay per data channel (i.e. for each transmit and receive
signal pair). It provides optical to electrical and electrical to optical signal conversion
between the MiCOMho P446 relay and the multiplexer. The interface unit should be
located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data
of electromagnetic noise or interference. The units are housed in a 20TE MiCOM case.
Fiber optic connections to the unit are made through BFOC/2.5 type connectors, more
commonly known as ‘ST’ connectors. The optical characteristics are similar to the
MiCOMho P446 850 nm multi-mode fiber optic interface.
6.3.3.2.1 Multiplexer link with G.703 using type P591 interface
A relay with 850 nm short haul optical interface is connected to a P591 unit by two cores
of 850 nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m is
suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. The P591 unit converts the
data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible G.703 co-directional electrical interface.
The G.703 output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible G.703 co-directional
channel on the multiplexer.
P443/P446 O/F G703 M M G703 O/F P443/P446

850nm P591 U U P591 850nm
X X
P2266ENe
The G.703 signals are isolated by pulse transformers to 1kV.

Since the G.703 signals are only of ±1 V magnitude, the cable connecting the P591 unit
and the multiplexer must be properly screened against electromagnetic noise and
interference. The interface cable should consist of twisted pairs of 24 AWG, overall
shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 120 . It is generally
recommended that the interface cable shield should be connected to the multiplexer
frame ground only. The choice of grounding depends however on local codes and
practices.
Electrical connections to the P591 unit are made via a standard 28-way Midos connector.
The MiCOMho P446 must be set with Clock Source as ‘External’.
6.3.3.2.2 Multiplexer link with V.35 using type P592 interface
data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible V.35 electrical interface. The V.35
output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible V.35 channel on the multiplexer.
7-70 P446/EN/TM/E
P443/P446 O/F V35 M M V35 O/F P443/P446

P592 U U P592
850nm 850nm
X X
P2267ENc
Connections of V.35 signals to the P592 unit are made via a standard female 34 pin ‘M’
block connector. Since the V.35 signals are either of ±0.55 V or ±12 V magnitude, the
cable connecting the unit to the multiplexer must be properly screened against
electromagnetic noise and interference. The interface cable should consist of twisted
pairs of wires which are shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 100 . It
is generally recommended that the interface cable shield is connected to the multiplexer
frame ground. The choice of grounding depends however on local codes and practices.
The P592 front panel consists of five indicating LEDs and six DIL (dual in line) switches.
The switch labeled ‘Clockswitch’ is provided to invert the V.35 transmit timing clock
signal if required.
The switch labeled ‘Fiber-optic Loopback’ is provided to allow a test loopback of the
communication signal across the fiber optic terminals. When switched on, the red LED
labeled 'Fiber-optic Loopback' is illuminated.
The switch labeled ‘V.35 Loopback’ is provided to allow a test loopback of the
communication signal across the V.35 terminals. It loops the incoming V.35 ‘Rx’ data
lines internally back to the outgoing V.35 ‘Tx’ data lines. When switched on, the red LED
labeled ‘V.35 Loopback’ is illuminated.
The switch labeled ‘DSR’ is provided to select/ignore the DSR (Data Set Ready)
handshaking control signal. The red LED labeled DSR Off is extinguished either when
DSR is asserted or when overridden by setting the DSR switch On.
The switch labeled ‘CTS’ is provided to select/ignore the CTS (Clear To Send)
handshaking control signal. The red LED labeled CTS Off is extinguished either when
CTS is asserted or when overridden by setting the CTS switch On.
The switch labeled ‘Data Rate’ is provided to allow the selection of 56 or 64k bits/s data
rate, as required by the PCM multiplexing equipment.
The LED labeled ‘Supply Healthy’ is green and provides indication that the unit is
correctly powered.
See the Wiring Diagrams chapter for External Connection Diagrams. The timing for the
InterMiCOM64 communication channel may be set either with Clock Source as ‘External’
for a multiplexer network which is supplying a master clock signal, or with Clock Source
as ‘Internal’ for a multiplexer network recovering signal timing from the equipment.
6.3.3.2.3 Multiplexer link with X.21 using type P593 interface
The P593 unit supports the ITU-T Recommendation X.21 interface. It is approved as line
interface equipment by the British Approvals Board for Telecommunications (BABT) for
connection to the services described in this section; License Certificate Number
NS/1423/1/T/605362.
data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible X.21 electrical interface. The X.21
output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible X.21 channel on the multiplexer or
ISDN digital data transmission link.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-71
P443/P446 O/F X.21 O/F P443/P446

P593 P593
850nm 850nm
P2268ENe
The relays require a permanently open communications channel. Consequently, no

communications handshaking is required, and it is not supported in the P593 unit. The
signals supported are shown in the table below.
ITU-T Recommendation X.21 is closely associated with EIA specifications RS422 and
RS449. The P593 can be used with RS422 or RS449 communications channels which
require only the signals shown below.
ITU-T Designation Description Connector Pin Direction
- Case earth 1 -
G Common return 8 -
T Transmit data A 2 From P593
T Transmit data B 9 From P593
R Receive data A 4 To P593
R Receive data B 11 To P593
S Signal element timing A 6 To P593
S Signal element timing B 13 To P593
Connections of X.21 signals to the P593 unit are made via a standard male 15 way D-
type connector, wired as a DTE device. The interface cable should consist of twisted
pairs of 24 AWG, overall shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 100 .
It is generally recommended that the interface cable shield is connected to the multiplexer
frame ground. The choice of grounding depends however on local codes and practices.
Please see the Wiring Diagrams chapter for the External Connection Diagrams.
The timing for the InterMiCOM64 communication channel must be set with Clock Source
as ‘External’.
The P593 front panel consists of four indicating LEDs and two switches.
The LED labeled ‘Supply healthy’ is green and provides indication that the unit is
correctly powered.
The LED labeled ‘Clock’ is green and provides indication that an appropriate X.21 signal
element timing signal is presented to the unit.
One of the switches is labeled ‘Fiber Optic Loopback’. This is provided to allow a test
loopback of the communication signal across the fiber optic terminals. When switched
on, the red LED labeled ‘Fiber Optic Loopback’ is illuminated.
The second switch is labeled ‘X.21 Loopback’. This is provided to allow a test loopback
of the communication signal across the X.21 terminals. It loops the incoming X.21 ‘Rx’
data lines internally back to the outgoing X.21 ‘Tx’ data lines, and also loops the incoming
fiber optic ‘Rx’ data line (via the X.21 signal conversion circuitry) back to the outgoing
fiber optic ‘Tx’ data line. When switched on, the red LED labeled ‘X.21 Loopback’ is
illuminated.
6.3.3.3 InterMiCOM64 connection over unconditioned pilot wires

It is possible to deploy InterMiCOM64 on certain circuits where unconditioned 2-wire or 4-
wire pilots are available for communication. To achieve this requires a combination of
P590 series optical fiber to electrical interface units together with third-party baseband
modems. The application will be restricted by the length and quality of the pilots, with
maximum pilot lengths restricted to less than 20km.
7-72 P446/EN/TM/E
When considering applying a scheme based on InterMiCOM64, P590, and baseband

modems, the impact of the modem retrain time on the application needs to be understood
before making the decision. Unconditioned 2-wire and 4-wire pilots are generally routed
in proximity to the electrical power transmission and distribution feeders that they are
helping to protect. As such, they are partial to electro-magnetic interference during
switching or fault conditions on the power system. The induced interference on the pilots
can cause disruption of the communications signals, and if this is sufficient to cause the
synchronization of the communications to be lost, then the modems will have to re-
synchronize, or retrain.
Note: If the possibility of communications breaks of up to 10 seconds during switching or

fault conditions on the power system cannot be tolerated by the InterMiCOM64
application, then the decision to implement a scheme using pilot wire circuits should
be reviewed.
6.3.3.3.1 Pilot isolation

During primary earth faults, the strong magnetic field generated can induce a significant
voltage between the pilots and ground (longitudinal voltage). To prevent damage to any
equipment connected to the pilot circuit, it must be ensured that the modem can provide
an adequate isolation barrier between the pilot itself and all other electrically isolated
circuits. Although it may be difficult to accurately predict the induced pilot voltage during
an earth fault, the following equations can be used to give an approximation:
Induced voltage for un-screened pilots  0.3 x F x L
Induced voltage for screened pilots  0.1 x F x L
Where:
F = Maximum prospective earth fault current in amperes
L = Length of pilot circuit in miles
In cases where the calculated voltage exceeds, typically 60% of the relay/modem
isolation level, additional isolation must be added. Alstom Grid offer the PCM-FLÜ 10 kV
or 20 kV isolating transformers for use in conjunction with such baseband modems. The
choice of
10 kV or 20 kV will depend upon the predicted magnitude of the induced voltage.
Note: The PCM-FLÜ isolating transformer has “a”, “m” and “b” taps on both primary and
secondary windings. For all InterMiCOM64 applications, connection must be made
between taps ‘a’ and ‘m’, since the frequency range of this winding extends to 2 MHz.
Connection between ‘a’ and ‘b’ may result in unreliable communications as the
maximum frequency for this tap configuration is 6 kHz. Connection to ‘a’ and ‘m’ taps
must be adhered to on both primary and secondary so as to maintain a 1:1 ratio.
6.3.3.3.2 Baseband modem and P590 specification

Deployment of the Patton “Campus” 1092A baseband modem has been demonstrated
with the MiCOM relays and a scheme based on this is presented below.
The Patton “Campus” 1092A baseband modem offers a relatively short retrain time (by
baseband modem standards), but it should be noted that this can be as long as ten
seconds and the effect of this should be recognized as per the note in section 6.3.3.3.
On a 2-wire pilot connection a maximum link length of approximately 17km can be
achieved. On a 4-wire pilot, approximately 18km is possible. These figures are,
however, dependent upon the diameter and quality of the pilot wires. The effect of cable
diameter on distance is shown in the following table.
Maximum Distance (2- Maximum Distance
Wire Gauge Wire Diameter
wire connection) (4-wire connection)
19 AWG 0.9mm 17.2km 18.2km
P446/EN/TM/E 7-73
Maximum Distance (2- Maximum Distance

Wire Gauge Wire Diameter
wire connection) (4-wire connection)
22 AWG 0.64mm 11.5km 12.1km
24 AWG 0.5mm 8km 8.5km
26 AWG 0.4mm 5.5km 5.7km
For maximum security and performance it is strongly recommended that the pilots use
screened twisted pairs of conductors.
The Campus modem should be specified with a G.703 interface and should be used in
conjunction with a MiCOM P591.
6.3.3.3.3 Baseband modem propagation delay
The use of a baseband modem will bring an additional propagation delay time that needs
to be taken into account. For a 2-wire connection to the Campus modem the additional
delay will be 1.02 ms. For a 4-wire connection to the Campus modem the additional
delay will be 1.08 ms.
6.3.3.3.4 Baseband modem and relay configuration
A scheme configuration using 2-wire connection without additional isolation is shown in
the figure below:
The MiCOMho P446 relays should have their “IM64 Comms Mode” set to “standard”,
their data rates set to 64 kbits/s, and their clock sources set to external.
One of the Campus modems on the pilot wire should be assigned as a “master” and the
other assigned as “slave”. The “master” should be set to generate an internal clock, and
the “slave” should be set for “receive recovery”. This is achieved by means of setting
dual in-line (DIL) switches inside the modem. To implement these settings, the switches
should be set as per the following tables:
MASTER
S1 (on the bottom side of the modem)
Pin no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setting 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Pin no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
S? (inside the interface card)

Pin no. 1 2 3 4
Setting 1 0 1 1
7-74 P446/EN/TM/E
SLAVE
Pin no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setting 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

Pin no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
S? (inside the interface card)

Pin no. 1 2 3 4
Setting 1 0 1 1
The MiCOM P591 communications interface units do not require any special setting up and
the scheme should be now operational.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-75
7 SCHEME LOGIC (BASIC AND AIDED SCHEME LOGIC)
7.1 Switch on to fault (SOTF) and trip on reclose (TOR)

The settings for SOTF and TOR are in the menu TRIP ON CLOSE (TOC). The settings
are designed to deal with two different situations.
 SOTF provides instantaneous operation of selected elements for a fault present on

manual closure of the circuit breaker.
 TOR provides instantaneous operation of selected elements for a persistent fault
present on auto-reclosing of the circuit breaker.
The SOTF and TOR functions are known as Trip on Close logic. Figure 46 shows the
Trip On Close function in relation to the Distance zones. Figure 47 shows the Trip On
Close driven by Current No Volt level detectors. Both methods operate in parallel if
mapped to the SOTF and TOR Tripping matrix in the setting file.
The Current No Volt (CNV) level detectors can be set in the menu GROUP X CB FAIL &
P.DEAD The same settings are used for pole dead logic detection. The 20 ms time
delay in Figure 47 avoids a possible race between very fast overvoltage and undercurrent
level detectors.
7-76 P446/EN/TM/E
SET: TOR_En
DDB: TOR Inhibit (485) & DDB: TOR_Active (878)
Pick-up =
DDB: Any PD (891)
TOC Delay
S
DDB: TOC_Active (877)
Drop-off = t TOC
Reset dly R
DDB: SOTF Inhibit (486)
&
DDB: All PD (890)
& Pick-up = tSOTF
S
Enable dly
R
Disabled DDB: SOTF_Active (879)

En I 1 1
Pulse = t SOTF TIME
SET: SOTF_En
En I +ext
En ext 1 &
SET: SOTF (488)
DDB: TOR_Active (878)
DDB: Zone 1 (960 to 965)

& DDB Trip_TOR_Z1(704)
SET: TOR_Z1_En
DDB: Zone 2 (966 to 971)
SET: TOR_Z2_En
& DDB: Trip_TOR_Z2 (705)
DDB:Zone 3 (972 to 977)

SET: TOR_Z3_En
DDB: Zone P (984 to 989)

SET:TOR_Z4_En
DDB: Zone P (978 to 983)
SET: TOR_ZP_En
& DDB: Trip_TOR_ZP(708)
DDB: SOTF_Active (879)
DDB: Zone 1 (960 to 965)
& DDB: Trip_SOTF_Z1 (709)
SET: SOTF_Z1_En
DDB: Zone 2 (966 to 971)
SET: SOTF_Z2_En
& DDB: Trip_SOTF_Z2 (710)
DDB: Zone 3 (972 to 977)
SET: SOTF_Z3_En & DDB: Trip_SOTF_Z3(711)
DDB: Zone 4 (984 to 989)
SET: SOTF_Z4_En & DDB: Trip_SOTF_Z4 (712)
DDB: ZoneP (978 to 983)
SET: SOTF_ZP_En & DDB:Trip_SOTF_ZP (713)
P4039ENb
Figure 46: Trip on close

P446/EN/TM/E 7-77
Figure 47: Trip on close based on CNV level detectors
7.1.1 Switch On To Fault (SOTF) mode

SOTF Status. SOTF can be activated in three different ways.
 Enabled using pole dead detection logic. If an All Pole Dead condition is detected,
the SOTF Delay timer starts. Once this timer expires, SOTF is enabled and stays
active for the period set in the TOC Reset Delay setting.
 Enabled by an external pulse. SOTF is enabled after an external pulse linked to
DDB Set SOTF (DDB 488) is ON. The external pulse could be a circuit breaker
close command, for example. The function stays active for the duration of the
SOTF Pulse setting.
 Enabled using both pole dead detection logic and an external pulse.
Three pole instantaneous tripping (and auto-reclose blocking) occurs for any fault
detected by the selected zones or Current No Volt level detectors when in SOTF mode.
Whether this feature is enabled or disabled, the normal time delayed elements or aided
channel scheme continues to function and can trip the circuit.
SOTF Delay. The SOTF Delay is a pick up time delay that starts after opening all three
poles of a CB. If the CB is then closed after the set time delay has expired, SOTF
protection is active. SOTF provides enhanced protection for manual closure of the
breaker (not for auto-reclosure).
This setting is visible only if Pole Dead or Pdead + Pulse are selected to enable SOTF.
SOTF Tripping. While the Switch on to Fault Mode is active, the IED trips
instantaneously for pick up of any zone selected in these links. To operate for faults on
the entire circuit length, at least Zone 1 and Zone 2 should be selected. If no elements
are selected, the normal time delayed elements and aided scheme provide the protection.
SOTF Pulse. A user settable time window during which the SOTF protection is available.
This setting is visible only if ExtPulse or Pdead + Pulse are selected to enable SOTF.
7.1.2 Trip On Reclose (TOR) mode

TOR Status. Enables or disables special protection following auto-reclosure. When
enabled, TOR is activated after the TOC Delay expires, ready for application when an
auto-reclose shot occurs.
7-78 P446/EN/TM/E
With this feature Enabled, for a period following circuit breaker closure, the IED operates
in Trip on Reclose mode. Three pole instantaneous tripping occurs for any fault
detected by the selected zones or Current No Volt level detectors. Whether this feature
is enabled or disabled, the normal time delayed elements or aided channel scheme
continue to function and can trip the circuit.
TOC Reset Delay. The SOTF and TOR features stay in service for the duration of the
TOC Reset Delay once the circuit is energized. The delay timer starts on CB closure and
is common for SOTF and TOR protection. Once this timer expires after successful
closure, all protection reverts to normal.
TOC Delay. A user settable time delay that starts when the CB opens, after which TOR
is enabled. The time delay must not exceed the minimum Dead Time setting of the auto-
reclose because both times start simultaneously and TOR protection must be ready by
the the CB closes on potentially persistent faults.
TOR Tripping. While the Trip on Reclose Mode is active, the IED trips instantaneously
for pick up of any selected Distance zone. For example, Zone 2 could operate without
waiting for the usual time delay if a fault is in Zone 2 on CB closure. Also Current No
Volts can be mapped for fast fault clearance on line reclosure on a permanent fault. To
operate for faults on the entire circuit length, at least Zone 1 and Zone 2 should be
selected. If no elements are selected, the normal time delayed elements and aided
scheme provide the protection. TOR tripping is 3 phase and auto-reclose is blocked.
7.1.3 Polarization during circuit energization

While the Switch on to Fault and Trip on Reclose modes are active, the directionalized
distance elements are partially cross polarized from other phases. The same proportion
of healthy phase to faulted phase voltage, as given by the Distance Polarizing setting in
the DISTANCE SETUP menu, is used.
Partial cross polarization is therefore substituted for the normal memory polarizing, for the
duration of the TOC window. If insufficient polarizing voltage is available, a slight reverse
offset (25% of the forward reach) is included in the zone 1 characteristic to enable fast
clearance of close up three phase faults. Therefore, the mapping of the CNV function to
the SOTF tripping matrix is not essential.
7.2 Channel aided schemes

The IED has two sets of aided channel (pilot) schemes which can be operated in parallel.
Aided Scheme 1 - May be keyed by distance and/or DEF and/or delta directional
comparison;
Aided Scheme 2 - May be keyed by distance and/or DEF and/or delta directional
comparison;
The provision of two discrete channel selections would allow the following to be
implemented, as an example:
 Distance POR with DEF POR scheme operating over a common shared channel…
Select both in AIDED SCHEME 1 only, with AIDED SCHEME 2 Disabled.
 Distance PUR with DEF BLOCKING operating over separate channels due to the
dissimilar scheme types. Assign Distance to AIDED SCHEME 1, and DEF to
AIDED SCHEME 2.
 Directional Comparison BLOCKING scheme with a second channel for a distance
with DEF BLOCKING scheme operating in unison… Assign Delta to AIDED
SCHEME 1, and both Distance/DEF to AIDED SCHEME 2.
Note: Where schemes share a common channel, the signal send and signal receive logic
operates in a logical “OR” mode.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-79
Aided Scheme 1 and Aided Scheme 2 are two instances of the same logic. Each of
these schemes provides the same options and can be independently applied. The
scheme logic is split into three sections defined in the following diagram: send logic,
receive logic, and aided tripping logic, as shown in Figure 48. Detailed scheme
descriptions follow later. As there are two instances of the aided scheme, any internal
logic signals which are specific to the instance of the scheme are shown in the diagrams
with two DDB numbers relating to the first and second instance, respectively.
Protection:
Distance
Signal Send (CTx)
DEF Send Logic
Delta Dir
Local Send
Feedback Echo
Signal Receive (CTx)
Signal Receive Channel Fail Alarm

+ Scheme
Receive Logic
Channel Fail/
Loss of Guard Weak Infeed Tripping
Aided Trip En
Protection:
Distance
Aided Tripping Aided Tripping
DEF Logic
Delta Dir
P1590ENa
Figure 48: Aided scheme logic overview
The full logic of Send, Receive and Aided Trip are shown in the following diagrams.
7-80 P446/EN/TM/E
MASK:Zone 1 En
SET: Dist Gnd En
DDB: Zone 1AN(960)

&
DDB: Zone 1 BN(961)
1
DDB: Zone 1 CN(962)
SET: Dist Ph En
DDB: Zone 1 AB(963)

&
DDB: Zone 1 BC(964)
1
DDB: Zone 1 CA(965)
MASK:Zone 2 En
DDB: Zone 2 AN(966) &

DDB: Zone 2 BN(967)
1
DDB: Zone 2 CN(968)
IntSig: BIK Send
DDB: Zone 2 AB(969)
& IntSig: Signal Send
DDB: Zone 2 BC(970)
1
DDB: Zone 2 CA(971)
DDB: Block Send
MASK: Zone 4 En
Aided 1 - 496
Aided 2 - 512
DDB: Zone 4 AN(984) & DDB Signal Send
1 &
DDB: Zone 4 BN(985)
& 1 tRG Aided 1 - 498
1 Aided 2 - 514
Blocking 1 Scheme
DDB: Zone 4 CN(986)
Reversal Guard
DDB: Zone 4 AB(987)

&
DDB: Zone 4 BC(988)
1
DDB: Zone 4 CA(989) IntSig: Echo Send
Aided 1 - 497
SET:Delta En Aided 2 - 513
DDB: Custom Send
MASK:Delta Fwd En
MASK:Custom En &
DDB:Delta Fwd AN(998)
&
DDB: Delta Fwd BN(999)
DDB: Delta Fwd CN(1000)
DDB: Delta Fwd AB(1001) 1

DDB: Delta Fwd BC(1002)
DDB: Delta Fwd CA(1003)
MASK:Delta Rev En
DDB: Delta Rev AN(1004)

&
DDB: Delta Rev BN(1005)
DDB:Delta Rev CN(1006)
DDB: Delta Rev AB(1007) 1

DDB: Delta Rev BC(1008)
DDB: Delta Rev CA(1009)
SET:DEF En
MASK:DEF Fwd En
&
DDB: DEF FWD(996)
DDB: DEF REV(997)
MASK:DEF Rev En
& P1591ENd
Figure 49: Send logic
P446/EN/TM/E 7-81
t
DR
&
200ms
&
t
& & DW
t
1 PR
1 &
150ms
& &
Aided 1:317
Aided 1:492 Aided 2:318
Aided 2:506 COS/LGS Alarm

1
DDB: COS/LGS &
CRx Int
DDB: CRx Ext 1
& Aided 1:494
Aided 2:508
Aided 1:493
Aided 2:507
Unblocking
Scheme Selected
P1592ENb
Figure 50: Receive logic
7-82 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 51: Aided tripping logic
7.2.1 Distance scheme PUR - permissive underreach transfer trip

To provide fast fault clearance for all faults, both transient and permanent, along the
length of the protected circuit, it is necessary to use a signal aided tripping scheme. The
simplest of these is the permissive underreach protection scheme (PUR). The channel
P446/EN/TM/E 7-83
for a PUR scheme is keyed by operation of the underreaching zone 1 elements of the
IED. If the remote IED detects a forward fault on receipt of this signal, the IED operates
with no additional delay. Faults in the last 20% (Note 1) of the protected line are
therefore cleared with no intentional time delay.
Note: Assuming a 20% typical “end-zone” when Zone 1 is set to 80% of the protected line.
The following are some of the main features and requirements for a permissive
underreaching scheme.
 Only a simplex signaling channel is required.

 The scheme has a high degree of security since the signaling channel is only
keyed for faults in the protected line.
 If the remote terminal of a line is open, faults in the remote 20% of the line are
cleared using the zone 2 time delay of the local IED.
 If there is a weak or zero infeed from the remote line end, (current below the IED
sensitivity), faults in the remote 20% of the line are cleared using the zone 2 time
delay of the local IED.
 If the signaling channel fails, Basic distance scheme tripping is available.
Figure 52 shows the simplified scheme logic.

Send logic: Zone 1
Permissive trip logic: Zone 2 plus Channel Received
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
A B
Z
Z
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
CRx CRx
CTx CTx
& &
Z1 TZ1 Z1
TZ1
Trip A Trip B
1 1
Zp Zp
TZp TZp
Z2 TZ2 Z2
TZ2
Z3 Z3
TZ3 TZ3
Z4 Z4
TZ4 TZ4
P1134ENa P1145ENb
Optional features of scheme
Figure 52: Permissive underreach transfer trip scheme (PUR)
Detailed logic is shown in Figure 53, as follows:
7-84 P446/EN/TM/E
DDB: CRx (494,508)

DDB: Aided Trip En (501,517)
&
100ms
SET: PUR Selected
P1586ENb
Figure 53: PUR
7.2.2 Distance scheme POR - permissive overreach transfer trip

The channel for a POR scheme is keyed by operation of the overreaching zone 2
elements of the IED. If the remote IED detects a forward fault when it receives this
signal, the IED operates with no additional delay. Faults in the last 20% (Note 1) of the
protected line are therefore cleared with no intentional time delay.
Note: Assuming a 20% typical “end-zone” when Zone 1 is set to 80% of the protected line.
The following are some of the main features and requirements for a permissive
overreaching scheme:
 The scheme requires a duplex signaling channel to prevent possible IED

maloperation due to spurious keying of the signaling equipment. This is necessary
because the signaling channel is keyed for faults external to the protected line.
 The POR scheme may be more advantageous than permissive underreach
schemes for the protection of short transmission lines, since the resistive coverage
of the Zone 2 elements may be greater than that of the Zone 1 elements.
 Current reversal guard logic is used to prevent healthy line protection maloperation
for the high speed current reversals experienced in double circuit lines, caused by
sequential opening of circuit breakers.
Note: The POR scheme also uses the reverse looking zone 4 of the IED as a reverse fault
detector. This is used in the current reversal logic and in the optional weak infeed
echo feature, shown dotted in Figure 54.
Send logic: Zone 2

P446/EN/TM/E 7-85
Zone 4
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
A Z B
Z
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
CB Open & & CB Open
CRx CRx
Zone 4 & & Zone 4
CTx CTx
1 1
LD0V & & LD0V
& &
Z1 Z1
TZ1 TZ1
1 Trip A Trip B 1
ZP ZP
TZP TZP
Z2 Z2
TZ2 TZ2
Z3 Z3
TZ3 TZ3
Z4 Z4
TZ4 TZ4
P1134ENa P1149ENb
Figure 54: Permissive overreach transfer trip scheme (POR)
Detailed logic is shown in Figure 55, as follows:
Note: The DDB Any Trip (522) feeds into a 100 ms delay on drop-off timer, which in turn
leads to signal sending. This is a principle similar to the logic which results in a signal
send for weak infeed and breaker open echoing.
7-86 P446/EN/TM/E
DDB:CRx Int
(494,508)
SET: POR Selected &
Any Z4 Element DDB: Aided Trip En
&
DEF Rev Element 1 1 (501,517)
tRGD
IntSig: BIK Send
DDB:Any Trip (522) SET:Reversal Guard
DDB:Trip_3Ph (529)
IntSig: Signal Send &

& IntSig: Echo Send
SETTING Send on Trip = None
1
ANY TRIP
&
SETTING Send on
Trip = Any Trip
1 &
100ms
SETTING Send on
Trip = Aided/ZI
&
SETTING Aided x
Distance = Disabled
&
ZI TRIP
1
AIDED x DIST TRIP
AIDED x DEF TRIP
DDB: CB Open 3 ph
250ms &
Pole (903)
DDB: CB 1 Open A Ph (904)

1
100ms
DDB: CB 2 Open A Ph (912) &
Only in P544/P546
DDB: CB 1 Open B Ph (905)

& 1
DDB: CB 2 Open B Ph (913)
Only in P544/P546
DDB: CB 1 Open C Ph (906)

DDB: CB 2 Open C Ph (914) &
Only in P544/P546
10ms
SET: WI Echo En &

DDB: VTS Slow
Block (833)
IntSig: Signal Send &

S
100ms SET:WI 3 PoleTripping DDB : WI Trip 3 Ph
R
SET: Weak Infeed Trip En
&
60ms Weak Infeed Trip & (642,652)
Any V< Operated
DDB:WI Trip A (637,647)

x = Scheme 1 or 2 DDB:V< A Operated 451,467 Weak Infeed
DDB:WI Trip C (638,648)
Aided x distance Trip and aided x DEF Trip can only DDB:V< B Operated 452,468 Snapshot
DDB:WI Trip B (639,649)
be active if they are enabled for that scheme. DDB:V< C Operated 453,469 Logic
P1582ENi
Figure 55: POR
7.2.3 Permissive overreach trip reinforcement

The send logic in the POR scheme is arranged so that for any trip command at the local
end, the IED sends a channel signal to the remote end(s). This maximizes the chances
for the fault to be isolated at all ends. The send signal generated by the Any trip
command is sent on both Ch1 and Ch2, if more then one channel is in use. This feature
is called permissive trip reinforcement and is a deliberate attempt to ensure that
synchronous tripping occurs at all line ends.
7.2.4 Permissive overreach scheme weak infeed features

Weak infeed logic can be enabled to run in parallel with the POR schemes. Two options
are available: WI Echo, and WI Tripping.
(Note: Special stub-end transformer Weak Infeed is covered in section 20.4)
P446/EN/TM/E 7-87
Weak Infeed Echo

For permissive schemes, a signal would only be sent if the required signal send zone
detects a fault. However, the fault current infeed at one line end may be so low that it is
insufficient to operate any distance zones, and risks a failure to send the signal. Also, if
one circuit breaker is left open, the current infeed is zero. These are termed weak infeed
conditions, and may result in slow fault clearance at the strong infeed line end (tripping
after time tZ2). To avoid this slow tripping, the weak infeed IED can be set to “echo” back
any channel received to the strong infeed IED, to immediately send a signal once a signal
has been received. This allows the strong infeed IED to trip instantaneously in its
permissive trip zone.
The additional signal send logic is as follows.
Echo Send
No Distance Zone Operation, plus Channel Received.
Weak Infeed Tripping
Weak infeed echo logic ensures an aided trip at the strong infeed terminal but not at the
weak infeed. The IED also has a setting option to allow tripping of the weak infeed circuit
breaker of a faulted line. Three undervoltage elements, Va<, Vb< and Vc< are used to
detect the line fault at the weak infeed terminal. This voltage check prevents tripping
during spurious operations of the channel or during channel testing.
The additional weak infeed trip logic is as follows.
Weak Infeed Trip

No Distance Zone Operation, plus V<, plus Channel Received.
Weak infeed tripping is time delayed according to the WI Trip Delay value. Due to the
use of phase segregated undervoltage elements, single pole tripping can be enabled for
WI trips if required. If single pole tripping is disabled, there is a three pole trip after the
time delay.
7.2.5 Permissive scheme unblocking logic - loss of guard

This mode is designed for use with frequency shift keyed (FSK) power line carrier
communications. When the protected line is healthy, a guard frequency is sent between
line ends to verify the channel is in service. However, when a line fault occurs and a
permissive trip signal must be sent over the line, the power line carrier frequency is
shifted to a new (trip) frequency. Therefore the distance function should receive either
the guard or trip frequency but not both together. With any permissive scheme the PLC
communications are transmitted over the power line which may contain a fault. For
certain fault types, the line fault can attenuate the PLC signals so the permissive signal is
lost and not received at the other line end. To overcome this problem, when the guard is
lost and no trip frequency is received, the IED opens a window of time during which the
permissive scheme logic acts as though a trip signal had been received. Two opto inputs
to the IED need to be assigned, one is the Channel Receive opto, the second is
designated Loss of Guard (the inverse function to guard received).
Permissive
Permissive Alarm
System condition channel Loss of guard
trip allowed generated
received
Healthy Line No No No No
Internal Line Fault Yes Yes Yes No
Yes, during a Yes, delayed on
Unblock No Yes
150 ms window pickup by 150 ms
Yes, delayed on
Signaling Anomaly Yes No No
pickup by 150 ms
Table 4: Loss of Guard function logic
7-88 P446/EN/TM/E
The window of time during which the unblocking logic is enabled starts
10 ms after the guard signal is lost, and continues for 150 ms. The 10 ms delay gives
time for the signaling equipment to change frequency, as in normal operation. For the
duration of any alarm condition, zone 1 extension logic is invoked if Z1 Ext on Chan. Fail
is Enabled.
7.2.6 Distance scheme BLOCKING

The signaling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse zone 4 elements of the IED.
If the remote IED picks up in zone 2, it operates after the trip delay if no block is received.
Listed below are some of the main features and requirements for a BLOCKING scheme:
 BLOCKING schemes require only a simplex signaling channel

 Reverse looking Zone 4 is used to send a blocking signal to the remote end to
prevent unwanted tripping
 When a simplex channel is used, a BLOCKING scheme can easily be applied to a
 Multi-terminal line provided that outfeed does not occur for any internal faults
 The blocking signal is transmitted over a healthy line, and so there are no problems
associated with power line carrier signaling equipment
 BLOCKING schemes provides similar resistive coverage to the permissive
overreach schemes
 Fast tripping occurs at a strong source line end, for faults along the protected line
section, even if there is weak or zero infeed at the other end of the protected line
 If a line terminal is open, fast tripping still occurs for faults along the whole of the
protected line length
 If the signaling channel fails to send a blocking signal during a fault, fast tripping
occurs for faults along the whole of the protected line, but also for some faults in
the next line section
 If the signaling channel is taken out of service, the IED operates in the
conventional basic mode
 A current reversal guard timer is included in the signal send logic to prevent
unwanted trips of the IED on the healthy circuit, during current reversal situations
on a parallel circuit
Figure 56 shows the simplified scheme logic.

Send logic:Reverse Zone 4
Trip logic: Zone 2, plus Channel NOT Received, delayed by Tp
P446/EN/TM/E 7-89
Zone 4
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
A Z B
Z
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
CRx CRx
Fast Z4 Fast Z4
& CTx CTx &
& &
Z1 Z1
TZ1 TZ1
1 Trip A Trip B 1
ZP ZP
TZP TZP
Z2 Z2
TZ2 TZ2
Z3 Z3
TZ3
TZ3
Z4 Z4
TZ4 TZ4

P1134ENa P1152ENb
Figure 56: Distance blocking scheme (BOP)
7.2.7 Distance schemes current reversal guard logic

For double circuit lines, the fault current direction can change in one circuit when circuit
breakers open sequentially to clear the fault on the parallel circuit. The change in current
direction causes the overreaching distance elements to see the fault in the opposite
direction to the direction in which the fault was initially detected (settings of these
elements exceed 150% of the line impedance at each terminal). The race between
operation and resetting of the overreaching distance elements at each line terminal can
cause the Permissive Overreach, and Blocking schemes to trip the healthy line. A
system configuration that could result in current reversals is shown in Figure 57. For a
fault on line L1 close to circuit breaker B, as circuit breaker B trips it causes the direction
of current flow in line L2 to reverse.
7-90 P446/EN/TM/E
t2(C) t2(D)
Fault Fault
A L1 B A L1 B
Strong Weak
source C L2 D source C L2 D
P1134ENa
Note how after circuit breaker B on line L1 opens P1157ENa
the direction of current flow in line L2 is reversed.
Figure 57: Example of fault current reverse of direction
7.2.8 Permissive overreach schemes current reversal guard

The current reversal guard incorporated in the POR scheme logic is initiated when the
reverse looking Zone 4 elements operate on a healthy line. Once the reverse looking
Zone 4 elements have operated, the IED’s permissive trip logic and signal send logic are
inhibited at substation D. The reset of the current reversal guard timer is initiated when
the reverse looking Zone 4 resets. A time delay tREVERSAL GUARD is required in case
the overreaching trip element at end D operates before the signal send from the IED at
end C has reset. Otherwise this would cause the IED at D to over trip. Permissive
tripping for the IEDs at D and C substations is enabled again, once the faulted line is
isolated and the current reversal guard time has expired.
7.2.9 Blocking scheme 1 and 2 current reversal guard

The current reversal guard incorporated in the BLOCKING scheme logic is initiated when
a blocking element picks-up to inhibit the channel-aided trip. When the current reverses
and the reverse looking Zone 4 elements reset, the blocking signal is maintained by the
timer tREVERSAL GUARD. Therefore, the IEDs in the healthy line are prevented from
over tripping due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers in the faulted line. After
the faulted line is isolated, the reverse-looking Zone 4 elements at substation C and the
forward looking elements at substation D resets.
Two variants of Blocking scheme exist, BLOCKING 1, and BLOCKING 2. The only
difference in functionality is:
 BLOCKING 1 - The Reversal Guard is applied to the Signal Send

 BLOCKING 2 - The Reversal Guard is applied to the Signal Receive
The difference in the receive logic is shown in Logic Diagrams, Figure 58 and Figure 59
below:
DDB: CTx (498,514)
DDB: CRx Int (494,508) 1

DDB: COS/LGS Alarm (492,506) 1
P1584ENc
Figure 58: Blocking 1
SET: Reversal
Guard
DDB: CTx (498,514)
1
tRGD
DDB: CRx Int (494,508)

DDB: COS/LGS Alarm (492,506) 1
P1585ENc
Figure 59: Blocking 2
The relative merits of Blocking 1 and Blocking 2 are discussed in Application Examples.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-91
7.2.10 Aided DEF ground fault scheme - permissive overreach

Figure 60 shows the element reaches, and Figure 61 the simplified scheme logic. The
signaling channel is keyed from operation of the forward IN> DEF element of the IED. If
the remote IED has also detected a forward fault, it operates with no additional delay
when it receives this signal.
Send logic: IN> Forward pickup
Permissive trip logic: IN> Forward plus Channel Received
IN> Fwd (A)
ZL
A B
IN> Fwd (B)
P1306ENa
Figure 60: The DEF permissive scheme
The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme
and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults.
CB Open & & CB Open
CRx CRx
DEF-R & & DEF-R
CTx CTx
1 1
LD0V & & LD0V
DEF-F & & DEF-F
DEF Inst Trip Trip DEF Inst

1 A B 1
DEF Bu1 t Bu1 t Bu1 DEF Bu1
DEF IDMT t IDMT t IDMT DEF IDMT
P1134ENa P1154ENa
Figure 61: Aided DEF (ground) permissive scheme logic
7.2.11 Aided DEF ground fault scheme – blocking

Figure 61 shows the element reaches, and Figure 62 the simplified scheme logic. The
signaling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse DEF element of the IED. If the
remote IED forward IN> element has picked up, it operates after the set Time Delay if no
block is received.
Send logic:DEF Reverse
7-92 P446/EN/TM/E
Trip logic: IN> Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, with small set delay
IN> Fwd (A)

IN>1 Rev (A)
ZL
A B
IN> Fwd (B) IN>1 Rev (B)
P1307ENa
Figure 62: The DEF blocking scheme
The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme
and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults.
Where t is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element.
To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping must be
used.
CRx CRx
DEF-R Start Start DEF-R
CTx
Stop CTx
Stop
DEF-F & & DEF-F
DEF Inst Trip Trip DEF Inst

1 A B 1
DEF IDMT t IDMT t IDMT DEF IDMT

P1134ENa P1155ENa
Figure 63: Aided DEF (ground) blocking scheme logic
7.2.12 Delta scheme POR - permissive overreach transfer trip

The channel for a directional comparison POR scheme is keyed by operation of the
overreaching Delta Forward elements of the IED. If the remote IED has also detected a
forward fault on receipt of this signal, the IED operates. Listed below are some of the
main features/requirements for a permissive overreaching scheme:
 Permissive overreach schemes tend to be more secure than blocking schemes

because forward directional decisions must be made at both ends of the line before
tripping is allowed. Failure of the signaling channel does not cause unwanted
tripping.
 If the infeed source at either end of the line is weak, the POR scheme must be
supplemented with Weak Infeed logic.
 The scheme requires a duplex signaling channel to prevent possible IED
maloperation due to spurious keying of the signaling equipment. This is necessary
due to the fact that the signaling channel is keyed for faults external to the
protected line.
 Current reversal guard logic is used to prevent healthy line protection maloperation
for the high speed current reversals experienced in double circuit lines, caused by
sequential opening of circuit breakers.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-93
This scheme is similar to that used in the LFDC IED, and is shown in Figure 64.
Send logic:  Fault Forward
Permissive trip logic:  Fault Forward plus Channel Received.
DIRREV DIR FWD

Z (T)
H
G
R R
Z (T)
DIR FWD DIRREV
DIR FWD DIR FWD

1 CTX CTX 1
CRX CRX
CB CB
Open & Signalling Signalling & Open
Equipment Equipment
DIR FWD & & DIR FWD
Trip G Trip H
1 1
TZ(T) TZ(T)
END G END H
Z t t Z
0 0
P1234ENa
P1019ENa
Figure 64: Delta directional comparison POR scheme
7.2.13 Delta blocking scheme

The signaling channel is keyed from operation of the Delta Reverse elements of the IED.
If the remote IED has detected Delta Forward, it operates after the trip delay if no block is
received. The following are some of the main features and requirements for a permissive
overreaching scheme.
 BLOCKING schemes require only a simplex signaling channel.

 The blocking signal is transmitted over a healthy line so there are no problems
associated with power line carrier signaling equipment.
 Delta blocking schemes tend to be less secure than permissive schemes because
failure of the signaling channel could result in an unwanted tripping later.
Therefore blocking schemes are best supervised using a Channel out of Service
indication.
7-94 P446/EN/TM/E
 Fast tripping occurs at a strong source line end for faults along the protected line
section, even if there is weak or zero infeed at the other end of the protected line.
 If a line terminal is open, fast tripping still occurs for faults along the whole of the
protected line length.
 A current reversal guard timer in the signal send logic prevents unwanted IED trips
on the healthy circuit during current reversal situations on a parallel circuit.
 To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping
Delta dly must be used.
This scheme is similar to that used in the LFDC IED, and is shown in Figure 64.
Send logic: Fault Reverse
Trip logic:  Fault Forward, plus Channel NOT Recieved, delayed by Tp.
DIR REV DIR FWD

Z (T)
H
G
R R
Z (T)
DIR FWD DIR REV
DIR REV DIR REV

CTX CTX
CRX CRX
Signalling Signalling
Equipment Equipment
DIR FWD & & DIR FWD
Trip G Trip H
1 1
TZ(T) TZ(T)
END G END H
Z t t Z
P1019ENa
0 0 P1233ENa
Figure 65: delta directional comparison BLOCKING scheme
7.3 Zone 1 extension and loss of load schemes

P446 offers additional non-channel distance schemes, notably Zone 1 extension, and
loss of load.
7.3.1 Zone 1 extension scheme

Auto-reclosure is widely used on radial overhead line circuits to re-establish supply
following a transient fault. A Zone 1 extension scheme may therefore be applied to a
radial overhead feeder to provide high speed protection for transient faults along the
whole of the protected line. Figure 66 shows the alternative reach selections for zone 1:
Z1 or the extended reach Z1X.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-95
Z1 Extension (A)
ZL
A Z1A B
Z1 Extension (B)
P1308ENa
Figure 66: Zone 1 extension scheme
In this scheme Zone 1X is enabled and set to overreach the protected line. A fault on the
line, including one in the end 20% not covered by zone 1, results in instantaneous
tripping followed by auto-reclosure. Zone 1X has resistive reaches and residual
compensation similar to Zone 1. The auto-recloser in the IED is used to inhibit tripping
from zone 1X so that on reclosure the IED operates with Basic scheme logic only, to co-
ordinate with downstream protection for permanent faults. Therefore transient faults on
the line are cleared instantaneously, which reduces the probability of a transient fault
becoming permanent. However, the scheme can operate for some faults on an adjacent
line, although this is followed by auto-reclosure with correct protection discrimination.
Increased circuit breaker operations would occur, together with transient loss of supply to
a substation.
Fault trip Z1X time delay
First fault trip = tZ1
Fault trip for persistent fault on auto-reclose = tZ2
Table 5: Time delays associated with extended zone Z1X
The Zone 1X reach is set as a percentage of the Zone 1 reach, as a reach multiplier.
The Zone 1 extension scheme can be Disabled, permanently Enabled or just brought into
service when the communication channel fails and the aided scheme is inoperative. It
can be set to be enabled when Ch 1 or Ch 2 fails, or when all channels fail, or when any
channel fails. See Figure 67.
DDB Reset Z1 Extension (490)

SET Z1X Enabled & DDB Zone 1 Extension Active (876)
1
SET Z1X on Ch 1 Fail
&
SET Z1X on Ch 2 Fail
&
SET Z1X on Ch 1 AND 2 Fail
&
SET Z1X on Ch 1 OR 2 Fail
&
DDB Channel 1 Fail (317)
DDB Channel 2 Fail (318) 1
P1548ENb
Figure 67: Zone 1 extension
7.3.2 Loss of load accelerated tripping (LoL)

The loss of load accelerated trip logic is shown in abbreviated form in Figure 68. The
loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end
fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phase. The scheme has the
advantage of not requiring a signaling channel. Alternatively, the logic can be enabled
when the channel associated with an aided scheme has failed. This failure is detected by
permissive scheme unblocking logic, or a Channel Out of Service (COS) opto input. It
can be set to be enabled when Ch 1 or Ch 2 fails, or when all channels fail, or when any
channel fails.
7-96 P446/EN/TM/E
Any fault in the reach of Zone 1 results in fast tripping of the local circuit breaker. For an
end zone fault with remote infeed, the remote breaker is tripped in Zone 1 by the remote
IED. The local IED can recognize this by detecting the loss of load current in the healthy
phases. This, coupled with operation of a Zone 2 comparator, causes tripping of the local
circuit breaker.
Before an accelerated trip can occur, load current must be detected before the fault. The
loss of load current opens a window during which time a trip occurs if a Zone 2
comparator operates. A typical setting for this window is 40 ms as shown in Figure 68,
although this can be altered in the LoL Window setting. The accelerated trip is delayed
by 18 ms to prevent initiation of a loss of load trip due to circuit breaker pole discrepancy
occurring for clearance of an external fault. The local fault clearance time can be
deduced as follows:
t = Z1d + 2CB + LDr + 18 ms
Where:
Z1d = Maximum downstream zone 1 trip time
CB = Breaker operating time
LDr = Upstream level detector (LoL: I<) reset time
Z2
Z1
Z1 Z1
Z1
Z2
LOL-A
LOL-B
LOL-C &
0 & 18ms Trip

&
40ms 0
Z2
1 P1146ENa
Figure 68: Loss of load accelerated trip scheme
For circuits with load tapped off the protected line, care must be taken in setting the loss
of load feature to ensure that the I< level detector setting is above the tapped load
current. When selected, the loss of load feature operates with the main distance scheme
that is selected. This provides high speed clearance for end zone faults when the Basic
scheme is selected or, with permissive signal aided tripping schemes, it provides high
speed back-up clearance for end zone faults if the channel fails.
Note: Loss of load tripping is only available where 3 pole tripping is used. The detailed
Logic Diagram is shown in Figure 69.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-97
SET LoL Enabled
SET LoL on Ch 1 Fail

1
&
SET LoL on Ch 2 Fail
& DDB LoL Inhibit (491)

DDB Any Trip (522)
SET LoL on Ch 1 AND 2 Fail SET Trip 3 Ph En
1
&
SET LoL on Ch 1 OR 2 Fail
& 18ms
& DDB I>LoL A (1365)

DDB Channel 1 Fail (317) DDB I>LoL B (1366) & tLoL
DDB I>LoL C (1367)
DDB Channel 2 Fail (318) 1
DDB Zone 2 AN (966) &
DDB Zone 2 BN (967) &
DDB Zone 2 CN (968) & S

Q
DDB Loss of Load Trip (654)
R
11
Set Dominant
DDB Zone 2 AB (969) & Latch
DDB Zone 2 BC (970) &
DDB Zone 2 CA (971) &

P1547ENb
Figure 69: Loss of load
7-98 P446/EN/TM/E
8 PHASE FAULT OVERCURRRENT PROTECTION

Phase fault overcurrent protection is provided as a form of back-up protection that could
be:
 Permanently disabled
 Permanently enabled
 Enabled only in case of VT fuse/MCB failure
In addition, each stage may be disabled by a DDB (463, 464, 465 or 466) Inhibit I > x (x =
1, 2, 3 or 4)
Phase overcurrent protection is phase segregated, but the operation of any phase is
mapped to 3 phase tripping in the default PSL.
The VTS element of the IED can be selected to either block the directional element or
simply remove the directional control.
8.1 Pick-up characteristics

The first two stages can be set either inverse time or definite time only. The third and
fourth stages have a DT characteristic only. Each stage can be configured to be
directional forward, directional reverse or non-directional.
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

t=Tx + L
( /s)  –1 
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

t = TD x  + L
( /s)  –1 
t = Operation time
 = Constant
 = Measured current
s = Current threshold setting
 = Constant
L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves)
T = Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD = Time multiplier setting for IEEE/US curves
IDMT curve description Standard  Constant  Constant L Constant
Standard Inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very Inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely Inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long Time Inverse UK 120 1 0
Rectifier UK 45900 5.6 0
Moderately Inverse IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Very Inverse IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely Inverse IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217
Inverse US-C08 5.95 2 0.18
Short Time Inverse US 0.16758 0.02 0.11858
Table 6: IDMT curve characteristics
P446/EN/TM/E 7-99
Note: The IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the
time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time of the
IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is used for the IEEE/US curves. The menu is
arranged so that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the > Time Dial cell is not visible and
vice versa for the TMS setting.
8.2 Reset characteristics

The IEC/UK inverse characteristics can be used with a definite time reset characteristic,
however, the IEEE/US curves may have an inverse or definite time reset characteristic.
The following equation can used to calculate the inverse reset time for IEEE/US curves:
TD x S
tRESET = in seconds
(1 - M2)
Where:
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves
S = Constant
M = /s
Curve description Standard S constant
Moderately Inverse IEEE 4.85
Very Inverse IEEE 21.6
Extremely Inverse IEEE 29.1
Inverse US 5.95
Short Time Inverse US 2.261
Table 7: Reset characteristics
8.3 Directional overcurrent protection

The phase fault elements of the IEDs are internally polarized by the quadrature phase-
phase voltages, as shown in the table below:
Phase of protection Operate current Polarizing voltage
A Phase A VBC
B Phase B VCA
C Phase C VAB
Table 8: Quadrature voltage polarisation
Under system fault conditions, the fault current vector lags its nominal phase voltage by
an angle depending on the system X/R ratio. The IED must therefore operate with
maximum sensitivity for currents lying in this region. This is done using the IED
characteristic angle (RCA) setting. The RCA is the angle by which the current applied to
the IED must be displaced from the voltage applied to the IED to obtain maximum
sensitivity. This is set in cell >Char Angle in the overcurrent menu. It is possible to set
characteristic angles anywhere in the range –95° to +95°.
Figure 70 shows the functional logic block diagram for directional overcurrent.
The overcurrent block is a level detector that detects if the current magnitude is above the
threshold, and together with the respective polarizing voltage, a directional check is
performed based on the following criteria:
7-100 P446/EN/TM/E
Directional forward
-90° < (angle(I) - angle(V) - RCA) < 90°
Directional reverse
-90° > (angle(I) - angle(V) - RCA) > 90°
A Phase
Overcurrent A Phase Start
Directional
VBC Polarizing
Voltage
Check & IDMT/DT A Phase Trip
1 &
VBC Polarizing
Memory
B Phase
Overcurrent B Phase Start
Directional
VCA Polarizing
Voltage
Check & IDMT/DT B Phase Trip
1 &
VCA Polarizing
Memory
C Phase
Overcurrent C Phase Start
Directional
VAB Polarizing
Voltage
Check & IDMT/DT C Phase Trip
1 &
VAB Polarizing
Memory
Fast VTS
Block
AR Timer Block
(3rd & 4th stages only)
Phase Overcurrent Timer Block

(Independent for each stage)
P1628ENb
Figure 70: Directional overcurrent logic
Any of the four overcurrent stages may be configured to be directional noting that IDMT
characteristics are only selectable on the first two stages. When the element is selected
as directional, a VTS Block option is available. When the relevant bit is set to 1,
operation of the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS), blocks the stage if
directionalized. When set to 0, the stage reverts to non-directional when the VTS
operates.
8.4 Synchronous polarization

For a close up three-phase fault, all three voltages collapse to zero and no healthy phase
voltages is present. For this reason, the IED includes a synchronous polarization feature
that stores the prefault voltage information and continues to apply it to the directional
overcurrent elements for 3.2 seconds. This ensures that either instantaneous or time
delayed directional overcurrent elements are allowed to operate, even with a three-phase
voltage collapse.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-101
9 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT
9.1 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS)

The negative phase sequence overcurrent protection included in the IED provides four-
stage non-directional/ directional overcurrent protection with independent time delay
characteristics. The first two stages of overcurrent protection have time-delayed
characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or
definite time (DT). The third and fourth stages have definite time characteristics only.
The inverse time delayed characteristics support both IEC and IEEE curves.
The operation of the elements can be directionalized for either forward or reverse fault
protection, for which a suitable IED characteristic angle can be set. Alternatively the
elements can be set as non-directional.
For the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate, the IED must detect a
polarizing voltage above a minimum threshold, 2> V2pol Set. When the element is
selected as directional, a VTS Block option is available. When the relevant bit is set to 1,
operation of the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS), blocks the stage if
directionalized. When set to 0, the stage reverts to non-directional on operation of the
VTS.
When enabled, the following signals are set by the negative sequence overcurrent logic
according to the status of the monitored function.
I2> Inhibit (DDB 562) - Inhibit all 4 stages when high
I2>1 Tmr. Block (DDB 563) - Block timer on 1st stage when high
I2>1 Start (DDB 567) - 1st stage started when high
I2>2 Start (DDB 568) - 2nd stage started when high
I2>3 Start (DDB 569) - 3rd stage started when high
I2>4 Start (DDB 570) - 4th stage started when high
I2>1 Trip (DDB 571) - 1st stage tripped when high
I2>2 Trip (DDB 572) - 2nd stage tripped when high
I3>3 Trip (DDB 573) - 3rd stage tripped when high
I4>4 Trip (DDB 574) - 4th stage tripped when high
All the above signals are available as DDB signals for mapping in Appendix C.
Negative sequence overcurrent protection starts 1/2/3/4 are mapped internally to the ANY
START DDB signal – DDB 736.
The non-directional and directional operation is shown in the following diagrams:
CTS Block n = 1, 2, 3, 4
I2> Protection Inhibit & I2>n Start

I2>n Start
Current Above I2>n Setting
& DT-n I2>n Trip

I2>n Trip
0
I2>n Timer Block
P1604ENa
Figure 71: Negative sequence overcurrent non-directional operation

7-102 P446/EN/TM/E
9.1.1 Directionalizing the negative phase sequence overcurrent element

Directionality is achieved by comparing the angle between the negative phase sequence
voltage and the negative phase sequence current. The element may be selected to
operate in either the forward or reverse direction. Select a suitable IED characteristic
angle setting 2> Char Angle to provide optimum performance. This setting should be
equal to the phase angle of the negative sequence current with respect to the inverted
negative sequence voltage – V2, to be at the center of the directional characteristic.
For the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate, the IED must detect a
polarizing voltage above a minimum threshold, 2> V2pol Set. Figure 72 shows the logic
for negative sequence overcurrent protection with directional operation.
CTS Block
I2> Protection Inhibit &

Current Above I2> Setting
Directional Check I2> Start
Polarising Voltage Above V2> Setting
&
Slow VTS Block
I2> Timer Block & DT

0
I2> Trip
P1605ENb
Figure 72: Directionalizing the negative phase sequence overcurrent element
P446/EN/TM/E 7-103
10 BROKEN CONDUCTOR
10.1 Broken conductor detection

The IED has an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase
sequence current (2/1). This is affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of
negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations
in load current. Therefore, a more sensitive setting can be achieved.
The ratio of 2/1 is calculated and compared with the threshold. If the threshold is
exceeded the delay timer is initiated. The CTS block signal is used to block the operation
of the delay timer.
I1
I2/I1 Above Delay Timer
Threshold &
Broken
I2 Conductor Trip
CTS Block
P1639ENa
Figure 73: Broken conductor logic
7-104 P446/EN/TM/E
11 EARTH FAULT
11.1 Earth fault, Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) and Restricted Earth Fault
(REF) protection
The IED includes backup earth fault protection. Two elements are available:
 A derived earth fault element, where the residual current to operate the element is
derived from the addition of the three line CT currents.
 A sensitive earth fault element where low current settings are required.
The sensitive earth fault element has a separate CT input and would normally be
connected to a core balance CT. The derived and sensitive earth fault elements both
have four stages of protection. The first two stages can be set to either inverse time or
definite time only. The third and fourth stages have a DT characteristic only. Each stage
can be configured to be directional forward, directional reverse or non-directional.
Note: The input CT which is designed specifically to operate at low current magnitudes is
common to both the Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) and high impedance Restricted Earth
Fault (REF) protection, so these features are treated as mutually exclusive in the IED
menu.
Protection also can be enabled if the differential protection communication channel fails
(not applicable to SEF and REF Functions).
Earth fault Overcurrent IN> can be set to:
 Permanently disabled
 Permanently enabled
 Enabled only if VT fuse/MCB fails
Also each stage of EF can be disabled using a DDB (467,468,469 and 470)
Inhibit IN > x and each stage of SEF by DDB (1724,1725,1726 and 1727)
Inhibit ISEF > x (where x = 1, 2, 3 or 4).
The VTS element of the IED can be selected to either block the directional element or
simply remove the directional control.
The N> and ISEF> Function Links settings have the following effect:
VTS Block - When the relevant setting is 1, operation of the Voltage Transformer
Supervision (VTS) blocks the stage if it is directionalized. When set to 0 the stage reverts
to non-directional when the VTS is operated`.
The inverse time characteristics available for the earth fault protection are the same as
those for the phase overcurrent elements, but with the addition of an IDG curve
characteristic.
11.1.1 IDG curve

The IDG curve is commonly used for time delayed earth fault protection in the Swedish
market. This curve is available in stages 1 and 2 of Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault
protection.
The IDG curve is represented by the following equation:
  
t = 5.8 - 1.35 loge   in seconds
 N > Setting 
P446/EN/TM/E 7-105
Where:
 = Measured current
N>Setting = An adjustable setting which defines the start point of the
characteristic
Although the start point of the characteristic is defined by the N> setting, the actual IED
current threshold is a different setting called “IDG s”. The IDG s setting is a multiple of
N>.
An additional setting IDG Time is also used to set the minimum operating time at high
levels of fault current.
Figure 74 shows how the IDG characteristic is implemented.
10
8 IDG Is Setting Range

Operating time (seconds)
3
IDG Time Setting Range
2
0
1 10 100
I/IN>
P2242ENa
Figure 74: IDG characteristic
11.2 Directional earth fault protection

As stated in the previous sections, each of the four stages of earth fault protection can be
set to directional if required. With the application of directional overcurrent protection, the
IED needs a suitable voltage supply to provide the necessary polarization. Two options
are available for polarization; Residual Voltage or Negative Sequence.
11.2.1 Residual voltage polarization

With earth fault protection, the polarizing signal must represent the earth fault condition.
As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly
used to polarize DEF elements. The IED derives this voltage from the 3 phase voltage
input, which must be supplied from either a 5-limb VT or three single phase VTs. These
types of VT design allow the residual flux to pass, so they allow the IED to derive the
required residual voltage. Also the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three-
limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the IED.
Note: Residual voltage is nominally 180 out of phase with residual current. Therefore the
DEF elements are polarized from the -Vres quantity. This 180 phase shift is
automatically introduced in the IED.
The following directional criteria are with zero sequence (residual voltage) polarization.
7-106 P446/EN/TM/E
Directional forward
-90o < (angle(IN) - angle(VN+180o) - RCA) < 90o
Directional reverse
-90o > (angle(IN) - angle(VN+180o) - RCA) > 90o
The virtual current polarizing feature is used exclusively in DEF aided schemes only and
is not available for use with the backup earth fault elements.
CTS Block
IN> Protection
Inhibit
&
IN Derived/Measured
> Setting
EF Start
Directional
VN Polarizing Check & IDMT/DT EF Trip
Voltage VN Pol> &
Slow VTS
Block
EF Timer Block P1633ENb
Figure 75: Directional Earth Fault overcurrent with neutral voltage polarization
(single stage)
11.2.2 Negative sequence polarization (Not for SEF)

In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarization of DEF can be either not
possible to achieve or problematic. An example of the former case is if a suitable type of
VT is unavailable, for example if only a three limb VT is fitted. An example of the latter
case is an HV/EHV parallel line application where problems with zero sequence mutual
coupling may exist.
In either of these situations, the problem can be solved using negative phase sequence
(nps) quantities for polarization. This method determines the fault direction by comparing
nps voltage with nps current. However, the operating quantity is still residual current.
It requires a suitable voltage and current threshold to be set in cells N>V2pol set and
N>2pol set, respectively.
Negative sequence polarizing is not recommended for impedance earthed systems,
regardless of the type of VT feeding the IED. This is due to the reduced earth fault
current limiting the voltage drop across the negative sequence source impedance (V2pol)
to negligible levels. If this voltage is less than 0.5 volts the IED ceases to provide DEF.
The logic diagram for directional earth fault overcurrent with negative sequence
polarization is shown in Figure 76.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-107
CTS Block
IN> Protection
Inhibit
&
IN Derived/Measured
> Setting
EF Start
NPS Polarizing
Current I2> Directional &
Check & IDMT/DT EF Trip
NPS Polarizing
Voltage V2> &
Slow VTS
Block
EF Timer Block P1630ENb
Figure 76: Directional EF with negative sequence polarization (single stage)
The directional criteria with negative sequence polarization is given below:
Directional forward
-90° < (angle(I2) - angle(V2 + 180°) - RCA) < 90°
Directional reverse
-90° > (angle(I2) - angle(V2 + 180°) - RCA) > 90°
7-108 P446/EN/TM/E
12 AIDED DEF
12.1 Directional function - setup of DEF and directional comparison

elements
The IED has additional aided channel pilot schemes to supplement differential and
distance protection.
 DEF Directional earth (ground) fault protection.

 Delta I and V based directional comparison scheme.
Both schemes are configured as unit protection, with a communication channel
connected between the remote line ends.
To make use of these schemes, set the base setting data in GROUP x DISTANCE
SETUP (for Delta comparison scheme) and GROUP x/ AIDED DEF (For Directional earth
fault protection)
12.1.1 DEF zero sequence polarization with virtual current polarizing

With earth fault protection, the polarizing (directional reference) signal is representative of
the earth fault condition. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions,
this quantity is commonly used to polarize the directional decision of DEF elements. The
IED internally derives this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input which must be supplied
from either a 5-limb VT or three single phase VTs. These types of VT design allow the
passage of residual flux and allow the IED to derive the required residual voltage. Also
the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three-limb VT has no path for
residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the IED.
Small levels of residual voltage may be present under normal system conditions due to
system imbalances, VT inaccuracies and IED tolerances. The IED has a user settable
threshold DEF VNPol Set which must be exceeded for the DEF function to be
operational. Residual voltage is nominally 180 out of phase with residual current so DEF
IEDs are polarized from the -Vres quantity. This 180 phase shift is automatically
introduced in the IED.
The IED can trip by this method of polarizing, even if VNpol is less than the set threshold.
If the superimposed current phase selector has identified the faulted phase, for example
phase A, it removes that phase from the residual calculation Va + Vb + Vc, leaving only
Vb + Vc. The resultant polarizing voltage has a large magnitude and is in the same
direction as –Vres. This allows the IED to be applied even where very solid earthing
behind the IED prevents residual voltage from being developed.
This technique of subtracting the faulted phase is described as virtual current polarizing
because it removes the need to use current polarizing from a CT in a transformer star
(wye)-ground connection behind the IED. This would have been necessary with
traditional IEDs.
If Virtual I Pol is set to Disabled it prevents checking of the faulted phase and
subsequent removal of the faulted phase voltage. The DEF protection is then polarized
by the residual voltage only.
The directional criteria with zero sequence (virtual current) polarization are as follows.
Directional forward
-90 < (angle(IN) - angle(VNpol+180) - RCA) < 90
Directional reverse
-90 > (angle(IN) - angle(VNpol+180) - RCA) > 90
P446/EN/TM/E 7-109
Where VNpol is as per the table below:

Phase selector pickup VNpol
A Phase Fault VB + VC
B Phase Fault VA + VC
C Phase Fault VA + VB
No Selection VN = VA + VB + VC
Table 9: Virtual current polarization
12.1.2 DEF negative sequence polarization

In certain applications, residual voltage polarization of DEF may be impossible to achieve
or problematic. An example of the former case is if a three-limb VT is fitted (it has no
path for residual flux). An example of the latter case is an HV/EHV parallel line
application where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist.
In either of these situations, the problem can be solved using negative phase sequence
(nps) quantities for polarization. This method determines the fault direction by comparing
nps voltage with nps current. However, the operate quantity is still residual current. It
requires a suitable voltage and current threshold to be set in cells DEF V2pol Set and
DEF 2pol Set, respectively.
The directional criteria with negative sequence polarization are as follows.
Directional forward
-90o < (angle(I2) - angle(V2+180o) - RCA) < 90o
Directional reverse
-90o > (angle(I2) - angle(V2+180o) - RCA) > 90o
7-110 P446/EN/TM/E
13 RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION (REF)

The REF protection in the IED is a high impedance element which shares the same CT
input as the SEF protection so only one of these elements can be selected.
The setting options are available under the GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROT’N menu.
The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme
where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in the following figure.
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected
circuit
Zm Zm AG
R CT1 R CT2
IF
R L1 R L3
VS R ST
R L2 R R L4
Voltage across relay circuit

VS = IF (RCT + 2RL )
Stabilising resistor R ST limits spill current to I S (relay setting)

R ST = VS R R
IS
IF = Maximum secondary through fault current
Where RR = Relay burden
RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the current transformer
P0115ENc
Figure 77: High impedance principle
If the IED circuit is considered to be very high impedance, the secondary current
produced by the healthy CT flows through the saturated CT. If CT magnetizing
impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage
across the IED circuit is equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the connected
impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The IED can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the overall
impedance of the IED circuit, so that the resulting current through the IED is less than its
current setting. As the impedance of the IED input alone is relatively low, a series
connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by
the formula shown in Figure 77. An additional non-linear metrosil may be required to limit
the peak secondary circuit voltage during internal fault conditions.
To ensure that the protection operates quickly during an internal fault, the CTs used to
operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 4 Vs.
The necessary IED connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 78.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-111
C
RSTAB
SEF Input
P2044ENc
Figure 78: High impedance REF IED CT connections
7-112 P446/EN/TM/E
14 RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE (NVD) PROTECTION

The NVD element in MiCOMho P446 is of two stage design, each stage having separate
voltage and time delay settings. Stage 1 may be set to operate on either an IDMT or DT
characteristic, whilst stage 2 may be set to DT only. Two stages are included for the NVD
protection to account for applications which require both alarm and trip stages.
The IED internally derives the NVD voltage from the 3 input phases which must be
supplied from either a 5-limb VT or three single phase VTs. These types of VT design
allow residual flux to pass and so allow the IED to derive the required residual voltage.
Also the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for
residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the IED.
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula:
t = K/( M - 1)
Where:
K = Time multiplier setting
t = Operating time in seconds
M = Derived residual voltage/IED setting voltage (VN> Voltage Set)
The functional block diagram of the first stage residual overvoltage is shown below:
1st stage VN > Start

VN >
& & IDMT/DT 1st stage VN > Trip
VTS Block
VN > Timer Block P1635ENa
Figure 79: Residual overvoltage logic (single stage)
Each stage of Residual Overvoltage protection may be disabled by a DDB (475 or 476)
Inhibit VN>x (x = 1, 2).
P446/EN/TM/E 7-113
15 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

The IED has a current based thermal replica using load current to model heating and
cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages.
The heat generated in an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive
loss (2R x t). Therefore, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal
time characteristic used in the IED is therefore based on current squared, integrated over
time. The IED automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal
model.
Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full
load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc.
Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are
allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating
follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature
occurs during cooling.
The IED provides two characteristics that may be selected according to the application.
Thermal overload protection may be disabled by DDB 478 Inhibit Thermal > .
15.1.1 Single time constant characteristic

This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers such as AN (Air
Natural) type, and capacitor banks.
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
 2 - (K. 2 
FLC)
t = - loge  
 
 (2 - p2) 
Where:
t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, ;
 = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant;
 = Largest phase current;
FLC = Full load current rating (IED setting ‘Thermal Trip’);
k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to <1.05 FLC;
P = Steady state preloading before application of the overload.
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, therefore whether the overload was applied from 'hot” or “cold”.
The thermal time constant characteristic may be rewritten as:
  - p 
e(-t/)=  
 -1 
Where:
 = 2/k2 FLC2
and
p = p2/k2 FLC2
Where  is the thermal state and is p the prefault thermal state.
7-114 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: A current of 105%s (kFLC) has to be applied for several time constants to cause a
thermal state measurement of 100%.
15.1.2 Dual time constant characteristic (typically not applied for P446)
This characteristic is used to protect oil-filled transformers with natural air cooling, such
as the ONAN (Oil Natural Air Natural) type. The thermal model is similar to that of the
single time constant, except that two time constants must be set.
When there is marginal overloading, heat flows from the windings into the bulk of the
insulating oil. Therefore at low current the replica curve is dominated by the long time
constant for the oil. This protects against a general rise in oil temperature.
When there is severe overloading, heat accumulates in the transformer windings with
little opportunity for dissipation into the surrounding insulating oil. Therefore at high
current the replica curve is dominated by the short time constant for the windings. This
protects against hot spots developing in the transformer windings.
Overall, the dual time constant characteristic provided in the IED protects the winding
insulation from ageing, and to minimize gas production by overheated oil.
Note: The thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature
change.
The thermal curve is defined as:
2 - (k.FLC)2
0.4e(-t/) + 0.6e(-t/) =
2 - p2
Where:
1 = Heating and cooling time constant of the transformer windings;
2 = Heating and cooling time constant for the insulating oil.
A graphical solution using a spreadsheet is recommended to solve this equation to give
the operating time (t). The spreadsheet can be set to calculate the current to give a
chosen operating time. The equation to calculate the current is:
0.4p2.e(-t/1) + 0.6p2.e(-t/2) -k2.FLC2

= …….. Equation 1
0.4 e(-t/1) + 0.6 e(-t/2) -1
Thermal State
Current IA Measurement
Thermal Start Thermal
Current IB 1 Trip Characteristic Thermal Alarm
Current IC Thermal Trip
Reset
Thermal State
Measurerment P1629ENa
Figure 80: Thermal overload protection logic diagram
Figure 80 shows how the magnitudes of the three phase input currents are compared and
the largest magnitude taken as the input to the thermal overload function. If this current
exceeds the thermal trip threshold setting, a start condition is asserted.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-115
16 POWER SWING BLOCKING AND OUT-OF STEP

PROTECTION
16.1 Power swing detection, alarming and blocking
16.1.1 Detection of power swings

A power swing may cause the impedance presented to the distance function to move
away from the normal load area and into one or more of its tripping characteristics. In the
case of a stable power swing it is important that the IED should not trip. The IED should
also not trip during loss of stability since there may be a utility strategy for controlled
system break up during such an event.
The power swing detection in the IED is an advanced technique that uses a
superimposed current (I) detector similar to the phase selection principle described
above. However for the power swing detector the current is always compared to that of
two cycles previous. For a fault condition this power swing detector (PSD) resets after
two cycles, as no superimposed current is detected.
For a power swing, the PSD measures superimposed current for longer than two cycles.
It is the length of time for which the superimposed current persists that distinguishes
between a fault and a power swing. A power swing is in progress if a three-phase
selection, or a phase-to-phase selection when one pole is open, is retained for more than
three cycles, as shown in Figure 81. At this point the required distance zones can be
blocked to avoid tripping, if the swing impedances cross into a tripping zone.
Power Fault
swing
3
cycles
PH1
PSB active PSB removed
& minimum including
3Æ faults
threshold
increased P1181ENa
PH2
Figure 81: Power swing detected for 3 cycles continuous I
Slow swing detection

To detect slow power swings (0.5 Hz and below) when the superimposed current remains
below the minimum threshold (5%In), a complementary method of detection can be used.
This method requires Slow Swing setting to be enabled and Zone 7 and Zone 8 to be
configured. The IED determines the elapsed time required by the impedance vector to
pass through a zone limited by two impedance characteristics. The second impedance
characteristic (the “outer” Zone 8) is concentric around the first one (the “inner” Zone 7),
see Figure 82.
The elapsed time defines the rate of change of impedance. If the rate of change is high,
the change is due to a fault. If the rate of change is low, the IED detects a slow power
swing.
Each characteristic consists of two pairs of settable parallel lines, one pair to determine
the reactance and one determining the resistance.
7-116 P446/EN/TM/E
Both Zone 7 and Zone 8 characteristics are based on the positive sequence impedance
measurement:
V1
Z1  ,
I1
where
V1 is the positive sequence voltage,
I1 is the positive sequence current.
+jX
Z8
t
Z7
V1
Z1 
I1

R8 R 7 R7
R8 +R
Z 7
Z 8
Figure 82: Slow Power Swing detection principle
Power swing is detected if the following condition is true:

t  PSB Timer (setting)
Each zone has a current sensitivity check in the same way as Zone 1.
A semaphore is set to indicate when a slow swing has been detected. This is used in the
main PSB function.
If the slow swing feature is disabled, the IED can not detect swings of 0.5 Hz and below.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-117
Inital
State :Idle
State :
PSB_Zone.CurrentZone = ZONE8
DDB Disabled: Slow Zone 8 Entered
Power Swing
PSB_Zone.CurrentZone = ZONE7 or OUT_OF_ZONE
DeltaT Expired
PSB_Zone.CurrentZone = OUT_OF_ZONE
PSB_Zone.CurrentZone = OUT_OF_ZONE
State :
Zone 7 Entered
State :
PSB_Zone.CurrentZone = ZONE7
DeltaT Expired
DDB Enabled: Slow
Power Swing
Figure 83: Slow Power Swing detection algorithm
Each line of the quadrilateral characteristic uses a comparator to determine the measured
impedance relative to the line.
16.1.2 Actions on power swing detection

Once a power swing is detected the following actions occur:
 Distance elements are blocked on selected zones if blocking is enabled

 All zones are switched to self polarized mho characteristics with 10% offset reach
for maximum stability during the swing
 A power swing block alarm is issued when the swing impedance enters a distance
zone. The condition of entering an impedance zone avoids alarming for
momentary low current swings that settle quickly
 When a power swing is in progress, the minimum threshold used by the phase
selector is increased to twice the maximum superimposed current prevailing in the
swing Therefore the phase selector resets once a power swing is detected. It can
then be used to detect a fault during a power swing.
16.1.3 Detection of a fault during a power swing

A fault is detected during a swing when the phase selector operates, based on its
increased threshold. Therefore any operation of the phase selector causes PSB
unblocking and allows a trip.
For example, a fault causes the delta current measured to increase above twice that
stored during the swing. This is a step change in delta I rather than the expected gradual
transition in a power swing.
16.1.4 Actions on detection of a fault during a power swing

The block signal is only removed from zones that start within two cycles of a fault being
detected. This improves stability for external faults during power swings. Any measuring
zone that was detecting an impedance within its characteristic before the phase selector
detected the fault remains blocked. This minimizes the risk of tripping for a swing
7-118 P446/EN/TM/E
impedance that may naturally be passing through Zone 1, and could otherwise cause a
spurious trip if all zones were unblocked on fault inception. Any measuring zone that
picks up beyond the two cycle window remains blocked. This minimizes the risk of
tripping for a continued swing that may pass through Zone 1, and could otherwise cause
a spurious trip if all zones were allowed to unblock together.
16.1.5 Power swing settings

The standard power swing detection has no settings and does not require any system
study. The only setting available to a user is to decide whether a zone should be blocked
or allowed to trip after a power swing is detected. Zone by zone, it is possible to select
one mode from the following:
 Allow Trip If a power swing locus stays in a trip zone characteristic for a duration
equal to the zone time delay, the trip is allowed to happen.
 Blocking Keeps stability for that zone, even if a power swing locus enters it.
 Delayed Unblock Maintains the block for a set duration. If the swing is still
present after the PSB Timeout Set window has expired, tripping is allowed as
normal.
Other setting possibilities are:
 Selection of PSB as Indication only raises an alarm, without blocking any zones.
 The PSB Unblock Dly function allows for any power swing block to be removed
after a set period. For a persistent swing that does not stabilize, any blocked
zones are made free to trip once the timer has elapsed. When setting which IEDs
will unblock, consider which IED locations are natural split points for islanding the
power system.
 The PSB Reset Delay is a time delay on drop-off timer, which maintains the PSB
detection even after the swing has apparently stabilized. It is used to ensure that
where the swing current passes through a natural minimum and delta I detection
might reset, that the detection does not drop out or chatter. It can therefore be
used to ensure a continual power swing indication when pole slipping (an unstable
out of step condition) is in progress.
3 Cycles PSB Reset

Delay
D I Pickup
t 0
& 0 t
Any Distance Start
PSB Timeout
t Blocking of
0
& selected
distance
zones
Fault during swing logic
P1654ENa
Figure 84: Power swing blocking
16.2 Out of step detection and tripping

Out of Step protection is used to split the power system into more stable areas of
generation and load balance during unstable power oscillations. The points at which the
system should be split are determined by detailed system stability studies.
The Out of Step function has four different setting options, which are only visible if
CONFIGURATION > PowerSwing Block is enabled.
 Disabled. Disables the Out of Step function.

P446/EN/TM/E 7-119
 Predictive OST. Splits the system in advance. It minimizes the angle shift
between two ends and aids stability in the split areas.
 OST. Splits the system when an out of step condition is detected, which is when a
pole slip occurs.
 Predictive OST or OST. Splits the system in advance or when an out of step
condition is detected.
16.2.1 Out of step detection

The Out of Step detection is based on the well proven ∆Z/∆t principle associated with two
concentric polygon characteristic, as shown in Figure 85.
16.2.1.1 Characteristic
Both polygon characteristics are independent and have independent settings for their
respective reactance and resistive reaches.
+jX
Z6
Z5
Predictive Out of
step trip
ZL
Recoverable swing
Out of step trip  R

R6' R5' R5 R6
Z5'
Z6'
Figure 85: Out of step detection characteristic
Both the inner Zone 5 (Z5) and outer Zone 6 (Z6) positive sequence impedance can be
set to ensure correct Out of Step detection during open pole swing conditions. Therefore
there is only one Z5 and Z6 positive sequence impedance polygon characteristic instead
of six characteristics for each measured loop. The measured positive sequence
impedance is calculated as:
V1
Z1  ,
I1
where V1 and I1 are the positive sequence voltage and current derived from the
measured phase quantities.
During symmetrical power oscillations, there is no difference between phase impedance
loops and positive sequence impedance loops, whereas for the open pole oscillations the
phase and positive sequence impedances are different. This must be taken into account
during testing or commissioning.
All four resistive blinders are parallel, using the common angle setting ‘α’ that
corresponds to the angle of the total system impedance ZT (= ZS + ZL + ZR), where ZS
and ZR are equivalent positive sequence impedances at the sending and receiving ends
7-120 P446/EN/TM/E
and ZL positive sequence line impedance. Tilting of the reactance line and residual
compensation is not implemented.
In Figure 85, the solid impedance trajectory represents the locus for the non-recoverable
power oscillation, also known as pole slip or out of step condition. The dotted impedance
trajectory represents a recoverable power oscillation, usually called swings.
16.2.1.2 Operating principle

The Out of Step detection algorithm is based on measuring the speed of positive
sequence impedance passing through the set ∆Z region. As soon as measured positive
sequence impedance touches the outer polygon, a timer is started.
If the disturbance takes less than 25 ms from entering zone 6 to entering zone 5, the IED
considers this to be a power system fault and not an out of step trip condition. The fixed
25 ms timer is not accessible to the user. During a power system fault, the speed of
impedance change from a load to a fault is fast, but the IED may operate slower for
marginal faults close to a zone boundary, particularly for high resistive faults inside the
zone operating characteristic and close to the Z5 boundary. Therefore, the fixed time of
25 ms is implemented to provide sufficient time for a distance element to operate and
therefore to distinguish between a fault and an extremely fast power system oscillation.
If the disturbance takes more than 25 ms but less than DeltaT set time from entering
Zone 6 to entering Zone 5, this is treated as a very fast oscillation. Therefore, the IED
trips if setting option 2 or 4 is selected. The minimum DeltaT setting is 30 ms, allowing 5
ms margin to the fixed 25 ms timer.
If the disturbance takes longer than the DeltaT setting time to enter Zone 5 after entering
Zone 6, it is considered as a slow power oscillation. On entering Z5, the IED records the
polarity of the resistive part of the positive sequence impedance. Two situations are
possible:
 If the resistive part of the positive sequence impedance leaves Z5 with the same
polarity as previously recorded on entering Zone 5, it is considered to be a
recoverable swing. No tripping is issued.
 If the resistive part of the positive sequence impedance has the opposite polarity
when exiting Zone 5 to that of the recorded polarity on entering Zone 5, an Out of
Step condition is recognized. This is followed by the tripping if setting option 3 or 4
is selected. If the DeltaT timer did not expire and setting option 3 is selected, the
Out of Step condition is detected, followed by OST operation.
As the tripping mode for the detected Out of Step condition is always 3 ph trip, the
Predictive OST and OST DDB signals are mapped to the 3ph tripping in the default PSL.
Also Out of Step operation blocks the auto-reclose function. The Out of Step tripping
time delay TOST delays the OST tripping command until the angle between internal
voltages between two ends are at 240 deg closing towards 360 deg. This limits the
voltage stress across the circuit breaker. If a fault occurs during the swing condition, the
out of step tripping function is blocked.
The Out of Step algorithm is completely independent from the distance elements and the
setting-free power swing detection function. The load blinder does not have any effect on
the OST characteristics. For the Out of Step operation, the minimum positive sequence
current of 5%In must be present.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-121
Figure 86: Out of step algorithm
7-122 P446/EN/TM/E
17 VOLTAGE PROTECTION
17.1 Undervoltage protection

Both the under and overvoltage protection functions are in the IED Volt Protection menu.
The measuring mode (ph-N or ph-ph) and operating mode (single phase or 3 phase) for
both stages can be set independently.
From the V<1 function cell, stage 1 can be set as either IDMT, DT or Disabled.
From the V<2 status cell, stage 2 can be set as DT only which can be enabled or
disabled.
Two stages are included to provide both alarm and trip stages, where required.
Alternatively, different time settings may be required depending on the severity of the
voltage dip.
Outputs are available for single or three phase conditions using the V<Operate Mode
cell.
If the protected feeder is de-energized, or the circuit breaker is opened, an undervoltage
condition is detected. V<Polehead nh is used for each of the two stages, to block the
undervoltage protection from operating for this condition. If V<Polehead nh is enabled,
the relevant stage is inhibited by the inbuilt pole dead logic in the IED. This logic
produces an output when it detects either an open circuit breaker through auxiliary
contacts feeding the IED opto inputs or it detects a combination of both undercurrent and
undervoltage on any one phase.
The IDMT characteristic of the first stage is defined by the following formula:
t = K/(1 - M)
Where:
M = Measured voltage / IED setting voltage (V< Voltage Set)
P446/EN/TM/E 7-123
Figure 87: First stage undervoltage function - single and three phase tripping
mode
Note: Undervoltage protection is phase segregated but the operation of any phase is
Each stage of Undervoltage protection can be disabled by a DDB (471 or 472) Inhibit
Vx<.
17.2 Overvoltage protection

Both the over and undervoltage protection functions are in the IED Volt Protection menu.
The measuring mode (ph-N or ph-ph) and operating mode (single phase or 3 phase) for
both stages can be set independently.
The IDMT characteristic on the first stage is defined by the following formula:
t = K/(M - 1)
Where:
7-124 P446/EN/TM/E

M = Measured voltage/IED setting voltage (V> Voltage Set)
The logic diagram for the first stage overvoltage function is shown in Figure 88.
Figure 88: Overvoltage - single and three phase tripping mode (single stage)
Note: Phase overvoltage protection is phase segregated, but the operation of any phase is
Each stage of Overvoltage protection may be disabled by a DDB (473 or 474) Inhibit Vx>
(x = 1, 2).
17.2.1 Compensated overvoltage

The Compensated Overvoltage function calculates the positive sequence voltage at the
remote terminal using the positive sequence local current and voltage and the line
impedance and susceptance. This can be used on long transmission lines where
Ferranti Overvoltages can develop under remote circuit breaker open conditions.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-125
The Compensated overvoltage protection function can be found in the IED menu Volt
Protection. The line impedance settings together with the line charging admittance in
IED menu Line Parameters is used to calculate the remote voltage.
The IED uses the {A,B,C,D] transmission line equivalent model given the following
parameters:
Total Impedance Z  z and
Total Susceptance Y  y  90 and
Line Length l
The remote voltage is calculated using the following equations:
V r   D  C  V s 
   
 I r   BA   I s 
where
Vr, Ir - Voltage and Current at the receiving end.
Vs, Is - Measured (IED) Voltage and Current at the sending end.
A  D  cosh   l 
B  Zc  sinh   l 
C  Yc  sinh   l 
  l  ZY
1 Z
Zc  
Yc Y
Y = Total Line Capacitive Charging Susceptance
Zc = Characteristic Impedance of the line (Surge Impedance).
There are two stages to provide both alarm and trip stages where required.
Both stages are independently settable where Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT,
DT or Disabled, in the V1>1 Cmp Funct cell. Stage 2 is DT only and is enabled/disabled
in the V1>Cmp Status cell.
The IDMT characteristic on the first stage is defined by the following formula:
t = K/(M - 1)
Where:
M = Remote Calculated voltage / IED setting voltage (PH-)
7-126 P446/EN/TM/E
18 FREQUENCY PROTECTION
18.1 Frequency protection

The IED has 4 stages of underfrequency and 2 stages of overfrequency protection to
facilitate load shedding and subsequent restoration. The underfrequency stages can be
optionally blocked by an undervoltage level (setting CB FAIL & P.DEAD/POLEDEAD
VOLTAGE/V<). All the stages can be enabled or disabled in the F<n Status or F>n
Status cell, depending on which element is selected.
Figure 89 shows the underfrequency logic. Only a single stage is shown, the other 3
stages are identical in functionality.
If the frequency is below the setting and not blocked, the DT timer is started. Blocking
may come from the Undervoltage level (selectively enabled for each stage) or the
underfrequency timer block.
If the frequency cannot be determined, the function is also blocked.
1 Underfrequency
Start
Underfrequency
& & (DT) Underfrequency
Trip
All Poles Dead

1
Freq. Not Found
Underfrequency
Timer Block P1640ENa
Figure 89: Underfrequency logic (single stage)
The functional logic diagram is for the overfrequency function as shown in Figure 90.
Only a single stage is shown as the other stages are identical in functionality. If the
frequency is above the setting and not blocked the DT timer is started and after this has
timed out the trip is produced. Blocking may come from the All_Poledead signal
(selectively enabled for each stage) or the overfrequency timer block.
1 Overfrequency
Start
Overfrequency
& & Definite Time Overfrequency
Trip
All Poles Dead

1
Freq. Not Found
Overfrequency
Timer Block P1641ENa
Figure 90: Overfrequency logic (single stage)
When enabled, the following signals are set by the under/overfrequency logic according
to the status of the monitored functions.
F<1 Timer Block (DDB 1149) - Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer
P446/EN/TM/E 7-127

F>1 Timer Block (DDB 1153) - Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer
F>2 Timer Block (DDB 1154) - Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer
F<1 Start (DDB 1155) - Underfrequency Stage 1 Start
F>1 Start (DDB 1159) - Overfrequency Stage 1 Start
F>2 Start (DDB 1160) - Overfrequency Stage 2 Start
F<1 Trip (DDB 1161) - Underfrequency Stage 1 Trip
F>1 Trip (DDB 1165) - Overfrequency Stage 1 Trip
F>2 Trip (DDB 1166) - Overfrequency Stage 2 Trip
Inhibit F<1 (DDB 1167) - Inhibit stage 1 Underfrequency protection
Inhibit F>1 (DDB 1171) - Inhibit stage 1 Overfrequency protection
Inhibit F>2 (DDB 1172) - Inhibit stage 2 Overfrequency protection
18.2 Independent rate of change of frequency protection [81R]

In the following load shedding scheme under falling frequency conditions, it is assumed
that by shedding a stage of load, the system can be stabilized at frequency f2. For slow
rates of decay, this can be done using the underfrequency protection element set at
frequency f1 with a suitable time delay. However, if the generation deficit is substantial,
the frequency rapidly decreases and the time delay imposed by the underfrequency
protection may not allow for frequency stabilization. In this case, the chance of system
recovery is enhanced by disconnecting the load stage based on a measurement of rate of
change of frequency and bypassing the time delay.
This element is a rate of change of frequency monitoring element, and operates
independently from the under and over frequency protection functions. A timer is
included to provide a time delayed operation and the element can be used to provide
extra flexibility to a load shedding scheme in dealing with severe load to generation
imbalances.
Since the rate of change monitoring is independent of frequency, the element can identify
frequency variations occurring close to nominal frequency and therefore provide early
warning to the operator on a developing frequency problem. Additionally, the element
could also be used as an alarm to warn operators of unusually high system frequency
variations.
7-128 P446/EN/TM/E
Frequency
fn
f1
Slow decay
f2
Rapid decay
Time
P4008ENc
Figure 91: Rate of change of frequency protection
18.2.1 Basic functionality

The IED provides four independent stages of rate of change of frequency protection
(df/dt+t). Depending on whether the rate of change of frequency is set positive or
negative, the element reacts to rising or falling frequency conditions respectively, and an
incorrect setting is indicated if the threshold is set to zero. The output of the element is
normally given a user-selectable time delay, although this can be set to zero to create an
instantaneous element.
An Independent setting is available for calculating the rate of change of frequency
measurement, df/dt Avg. Cycles over a fixed period of either 6 or 12 cycles. This
provides the ability to de-sensitize the frequency based protection element against
oscillations in the power system frequency. The 12-cycle averaging window setting
improves measurement accuracy but slows down the protection start time following fault
inception. The maximum fault detection start time following fault inception can be
approximated as follows:
Fault Detection Delay Time (cycles) = 2 X M + 1
Where M = No. of frequency averaging cycles df/dt.Av. Cycles
When enabled, the following signals are set by the df/dt logic according to the status of
the monitored function.
df/dt> Inhibit (DDB 592) - Inhibit all 4 stages when high
df/dt>1 Tmr. Block (DDB 593) - Block timer on 1st stage when high
df/dt>2 Tmr. Block (DDB 594) - Block timer on 2nd stage when high
df/dt>3 Tmr. Block (DDB 595) - Block timer on 3rd stage when high
df/dt>4 Tmr. Block (DDB 596) - Block timer on 4th stage when high
df/dt>1 Start (DDB 597) - 1st stage started when high
df/dt>2 Start (DDB 598) - 2nd stage started when high
df/dt>3 Start (DDB 599) - 3rd stage started when high
df/dt>4 Start (DDB 600) - 4th stage started when high
df/dt>1 Trip (DDB 601) - 1st stage tripped when high
df/dt>2 Trip (DDB 602) - 2nd stage tripped when high
df/dt>3 Trip (DDB 603) - 3rd stage tripped when high
df/dt>4 Trip (DDB 604) - 4th stage tripped when high
All the above signals are available as DDB signals for mapping in Appendix C.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-129
19 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL AND POLE DEAD DETECTION

FUNCTION
19.1 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)

The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, CB Fail 1 Timer and CB
Fail 2 Timer, allowing configuration for the following situations:
 Simple CBF, where only CB Fail 1 Timer is enabled. For any protection trip, the
CB Fail 1 Timer is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to
isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, CB Fail 1 Timer times out and
closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using the programmable scheme
logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally tripping all
infeeds connected to the same busbar section.
 A retripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. CB Fail 1 Timer is used to route a
trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This requires duplicated
circuit breaker trip coils and is known as retripping. If retripping fails to open the
circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued following an additional time delay. The
backtrip uses CB Fail 2 Timer, which is also started at the instant of the initial
protection element trip.
CBF elements CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer can be configured to operate for
trips triggered by protection elements in the IED or using an external protection trip. The
latter is done by allocating one of the IED opto-isolated inputs to External Trip using the
programmable scheme logic.
Three-phase and phase-segregated outputs of CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer are
in PSL.
Independent CB Fail settings are provided for CB1 and CB2.
19.1.1 Initiation of circuit breaker failure protection

If ‘ExtTrip Only Ini’ setting is ‘Disabled’, CBF protection can be initiated when any internal
protection function issues a trip or if an external protection trip occurs. If ‘ExtTrip Only Ini’
setting is ‘Enabled’, then only external protection is allowed to initiate CBF function.
An external protection and internal current-based protections (except SEF protection)
initiate CB Fail function on per-phase basis, while non-current-based protections and SEF
initiate CB Fail for all three phases simultaneously.
19.1.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers

It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection IEDs to indicate
that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as required. This
covers the following situations:
 Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied upon to
definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
 Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This may
result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing
resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault
current, the initiating protection element may reset. Therefore resetting the
element may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function that needs current to operate, the IED uses operation of
undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have tripped
and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be reliable
methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in some applications. For example:
7-130 P446/EN/TM/E
 Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage derives

measurements from a line connected voltage transformer. Here, I< only gives a
reliable reset method if the protected circuit would always have load current
flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating protection element might be a more
reliable method.
 Similarly, where the distance scheme includes Weak Infeed (“WI”) trip logic, the
reset of the WI trip condition should be used in addition to the undercurrent check.
Set: ‘WI Prot Reset’ = Enabled.
 Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage derives
measurements from a busbar connected voltage transformer. Again using I<
would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded. Also, tripping the circuit breaker
may not remove the initiating condition from the busbar, and so drop-off of the
protection element may not occur. In such cases, the position of the circuit breaker
auxiliary contacts may give the best reset method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the IED’s pole dead
logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed provided the
undercurrent elements have also reset.
If the CBF protection is initiated by an external protection trip, then two resetting options
are provided which doesn’t necessarily require undercurrent elements (I<) operation: Prot
Reset OR I< and ProtRstOrCBOp&I< (see the table below). These options can be
especially useful if re-tripping is not implemented, since they allow avoiding back-tripping
due to spurious short-time energization of External Trip opto-inputs.
Important Note: If Prot Reset OR I< or ProtRstOrCBOp&I< options is used, External Trip
inputs MUST NOT be connected to Trip Conversion logic inputs in PSL.
Initiation Setting Value Resetting mechanism

Current based
The resetting mechanism is fixed:
protection except
SEF protection - - [‘ΙA(B,C) < Fast Undercurrent’
elements operate] for all initiated
(e.g.
phases
50/51/46/21/67)
The resetting mechanism is fixed:
SEF Protection
- - [‘ΙSEF< Fast Undercurrent’ element
(ANSI!!!)
operates]
[All ‘ΙA(B,C) < Fast Undercurrent’
I< Only
elements operate]
Non-current based [‘All Poles Dead’ state detected]
protection Non I Prot CB Open & I< AND [All ‘ΙA(B,C) < Fast
Reset Undercurrent’ elements operate]
(e.g. 27/59)
[Protection element reset] AND [All
Prot Reset & I< ‘ΙA(B,C) < Fast Undercurrent’
elements operate]
P446/EN/TM/E 7-131
Initiation Setting Value Resetting mechanism

[‘ΙA(B,C) < Fast Undercurrent’
I< Only elements operate] for all initiated
phases
[[‘Pole Dead A(B,C)’ is detected]
AND [‘ΙA(B,C) < Fast Undercurrent’
CB Open & I<
elements operate]] for all initiated
phases
[External protection reset] AND
Prot Reset & I<
elements operate for all initiated
External protection Ext Prot Reset
phases]
[External protection reset] OR
Prot Reset OR I<
elements operate for all initiated
phases]
[External protection reset] OR
[[[‘Pole Dead A(B,C)’ is detected]
ProtRstOrCBOp&I< AND [‘ΙA(B,C) < Fast Undercurrent’
elements operate]] for all initiated
phases]
Table 10: CB Fail resetting mechanisms
The complete breaker fail logic is shown in the following figures:
Figure 92: CB failure for CB1 part 1
7-132 P446/EN/TM/E
DDB CB1 External Trip A (535)

INTSIG TripStateExt A CB1
Setting CB1
3 Ext Trip Reset
0 I < Only
1 CB Open & I <
2 Prot Reset & I <
3 Prot Reset OR I<1
4 Prot Reset OR ( CB
CB1 Open A ph (904) Open & I< )
INTSIG IA<Fast Undercurrent CB1
INTSIG Latch ATrip Reset Incomp CB1

4
P4946ENa
‘0’
P446/EN/TM/E 7-133
7-134 P446/EN/TM/E
P446/EN/TM/E 7-135
INTSIG Latch_ATrip_Reset_Incomp CB1
INTSIG Latch_BTrip_Reset_Incomp CB1 DDB CB1 Fail1 Trip (834)
INTSIG Latch_CTrip_Reset_Incomp CB1

INTSIG Latch_3phTrip_Reset_Incomp CB1 DDB CB1 Fail Alarm(298)
INTSIG Latch_NonITrip_Reset_Incomp CB1
SET: Enable
CB1 Fail 1 DDB CB1 Fail2 Trip (835)
Status Disable
SET: Enable
CB1 Fail 2
Status Disable
INTSIG CB1 ZCD State A

INTSIG WI INFEED A
SET:CB Fail 1 Timer
INTSIG TripStateA CB1 DDB CB1 Fail1 Trip A (1672)
t
SET:CB Fail 2
Timer
t DDB CB1 Fail2 Trip A (1675)
0
INTSIG CB1 ZCD State B

INTSIG WI INFEED B
SET:CB Fail 1 Timer

INTSIG TripStateB CB1
t DDB CB1 Fail1 Trip B (1673)
SET:CB Fail 2
Timer
t DDB CB1 Fail2 Trip B (1676)
0
INTSIG CB1 ZCD State C

INTSIG WI INFEED C
SET:CB Fail 1 Timer
INTSIG TripStateC CB1 DDB CB1 Fail1 Trip C (1674)
t
SET:CB Fail 2
Timer
t DDB CB1 Fail2 Trip C (1677)
0
INTSIG ZCDStateSEF
SET:CB Fail 1 Timer
INTSIG TripStateSEF t
SET:CB Fail 2
Timer t
P4952ENb
0
7-136 P446/EN/TM/E
DDB CB2 External Trip A (539)

INTSIG TripStateExt A CB2
Setting CB2
3 Ext Trip Reset
0 I < Only
1 CB Open & I <
2 Prot Reset & I <
3 Prot Reset OR I<1
4 Prot Reset OR ( CB
CB2 Open A ph (912) Open & I< )
INTSIG IA<Fast Undercurrent CB2
INTSIG Latch ATrip Reset Incomp CB2

4
P4946ENc
‘0’
P446/EN/TM/E 7-137
7-138 P446/EN/TM/E
P446/EN/TM/E 7-139
7-140 P446/EN/TM/E
19.2 Pole dead logic

The IED uses pole dead logic to determine when the circuit breaker poles are open (pole
dead). This logic produces an output when it detects either an open circuit breaker
through auxiliary contacts feeding the IED opto inputs or it detects a combination of both
undercurrent and undervoltage on any one phase.
This indication can be forced by a status indication from CB auxiliary contacts (52a or
52b), or internally determined by the IED.
The undercurrent detector uses setting (CB FAIL & I< / UNDER CURRENT / I< Current
Set) and the undervoltage level detector uses setting (CB FAIL & I< / PoleDead Voltage
/ V<). The undervoltage level detector V< is set using the pick-up setting, default value
38.1 V. The drop-off is calculated at (43.8 / 38.1) x pick-up setting.
Note: If the VT is connected at the busbar side, auxiliary contacts (52a or 52b) must be
connected to the IED for a correct pole dead indication.
INTSIG Phase A Undercurrent Operation

20ms
INTSIG Phase A Undervoltage Operation
& t DDB Pole Dead A (892)
0 1
DDB CB 1 Open A ph (904)

& &
DDB CB2 Open A ph (912)
INTSIG Phase B Undercurrent Operation 20ms
INTSIG Phase B Undervoltage Operation

& t DDB Pole Dead B (893)
0 1
DDB CB 1 Open B ph (905)

& &
DDB CB2 Open B ph (913)
INTSIG Phase C Undercurrent Operation

20ms
INTSIG Phase C Undervoltage Operation

& t
0 1
DDB Pole Dead C (894)
DDB CB 1 Open C ph (906)

& &
DDB CB2 Open C ph (914)
DDB Any Pole Dead (891)
1
DDB All Poles Dead (890)

DDB CB Open 3 ph (903) &
&
&
DDB CB2 Open 3 ph (911)
INTSIG VTS Slow Block P1112ENc
Figure 104: Pole dead logic
P446/EN/TM/E 7-141
20 SUPERVISION (VTS, CTS, INRUSH DETECTION AND

INFEED BLOCKING)
20.1 Voltage transformer supervision - fuse fail

The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac
voltage inputs to the IED. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults,
overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to IEDs. This usually results in one or
more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there would be a
misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as measured by the IED,
which may result in maloperation.
The VTS logic in the IED is designed to detect the voltage failure, and automatically
adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability would otherwise be
compromised. A time-delayed alarm output is also available.
VTS can be declared by a mini circuit breaker (MCB) status input, by internal logic using
IED measurement, or both. The setting VTS Mode (Measured + MCB /Measured
Only/MCB Only) is used to select the method of declaring VT failure.
For the measured method, there are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure
of the VT supply:
 Loss of one or two phase voltages

 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energization
20.1.1 Loss of one or two phase voltages

The VTS feature of the IED operates on detection of negative phase sequence (NPS)
voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence current. This gives operation
for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is assured during
system fault conditions, by the presence of NPS current. The use of negative sequence
quantities ensures correct operation even where three-limb or V-connected VTs are used.
The Negative Sequence VTS Element is blocked by Any Pole Dead signal during 1P AR
dead time. The resetting of the blocking signal is delayed by 240 ms after Any Pole Dead
condition disappears.
The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 = 10 V and I2 = 0.05 to
0.5 In settable (defaulted to 0.05 In).
20.1.2 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions

If all three phase voltages to the IED are lost, there are no negative phase sequence
quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under such circumstances, a
collapse of the three phase voltages occurs. If this is detected without a corresponding
change in any of the phase current signals (which would indicate a fault), a VTS condition
is raised. The IED detects the presence of superimposed current signals, which are
changes in the current applied to the IED. These signals are generated by comparing the
present value of the current with the value from one cycle previously. Under normal load
conditions, the value of superimposed current should therefore be zero. Under a fault
condition a superimposed current signal is generated which prevents operation of the
VTS.
To avoid blocking VTS due to changing load condition, the superimposed current signal
can only prevent operation of the VTS during the time window of 40 ms following the
voltage collapse.
The phase voltage level detectors are fixed and drop off at 10 V and pickup at 30 V.
The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is fixed at 0.1 In.
7-142 P446/EN/TM/E
20.1.3 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energization

If a VT is inadvertently left isolated before line energization, incorrect operation of voltage
dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element detected three phase VT
failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no corresponding change in current.
However, on line energization there is a change in current, for example, due to load or
line charging current. An alternative method of detecting 3 phase VT failure is therefore
required on line energization.
The absence of measured voltage on all 3 phases on line energization can be due to two
conditions. The first is a 3 phase VT failure and the second is a close up three phase
fault. The first condition requires blocking of the voltage dependent function and the
second requires tripping. To differentiate between these two conditions an overcurrent
level detector VTS > Inhibit is used which prevents a VTS block from being issued if it
operates. This overcurrent level detector is only enabled for 240 ms following line
energization (based on All Poles Dead signal drop off). Therefore, the VTS > Inhibit
setting can be set below the load current. It must still be set in excess of any non-fault
based currents upon line energization (line charging current, transformer inrush current if
applicable) but below the level of current produced in case of switching onto a fault. If the
line is energized where a 3-phase VT failure is already present, the overcurrent detector
does not operate and the VTS block is applied. Closing onto a fault results in operation
of the overcurrent detector and prevents a VTS block from being applied.
This logic is enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the IED’s pole dead
logic) to prevent continuous operation under dead system conditions where no voltage is
present and the VTS > Inhibit overcurrent element is not picked up.
20.1.4 VTS logic

The IED may respond as follows, on operation of any VTS element:
 VTS set to provide alarm indication only;

 Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements;
 Optional conversion of directional overcurrent elements to non-directional
protection (available when set to Blocking mode only). These settings are in the
Function Links cell of the relevant protection element columns in the menu.
The VTS > Inhibit or VTS 2> Inhibit elements are used to override a VTS block if a
fault occurs on the system which could trigger the VTS logic. However, once the VTS
block is set, subsequent system faults must not override the block. Therefore the VTS
block is latched after a user settable time delay VTS Time Delay. Once the signal has
latched there are two methods of resetting. The first is manually using the front panel
interface or remote communications, if the VTS condition has been removed. The
second is in Auto mode, by restoring the 3 phase voltages above the phase level detector
settings mentioned previously.
VTS Status can be set to Disabled, Blocking or Indication.
A VTS indication is given after the VTS Time Delay has expired. If the VTS is set to
indicate only, the IED may maloperate, depending on which protection elements are
enabled. In this case the VTS indication is given before the VTS time delay expires, if a
trip signal is given.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-143
Figure 105: VTS logic
This scheme can also correctly operate under very low load or even no load conditions,
by the combination of time delayed signals derived from the DDB signals VTS Fast block
and all Poles Dead, to generate the Block Distance DDB.
Note: All non-distance voltage-dependent elements are blocked by the “VTS Fast Block”
DDB.
If a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage transformer ac output
circuits, MCB auxiliary contacts can be used to indicate a three phase output
disconnection. As previously described, it is possible for the VTS logic to operate
correctly without this input. However, this facility has been provided for compatibility with
the current practices of various utilities. Energizing an opto-isolated input assigned to
DDB: MCB/VTS on the IED therefore providess the necessary block.
20.2 Current transformer supervision

The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of the
ac phase current inputs to the IED. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of the
interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated element.
7-144 P446/EN/TM/E
Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT secondary voltages

being generated.
20.2.1 Standard CTS (voltage dependant CTS, no need of communications to

declare CTS)
The standard CT supervision feature (CTS) operates on detection of derived zero
sequence current, in the absence of a corresponding derived zero sequence voltage that
would normally accompany it. The voltage transformer connection used must be able to
refer zero sequence voltages from the primary to the secondary side. Therefore, this
element should only be enabled where the VT is of five limb construction, or comprises
three single phase units, and has the primary star point earthed.
CTS block
I N>
& Time delay t CTS alarm
V N<
P2130ENa
Figure 106: Voltage dependant CTS principle scheme
Operation of the element produces a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD, an event
record and a DDB 294: CT Fail Alarm, with an instantaneous block (DDB 928: CTS
Block) for inhibition of protection elements. See Figure 106 above.
Figure 107: Standard CTS
20.2.2 CTS blocking

The standard method always block protection elements operating from derived quantities:
Broken Conductor, Earth Fault and Neg Seq O/C.
Other protection functions such as DEF can be selectively blocked by customizing the
PSL, gating DDB 928: CTS Block with the protection function logic.
20.3 Transformer magnetizing inrush detector

P446 has been designed as a fast distance protection IED. Distance zones should
therefore not be slowed by forcing them to wait for detection or no detection of
transformer inrush current (in general applications). For this reason, the IED has no
second harmonic blocking of the distance elements in the standard protection algorithms.
However, if using a long Zone 1 reach through a transformer, harmonic blocking for
magnetizing inrush current can be implemented. If Inrush Detection is Enabled, the
output of the I(2)/I(1) detectors can be picked up in the Programmable Scheme Logic.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-145
Blocking functions can then be assigned in the PSL as necessary because this detector
does not route directly into the IED’s fixed logic.
20.4 Special weak infeed logic for stub end transformer terminals
The true weak infeed condition is when no current based protection element is sensitive
enough to operate. This is the case when zero or minimal generation is connected at that
terminal, and the prospective level of fault current flowing through the CT is insufficient for
any forward or reverse protection operation. In such cases, the fault is cleared using
either POR or Blocking schemes and by enabling WI Echo + Trip.
However, there could be a specific configuration as shown in Figure 108 that may not be
detected by the IED as a weak infeed condition, even if there is no generation at that end
(left side - IED2).
Figure 108: Weak infeed configuration on stub-fed radial circuit (parallel line is out
of service)
The reason is a star earthed transformer which, in the case of phase to ground and
double phase to ground faults, imposes a very low zero sequence impedance and almost
infinite positive and negative sequence impedance, behaving as a source of zero
sequence current only. In this case the zero sequence current Io dominates I1 and I2 at
the weak end, where all three phase currents approximately equal Io (all in phase and
equal in magnitude). This is true for F1 earth faults at IED2, and for F2 earth faults at
IED1 and IED2. The phase currents are sufficient to the pickup current level detectors in
the IED, aso a true weak infeed condition is not seen by the IED.
In such a stub-end feeding case, IED2 may experience some overreach in the case of
double-phase to ground faults. This is caused by the unusual current distribution making
the IED detect a single-phase fault condition (and potential single pole tripping only in
single pole tripping applications).
For this unusual feeding arrangement, the IED uses a zero sequence stabilizing feature
which measures the dominance of zero sequence current over negative sequence
current (Io/2). It promotes stability by forcing the IED to recognize the above
configuration as a WI condition. It then blocks all distance elements, once the measured
Io/2 ratio exceeds the setting.
7-146 P446/EN/TM/E
21 SYSTEM CHECKS
21.1 System voltage checks
21.1.1 System checks overview

In some situations it is possible for both “bus” and “line” sides of a circuit breaker to be
live when the circuit breaker is open, for example at the ends of a feeder which has a
power source at each end. Therefore, when closing the circuit breaker, it is normally
necessary to check that the network conditions on both sides are suitable, before giving a
CB Close command. This applies to both manual circuit breaker closing and auto-
reclosure. If a circuit breaker is closed when the line and bus voltages are both live, with
a large phase angle, frequency or magnitude difference between them, the system could
be subjected to an unacceptable shock, resulting in loss of stability, and possible damage
to connected machines.
System checks involve monitoring the voltages on both sides of a circuit breaker, and, if
both sides are live, performing a synchronism check to determine whether the phase
angle, frequency and voltage magnitude differences between the voltage vectors, are
within permitted limits.
The preclosing system conditions for a given circuit breaker depend on the system
configuration and, for auto-reclosing, on the selected auto-reclose program. For
example, on a feeder with delayed auto-reclosing, the circuit breakers at the two line
ends are normally arranged to close at different times. The first line end to close usually
has a live bus and a dead line immediately before reclosing. It charges the line (dead line
charge) when the circuit breaker closes. The second line end circuit breaker sees live
bus and live line after the first circuit breaker has reclosed. If there is a parallel
connection between the ends of the tripped feeder, they are unlikely to go out of
synchronism so the frequencies are the same. However, the increased impedance could
cause the phase angle between the two voltages to increase. Therefore the second
circuit breaker to close may need a synchronism check to ensure that the phase angle
has not increased to a level that would cause unacceptable shock to the system when the
circuit breaker closes.
If there are no parallel interconnections between the ends of the tripped feeder, the two
systems could lose synchronism, and the frequency at one end could “slip” relative to the
other end. In this situation the second line end would need a synchronism check of both
phase angle and slip frequency.
If the second line end busbar has no power source other than the feeder that has tripped;
the circuit breaker sees a live line and dead bus, assuming the first circuit breaker has
reclosed. When the second line end circuit breaker closes, the bus charges from the live
line (dead bus charge).
21.1.2 System voltage checks logic diagrams

The system voltage checks logic is shown in AR Figure 59, AR Figure 60 and AR Figure
61.
21.1.3 System voltage checks VT selection

The System Voltage Checks function compares the line voltage and bus voltage.
For a single circuit breaker application, there are two voltage inputs to compare: one from
the voltage transformer (VT) input, from the line side of the circuit breaker, and one from
the VT on the bus side of the circuit breaker.
For a dual circuit breaker installation (breaker-and-a-half switch or mesh/ring bus), three
VT inputs are required, one from the common point of the two circuit breakers, identified
P446/EN/TM/E 7-147
as the line, one from the bus side of CB1, and the third from the bus side of CB2. In most
cases the line VT input is three phase, whereas the bus VTs are single phase.
The bus VT inputs are normally single phase so the system voltage checks are made on
single phases. Also the VT can be connected to either a phase to phase or phase to
neutral voltage. Therefore for correct synchronism check operation, the IED must be
programmed with the appropriate connection. The CS Input setting in the CT AND VT
RATIOS can be set to A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C or C-A according to the application.
The single phase Bus1 VT and Bus 2 VT inputs each have associated phase shift and
voltage magnitude compensation settings CB1 CS VT PhShft, CB1 CS VT Mag., CB2 CS
VT PhShft and CB2 CS VT Mag., to compensate for healthy voltage angle and magnitude
differences between the Bus VT input and the selected line VT reference phase. This
allows the bus VT inputs to be taken from VT windings with different rated voltages or
phase connections to the reference voltage (for example, they could be taken from VTs
on opposite sides of a transformer). Any voltage measurements or comparisons using
bus VT inputs are made using the compensated values.
The system checks logic comprises two modules, one to monitor the voltages, and one to
check for synchronism.
The voltage monitor determines the voltage magnitudes, frequencies and relative phase
angles of the VT inputs using the same VT inputs as the check sync reference phase
voltage setting CS Input, The Live Line, Dead Line, etc., outputs from the voltage monitor
are qualified by blocking inputs from the P544/P546, external VT supervision, VT
secondary MCB auxiliary switch contacts, and by external inputs mapped in the PSL to
DDBs (1522, etc.) to individually inhibit the output DDBs (888, etc.) for each function.
21.1.4 System voltage synchronism checks

Two synchronism check stages are provided for each circuit breaker to compare the line
and bus voltages when closing a circuit breaker.
Synchronism check logic is enabled or disabled for each circuit breaker using Sys
Checks CB1 to Enable or Disable, and Sys Checks CB2 to Enable or Disable.
If Sys Checks CB1 is set to Disable, all other menu settings associated with system
checks and synchronism checks for CB1 become invisible and a DDB (880) signal
Similarly if Sys Checks CB2 is set to Disable, all other menu settings associated with
system checks and synchronism checks for CB2 become invisible, and a DDB (1484)
signal SChksInactiveCB2 is set.
7-148 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 109: Synchro check functionality
Two stages of system synchronism check supervision are provided for each circuit
breaker. When required, they control the manual closing and/or auto-reclosing of the
associated circuit breaker. CB1 CS1 and CB1 CS2 supervise CB1, while CB2 CS1 and
CB2 CS2 supervise CB2.
The functionality of the first two stages (CB1 CS1 and CB2 CS1) is the same for each,
but each circuit breaker has individual settings.
The functionality of the second two stages (CB1 CS2 and CB2 CS2) is the same for
each, with each circuit breaker having individual settings, and the functionality is similar to
the first stages, but the second stages have an additional “adaptive” setting.
The synchronism check function can be set to provide appropriate synchronism check
supervision of circuit breaker closing for either synchronous or asynchronous systems.
The overall Check Sync. functionality is shown in Figure 109.
Two independently settable synchronism check functions are provided for each circuit
breaker controlled by the IED. CB1 CS1 or CB1 CS2, or both, can be applied to
supervise closing of circuit breaker CB1. CB2 CS1 or CB2 CS2, or both, can be applied
to supervise closing of circuit breaker CB2.
CB1 CS1 and CB2 CS1 are designed to be applied for synchronism check on
synchronous systems, while CB1 CS2 and CB2 CS2 provide additional features which
may be required for synchronism check on asynchronous systems. In situations where it
is possible for the voltages on either side of a circuit breaker to be either synchronous or
asynchronous depending on plant connections elsewhere on the system, both CBx CS1
and CBx CS2 can be enabled, to provide a permissive close signal if either set of
permitted closing conditions is satisfied.
Each synchronism check function, as well as having the basic maximum phase angle
difference and slip frequency settings, can also be set to inhibit circuit breaker closing if
selected “blocking” conditions such as overvoltage, undervoltage or excessive voltage
magnitude difference are detected. In addition, CB1 CS2 and CB2 CS2 each require the
phase angle difference to be decreasing in magnitude to permit circuit breaker closing,
and each has an optional “Adaptive” closing feature to issue the permissive close signal
P446/EN/TM/E 7-149
when the predicted phase angle difference immediately prior to the instant of circuit
breaker main contacts closing (after CB Close time) is as close as practicable to zero.
Slip frequency can be defined as the difference between the voltage signals on either
side of the circuit breaker, and represents a measure of the rate of change of phase
between the two signals.
There are two system synchronism check stages for each circuit breaker. This allows the
circuit breaker closing to be enabled under different system conditions, for example, low
slip / moderate phase angle, or moderate slip / small phase angle.
When the check synchronism criteria is satisfied, a DDB signal CBx CSy OK is set
(x = 1 or 2, y = 1 or 2).
For CB1 CS1 OK DDB (883) to be set, the following conditions are necessary:
 Settings Sys Checks CB1 and CB1 CS1 Status must both be Enabled;
AND
 Live Line and Live Bus 1 signals are both set;
AND
 None of the selected CB1 CS1 Volt. Blk conditions (V<, V>, VDiff) are true;
AND
 The measured phase angle magnitude is less than the CB1 CS1 Angle setting;
AND
 If CB1 CS1 SlipCtrl setting is Enabled, the measured slip frequency between the
line VT and Bus1 VT is less than the CB1 CS1 SlipFreq setting.
For signal CB1 CS2 OK DDB (884) to be set, the following conditions are necessary:
AND
AND
AND
line VT and Bus1 VTs is less than the CB1 CS2 SlipFreq setting;
AND
 The measured phase angle magnitude is decreasing;
AND
 If the CB1 CS2 Adaptive setting is Disabled, the measured phase angle magnitude
is less than the CB1 CS2 Angle setting;
OR
If the CB1 CS2 Adaptive setting is Enabled, AND if the predicted phase angle
when CB1 closes (after CB1 Cl Time setting) is less than the CB1 CS2 Angle
setting AND as close as possible to zero AND still decreasing in magnitude.
For CB2 CS1 OK DDB (1577) to be set, the following conditions are necessary:
AND
AND
AND
7-150 P446/EN/TM/E
 The measured phase angle magnitude is less than the CB2 CS1 Angle setting;
AND
line VT and Bus1 VT is less than the CB2 CS1 SlipFreq setting.
For signal CB2 CS2 OK DDB (1463) to be set, the following conditions are necessary:
AND
AND
AND
line VT and Bus1 VTs is less than the CB2 CS2 SlipFreqsetting;
AND
 The measured phase angle magnitude is decreasing;

AND
 If the CB2 CS2 Adaptive setting is Disabled, the measured phase angle magnitude
is less than the CB2 CS2 Angle setting;
OR
If the CB2 CS2 Adaptive setting is Enabled, AND if the predicted phase angle
when CB2 closes (after CB2 Cl Time setting) is less than the CB2 CS2 Angle
setting AND as close as possible to zero AND still decreasing in magnitude.
In most situations where synchronism check is required, the Check Sync. 1 function
alone provides the necessary functionality and the Check Sync. 2 signals can be ignored.
21.1.4.1 Slip control by timer

If Slip Control by Timer or Frequency + Timer is selected, the combination of Phase
Angle and Timer settings determines an effective maximum slip frequency, calculated as:
2xA
T x 360 Hz. for Check Sync. 1, or
A
T x 360 Hz. for Check Sync. 2
A = Phase Angle setting ()

T = Slip Timer setting (seconds)
For example, with Check Sync. 1 Phase Angle setting 30 and Timer setting 3.3 sec., the
“slipping” vector has to remain within 30 of the reference vector for at least 3.3
seconds. Therefore a synchro check output will not be given if the slip is greater than 2 x
30 in 3.3 seconds. Using the formula: 2 x 30  (3.3 x 360) = 0.0505 Hz (50.5 mHz).
For Check Sync. 2, with Phase Angle setting 10 and Timer setting 0.1 sec., the slipping
vector has to remain within 10 of the reference vector, with the angle decreasing, for 0.1
sec. When the angle passes through zero and starts to increase, the synchro check
output is blocked. Therefore an output will not be given if slip is greater than 10 in 0.1
second. Using the formula: 10  (0.1 x 360) = 0.278 Hz (278 mHz).
Slip control by Timer is not practical for “large slip/small phase angle” applications,
because the timer settings required are very small, sometimes < 0.1s. For these
situations, slip control by frequency is recommended.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-151
If Slip Control by Frequency + Timer is selected, for an output to be given, the slip
frequency must be less than BOTH the set Slip Freq. value and the value determined by
the Phase Angle and Timer settings.
21.1.4.2 Check sync. 2

Check sync. 2 functions are included for situations where the maximum permitted slip
frequency and phase angle for synchro check can change according to actual system
conditions. A typical application is on a closely interconnected system, where
synchronism is normally retained when a given feeder is tripped, but under some
circumstances, with parallel interconnections out of service, the feeder ends can drift out
of synchronism when the feeder is tripped. Depending on the system and machine
characteristics, the conditions for safe circuit breaker closing could be, for example:
Condition 1: For synchronized systems, with zero or very small slip:
Slip 50 mHz; phase angle <30
Condition 2: For unsynchronized systems, with significant slip:
Slip 250 mHz; phase angle <10 and decreasing
By enabling both Check Sync. 1, set for condition 1, and Check Sync. 2, set for condition
2, the P446 can be configured to allow CB closure if either of the two conditions is
detected.
For manual circuit breaker closing with synchro check, some utilities might prefer to
arrange the logic to check initially for condition 1 only.
21.1.4.3 Predictive closure of circuit breaker

The “Freq.+Comp.” (Frequency + CB Time Compensation) setting modifies the Check
Sync. 2 function to take account of the circuit breaker closing time. When set to provide
CB Close Time compensation, a predictive approach is used to close the circuit breaker
ensuring that closing occurs at close to 0º therefore minimising the impact to the power
system. The actual closing angle is subject to the constraints of the existing product
architecture, i.e. the protection task runs twice per power system cycle, based on
frequency tracking over the frequency range of 40 Hz to 70 Hz.
21.1.4.4 Voltage and phase angle correction

This feature involves the Check Synchronizing function with different VT ratios. The relay
needs to convert the measured secondary voltages into primary voltage, which in turn
shall be used for check synchronizing function. This is used in applications where the
VTs are having different ratios on bus/line sides of the circuit breaker. Likewise, the
transformer may be of any vector group (say Dy11, Yd5, etc.), in which case an angular
correction factor is required in case the VTs mounted on different sides are used for
synchronizing.
There are some applications where the main VT is in the HV side of a transformer and
the check sync VT is in the LV side or vice-versa. Due to the group index of the
transformer, if this is different from "0", both voltages are not "in phase", so the Check
Synchronizing feature must have a ‘k’ factor (correction factor) to give this vectorial
correction.
kSM, setting ranges from 0.1 to 3, in steps of 0.001, where kSM is the voltage correction
factor.
kSA, setting ranges from -150 to 180º, in steps of 30º, where kSA is the angle correction
factor.
After adding ‘k’ factors:
For the check synch the following will be used:
7-152 P446/EN/TM/E
For matching magnitudes, assuming C/S input setting [0A0F] is A-N:

If ( Vcs (sec)  kSM  Va (sec) ) then line and bus voltages magnitudes are matched
For matching angles:

 
If ( Vcs (sec)  kSA  Va (sec) ) then line and bus voltage angles are matched
Where kSM is [0A14] C/S V kSM

and kSA is [0A15] C/S Phase kSA
Important note:
Setting the right VT ratios will not adjust the k factors and will have no impact on the
check synch functionality, check synch will only take into account the k factors setting.
The VT ratios have impacts on the presentation of the related measurements or

settings in terms of primary or secondary values.
The CS voltage settings in system check column are all referenced by the Main VT
ratios.
The Bus-Line Ang [0230] measurement takes into account the C/S Phase kSA
setting.
Following are various possible application scenarios, wherein voltage correction factor
and angular correction factors are applied to match different VT ratios:
Physical Ratio’s CS Correction
Relay Setting Ratio’s
(ph-N Values) Factors
Main VT Ratio
Scenario Main VT Ratio CS VT Ratio CS VT Ratio
(ph-ph) Always kSM kSA
Pri Sec Pri Sec [0A01] [0A02] [0A03] [0A04] [0A14] [0A15]
(kV) (V) (kV) (V) Pri (kV) Sec (V) Pri (kV) Sec (V)
1 220/√3 110/√3 132/√3 100/√3 220 110 132 100 1.1 30º
2 220/√3 110/√3 220/√3 110 220 110 127 110 0.577 0º
3 220/√3 110/√3 220/√3 110/3 220 110 381 110 1.732 0º
In the above examples, the CS VT ratio settings in the relay are so adjusted to a value such
that they are within the acceptable range of the relay inputs and by multiplying a voltage
correction factor, kSA, they are corrected and made equal to the physical ratios. This does
not directly match the physical ratios. It can be phase - phase, phase - neutral or any ratio
which can match the physical VT ratio.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-153
22 CIRCUIT-BREAKER CONTROL: OPERATIONAL

DESCRIPTION
This section describes the P446 operational control of dual circuit breakers.
22.1 INTRODUCTION
The circuit breaker control and monitoring in the dual-breaker P446 provides single phase
or three phase switching of a feeder controlled by two circuit breakers at a line end, for
example in a one and a half switch configuration or at a mesh type (ring bus) installation.
It can also be set to manage switching of a feeder controlled by a single circuit breaker
This section introduces the operation of the circuit breaker scheme. It describes the
circuit breaker state monitoring, condition monitoring, circuit breaker control, and the
circuit breaker auto-reclose operation.
The control logic for dual circuit breaker switching sequences is complex. For detailed
information see the logic diagrams in the“Circuit Breaker Control and Auto-Reclose
Figures (AR Figures) section at the end of this chapter. Diagrams not included in this
chapter are in the AR figures section and are clearly indicated.
The inputs and outputs of the logic described are, in many cases, DDB signals that are
available to the programmable scheme logic (PSL). These signals are described in
Appendix C of this manual. Other signals are used but are internal to the circuit breaker
control logic. Unlike the DDB signals, these internal signals cannot be accessed using
the programmable scheme logic. They are hard-coded into the application software. A
second supplementary section lists these signals and provides a brief description.
22.2 Circuit breaker scheme designation

In the dual-breaker IED, the two controlled circuit breakers are designated CB1 and CB2.
CB1 connects the IED to Bus1 and CB2 connects the IED to Bus 2.
The IED can be configured for use in a single circuit breaker application using either CB1
control or CB2 control. In this case, all text associated with the unused circuit breaker is
hidden.
Note: If the menu text does not state which CB, it should be assumed to be CB1 (for
example, CB Operations in the circuit breaker monitoring features). CBx is either CB1
or CB2.
22.3 Circuit breaker status

The IED monitors the position of each circuit breaker. If the state is unknown, an alarm is
raised.
The IED can be set to monitor the auxiliary contacts of each circuit breaker as normally
open (52A) or normally closed (52B). Under healthy conditions for each circuit breaker,
the 52A and 52B contacts should be in opposite states. If both sets of contacts are open,
it indicates one of the following conditions:
 Auxiliary contacts or wiring is defective

 Circuit breaker is defective
 Circuit breaker is in an isolated position
If both sets of contacts are closed, it indicates one of the following conditions:
7-154 P446/EN/TM/E
 Auxiliary contacts or wiring is defective

 Circuit Breaker is defective
If any of these conditions exist, an alarm is issued after a time delay. This delay is set in
CB CONTROL settings > CB Status time. A normally open or normally closed output
contact can be assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic (PSL).
The time delay avoids the alarm tripping due to noise or contact bounce during normal
switching.
Note: The CB Status time setting is applied equally to both controlled circuit breakers.
Under CB CONTROL there are two settings: CB1 Status Input and CB2 Status Input.
Each can be set at one of the following seven options to control CB1 and CB2:
CB Status Description
None
52A 3 pole
52B 3 pole
52A & 52B 3 pole
52A 1 pole
52B 1 pole
52A & 52B 1 pole
If None is selected, no circuit breaker status is available. This directly affects any
function in the IED that uses this signal such as circuit breaker control or auto-reclose.
If only 52A is used (open when the circuit breaker is open, closed when the circuit
breaker is closed), the IED assumes a 52B signal from the absence of the 52A signal.
Circuit breaker status information is available but no discrepancy alarm is issued. This is
also true where only a 52B is used (closed when the circuit breaker is open, open when
the circuit breaker is closed).
If both 52A and 52B are used, status information is available and a discrepancy alarm
CBx Status Alarm (x = 1 or 2) is available, according to the following table. 52A and 52B
inputs are assigned to IED opto-isolated inputs using the PSL.
Auxiliary contact position CB state detected Action
52A 52B
Open Closed Breaker Open Circuit breaker healthy
Closed Open Breaker Closed Circuit breaker healthy
Alarm raised if the condition
Closed Closed CB Failure persists for greater than “CB
Status time”
Alarm raised if the condition
Open Open State Unknown persists for greater than “CB
Status time”
In the internal logic of the P446, the breaker position used in the algorithm is considered
to be open when the CB State Detected is Breaker Open. In all others cases the breaker
position is considered to be closed. Therefore during operation of the circuit breaker, if
the condition 52A=52B=0 or 52A=52B=1 is encountered, the circuit breaker is considered
to be closed.
If single pole tripping is used, an open breaker condition is only given if all three phases
indicate an open condition. Similarly for a closed breaker condition, indication that all
P446/EN/TM/E 7-155
three phases are closed must be given. For single pole tripping applications 52A-a, 52A-
b and 52A-c or 52B-a, 52B-b and 52B-c inputs should be used. The circuit breaker state
monitoring logic diagrams for CB1 & CB2 are shown in AR Figure 1 and AR Figure 2.
If inputs relevant to each of the circuit breakers (CB1 and CB2) are available to the IED
using the opto isolated inputs, the logic can determine the state of each circuit breaker.
22.4 Circuit breaker condition monitoring

Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and
mechanism operate correctly and also that the interrupting capability has not been
compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based
on a fixed time interval or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of
monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive
maintenance. The circuit breaker monitoring features of the P446 can help with more
efficient maintenance regimes.
22.4.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features

For each trip operation for each circuit breaker the IED records statistics as shown in the
following table taken from the IED menu. The menu cells shown are counter values only.
The Min./Max. values in this case show the range of the counter values. These cells can
not be set.
Menu text Default Setting Step size
Min. Max.
CB1 A Operations 0 0 10000 1
CB1 B Operations 0 0 10000 1
CB1 C Operations 0 0 10000 1
CB1 A Broken 0 0 25000 n^ 1
CB1 B Broken 0 0 25000 n^ 1
CB1 C Broken 0 0 25000 n^ 1n^
CB1 Operate Time 0 0 0.5 s 0.001
Reset CB1 Data No Yes, No
CB2 A Operations 0 0 10000 1
CB2 B Operations 0 0 10000 1
CB2 C Operations 0 0 10000 1
CB2 A Broken 0 0 25000 n^ 1
CB2 B Broken 0 0 25000 n^ 1
7-156 P446/EN/TM/E
Menu text Default Setting Step size

CB2 C Broken 0 0 25000 n^ 1n^
CB2 Operate Time 0 0 0.5 s 0.001
Reset CB2 Data No Yes, No
In certain situations, such as following a maintenance inspection and overhaul, these

counters can be reset to zero. The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters aree
updated every time the IED issues a trip command. If the breaker is tripped by an
external protection device, the circuit breaker condition monitoring data can be updated.
This is done using the programmable scheme logic and by allocating one of the P446
opto-isolated inputs to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal mapped to
the opto is called an External Trip.
Note: When in Commissioning Test Mode the circuit breaker condition monitoring counters
are not updated.
The measurement of circuit breaker broken current, operating time and the overall circuit
breaker monitoring logic diagram, are shown in Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 112,
Figure 113, Figure 114 and Figure 115.
INTSIG Phase A Current SET CUMULATIVE IA

BROKEN In
S
R
INTSIG Phase B Current

SET CUMULATIVE IB
BROKEN In
S
R
INTSIG Phase C Current SET CUMULATIVE Ic

BROKEN In
S
DDB CB1 Trip 3ph (526) R
1 t Note: Broken current totals shall not

DDB ExternalTrip3ph (534) 0 be incremented if the relay is in test
1 cycle mode.
DDB CB1 Trip Output A (523)
1 t 1
DDB CB1 ExternalTrip A (535)
0
1 cycle
DDB CB1 Trip Output B (524)
1 t 1
DDB CB1 Ext Trip B (536)
0
1 cycle
DDB CB1 Trip Output C (525)
1 t 1
1
DDB CB1 Ext Trip C (537) 0
1 cycle
COMMAND: Reset CB1 Data
1
DDB Rst CB1 Data (447)
NOTE: Broken current totals shall not be incremented if the relay is in test mode
P1113ENf
Figure 110: CB1 condition monitoring – broken current
P446/EN/TM/E 7-157
INTSIG Phase A Current SET CUMULATIVE IA

BROKEN In
S
R
INTSIG Phase B Current

SET CUMULATIVE IB
BROKEN In
S
R
INTSIG Phase C Current SET CUMULATIVE Ic

BROKEN In
S
DDB CB2 Trip 3ph (1600) R
1 t Note: Broken current totals shall not

DDB CB2 ExtTrip3ph (538) 0 be incremented if the relay is in test
1 cycle mode.
DDB CB2 Trip OutputA (1601)
1 t 1
DDB CB2 ExtTrip A (539)
0
1 cycle
DDB CB2 Trip OutputB (1602)
1 t 1
DDB CB2 ExtTrip B (540)
0
1 cycle
DDB CB2 Trip OutputC (1603)
1 t 1
1
DDB CB2 ExtTrip C (541) 0
1 cycle
1
NOTE: Broken current totals shall not be incremented if the relay is in test mode
P1113ENg
Figure 111: CB2 condition monitoring – broken current
7-158 P446/EN/TM/E
DDB Trip 3ph (526)
&
1
DDB External Trip3Ph (534)
DDB CB1 Trip Output A (523)
1 Start
DDB External Trip A (535)
CB1 OPERATING TIME

PHASE A CB Op Time Ph A
Reset
LD Fast U/C IA<
1 Stop
DDB Pole Dead A (892)
DDB CB1 Trip Output B (524)
1 Start
DDB External Trip B (536)
CB1 OPERATING TIME

PHASE B CB Op Time Ph B
Reset
LD Fast U/C IB<
1 Stop
DDB Pole Dead B (893)
DDB CB1 Trip Output C (525)
DDB CB1 Ext Trip C (537)

1 Start
CB1 OPERATING TIME CB Op Time Ph C

LD Fast U/C IC< PHASE C Reset
1 Stop
1
Note: CB Operating Time shall not be produced if the relay P1114ENh
is in test mode
Figure 112: CB1 condition monitoring – operation time
P446/EN/TM/E 7-159
DDB CB2 Trip 3ph (1600)
&
1
DDB CB2 Ext Trip3Ph (538)
DDB CB2 Trip OutputA (1601)
1 Start
DDB CB2 Ext Trip A (539)
CB2 OPERATING TIME

PHASE A CB2 Op Time Ph A
Reset
LD Fast U/C IA<
1 Stop
DDB Pole Dead A (892)
DDB CB2 Trip OutputB (1602)
1 Start
CB2 OPERATING TIME

PHASE B CB2 Op Time Ph B
Reset
LD Fast U/C IB<
1 Stop
DDB Pole Dead B (893)
DDB CB2 Trip OutputC (1603)

1 Start
CB2 OPERATING TIME CB2 Op Time Ph C

LD Fast U/C IC< PHASE C Reset
1 Stop
1
Note: CB Operating Time shall not be produced if the relay P1114ENi
is in test mode
Figure 113: CB2 condition monitoring – operation time
Reset SET: I^ Maintenance Enable DDB CB I^ Maint (1106)

&
Phase A Broken Current Alarm &
Disable S Q
Reset R
Select > I^ Maintenance Set Dominant
Phase B Broken Current Greatest Setting
Reset
Command : Yes 1 DDB CB I^ Lockout (1107)
Phase C Broken Current > I^ Lockout Enable &
Reset CB Data
No Setting
Quiescent State Disable
Opto Input DDB Rst CB1 data (447) 1 1 DDB CB1 Monitor alarm (299)
> I^ lockout Alarm
Command : Yes 1
Clear Alarms No
Quiescent State
SET: No CB Ops Enable

DDB CB1 Trip 3ph (526) & DDB No.CB Ops Maint (1108)
Maintenance Alarm Disable &
S Q
1 Increment R
DDB CB1 Ext Trip3ph (534) 1
> No CB Ops
Phase A Trip Maintenance Setting Set Dominant
Counter
DDB Trip Output A (523)
Reset
1 SET: No CB Ops Enable DDB No.CB Ops Lock (1109)
DDB External Trip A (535) &
Lock Alarm
1 Increment Disable
DDB Trip Output B (524) Phase B Trip Select
Counter > No CB Ops Lock
1 Maximum Setting
DDB External Trip B (536) Reset
DDB Trip Output C (525) > No CB Ops Lock &

1 Increment
Setting Minus 1
1 Phase C Trip
DDB External Trip C (537)
Counter
1 Reset
SET: Fault Freq Enable & S Q DDB CB1 FaultFreqLock (1112)

Lock Alarm Disable R
> Fault Freq

Count Setting
DDB CB1 Pre-Lockout (1364)

Increment 1
S Q t > Fault Freq Count &
Excessive Fault
R 0 Frequency Counter Setting Minus 1
SET: Fault Reset
Freq Time 1
Excessive Fault
Frequency Counter
SET: CB Time Enable & DDB CB1 Time Maint (1110)

Maintenance Alarm &
Disable S Q
Reset R
Phase A Circuit Breaker Operation Time >CB Time Set Dominant
Maintenance
Reset Select Setting
Greatest DDB CB1 Time Lockout (1111)
Phase B Circuit Breaker Operation Time Enable
SET CB Time &
Lockout Alarm Disable
Reset
Phase C Circuit Breaker Operation Time >CB Time Lockout 1 DDB CB1 mon LO Alarm (300)
Setting INTSIG Reset Lockout Alarm
INTSIG Control CB Unhealthy
INTSIG Control no Check Synch

1 S Q DDB CB1 LO Alarm (860)
R
INTSIG CB Failed to Trip
INTSIG CB Failed to Close
Command: Yes
CB mon LO reset No
1
Quiescent State
Command: Clear
Clear Alarms
No Operation
Quiescent State
DDB CB Open 3ph (903) S Q

R
DDB CB Closed 3ph (907)
t
1 & 0
SET: CB Control/
DDB CB Closed A ph (908) CB mon LO RstDly
DDB CB Closed B ph (909)

&
DDB CB Closed C ph (910)
SET CB: Control: User Interface

Rst CB mon LO by CB Close
P1115ENh
Figure 114: Circuit breaker 1 – monitoring
7-160 P446/EN/TM/E
Reset SET: I^ Maintenance Enable DDB CB2 I^ Maint (1113)

&
Phase A Broken Current Alarm &
Disable S Q
Reset R
Select > I^ Maintenance
Phase B Broken Current Greatest Setting Set Dominant
Reset
Command : Yes 1 DDB CB2 I^ Lockout (1114)
Phase C Broken Current > I^ Lockout Enable &
Reset CB Data
No Setting
Quiescent State Disable
Opto Input DDB Rst CB2 data (1597) 1 1 DDB CB2 Monitor Alm (321)
> I^ lockout Alarm
Command : Yes 1
Clear Alarms No
Quiescent State
SET: No CB Ops Enable

DDB CB2 Trip 3ph (1600) & DDB No.CB2 Ops Maint (1115)
Maintenance Alarm Disable &
S Q
1 Increment R
DDB CB2 Ext Trip3ph (538) 1
> No CB Ops
Phase A Trip Maintenance Setting Set Dominant
Counter
DDB CB2 Trip OutputA(1601)
Reset
1 SET: No CB Ops Enable DDB No.CB2 Ops Lock (1116)
DDB CB2 Ext Trip A (539) &
Lock Alarm
1 Increment Disable
DDB CB2 Trip OutputB(1602) Phase B Trip Select > No CB Ops Lock
Counter Maximum
1 Reset Setting
DDB CB2 Trip OutputC (1603) > No CB Ops Lock &

1 Increment
Setting Minus 1
1 Phase C Trip
Counter
1 Reset
Enable
SET: Fault Freq & S Q DDB CB2 FaultFreqLock (1119)
Lock Alarm Disable R
> Fault Freq

Count Setting
DDB CB2 Pre-Lockout (1598)

Increment 1
S Q t > Fault Freq Count &
Excessive Fault
R 0 Frequency Counter Setting Minus 1
SET: Fault Reset
Freq Time 1
Excessive Fault
Frequency Counter
SET: CB Time Enable & DDB CB2 Time Maint (1117)

Maintenance Alarm &
Disable S Q
Reset R
Phase A Circuit Breaker Operation Time >CB Time Set Dominant
Maintenance
Reset Select Setting
Greatest DDB CB2 Time Lockout (1118)
Phase B Circuit Breaker Operation Time Enable
SET CB Time &
Lockout Alarm Disable
Reset
Phase C Circuit Breaker Operation Time >CB Time Lockout 1 DDB CB2 mon LO Alarm (322)
Setting INTSIG Reset Lockout Alarm
INTSIG Control CB Unhealthy
INTSIG Control no Check Synch

1 S Q CB2 LO Alarm (1599)
R
INTSIG CB Failed to Trip
INTSIG CB Failed to Close
Command: Yes
CB mon LO reset
No
1
Quiescent State
Command: Clear
Clear Alarms
No Operation
Quiescent State
DDB CB2 Open 3 ph (911) S Q

R
DDB CB2 Closed 3 ph (915)
t
1 & 0
SET: CB Control/
DDB CB2 Closed A ph (916) CB mon LO Rst Dly
DDB CB2 Closed B ph (917)

&
DDB CB2 Closed C ph (918)
SET: CB Control User Interface

Rst CB mon LO by
CB Close
P1115ENi
Figure 115: Circuit breaker 2 – monitoring
22.5 Circuit breaker control

This functionality shows how a circuit breaker close signal from the auto-reclose logic
AutoClose CBx (x = 1 or 2) is applied alongside operator controlled circuit breaker close
and trip control
See AR Figure 43 and AR Figure 44 (logic diagram supplement) for CB1 & CB2 circuit
breaker control respectively.
The P446 includes the following options for the control of each of the two circuit breakers:
 Local tripping and closing using the IED menu or Hotkeys

 Local tripping and closing using IED opto-isolated inputs
 Remote tripping and closing using the IED communications
 Auto-reclosing using the Auto Close CB1 or Auto Close CB2 signal from the CB1 &
CB2 Auto Close logic.
It is recommended that separate IED output contacts are allocated for remote circuit
breaker control and protection tripping. This enables the control outputs to be selected
using a local/remote selector switch as shown in Figure 116. Where this feature is not
required, the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection and remote tripping.
For the P446, the two circuit breakers can be selectively controlled both locally and
remotely if IED contacts are assigned to allow a separate control trip contact and a
separate control close for each circuit breaker. Therefore there are four output IED
contacts.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-161
+ ve
Protection
trip
Trip
Remote 0
control trip Close
Remote
control close
Local
Remote
Trip Close
ve
P0123ENa
Figure 116: Remote control of circuit breaker
A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed.
Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the circuit breaker is initially open. To
confirm these states it will be necessary to use the circuit breaker 52A and/or 52B
contacts (the different selection options are given from the CBx Status Input cell above).
If no circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are available then this cell should be set to None.
Under these circumstances no circuit breaker control (manual or auto) will be possible.
A circuit breaker close command (Close CB1 for CB1 or Close CB2 for CB2) will initiate
closing of the circuit breaker. The output contact, however, can be set to operate
following a user defined time delay (‘Man Close Delay’). This is designed to give
personnel time to retreat from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time
delay applies to all manual circuit breaker close commands.
The control close cycle can be cancelled at any time before the output contact operates
by any appropriate trip signal, or by activating DDB (443): Rst CB1 CloseDly for CB1 or
by DDB (1419): Rst CB2 CloseDly for CB2.
An Auto Close CB1 or Auto Close CB2 signal from the Auto close logic bypasses the
Man Close Delay time, and the CB1 Close or CB2 Close outputs operate immediately to
close the circuit breaker.
The length of the trip or close control pulse is set using the Trip Pulse Timeand Close
Pulse Time settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure the
breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.
Note: The manual trip and close commands are found in the SYSTEM DATA column and
the hotkey menu.
If an attempt to close the circuit breaker is being made and a protection trip signal is
generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command.
If the system check synchronism function is set, this can be enabled to supervise manual
circuit breaker close commands. A circuit breaker close output will only be issued if the
check synchronism criteria are satisfied. Different system check criteria can be selected
for control closing CB1 and CB2. A user settable time delay (Check Sync Time) is
7-162 P446/EN/TM/E
included to supervise manual closure with check synchronizing criteria. If the check
synchronism criteria are not satisfied in this time period following a close command the
IED will lockout and alarm.
Before manual reclosure, in addition to a synchronism check, there is also a circuit
breaker healthy check, CB Healthy, which requires the circuit breaker to be capable of
closing safely (for example, having its closing spring fully charged and/or gas pressure
sufficient for a close and immediate fault trip), as indicated by DDB input CBx Healthy (x
= 1 or 2). A user settable time delay CB Healthy Time is included for manual closure
with this check. If the circuit breaker does not indicate a healthy condition in this time
period following a close command (DDB input is still low when the set time has elapsed)
then the IED will lockout the relevant circuit breaker and set an alarm. This check can be
disabled by not allocating an opto input for DDB “CB Healthy". The signal defaults to high
if no logic is mapped to a DDB in the PSL in the IED.
If auto-reclose is used it may be desirable to block its operation when performing a
manual close. In general, the majority of faults following a manual closure will be
permanent faults and it will be undesirable to allow auto-reclose.
To ensure that auto-reclosing is not initiated for a manual circuit breaker closure on to a
pre-existing fault (switch on to fault), the AUTO-RECLOSE menu setting CB IS Time
(circuit breaker in service time) should be set for the desired time window. This setting
ensures that auto-reclose initiation is inhibited for a period equal to setting “CB IS Time”
following a manual circuit breaker closure. If a protection operation occurs during the
inhibit period, auto-reclosing is not initiated.
Following manual circuit breaker closure, if either a single phase or a three phase fault
occurs during the inhibit period, the circuit breaker is tripped three phase, but auto-
reclose is not locked out for this condition.
If the circuit breaker fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in
the state of CBx Status inputs) a ‘CBx Trip Fail’ or ‘CBx Close Fail’ alarm (x = 1 or 2) is
generated after the relevant ‘Trip pulse Time’ or ‘Close Pulse Time’ has expired. These
alarms can be viewed on the IED LCD display, remotely using the IED communications,
or can be assigned to operate output contacts using the IEDs programmable scheme
logic (PSL).
Note: CB Healthy Time timer and Check Sync Time timer described in this menu section are
applicable to manual circuit breaker operations only. These settings are duplicated in
the auto-reclose menu for auto-reclose applications.
For the description of settings and commands related to the various methods for resetting
circuit breaker lockouts, refer to section 22.6.6.23 - Reset CB Lockout.
22.5.1 Circuit breaker control using hotkeys

The hotkeys allow direct access to the manual trip and close commands without the need
to use the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu. Red or green color coding can be
applied when used in circuit breaker control applications.
If <<TRIP>> or <<CLOSE>> is selected the user is prompted to confirm the execution of
the relevant command. If a “trip” is executed, a screen displaying the circuit breaker
status will be displayed once the command has been completed. If a “close” is executed
a screen with a timing bar will appear while the command is being executed. This screen
has the option to cancel or restart the close procedure. The timer used is taken from the
manual close delay timer setting in the CB Control menu. If the command has been
executed, a screen confirming the present status of the circuit breaker will be displayed.
The user is then prompted to select the next appropriate command or to exit - this will
return to the default IED screen.
If no keys are pressed for a period of 25 seconds whilst the P446 is waiting for the
command confirmation, the MiCOMho P446 will revert to showing the circuit breaker
status. If no key presses are made for a period of 25 seconds whilst the P446 is
P446/EN/TM/E 7-163
displaying the circuit breaker status screen, the P446 will revert to the default IED screen.
Figure 117 shows the hotkey menu associated with circuit breaker control functionality.
To avoid accidental operation of the trip and close functionality, the hotkey circuit breaker
control commands are disabled for 10 seconds after exiting the hotkey menu.
Figure 117: Circuit breaker control hotkey menu
22.5.2 Circuit breaker control using function keys

The function keys allow direct control of the circuit breaker if programmed to do this in the
PSL. To enable local tripping and closing, it must be set in the CB Control menu, CB
Control By cell, to one of the opto settings. All circuit breaker manual control settings and
conditions apply for manual tripping and closing using the function keys.
The default logic can be programmed to activate this feature for CB1
Figure 118: Circuit breaker control using function keys default PSL
Function key 2 and function key 3 are both enabled and set to Normal Mode and the
associated DDB signals (1097) and (1098) are active high ‘1’ on a key press.
The following DDB signals must be mapped to the relevant function key:
Init Trip CB1 (DDB 439) - Initiate manual circuit breaker CB1 trip
7-164 P446/EN/TM/E
Init Close CB1 (DDB 440) - Initiate manual circuit breaker CB1 close
The programmable function key LEDs are mapped so the LEDs are yellow while the keys
are activated.
The diagram shows the control of CB1 only for simplicity. CB2 can be controlled in a
similar way and the relevant DDB signals are (441) Init Trip CB2, and (442) Init Close
CB2.
22.6 Single and three phase auto-reclosing

The auto-reclose scheme in the MiCOMho P446 provides single phase or three phase
auto-reclosing of a feeder terminal switched by one or two circuit breakers.
With the P446, the user can select to initiate auto-reclosure following any Zone 1, or
distance-aided scheme trips which occur. In addition, the user can selectively decide to
auto-reclose for trips from time-delayed distance zones, overcurrent and earth (ground)
elements, and DEF aided schemes.
In a two circuit breaker scheme, the circuit breakers are normally arranged to reclose
sequentially with one designated leader circuit breaker reclosing after a set dead time
followed, if the leader circuit breaker remains closed, by the second circuit breaker after a
further delay, the follower time. In the operational description, the two circuit breakers are
designated as CB1 and CB2. The scheme can be configured by menu settings, by
control commands, or by opto inputs to operate in any of the following modes for the first
shot (first auto-reclose attempt):
Leader CB Leader AR mode Follower CB Follower AR Mode
CB1 1Ph CB2 1Ph or 3Ph
CB1 3Ph CB2 3Ph
CB1 1/3Ph CB2 1/3Ph or 3Ph
CB1 1Ph, 3P or 1/3Ph No follower AR No follower AR
CB2 1Ph CB1 1Ph or 3Ph
CB2 3Ph CB1 3Ph
CB2 1/3Ph CB1 1/3Ph or 3Ph
CB2 1Ph, 3P or 1/3Ph No follower AR No follower AR
If 1Ph or 1/3Ph follower auto-reclose mode is selected, the follower can perform single
phase auto-reclose only if the leader circuit breaker has performed single phase auto-
reclose. If the leader has tripped and reclosed three phase, the follower is also forced to
trip three phase, and will then reclose three phase provided three phase auto-reclose is
permitted for the follower circuit breaker. If the follower circuit breaker trips three phase,
and three phase auto-reclose is not permitted for the follower, then the follower circuit
breaker will lock out without reclosing.
Single phase reclosing is permitted only for the first shot of an auto-reclose cycle. If two
or more shots are enabled, then in a multi-shot auto-reclose cycle the second and
subsequent trips and reclosures will be three phase.
The scheme can be configured to control a single circuit breaker installation. If the menu
setting Num CBs is set to CB1 Only, all menu settings and indications relating to CB2 are
redundant and hidden, and the scheme controls only CB1. If the menu setting Num CBs
is set to CB2 Only, all menu settings and indications relating to CB1 are redundant and
hidden, and the scheme controls only CB2. In these single circuit-breaker configurations,
the selected circuit-breaker auto-reclose can be selected to 1Ph, 3Ph or 1/3Ph AR mode
indicating single phase, three phase, or single/three phase operation.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-165
22.6.1 Time delayed and high speed auto-reclosing

The auto-reclose function offers multi-shot auto-reclose control, selectable to perform up
to a four shot cycle. Dead times (Note 1) for all shots (Note 2) are independently
adjustable. If a circuit breaker closes successfully at the end of the dead time, a Reclaim
Time starts. If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the auto-reclose function resets at
the end of the reclaim time. If the protection trips again during the reclaim time the IED
advances to the next shot in the programmed cycle, or, if all programmed reclose
attempts have been made, the auto-reclose goes to lockout.
Note 1: Dead Time denotes the open (dead) interval delay of the CB
Note 2: A Shot is a reclosure attempt
22.6.2 Auto-reclose logic inputs

The auto-reclose function uses inputs in the logic. These inputs can be assigned and
activated from any of the opto-isolated inputs on the IED using the programmable
scheme logic (PSL). Contacts from external equipment can be connected to the optos to
control the auto-recloser. The circuit breaker status (open/closed) must also be available
through auxiliary contact inputs to the IED.
These logic inputs can also be assigned and activated from other sources. The function
of these inputs is identified by their DDB signal text. The inputs can be selected to accept
either a normally open or a normally closed contact, programmable using the PSL editor.
22.6.2.1 Circuit breaker healthy

The majority of circuit breakers are only capable of providing one trip-close-trip cycle.
Following this, it is necessary to re-establish sufficient energy in the circuit breaker (spring
charged, gas pressure healthy, etc.) before the circuit breaker can be reclosed.
The DDB CB Healthy input is used to ensure that there is sufficient energy available to
close and trip the circuit breaker before initiating a CB Close command. If on completion
of the dead time, the DDB CB Healthy" input is low, and remains low for a period given by
the CB Healthy Time timer, lockout will result and the circuit breaker will remain open
DDBs (436 & 437) are used for CB1 Healthy & CB2 Healthy respectively to enable CB1
Close and CB2 Close by auto-reclose. The CB Healthy Time setting is common to both
CB1 and CB2.
This check can be disabled by not allocating an opto input for DDB CB Healthy. The
signal defaults to high if no logic is mapped to a DDB in the PSL in the IED
22.6.2.2 Inhibit auto-reclose

An external input can be used to inhibit auto-reclose. The signal can be mapped using
the PSL from an opto input or a communications input.
The signal is Inhibit AR, DDB (1420). This single signal applies to both CB1 and CB2.
Energising the input inhibits any auto-switching. Any auto-reclose in progress is reset
and inhibited but not locked out. The signal ensures that auto-switching does not
interfere with any manual switching. A typical application would be on a mesh-corner
scheme where manual switching is being performed on the mesh, for which any auto-
reclose would cause interference.
If a single phase auto-reclose cycle is in progress and a single pole of the circuit breaker
is tripped when this signal is raised, a ‘force three phase trip output’, (AR Force 3 pole,
DDB (858)) is set. This forces the circuit breaker to trip the other phases, ensuring that
all poles are in the same state. It also avoids a pole stuck condition when the circuit
breaker is subsequently closed.
7-166 P446/EN/TM/E
22.6.2.3 Block auto-reclose

External inputs can be used to block auto-reclose. Two signals (one for each circuit
breaker controlled) can be mapped using the PSL from opto inputs or communications
inputs.
The two signals are:
 Block CB1 AR DDB (448)

 Block CB2 AR DDB (1421).
If asserted, the Block CB AR input blocks the operation of the auto-reclose cycle. If auto-
reclose is in progress, it forces the circuit breaker to lockout.
Typically it is used where auto-reclose may be required. An example is on a transformer
feeder, where auto-reclosing can be initiated from the feeder protection but blocked from
the transformer protection.
Block CB AR can also be used if the auto-reclose cycle is likely to fail due to conditions
associated with the protected circuit. For example, the input can be used if a circuit
breaker indicates, anywhere during the dead time, that it can not switch. This may be
due to low gas pressure or loss of vacuum alarm.
22.6.2.4 Reset lockout

The Reset Lockout input can be used to reset the auto-reclose function following lockout
and reset any auto-reclose alarms, provided that the signals which initiated the lockout
have been removed.
The following DDB signals are available for mapping in PSL from opto inputs or
communications inputs:
DDB (446) Rst CB1 Lockout: Reset Lockout Opto Input to reset CB1 Lockout state
DDB (1422) Rst CB2 Lockout: Reset Lockout Opto Input to reset CB2 Lockout state
22.6.2.5 Pole discrepancy

Circuit breakers with independent mechanisms for each pole normally have a ‘phases not
together’ or ‘pole discrepancy’ protection device. This automatically trips all three phases
if they are not all in the same position (all open or all closed).
During single pole auto-reclosing a pole discrepancy condition is deliberately introduced
and the pole discrepancy device must not operate for this condition. This may be
achieved using a delayed action pole discrepancy device with a delay longer than the
single pole auto-reclose dead time, SP AR Dead Time.
Alternatively, a signal can be given from the IED during the single pole auto-reclose dead
time, AR 1 Pole In Progress, to inhibit the external pole discrepancy device.
In the IED, the Pole Discrepancy input is activated by a signal from an external device.
This signal indicates that all three poles of the CB are not in the same position. The Pole
Discrepancy inputs, DDB (451) & DDB (1606) force a 3 pole trip on CB1 & CB2
respectively using PSL mapping.
The logic diagram for the pole discrepancy is shown in AR Figure 62 (logic diagram
supplement).
22.6.2.6 External trip

The External Trip 3Ph input and the External Trip A, External Trip B and External Trip C
inputs can be used to initiate three or single phase auto-reclose.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-167
Note: These signals are not used to trip the circuit breaker but do initiate auto-reclose. To
trip the circuit breaker directly they could be assigned to the trip contacts of the IED in
the PSL.
To initiate auto-reclosing, the following DDB signals can be mapped from opto inputs
using the PSL.
DDB (535): CB1 Ext Trip A
DDB (536): CB1 Ext Trip B
DDB (537): CB1 Ext Trip C
DDB (534): CB1 Ext Trip 3Ph
22.6.3 Internal signals
22.6.3.1 Trip initiate signals

Use P841b which has most up-to-date autoreclose documentation. Applies to P446,
P544, P546.
The Trip Inputs A, Trip Inputs B and Trip Inputs C signals are used to initiate single or
three phase auto-reclose.
Note: For single phase auto-reclose these signals must be mapped in the PSL as shown in
the default.
22.6.3.2 Circuit breaker status

The CB Open 3 ph, CB Open A ph, CB Open B ph and CB Open C ph, signals are used
to indicate if a circuit breaker is open three or single phase. These are driven from the
internal pole dead logic and the circuit breaker auxiliary inputs.
The CB Closed 3 ph, CB Closed A ph, CB Closed B ph and CB Closed C ph, signals are
used to indicate if a circuit breaker is closed three or single phase. These are driven from
the internal pole dead logic and the circuit breaker auxiliary inputs.
22.6.3.3 Check synch ok and system check ok

Internal signals generated from the internal system check function and external system
check equipment are used by the internal auto-reclose logic to permit auto-reclosure.
DDB (883) CB1 CS1 OK & DDB (884) CB1 CS2 OK are output from CB1 Check Sync
logic and indicate conditions for CB1 sync check stage1 & 2 are satisfied.
DDB (1577) CB2 CS1 OK & DDB (1463) CB2 CS2 OK are output from CB2 Check Sync
logic and indicate conditions for CB2 sync check stage1 & 2 are satisfied.
22.6.4 Auto-reclose logic outputs

The CB1 AR 1p InProg (DDB 845) and the CB2 AR 1p InProg (DDB 855) output signals
indicate that single phase auto-reclose is in progress. The outputs remain high from
protection initiation until lockout, or successful reclosure of the circuit breaker which is
indicated by the circuit breaker successful auto-reclose signals,CB1 Succ 1P AR (DDB
7-168 P446/EN/TM/E
1571) and CB2 Succ 1P AR (DDB 1451) generated by the logic for CB1 and CB2
respectively.
The CB1 AR 3p InProg (DDB 844) and CB2 AR 3p InProg (DDB 1411) output signals
indicate that three phase auto-reclose is in progress. The outputs remain high from
protection initiation until lockout, or successful reclosure of the circuit breaker which is
indicated by the circuit breaker successful auto-reclose signals, CB1 Succ 3P AR (DDB
852) and CB2 Succ 3P AR (DDB 1452) for generated by the logic for CB1 and CB2
respectively.
Any ‘auto-reclose lockout’ condition resets all ‘auto-reclose in progress’ signals
associated with that circuit breaker, such as ARIP.
22.6.5 Auto-reclose logic operating sequence

For simplicity, the auto-reclose operating sequence is described for the case of a single
circuit breaker, CB1 only.
The same operating sequence would apply if CB2 only was enabled.
In a dual breaker application, the same operating sequence applies to the leader circuit
breaker. If the leader circuit breaker remains closed after the set dead time, the follower
circuit breaker recloses after a further delay (the follower time).
Note: In a dual circuit breaker application, the settings describing single and three phase
auto-reclose AR 1P AR 3P and AR 1/3P below would change in the dual breaker case
to reflect the mode of the leader circuit breaker L1P, L3P, L1/3P.
Following this introduction to the logic sequence, is a comprehensive description of the

auto-reclose and circuit breaker operation.
An auto-reclose cycle can be internally initiated by operation of a protection element,
provided the circuit breaker is closed until the instant of protection operation.
The operation of the auto-reclose sequence is controlled by the “Dead Timers”. Using
settings, the user can determine what conditions are used to initiate the dead timers as
described in section 22.6.6.14. However, the dead timers can be considered to start on
initiation of the auto-reclose cycle by the protection.
If only single phase auto-reclose AR 1P is enabled then the logic allows only a single shot
auto-reclose. For a single phase fault, the single phase dead timer SP AR Dead Time
starts, and the single phase auto-reclose in progress signal CB1 AR 1p InProg (DDB 845)
is asserted. For a multi-phase fault the logic triggers a three phase trip and goes to
lockout.
If only three phase auto-reclose AR 3P is enabled then, for any fault, the three phase
dead timers: 3P AR DT Shot 1, 3P AR DT Shot 2, 3P AR DT Shot 3, 3P AR DT Shot 4,
(Dead Time 1, 2, 3, 4) are started and the three phase auto-reclose in progress signal
CB1 AR 3p InProg (DDB 844) is asserted. The logic forces a three phase trip by setting
AR Force CB1 3P (DDB 858) for any single phase fault if only three phase auto-reclose
AR 3P is enabled.
If single and three phase auto-reclose AR1/3P are enabled then, if the first fault is a
single phase fault the single phase dead time SP AR Dead Time is started and the single
phase auto-reclose in progress signal CB1 AR 1p InProg (DDB 845) is asserted. If the
first fault is a multi-phase fault the three phase dead timer 3P AR DT Shot 1 is started
and the three phase auto-reclose in progress signal CB1 AR 3p InProg (DDB 844) is
asserted. If the IED has been set to allow more than one reclose (AR Shots >1) then any
subsequent faults will be converted to three phase trips by setting the signal AR Force
CB1 3P (DDB 858). The three phase dead times 3P AR DT Shot 2, 3P AR DT Shot 3 and
3P AR DT Shot 4 (Dead Times 2, 3, 4) will be started for the 2nd, 3rd and 4th trips (shots)
respectively. The three phase auto-reclose in progress signal CB1 AR 3p InProg (DDB
844) will be asserted. If a single phase fault evolves to a multi-phase fault during the
single phase dead time (SP AR Dead Time) then single phase auto-reclose is stopped.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-169
The single phase auto-reclose in progress signal CB1 AR 1p InProg (DDB 845) is reset,
the three phase auto-reclose in progress signal CB1 AR 3p InProg (DDB 844) is set, and
the three phase dead timer 3P AR DT Shot 1 is started.
At the end of the relevant dead time, provided system conditions are suitable, a circuit
breaker close signal is given. The system conditions to be met for closing are that the
system voltages are in synchronism or that the dead line/live bus or live line/dead bus
conditions exist, indicated by the internal system check synchronizing element, and that
the circuit breaker closing spring, or other energy source, is fully charged as indicated by
the CB Healthy input. The circuit breaker close signal is cut-off when the circuit breaker
closes. For single phase auto-reclose no voltage or synchronism check is required as
synchronizing power is flowing in the two healthy phases. For three phase auto-
reclosing, for the first shot only, auto-reclose can be performed without checking that the
voltages are in synchronism using a setting. This setting, CBxL SC Shot 1, can be set to
Enabled to perform synch-checks on shot 1 for CB1 or CB2, or Disabled to not perform
the checks.
When the circuit breaker has closed, the Set CB1 Close (DDB 1565) signal from the CB
autoclose logic goes high and the Reclaim Time starts. If the circuit breaker has
remained closed and not tripped again when the reclaim timer expires, the auto-reclose
cycle is complete. Signal CB1 Succ 1P AR (DDB1571) or CB1 Succ 3P AR (DDB 852) is
generated to indicate the successful reclosure. These signals also increment the relevant
circuit breaker successful auto-reclose shot counters CB1 SUCC SPAR, CB1 SUCC
3PAR Shot1, CB1 SUCC 3PAR Shot2, CB1 SUCC 3PAR Shot3 and CB1 SUCC 3PAR
Shot4, as well as resetting the circuit breaker auto-reclose in progress CB1 ARIP signal.
If the protection operates and circuit breaker trips during the reclaim time the IED either
advances to the next shot in the programmed auto-reclose cycle, or, if all programmed
reclose attempts have been made, the circuit breaker goes to lockout. Every time the IED
trips the sequence counter is incremented by 1 and the reclaim time starts again after
each shot, following the Set CB1 Close signal going high again.
For multi-phase faults the auto-reclose logic can be set to allow auto-reclose block for 2
and 3 phase faults or to allow auto-reclose block for 3 phase faults only using the setting
Multi Phase AR in the AUTORECLOSE settings, where the options are Allow Autoclose ,
BAR 2 & 3 ph and BAR 3 Phase.
Figure 119: Auto-reclose timing diagram – single breaker, single fault
7-170 P446/EN/TM/E
Protection Trip (1ph) (3ph)
CB1/CB2 AR 1p in
Progress
CB1/CB2 AR 3p in
Progress
CB1 Open (1ph)
CB1 Open (3ph)
CB2 Open (1ph)
CB2 Open (3ph)
Dead Time (1p)
AR Force CB2 (3p)
AR Force CB1 (3p)
Auto Close CB1
Follower Time(1p)
Auto Close CB2
Reclaim Timing (1p)
Dead Time (3p)
P4352ENa
Figure 120: Auto-reclose timing diagram – repeated fault inception
P446/EN/TM/E 7-171
Figure 121: Auto-reclose timing diagram leader/follower (1ph)
7-172 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 122: Auto-reclose timing diagram leader/follower (3ph)
22.6.6 Auto-reclose main operating features
22.6.6.1 Circuit breaker in service

The circuit breaker in service logic is shown in AR Figure 4 (logic diagram supplement).
To be available for auto-reclosing, each circuit breaker has to be in service when the
auto-reclose is initiated by a protection operation. The circuit breaker is considered to be
in service if it has been in a closed state for a period equal to or greater than the setting
CB IS Time.
A short adjustable time delay, CB IS Memory Time, allows for situations where, due to
very fast acting circuit breaker auxiliary switches, when a circuit breaker trips following a
fault, the circuit breaker change of state from closed to open is detected in the auto-
reclose initiation logic before the AR Initiate signal from the protection is recognised.
Once an auto-reclose cycle has been started for the relevant circuit breaker, the in
service signal for that circuit breaker stays set until the end of the auto-reclose cycle.
The Bx In Service (x = 1 or 2) signal resets if the circuit breaker opens, or if the
corresponding circuit breaker auto-reclose in progress (ARIP) signal resets.
22.6.6.2 Auto-reclose enable

The auto-reclose enable logic is shown in AR Figure 5 (logic diagram supplement).
A master enable/disable signal provides overall control of the auto-reclose function for the
circuit breakers. If CONFIGURATION > Auto-reclose setting is set to enabled the
auto-recloser can be brought into service with the following alternative commands,
providing further control.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-173
The auto-recloser is enabled when the AR In Service DDB (1385) goes high. To achieve
this, as well as enabling the CONFIGURATION > Auto-reclose setting, the following
conditions must be met.
 Auto-reclose must be enabled for at least one of the circuit breakers (CB1/CB2).
This is done by enabling DDB input AR Enable CB1 (1609) for CB1 or AR Enable
CB2 (1605), or both, for CB2. Both of these DDB signals default to high if not
mapped in the PSL. If they are not mapped, this part of the logic is always
satisfied.
 Auto-reclosing needs to be enabled from an opto input mapped to the AR Enable
DDB (1384), or one of the following conditions must be met.
 A menu command from CB CONTROL > HMI Auto-reclose Mode is used to
bring the auto-recloser into service.
 For a P446 with IEC 60870-5-103 communications, a standardised enable auto-
reclose command is received through the communications link.
 The auto-recloser is brought into service by pulsing the AR Pulse On DDB
(1382).
The auto-reclose status is shown in CB CONTROL > AR Status as either In Service or
Out of Service.
22.6.6.3 Leader & follower circuit breaker selection

The leader and follower circuit breaker selection logic is shown in AR Figure 6 (logic
diagram supplement).
The method of selecting the preferred leader and follower circuit breakers is determined
by the menu setting Leader Select By, which can be set to Leader by Menu, Leader by
Opto or Leader by Ctrl.
If Leader Select By: is set to Leader by Menu, a further setting, Select Leader:, becomes
visible and is used to select the preferred leader circuit breaker by setting Select Leader:
either to Sel Leader CB1 or Sel Leader CB2.
If Leader Select By: is set to Leader by Opto, the preferred leader circuit breaker is
determined by the status of the input DDB (1408): CB2 Lead. If the input DDB (1408)
CB2 Lead is low, then preferred leader circuit breaker is CB1. If DDB CB2 Lead is high
then it selects CB2 as the preferred leader.
If Leader Select By: is set to Leader by Control, then the preferred leader circuit breaker
is determined by the user control command CTRL CB2 Lead cell found under the CB
CONTROL column in the IED menu. If the command applied is Reset CB2 Lead, CB1 is
selected as the preferred leader. Applying Set CB2 Lead command selects CB2 as the
preferred leader.
If Num CBs is set to Both CB1 &CB2, either CB1 or CB2 can be selected as leader. If
the setting Num CBs is set to CB1 Only, CB1 is selected as leader. Similarly, CB2 is
selected as leader if the setting Num CBs is set to CB2 Only.
Provided that the circuit breaker is available for auto-reclose (i.e. the circuit breaker is: in
service, not locked out, and enabled for auto-reclosing {refer sections 22.6.6.2 and
22.6.6.4}), the “preferred” leader circuit breaker will be the “active” leading circuit breaker
in the auto-reclose cycle.
If the “preferred” leader circuit breaker is not available for auto-reclosing then, provided it
is available for auto-reclose, the “non-preferred” circuit breaker becomes the “active”
leader. If this is the case there will be no follower circuit breaker.
If both circuit breakers are available for auto-reclosing and follower reclosing is enabled,
then the “preferred leader” will be the “active” leader and the “non-preferred” circuit
breaker will be the follower.
7-174 P446/EN/TM/E
22.6.6.4 Auto-reclose mode for leader & follower circuit breaker

The auto-reclose mode for the leader and follower circuit breaker logic is shown inAR
Figure 9 (logic diagram supplement).
Once auto-reclosing is enabled, the specific reclosing modes which can be applied to
each circuit breaker are selected.
The auto-reclose function has three operating modes:
 Single Phase Auto-reclose (1P)

 Three Phase Auto-reclose (3P)
 Single/Three Phase Auto-reclose(1/3P)
Single phase reclosing is permitted only for the first shot of an auto-reclose cycle. If two
or more shots are enabled, then, in a multi-shot auto-reclose cycle, the second and
subsequent trips and reclosures will always be three phase.
The settings for the reclosing modes are affected by the number of circuit breakers, Num
CBs, setting in the AUTO-RECLOSE column of the menu.
22.6.6.5 Auto-reclose mode with one circuit breaker

If Num CBs is set to CB1 Only or CB2 Only, only one circuit breaker will be controlled,
and a setting AR Mode is visible which controls the specific auto-reclosing mode for the
active circuit breaker.
The following setting options are available: AR 1P, AR 1/3P, AR 3P & Opto.
Single phase auto-reclosing of the circuit breaker is permitted if AR Mode is set to AR 1P
or AR 1/3P. Three phase auto-reclosing of the circuit breaker is permitted if AR Mode is
set to AR 3P or AR 1/3P.
If the AR Mode selection is by Opto then the reclose mode for the active circuit breaker is
determined by the status of two DDB inputs: Lead AR 1P (1497) to enable single phase
auto-reclose, and Lead AR 3P (1498) to enable three phase auto-reclose.
22.6.6.6 Auto-reclose mode with two circuit breakers

If Num CBs is set to Both CB1&CB2 then a setting Lead/Foll ARMode becomes visible
and is used to control the specific reclosing modes that are applied to each circuit
breaker. The options available are :-
L1P F1P
L1P F3P
L3P F3P
L1/3P F1/3P
L1/3P F3P
Opto”
Where L refers to the leader circuit breaker, F refers to the follower circuit breaker, 1P
implies single phase, 3P implies three phase, and 1/3P implies single or three phase, so
a setting of L1/3P F3P would mean that the leader circuit breaker could perform single or
three phase auto-reclose, whilst the follower would perform three phase auto-reclose
only.
If the auto-reclose mode selection is by Opto then the reclose mode for the active leader
is determined by the status of two DDB inputs: Lead AR 1P (1497) to enable single
phase auto-reclose, and “Lead AR 3P” (1498) to enable three phase auto-reclose. The
reclose mode for the active follower is determined by the status of two DDB inputs:
Follower AR 1P (1409) to enable single phase auto-reclose, and Follower AR 3P (1410)
to enable three phase auto-reclose.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-175
Where the selected follower auto-reclose mode supports single phase tripping, the
follower can perform single phase auto-reclose only if the leader circuit breaker has
performed single phase auto-reclose. If the leader has tripped and reclosed three phase,
the follower is also forced to trip three phase. The follower will reclose three phase
provided three phase auto-reclose is permitted for the follower circuit breaker. If the
follower circuit breaker trips three phase and three phase auto-reclose is not permitted for
the follower, then the follower circuit breaker locks out without reclosing.
22.6.6.7 Force three phase trip

The force three phase trip logic is shown in AR Figure 10 (logic diagram supplement).
Following single phase tripping, whilst the auto-reclose cycle is in progress, and upon
resetting of the protection elements, an output signal DDB associated with the tripped
circuit breaker is asserted high.
In the case of CB1, this is DDB: AR Force CB1 3P (858).
In the case of CB2, this is DDB: AR Force CB2 3P (1485).
These signals are applied to any associated protection trip conversion logic to force all
protection trips to be converted to three phase trips for the associated circuit breaker, for
any subsequent faults that occur whilst the auto-reclose cycle remains in progress.
22.6.6.8 Auto-reclose Initiation

The auto-reclose initiation logic is shown in AR Figure 11, AR Figure 12, AR Figure 13
and AR Figure 14 (logic diagram supplement).
Auto-reclose cycles can be initiated by :-
 Protection functions hosted by the P446

 External protection equipment
 Trip test
Auto-reclose initiation will start an auto-reclose for any circuit breaker that is in service
and enabled for auto-reclose: CB1 auto-reclose will start if CB1 is in service and enabled
for auto-reclose; CB2 auto-reclose will start if CB2 is in service and enabled for auto-
reclose.
When an auto-reclose cycle is started, the relevant circuit breaker auto-reclose in
progress CB1 ARIP and/or CB2 ARIP signal is set, and remains set until the end of the
cycle for the associated circuit breaker. The end of the cycle is signified by successful
reclosure, or by lockout.
22.6.6.9 Auto-reclose initiation by host IED protection function

Many protection functions in the P446 (for example Zone 1 trips, distance-aided scheme
trips, time-delayed distance zones, overcurrent and earth (ground) elements, DEF and
directional aided schemes) can be programmed to initiate or block auto-reclose by
selecting the Initiate AR, or Block AR options in the settings which are available under
the AUTORECLOSE settings column of the menu. Operation of a protection function
selected for auto-reclose will initiate auto-reclose. Operation of a protection function
selected to block auto-reclose will block and force a lockout.
22.6.6.10 Auto-reclose initiation by external protection equipment

The following DDB signals are available for mapping in the PSL from opto inputs or
communication inputs to initiate auto-reclosing.
7-176 P446/EN/TM/E

If mapped, activation of the input to the DDB will initiate auto-reclose.
22.6.6.11 Auto-reclose initiation and cycle by trip test

A user command (Test Autoreclose under COMMISSION TESTS) in the MiCOMho P446
menu can be used to initiate an auto-reclose cycle. Four separate commands can be
executed, each command comprising a 100 ms pulse output when the relevant “execute”
option is selected. Available commands are: Trip Pole A / Trip Pole B / Trip Pole C2 /
Trip 3 Pole. There is also a No Operation option to exit the command field without
initiating a test.
22.6.6.12 Sequence counter

The sequence counter logic is shown in AR Figure 18 (logic diagram supplement).
The auto-reclose logic includes a counter known as the sequence counter. Unless auto-
reclose is in progress, the sequence counter will have a value of 0. Following a trip, and
subsequent auto-reclose initiation, the sequence counter is incremented. The counter
provides output signals indicating how many initiation events have occurred in any auto-
reclose cycle. These signals are available as user indications and are used in the logic to
select the appropriate dead timers or, for a persistent fault, force a lockout.
It is possible to skip Shot 1 by enabling AR Skip Shot 1 setting. If this setting is enabled,
the sequence counter will skip Shot 1 and move to Shot 2 immediately upon AR initiation.
The logic generates the following sequence counter outputs which are used in the auto-
reclose shots counter logic (refer section 22.6.6.19).
DDB 847: Seq. Counter = 1 is set when the counter is at 1;
DDB 848: Seq. Counter = 2 is set when the counter is at 2;
DDB 849: Seq. Counter = 3 is set when the counter is at 3; and
DDB 850: Seq. Counter = 4 is set when the counter is at 4.
Every time the IED trips the sequence counter is incremented by 1. The auto-reclose
logic compares the sequence counter values to the number of auto-reclose shots setting,
AR Shots. If the counter value exceeds the setting then the auto-reclose is locked out.
In the case of a successful auto-reclose cycle the sequence counter resets to zero.
22.6.6.13 Auto-reclose cycle selection

The auto-reclose cycle selection determines, for a dual breaker configuration, the logic to
determine which of the circuit breakers will act as leader/follower and whether the
reclosing will be single phase or three phase. The logic is shown in AR Figure 19 and AR
Figure 21 (logic diagram supplement).
In a dual circuit breaker arrangement, when an auto-reclose cycle is started, single phase
or three phase reclosing is asserted for each circuit breaker, according to whether the
circuit breaker has tripped single phase or three phase, and according to whether single
phase and/or three phase reclosing is permitted for that circuit breaker. Dependent upon
the settings and trip performed, each circuit breaker can perform:-
 Single phase reclose as Leader (with or without follower);
P446/EN/TM/E 7-177
 Single phase reclose as Follower (provided the leader is also selected to single
phase auto-reclose);
 Three phase reclose as Leader (with or without follower);
 Three phase reclose as Follower;
22.6.6.14 Dead time control

The dead time control logic is shown in AR Figure 22, AR Figure 24, AR Figure 25 and
AR Figure 26 (logic diagram supplement).
Once an auto-reclose cycle has started, the conditions to enable the dead time to run are
determined by menu settings, circuit breaker status, protection status, the nature of the
auto-reclose cycle (single phase or three phase) and opto inputs from external sources.
Three settings are involved in controlling the dead time start :-
 DT Start by Prot
 3PDTStart WhenLD
 DTStart by CB Op.
The DT Start by Prot setting is always visible and has three options Protection Reset,
Protection Op, and Disable. These options set the basic conditions for starting the dead
time.
The ‘dead time started by protection operation’ condition can, optionally, be qualified by a
check that the line is dead.
The ‘dead time started by protection reset’ condition can, optionally, be qualified by a
check, that the circuit breaker is open, as well as by an optional check that the line is
dead (note*).
If the DT Start by Prot is set to Disable, the circuit breaker must be open for the dead time
to start. This condition can, optionally be qualified by a check that the line is dead
(note*).
The qualification to check that the ‘line is dead’ is provided by setting 3PDTStart WhenLD
to Enabled.
The qualification to check that the ‘circuit breaker is open’ is provided by setting DTStart
by CB Op to Enabled.
In a dual circuit breaker scheme (Num CBs set to Both CB1 & CB2) if the DTStart by CB
Op is set to enabled, both circuit breakers must be tripped to enable the dead time to
start. For a single phase auto-reclose cycle, the leader circuit breaker has to be tripped
single phase. For a three phase auto-reclose cycle, both circuit breakers have to be
tripped three phase.
Note*: This is only applicable when tripping/auto-reclose is three phase.
22.6.6.15 Follower circuit breaker enable and time control

The follower circuit breaker control logic is shown in AR Figure 27, AR Figure 28 and
(logic diagram supplement).
When a leader/follower auto-reclose cycle is initiated, the conditions for the follower delay
period (Follower Time) to start are determined by the leader circuit breaker operation, the
follower circuit breaker status, the menu setting BF if LFail Cls (Block Follower reclose if
Leader CB Fails to close), and opto inputs from external sources. The basic condition to
start the follower delay is that the leader circuit breaker must have reclosed.
7-178 P446/EN/TM/E
If the menu setting BF if LFail Cls is set to Disabled, the follower circuit breaker will
reclose even if the leader circuit breaker fails to reclose (for example, due to the absence
of a CB Healthy signal). When BF if LFail Cls is set to Disabled, an additional menu
setting Dynamic F/L becomes visible to further control the operation of the follower circuit
breaker. If the setting Dynamic F/L is set to Enabled, the follower circuit breaker will
reclose with no deliberate additional delay, i.e. at approximately the same instant that the
leader circuit breaker would have closed if it had been healthy. If the menu setting
Dynamic F/L is set to Disabled, the follower circuit breaker will reclose after an additional
delay equal to the set Follower Time.
If the menu setting BF if LFail Cls is set to Enabled then, if the leader circuit breaker fails
to reclose, the follower circuit breaker cycle is cancelled and auto-reclosing of both circuit
breakers is locked out.
The follower circuit breaker must be open for the follower delay time to start. For a single
phase follower auto-reclose cycle, the follower circuit breaker has to be open single
phase. For a three phase follower auto-reclose cycle, the follower circuit breaker has to
be open three phase.
When the follower delay time has timed out, the relevant internal signal CBxSPFTCOMP
or CBx3PFTCOMP (x = 1 or 2) is applied to the CB AutoClose logic, described later in
section 22.6.6.16 to indicate that the follower time is complete.
22.6.6.16 CB1 and CB2 auto close

The CB1 and CB2 auto close logic is shown in AR Figure 32 and AR Figure 33 (logic
diagram supplement).
When the end of a dead time or the end of a follower time is indicated by one of the
following internal signals, the auto close logic is executed:-
 CB1 SPDTCOMP
 CB1 3PDTCOMP
 CB2 SPDTCOMP
 CB2 3PDTCOMP
 CB1 SPFTCOMP
 CB1 3PFTCOMP
 CB2 SPFTCOMP
 CB2 3PFTCOMP
The auto close logic checks that all necessary conditions are satisfied before issuing a
AutoClose CB1 or AutoClose CB2 signal to the CB1 and CB2 overall control scheme as
shown in the AR Figure 43 and AR Figure 44. (logic diagram supplement) described in
section 22.5.
For any reclosure, the circuit breaker must be healthy (mechanism OK to close, and retrip
if necessary) and it should not be in a lockout state.
For any single phase reclosure, the circuit breaker must be open on one phase. For any
three phase reclosure, the circuit breaker must be open on all three phases and the
appropriate system check conditions (live bus/dead line, synch check etc) must be
satisfied. The system check conditions for CB1 leader reclose, CB2 leader reclose, CB1
follower reclose and CB2 follower reclose are independently selectable by menu settings
and are described in section 22.6.6.20.
The auto close signals (AutoClose CB1, AutoClose CB2) sent to the circuit breaker
control scheme are pulses lasting 100 milliseconds. Another pair of signals Set CB1
Close & Set CB2 Close, DDBs (1565/1449) are set in conjunction with the auto close
signals, but these remain set until either the end of the auto-reclose cycle, or the next
P446/EN/TM/E 7-179
protection operation. These signals are used to initiate the Reclaim timing logic and the
CB AR Shots Counters logic, described in sections 22.6.6.17 to 22.6.6.19.
22.6.6.17 Reclaim time & successful auto-reclose

The reclaim time logic is shown in AR Figure 34 and AR Figure 35.
The successful auto-reclose logic is shown in AR Figure 36, AR Figure 37 and AR Figure
38.
The Set CB1 Close & Set CB1 Close, DDBs (1565/1449) signals from the auto close
logic are used to enable the reclaim timers. Depending on whether the circuit breaker
has tripped single phase or three phase, and whether single phase and/or three phase
reclosing is permitted for the circuit breaker, either the single phase reclaim timer SPAR
Reclaim Time or the three phase reclaim timer 3PAR Reclaim Time is enabled.
If any protection re-operates before the reclaim time has timed out, the sequence counter
is incremented. The counter signal advances from ‘Seq Counter = n’ to ‘Seq Counter =
(n+1)’, resets any ….DTCOMP signal and prepares the logic for the next dead time to
start when conditions are suitable. The operation also resets the Set CB Close signal,
and so the reclaim timer is also stopped and reset. The Reclaim time starts again if the
Set CB Close signal goes high following completion of a dead time in a subsequent auto-
reclose cycle.
If CB1 is closed and has not tripped again when the reclaim time is complete, signals
CB1 Succ 1P AR, (DDB1571) or CB1 Succ 3P AR, (DDB 852) are generated to indicate
the successful reclosure.
Similarly, If CB2 is reclosed during the auto-reclose cycle and remains closed when the
reclaim time is complete, signals CB2 Succ 1P AR, (DDB 1451) or CB2 Succ 3P AR,
(DDB 1452) are generated to indicate successful reclosure.
These signals also increment the relevant circuit breaker successful auto-reclose shot
counters and reset the relevant CB ARIP signal.
The successful auto-reclose signals generated from the logic can be reset by various
commands and settings options available under CB CONTROL menu settings column.
These settings are described below:-
If Res AROK by UI is set to enabled, all the successful auto-reclose signals can be reset
by user interface command Reset AROK Ind from the CB CONTROL settings column.
If Res AROK by NoAR is set to enabled, the successful auto-reclose signals for each
circuit breaker can be reset by temporarily generating an AR disabled signal for each
circuit breaker according to the logic described in section 22.6.6.21, Autoreclose Enable
logics, AR Figure 5.
If Res AROK by Ext is set to enabled, the successful autoreclose signals for can be reset
by activation of the relevant input Ext Rst CB1 AROK or Ext Rst CB2 AROK (DDB1517 or
1417) mapped in the PSL.
If Res AROK by TDly is set to enabled, the successful autoreclose signals for are
automatically reset after a user defined time delay as set in Res AROK by TDly setting.
22.6.6.18 Circuit breaker healthy & system check timers

The circuit breaker healthy and system check timers logic is shown in AR Figure 39 and
AR Figure 40.
This logic provides signals to cancel auto-reclosing for either circuit breaker if the circuit
breaker is not healthy (e.g. low gas pressure or, for three phase auto-reclosing, the
required line & bus voltage conditions are not satisfied) when the scheme is ready to
close the circuit breaker.
In this logic, both CB1 and CB2 share the settings AR CBHealthy Time and AR
CheckSync Time.
7-180 P446/EN/TM/E
For either circuit breaker, at the completion of any dead time or follower time, the logic
starts an AR CBHealthy timer. If the CB Healthy signal (DDB 436 or 437) becomes high
before the set time is complete, the timer stops and, if all other relevant circuit breaker
closing conditions are satisfied the scheme issues the CB AutoClose signal. If the CB
Healthy signal, (DDB 436 or 437) signal stays low, then at the end of the set AR
CBHealthy time an AR CB Unhealthy alarm signal (DDB 307 or 329) is set. This forces
the circuit breaker auto-reclose sequence to be cancelled.
Additionally, for either circuit breaker, at the completion of any three phase dead time or
three phase follower time, the logic starts an AR CheckSync Time. If the circuit breaker
synchro-check OK signal {“CB L SCOK “ (DDB 1573 or1455) or CB F SCOK (DDB1491
or1456)} goes high before the set time is complete, the timer stops and, if all other
relevant circuit breaker closing conditions are satisfied, the scheme issues the CB
AutoClose signal. If the System check OK signal stays low, then at the end of the AR
CheckSync Time an alarm AR CB No C/S (DDB 308 or 330) is set which informs that the
check synchronism is not satisfied for that circuit breaker and forces the auto-reclose
sequence to be cancelled.
22.6.6.19 CB1 & CB2 auto-reclose shot counters

The CB1 & CB2 auto-reclose shot counter logic is shown in AR Figure 41 and AR Figure
42.
There are several counters which allow the circuit breaker auto-reclosing history to be
analysed. Each circuit breaker has a set of counters that are stored in non-volatile
memory. The data is then maintained even if the auxiliary supply fails.
Logic signals from the sequence counters is combined with successful auto-reclose
signals and auto-reclose lockout signals to provide the following summary for each circuit
breaker.
 Overall total shots (No. of reclose attempts);

 CBx Total Shots
 Number of successful single phase reclosures;
 CBx SUCC SPAR
 Number of successful 1st shot three phase reclosures;
 CBx SUCC3PARShot1
 Number of successful 2nd shot three phase reclosures;
 Number of successful 3rd shot three phase reclosures;
 Number of successful 4th shot three phase reclosures;
 Number of failed auto-reclose cycles which forced CB to lockout.
 CBx Failed Shots
All the counter contents are accessible through the CB CONTROL column of the menu.
For each individual circuit breaker, these counters can be reset either by user commands
Reset CB1 Shots or Reset CB2 Shots from the CB CONTROL settings column, or by
activation of the relevant input Ext Rst CB1 Shots or Ext Rst CB2 Shots (DDB 1518 or
22.6.6.20 System checks for circuit breaker closing

The system checks for circuit breaker closing logic is shown in AR Figure 45, AR Figure
46, AR Figure 47, AR Figure 48,AR Figure 51 and AR Figure 52.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-181
For three phase auto-reclosing and control closing of the circuit breakers, system voltage
checks are separately selectable for :-
 CB1 reclosing as leader;

 CB1 reclosing as follower;
 CB1 control close;
 CB2 reclosing as leader;
 CB2 reclosing as follower;
 CB2 control close.
In the AUTORECLOSE settings, if the Num CBs is set to CB1 Only or CB2 Only, then the
operation of the circuit breaker will be the same as described for the corresponding
leader circuit breaker (for example CB1 operation will be the same as described by CB1L
in the diagrams and descriptions.
The system check options for each circuit breaker are enabled or disabled in the CBx SC
all setting (x = 1L, 2L, 1F, 2F) in the AUTORECLOSE column of the menu. If set to
Disabled, then no system checks are required on any shot, and the relevant settings are
invisible. Otherwise, the system check options that can be enabled for each breaker (as
leader or follower) are:-
System check option Setting
System checks not required for first shot of auto-
CBx SC Shot1
reclose
Fast synchronism check (note 2) CBx SC ClsNoDly
Check synchronism stage 1 (note 1) CBx SC CS1
Check synchronism stage 2 (note 1) CBx SC CS2
Dead line / Live Bus CBx SC DLLB
Live Line / Dead bus CBx SC LLDB
Dead line / Dead bus CBx SC DLDB
Note 1: Two separate (independent) system synchronism check stages are available for each
circuit breaker. Each stage has different slip frequency and phase angle settings as
described in section 21.1.
Note 2: A fast synchronism check auto-reclose option is available for the three phase auto-
reclose as leader circuit breaker, by menu setting CBx SC ClsNoDly. When the
setting is enabled, then if the line and bus come into synchronism (i.e. line energised
from remote end) at any time after the three phase dead time has started, a
AutoClose CB signal is issued immediately without waiting for the dead time to
elapse. This option is sometimes required for the second line end to reclose on a line
with delayed auto-reclosing (typical cycle: first line end reclose after dead time with
live bus & dead line, then second line end reclose immediately with live bus & live line
in synchronism).
Manual reclosing for each circuit breaker is controlled according to the settings in the
SYSTEM CHECKS column of the menu. The system check options for each circuit
breaker are enabled or disabled in the CBxM SC all setting (x = 1 or 2) in the SYSTEM
CHECKS column of the menu. If set to Disabled, then no system checks are required for
manual closure, and the relevant settings are invisible. Otherwise, the system check
options that can be enabled for each breaker (as leader or follower) are:-
Check synchronism stage 1
CBxM SC CS1
(refer note 1 above)
7-182 P446/EN/TM/E

Check synchronism stage 2
CBxM SC CS2
(refer note 1 above)
Dead line / Live Bus CBxM SC DLLB
Live Line / Dead bus CBxM SC LLDB
Dead line / Dead bus CBxM SC DLDB
Table 16: System checks for Manual Closing
22.6.6.21 CB1 & CB2 trip time monitor

The circuit breaker trip time monitor logic is shown in AR Figure 53 and AR Figure 54.
This logic checks that a circuit breaker trips correctly following the issuing of a protection
trip signal.
When any protection trip signal is issued a timer, Trip Pulse Time is started.
The Trip Pulse Time setting is common to both CB1 and CB2 and is used in the trip time
monitor logic and in the circuit breaker control logic.
If the circuit breaker trips correctly (single phase or three phase, according to the trip
signal and settings) the timer resets and the auto-reclose cycle, if enabled, proceeds
normally. If either circuit breaker fails to trip correctly within the set time, the signal CB1
Fail Pr Trip (1575) and/or CB2 Fail Pr Trip (1459) is issued and the affected circuit
breaker auto-reclose cycle is forced to lock out.
22.6.6.22 Autoreclose lockout

The auto-reclose lockout logic is shown in AR Figure 55, AR Figure 55a, AR Figure 56
and AR Figure 56a.
Auto-reclose lockout of a circuit breaker is triggered by the following events.
 Protection operation during reclaim time. If, following the final reclose attempt, the
protection operates during the reclaim time, the IED will be driven to lockout and
the auto-reclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition is reset.
 Persistent fault. A fault is considered persistent if the protection re-operates after
the last permitted shot.
 Block auto-reclose. The block auto-reclose logic can cause a lockout if auto-
reclose is in progress. If asserted, the Block CBx AR input (DDB 448 /1421)
mapped in the PSL will, if auto-reclose is in progress, block auto-reclose and cause
a lockout.
 Multi phase faults. The logic can be set to block auto-reclose either for two phase
or three phase faults, or to block auto-reclose for three phase faults only. For this,
the setting Multi Phase AR applies, where the options are Allow AR, BAR 2&3
Phase & BAR 3 Phase in the AUTORECLOSE column of the menu.
 Protection function selection. The protection functions can be individually selected
to block auto-reclose and force lockout. If enabled, the protection functions in the
AUTORECLOSE column of the menu can be set to “Initiate AR”, “No Action” or
“Block AR”. Selecting Block AR blocks auto-reclose and forces lockout if the
protection function operates.
 Circuit breaker failure to close. If the circuit breaker fails to close because, for
example, the circuit breaker springs are not charged, the gas pressure is low, or
there is no synchronism between the system voltages indicated by the AR CBx
Unhealthy and
AR CBx No Checksync alarms, auto-reclose will be blocked and forced to lockout.
 Circuit breaker open at the end of the reclaim time. An auto-reclose lockout is
forced if the circuit breaker is open at the end of the reclaim time.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-183
 Circuit breaker fails to close when the close command is issued.

 Block follower if leader fails to close is set. If the setting BF if Lfail Cls in the
AUTORECLOSE column of the menu is set to Enable, the active follower circuit
breaker will lockout if the leader circuit breaker fails to reclose.
 Circuit breaker fails to trip correctly.
 Three phase dead time started by line dead violation. If the line does not go dead
within the Dead Line Time time setting when the dead time start is determined by
the menu setting 3PDTStart WhenLD, the logic will force the auto-reclose
sequence to lockout after expiry of the setting time.
 Single phase evolving to multi phase fault. If, after expiry of the discriminating time
from the Protection Re-operation + Evolving fault logic (refer section 22.6.6.13), a
single phase fault evolves into a two, or three phase fault, the internal signal
Evolve Lock will be asserted that will force the auto-reclose to lockout.
 Leader/Follower invalid selection using opto. If the Leader/Follower AR mode in
the AUTORECLOSE menu is set to be selected using the opto-inputs, then if the
logic detects an invalid auto-reclose mode combination, it forces both CB1 & CB2
to lockout if a trip occurs.
If CB1 or CB2 is locked out, the logic generates the alarms CBx AR Lockout (DDB 306
/328) for the corresponding circuit breaker. In this condition, auto-reclose of the circuit
breaker cannot be initiated until the corresponding lockout has been reset. The methods
of resetting from the lockout state are discussed in the next section.
Circuit breaker lockout, can also be caused by the circuit breaker condition monitoring
functions:-
 Maintenance lockout,
 Excessive fault frequency lockout,
 Broken current lockout,
 Circuit breaker failed to trip,
 Circuit breaker failed to close,
 Manual close failure - no check synchronism / circuit breaker unhealthy situation.
These lockout alarms are mapped to a signals CBx mon LO Alarm (DDBs 300 & 322 for
CB1 and CB2 respectively) and CBx LO Alarm. (DDBs 860 & 1599 for CB1 and CB2
respectively).
22.6.6.23 Reset circuit breaker lockout

The lockout conditions caused by the circuit breaker condition monitoring functions
(including manual close failure) described in previous section can be reset according to
the condition of the Rst CB mon LO by setting found in the CB CONTROL column of the
menu.
The Rst CB mon LO by setting has two options CB Close, and User interface.
If Rst CB mon LO By is set to CB Close then closure of the circuit breaker will be a trigger
for lockout reset. If set to CB Close, a further setting, CB mon LO RstDly, becomes
visible. This is a timer setting that is applied between the circuit breaker reclosing, and
the lockout being reset.
If Rst CB mon LO By is set to User Interface the a further command appears in the the
CB CONTROL column of the menu, CB mon LO reset. This command can be used to
reset the lockout.
This logic is included in Figure 114 and Figure 115 (CB Monitoring figure).
7-184 P446/EN/TM/E
An auto-reclose lockout state of a circuit breaker will generate an auto-reclose circuit

breaker lockout alarm (AR CBx lockout) and DDB 306 or 328 is set, corresponding to
CB1 or CB2 being locked out, as per the logic diagrams in AR Figure 57 and AR Figure
58.
The auto-reclose lockout conditions can be reset by various commands and settings
options found under the CB CONTROL column of the menu.
These settings and commands are described below:-
If Res LO by CB IS is set to Enabled, the circuit breaker lockout is reset if the circuit
breaker is manually closed successfully. For this the circuit breaker must remain closed
long enough so that it enters the “In Service” state. (See section 22.4, Circuit Breaker In
Service and Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 112, Figure 113, Figure 114 and Figure 115 .
If Res LO by UI is set to Enabled, the circuit breaker lockout can be reset by the user
interface commands Reset CB1 LO or Reset CB2 LO found in the CB CONTROL column
of the menu.
If Res LO by NoAR is set to Enabled, the circuit breaker lockout can be reset by
temporarily generating an “AR disabled” signal according to the logic described in section
22.6.6.2, “Auto-reclose Enable” logic and AR Figure 5.
If Res LO by ExtDDB is set to Enabled, the circuit breaker lockout can be reset by
activation of the relevant input DDB Rst CB1 Lockout or Rst CB2 Lockout (DDB 446 /
If Res LO by TDelay is set to Enabled, the circuit breaker lockout is automatically reset
after a user defined time delay as set in LO Reset Time setting.
The reset circuit breaker auto-reclose lockout logic is shown in AR Figure 57and AR
Figure 58.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-185
23 MEASUREMENTS
23.1 Fault locator

The IED has an integral fault locator that uses information from the current and voltage
inputs to provide a distance to fault location. The sampled data from the analog input
circuits is written to a cyclic buffer until a fault condition is detected. The data in the input
buffer is then held to allow the fault calculation to be made. When the fault calculation is
complete the fault location information is available in the IED fault record.
When applied to parallel circuits mutual flux coupling can alter the impedance seen by the
fault locator. The coupling contains positive, negative and zero sequence components. In
practice the positive and negative sequence coupling is insignificant. The effect on the
fault locator of the zero sequence mutual coupling can be eliminated using the mutual
compensation feature provided.
23.1.1 Basic theory for ground faults

The figure below shows a two-machine equivalent circuit of a faulted power system.
Ip mZr (1m)Z Iq
Zsp Zsq
Vp Rf
Ep Eq
If
P0124ENa
Figure 123: Two-machine equivalent circuit
From this diagram:

Vp = mpZr + fRf …(equation 1)
The fault location, m, can be found if f can be estimated allowing equation 1 to be
solved.
23.1.2 Data acquisition and buffer processing

The fault locator stores the sampled data in a 12 cycle cyclic buffer at a resolution of 48
samples per cycle. When the fault recorder is triggered the data in the buffer is frozen so
that the buffer contains 6 cycles of pretrigger data and 6 cycles of post-trigger data. Fault
calculation commences shortly after this trigger point.
You can select the trigger for the fault recorder using the programmable scheme logic.
The fault locator can store data for up to four faults. This ensures that fault locations can
be calculated for all shots on a typical multiple reclose sequence.
7-186 P446/EN/TM/E
23.1.3 Faulted phase selection

Phase selection is derived from the superimposed current phase selector.
Phase selection and fault location calculations can only be made if the current change
exceeds 5% In.
23.1.4 The fault location calculation

The fault location calculation works by:
 Obtaining the vectors.

 Selecting the faulted phase(s).
 Estimating the phase of the fault current f for the faulted phase(s).
 Solving equation 1 for the fault location m at the instant of time where f = 0.
23.1.5 Obtaining the vectors

Different sets of vectors are chosen depending on the type of fault identified by the phase
selection algorithm. The calculation using equation 1 is applied for either a phase to
ground fault or a phase to phase fault.
therefore for an A phase to ground fault:
pZr=a(Zline / THETA line) + n (Zresidua l/ THETA residual) ...(equation 2)
and Vp=VA
and for a A phase to B phase fault:
pZr=a(Zline / THETA line) - b (Zresidual / THETA residual) ...(equation 3)
and Vp = VA - VB
The calculation for a ground fault (equation 4) is modified when mutual compensation is
used:
pZr=a(Zline / THETA line) +n (residual / THETA residual)+
m(mutual / THETA mutual) ...(equation 4)
23.1.6 Solving the equation for the fault location

As the sine wave of f passes through zero, the instantaneous values of the sine waves
Vp and p can be used to solve equation (1) for the fault location m. (The term fRf being
zero).
This is determined by shifting the calculated vectors of Vp and pZr by the angle (90° -
angle of fault current) and then dividing the real component of Vp by the real component
of pZr.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-187
IpZr
Vp
If = 0
Vp IpZr
P0125ENa
Figure 124: Fault locator selection of fault current zero
i.e.:
Phase advanced vector Vp
=  Vp  [cos(s) + jsin(s) ] * [ sin(d) + jcos(d) ]
=  Vp  [-sin(s-d) + jcos(s-d) ]
Phase advanced vector pZr
=  pZr  [cos (e) + jsin (e) ] * [sin (d) + jcos (d) ]
=  pZr  [-sin(e-d) + jcos(e-d) ]
Therefore, from equation 1:
m = Vp ÷ (p * Zr) at f = 0
= Vp sin(s-d) / (pZr * sin(e-d))
Where:
d = Angle of fault current f
s = Angle of Vp
e = Angle of pZr
Therefore the IED evaluates m which is the fault location as a percentage of the fault
locator line impedance setting and then calculates the output fault location by multiplying
this by the line length setting. When calculated the fault location can be found in the fault
record under the VIEW RECORDS column in the Fault Location cells. Distance to fault is
available in kilometers, miles, impedance or percentage of line length.
23.1.7 Mutual compensation

Analysis of a ground fault on one circuit of a parallel overhead line shows that a fault
locator positioned at one end of the faulty line tends to over-reach while that at the other
end tends to under-reach. In cases of long lines with high mutual inductance, mutual
zero sequence compensation can be used to improve the fault locator accuracy. The
7-188 P446/EN/TM/E
compensation is achieved by taking an input to the IED from the residual circuit of the
current transformers in the parallel line.
P446 provides mutual compensation for both the fault locator function, AND the distance
protection zones.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-189
24 COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS
24.1 Read Only mode

With IEC 61850 and Ethernet/Internet communication capabilities, security has become a
pressing issue. The Px40 IED provides a facility to allow the user to enable or disable the
change in configuration remotely. This feature is available only in IEDs with Courier,
Courier with IEC 60870-5-103 and Courier with IEC 61850 protocol options. It has to be
noted that in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, Read Only Mode function is different from the
existing Command block feature.
24.1.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol on rear port 1

The protocol does not support settings but the indications, measurands and disturbance
records commands are available at the interface.
Allowed:
Poll Class 1 (read spontaneous events)
Poll Class 2 (read measurands)
GI sequence (ASDU7 'Start GI', Poll Class 1)
Transmission of Disturbance Records sequence (ASDU24, ASDU25, Poll Class 1)
Time Synchronization (ASDU6)
General Commands (ASDU20), namely:
INF23 activate characteristic 1
Blocked:
Write parameter (=change setting) (private ASDUs)
General Commands (ASDU20), namely:
INF16 auto-recloser on/off
INF19 LED reset
Private INFs (e.g. CB open/close, control inputs)
24.1.2 Courier protocol on rear port 1 or 2 and Ethernet
Allowed:
Read settings, statuses, measurands
Read records (event, fault, disturbance)
Time Synchronization
Change active setting group
Blocked:
Write settings
All controls, including:
Reset Indication (Trip LED)
Operate control inputs
7-190 P446/EN/TM/E
CB operations
Auto-reclose operations
Reset demands
Test LEDs & contacts
24.1.3 IEC 61850
Allowed:
Read statuses, measurands
Generate reports
Extract disturbance records
Time synchronization
Change active setting group
Blocked:
All controls, including:
Enable/disable protection
Operate control inputs
CB operations (Close/Trip, Lock)
Reset LEDs
24.1.4 Courier database support

Three new settings, one for each remote communications port at the back of the IED are
created to support the enabling and disabling of the read only mode at each port.
The NIC Read Only setting applies to all the communications protocols (including the
Tunneled Courier) that are transmitted through the Ethernet Port. Their default values are
Disabled.
DNP3 communication interfaces that do not support the feature ignore these settings.
24.1.5 New DDB signals

The remote read only mode is also available in the PSL via three dedicated DDB signals:
 RP1 Read Only

 RP2 Read Only
 NIC Read Only
Through careful scheme logic design, the activations of these read only signals can be
facilitated via Opto Inputs, Control Inputs and Function Keys.
These DDBs are available in every build, however they are effective only in Courier, IEC
60870-5-103 build and in latest IEC 61850 (firmware version 57 onwards). The setting
cells are not available in DNP3.0.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-191
25 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION VIA OPTO-INPUTS

In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the IEDs real time clock
so that events from different IEDs can be placed in chronological order. This can be
done using the IRIG-B input, if fitted, or via the communication interface connected to the
substation control system. In addition to these methods the P446 range offers the facility
to synchronize via an opto-input by routing it in PSL to DDB 400 (Time Sync.). Pulsing
this input results in the real time clock snapping to the nearest minute. The
recommended pulse duration is 20 ms to be repeated no more than once per minute. An
example of the time sync. function is shown.
Time of “Sync. Pulse” Corrected time
19:47:00 to 19:47:29 19:47:00
19:47:30 to 19:47:59 19:48:00
Note: The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss.
To avoid the event buffer from being filled with unnecessary time sync. events, it is
possible to ignore any event that is generated by the time sync. opto input. This can be
done by applying the following settings:
Menu Text Value
RECORD CONTROL
Opto Input Event Enabled
Protection Event Enabled
DDB 63 - 32 (Opto Inputs) Set “Time Sync.” associated opto to 0
To improve the recognition time of the time sync. opto input by approximately 10 ms, the
opto input filtering could be disabled. This is achieved by setting the appropriate bit to 0
in the Opto Filter Cntl. cell (OPTO CONFIG. column). Disabling the filtering may make
the opto input more susceptible to induced noise. Fortunately the effects of induced
noise can be minimized by using the methods described in the Software Design chapter.
7-192 P446/EN/TM/E
26 CONTROL INPUTS
The control inputs function as software switches that can be set or reset either locally or
remotely. These inputs can be used to trigger any function that they are connected to as
part of the PSL. There are three setting columns associated with the control inputs that
are: CONTROL INPUTS, CTRL. I/P CONFIG. and CTRL. I/P LABELS. The function of
these columns is described below:
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
CONTROL INPUTS
Ctrl I/P Status 00000000000000000000000000000000
Control Input 1 No Operation No Operation, Set, Reset
Control Input 2 to 32 No Operation No Operation, Set, Reset
The Control Input commands can be found in the ‘Control Input’ menu. In the ‘Ctrl. /P
status’ menu cell there is a 32 bit word which represent the 32 control input commands.
The status of the 32 control inputs can be read from this 32-bit word. The 32 control
inputs can also be set and reset from this cell by setting a 1 to set or 0 to reset a
particular control input. Alternatively, each of the 32 Control Inputs can be set and reset
using the individual menu setting cells ‘Control Input 1, 2, 3’ etc. The Control Inputs are
available through the IED menu as described above and also via the rear
communications.
In the programmable scheme logic editor 32 Control Input signals, DDB 191 - 223, which
can be set to a logic 1 or On state, as described above, are available to perform control
functions defined by the user.
CTRL. I/P CONFIG.
Hotkey Enabled 11111111111111111111111111111111
Control Input 1 Latched Latched, Pulsed
Ctrl Command 1 Set/Reset Set/Reset, In/Out, Enabled/Disabled, On/Off
Control Input 2 to 32 Latched Latched, Pulsed
Ctrl Command 2 to 32 Set/Reset Set/Reset, In/Out, Enabled/Disabled, On/Off
]
CTRL. I/P LABELS
Control Input 1 Control Input 1 16 character text
Control Input 2 to 32 Control Input 2 to 32 16 character text
The CTRL. I/P CONFIG. column has several functions one of which allows the user to
configure the control inputs as either ‘latched’ or ‘pulsed’. A latched control input remains
in the set state until a reset command is given, either by the menu or the serial
communications. A pulsed control input, however, remains energized for 10 ms after the
set command is given and then resets automatically (no reset command required).
In addition to the latched/pulsed option this column also allows the control inputs to be
individually assigned to the Hotkey menu by setting ‘1’ in the appropriate bit in the Hotkey
Enabled cell. The hotkey menu allows the control inputs to be set, reset or pulsed
without the need to enter the CONTROL INPUTS column. The Ctrl. Command cell also
allows the SET/RESET text, displayed in the hotkey menu, to be changed to something
more suitable for the application of an individual control input, such as ON/OFF, IN/OUT
etc.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-193
The CTRL. I/P LABELS column makes it possible to change the text associated with
each individual control input. This text is displayed when a control input is accessed by
the hotkey menu, or it can be displayed in the PSL.
Note: Except for pulsed operation, the status of the control inputs is stored in non
volatile memory. If the auxiliary supply is interrupted, the status of all inputs is
recorded. Once the auxiliary supply is restored, the status of the control inputs is
restored to that of before the supply failure. If the battery is missing or discharged,
the control inputs are set to logic 0 once the auxiliary supply is restored.
7-194 P446/EN/TM/E
27 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL AND AUTO-RECLOSE

FIGURES (AR FIGURES)
Fig 1
DDB: CB1 Aux3Ph 52A(420)

&
DDB: CB1 Aux3Ph 52B(424) & 1

1 DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907)
XOR &
Setting: None &

CB1 Status Input:
52A 3Pole &
None; 1 1 DDB: CB1 Open 3ph(903)
52A 3Pole; 52B 3Pole
52B 3Pole; &
52A&52B 3Pole
52A&52B 3Pole;
52A 1Pole; 52A 1Pole &
52B 1Pole;
52A&52B 1Pole; 52B 1Pole
52A&52B 1Pole
DDB: CB1 Aux A 52A(421) &
DDB: CB1 Aux A 52B(425) & 1 DDB:CB1 Closed Aph(908)

1
XOR & &
&
1 DDB:CB1 Open Aph(904)

& 1
&
& &
DDB: CB1 Aux B 52A(422) &
DDB: CB1 Aux B 52B(426) DDB: CB1 Closed Bph(909)

& 1 1
XOR &
&
& 1 1 DDB:CB1 Open Bph(905)
&
&
DDB: CB1 Aux C 52A(423)

&
DDB: CB1 Aux C 52B(427) & 1 DDB: CB1 Closed Cph(910)

1
XOR &
&
1 DDB:CB1 Open Cph(906)

& 1
CB Status time
&
1 t DDB:CB1 Status Alm(301)
0
&
P4096ENa
AR Figure 1: Synchro check functionality
P446/EN/TM/E 7-195
Fig 2
DDB: CB2 Aux3Ph 52A(428) &
DDB: CB2 Aux3Ph 52B(432) & 1

1 DDB: CB2 Closed 3ph(915)
XOR &
Setting: None &

CB2 Status Input:
52A 3Pole &
None; 1 1 DDB: CB2 Open 3ph(911)
52A 3Pole; 52B 3Pole
52B 3Pole; &
52A&52B 3Pole
52A&52B 3Pole;
52A 1Pole; 52A 1Pole &
52B 1Pole;
52A&52B 1Pole; 52B 1Pole
52A&52B 1Pole
DDB: CB2 Aux A 52A(429) &
DDB: CB2 Aux A 52B(433) & 1 DDB:CB2 Closed Aph(916)

1
XOR & &
&
1 DDB:CB2 Open Aph(912)
& 1
&
& &
DDB: CB2 Aux B 52A(430) &
DDB: CB2 Aux B 52B(434) & 1 DDB: CB2 Closed Bph(917)

1
XOR &
&
& 1 1 DDB:CB2 Open Bph(913)
&
&
DDB: CB2 Aux C 52A(431) &
DDB: CB2 Aux C 52B(435) & 1 DDB: CB2 Closed Cph(918)

1
XOR &
&
1 DDB:CB2 Open Cph(914)
& 1
CB Status time
&
1 t DDB:CB2 Status Alm(323)
0
&
AR Figure 2: Circuit breaker 2 - state monitor
7-196 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 3
DDB:CB1 Open Aph(904)

1 Int Sig: CB1Op1P
DDB:CB1 Open Bph(905)
Fig 19,28,32,36
DDB:CB1 Open Cph(906)
1 Int Sig: CB1OpAny

DDB: CB1 Open 3ph(903) Fig 16,37,55,56
1 Int Sig: CB1Op2/3P
2 Fig 16,21,24,28,36

1 Int Sig: CB2Op1P
Fig 19,28,33,36
1 Int Sig: CB2OpAny

DDB: CB2 Open 3ph(911)
Fig 17,38,55,56
1 Int Sig: CB2Op2/3P
2 Fig 17,21,24,28,36
P4098ENa
AR Figure 3: CB1 & CB2 Open 1P, 2P, 2/3P, Any
Fig 4
Fig 55 DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306) CBIST

& Int Sig: CB1CRLO
0
Fig 57
Setting:
NUM CBs : CB1 Only
CB1 Only/
CB2 Only/ 1
Both CB1 BothCB1&CB2 & CBIST
&CB2 CBISMT
DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907)
Logic 1 & S
Q DDB: CB1 In Service(1526)
R
Fig 8,55,56
1
Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARIP(1544)
Fig 56 DDB: CB2 AR Lockout(328)

& CBIST Int Sig: CB2CRLO
0
Fig 58
Setting:
NUM CBs : CB2 Only
CB1 Only/ 1
CB2 Only/
Both CB1 BothCB1&CB2 & CBIST
&CB2 CBISMT

Logic 1 & S
Q DDB: CB2 In Service(1428)
R
Fig 8,55,56
1
P4099ENa
AR Figure 4: Circuit breaker in service
P446/EN/TM/E 7-197
Fig 5
Config Setting:
AutoReclose: Enable
Enable/Disable & IntSig: AR DISABLED
HMI command Fig 13,37,38,57,58

ARC Status
IEC60670-5-103 Command (default AR
DDB AR pulse(1382on/1383off) command is 1
on)
DDB: AR Enable(1384) DDB: AR In Service(1385)
DDB: AR Enable CB1(1609)* *Note Fig 8,9,10,55a,56a

1
If not mapped in PSL
are defaulted high.
DDB: AR Enable CB2(1605)*
AR Figure 5: Auto-reclose enable
Fig 6
Setting:
Leader by Menu
Leader Select by:
Leader by Menu/
Leader by Opto
Leader by Opto/ &
Leader by Control
Leader by Control
Setting: &
Sel LeaderCB1
Select Leader:
Sel LeaderCB1/
Sel LeaderCB2 Sel LeaderCB2
DDB: CB2 Lead(1408) &

1 IntSig: Pref LCB1
Fig 7
& 1 IntSig: Pref LCB2

Fig 7
Command:
CB2 Lead: Set &
ReSet/Set
Setting:
NUM CBs : CB1 Only
CB1 Only/ &
CB2 Only/ BothCB1&CB2
Both CB1
&CB2 CB2 Only
AR Figure 6: Lead & follower circuit breaker selection
7-198 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 7
Fig 8 DDB: Leader CB1(1530)

&
1 Int Sig: CB1 LFRC
Fig 43 DDB:CB1 Close Fail(303)
Fig 8,35,56
1 &
Fig 39 DDB:AR CB1 Unhealthy(307)
Fig 16 DDB: ARIP(1542)

&
1 Int Sig: CB2 LFRC
Fig 44 DDB:CB2 Close Fail(325)
Fig 8,35,55
&
Fig 40 DDB:AR CB2 Unhealthy(329) 1

1
&
Fig 20 Int Sig: Reset L-F SD
Q
t=0.1s R
Fig 6 Int Sig: Pref LCB1 &
1 Int Sig:SETLCB1
Fig 8
Fig 8 DDB: CB2 NOAR(1429) &
Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARIP(1544) 0.1S

0
1
&
&
SD
Int Sig: Pref LCB2 Q
Fig 6 R
& 1 Int Sig: SETLCB2
Fig 8
Fig 8 DDB: CB1 NOAR(1528)
&
DDB: CB2 ARIP(1435) 0.1S

Fig 17
0
1
&
AR Figure 7: Leader/follower logic – 1
P446/EN/TM/E 7-199
AR Figure 8: Leader/follower logic – 2
7-200 P446/EN/TM/E
Setting:
NUM CBs :
CB 1 Only Fig 9
CB 2 Only
Both CB1&CB2
&
Fig 5 DDB: AR in Service(1385)

*Note
DDB: AR Enable CB1(1609)* & If not mapped in PSL
are defaulted high.
DDB: AR Enable CB2(1605)*
&
Note
1
When Leader/Follower AR Mode is
set via optos there are 7 invalid
& combinations of optos that can be
selected. This logic detects these
combinations and on a trip forces
Setting: both CB1 & CB2 to lockout.
AR Mode &
AR 1P 1
AR 1/3P
AR 3P &
AR Opto 1
& & Invalid conditions are:

DDB: Lead AR 1P(1497) Lead ARFollower AR
1P 3P 1P 3P
& 0 0 0 1
DDB: Lead AR 3P(1498)
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
& 0 1 1 0
1 0 1 1 1
Setting: 1 0 1 1
Leader/Follower 1 1 1 0
AR Mode
L 1P, F1P &
1
L 1P, F3P
L 3P, F3P
L 1/3P, F1/3P
L 1/3P, F3P & Int Sig: Foll SPAROK
1
AR opto
Fig 8,9
& Int Sig: Foll 3PAROK

1
& Fig 8,9
DDB: Lead AR 1P(1497)
&
DDB: Lead AR 3P(1498) 5.0s DDB: Invalid AR Mode(331)
0
&
DDB: Follower AR 1P(1409) See
Int Sig: InvalidAR Mode
Note
& Fig 55,56
DDB: Follower AR 3P(1410)
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter=0(846)

1
1

& & Int Sig:CB1LSPAROK
DDB: AR Enable CB1(1609)* Fig 9,10,19,21,55
1
& Int Sig: CB2LSPAROK

&
Fig 9,10,19,21,56
1
Fig 8 DDB: Leader CB2(1431) Int Sig: CB1L3PAROK
&
Fig 10,16,21,55
DDB: AR Enable CB2(1605)* 1
Int Sig: CB2L3PAROK
&
Fig 10,17,21,56
Fig 8 Int Sig: Foll CB1

&
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2L SPAROK & Int Sig:CB1FSPAROK
Fig 10,19,21,55
Fig 9 Int Sig: Foll SPAROK
& Int Sig: CB1F3PAROK

Fig 10,16,21,55
Fig 8 Int Sig: Foll CB2

& Int Sig: CB2FSPAROK
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1LSPAROK &
Fig 10,19,21,56
Fig 9 Int Sig: Foll 3PAROK
& Int Sig: CB2F3PAROK
Fig 10,17,21,56
AR Figure 9: Leader & follower AR modes enable
P446/EN/TM/E 7-201
Fig 10
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1 L SPAROK

1
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1 F SPAROK
Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARIP( 1544)

&
Fig 13 Int Sig: TARANY
&
Fig 18 DDB:Seq Counter =1( 847) 1 & 1
& DDB: AR Force CB1 3P( 858)
Fig 18 DDB:Seq Counter =2( 848)
DDB:Seq Counter =3(849) Fig 63

Fig 18
Fig 18 DDB:Seq Counter =4( 850)
Fig 55 DDB: CB1 AR Lockout( 306)
Fig 39 DDB: AR CB1 Unhealthy(307)
DDB: Inhibit AR (1420)
Setting:
CB2 TripMode
3P 3P
1/3P &
Fig 8 DDB: Leader CB2( 1431)
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2 L SPAROK

1
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2 F SPAROK
Fig 17 DDB: CB2 ARIP( 1435)

&
&
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter =1(847) 1 & 1 DDB: AR Force CB2 3P( 1485)
&
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter =2(848)
Fig 63
DDB: Inhibit AR (1420)

Setting:
CB1 TripMode
3P 3P
1/3P &
Fig 5 DDB: AR In Service( 1385)
Setting: 1 P4105ENa
NUM CBs:
CB1 Only
CB2 Only
Both CB1&CB 2 1
AR Figure 10: Force three phase trip
7-202 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 11
Setting:
PrFunct1 Trip:
PrFunct1 Trip Initiate AR
No Action
Block AR
1 IntSig:Prot AR Block
Fig 55,56
Setting:
PrFunct2 Trip:
PrFunct2 Trip Initiate AR
1 S
No Action Q
Block AR R 1 IntSig: INIT AR
Fig 13,14,16,17
&
Setting:
PrFunct ‘n’ Trip:
Initiate AR
PrFunct3 Trip
No Action
Block AR
DDB: IA< Start (864)

1
DDB: IB< Start (865)
DDB: IC< Start (866)
Fig 12 DDB(577): AR Trip Test A

1
&
Fig 12 DDB(578): AR Trip Test B
Fig 12 DDB(579): AR Trip Test C
DDB(522): Any Trip
AR Figure 11: Auto-reclose initiation
AR Figure 12: Test trip & AR initiation
P446/EN/TM/E 7-203
Fig 15 Int Sig: CB2 TARA Fig 13
Fig 15 Int Sig: CB2 TARB 1

Fig 15 Int Sig: CB2 TARC
Setting:
NUM CBs : CB1 Only
CB1 Only/ 1
CB2 Only/ BothCB1&CB2 2 Int Sig:TAR2/3 PH
Both CB1
&CB2 Fig 53
1 Int Sig: TARANY

Fig 11 Int Sig: Init AR
Fig 10,20
&
DDB: CB1 Trip OutputA(523)
DDB: CB1 Ext TripA(535) 1 Int Sig: TARA

Fig 53
S
Q DDB: CB1 Trip AR MemA(1535)
DDB: CB1 Ext Trip 3Ph(534) R
Fig 13
&
DDB: CB1 Trip OutputB(524)
1 Int Sig: TARB
DDB: CB1 Ext TripB(536)
Fig 53
S
Q DDB: CB1 Trip AR MemB(1536)
R Fig 13
&
DDB: CB1 Trip OutputC(525)
1 Int Sig: TARC
DDB: CB1 Ext TripC(537)
Fig 53
S
Q DDB: CB1 Trip AR MemC(1537)
R
Fig 13
Fig 16 DDB: ARIP(1542) 0.01
0.1
&
1 Int Sig: RESPRMEM
Fig 5 Int Sig: AR Disabled 1 0.2

& Fig 14,15
0
S
Q
R
1
Fig 14 DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemA(1499)
Fig 14 DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemB(1500) 1

Fig 14 DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemC(1501)
Fig 13 DDB: CB1 Trip AR MemA(1535) 1 Int Sig: TMEMANY

1
Fig 13 DDB: CB1 Trip AR MemB(1536) Fig 20,21
Fig 13 DDB: CB1 Trip AR MemC(1537)
1 Int Sig: TMEM 1Ph

Fig 16,19,55
2 Int Sig:TMEM 2/3Ph

Fig 16,53,55
& Int Sig: TMEM 3Ph

Fig 21
P4108ENa
AR Figure 13: CB1 1pole / 3 pole trip + AR initiation
7-204 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 14
Setting:
NUM CBs : CB2 Only
CB1 Only/ 1
CB2 Only/ BothCB1&CB2
Both CB1
&CB2
2 Int Sig:CB2 TAR2/3 PH

Fig 11 Int Sig: Init AR Fig 54
&
DDB: CB2 Trip OutputA(1601)
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip A(539) 1 Int Sig: CB2 TARA

Fig 14,54
S
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip 3Ph(538) Q DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemA(1499)
R Fig 13
&
DDB: CB2 Trip OutputB(1602)
1 Int Sig: CB2 TARB
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip B(540)
Fig 14,54
S
Q DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemB(1500)
R
& Fig 13
DDB: CB2 Trip OutputC(1603)
1 Int Sig: CB2 TARC
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip C(541)
Fig 14,54
S
Q DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemC(1501)
Fig 13 Int Sig: RESPRMEM R Fig 13
Fig 14 DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemA(1499)

1 Int Sig: CB2 TMEM 1Ph
Fig 14 DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemB(1500) Fig 17,19,56
Fig 14 DDB: CB2 Trip AR MemC(1501) 2 Int Sig:CB2 TMEM 2/3Ph

Fig 17,54,56
& Int Sig: CB2 TMEM 3Ph

Fig 21
AR Figure 14: CB2 1 pole / 3 pole trip + AR initiation
Fig 15
Fig 16 DDB: AR Start(1541)
DDB: Trip Inputs A(530) & S

1 Q
DDB: Ext Fault APh(1508) R
=2 Int Sig: FLTMEM 2P

DDB: Trip Inputs B(531) & S
1 Q Fig 55,56
DDB: Ext Fault BPh(1509) R
& Int Sig: FLTMEM 3P
Fig 55,56
DDB: Trip Inputs C(532) & S
1 Q
DDB: Ext Fault CPh(1510) R
Fig 13 Int Sig: ResPRMEM
AR Figure 15: 1Ph, 2Ph & 3Ph fault memory
P446/EN/TM/E 7-205
Fig 16
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip A (539)
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip B(540)

DDB: CB2 Ext Trip C(541)
1 DDB: AR START(1541)
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip 3Ph(538)

Fig 15,17,18,22,24,25,27,28,29,37,38
DDB: CB1 Ext TripA(535)
DDB: CB1 Ext TripB (536) 1
DDB: CB1 Ext TripC (537)

DDB: CB1 Ext Trip 3Ph(534)
0.02
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB1 OpAny 0
&
Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARIP(1544) 1
Fig 16 DDB:AR START(1541)

&
Fig 32 DDB: Set CB1 Close(1565) &

DDB:CB1 Closed 3ph(907)
Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM2/3Ph
Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM1Ph 1

&
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB1Op2/3P
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1L3 PAROK &

1 &
Int Sig: CB1F3 PAROK 1 DDB: CB1 ARINIT (1543)
Fig 9
Fig 18,22,55
DDB: Inhibit AR (1420) S
Q DDB: CB 1ARIP (1544)
DDB: CB1 LO Alarm(860) R Fig 4,7,10,20,32,35,41,43,55
Fig 8 DDB: CB1 NOAR (1528) 1 DDB: ARIP(1542)
Fig 36 Int Sig: CB1 ARSUCC 1
Fig 7,8,13,18,19,22,32 , 33,55,56
Fig 35 Int Sig: CBARCancel

& Int Sig: CB1 LARIP
Fig 8 DDB: Leader CB1(1530) Fig 19,21,35,55
1 & Int Sig: CB1 FARIP

Fig 8 DDB: Follower CB1(1432)
Fig 19,21,35,55
AR Figure 16: CB1 Auto-reclose in progress
7-206 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 17
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip A( 539)
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip B( 540) 1
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip C( 541)

DDB: CB2 Ext Trip3Ph(538)
0.02
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB2 OpAny 0
&
Fig 17 DDB: CB2 ARIP( 1435) 1
Fig 16 DDB: AR START( 1541)

&
Fig 33 DDB: Set CB2 Close( 1449) &

DDB: CB2 Closed3ph(915)
Fig 14 Int Sig:CB2 TMEM2/3Ph
Fig 14 Int Sig: CB2 TMEM1Ph 1

&
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB2Op2/3P &
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2L3 PAROK &
1
1 DDB: CB2 ARINIT( 1434)
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2F3 PAROK
Fig 18,22,55
DDB: Inhibit AR( 1420) S
Q DDB: CB2 ARIP( 1435)
DDB: CB2 LO Alarm( 1599) R
Fig 4,7,10,16,20,33,35,42, 44,56
Fig 8 DDB: CB2 NOAR( 1429)
Fig 36 Int Sig: CB2 ARSUCC 1
Fig 35 Int Sig: CBARCancel

& Int Sig: CB 2 LARIP
Fig 19,21,35,56
1
& Int Sig: CB 2 FARIP
Fig 8 DDB: Follower CB2( 1433)
Fig 19,21,35, 56
P4112Ena
AR Figure 17: CB2 Auto-reclose in progress
Fig 18
Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARINIT(1543)

1
Fig 16 DDB: ARIP(1542) &
Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541) 1

& & Int Sig: SC Increment
Fig 24 DDB: 1P DTime(1554)

&
SEQUENCE COUNTER
(1) Increment on Rising DDB: Seq Counter=0(846)

Edge
Fig 9,18
DDB: Seq Counter=1(847)
Fig 9,10,18,20,26,28,41, 42,45,46,47,48
Fig 10,26,41,42
Fig 10,26,41,42

DDB: ARIP(1542) (3) Reset on falling Edge
Fig 10,26,41,42
Setting: DDB: Seq Counter=5(851)

AR Shots
AR Shot:1/2/3/4 DDB: Seq Counter>Set(1546)
Fig 55,56
Int Sig:SCCountoveqShots
& S
Int Sig:Prot Re-op Q Int Sig: LastShot
Fig 20 R
Fig 20,55,56
Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541)
P4113Ena
AR Figure 18: Sequence counter
P446/EN/TM/E 7-207
Int Sig: CB1L 3PAR

Fig 19
Int Sig: CB2L 3PAR
1
1 S
Fig 16 DDB: ARIP(1542) Int Sig: LeaderSPAR
Q
R
Fig 20 Int Sig:RESETL-F
Fig 35
Fig 16 Int Sig: CB1L ARIP
Fig 9 Int Sig:CB1L SPAROK &

S
Q Int Sig: CB1L SPAR
Fig 13 Int Sig:TMEM 1PH R
Fig 24

1
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB1L 3PAR
Fig 9 Int Sig:CB2L SPAROK & S

Q Int Sig: CB2L SPAR
Fig 15 Int Sig:CB2 TMEM 1PH R
Fig 24

1
Fig 19 Int Sig: CB2L SPAR
Fig 16 Int Sig: CB1F ARIP
Fig 9 Int Sig:CB1F SPAROK &

S
Q Int Sig: CB1F SPAR
Fig 13 Int Sig:TMEM 1PH R
Fig 27,28,32

1
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB1F 3PAR 1 DDB: CB1 AR 1p InProg(845)

Fig 62
Fig 19 Int Sig: CB1L SPAR
Fig 9 Int Sig:CB2F SPAROK & S

Q Int Sig: CB2F SPAR
R
Fig 15 Int Sig:CB2 TMEM 1PH
Fig 27,28,33

1 1 DDB: CB2 AR 1p InProg(855)
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB2F 3PAR
Fig 62
P4114Ena
AR Figure 19: Single phase AR cycle selection
Fig 20
Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM ANY

& 0
0.02 &
1 Int Sig:Prot Re-op
Fig 13 Int Sig: TAR ANY
& Fig 18,32,33,35,55,56
& Int Sig:RESETL-F

Fig 24 DDB: 1P DTime(1554)
Fig 7,8,19
Discrim T
& t
0
Fig 20 Int Sig: Prot Re-Op & Int Sig: Evolve Lock
Fig 55,56
& DDB: Evolve 3ph(1547)
Fig 21,55,56
& S
Fig 18 Int Sig:LastShot 0 Q
0.02 R

1
Fig 32 & DDB: CB1 Failed AR(1550)

Int Sig: SET CB1 CL 0 1
0.02
DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) &
& DDB: CB2 Failed AR(1441)

Fig 33 Int Sig: SET CB2CL 0 1
0.02
AR Figure 20: Protection re-operation + evolving fault + persistent fault
7-208 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 21

& S
Q Int Sig: CB1L3PAR
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1L 3PAROK R
Fig 19,25,26,32,40
Fig 20 DDB: Evolve 3ph(1547)
Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM 3P

1
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB1 OP 2/3P
1 DDB: CB1 AR 3p InProg(844)
Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM ANY
&
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1L SPAROK

& S
Q Int Sig: CB2L3PAR
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2L 3PAROK R
Fig 19,25,26,33,39
Fig 15 Int Sig: CB2 TMEM 3P
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB2 OP 2/3P 1
& 1 DDB: CB2 AR 3p InProg(1411)

Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2L SPAROK

& S
Q Int Sig: CB1F3PAR
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1F 3PAROK R
Fig 19,27,28,32
&
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1F SPAROK

& S
Q Int Sig: CB2F3PAR
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2F 3PAROK R
Fig 19,27,28,33
&
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2F SPAROK
AR Figure 21: Three phase AR cycle selection
P446/EN/TM/E 7-209
Fig 22
Setting: Pr AR Disable
DT Start by Prot: 1
& DDB: DTOK All(1551)
Pr AR Disable/Pr Pr ProtOp
ProtOp/Pr ProtRes Fig 24,25
Pr ProtRes
&
Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541) S

Q
R &
Fig 24 Int Sig: OKTimeSP
Fig 25 DDB: OKTIME3P(1555) 1

Set Dead
Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARINIT(1543) Line time
1 0 & S t
0.02 Q Int Sig: DeadLineLockout
Fig 17 DDB: CB2 ARINIT(1434) R 0
Fig 55,56
1
Setting:
3PDT Start When LD: Disabled
Enabled/Disabled 1
Enabled
&
1
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
DDB: CB1 AR 1p InProg(845)
&
Setting:
DT Start by CB Op : &
Disabled
Enabled/Disabled 1
Fig 3 Enabled
Fig 3 1 DDB: DTOK CB1L 1P(1552)

Int Sig: CB1OP1P &
Int Sig: CB2OPANY Fig 24
1
1 DDB: DTOK CB1L 3P(1553)

DDB: CB1 Open 3ph(903) &
Fig 25
Fig 3 1
1 DDB: DTOK CB2L 1P(1442)

Fig 3 Int Sig: CB2OP1P &
Fig 24
Int Sig: CB1OPANY 1
DDB: CB2 Open 3ph(911) & 1 DDB: DTOK CB2L 3P(1443)

Fig 25
1
Setting:
NUM CBs :
CB 1 Only
CB 2 Only
Both CB1&CB2
P4117Ena
AR Figure 22: Dead time start enable
AR Figure 23: Intentionally blank
7-210 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 24
Fig 19 Int Sig: CB1LSPAR &

Fig 22 DDB: DTOK CB1L 1P(1552)
1
Fig 19 Int Sig: CB2LSPAR & &

S
DDB: DTOK All(1551) Q Int Sig: OKTimeSP
Fig 22 R &
Fig 24 Int Sig: SPDTCOMP
Fig 22
Setting:
DT Start by Prot:
Pr AR Disable/Pr Pr ProtRes
ProtOp/Pr ProtRes
&
Fig 19 Int Sig: CB1LSPAR

1
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter=1(847) 1
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB1OP2/3P

&
Logic 1
&
Fig 19 Int Sig: CB1LSPAR 1
Logic 1
&
1PDTIME
t Int Sig: SPDTCOMP
0
Fig 24
&
& Int Sig: CB1SPDTCOMP

Fig 32,34,39
1 DDB:1P DTime(1554)
&
Fig 18,20
& Int Sig: CB2SPDTCOMP
Fig 33,34,40
P4119ENa
AR Figure 24: Single phase AR lead CB dead time
P446/EN/TM/E 7-211
Fig 25
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB1L3PAR &

Fig 22 DDB:DTOK CB1L 3P(1553)
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB2L3PAR &

Fig 22 DDB: DTOK All(1551) & S

Q
Fig 26 Int Sig: 3PDTCOMP R & DDB: OK Time 3P(1555)
Setting: Fig 22,26,32,33,34,39,40

DT Start by Prot:
Pr AR Disable/Pr Pr ProtRes
ProtOp/Pr ProtRes
&
Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541) 1
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB1L3PAR

1
Logic 1
&
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB1L3PAR 1
Logic 1
&
P4120ENa
AR Figure 25: Three phase AR lead CB dead time enable
Fig 26
1 Int Sig: 3PDTCOMP
Fig 25,26
Fig 25 DDB: OKTIME3P(1555) 3PDTIME1
& t
& DDB: 3P DTime1(1556)
& t DTIME2
& t DTIME3
DTIME4
& t
1 DDB: 3P Dead Time IP(853)
Fig 26 Int Sig: 3PDTCOMP & DDB: CB13PDTIME(1560)

& Int Sig: CB13PDTCOMP

Fig 32,34,39
& DDB: CB23PDTIME(1444)

& Int Sig: CB23PDTCOMP

Fig 33,34,40
P4121ENa
AR Figure 26: Three phase AR lead CB dead time
7-212 P446/EN/TM/E
Setting: Fig 27
BF if Lfail Cls: Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
Fig 43 DDB: Control CloseCB1(839)

&
Fig 19 Int Sig: CB2FSPAR
1
Fig 21 Int Sig: CB2F3PAR
S
Q
DDB: CB2 Closed 3ph(915) & DDB: En CB2 Follower(1445)
1 RD
Fig 44 DDB: CB2CloseFail(325) Fig 28,29

&
1
Logic 1
&
1
Logic 1
&
Fig 44 DDB: Control CloseCB2(841)

&
1
S
DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) Q
RD & DDB: En CB1 Follower(1488)
1
Fig 43 DDB: CB1CloseFail(303) Fig 28,29

&
Fig 56 DDB: CB2 AR Lockout(328) 1
Logic 1
&
Int Sig: CB1FSPAR 1
Fig 19
Logic 1
&
AR Figure 27: Follower AR enable
Fig 28
Setting:
Dynamic F/L : Enabled
Enabled/Disable &
Int Sig: CB1 LFRC
1
Int Sig: CB2 LFRC
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB1OP1P

Fig 27 DDB: En CB1 Follower(1488) & 1
&
1 DDB:1PF TComp(1561)
Fig 3 Int Sig: CB2OP1P
Fig 28
Fig 27 DDB: En CB2 Follower(1445) &
Fig 28 DDB:1PF TComp(1561)

FOLL Time
S t
Q
Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541) 1 R 0

1

&
&
Int Sig: CB1SPFTCOMP

&
Fig 32,34,39
1 DDB: 1P Follower Time(1446)
&
& Int Sig: CB2SPFTCOMP

Fig 33,34,40
P4123ENa
AR Figure 28: Single phase follower time
P446/EN/TM/E 7-213
Setting: Fig 29
Enabled/Disable &
Int Sig: CB1 LFRC

1
Int Sig: CB2 LFRC

&
Fig 27 DDB: En CB1 Follower(1488) 1
&
1 DDB: 3PF TComp(1562)
Fig 29

&
Fig 27 DDB: En CB2 Follower(1445)
Fig 29 Int Sig: 3PFOLLTCOMP
FOLL Time
Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541) S t
Q
1 R 0
1
&
Int Sig: CB13PFTCOMP
& Fig 32,34,39
1 DDB: 3P Follower Time(1447)
&
& Int Sig: CB23PFTCOMP

Fig 33,34,40
P4124ENa
AR Figure 29: Three phase follower time

7-214 P446/EN/TM/E
DDB: Any Trip(522)
Fig 55 DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306) Fig 32

&
DDB: CB1HEALTHY(436)*
Fig 24 IntSig: CB1SPDTCOMP &

*Note
Fig 3 IntSig: CB1OP1P If not mapped in PSL
are defaulted high.
Fig 21 IntSig: CB1L3PAR
&
Fig 26 IntSig: CB13PDTCOMP

&
Fig 45 DDB: CB1LSCOK(1573)
1
Fig 45 DDB: CB1FASTSCOK(1572)
&
Fig 25 DDB: OKTIME3P(1555)
Fig 19 IntSig: CB1FSPAR

&
Fig 3 IntSig: CB1OP1P
Fig 28 IntSig: CB1SPFTCOMP
Fig 21 IntSig: CB1F3PAR

Fig 29 IntSig: CB13PFTCOMP
Fig 47 DDB: CB1F SCOK(1491)
Logic 1 &
PULSE 0.1S
S
Fig 55 DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306) Q DDB:Auto Close CB1(854)
1 R
Fig 20 IntSig: PROTREOP Fig 35,43
Fig 16 DDB: ARIP(1542) DDB:Set CB1 Close(1565)
Fig 16,20,34,41,55,56
Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARIP(1544) & DDB:CB1CONTROL(1566)
P4127ENa
AR Figure 32: CB Auto close
P446/EN/TM/E 7-215
DDB: Any Trip(522) Fig 33

&
Fig 24 IntSig: CB2SPDTCOMP &

*Note
are defaulted high.

&
1
&
Fig 25 DDB: OKTIME3P(1555)
Fig 19 IntSig: CB2FSPAR

&
Fig 21 IntSig: CB2F3PAR

Fig 48 DDB: CB2FSCOK(1456)
&
Logic 1
PULSE 0.1S
S
Fig 56 DDB: CB2 AR Lockout(328) Q DDB: Auto Close CB2(1448)
1 R
Fig 20 IntSig: PROTREOP Fig 35,44
Fig 16 DDB: ARIP(1542) DDB: Set CB2 Close(1449)
Fig 17,20,34,42,55,56
Fig 17 DDB: CB2 ARIP(1435) & DDB: CB2CONTROL(1450)
AR Figure 33: CB2 Auto close
7-216 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 34
Fig 24 IntSig: CB1SPDTCOMP
Fig 28 IntSig: CB1SPFTCOMP 1
&
Fig 32 DDB: Set CB1 Close(1565)
S
Q IntSig: SETCB1SPCL
Fig 26 IntSig: CB13PDTCOMP R
& Fig 35,36
&
Fig 25 DDB: OKTIME3P(1555) &
1
Fig 29 IntSig: CB13PFTCOMP S
& Q IntSig: SETCB13PCL
Fig 47 DDB: CB1F SCOK(1491) R
Fig 35,36

Fig 28 IntSig: CB2SPFTCOMP 1
&
Fig 33 DDB: Set CB2 Close(1449) S

Q IntSig: SETCB2SPCL
Fig 26 IntSig: CB23PDTCOMP R
& Fig 35,36
&
Fig 25 DDB: OKTIME3P(1555) &
1 S
Fig 29 IntSig: CB23PFTCOMP Q IntSig: SETCB23PCL
& R
Fig 48 DDB: CB2FSCOK(1456) Fig 35,36
P4129ENa
AR Figure 34: Prepare reclaim initiation
P446/EN/TM/E 7-217
Fig 35
Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB1SPCL

Logic 1
Fig 17 IntSig: CB2FARIP
Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB2SPCL 1
Fig 34 SPAR RECLAIM TIME
IntSig: SETCB23PCL
DDB: Auto Close CB1(854) & t DDB: 1P Reclaim TComp(1568)
Fig 32 1 &
0
Fig 36
Fig 16 IntSig: CB1LARIP
& DDB: 1P Reclaim Time(1567)

Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB13PCL

&
Fig 33 DDB: Auto Close CB2(1448)
Setting:
Enabled/Disable
Fig 7 IntSig: CB2LFRC

&
&
1
&
& &

&
&
1
&
&
Fig 19 IntSig: LeaderSPAR

1
3PAR RECLAIM TIME
1
Fig 32 DDB: Auto Close CB1(854) & t
& DDB: 3P Reclaim TComp(1570)
0
Fig 36
& DDB: 3P Reclaim Time(1569)


1
Fig 33 DDB: Auto Close CB2(1448) &

Fig 17 IntSig: CB2LARIP Logic 1
Close Pulse time

Fig 35 DDB: 1P Reclaim Time(1567) t
1
Fig 35 DDB: 3P Reclaim Time(1569) 0
&
Fig 20 Int Sig:Prot Re-op & Int Sig: CBARCancel
Fig 16,17
1

&
P4130ENa
AR Figure 35: Reclaim time
7-218 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 35 Fig 36
DDB: 3P Reclaim TComp(1570)
1
Fig 35 DDB: 1P Reclaim TComp(1568)

& & S
Fig 3 IntSig: CB1OP1P Q DDB: CB1 Succ 1P AR(1571)
0.02S &
RD
DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) S
Fig 41
Q
R
1
1 IntSig: CB1ARSUCC
Fig 37 IntSig: RESCB1ARSUCC
Fig 16,37
Fig 35 1
Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB13PCL 0

& & S
Fig 3 IntSig: CB1OP2/3P Q DDB: CB1 Succ 3P AR(852)
0.02S &
RD
DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) S Fig 41
Q
R
1

1

& & S
Fig 3 IntSig: CB2OP1P Q DDB: CB2 Succ 1P AR(1451)
0.02S &
RD
DDB: CB2 Closed 3ph(915) S Fig 42
Q
R
1
Fig 38 IntSig: RESCB2ARSUCC 1 IntSig: CB2ARSUCC
Fig 17,38
1
Fig 35
Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB23PCL 0

& & S
Fig 3 IntSig: CB2OP2/3P Q DDB: CB2 Succ 3P AR(1452)
0.02S &
RD
S Fig 42
DDB: CB2 Closed 3ph(915) Q
R
1
P4131ENa
AR Figure 36: Successful auto-reclose signals
P446/EN/TM/E 7-219
AR Figure 37: Reset CB1 successful AR indication
7-220 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 38
Fig 3 IntSig: CB2OPANY
Setting: Enabled
Res AROKby UI:
Enabled/Disabled Disabled
&
Yes
COMMAND:
Reset AROK Ind
No
Setting: Enabled
Res AROK by NoAR:
1 IntSig: RESCB2ARSUCC
Fig 5 IntSig: AR DISABLED &
1
Fig 36
Setting:
NUM CBs :
CB 1 Only
CB 2 Only
Both CB1&CB2
Enabled
Setting:
Res AROK by Ext
&
DDB: Ext Rst CB2 AROK(1417)
Enabled
Setting:
Res AROK by TDly:
AROK Reset Time

t &
Fig 36 IntSig: CB2ARSUCC
0
AR Figure 38: Reset CB2 successful AR indication
Fig 39
Fig 25 DDB: OK Time 3P(1555) &
*Note
Fig 45 DDB: CB1 Fast SCOK(1572) If not mapped in PSL
are defaulted high.
1 CB Healthy Time
& S t
Fig 29 IntSig: CB13PFTCOMP Q DDB: AR CB1 Unhealthy(307)
RD 0
Fig 7,10,55

&
Fig 45 DDB: CB1L SCOK(1573)
S
Q
RD

& CB Sys Check Time
Fig 47 DDB: CB1F SCOK(1491)
S t
Q 1 DDB: AR CB1 No C/S(308)
RD 0
Fig 55
1
P4134ENa
AR Figure 39: CB healthy & system check timers
P446/EN/TM/E 7-221
Fig 40
Fig 21 IntSig: CB2L3 PAR
Fig 25 DDB: OK Time3P( 1555) & * Note
DDB: CB2 Fast SCOK( 1454) If not mapped in PSL
Fig 46
are defaulted high
.
Fig 24 IntSig: CB2 SPDTCOMP
1
Fig 28 IntSig: CB2 SPFTCOMP
AR CBHealthy Time
Fig 26 IntSig: CB23 PDTCOMP
& S t
Fig 29 IntSig: CB23 PFTCOMP DDB: AR CB2 Unhealthy( 329)
Q
RD 0
Fig 7,10,56
DDB: CB2 HEALTHY(437)*

Fig 56 DDB: CB2 AR Lockout( 328) 1
DDB: CB2 Closed3ph( 915)
Fig 26 IntSig: CB23 PDTCOMP

&
Fig 46 DDB: CB2 L SCOK( 1455)
S
Q
RD

DDB: CB 2 Closed3ph( 915)
Fig 29 IntSig: CB23 PFTCOMP AR CheckSync Time

&
Fig 48 DDB: CB2 FSCOK( 1456) t
S DDB: AR CB2 No C/S( 330)
1
Q 0
RD Fig 56

DDB: CB2 Closed3ph( 915)
P4135ENa
AR Figure 40: CB2 healthy & system check timers
7-222 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 41
CB 1 TOTAL SHOTS
Fig 32 DDB: Set CB1 Close(1565) INC
COUNTER
RES
CB 1 SUCCESSFUL
Fig 36 DDB: CB1 Succ 1P AR(1571) INC
SPAR SHOT 1 COUNTER
RES
Fig 36 DDB: CB1 Succ 3P AR(852)
CB 1 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter=1(847) 3 PAR SHOT1 COUNTER
RES
CB 1 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
RES
CB 1 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
RES
CB 1 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
3 PAR SHOT4 COUNTER
RES
DDB: CB1 ARIP(1544) 0

Fig 16 CB 1 FAILED AR
0.02
& INC
COUNTER
RES
DDB: Ext Rst CB1 Shots(1518)

1
COMMAND:
Reset CB1shots Yes
Yes /No
AR Figure 41: AR shots counters
P446/EN/TM/E 7-223
Fig 42
CB 2 TOTAL SHOTS
Fig 33 DDB: Set CB2 Close(1449) INC
COUNTER
RES
CB 2 SUCCESSFUL
Fig 36 DDB: CB2 Succ 1P AR(1451) INC
SPAR SHOT 1 COUNTER
RES
Fig 36 DDB: CB2 Succ 3P AR(1452)
CB 2 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
RES
CB 2 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
RES
CB 2 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
RES
CB 2 SUCCESSFUL
& INC
RES
DDB: CB2 ARIP(1435) 0 CB 2 FAILED AR

Fig 17 0.02 & INC
COUNTER
RES
DDB: Ext Rst CB2 Shots(1418)

1
COMMAND:
Reset CB2shots Yes
Yes /No
AR Figure 42: CB2 AR shots counters
7-224 P446/EN/TM/E
Disable
Settings: Local Fig 43
CB Control by
Remote
Local & Remote *Note
Opto are defaulted high.
Enable opto
Local & Opto
1 initiated
Remote & Opto CB trip and close
Local & Remote & Opto DDB: Control TripCB1(838)
Reset
COMMAND:
Dominont SET: Trip
UI Trip CB1 Pulse Time
Latch
1
& S t
& Q
DDB: Init Trip CB1(439) 0
R & DDB:CB1 Trip Fail(302)
DDB: Init Close CB1(440) & Reset

DDB:CB1CloseinProg(842)
1 Dominont
COMMAND: SET: Man
Latch Reset
UI Close CB1 Close Delay
& S t Dominont
Q Latch DDB:Control CloseCB1(839)
R 0 &
1 Fig 27
Fig 32 S t SET: Close
DDB: Auto Close CB1(854) Q
R 0 Pulse Time
DDB: Rst CB1 CloseDly(443)
1
DDB: Any Trip(522) & DDB:CB1CloseFail(303)
DDB: Control TripCB1(838) Fig 7,27,55
DDB: CB1 Ext Trip 3Ph(534) 1

1

1
1
DDB:CB1 Open Bph(905) &

1
DDB:CB1 Closed Aph(908)
1
DDB: CB1 Closed Bph(909) 1
SET: CB Healthy Time
DDB: CB1 Closed Cph(910)
t
& DDB: Man CB1unhealthy(304)
DDB: CB1HEALTHY(436)* 0
t
& DDB: NoCS CB1ManClose(305)
DDB: CB1 Man SCOK(1574) 0
Fig 51
SET: Check Sync Time
P4138ENa
AR Figure 43: CB1 circuit breaker control
P446/EN/TM/E 7-225
Disable
SET: Local Fig 44
CB Control by
Remote
*No te
Local & Remote
Opto are defaulted high.
Local & Opto
1 Enable opto initiated
Remote & Opto CB trip and close
Local & Remote & Opto DDB: ControlTripCB2(840)
Reset
COMMAND: Dominont SET: Trip
UI Trip CB2 Latch Pulse Time
1
& S t
& Q
DDB: Init Trip CB2(441) 0
R & DDB: CB2 Trip Fail(324)
DDB: Init Close CB2(442) & Reset

DDB: CB2 Close inProg(1453)
1 Dominont
COMMAND: SET: Man Close
Latch Reset
UI Close CB2 Delay
& S t Dominont
DDB: CB2 ARIP(1435) Q Latch DDB:Control CloseCB2(841)
Fig 17 0
R &
1 S t Fig 27
Fig 33 DDB: Auto Close CB2(1448) SET: Close
Q
R 0 Pulse Time
DDB: Rst CB2 CloseDly(1419)

1
DDB: Any Trip(522) & DDB: CB2CloseFail(325)
DDB: Control Trip CB2(840)
Fig 7,27,56
DDB: CB2 Ext Trip3Ph(538) 1
1


1
1
DDB:CB2 Open Bph(913) &

1
DDB:CB2 Closed Aph(916)
1
DDB: CB2 Closed Bph(917) 1
SET: CB Healthy Time
DDB: CB2 Closed Cph(918)
t
& DDB:ManCB2unhealthy(326)
0
t
& DDB: NoCS CB2ManClose(327)
DDB: CB2 Man SCOK(1458) 0
Fig 52
SET: Check Sync Time
P4139ENa
AR Figure 44: CB2 circuit breaker control
7-226 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 45
Setting:
CB1L SC ClsNoDly: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled DDB: CB1FASTSCOK(1572)
&
Fig 32,34,39
Setting: 1
CB1L SC CS1: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB:CB1 CS1 OK(883)
Setting:
CB1L SC CS2 Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB:CB1 CS2 OK(884)
Setting:
CB1L SC DLLB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
DDB: Live Bus1(886)
Setting:
CB1L SC LLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Live Line(888)
&
DDB:Dead Bus1(887) 1 DDB: CB1LSCOK(1573)
Fig 32,34,39
Setting:
CB1L SC DLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
DDB:Dead Bus1(887)
Setting:
CB1L SC Shot1: Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
& *Note
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter=1(847) If not mapped in PSL
are defaulted high.
Setting:
CB1L SC all: Disabled
Enabled/Disabled &
DDB: CB1 Ext CS OK(900)* P4140ENa
AR Figure 45: CB1 lead 3PAR system check
P446/EN/TM/E 7-227
Fig 46
Setting:
CB2L SC ClsNoDly: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled & DDB: CB2FASTSCOK(1454)
Fig 33,34,40
Setting: 1
CB2L SC CS1: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB:CB2 CS1 OK(1577)
Setting:
CB2L SC CS2 Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
Setting:
CB2L SC DLLB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)

&
DDB: Live Bus2(1461)
Setting:
CB2L SC LLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Live Line(888)

& 1 DDB: CB2LSCOK(1455)
DDB: Dead Bus2(1462) Fig 33,34,40
Setting:
CB2L SC DLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)

&
DDB: Dead Bus2(1462)
Setting:
CB2L SC Shot1: Disabled *Note
Enabled/Disabled If not mapped in PSL
are defaulted high.
&
Setting:
CB2L SC all: Disabled
Enabled/Disabled &
DDB: CB2 Ext CS OK(901)*
AR Figure 46: CB2 lead 3PAR system check
7-228 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 47
Setting:
CB1F SC CS1: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB:CB1 CS1 OK(883)
Setting:
CB1F SC CS2 Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB:CB1 CS2 OK(884)
Setting:
CB1F SC DLLB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
DDB: Live Bus1(886)
Setting:
CB1F SC LLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Live Line(888)
& 1 DDB: CB1F SCOK(1491)

DDB:Dead Bus1(887)
Fig 32,34,39
Setting:
CB1F SC DLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)

&
DDB:Dead Bus1(887)
Setting:
CB1F SC Shot1: Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
*Note
Setting: If not mapped in PSL
CB1F SC all: Disabled are defaulted high.
Enabled/Disabled &

P4142ENa
AR Figure 47: CB1 follow 3PAR system check
P446/EN/TM/E 7-229
Fig 48
Setting:
CB2F SC CS1: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
Setting:
CB2F SC CS2 Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
Setting:
CB2F SC DLLB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
Setting:
CB2F SC LLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Live Line(888)
& 1 DDB: CB2F SCOK(1456)

Fig 33,34,40
Setting:
CB2F SC DLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
Setting:
CB2F SC Shot1: Disabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
*Note
CB2F SC all: Disabled are defaulted high.
Enabled/Disabled &
P4143ENa
AR Figure 48: CB2 follow 3PAR system check

7-230 P446/EN/TM/E
Setting:
Enabled Fig 51
CB1M SC CS1:
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB:CB1 CS1 OK(883)
Setting:
CB1M SC CS2 Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB:CB1 CS2 OK(884)
Setting:
CB1M SC DLLB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)

&
DDB: Live Bus1(886)
Setting:
CB1M SC LLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Live Line(888)

1 DDB: CB1 Man SCOK(1574)
&
DDB:Dead Bus1(887)
Fig 43
Setting:
CB1M SC DLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)

&
DDB:Dead Bus1(887)
*Note
Setting:
CB1M SC Required: Disabled If not mapped in PSL
are defaulted high.
Enabled/Disabled &
AR Figure 51: CB1 man. close system check
P446/EN/TM/E 7-231
Setting:
CB2M SC CS1: Enabled Fig 52
Enabled/Disabled
&
Setting:
CB2M SC CS2 Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
Setting:
CB2M SC DLLB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
Setting:
CB2M SC LLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Live Line(888)
& 1 DDB: CB2 Man SCOK(1458)

Fig 44
Setting:
CB2M SC DLDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
DDB: Dead Line(889)
&
*Note
CB2M SC Required: Disabled are defaulted high.
Enabled/Disabled &
AR Figure 52: CB2 man. close system check
7-232 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 53
Trip Pulse Time
Fig 13 IntSig: TAR2/3Ph S t
Q
RD 0
DDB: CB1 Open 3ph(903) & S

Q
DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) RD
Fig 13 IntSig: TARA Trip Pulse Time

& S
Fig 13 IntSig: TMEM2/3Ph Q t 1
RD 1
0
& S
Q
DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) RD 1
DDB: CB1FailPrTrip(1575)
Fig 55,56
Fig 13 IntSig: TARB
& S
Fig 13 IntSig: TMEM2/3Ph Q
RD
& S
Q
Fig 13 IntSig: TARC

& S
Fig 13 IntSig: TMEM2/3Ph Q
RD
DDB:CB1 Open Cph(906) & S

Q
P4148ENa
AR Figure 53: CB1 trip time monitor
P446/EN/TM/E 7-233
Fig 54
Trip Pulse Time

Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TAR2/3Ph S t
Q
RD 0
& S
Q
Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TARA Trip Pulse Time

& S
Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TMEM2/3Ph 1
Q t
RD 1
0
& S
Q
DDB: CB2FailPrTrip(1459)
Fig 55,56
Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TARB
& S
Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TMEM2/3Ph Q
RD
& S
Q
1
Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TARC

& S
Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TMEM2/3Ph Q
RD
& S
Q
1
AR Figure 54: CB2 trip time monitor
7-234 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 55
Fig 15 IntSig: FLTMEM3P

&
Setting: BAR3Ph
Multi Phase AR: 1
Allow Autoclose/BAR BAR2 and3Ph
2 and 3 Ph/BAR 3Phase
&
Fig 43 DDB: CB1 CloseFail (303)
Setting:
BF if Lfail Cls: Enabled
Enabled/ Disabled
Fig 7 Int Sig: CB 2 LFRC &
Fig 16 IntSig: CB1 FARIP
Fig 56 DDB: CB 2 AR Lockout (328)

&
Fig 53 DDB: CB1 FailPrTrip (1575)
Fig 3 IntSig: CB1 OpAny
Fig 16 DDB: CB 1 ARIP(1544) &
DDB: BlockCB1AR (448)
Fig 39 DDB: AR CB1 No C/S(308)
Fig 20 DDB: Evolve3ph( 1547) S

Q
Fig 20 IntSig: PROTRE-OP R
Fig 18 IntSig: LastShot &
Fig 16 DDB: CB 1 ARIP(1544) 1
IntSig: BARCB1
Fig 20 IntSig: EVOLVELOCK & Fig 8,55a
Fig 11 IntSig: ProtARBlock
Fig 4 DDB: CB 1 In Service(1526)

&
Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM2/3Ph
1
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1L3 PAROK 0

1
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1F3 PAROK 0.02s

&
Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM1Ph
1
Fig 9 Int Sig:CB1 LSPAROK 0

1
Fig 9 Int Sig:CB1 FSPAROK 0.02s
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter>Set (1546)
Fig 1 DDB: CB 1 Status Alm(301)
Fig 16 IntSig: CB1 LAIRP

1 Trip Pulse Time
Fig 16 IntSig: CB1 FARIP
Fig 33 DDB: Set CB2 Close(1449) t

&
0
Fig 3 IntSig: CB2 OpAny

&
Setting:
NUM CBs :
CB 1 Only/
CB 2 Only/
Both CB1
&CB2 BothCB1&CB2
Fig 4 &
DDB: CB 1 In Service(1526)
DDB: CB2 FailPrTrip(1459) &
Fig 54
Fig 9 IntSig: InvalidAR Mode

&
Fig 16 DDB: CB 1 ARINIT(1543)
1
Fig 16 DDB: CB 1 ARIP (1544)
P4150ENa
Fig 22 Int Sig: DeadLineLockout
AR Figure 55: Auto-reclose lockout – CB1
P446/EN/TM/E 7-235
Fig 55a
Fig 55 IntSig: BARCB1
Fig 5 DDB: AR In Service(1385)

&
& S
Q DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306)
Setting: R
NUM CBs : Fig
CB1 Only
CB1 Only/ 1 4,8,10,20,27,32,39,41,56,
CB2 Only/ 57
Both CB1 &
&CB2 BothCB1&CB2
Fig 57 IntSig: RESCB1LO
P4151ENa
AR Figure 55a: Auto-reclose lockout – CB1
7-236 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 56
&
Setting: BAR3Ph
Multi Phase AR: 1
Allow Autoclose/BAR BAR2and3Ph
2and3 Ph/BAR 3Phase
Fig 15 IntSig: FLTMEM2P &
Fig 44 DDB: CB2CloseFail(325)
Setting:
BF if Lfail Cls: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
Fig 7 Int Sig: CB1 LFRC &

&
Fig 54 DDB: CB2FailPrTrip(1459)
Fig 3 IntSig: CB2OpAny
Fig 17 DDB: CB2 ARIP(1435) &
DDB: BlockCB2AR(1421)
Fig 40 DDB: AR CB2 No C/S(330)

Fig 20 DDB: Evolve 3ph(1547) S
Q
Fig 20 IntSig: PROTRE-OP R
Fig 18 &
IntSig: Last Shot
1 IntSig: BARCB2
Fig 8,56a
&
Fig 20 IntSig: EVOLVELOCK
Fig 11 IntSig: ProtARBlock
Fig 4 DDB: CB2 In Service(1428)

&
Fig 14 Int Sig:CB2TMEM 2/3Ph
1
Fig 9 Int Sig: CB2L3PAROK 0

1
Int Sig: CB2F3PAROK 0.02s
Fig 9
DDB: CB2 In Service(1428)

&
Fig 14 Int Sig:CB2TMEM 1Ph
1
Fig 9 Int Sig:CB2LSPAROK 0

1
Int Sig:CB2FSPAROK 0.02s
Fig 9
Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter>Set(1546)
Fig 2 DDB: CB2 Status Alm(323)
Fig 17 IntSig: CB2LAIRP

1 Trip Pulse Time
Fig 33 DDB: Set CB2 Close(1449) t

&
0
Fig 3 IntSig: CB1OpAny
Setting: &
NUM CBs :
CB1 Only/
CB2 Only/
Both CB1
&CB2 BothCB1&CB2
Fig 4 &
DDB: CB1 In Service(1526)
Fig 4 DDB: CB2 In Service(1428)
DDB: CB1FailPrTrip(1575) &
Fig 54
Fig 9 IntSig: InvalidAR Mode

&
1
Fig 22 Int Sig: DeadLineLockout
AR Figure 56: Auto-reclose lockout – CB2
P446/EN/TM/E 7-237
Fig 56a
Fig 56 IntSig: BARCB2
Fig 5 DDB: AR In Service(1385)

&
& S
Q DDB: CB2 AR Lockout(328)
Setting:
NUM CBs : R
CB2 Only Fig
CB1 Only/ 1
CB2 Only/ 4,8,10,20,27,33,40,42,5
Both CB1 5,58
&CB2 BothCB1&CB2
&
Fig 58 IntSig: RESCB2LO
AR Figure 56a: Auto-reclose lockout – CB2
Fig 57
Setting:
Res LO by CB IS: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
Fig 4 IntSig: CB1CRLO
Setting:
Res LO by UI: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
COMMAND:
ResetCB1LO: Yes &
Yes/No
Setting:
Res LO by NoAR: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled

1
Setting: 1 IntSig: RESCB1LO

NUM CBs :
CB1 Only/ Fig 55
CB2 Only/ CB2 Only
Both CB1
&CB2
Setting:
Res LO by ExtDDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB: Rst CB1 Lockout(446)
Setting:
Res LO by T Delay: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
LO Reset Time
t &
Fig 55 DDB: CB1AR Lockout(306)
0
P4154ENa
AR Figure 57: Reset CB1 lockout
7-238 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 58
Setting:
Res LO by CB IS: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
Fig 4 IntSig: CB2CRLO
Setting:
Res LO by UI: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
COMMAND: &
ResetCB2LO: Yes
Yes/No
Setting:
Res LO by NoAR: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled

1
Setting: 1 IntSig: RESCB2LO

NUM CBs :
CB1 Only/
CB2 Only/ CB1 Only Fig 56
Both CB1
&CB2
Setting:
Res LO by ExtDDB: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
&
DDB: Rst CB2 Lockout(1422)
Setting:
Res LO by T Delay: Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
LO Reset Time
t &
0
AR Figure 58: Reset CB2 lockout
P446/EN/TM/E 7-239
AR Figure 59: System checks – voltage monitor
7-240 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 60
ConfigurationSetting: Enabled
System Checks:
Enabled/Disabled Disabled 1 DDB:SchkslnactiveCB1(880)
Setting: Enabled
&
System Checks CB1:
CB1 CS1CriteriaOK
&
Setting: CB1 CS2CriteriaOK

&
Select CB1 CS1SlipF>
A-N,B-N,C-N & DDB: CB1 CS1SlipF>(1578)
A-B,B-C,C-A
CB1 CS1SlipF<
LINE VT CSRef & DDB: CB1 CS1SlipF<(1579)
CB1 CS2SlipF> & DDB: CB1 CS2SlipF>(1464)

Check Synch CB1 CS2SlipF<
& DDB: CB1 CS2SlipF<(1465)
CSVline<
& DDB: CSVline<(1580)
CSVBus1<
& DDB: CSVBus1<(1582)
Check synch settings CSVLine>
BUS1 VT CS1 and operation criteria & DDB: CSVLine>(1581)
are shown
CSVBus1>
& DDB: CSVBus1>(1583)
CB1 CS1VL>VB1
& DDB: CB1 CS1 VL>VB(1586)
CB1 CS1VL<VB1
& DDB: CB1 CS1 VL<VB(1588)
CB1 CS1FL>FB1
& DDB: CB1 CS1 FL>FB(1590)
CB1 CS1FL<FB1
& DDB: CB1 CS1 FL<FB(1591)
*Note CB1 CS1AngHigh+

& DDB: CB1 CS1AngHigh+(1592)
are defaulted high. CB1 CS1AngHigh-
& DDB: CB1 CS1AngHigh-(1593)
CB1 CS2FL>FB1
& DDB: CB1 CS2 FL>FB(1493)
CB1 CS2FL<FB1
& DDB: CB1 CS2 FL<FB(1494)
CB1 CS2AngHigh+
& DDB: CB1 CS2AngHigh+(1495)
CB1 CS2AngHigh-
& DDB: CB1 CS2AngHigh-(1496)
CS1AngRotACW
& DDB: CB1 CS AngRotACW(1594)
CS1AngRotCW
& DDB: CB1 CS AngRotCW(1595)
& DDB: CB1 CS2 VL>VB(1587)

CB1 CS2VL>VB1
& DDB: CB1 CS2 VL<VB(1589)

CB1 CS2VL<VB1
DDB: VTS Fast Block(832)
DDB: MCB/VTS(438)
1
DDB: MCB/VTSCS1(1521)
Setting: Enabled
DDB: F Out of Range(319) CB1 CS1: & DDB:CB1 CS1 OK(883)
DDB:CB1 CS1 Enabled(881)*
Setting: Enabled
CB1 CS2:
Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB1 CS2 OK(884)
Disabled
DDB:CB1 CS2 Enabled(882)*
Inputs default to high if
unmapped in PSL
AR Figure 60: CB1 synch check signals
P446/EN/TM/E 7-241
AR Figure 61: CB2 synch check signals
7-242 P446/EN/TM/E
Fig 62
DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306)
DDB: CB1 LO Alarm(860) 1

DDB: Pole Discrep.CB1(451) 0.04s DDB: Pole Discrep.CB1(699)
&
& 0
DDB:CB1 Open Bph(905) 1
&
DDB: CB2 AR Lockout(328)
DDB: CB2 LO Alarm(1599) 1

0.04s DDB: Pole Discrep.CB2(1607)
DDB: Pole Discrep.CB2(1606) &
& 0
DDB:CB2 Open Bph(913) 1
&
AR Figure 62: Pole discrepancy
P446/EN/TM/E 7-243
Fig 63
DDB: Trip Inputs A (530)

1 S
Q DDB: CB1 Trip Output A(523)
R
DDB: Trip Inputs B (531)
1 S
Q DDB: CB1Trip Output B(524)
R
DDB: Trip Inputs C (532)
1 S
Q DDB: CB1 Trip Output C(525)
Setting: 1 R
CB1 TripMode
3P 3P
1 /3P
&
DDB: AR Force CB1 3P(858) 1 1 S
Q DDB: CB1 Trip 3Ph(526)
DDB: Force 3PTrip CB1(533) R
DDB: CB1 Trip I/P 3ph(529)
1 S
Q DDB: CB2 Trip Output A (1601)
R
1 S
Setting: Q DDB: CB2Trip Output B (1602)
R
CB2 TripMode
3P 3P 1 S
1 /3P Q DDB: CB2 Trip Output C (1603)
R
DDB: AR Force CB2 3P(1485) 1 &

1 S
Q DDB: CB2 Trip 3Ph (1600)
DDB: Force 3PTrip CB2(1604) R
DDB: CB2 Trip I/P 3ph(1608)
Dwell DDB: Any Trip(522)

1
100ms
S
DDB: PoledeadA(892) & Q DDB: 2/3Ph Fault(527)
1 R
& 1 S
DDB: PoledeadB(893) 1 Q DDB: 3Ph Fault(528)
R
&
1
DDB: PoledeadC(894)
&
P4160ENa
AR Figure 63: CB trip conversion
7-244 P446/EN/TM/E
28 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL AND AUTO-RECLOSE

LOGIC (INTERNAL SIGNAL DEFINITIONS)
This section lists only the hard-coded internal signals used in the circuit breaker control.
The DDB signals featuring in the logic are described in Appendix C of this manual.
Name Description
3PDTCOMP Int Sig: Three phase dead time complete
AR DISABLED Int Sig: Overall autoreclosing disabled
BAR CB1 Int Sig from “Autoreclose Lockout – CB1”
BAR CB2 Int Sig from “Autoreclose Lockout – CB2”
CB1 3PDTCOMP Int Sig: CB1 3PAR dead time complete
CB1 3PFTCOMP Int Sig: CB1 3PAR follower time complete
CB1 3POK Int Sig: CB1 OK for 3P AR (leader or follower)
CB1 ARSUCC Int Sig: CB1 auto-reclose sucessful
Int Sig + DDB: Line/Bus1 phase angle in range:
CB1 CS1 AngHigh-
-CB1 CS1 Angle to -180deg
CB1 CS1 AngHigh+
+CB1 CS1 Angle to +180deg
CB1 CS1 FL<FB Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 F > (Line F + “CB1 CS1 SlipFreqf”)
CB1 CS1 FL>FB Int Sig + DDB: Line F > (Bus1 F + “CB1 CS1 SlipFreqf”)
Int Sig + DDB: CB1 CS1 is enabled and Line and Bus 1 voltages
CB1 CS1 OK
meet CB1 CS1 settings
CB1 CS1 SlipF< Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 1 slip freq < CB1 CS1 SlipFreq setting
CB1 CS1 SlipF> Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 1 slip freq > CB1 CS1 SlipFreq setting
CB1 CS1 VL<VB Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 V > (Line V + “CB1 CS1 VDiff”)
CB1 CS1 VL>VB Int Sig + DDB: Line V > (Bus1 V + “CB1 CS1 VDiff”)
CB1 CS2AngHigh-
CB1 CS2AngHigh+
CB1 CS2FL<FB Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 F > (Line F + “CB1 CS2 SlipFreqf”)
CB1 CS2FL>FB Int Sig + DDB: Line F > (Bus1 F + “CB1 CS2 SlipFreqf”)
CB1 CS2OK
CB1 CS2SlipF< Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 1 slip freq < CB1 CS2 SlipFreq setting
CB1 CS2SlipF> Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 1 slip freq > CB1 CS2 SlipFreq setting
CB1 CS2VL<VB Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 V > (Line V + “CB1 CS2 VDiff”)
CB1 CS2VL>VB Int Sig + DDB: Line V > (Bus1 V + “CB1 CS2 VDiff”)
CB1 LARIP Int Sig : CB1 ARIP as leader
CB1 Op1P Int Sig: CB1 open single phase
CB1 Op2/3P Int Sig: CB1 open on 2 or 3 phases
CB1 OpAny Int Sig: CB1 open on 1, 2 or 3 phases
CB1 SPOK Int Sig: CB1 OK for SP AR (leader or follower)
CB1 SysCh Off Int Sig + DDB: CB1 CS1 & CB1 CS2checks disabled
CB1CRLO Int Sig: CB1 in service – reset CB1 lockout
CB1L3PAR Int Sig from “Three Phase AR Cycle Selection”
CB1L3PAR Int Sig from “Single Phase AR Cycle Selection”
CB1L3PAROK Int Sig: CB1 OK to 3Ph AR as leader
CB1LFRC Int Sig: CB1 failed to reclose as leader
P446/EN/TM/E 7-245
Name Description
CB1LFRC Int Sig from “Leader/Follower Logic – 1”
CB1LSPAR Int Sig from “Single Phase AR Cycle Selection”
CB1LSPAROK Int Sig: CB1 OK to SP AR as leader
CB1SPDTCOMP Int Sig: CB1 SP dead time complete
CB1SPFTCOMP Int Sig: CB1 SP follower time complete
CB2 3PDTCOMP Int Sig: CB2 3PAR dead time complete
CB2 3PFTCOMP Int Sig: CB2 3PAR follower time complete
CB2 3POK Int Sig: CB2 OK for 3P AR (leader or follower)
CB2 ARSUCC Int Sig: CB2 auto-reclose sucessful
CB2 CS1 AngHigh-
CB2 CS1 AngHigh+
CB2 CS1 FL<FB Int Sig + DDB: Bus2 F > (Line F + “CB2 CS1 SlipFreqf”)
CB2 CS1 FL>FB Int Sig + DDB: Line F > (Bus2 F + “CB2 CS1 SlipFreqf”)
CB2 CS1 OK
CB2 CS1 SlipF< Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 2 slip freq < CB2 CS1 SlipFreq setting
CB2 CS1 SlipF> Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 2 slip freq > CB2 CS1 SlipFreq setting
CB2 CS1 VL<VB Int Sig + DDB: Bus2 V > (Line V + “CB2 CS1 VDiff”)
CB2 CS1 VL>VB Int Sig + DDB: Line V > (Bus2 V + “CB2 CS1 VDiff”)
CB2 CS2AngHigh-
CB2 CS2AngHigh+
CB2 CS2FL<FB Int Sig + DDB: Bus2 F > (Line F + “CB2 CS2 SlipFreqf”)
CB2 CS2FL>FB Int Sig + DDB: Line F > (Bus2 F + “CB2 CS2 SlipFreqf”)
CB2 CS2OK
CB2 CS2SlipF< Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 2 slip freq < CB2 CS2 SlipFreq setting
CB2 CS2SlipF> Int Sig + DDB: Line-Bus 2 slip freq > CB2 CS2 SlipFreq setting
CB2 CS2VL<VB Int Sig + DDB: Bus2 V > (Line V + “CB2 CS2 VDiff”)
CB2 CS2VL>VB Int Sig + DDB: Line V > (Bus2 V + “CB2 CS2 VDiff”)
CB2 FARIP Int Sig: CB2 ARIP as follower
CB2 LARIP Int Sig: CB2 ARIP as leader
CB2 Op1P Int Sig: CB2 open single phase
CB2 Op2/3P Int Sig: CB2 open on 2 or 3 phases
CB2 OpAny Int Sig: CB2 open on 1, 2 or 3 phases
CB2 SPOK Int Sig: CB2 OK for SP AR (leader or follower)
CB2 SysCh Off Int Sig + DDB: CB2 CS1 & CB2 CS2checks disabled
CB2 TAR 2/3Ph Int Sig: 2Ph or 3Ph trip & AR initiation CB2
CB2 TARA Int Sig: A Ph trip & AR initiation CB2
CB2 TARB Int Sig: B Ph trip & AR initiation CB2
CB2 TARC Int Sig: C Ph trip & AR initiation CB2
CB2 TMEM 1Ph Int Sig: CB1 1Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory CB2
CB2 TMEM 2/3Ph Int Sig: CB1 2Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory CB2
CB2 TMEM 3Ph Int Sig: CB1 3Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory CB2
CB2CRLO Int Sig: CB2 in service – reset CB2 lockout
7-246 P446/EN/TM/E
Name Description
CB2F3PAR Int Sig from “Three Phase AR Cycle Selection”
CB2F3PAROK Int Sig: CB2 OK to 3Ph AR as follower
CB2FSPAR Int Sig: CB2 SPAR in progress as follower
CB2FSPAROK Int Sig: CB2 OK to SP AR as follower
CB2L3PAR Int Sig from “Three Phase AR Cycle Selection”
CB2L3PAROK Int Sig: CB2 OK to 3Ph AR as leader
CB2LFRC Int Sig: CB2 failed to reclose as leader
CB2LFRC Int Sig from “Leader/Follower Logic – 1”
CB2LSPAR Int Sig from “Single Phase AR Cycle Selection”
CB2LSPAROK Int Sig: CB2 OK to SP AR as leader
CB2SPDTCOMP Int Sig: CB2 SP dead time complete
CB2SPFTCOMP Int Sig: CB2 SP follower time complete
CBARCancel Int Sig: Stop and reset CB1 and CB2 AR In progress
CS VBus1< Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 Volts < CS UV setting
CS VBus1> Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 Volts > CS OV setting
CS VBus2< Int Sig + DDB: Bus2 Volts < CS UV setting
CS VBus2> Int Sig + DDB: Bus2 Volts > CS OV setting
CS VLine< Int Sig + DDB: Line Volts < CS UV setting
CS VLine> Int Sig + DDB: Line Volts > CS OV setting
Int Sig + DDB: Line freq > (Bus1 freq + 0.001Hz)
CS1 Ang Rot ACW
(CS1 Angle Rotating Anticlockwise)
Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 freq > (Line freq + 0.001Hz)
CS1 Ang Rot CW
(CS1 Angle Rotating Clockwise)
Int Sig + DDB: Line freq > (Bus2 freq + 0.001Hz)
CS2 Ang Rot ACW
(CS2 Angle Rotating Anticlockwise)
Int Sig + DDB: Bus2 freq > (Line freq + 0.001Hz)
CS2 Ang Rot CW
(CS2 Angle Rotating Clockwise)
Dead Bus 1 Int Sig + DDB: CS1 V magnitude < Dead Bus 1 setting
Dead Bus 2 Int Sig + DDB: CS2 V magnitude < Dead Bus 2 setting
Dead Line Int Sig + DDB: Line V magnitude < Dead Line setting
Int Sig: When setting “3PDT Start When LD” is set to Enabled and
DeadLineLockout the line does not go dead for a time set by “Dead Line Time” then
this signal will force the auto-reclose sequence to lockout.
ENABLE CB13PDT Int Sig: Enable dead time for CB1 3PAR
ENABLE CB1SPDT Int Sig: Enable dead time for CB1 SPAR
ENABLE CB23PDT Int Sig: Enable dead time for CB2 3PAR
ENABLE CB2SPDT Int Sig: Enable dead time for CB2 SPAR
EVOLVE LOCK Int Sig: Lockout for 2nd trip after Discrim Tim
F Out of Range Int Sig from frequency tracking logic
FLTMEM 2P Int Sig: 2 Ph fault memory
FLTMEM 3P Int Sig: 3 Ph fault memory
Foll CB1 Int Sig from “Leader & Follower Logic – 2”
Foll CB2 Int Sig from “Leader & Follower Logic – 2”
Foll3PAROK Int Sig from “Leader & Follower AR Modes Enable”
FollSPAROK Int Sig from “Leader & Follower AR Modes Enable”
INIT AR Int Sig: Host protection required to initiate AR
Int Sig: An invalid state is being indicated by the logic that
Invalid AR Mode
determines AR mode by opto.
P446/EN/TM/E 7-247
Name Description
Last Shot Int Sig: the last shot
Live Bus 1 Int Sig + DDB: CS1 V magnitude >= Live Bus 1 setting
Live Bus 2 Int Sig + DDB: CS2 V magnitude >= Live Bus 2 setting
Live Line Int Sig + DDB: Line V magnitude >= Live Line setting
OK Time SP Int Sig from “Single Phase AR Lead CB Dead Time”
PrefLCB1 Int Sig: CB1 is the preferred leader
PrefLCB2 Int Sig: CB2 is the preferred leader
Prot AR Block* Int Sig: Host protection required to block AR
Prot Re-op Int Sig from “Protection Re-operation + Evolving Fault”
RESCB1ARSUCC Int Sig from “Reset CB1 Successful AR Indication
RESCB1LO Int Sig from “Reset CB1 Lockout”
RESCB2ARSUCC Int Sig from “Reset CB2 Successful AR Indication
RESCB2LO Int Sig from “Reset CB2 Lockout”
Reset L-F Int Sig: From “Protection Re-operation + Evolving fault”
RESPRMEM Int Sig: Reset “trip & AR” memory
SC Increment Int Sig: Increment the sequence counter
SCCountoveqShots Int Sig: Sequence counter has exceeded setting
SET CB1CL Int Sig from “CB1 Auto Close”
SET CB2CL Int Sig from “CB2 Auto Close”
SET LCB1 Int Sig: CB1 selected leader
SET LCB1 Int Sig from “Leader/Follower Logic – 1”
SET LCB2 Int Sig: CB2 selected leader
SET LCB2 Int Sig from “Leader/Follower Logic – 1”
SETCB13PCL Int Sig: CB1 three phase close given
SETCB1SPCL Int Sig: CB1 single phase close given
SETCB23PCL Int Sig: CB2 three phase close given
SETCB2SPCL Int Sig: CB2 single phase close given
SPDTCOMP Int Sig: Single phase dead time complete
TAR 2/3Ph Int Sig: 2Ph or 3Ph trip & AR initiation
TARA Int Sig: A Ph trip & AR initiation
TARANY Int Sig from “CB1 1 Pole / 3 Pole Trip + AR Initiation”
TARANY Int Sig: Any trip & AR initiation
TARB Int Sig: B Ph trip & AR initiation
TARC Int Sig: C Ph trip & AR initiation
TMEM 1Ph Int Sig: CB1 1Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory
TMEM 2/3Ph Int Sig: CB1 2Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory
TMEM 3Ph Int Sig: CB1 3Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory
TMEM ANY Int Sig: Any Ph trip & AR initiation memory
7-248 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 8 Application Examples
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
CHAPTER 8
P446/EN/TM/E 8-1
8 Application Examples MiCOMho P446
8-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The Application chapter describes how the MiCOMho P446 can be applied, providing application
examples where appropriate.
1 Chapter Overview
2 Introduction
2.1 Protection of Overhead Line, Cable, and Hybrid Circuits
3 Application of Individual Protection Functions

3.1 Distance Protection and Aided DEF
3.1.1 Simple and Advanced Setting Mode
3.1.2 Line Parameters Settings
3.1.3 Residual Compensation for Earth Faults
3.1.4 Mutual Compensation for Parallel Lines
3.1.5 Selection of Distance Operating Characteristic
3.1.5.1 Phase Characteristic
3.1.5.2 Earth Characteristic
3.1.6 Zone Reaches - recommended settings
3.1.7 Quadrilateral Phase Resistive Reaches
3.1.8 Quadrilateral Ground Resistive reaches and Tilting
3.1.9 Phase Fault Zone Settings
3.1.10 Directional Element for Distance Protection
3.1.11 Distance Setup - Filtering, Load Blinding and Polarizing
3.1.11.1 Digital Filtering
3.1.11.2 CVTs with Passive Suppression of Ferroresonance
3.1.11.3 CVTs with Active Suppression of Ferroresonance
3.1.12 Load Blinding (Load Avoidance)
3.1.13 Recommended Polarizing Settings
3.1.14 Distance Elements Basic Scheme Setting
3.1.15 Power Swing Alarming and Blocking
3.1.16 Out of Step Protection
3.1.17 Critical Stability Angle
3.1.17.1 Setting Option Recommendation
3.1.17.2 Blinder Limits Determination
3.1.17.3 Delta t, R5 and R6 Setting Determination
3.1.17.4 Tost (Trip Delay) Setting
3.1.17.5 Blinder Angle Setting
3.1.17.6 Out of Step Operation on Series Compensated Lines
3.2 Switch on to Fault (SOTF) and Trip on Reclose (TOR)
3.2.1 Switch onto Fault Mode
3.2.2 Trip on Reclose Mode
3.3 Directional Function - Setup of DEF Elements
3.3.1 DEF Zero Sequence Polarization
3.3.2 DEF Negative Sequence Polarization
3.3.3 General Setting Guidelines for DEF (Directional Ground Overcurrent)
3.3.3.1 DEF Forward Threshold
3.3.3.2 DEF Reverse Threshold
3.3.4 Delta Directional Comparison - Principle and Setup
3.3.5 Delta Directional Comparison - Selection of I and V Threshold
3.4 Channel Aided Schemes
P446/EN/TM/E 8-3
3.4.1 Distance Scheme PUR - Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

3.4.2 Distance Scheme POR - Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
3.4.3 Permissive Overreach Trip Reinforcement
3.4.4 Permissive Overreach Scheme Weak Infeed Features
3.4.5 Distance Scheme Blocking
3.4.6 Permissive Overreach Schemes Current Reversal Guard
3.4.7 Blocking Scheme Current Reversal Guard
3.4.8 Aided DEF Earth Fault Scheme - Permissive Overreach
3.4.9 Aided DEF Earth Fault Scheme - Blocking
3.4.10 Delta Scheme POR - Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
3.4.11 Delta Blocking Scheme
3.4.12 Delta Schemes Current Reversal Guard Timer
3.5 Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL)
3.6 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection
3.6.1 Directional Overcurrent Characteristic Angle Settings
3.7 Thermal Overload Protection
3.7.1 Single Time Constant Characteristic
3.7.2 Dual Time Constant Characteristic
3.8 Earth Fault (Ground Overcurrent) and Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) Protection
3.8.1 Directional Earth Fault Protection
3.8.1.1 Residual Voltage Polarization
3.8.1.2 General Setting Guidelines for Directional Earth Fault (Ground Overcurrent) Protection
3.8.2 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Element (SEF)
3.8.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
3.8.3.1 Setting Guidelines for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (REF)
3.8.3.2 Use of METROSIL Non-Linear Resistors
3.9 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (NPS)
3.9.1 Negative Phase Sequence Current Threshold, '2> Current Set'
3.9.2 Time Delay for the NPS Overcurrent Element, ‘2> Time Delay’
3.9.3 Directionalizing the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element
3.10 Undervoltage Protection
3.11 Overvoltage Protection
3.12 Compensated Overvoltage Protection
3.13 Residual Overvoltage (Neutral Displacement) Protection
3.13.1 Setting Guidelines
3.14 Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (CBF)
3.14.1 Breaker Fail Timer Settings
3.14.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings
3.15 Broken Conductor Detection
3.16 Communication between IEDs
3.16.1 Data Rate
3.17 Integral Intertripping
3.17.1 EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM (Modem InterMiCOM)
3.17.2 InterMiCOM64
4 Worked Protection Example and Other Tips

4.1 Distance Protection Setting Example
4.1.1 Objective
4.1.2 System Data
8-4 P446/EN/TM/E
4.1.3 IED Settings

4.1.4 Line Impedance
4.1.5 Residual Compensation for Earth Fault Elements
4.1.6 Zone 1 Phase and Ground Reach Settings
4.1.9 Zone 3 Reverse Reach
4.1.10 Load Avoidance
4.1.11 Additional Settings for Quadrilateral Applications
4.1.11.1 Phase Fault Resistive Reaches (Rph)
4.1.11.2 Earth Fault Resistive Reaches (RGnd)
4.2 Teed Feeder Protection
4.2.1 The Apparent Impedance seen by the Distance Elements
4.2.2 Permissive Overreach Schemes
4.2.3 Permissive Underreach Schemes
4.2.4 Blocking Schemes
4.3 VT Connections
4.3.1 Open Delta (Vee Connected) VTs
4.3.2 VT Single Point Earthing
4.4 Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS)
4.4.1 TCS Scheme 1
4.4.1.1 Scheme Description
4.4.1.2 Scheme 1 PSL
4.4.2 TCS Scheme 2
4.4.3 TCS Scheme 3
4.5 Intermicom64 Application Example
4.5.1 InterMiCOM64 Mapping for Three Ended Application – BLOCKING or PUR Example
4.5.2 Intermicom64 Application Example General Advice
4.5.3 Three-ended Applications
4.5.4 Intermicom64 Application Example Scheme Description
4.5.5 Intermicom64 Application Example Channel Supervision
4.5.6 Intermicom64 Application Example Transfer Trip
4.5.7 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Mapping for Two Ended Application
4.5.8 Intermicom64 Application Example - Dual Redundant Communications Channels
4.5.9 Intermicom64 Application Example - Scheme Coordination Timers
64
4.5.9.1 InterMiCOM Application Example - Distance PUR Permissive Underreach
64
4.5.9.2 InterMiCOM Application Example - Distance POR Permissive Overreach
64
4.5.9.3 InterMiCOM Application Example - Distance Blocking
64
4.5.9.4 InterMiCOM Application Example - Directional Earth Fault (DEF) POR Permissive Overreach
64
4.5.9.5 InterMiCOM Application Example - Directional Earth Fault (DEF) Blocking
64
4.5.9.6 InterMiCOM Application Example - Delta Directional POR Permissive Overreach
64
4.5.9.7 InterMiCOM Application Example - Delta Directional Blocking
4.5.10 Fallback Mode for InterMiCOM64 Bits
5 Application of Non Protection Functions

5.1 Single and Three Phase Auto-Reclosing
5.1.1 Time Delayed and High Speed Auto-Reclosing
5.1.2 Auto-reclose Logic Operating Sequence
P446/EN/TM/E 8-5
5.1.3 Auto-Reclose Setting Guidelines

5.1.3.1 Circuit Breaker Healthy
5.1.3.2 Number of Shots
5.1.3.3 Dead Timer Setting
5.1.3.4 Follower Time Setting
5.1.3.5 De-ionizing Time
5.1.3.6 Example Minimum Dead Time Calculation
5.1.3.7 Reclaim Timer Setting
5.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
5.2.1 Standard CTS
5.3 Circuit Breaker (CB) Condition Monitoring
5.3.1 Setting the  ^ Thresholds
5.3.2 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds
5.3.3 Setting the Operating Time Thresholds
5.3.4 Setting the Excessive Fault Frequency Thresholds
5.4 Read Only Mode
6 Two Circuit Breaker Control Worked Example

6.1 Introduction
6.2 Circuit Breaker Status
6.3 Voltage Inputs
6.4 Application Settings
6.4.1 CB CONTROL Menu:
6.4.2 CONFIGURATION Menu:
6.4.3 CT & VT RATIOS Menu:
6.4.4 GROUP 1 LINE PARAMETERS Menu:
6.4.5 GROUP 1 DISTANCE Menu:
6.4.6 GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS Menu:
6.4.7 GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE Menu:
6.5 PSL (Programmable Scheme Logic) MAPPING
7 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT) requirements

7.1 Recommended CT Classes (British and IEC)
7.2 Distance Protection CT Requirements:
7.2.1 Zone 1 Reach Point Accuracy (RPA)
7.3 Zone 1 Close-up Fault Operation
7.4 Time Delayed Distance Zones
7.5 Determining Vk for an IEEE “C" class CT
7.6 Worked Example for CT Requirements
7.6.1 Important notes to be considered
7.6.2 System Data
7.6.3 Calculation of Primary X/R
7.6.4 Calculation of Source Impedance Zs
7.6.5 Calculation of Full Line Impedance (full 100 kms)
7.6.6 Calculation of Total Impedance Till Remote Bus Bar
7.6.7 Calculation of through Fault X/R
7.6.8 Calculation of through Fault If
7.6.9 Calculation of Line Impedance Till Zone1 Reach Point (80 kms)
7.6.10 Calculation of Total Impedance Till Zone1 Reach Point
7.6.11 Calculation of X/R Till Zone1 Reach Point
7.6.12 Calculation of Fault Current Till Zone1 Reach Point
8-6 P446/EN/TM/E
7.6.13 CT Vk for Distance Zone1 Reach Point

7.6.14 CT Vk for Distance Zone1 Close-up Fault
7.6.15 CT Vk for Distance Time Delayed Zones
7.6.16 Vk to be considered
8 High Break Output Contacts

9 Auxiliary Supply Fuse Rating
P446/EN/TM/E 8-7
2 INTRODUCTION
2.1 Protection of Overhead Line, Cable, and Hybrid Circuits

Overhead lines typically range from 10 kV distribution lines to 800 kV transmission lines. They are
probably the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system. It is therefore essential
that the protection associated with them provides secure and reliable operation.
Continuity of supply is of paramount importance for distribution systems. The majority of faults on
overhead lines are transient or semi-permanent. Multi-shot auto-reclose cycles are used with
instantaneous tripping elements to increase system availability. For permanent faults it is essential
that only the faulted section is isolated. Therefore high speed, discriminative fault clearance is a
fundamental requirement of protection schemes on a distribution network.
Power is transported from the generators to the region of demand using overhead lines. Overhead
lines must have maximum availability but they are exposed which makes them prone to faults.
Protection devices must therefore trip to isolate any faulted circuit.
Transmission networks must clear faults quickly to prevent plant damage, however, the system must
remain stable. If systems are not highly interconnected, single phase tripping and high speed auto-
reclosure are often used. Therefore very high speed protection is needed to reduce overall fault
clearance times.
Charging current may also adversely affect protection. This is a problem particularly with cables and
long transmission lines. Both the initial inrush and steady state charging current must not cause IED
maloperation and preferably should not compromise protection performance.
Physical distance must be taken into account. Some EHV transmission lines can be up to several
hundred kilometres in length. If high speed, discriminative protection is used, it is necessary to
transfer information between line ends. If this signal is lost, the signalling equipment must be secure
and the line must remain protected.
There are many different line configurations possible. Transmission applications may typically consist
of 2 or 3 terminal applications, possibly fed from breaker and a half or mesh arrangements. Lower
voltage applications may also be 2 or 3 terminal configurations but with in zone transformers or small
teed load transformers.
Back-up protection is also an important feature of any protection scheme. If equipment such as
signalling equipment or switchgear fails, alternative forms of fault clearance are needed. Ideally this
back-up protection operates with minimum delay yet it discriminates with both the main protection and
the protection elsewhere on the system.
8-8 P446/EN/TM/E
3 APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may
be applied. Worked examples are provided, to show how the settings are applied to the IED.
3.1 Distance Protection and Aided DEF
3.1.1 Simple and Advanced Setting Mode

To the benefit of user, the MiCOMho P446 offers two setting modes for distance protection: Simple
and Advanced. In the majority of cases, Simple setting is recommended, and allows the user merely
to enter the line parameters such as length, impedances and residual compensation. Then, instead of
entering distance zone impedance reaches in ohms, zone settings are entered in terms of percentage
of the protected line. This makes the IED particularly suited to use along with any installed LFZP
Optimho IEDs, as the reduced number of settings mimics the Autocalc facility within Opticom software.
The Advanced setting mode is recommended for the networks where the protected and adjacent lines
are of dissimilar construction, requiring independent zone characteristic angles and residual
compensation. In this setting mode all individual distance ohmic reach and residual compensation
settings and operating current thresholds per each zone are accessible. This makes the IED
adaptable to any specific application.
3.1.2 Line Parameters Settings

It is essential (especially when using the simple setting mode) that the data relating to 100% of the
protected line is entered here. Take care to input the Line Impedance that correctly corresponds to
either Primary or Secondary, whichever has been chosen as the basis for Settings Values in the
Configuration column.
3.1.3 Residual Compensation for Earth Faults

For earth faults, residual current (derived as the vector sum of phase current inputs (Ia + Ib + Ic) is
assumed to flow in the residual path of the earth loop circuit. Therefore, the earth loop reach of any
zone must generally be extended by a multiplication factor of (1 + kZN) compared to the positive
sequence reach for the corresponding phase fault element.
Caution The kZN Angle is different than previous LFZP, SHNB, and LFZR IEDs: When
importing settings from these older products, subtract. angle  Z1.
3.1.4 Mutual Compensation for Parallel Lines

Typically a mutual cut off factor of 1.5 is chosen to give a good margin of safety between the
requirements of correct mutual compensation for faults inside the protected line and eliminating mal-
operations for faults on the parallel line.
3.1.5 Selection of Distance Operating Characteristic

In general, the following characteristics are recommended:
 Short line applications: Mho phase fault and quadrilateral earth fault zones.
 Open delta (vee-connected) VT applications: Mho for phase fault, with earth fault distance
disabled, and only directional earth fault element used for earth fault protection.
 Series compensated lines: Recommend always using mho characteristics for both phase and
earth faults.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-9
3.1.5.1 Phase Characteristic

This phase characteristic selection is common to all zones, allowing mho or quadrilateral selection.
Generally, the characteristic chosen matches the utility practice. If applied for line protection similarly
to LFZP Optimho, LFZR, SHNB Micromho or SHPM Quadramho models in the Alstom Grid range, a
mho selection is recommended. For cable applications, or to set similarly to the MiCOM
P441/442/444 models, a quadrilateral selection is recommended.
Figure 1 shows the basic settings needed to configure a forward-looking mho zone, assuming that the
load blinder is enabled.
Variable mho Zone Reach Z

expansion by
polarizing ratio
Time
Delay
t
Load
Blinder
Line Angle b
Angle
Blinder Radius
P1725ENa
Figure 1: Settings required to apply a Mho zone
Figure 2 shows the basic settings needed to configure a forward-looking quadrilateral zone (blinder
not shown).
Zone Reach
Z
Tilt Angle
Time
Delay
t
Line
Angle
Resistive
Reach
R
P1726ENa
Figure 2: Settings required to apply a quadrilateral zone
8-10 P446/EN/TM/E
3.1.5.2 Earth Characteristic

In general, the same setting philosophy would be followed for ground distance protection as is used
for the phase elements.
The ground characteristic selection is common to all zones, allowing mho or quadrilateral selection
and generally, the characteristic chosen matches the utility practice. If applied for long and medium
length line protection similarly to LFZP Optimho, LFZR, SHNB Micromho or SHPM Quadramho
models in the Alstom Grid range, a mho selection is recommended. For cable applications, or to set
similarly to the MiCOM P441/442/444 models, a quadrilateral selection is recommended.
Quadrilateral ground characteristics are also recommended for all lines shorter than 10 miles (16 km).
This ensures that the resistive fault arc coverage does not depend on mho circle dynamic expansion
and is a known set value.
3.1.6 Zone Reaches - recommended settings

The Zone 1 elements of a distance IED should be set to cover as much of the protected line as
possible, allowing instantaneous tripping for as many faults as possible. In most applications the
Zone 1 reach (Z1) should not be able to respond to faults beyond the protected line. For an
underreaching application the Zone 1 reach must therefore be set to account for any possible
overreaching errors. These errors come from the IED, the VTs and CTs and inaccurate line
impedance data. It is therefore recommended that the reach of the Zone 1 distance elements is
restricted to 80% of the protected line impedance (positive phase sequence line impedance), with
Zone 2 elements set to cover the final 20% of the line.
The Zone 2 elements should be set to cover the 20% of the line not covered by Zone 1. Allowing for
underreaching errors, the Zone 2 reach (Z2) should be set in excess of 120% of the protected line
impedance for all fault conditions. Where aided tripping schemes are used; fast operation of the
Zone 2 elements is required. It is therefore beneficial to set Zone 2 to reach as far as possible, such
that faults on the protected line are well within reach. A constraining requirement is that, where
possible, Zone 2 does not reach beyond the Zone 1 reach of adjacent line protection. For this reason
the Zone 2 reach should be set to cover 50% of the shortest adjacent line impedance, if possible.
The Zone 3 elements would usually be used to provide overall back-up protection for adjacent circuits.
The Zone 3 reach (Z3) is therefore set to approximately 120% of the combined impedance of the
protected line plus the longest adjacent line. A higher apparent impedance of the adjacent line may
need to be allowed where fault current can be fed from multiple sources or flow through parallel paths.
Zone 3 may also be programmed with a slight reverse (“rev”) offset, in which case its reach in the
reverse direction is set as a percentage of the protected line impedance too. This would typically
provide back-up protection for the local busbar, where the offset reach is set to 20% for short lines
(<30 km) or 10% for longer lines.
Zone 3 may also be set as a reverse directional zone. The setting chosen for Zone 3, if used,
depends on its application. Typical applications include its use as an additional time delayed zone or
as a reverse back-up protection zone for busbars and transformers.
The Zone P elements provide an additional programmable zone which can be set with the same
options as Zone 3 (Forward, Reverse or Offset). Some users may need Zone P as an additional
forward protection zone to line up with any existing practice of using more than three forward zones of
distance protection.
The Zone 4 elements may also provide back-up protection for the local busbar. Where Zone 4 is used
to provide reverse directional decisions for Blocking or Permissive Overreach schemes, Zone 4 must
reach further behind the IED than Zone 2 for the remote end IED. In such cases the reverse reach
should be as below (depends on characteristic used):
Mho: Z4  ((Remote Zone 2 reach) x 120%)
Quadrilateral: Z4  ((Remote Zone 2 reach) x 120%) minus
the protected line impedance
P446/EN/TM/E 8-11
Note: In the case of the mho, the line impedance is not subtracted. This ensures that whatever the
amount of dynamic expansion of the circle, the reverse looking zone always detects all solid and
resistive faults capable of detection by Zone 2 at the remote line end.
3.1.7 Quadrilateral Phase Resistive Reaches

Two setting modes are possible for resistive reach coverage:
Common In this mode, all zones share one common fault resistive reach
setting
Proportional With this mode, the aspect ratio of (zone reach): (resistive reach) is
the same for all zones. The Fault Resistance defines a reference
fault at the remote end of the line. Depending on the zone reach
percentage setting, the resistive reach is the same percentage of
the Fault Resistance setting. For example, if the Zone 1 reach is
80% of the protected line, its resistive reach is 80% of the
reference Fault Resistance.
Proportional setting is used to mimic Germanic protection practice, and to avoid zones being
excessively broad (large resistive reach width compared to zone reach length). In general, for easiest
injection testing, the aspect ratio of any zone is best within the 1 to 15 range:
1/15th  Z reach / R reach setting  15
The resistive reach settings (RPh and RG) should be selected according to the utility practice. If no
such guidance exists, a starting point for Zone 1 is:
Cables Choose Resistive Reach = 3 x Zone 1 reach
Overhead lines Choose Resistive Reach according to the following
formula…
Resistive reach = [2.3 - 0.0045 x Line length (km)] x Zone 1
reach
Lines longer than 400 km Choose: 0.5 x Zone 1 reach
3.1.8 Quadrilateral Ground Resistive reaches and Tilting
Note: Because the fault current for a earth fault may be limited by tower footing resistance, high soil
resistivity, and weak infeeding; any arcing resistance is often higher than for a corresponding phase
fault at the same location. It maybe necessary to set the RG ground resistive settings to be higher
than the RPh phase setting (i.e. boosted higher than the rule of thumb in the last subsection). A
setting of RG three times that of RPh is not uncommon.
Dynamic tilting
Medium/ Long lines
In the case of medium and long line applications where Quad distance ground characteristic is used,
the recommended setting is ‘Dynamic tilt’ enabled at starting tilt angle of -3° (as per default settings).
The -3° is set to compensate for possible CT/VT and line data errors.
For high resistive faults during power exporting, the under-reaching zone 1 is only allowed to tilt down
by the angle difference between the faulted phase and negative sequence current (Iph-I2) starting
from the –3° set angle. This ensures stability of zone 1 for high resistance faults beyond the Zone 1
reach even during heavy load conditions (high load angle between two voltage sources) and sufficient
sensitivity for high resistance internal faults. The tilt angle for all other zones (that are by nature over-
reaching zones) remain at -3 deg.
8-12 P446/EN/TM/E
In the case of power importing, Zone 1 remains at –3° while all other zones are allowed to tilt up by the
(Iph-I2) angle difference, starting from –3°. This increases the Zone 2 and Zone 4 resistive reaches
and secures correct operation in POR and blocking type schemes.
Short lines
For very short lines, typically below 10 Miles (16 km), the ratio of resistive to reactance reach setting
(R/X) could easily exceed 10. For such applications the geometrical shape of the Quad characteristic
could be such that the top reactance line is close or even crosses the resistive axis as presented in
Figure 3.
Figure 3: Example of high resistive Zone 1 fault that falls outside Zone 1 characteristic when
starting tilt angle of -3° is set (over-tilting effect)
In the case of high resistance external faults on a short line, particularly under heavy power exporting
conditions, Zone 1 remains stable due to dynamic downwards tilting of the top line. However, the
detection of high resistance internal faults especially towards the end of the line needs consideration.
In such applications a user has a choice to either detect high resistance faults using highly sensitive
Aided DEF or Delta Directional schemes or to clear the fault with distance ground protection. If
distance is to operate, it is necessary to eliminate over-tilting for internal faults by reducing the initial -
3° tilting angle to zero so that the overall top line tilt is equal to (Iph-I2) angle only.
As shown in Figure 3, the internal resistive fault then falls in the Zone 1 operating characteristic.
However, for short lines the load angle is relatively low when compared to long transmission lines for
the same transfer capacity and therefore the top line dynamic tilting may be moderate. Therefore it
may be necessary to reduce the Zone 1 reach to guarantee Zone 1 stability. This is particularly
recommended if distance is operating in an aided scheme. To summarize, for very short lines with
large R/X setting ratios, it is recommended to set the initial tilt angle to zero and Zone 1 reach to 70-
75% of the line impedance.
Note: The above discussion assumes homogenous networks where the angle of the negative sequence
current derived at relaying point is very close to the total fault current angle. If the network is non-
homogenous, there is a difference in angle that causes inaccurate dynamic tilting. Therefore in such
networks either quad with fixed tilt angle or even Mho characteristic should be considered to avoid
Zone 1 over-reach.
Fixed tilt angle

As an alternative to Dynamic tilting, a user can set a fixed tilt angle. This is applicable to applications
where the power flow direction is unidirectional.
Exporting end
P446/EN/TM/E 8-13
To secure stability, the tilt angle of Zone 1 at exporting end has to be set negative and above the
maximum angle difference between sources feeding the resistive faults. This data should be known
from load flow study, but if unavailable, the minimum recommended setting would be the angle
difference between voltage and current measured at local end during the heaviest load condition
coupled with reduced Zone 1 reach of 70-75% of the line impedance.
Note: Figure 3 shows that at sharp fixed tilt angle, the effective resistive coverage would be significantly
reduced, and therefore for the short lines the dynamic tilting (with variable tilt angle depending on
fault resistance and location) is preferred. For all other over-reaching zones set tilting angle to zero.
Importing end
Set Zone 1 tilt angle to zero and for all other zones the typical setting should be positive and between
+(5-10)°.
Note: The setting accuracy for over-reaching zones is not crucial because it does not pose a risk for IED
mal-operation. The purpose is only to boost Zone 2 and Zone 4 reach and improve distance aided
schemes.
3.1.9 Phase Fault Zone Settings

Each zone has two additional settings that are not accessible in the Simple set mode. These settings
are:
 A tilt angle on the top line of any quadrilateral set for phase faults;
 A minimum current sensitivity setting.
By factory defaults, the Top Line of quadrilateral characteristics is not fixed as a horizontal reactance
line. To account for phase angle tolerances in the line CT, VT and IED, the line is tilted downwards, at
a “droop” of –3o. This tilt down helps to prevent Zone 1 overreach.
The fixed Tilt setting on the phase elements may also be used to compensate for overreach effects
when prefault heavy load export was flowing. In such cases, fault arc resistance is phase shifted on
the impedance polar plot, tilting down towards the resistive axis and not appearing to be fully resistive
in nature. For long lines with heavy power flow, the Zone 1 top line might be tilted downwards in the
range –5 to –15o, mimicking the phase shift of the resistance.
Note 1: A minus angle is used to set a downwards tilt gradient, and a positive angle to tilt upwards.
Note 2: mho characteristics have an inherent tendency to avoid unwanted overreaching, making them very
desirable for long line protection, and one of the reasons for their inclusion in the IED.
The current Sensitivity setting for each zone is used to set the minimum current that must be flowing
in each of the faulted phases before a trip can occur. It is recommended to leave these settings at
their default. The exception is where the IED is made more insensitive to match the lesser sensitivity
of older IEDs existing on the power system, or to grade with the pickup setting of any ground
overcurrent protection for tee-off circuits.
3.1.10 Directional Element for Distance Protection

Distance zones are directionalized by the delta decision. For delta directional decisions, the RCA
settings must be based on the average source + line impedance angle for a fault anywhere internal or
external to the line. Typically, the Delta Char Angle is set to 60o, as it is not essential for this setting
8-14 P446/EN/TM/E
to be precise. When a fault occurs, the delta current is never close to the characteristic boundary, so
an approximate setting is good enough.
The 60° angle is associated with mainly inductive sources and works perfectly well for most
applications. However, in series compensated line applications where the capacitor is physically
located behind the line VT, the Delta directional characteristic angle needs adjusting. In such
applications the capacitor is included in the equivalent source impedance. Then the overall source
impedance seen by the IED becomes predominantly capacitive if the inductance of the normally
strong source is less than the capacitor value. In this case, the calculated operating angle during an
internal fault may not fall within the default 60° delta directional line operating boundary. This could
lead to an incorrect (reverse) directional decision. A zero degree shift is most suitable for such a fault.
However, the constraining factor is the case of external faults for which the source is always inductive
regardless of the degree of compensation and for which the 60° shift is most appropriate. To ensure
correct, reliable and fast operation for both fault locations in the case of predominantly capacitive
source, a Delta Char Angle setting of 30° is strongly recommended.
3.1.11 Distance Setup - Filtering, Load Blinding and Polarizing
3.1.11.1 Digital Filtering

In most applications, it is recommended that Standard filtering is used. This ensures that the IED
offers fast, sub-cycle tripping. In certain rare cases, such as where lines are immediately adjacent to
High Voltage DC (HVDC) transmission, the current and voltage inputs may be severely distorted under
fault conditions. The resulting non-fundamental harmonics could affect the reach point accuracy of the
IED. To prevent the IED being affected, a Special set of filters are available.
Note: When using the long line filter the instantaneous operating time is increased by about a quarter of a
power frequency cycle.
3.1.11.2 CVTs with Passive Suppression of Ferroresonance

Set a Passive CVT filter for any type 2 CVT (those with an anti-resonance design). An SIR cutoff
setting needs to be applied, above which the IED operation is deliberately slowed by a quarter of a
cycle. A typical setting is SIR = 30, below which the IED trips sub-cycle, and if the infeed is weak the
CVT filter adapts to slow the IED and prevent transient overreach.
3.1.11.3 CVTs with Active Suppression of Ferroresonance

Set an Active CVT filter for any type 1 CVT.
3.1.12 Load Blinding (Load Avoidance)

For security, it is highly recommended that the blinder is Enabled, especially for lines above 150 km
(90 miles), to prevent non-harmonic low-frequency transients causing load encroachment problems,
and for any networks where power swings might be experienced.
The impedance radius must be set lower than the worst-case loading, and this is often taken as 120%
overloading in one line, multiplied by two to account for increased loading during outages or fault
clearance in an adjacent parallel circuit. Then an additional allowance for measuring tolerances
results in a recommended setting typically 1/3rd (or even 1/4th in some countries such as UK) of the
rated full load current:
Z  (Rated phase voltage Vn)/(IFLC x 3)
When the load is at the worst-case power factor, it should remain below the beta setting. So, if we
assume a typical worst-case 0.85 power factor, then:
  Cos-1 (0.85) plus 15o margin  47o
P446/EN/TM/E 8-15
and to ensure that line faults are detected,   (Line Angle -15o).
In practice, an angle half way between the worst-case leading load angle, and the protected line
impedance angle, is often used.
The MiCOMho P446 has a facility to allow the load blinder to be bypassed any time the measured
voltage for the phase in question falls below an undervoltage V< setting. Under such circumstances,
the low voltage could not be explained by normal voltage excursion tolerances on-load. A fault is
definitely present on the phase in question, and it is acceptable to override the blinder action and allow
the distance zones to trip according to the entire zone shape. The benefit is that the resistive
coverage for faults near to the IED location can be higher.
The undervoltage setting must be lower than the lowest phase-neutral voltage under heavy load flow
and depressed system voltage conditions. The typical maximum V< setting is 70% Vn.
3.1.13 Recommended Polarizing Settings

Cable applications
In line with LFZP123 or LFZR applications for cable feeders, use only minimum 20% (0.2) memory,
which results in minimum mho expansion. This keeps the protected line section well within the
expanded mho, thereby ensuring better accuracies and faster operating times for close-up faults.
Series compensated lines
Use a mho with maximum memory polarizing (setting = 5). The large memory content ensures correct
operation even with the negative reactance effects of the compensation capacitors seen either within
Zs, or within the line impedance.
Short lines
For lines shorter than 10 miles (16 km), or with an SIR higher than 15, use maximum memory
polarizing (setting = 5). This ensures sufficient characteristic expansion to cover fault arc resistance.
General line applications
Use any setting between 0.2 and 1.
3.1.14 Distance Elements Basic Scheme Setting

The Zone 1 time delay (tZ1) is generally set to zero, giving instantaneous operation.
The Zone 2 time delay (tZ2) is set to co-ordinate with Zone 1 fault clearance time for adjacent lines.
The total fault clearance time consists of the downstream Zone 1 operating time plus the associated
breaker operating time. Allowance must also be made for the Zone 2 elements to reset following
clearance of an adjacent line fault and also for a safety margin. A typical minimum Zone 2 time delay
is of the order of 200 ms.
The Zone 3 time delay (tZ3) is typically set with the same considerations made for the Zone 2 time
delay, except that the delay needs to co-ordinate with the downstream Zone 2 fault clearance. A
typical minimum Zone 3 operating time would be in the region of
400 ms.
The Zone 4 time delay (tZ4) needs to coordinate with any protection for adjacent lines in the IED’s
reverse direction.
Note (1): The MiCOMho P446 allows separate time delays to be applied to both phase and earth fault zones,
for example where earth fault delays are set longer to time grade with external ground/earth
overcurrent protection.
8-16 P446/EN/TM/E
Note (2): Any zone (“#”) which may reach through a power transformer reactance, and measure secondary
side faults within that impedance zone should have a small time delay applied. This is to avoid
tripping on the inrush current when energizing the transformer. As a general rule, if: Z# Reach setting
> 50% XT transformer reactance, set: tZ#  100 ms. Alternatively, the 2nd harmonic detector
that is available in the Programmable Scheme Logic may be used to block zones that may be at risk
of tripping on inrush current. Settings for the inrush detector are found in the SUPERVISION menu
column.
Figure 4 shows the typical application of the Basic scheme.
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
A Z B
Z
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Typical application
Relay A Relay B
Z1 TZ1 TZ1 Z1
Trip A Trip B
1 1
ZP ZP
TZP TZP
Z2 Z2
TZ2 TZ2
Z3 Z3
TZ3 TZ3
Z4 Z4
TZ4 TZ4
Note: All timers can be set instantaneous P1144ENb
Figure 4: Basic time stepped distance scheme
3.1.15 Power Swing Alarming and Blocking

The PSB technique used in the IED has the significant advantage that it is adaptive and requires no
user-set thresholds to detect swings faster than 0.5 Hz. The PSB relies on the delta techniques
internal to the IED, which automatically detect swings. During the power oscillations slower than 0.5
Hz the continuous ∆I phase current integral to the detection technique for swing conditions may fall
below the sensitive threshold of ∆I=0.05 In therefore may not operate. These slow swings usually
occur following sudden load changes or single pole tripping on the weaker systems where the
displacement of initial power transfer is not severe. The slow swings of up to 1 Hz are by its nature
recoverable swings but the swing impedance may stay longer inside the distance characteristics until
the oscillations are damped by the power system. Therefore to guarantee system stability during very
slow swings it is recommended to enable Slow Swing algorithm to complement the automatic setting
free detection algorithm.
Two concentric distance zones (Zone 7 and Zone 8) are used for slow swing detection.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-17
Z8
t
Z7
V1
Z1 
I1

R8 R 7 R7
R8
Z 7
Z 8
Figure 5: Slow Power Swing detection principle
Zone 7 and Zone 8 should be configured as follows:

1. Inner Zone 7 should encompass all distance zones to be blocked during power
swing condition (only phase-to-phase elements should be considered). Outer
Zone 8 should be set smaller than the minimum possible load impedance. The
security margin for both conditions should be at least 20%, also a margin of at
least 10% should be provided between R7 and R8:
R8 > 1.1*R7.
It is recommended then to set R7’ and R8’ equal to R7 and R8:
R7’ = -R7, R8’ = -R8.
Distance zones to be blocked

(ONLY Phase-to-Phase)
+jX
MAX Load
½ Rx Ph. Resistive
+R
Zone 7
Zone 8
Figure 6: Slow Power Swing settings – condition 1
8-18 P446/EN/TM/E
2. Inner Zone 7 should be set in excess of total impedance ZT , which include local
source impedance ZS , line impedance ZL and remote source impedance ZR . Only
positive sequence impedances should be considered. The security margin for this
condition should be at least 20%. The recommended margin between Z7 and Z8
settings is 10%:
Z8 = 1.1*Z7
It is recommended then to set Z7’ and Z8’ equal to Z7 and Z8:
Z7’ = -Z7, Z8’ = -Z8.
The angle Alpha should be set equal to the angle of the total impedance ZT :
   ZT
ZR
ZL
ZT   ZT
ZS
3. Setting PSB Timer ( t in Fig. …) can be calculated as follows:

(1   2 )  f nom
t  ,
f PS
where
angles 1 and  2 are defined in Figure 8
f nom is the nominal frequency,

f PS is the maximum Power Swing frequency to be taken into account.
Since any power swing with f PS  0.5 Hz can be detected by the setting-free delta
current algorithm, only power swings with f PS  0.5 Hz need to be considered for
Slow Power Swing detection. It is recommended to take f PS  1 Hz because this
value provides sufficient security margin.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-19
Zone 7 Zone 8
ZR
ZL
ZT
2 1
2
ZT
ZS
The user decides which zones are required to be blocked.

Two additional timers are available:
 The PSB Reset Delay is used to maintain the PSB status when I naturally is low during the
swing cycle (near the current maxima and minima in the swing envelope). A typical setting of
0.2s is used to seal-in the detection until I has chance to appear again.
 The PSB Unblock Dly is used to time the duration for which the swing is present. The intention
is to allow the distinction between a stable and an unstable swing. If after the timeout period the
swing has still not stabilized, the block for selected zones can be released (unblocking), giving
the opportunity to split the system. If no unblocking is required at the location of this IED, set to
maximum (10 s).
PSB should be disabled in distribution systems, where power swings do not normally occur.
3.1.16 Out of Step Protection

MiCOMho P446 provides an integrated Out of Step protection, therefore avoiding a need for a
separate stand alone Out of Step IEDs. Unlike the power swing detection, the Out of Step protection
requires settings and is completely independent from the setting free Power swing detection.
This section provides a discussion and a guidance of how to set the Out of Step protection.
Settings based on system studies must be applied when ‘Predictive OST’ operation mode is selected
as the high setting accuracy is needed to avoid premature system splitting in the case of severe power
oscillations that do not lead to pole slip conditions. For the ‘OST’ setting the same method may be
used but an exhaustive stability study may not be required as shown later that the total system
impedance ZT and system split points are adequate to set the IED for this situation.
The MiCOMho P446 Out of Step protection can operate as stand alone protection, so Distance
Protection may be completely disabled under the Configuration column.
3.1.17 Critical Stability Angle

What is the angle between two ends when a power system oscillation could be declared as a pole
slip?
8-20 P446/EN/TM/E
Consider the power angle curves as in Figure 9.
Curve 1
Area 2
F Area 1
Po A E G
Out-of-Step
D
Curve 2 Curve 3
C
B
q
o q0 q1 o q2 q3 o
0 90 180
Phase Angle Difference between Two Ends

Figure 9: Power transfer in relation to angle difference θ between 2 ends
The figure above represents power angle curves, with no AR being performed, as follows:
Curve 1 - Pre-fault system operation through parallel lines where transmitted power is Po
Curve 2 - Transmitted power significantly reduced during two-phase to earth fault
Curve 3 - New power curve when the parallel line is tripped (fault cleared)
It can be seen that at a fault instance, the operating point A moves to B, with a lower transfer level.
There is therefore a surplus of power P=AB at the sending end and the corresponding deficit at the
receiving end. The sending end machines start to speed up, and the receiving end machines to slow
down, so phase angle θ increases, and the operating point moves along curve 2 until the fault is
cleared, when the phase angle is θ1. The operating point now moves to point D on curve 3 which
represents one line in service. There is still a power surplus at the sending end, and deficit at the
receiving end, so the machines continue to drift apart and the operating point moves along curve 3. If,
at some point between E and G (point F) the machines are rotating at the same speed, the phase
angle will stop increasing. According to the Equal Area Criterion, this occurs when area 2 is equal to
area 1. The sending end will now start to slow down and receiving end to speed up. Therefore, the
phase angle starts to decrease and the operating point moves back towards E. As the operating point
passes E, the net sending end deficit again becomes a surplus and the receiving end surplus
becomes a deficit, so the sending end machines begin to speed up and the receiving end machines
begin to slow down. With no losses, the system operating point would continue to oscillate around
point E on curve 3, but in practice the oscillation is dumped, and the system eventually settles at
operating point E.
To resume, if area 1<area 2, the system will stay in synchronism. This swing is usually called a
recoverable power swing. If, on contrary, the system passes point G with a further increase in angle
difference between sending and receiving ends, the system drifts out of synchronism and becomes
P446/EN/TM/E 8-21
unstable. This will happen if the initial power transfer Po was set too high in Figure 9, so that the area
1 is greater than area 2. This power swing is not recoverable and is usually called out of step or out
of synchronism or pole slip condition. After this, only system separation and re-synchronizing of the
machines can restore normal system operation.
In Figure 9, the point G is shown at approximately 120° deg, but it is not true in all cases. If, for
example the pre-fault transmitted power (Po) was too high and if the fault clearance was slow, the
area 1 will be greater so for the system to recover the angle θ would be close to 90 deg. On contrarily,
if the pre-fault transmitted power Po was low and fault clearance fast, the area 1 will be small, so that
based on area comparison, the angle θ could go closer to 180 deg and the system will still remain
stable.
The actual angle difference at which system will become unstable could only be determined by a
particular system studies, but for the purpose of settings recommendation where ‘OST’ setting is
selected, the typical angle beyond which system will not recover is assumed to be 120 deg.
3.1.17.1 Setting Option Recommendation

The IED provides 4 different setting options:
1. Disabled
2. Predictive OST
3. OST
4. Predictive OST or OST
Set Option 1 on all lines except the line where tripping due to unrecoverable power oscillations is
required or for the system where power oscillations are not severe - mainly in well interconnected
systems operating with 3 phase tripping.
Setting Option 2 (and 4) is the best setting option from the system point of view, perhaps not being
widely used in the past. Some utilities prefer an early system split to minimize the angle shift between
ends and maximize the chances for the remaining two halves to stabilize as quickly as possible.
Special care must be taken when this method is applied to ensure that the actual circuit breaker
opening does not occur when the internal voltages at two ends are in anti phase. This is due to the
fact that most breakers are not designed to interrupt at double nominal voltage and any attempt to
break at that point would lead to flash over and possible circuit breaker damage. The fact is that
setting Option 2 (and 4) will be mainly applied do detect and trip fast power oscillations. When this is
coupled with a typical 2 cycle circuit breaker operating time, the two voltages angles may rapidly move
in opposite directions at the time of opening the circuit breaker. Therefore, if this setting option is
chosen, the above facts must be taken into account so that the actual CB opening must occur well
before the angle difference between two ends approaches 180 degrees. On that basis, accurate
settings have to be determined based on exhaustive system studies.
Setting Option 3 is the most commonly used approach. Once the Out of Step conditions are
detected, the OST command will split the system at pre-determined points. The slight disadvantages
of this method in comparison to Option 2 (and 4) is that the power oscillation will escalate further, thus
causing more difficulties for the split parts to remain stable but the advantage is that the timing of the
circuit breaker operation (‘tripping angle’) is easily controlled and the decision to split the system will
be correct even if errors were made in the system data and setting parameters. This extra security is
achieved by measuring and confirming the change of polarity of the resistive part of positive sequence
impedance on Zone 5 exit (reset).
Setting Option 4 provides 2 stages of Out of Step detection and tripping. If the power system
oscillation is very fast, the combination of ∆R and Delta t setting (as discussed below) must be set in
such a way that ‘Predictive OST’ operates. If however the oscillation is slower, the condition for the
‘Predictive OST’ will not be met and the ‘OST’ will operate later upon Z5 reset, providing that the
change in polarity of the resistive component was detected. This is to distinguish between a slower
non-recoverable oscillation and recoverable swings.
8-22 P446/EN/TM/E
3.1.17.2 Blinder Limits Determination

Consider the Out of Step characteristic versus angle θ between two ends.
+jX
Z6
Z5
Predictive Out of
ZR step trip
ZT 
ZL
 R
R6' R5' R5 R6
Out of step trip
ZS
Z5'
Z6'
Figure 10: Setting determination for the positive sequence resistive component R5
Firstly, determine the minimum inner resistive reach R5.

Figure 10 shows:
ZT 2
R5 min  ,
tan( 2)
Where ZT is a total system positive sequence impedance that equals to ZS + ZL + ZR, where ZS and
ZR are equivalent positive sequence impedances at the sending and receiving ends and ZL positive
sequence line impedance. ‘θ’ is an angle difference between the internal voltages at sending and
receiving ends beyond which no system recovery is possible.
The next step is to determine the maximum (limit value) for the outer resistive reach R6. It must be
insured that Point A in Figure 11 does not overlap with the load area for the worst assumed power
factor of 0.85 and the lowest possible ZT angle α.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-23
+jX
Z6
LOAD
ZT
 R
O 32  
R6' R6
Z6'
Figure 11: R6MAX determination
β = 32 + 90 – α
Z load min = OA
R6MAX < Zload min x cos β
Where:
 Zload min is the minimum load impedance radius calculated above which already has built in
sufficient margin
 32 deg is the load angle that corresponds to the lower power factor of 0.85
 ‘α’ is the load blinder angle that matches ZT angle
The setting of negative resistance R5’ should equal the R5 to accommodate the ‘load import’
condition. Starting from the limit values R5MIN and R6MAX the actual R5 and R6 (including the
corresponding R5’ and R6’) reaches will be set in conjunction with the ‘Delta t’ setting below.
8-24 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: R6MAX reach must be greater than the maximum resistive reach of any distance zone to ensure
correct initiation of the 25 ms and ‘Delta t’ timers. However, the R5MIN reach could be set below the
distance maximum resistive reach (inside the distance characteristic) if an extensive resistive
coverage is required, meaning that Out of Step protection does not pose a restriction to the quad
applications.
Setting of reactance lines Z5 and Z6 depends on how far from the IED location the power oscillations
are to be detected. Normally, there is only one point where the system is to be initially split and that
point will be determined by system studies. For that reason, the Out of Step protection must be
enabled at that location and disabled on all others. To detect the Out of step conditions, the Z5’-Z5
and Z6’-Z6 setting must be set to comfortably encompass the total system impedance ZT, as shown in
Figure 10. A typical setting could be:
Z5 = Z5’ = 1/2 x 2 ZT = ZT
The Z6 and Z6’ setting is not of great importance and could be set to Z6 = Z6’ = 1.1 x Z5
3.1.17.3 Delta t, R5 and R6 Setting Determination

The R5MIN and R6MAX settings determined above are only limit values, the actual R5 and R6 need to
be determine in relation to the Delta t’ timer.
Predictive OST setting:

For the ‘Predictive OST’ setting it is important to:
 Set R6 (and R6’) equal to R6MAX

 Set R5 as close as practical to R6MAX
The aim of pushing the R5 setting to the right is to detect the fast oscillation as soon as possible to
gain sufficient time to operate the breaker before the two source voltages are in opposite direction.
The only restriction would be the limitation of the Delta t minimum time delay of 30 ms and the speed
of oscillation. Set Delta t so that the following condition is satisfied:
‘Delta t’ does not expire after positive sequence impedance has passed the R6-R5 region
For this setting, knowledge of the accurate rate of change of swing impedance when crossing the R6-
R5 region is essential and therefore must be based on system studies.
Assumption that the rate of change of the positive sequence impedance during crossing the R6-R5
region is average rate of change for the whole swing cycle is wrong and could easily lead to incorrect
‘Predictive OST’ operation.
Note: For the fault, the R6-R5 region will be passed faster than 25 ms, therefore even very fast oscillations
of 7 Hz will not be mistaken with the fault condition and Predictive OST will not operate.
OST setting:
For the OST setting option the precise setting of blinders and Delta t is not necessary. This is based
on the fact that:
The wider the ∆R region and the shorter the ∆t setting, any oscillation will be successfully detected.
The only condition is that the fault impedance must pass through the ∆R region faster than ∆t setting.
Therefore, for the OST setting assume that θ = 120° and set:
 R5 = R5’ = R5MIN = ZT/3.46

 R6 = R6’ = R6MAX
 Delta t = 30 ms
P446/EN/TM/E 8-25
The point is that Delta t always expires, therefore the above setting will secure the detection of a wide
range of oscillations, starting from very slow oscillations caused by recoverable swings up to the
fastest oscillation of 7Hz. It should be noted that any fault impedance will pass the R6-R5 region
faster than the minimum settable Delta t time of
30 ms.
Predictive OST or OST setting:

As per Predictive OST above.
3.1.17.4 Tost (Trip Delay) Setting

Tost must be set zero for setting Option 2 and 4 above.
For setting Option 3, Tost should normally be set to zero. It is only the case if a user wants to operate
breaker at the angle closer to 360 degrees (when voltages are in phase) when time delay could be
applied.
3.1.17.5 Blinder Angle Setting

Set blinders angle ‘α’ same as total system impedance ZT angle.
3.1.17.6 Out of Step Operation on Series Compensated Lines

The maximum phase currents during out of step condition rarely exceed 2xIn RMS, which corresponds
to the minimum swing impedance passing through Zone 1. Since the Metal-Oxide Varistors (MOV)
bypass level is normally set between 2-3 In, they will not operate during the power oscillations and
therefore in majority of applications will not make any impact on Out of Step operation.
In the worst case, power oscillations are triggered on fault clearance on the parallel line.
Approximately twice the load current starts flowing through the remaining circuit, increases further and
eventually exceeds the MOV threshold. The R6-R5 region is usually set far from Zone 1, therefore it is
unlikely that the positive sequence impedance’s trajectory may traverse in and out of the set ∆R region
due to MOVs operation. If MOVs do operate within the ∆R region (see Figure 12), a timer, that has
been initiated, may reset and be reinitiated or the impedance may remain within ∆R region for slightly
longer. This is due to the fact that resistive and capacitive components will be added to the measured
impedance during MOV operation as per Figure 12. This effect may have an impact on the ‘Delta t’
measurement if ‘Predictive OST’ setting is used. If the recommendation to set R5MIN as close as
practically possible to the R6MAX is followed, it is unlikely that the swing currents will exceed MOV
threshold within the ∆R region. If a study shows that the MOVs could operate within the ∆R region, it
is recommended to set ‘Predictive OST and OST’ operating mode to cover all eventualities.
8-26 P446/EN/TM/E
+jX
Z6
Z5
∆R
ZL
MOV’s operation
R
R6' R5' R5 R6
Z5'
Z6'
P1977Ena
Figure 12: Example of timer reset due to MOVs operation
Note: If the OST setting is chosen, the timer when triggered, will eventually expire as the power
oscillations progress, therefore MOV operation will not have any impact on Out of Step operation.
3.2 Switch on to Fault (SOTF) and Trip on Reclose (TOR)
3.2.1 Switch onto Fault Mode

To ensure fast isolation of faults (for example a closed three phase earth/grounding switch) upon
energization, it is recommended this feature is enabled with appropriate zones and/or Current No Volt
(CNV) level detectors, depend on utility practices.
When busbar VTs are used, Pole Dead signal will not be produced and a user has to connect circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts for correct operation. This is not necessary if the SOTF is activated by an
external pulse.
SOTF delay The time chosen should be longer than the slowest delayed-auto-
reclose dead time, but shorter than the time in which the system
operator might re-energize a circuit once it had opened/tripped.
110 seconds is recommended as a typical setting.
SOTF pulse Typically this could be set to at 500 ms. This time is enough to
establish completely the voltage memory of distance protection.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-27
TOC reset delay 500 ms is recommended as a typical setting (chosen to be in

excess of the 16 cycles length of memory polarizing, allowing full
memory charging before normal protection resumes).
3.2.2 Trip on Reclose Mode

To ensure fast isolation of all persistent faults following the circuit breaker reclosure. It is
recommended this feature is enabled with appropriate zones selected and/or Current No Volt (CNV)
level detectors.
TOC Delay The TOR is activated after TOC Delay has expired. The setting
must not exceed the minimum AR Dead Time setting to make sure
that the TOR is active immediately on reclose command.
TOC reset delay 500 ms is recommended as a typical setting (as per SOTF).
3.3 Directional Function - Setup of DEF Elements
3.3.1 DEF Zero Sequence Polarization

In practice, the typical zero sequence voltage on a healthy system can be as high as 1% (i.e.: 3%
residual), and the VT error could be 1% per phase. A VNpol Set setting between 1% and 4%.Vn is
typical, to avoid spurious detection on standing signals. The residual voltage measurement provided
in the Measurements 1 column of the menu may assist in determining the required threshold setting
during commissioning, as this will indicate the level of standing residual voltage present. The Virtual
Current Polarizing feature will create a VNpol which is always large, regardless of whether actual VN
is present.
With DEF, the residual current under fault conditions lies at an angle lagging the polarizing voltage.
Hence, negative characteristic angle settings are required for DEF applications. This is set in cell
‘DEF Char Angle' in the relevant earth fault menu.
The following angle settings are recommended for a residual voltage polarized IED:-
 Distribution systems (solidly earthed)  -45°

 Transmissions systems (solidly earthed)  -60°
If Virtual I Pol is set to Disabled it prevents checking of the faulted phase and subsequent removal of
the faulted phase voltage. The DEF protection is then polarized by the residual voltage only.
3.3.2 DEF Negative Sequence Polarization

For negative sequence polarization, the RCA settings must be based on the angle of the upstream
negative phase sequence source impedance. A typical setting is -60o.
3.3.3 General Setting Guidelines for DEF (Directional Ground Overcurrent)
3.3.3.1 DEF Forward Threshold

This setting determines the current sensitivity (trip sensitivity) of the DEF aided scheme. This setting
must be set higher than any standing residual current unbalance. A typical setting will be between 10
and 20% In.
3.3.3.2 DEF Reverse Threshold

This setting determines the current sensitivity for the reverse earth fault. The setting must always be
below the DEF forward threshold for correct operation of Blocking scheme and to provide stability for
current reversal in parallel line applications. The recommended setting is 2/3 of DEF forward setting.
8-28 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: This setting has to be above the maximum steady state residual current unbalance.
3.3.4 Delta Directional Comparison - Principle and Setup

For delta directional decisions, the RCA settings must be based on the average source + line
impedance angle for a fault anywhere internal or external to the line. Typically, the Delta Char Angle
is set to 60o, as it is not essential for this setting to be precise. When a fault occurs, the delta current
will never be close to the characteristic boundary, so an approximate setting is good enough.
3.3.5 Delta Directional Comparison - Selection of I and V Threshold

For best performance, it is suggested that the delta I Fwd current threshold is set at 10 to 20% In.
This will ensure detection of all fault types, provided that the fault current contribution to an earth fault
at the remote end of the line will generate at least this amount of delta. Selection of the correct Delta V
Forward setting is achieved with reference to Table 1 (SIR = Source to Line impedance ratio):
Lowest SIR ratio of the system Recommended V Fwd (as a % of Vn)
 0.3 4%
 0.5 6%
1 9%
2 13%
3 15%
5 17%
10 19%
25 – 60 21%
Table 1: Delta V Forward settings
For the reverse fault detectors, these must be set more sensitively, as they are used to invoke the
blocking and current reversal guard elements. It is suggested that all reverse detectors are set at 66
to 80% of the setting of the forward detector, typically:
Delta V Rev = Delta V Fwd x 0.66
Delta I Rev = Delta I Fwd x 0.66
This setting philosophy is in-accordance with the well-proven Alstom Grid LFDC IED.
Note: Deltas by their nature are present only for 2 cycles on fault inception. If any distance elements are
enabled, these will automatically allow the delta forward or reverse decisions to seal-in, until such
time as the fault is cleared from the system. Therefore as a minimum, some distance zone(s) must
be enabled in the DISTANCE SETUP column as fault detectors. It does not matter what time delay
is applied for the zone(s). This can either be the typical distance delay for that zone or set to
Disabled in the SCHEME LOGIC column, if no distance tripping is required. As a minimum, Zone 3
must be enabled, with a reverse reach such as to allow seal-in of Delta Rev, and a forward reach to
allow seal-in of Delta Fwd.
The reaches applicable would be:

Zone 3 Forward Set at least as long as a conventional Zone 2 (120-150% of
the protected line)
Zone 3 Reverse Set at least as long as a conventional Zone 4, or
supplement by assigning Zone 4 if a large reverse reach is
not preferred for Zone 3.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-29
A mho characteristic is generally advised in such starter applications, although quadrilaterals are
acceptable. As the mho starter is likely to have a large radius, applying the Load Blinder is strongly
advised.
3.4 Channel Aided Schemes

The MiCOMho P446 has two sets of aided channel (“pilot”) schemes, which can be operated in
parallel.
Aided Scheme 1 Can be keyed by distance, DEF, or delta directional comparison.
Aided Scheme 2 Can be keyed by distance, DEF, or delta directional comparison.
When schemes share the same channel, the same generic scheme type must be applied. This
means ALL Permissive Overreach, or ALL Blocking.
3.4.1 Distance Scheme PUR - Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip

This scheme is similar to that used in the LFZP Optimho, SHNB Micromho, LFZR, and MiCOM P44x
(note 1) distance IEDs. (Note 1: matches PUP Z2 mode in P441/442/444). It allows an instantaneous Z2
trip on receipt of the signal from the remote end protection.
Send logic: Zone 1
The Dist dly trip time setting should be set to Zero, for fast fault clearance.
3.4.2 Distance Scheme POR - Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

distance IEDs (matches POP Z2 mode in P441/442/444, and POR2 scheme in LFZP/LFZR).
Note: The POR scheme also uses the reverse looking Zone 4 of the IED as a reverse fault detector. This
is used in the current reversal logic and in the optional weak infeed echo feature.
Send logic: Zone 2

The Dist dly trip time setting should be set to Zero, for fast fault clearance.
3.4.3 Permissive Overreach Trip Reinforcement

For any trip command at the local end, the IED’s POR logic sends a channel signal to the remote
end(s). This maximizes the chances for the fault to be isolated at all ends. The send signal can be
configured using Any Trip or AnyZ1/Aided Trip or none, depending on local practice. It is sent on
both channels, Ch1 and Ch2, if more than one channel is in use. This feature is termed permissive
trip reinforcement and ensures that synchronous tripping occurs at all line ends.
3.4.4 Permissive Overreach Scheme Weak Infeed Features

Where weak infeed tripping is employed, a typical voltage setting is 70% of rated phase-neutral
voltage. Weak infeed tripping is time delayed according to the WI Trip Delay value, usually set at
60 ms.
3.4.5 Distance Scheme Blocking

To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping, “Dist dly”, must be
used, as follows:
8-30 P446/EN/TM/E
Recommended Dly setting = Max. Signalling channel operating time + 1 power frequency
cycle.
(note 3) distance IEDs. (Note 3: matches BOP Z2 mode in P441/442/444).
Send logic: Reverse Zone 4
Trip logic: Zone 2, plus Channel NOT Received, delayed by Tp
Note: Two variants of a Blocking scheme are provided, Blocking 1 and Blocking 2. Both schemes operate
identically, except that the reversal guard timer location in the logic changes. Blocking 2 may
sometimes allow faster unblocking when a fault evolves from external to internal, and hence a faster
trip.
3.4.6 Permissive Overreach Schemes Current Reversal Guard

The recommended setting is:
tREVERSAL GUARD = Maximum signalling channel reset time + 35 ms.
3.4.7 Blocking Scheme Current Reversal Guard

The recommended setting is:
 Where Duplex signalling channels are used:

tREVERSAL GUARD = Maximum signalling channel operating time + 20 ms.
 Where Simplex signalling channels are used:

tREVERSAL GUARD = Maximum signalling channel operating time - minimum
signalling channel reset time + 20 ms.
3.4.8 Aided DEF Earth Fault Scheme - Permissive Overreach

This POR scheme is similar to that used in all other Alstom Grid IEDs.
Send logic: IN> Forward pickup
Permissive trip logic: IN> Forward plus Channel Received
Note: The Time Delay for a permissive scheme aided trip would normally be set to zero.
3.4.9 Aided DEF Earth Fault Scheme - Blocking

This scheme is similar to that used in all other Alstom Grid IEDs.
Send logic: DEF Reverse
Trip logic: IN> Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, with a small set delay
To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping must be used. The
recommended Time Delay setting = max. Signalling channel operating time +20 ms.
3.4.10 Delta Scheme POR - Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip

This scheme is similar to that used in the LFDC IED.
Send logic:  Fault Forward
P446/EN/TM/E 8-31
Permissive trip logic:  Fault Forward plus Channel Received.

The Delta Delay trip time setting should be set to zero, for fast fault clearance.
3.4.11 Delta Blocking Scheme

This scheme is similar to that used in the LFDC IED.
Send logic:  Fault Reverse
Trip logic:  Fault Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, delayed by Tp.
Recommended Dly setting = Max. signalling channel operating time + 6 ms.
3.4.12 Delta Schemes Current Reversal Guard Timer

Similarly to the distance protection schemes, current reversals during fault clearance on an adjacent
parallel line need to be treated with care. To prevent misoperation (mal-tripping) of the protection on
the unfaulted line, a current reversal guard timer must be set. The recommended setting for both POR
and BLOCKING schemes is:
tREVERSAL GUARD = Maximum signalling channel reset time + 35 ms
3.5 Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL)

For circuits with load tapped off the protected line, care must be taken in setting the loss of load
feature to ensure that the I< level detector setting is above the tapped load current. When selected,
the loss of load feature operates in conjunction with the main distance scheme that is selected. In this
way it provides high speed clearance for end zone faults when the Basic scheme is selected or, with
permissive signal aided tripping schemes, it provides high speed back-up clearance for end zone
faults if the channel fails.
3.6 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

Settings for the time delayed overcurrent element should be selected to ensure discrimination with
surrounding protection. Setting examples for phase fault overcurrent protection can be found in the
Network Protection and Automation Guide (NPAG), a comprehensive reference available from Alstom
Grid.
Caution The IEEE C.37.112 standard for IDMT curves permits some freedom to
manufacturers at which Time Dial (TD) value the reference curve applies.
Rather than pick a mid-range value, for the MiCOMho P446 the reference curve
norm applies at a time dial of 1. The time dial is merely a multiplier on the
reference curve to achieve the desired tripping time. Take care when grading
with other suppliers' IEDs which may take TD = 5, or TD = 7 as a mid-range
value to define the IDMT curve. The equivalent MiCOMho P446 setting to match
those IEDs is achieved by dividing the imported setting by 5 or 7.
3.6.1 Directional Overcurrent Characteristic Angle Settings

The IED uses a 90° connection angle for the directional overcurrent elements. The IED characteristic
angles in this case are nominally set to:
 +30° Plain feeders, zero sequence source behind IED

 +45° Transformer feeder, zero sequence source in front of IED
8-32 P446/EN/TM/E
Although it is possible to set the RCA to exactly match the system fault angle, it is recommended the
above figures are followed, as these settings have been shown to provide satisfactory performance
and stability under a wide range of system conditions.
3.7 Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in
excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which
may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure.
3.7.1 Single Time Constant Characteristic

The current setting is calculated as:
Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio.
Typical time constant values are given in the following table. The IED setting, ‘Time Constant 1’, is in
minutes.
Time constant  (minutes) Limits
Air-core reactors 40
Capacitor banks 10
Overhead lines 10 Cross section  100 mm2 Cu or 150 mm2 Al
Cables 60 - 90 Typical, at 66 kV and above
Busbars 60
Table 2: Single Time Constant Values
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip
threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Alarm’ = 70% of thermal capacity.
3.7.2 Dual Time Constant Characteristic

The current setting is calculated as:
Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the transformer / CT ratio.
Typical time constants:
1 (minutes) 2 (minutes) Limits
Oil-filled transformer 5 120 Rating 400 - 1600 kVA
Table 3: Dual Time Constant Values
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip
threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Alarm’ = 70% of thermal capacity.
Note: The thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be
made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-33
3.8 Earth Fault (Ground Overcurrent) and Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) Protection
Caution The IEEE C.37.112 standard for IDMT curves permits some freedom to
manufacturers at which Time Dial (TD) value the reference curve applies.
Rather than pick a mid-range value, for the MiCOMho P446 the reference curve
norm applies at a time dial of 1. The time dial is merely a multiplier on the
reference curve to achieve the desired tripping time. Take care when grading
with other suppliers' IEDs which may take TD = 5,or TD = 7 as a mid-range value
to define the IDMT curve. The equivalent MiCOMho P446 setting to match those
IEDs is achieved by dividing the imported setting by 5 or 7.
3.8.1 Directional Earth Fault Protection
3.8.1.1 Residual Voltage Polarization

It is possible that small levels of residual voltage will be present under normal system conditions due
to system imbalances, VT inaccuracies, IED tolerances etc. Hence, the IED includes a user settable
threshold (N>VNPol Set) which must be exceeded in order for the DEF function to be operational. In
practice, the typical zero sequence voltage on a healthy system can be as high as 1% (i.e.: 3%
residual), and the VT error could be 1% per phase. A setting between 1% and 4% is typical. The
residual voltage measurement provided in the Measurements 1 column of the menu may assist in
determining the required threshold setting during commissioning, as this will indicate the level of
standing residual voltage present.
3.8.1.2 General Setting Guidelines for Directional Earth Fault (Ground Overcurrent) Protection
When setting the IED characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional earth fault element, a positive
angle setting was specified. This was due to the fact that the quadrature polarizing voltage lagged the
nominal phase current by 90°; i.e. the position of the current under fault conditions was leading he
polarizing voltage and hence a positive RCA was required. With directional earth fault DEF, the
residual current under fault conditions lies at an angle lagging the polarizing voltage. Hence, negative
RCA settings are required for DEF applications. This is set in cell 'I>N’ in the relevant earth fault
menu.
The following angle settings are recommended for a residual voltage polarized IED:-
 Distribution systems (solidly earthed) -45°

 Transmissions systems (solidly earthed) -60°
For negative sequence polarization, the RCA settings must be based on the angle of the upstream
negative phase sequence source impedance.
3.8.2 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Element (SEF)

SEF would normally be fed from a core balance current transformer (CBCT) mounted around the three
phases of the feeder cable. However, care must be taken in the positioning of the CT with respect to
the earthing of the cable sheath. See Figure 13.
8-34 P446/EN/TM/E
Cable gland
Cable box
Cable gland/sheath SEF

earth connection
Incorrect
No operation
SEF
Correct
Operation
SEF
P0112ENa
Figure 13: Positioning of core balance current transformers
Figure 13 shows that if the cable sheath is terminated at the cable gland and earthed directly at that
point, a cable fault (from phase to sheath) will not result in any unbalance current in the core balance
CT. Hence, prior to earthing, the connection must be brought back through the CBCT and earthed on
the feeder side. This then ensures correct IED operation during earth fault conditions.
3.8.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

Earth faults occurring on a transformer winding or terminal may be of limited magnitude, either due to
the impedance present in the earth path or by the percentage of transformer winding that is involved in
the fault. It is common to apply standby earth fault protection fed from a single CT in the transformer
earth connection - this provides time-delayed protection for a transformer winding or terminal fault. In
general, particularly as the size of the transformer increases, it becomes unacceptable to rely on time
delayed protection to clear winding or terminal faults as this would lead to an increased amount of
damage to the transformer.
A common requirement is therefore to provide instantaneous phase and earth fault protection.
Applying differential protection across the transformer may fulfill these requirements. However, an
earth fault occurring on the LV winding, particularly if it is of a limited level, may not be detected by the
differential IED, as it is only measuring the corresponding HV current. Therefore, instantaneous
protection that is restricted to operating for transformer earth faults only is applied. This is referred to
as restricted earth fault protection (REF).
P446/EN/TM/E 8-35
When applying differential protection such as REF, some suitable means must be employed to give
the protection stability under external fault conditions, therefore ensuring that IED operation only
occurs for faults on the transformer winding / connections.
Two methods are commonly used; bias or high impedance. The biasing technique operates by
measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the IED sensitivity accordingly. The high
impedance technique ensures that the IED circuit is of sufficiently high impedance so the differential
voltage that may occur under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current
through the IED.
The REF protection in the IED can be configured to operate as high impedance element. The
following sections describe the application of the IED for the high impedance element.
Note: The high impedance REF element of the IED shares the same CT input as the SEF protection.
Hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
3.8.3.1 Setting Guidelines for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (REF)
From the SEF/REF options cell, Hi Z REF must be selected to enable this protection. The only setting
cell then visible is REF>s, which may be programmed with the required differential current setting.
This would typically be set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault
level for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for a solidly earthed
system.
The primary operating current (op) is a function of the current transformer ratio, the IED operating
current (REF>s1), the number of current transformers in parallel with an IED element (n) and the
magnetizing current of each current transformer (e) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can
be expressed in three ways:
To determine the maximum current transformer magnetizing current to achieve a specific primary
operating current with a particular IED operating current:
1  op 
e < x - REF > s 
n  CT ratio 
 
To determine the minimum IED current setting to achieve a specific primary operating current with a
given current transformer magnetizing current.
 op 
[REF > s] <  - ne 
 CT ratio 
 
3.8.3.2 Use of METROSIL Non-Linear Resistors

Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under internal fault
conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers, IED and interconnecting
leads, which are normally able to withstand 3000 V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that can be produced for
an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an internal fault will be a function of the current
transformer kneepoint voltage and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault
if current transformer saturation did not occur.
Vp = 2 2Vk ( Vf - Vk )
Vf = 'f (Rct + 2RL + RST)
8-36 P446/EN/TM/E
Where: Vp = Peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault

conditions
Vk = Current transformer kneepoint voltage
Vf = Maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation
did not occur
'f = Maximum internal secondary fault current
Rct = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Maximum lead burden from current transformer to IED
RST = Relay stabilizing resistor
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000 V peak, metrosils should be applied. They
are connected across the IED circuit and shunt the secondary current output of the current transformer
from the IED to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating characteristics
follow the expression:
V = C0.25
Where: V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor
(metrosil)
C = Constant of the non-linear resistor (metrosil)
I = Instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor
(metrosil)
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be approximately 0.52 x
the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows:
 Vs (rms) x 2  4
(rms) = 0.52  
 C 
Where: Vs(rms)= rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the
metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the metrosil is not sinusoidal but appreciably
distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (metrosil), its characteristic should be such that it
complies with the following requirements:
 At the IED voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) current should be as low as
possible, but no greater than approximately 30 mA rms for 1 A current transformers and
approximately 100 mA rms for 5 A current transformers.
 At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) should limit the voltage to
1500 V rms or 2120 V peak for 0.25 second. At higher IED voltage settings, it is not always
possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, so higher fault voltages may have to be
tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types required, depending on IED current rating, REF
voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for IEDs with a 1 Amp CT

The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:
 At the IED voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30 mA rms.
 At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to
1500 V rms if possible.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-37
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1 Amp CTs are as shown in the following table:
Nominal
Relay voltage setting Recommended Metrosil type
characteristic
C  Single pole relay Triple pole relay
Up to 125 V rms 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
450 900 0.25 0.25
125 to 300 V rms 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195
Table 4: Recommended Metrosil type for use with 1 Amp CTs
Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless otherwise
specified by the customer.
Metrosil units for IEDs with a 5 amp CT

These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:
 At the IED voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100 mA rms (the actual
maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description.
 At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to
1500 V rms for 0.25 secs. At the higher IED settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage
to 1500 V rms so higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
 The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole relays are
shown in the following table:
Secondary
internal fault Recommended Metrosil type
current
Relay voltage setting
Amps rms Up to 200 V rms 250 V rms 275 V rms 300 V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223
50 A C = 540/640 C = 670/800 C = 670/800 C = 740/870*
35 mA rms 40 mA rms 50 mA rms 50 mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196
100 A C = 470/540 C = 570/670 C = 570/670 C = 620/740*
70 mA rms 75 mA rms 100 mA rms 100 mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1219 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222
150 A C = 430/500 C = 520/620 C = 570/670** C = 620/740***
100 mA rms 100 mA rms 100 mA rms 100 mA rm
Note: *2400 V peak **2200 V peak ***2600 V peak
Table 5: Recommended Metrosil type for use with 5Amp CTs
In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact Alstom Grid for detailed
applications.
8-38 P446/EN/TM/E
Notes: The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied for use with triple pole
relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically
insulated from each other. To order these units please specify Triple pole Metrosil type, followed
by the single pole type reference.
Metrosil units for higher IED voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied if required.
To express the protection primary operating current for a particular IED operating current and with a
particular level of magnetizing current.
op = (CT ratio) x (REF > s + nc)
To achieve the required primary operating current with the current transformers that are used, a
current setting (REF>s) must be selected for the high impedance element, as detailed in expression
(ii) above. The setting of the stabilizing resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner,
where the setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the IED current setting
(REF>s).
Vs F (RCT + 2RL)
Rst = =
REF>s REF > s
Note: The above formula assumes negligible IED burden.
The stabilizing resistor that can be supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum declared
resistance.
3.9 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (NPS)

The following section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied
in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection to alleviate some less common
application difficulties:
 Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-
phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate.
 In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault IED due to the
system configuration. For example, an earth fault IED applied on the delta side of a Dy (delta-
wye) transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star (wye) side. However, negative
sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition,
irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore a negative phase sequence overcurrent
element may be employed to provide time-delayed back-up protection for any uncleared
asymmetrical faults downstream.
 It may be required to simply alarm for the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the
system. Operators may then investigate the cause of the unbalance.
3.9.1 Negative Phase Sequence Current Threshold, '2> Current Set'

The current pick-up threshold must be set higher than the negative phase sequence current due to the
maximum normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set practically at the commissioning
stage, making use of the IED measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence
current, and setting at least 20% above this figure.
Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric
faults, a precise threshold setting would have to be based upon an individual fault analysis for that
particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection,
P446/EN/TM/E 8-39
the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase
sequence fault current contribution to a specific remote fault condition.
3.9.2 Time Delay for the NPS Overcurrent Element, ‘2> Time Delay’
As stated above, correct setting of the time delay for this function is vital. It should also be noted that
this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide
an alarm. Hence, in practice, it would be associated with a long time delay.
It must be ensured that the time delay is set greater than the operating time of any other protective
device (at minimum fault level) on the system which may respond to unbalanced faults.
3.9.3 Directionalizing the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element

If negative phase sequence current flows in either direction through an IED location, such as parallel
lines, use directional control of the element. Directionality is achieved by comparing the angle
between the negative phase sequence voltage and the negative phase sequence current. The
element can be selected to operate in either the forward or reverse direction. A suitable IED
characteristic angle setting (2> Char Angle) is chosen to provide optimum performance. This setting
should be set equal to the phase angle of the negative sequence current with respect to the inverted
negative sequence voltage (– V2), to be at the centre of the directional characteristic.
The angle that occurs between V2 and 2 under fault conditions is directly dependent upon the
negative sequence source impedance of the system. However, typical settings for the element are as
follows;
 For a transmission system the RCA should be set equal to -60°

 For a distribution system the RCA should be set equal to -45°
For the negative phase sequence directional elements to operate, the IED must detect a polarizing
voltage above a minimum threshold, 2> V2pol Set. This must be set in excess of any steady state
negative phase sequence voltage. This may be determined during the commissioning stage by
viewing the negative phase sequence measurements in the IED.
3.10 Undervoltage Protection

In the majority of applications, undervoltage protection is not required to operate during system earth
fault conditions. If this is the case, the element should be selected in the menu to operate from a
phase to phase voltage measurement, as this quantity is less affected by single phase voltage
depressions due to earth faults. The measuring mode (ph-N or ph-ph) and operating mode (single
phase or 3 phase) for both stages are independently settable.
The voltage threshold setting for the undervoltage protection should be set at some value below the
voltage excursions which may be expected under normal system operating conditions. This threshold
is dependent upon the system in question but typical healthy system voltage excursions may be in the
order of -10% of nominal value.
Similar comments apply with regard to a time setting for this element, i.e. the required time delay is
dependent upon the time for which the system is able to withstand a depressed voltage.
3.11 Overvoltage Protection

The inclusion of the two stages and their respective operating characteristics allows for several
possible applications;
 Use of the IDMT characteristic gives the option of a longer time delay if the overvoltage
condition is only slight but results in a fast trip for a severe overvoltage. As the voltage settings
for both of the stages are independent, the second stage could then be set lower than the first
to provide a time delayed alarm stage if required.
8-40 P446/EN/TM/E
 Alternatively, if preferred, both stages could be set to definite time and configured to provide the
required alarm and trip stages.
 If only one stage of overvoltage protection is required, or if the element is required to provide an
alarm only, the remaining stage can be disabled in the IED menu.
This type of protection must be coordinated with any other overvoltage IEDs at other locations on the
system. This should be carried out in a similar manner to that used for grading current operated
devices. The measuring mode (ph-N or ph-ph) and operating mode (single phase or 3 phase) for both
stages are independently settable.
3.12 Compensated Overvoltage Protection

Temporary overvoltages in the order of seconds (even minutes) which may originate from switching or
load rejection may damage primary plant equipment. In particular, this type of overvoltage protection
is applied to protect long transmission lines against Ferranti effect overvoltages, where the
transmission line is energized from one end only. The following graph shows the ferranti overvoltages
calculated for a 345 kV and 765 kV transmission line for different line lengths based on the formulae in
the Operation chapter.
Figure 14: Calculated Ferranti voltage rise on 345 kV and 765 kV lines
The two stage compensated overvoltage element can be applied as alarming or trip elements. Both
stages’ time delays should be set not to pick-up for transient overvoltages in the system with a typical
time delays of 1-2 seconds upwards being adequate for most applications. In the example above for a
345 kV transmission line of 400 km line length, the alarm threshold (stage 1) can be set to 105% and
the trip threshold set to 110% for example.
3.13 Residual Overvoltage (Neutral Displacement) Protection

On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to earth voltages is
nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors at 120° to one another. However,
when an earth fault occurs on the primary system this balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is
produced.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-41
Note: This condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth which is commonly referred
to as neutral voltage displacement or NVD.
Figure 15 and Figure 16 show the residual voltages that are produced during earth fault conditions
occurring on a solid and impedance earthed power system respectively.
E S R F
ZS ZL
A-G
VA
VA
VC VB VC VB VC VB
VA VRES
VA VRES
VB VB VB
VC VC VC
Residual voltage at R (relay point) is dependant upon Z S / Z L ratio.

Z S0
VRES = x3E
2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0
P0117ENa
Figure 15: Residual voltage, solidly earthed system
Figure 15 shows the residual voltage measured by a IED for an earth fault on a solidly earthed system
is solely dependent upon the ratio of source impedance behind the IED to line impedance in front of
the IED, up to the point of fault. For a remote fault, the Zs/Zl ratio will be small, resulting in a
correspondingly small residual voltage. Depending on the setting, such an IED would only operate for
faults up to a certain distance along the system. The value of residual voltage generated for an earth
fault condition is given by the following general formula.
8-42 P446/EN/TM/E
E S R F
ZS ZL
N
ZE A-G
VA - G
S VA - G
G,F R G,F
G,F
VC - G VC - G
VC - G
VB - G VB - G VB - G
VRES VRES VRES

VB - G VB - G VB - G
VA - G VA - G
VC - G VC - G VC - G
Z S0 + 3ZE
VRES = x3E
2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0 + 3ZE
P0118ENa
Figure 16: Residual voltage, resistance earthed system
Figure 16 shows that a resistance earthed system will always generate a relatively large degree of
residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance now includes the earthing impedance. It
follows then, that the residual voltage generated by an earth fault on an insulated system will be the
highest possible value (3 x phase-neutral voltage), as the zero sequence source impedance is infinite.
The detection of a residual overvoltage condition is an alternative means of earth fault detection,
which does not require any measurement of zero sequence current. This may be particularly
advantageous at a tee terminal where the infeed is from a delta winding of a transformer (and the
delta acts as a zero sequence current trap).
Note: Where residual overvoltage protection is applied, such a voltage will be generated for a fault
occurring anywhere on that section of the system and hence the NVD protection must coordinate
with other earth/earth fault protection.

The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent on the magnitude of residual voltage that is
expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent on the method of system
earthing employed and may be calculated by using the formulae previously given in Figure 15 and
Figure 16. Ensure the IED is set above any standing level of residual voltage present on the system.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-43
Note: IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first stage of NVD in order that elements located at
various points on the system may be time graded with one another.
3.14 Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (CBF)
3.14.1 Breaker Fail Timer Settings

Typical timer settings to use are as follows:
Typical delay for 2 ½ cycle circuit
CB fail reset mechanism tBF time delay
breaker
CB interrupting time + element reset time
Initiating element reset 50 + 45 + 10 + 50 = 155 ms
(max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin
CB auxiliary contacts opening/closing time
CB open 50 + 10 + 50 = 110 ms
(max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin
CB interrupting time + undercurrent
Undercurrent elements 50 + 25 + 50 = 125 ms
element (max.) + safety margin
Table 6: Breaker fail timer settings
Note: All CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements. Where element reset or
CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting should still be used if this proves to be the
worst case.
The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2½ cycle circuit breaker.
Note: Where auxiliary tripping IEDs are used, an additional 10-15 ms must be added to allow for trip IED
operation.
3.14.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings

The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that I< operation
indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead line or cable circuits is
20% In, reduced to 10% or 5% where the infeed has a high SIR ratio (e.g. at a spur terminal with
embedded generation infeed).
The Sensitive Earth Fault protection (SEF) undercurrent element must be set less than the respective
trip setting, typically as follows:
SEF< = (SEF> trip) / 2
3.15 Broken Conductor Detection

The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and
ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages
which initiate flashovers. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead
lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults result in an appreciable increase in current and
hence in the majority of applications are easily detectable.
Another type of unbalanced fault that can occur on the system is the series or open circuit fault.
These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or single-phasing
of fuses. Series faults will not cause an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not
readily detectable by standard protection. However, they will produce an unbalance and a resultant
level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected.
8-44 P446/EN/TM/E
It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent IED to detect the above condition.
However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition
may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load
unbalance etc. A negative sequence element therefore would not operate at low load levels.

For a broken conductor affecting a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero
sequence current flow and the ratio of 2/1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In
the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedances in each sequence
network), the ratio 2/1 will be 50%.
In practice, the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system govern this
minimum setting. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the IED
measurement facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to
take the measurements during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single-phase loads
are accounted for.
Note: A minimum value of 8% negative phase sequence current is required for successful IED operation.
Since sensitive settings have been employed, it can be expected that the element will operate for any
unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole auto-reclose cycle).
Hence, a long time delay is necessary to ensure coordination with other protective devices. A 60
second time delay setting may be typical.
The example following information was recorded by the IED during commissioning;
full load = 500 A
2 = 50 A
therefore the quiescent 2/1 ratio is given by;
2/1 = 50/500 = 0.1
To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 20% of this value may be typical: Therefore set
2/1 = 0.2
In a double circuit (parallel line) application, using a 40% setting will ensure that the broken conductor
protection will operate only for the circuit that is affected. Setting 0.4 results in no pick-up for the
parallel healthy circuit.
Set 2/1 Time Delay = 60 s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed
protections.
3.16 Communication between IEDs
3.16.1 Data Rate

The data rate for signalling between the two or three ends may be set to either 64 kbit/sec or
56 kbit/sec as appropriate.
If there is a direct fibre connection between the ends, the data rate would usually be set to 64 kbit/sec,
as this gives a slightly faster trip time.
If there is a multiplexer network between the ends, then this will determine the data rate to be used by
the MiCOMho P446 system. The electrical interface to the multiplexer (G.703 co-directional, V.35, or
X.21) will be provided on either a 64 kbit/sec or 56 kbit/sec channel, and the MiCOMho P446 at each
end must be set to match this data rate.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-45
Generally, North American multiplexer networks are based on 56 kbit/sec (and multiples thereof)
channels, whereas multiplexer networks in the rest of the world are based on
64 kbit/sec (and multiples thereof) channels.
This setting is not applicable if IEEE C37.94 mode selected.
3.17 Integral Intertripping

The MiCOMho P446 supports integral intertripping in the form of InterMiCOM. InterMiCOM can use
an auxiliary EIA(RS)232 connection (MODEM InterMiCOM), or it can use an integral optical fibre
communication connection (fibre InterMiCOM, or InterMiCOM64). EIA(RS)232 (MODEM) InterMiCOM
provides a single, full duplex communication channel, suitable for connection between two MiCOMho
P446 devices. The fibre InterMiCOM (InterMiCOM64) can provide up to two full-duplex
communications channels. It can be used to connect two MiCOMho P446 using a single channel, or
redundancy can be added by using dual communications. Alternatively, InterMiCOM64 can be used to
connect three MiCOMho P446 devices in a triangulated scheme for the protection of Teed feeders.
MODEM InterMiCOM and InterMiCOM64 are completely independent. They have separate settings,
are described by separate DDB signals.
As a general rule, where possible, InterMiCOM64 would be preferable from an application point of view
since it is faster, and based on optical fibres it has high immunity to electromagnetic interference. If
the high speed communication channel requirement of InterMiCOM64 cannot be provided, EIA(RS)232
provides a cost effective alternative.
Because of the differences between the implementation of EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM and
InterMiCOM64, the settings associated with each implementation are different. There are settings to
prevent inadvertent cross-connection or loopback of communications channels (address settings),
settings to accommodate different channel requirements (baud rate, clock source, channel selection)
as well as the different settings used for channel quality monitoring and signal management actions in
the event of channel failures.
The received InterMiCOM signals are continually monitored for quality and availability. In the event of
quality or availability of the received signals falling below set levels, then an alarm can be raised.
Note: An alarm indicating the signalling has failed, refers only to the incoming signals. The remote IED will
monitor the other direction of the communications link for quality of transmission. If indication of the
quality of the signal transmitted from the local IED for reception at the remote IED is required, then
one of the InterMiCOM command channels can be used to reflect this back.
3.17.1 EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM (Modem InterMiCOM)

The settings needed for the implementation of MODEM InterMiCOM are in two columns of the IED
menu structure. The first column entitled INTERMICOM COMMS contains all the information to
configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities.
The second column entitled INTERMICOM CONF selects the format of each signal and its fallback
operation mode.
The settings required for the InterMiCOM signalling are largely dependant on whether a direct or
indirect (modem/multiplexed) connection between the scheme ends is used.
Direct connections are either short metallic or dedicated fibre optic based (using suitable EIA 232 to
optical fibre converters) so can be set to have the highest signalling speed of 19200 b/s. Due to this
high signalling rate, the difference in operating speed between the direct, permissive and blocking type
signals is so small that the most secure signalling (direct intertrip) can be selected without any
significant loss of speed. In turn, since the direct intertrip signalling requires the full checking of the
message frame structure and CRC checks, it is safer to set the IM# Fallback Mode to Default with a
minimal intentional delay by setting IM# FrameSyncTim to 10 msecs. In other words, whenever two
consecutive messages have an invalid structure, the IED immediately reverts to the default value until
a new valid message is received.
8-46 P446/EN/TM/E
For indirect connections, the settings applied become more application and communication media
dependent. As for the direct connections, consider only the fastest baud rate but this will usually
increase the cost of the necessary modem/multiplexer. In addition, devices operating at these high
baud rates may suffer from data jams during periods of interference and in the event of
communication interruptions, may require longer re-synchronization periods. Both of these factors will
reduce the effective communication speed thereby leading to a recommended baud rate setting of 9.6
kbit/s. As the baud rate decreases, the communications will become more robust with fewer
interruptions, but the overall signalling times will increase.
Since it is likely that slower baud rates will be selected, the choice of signalling mode becomes
significant. However, once the signalling mode has been chosen it is necessary to consider what
should happen during periods of noise when message structure and content can be lost. If Blocking
Mode is selected, only a small amount of the total message is actually used to provide the signal,
which means that in a noisy environment there is still a good likelihood of receiving a valid message.
In this case, it is recommended that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to Default with a reasonably long
IM# FrameSyncTim. A typical default selection of Default = 1 (blocking received substitute) would
generally apply as the failsafe assignment for blocking schemes.
If Direct Intertrip mode is selected, the whole message structure must be valid and checked to
provide the signal, which means that in a very noisy environment the chances of receiving a valid
message are quite small. In this case, it is recommended that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to
Default with a minimum IM# FrameSyncTim setting i.e. whenever a non-valid message is received,
InterMiCOM will use the set default value. A typical default selection of Default = 0 (intertrip NOT
received substitute) would generally apply as the failsafe assignment for intertripping schemes.
If Permissive mode is selected, the chances of receiving a valid message is between that of the
Blocking and Direct Intertrip modes. In this case, it is possible that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to
Latched. Table 7 shows the recommended IM# FrameSyncTim settings for the different signalling
modes and baud rates:
Minimum recommended Minimum setting Maximum setting
Baud rate
“IM# FrameSyncTim” Setting (ms) (ms)
Direct intertrip mode Blocking mode
600 100 250 100 1500
1200 50 130 50 1500
2400 30 70 30 1500
4800 20 40 20 1500
9600 10 20 10 1500
19200 10 10 10 1500
Table 7: Recommended IM# FrameSyncTim settings
Note: No recommended setting is given for the Permissive mode since it is anticipated that Latched
operation will be selected. However, if Default mode is selected, the IM# FrameSyncTim setting
should be set greater than the minimum settings listed above. If the IM# FrameSyncTim setting is
set lower than the minimum setting listed above, there is a danger that the IED will monitor a correct
change in message as a corrupted message.
A setting of 25% is recommended for the communications failure alarm.
3.17.2 InterMiCOM64
IMx Command Type

Due to the fast data rate, there is not so much difference in real performance between the three
generic modes of teleprotection (Direct Intertrip, Permissive and Blocking), so only two are
implemented for InterMiCOM64. Direct Intertripping is available, with the second mode a combined
mode for Permissive/Blocking (the latter is named as ‘Permissive’ in the menu). To increase the
P446/EN/TM/E 8-47
security for Intertripping (Direct transfer tripping), the InterMiCOM64 Direct command is issued only
when 2 valid consecutive messages are received. The recommended setting is:
 For Blocking schemes set ‘Permissive’

 For Permissive scheme set ‘Permissive’
 For Transfer (inter)tripping set ‘Direct’
The setting files provide independent setting for each of the first 8 commands. Due to the fast data
rate, there is minimal speed difference between the two mode options. Both give a typical operating
time as shown in the following table. The operating time is the PSL trigger at the send IED to the PSL
state change at the receive IED.
Channel mode
Application Typical delay (ms) Maximum (ms) Comments
setting
Assuming no repeaters (no
Permissive Direct Fibre 3 to 7 9
source of digital “noise”)
For channel bit error rate up
Multiplexed Link 5 to 8 + MUX 12 + MUX
to 1 x 10-3
Assuming no repeaters (no
Direct Intertrip Direct Fibre 4 to 8 10
source of digital “noise”)
For channel bit error rate up
Multiplexed link 6 to 8 + MUX 13 + MUX
to 1 x 10-3
Table 8: Typical operating times in ms
When using InterMiCOM64 to implement Aided Scheme 1 or Aided Scheme 2, it is suggested to

assume a conservative worst-case channel delay of 15 ms (pickup and reset delay), for the purposes
of blocking and reversal guard calculations. The delay of the multiplexer should be added if
applicable, taking into account longer standby path re-routings which might be experienced in the
event of self-healing in a SONET/SDH telecomms network.
When using InterMiCOM64 as a standalone feature in 3-terminal applications, where fallback to “chain”
topology is possible in the event of failure of one communications leg in the triangle, longer times may
be experienced. In fallback mode, retransmission of the messages occurs so the path length is
doubled. Overall command times to the final end can be doubled.
IMx Fallback Mode

When the ‘Default’ setting is selected, the following ‘IMx Default Value’ settings are recommended:
For Intertripping schemes set 0, for Blocking schemes set 1. In Permissive applications, the user may
prefer to latch the last healthy received state for a period of time.
8-48 P446/EN/TM/E
4 WORKED PROTECTION EXAMPLE AND OTHER TIPS
4.1 Distance Protection Setting Example
4.1.1 Objective
To protect the 100 km double circuit line between Green Valley and Blue River substations using a
MiCOMho P446 in distance POR Permissive Overreach mode and to set the IED at Green Valley
substation, shown in Figure 17. It is assumed that mho characteristics will be used.
Tiger Bay Green Valley Blue River Rocky Bay
100km
80km 60km
21 21
System data
Green Valley - Blue River transmission line
System voltage 230kv
System grounding solid
CT ratio 1200/5
VT ratio 230000/115
Line length 100km
Line impedance
Z1 = 0.089 + J0.476 OHM/km
Z2 = 0.426 + J1.576 OHM/km
Fault levelts
Green Valley substation busbars maximum 5000MVA, minimum 2000MVA
Blue River substation busbars maximum 3000MVA, minimum 1000MVA
P1019ENa
Circuit continous rating = 400MVA
Worst-case power factor of load = 0.85 P1019ENb
Figure 17: System assumed for worked example
4.1.2 System Data

Line length: 100 km
Line impedances: Z1 = 0.089 + j0.476 = 0.484 79.4 /km
Z0 = 0.426 + j1.576 = 1.632 74.8 /km
Z0/Z1 = 3.372 -4.6
CT ratio: 1 200/5
VT ratio: 230 000/115
P446/EN/TM/E 8-49
4.1.3 IED Settings

It is assumed that Zone 1 Extension is not used and that only three forward zones are required.
Settings on the IED can be performed in primary or secondary quantities and impedances can be
expressed as either polar or rectangular quantities (menu selectable). For the purposes of this
example, secondary quantities are used.
4.1.4 Line Impedance

1200 / 5
Ratio of secondary to primary impedance = 230000 / 115 = 0.12
Line impedance secondary = ratio CT/VT x line impedance primary.

Line Impedance = 100 x 0.484 79.4 (primary) x 0.124
= 5.81 79.4  secondary.
Select Line Angle = 80 for convenience.
Therefore set Line Impedance and Line Angle: = 5.81 80  secondary.
4.1.5 Residual Compensation for Earth Fault Elements

The residual compensation factor can be applied independently to certain zones if required. This
feature is useful where line impedance characteristics change between sections or where hybrid
circuits are used. In this example, the line impedance characteristics do not change and as such a
common KZN factor can be applied to each zone. This is set as a ratio kZN Res. Comp, and an
angle kZN Angle:
kZN Res. Comp, kZN = (Z0 - Z1) / 3Z1 i.e.: As a ratio
kZN Angle, kZN =  (Z0 - Z1) / 3Z1 Set in degrees
ZL0 - ZL1 = (0.426 + j1.576) - (0.089 + j0.476)
= 0.337 + j1.1
= 1.15 72.9
1.1572.9
kZN = = 0.79 –6.5°
3  0.48479.4
Therefore, select:
kZN Res. Comp = 0.7
kZN Angle = - 6.5°

Required Zone 1 reach is to be 80% of the line impedance between Green Valley and Blue River
substations.
Setting the IED in the SIMPLE setting mode (recommended):
 Set Zone 1 Ph and Zone 1 Gnd reach = 80%

From this the IED automatically calculates the required ohmic reaches, or they can be entered
manually in the ADVANCED mode, as follows:
Required Zone 1 reach = 0.8 x 100 x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12
Z1 = 4.64 79.4  secondary
The Line Angle = 80
8-50 P446/EN/TM/E
Therefore actual Zone 1 reach, Z1 = 4.64 80  secondary.

Required Zone 2 impedance = (Green Valley-Blue River) line impedance + 50%
(Blue River-Rocky Bay) line impedance
Z2 = (100+30) x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12 = 7.56 79.4 
secondary.
The Line Angle = 80
Actual Zone 2 reach setting = 7.56 80  secondary
Alternatively, in SIMPLE setting mode, this reach can be set as a percentage of the protected line.
Typically a figure of at least 120% is used.

Required Zone 3 forward reach = (Green Valley-Blue River + Blue
River-Rocky Bay) x 1.2
= (100+60) x 1.2 x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12
Z3 = 11.15 79.4 ohms secondary
Actual Zone 3 forward reach setting = 11.16 80 ohms secondary
Alternatively, in SIMPLE setting mode, this reach can be set as a percentage of the protected line.
4.1.9 Zone 3 Reverse Reach

In the absence of other special requirements, Zone 3 can be given a small reverse reach setting, of
Z3’ = 10%. This is acceptable because the protected line length is > 30km.
Zone 4 Reverse Settings with POR and BLOCKING schemes
Where Zone 4 is used to provide reverse directional decisions for Blocking or Permissive Overreach
schemes, Zone 4 must reach further behind the IED than Zone 2 for the remote IED. This can be
achieved by setting: Z4  ((Remote Zone 2 reach) x 120%), where mho characteristics are used.
Remote Zone 2 reach = (Blue River-Green Valley) line impedance +
50%n (Green Valley-Tiger Bay) line
impedance
= (100+40) x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12
= 8.13 79.4  secondary
Z4  ((8.13 79.4) x 120%) - (5.81 79.4)
= 3.95 79.4
Minimum Zone 4 reverse reach setting = 3.96 80 ohms secondary
4.1.10 Load Avoidance

The maximum full load current of the line can be determined from the calculation:
IFLC = [(Rated MVAFLC) / (3 x Line kV)]
IED settings must allow for a level of overloading, typically a maximum current of 120% IFLC
prevailing on the system transmission lines. Also, for a double circuit line, during the auto-reclose
dead time of fault clearance on the adjacent circuit, twice this level of current may flow on the healthy
line for a short period of time. Therefore the circuit current loading could be 2.4 x IFLC.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-51
With such a heavy load flow, the system voltage may be depressed, typically with phase voltages
down to 90% of Vn nominal.
Allowing for a tolerance in the measuring circuit inputs (line CT error, VT error, IED tolerance, and
safety margin), this results in a load impedance which might be 3 times the expected “rating”.
To avoid the load, the blinder impedance needs to be set:
Z  (Rated phase-ground voltage Vn) / (IFLC x 3)
= (115/√3) / (IFLC x 3)
Set the V< Blinder voltage threshold at the recommended 70% of Vn = 66.4 x 0.7 = 45 V.
4.1.11 Additional Settings for Quadrilateral Applications
4.1.11.1 Phase Fault Resistive Reaches (Rph)

In primary impedance terms, RPh reaches must be set to cover the maximum expected phase-to-
phase fault resistance. Ideally, RPh must be set greater than the maximum fault arc resistance for a
phase-phase fault, calculated as follows:
Ra = (28710 x L)/If 1.4
Where:
If = Minimum expected phase-phase fault current (A);
L = Maximum phase conductor separation (m);
Ra = Arc resistance, calculated from the van Warrington formula ().
Typical figures for Ra (primary ) are given in the table below, for different values of minimum
expected phase fault current.
Conductor spacing (m) Typical system voltage (kV) If = 1 kA If = 2 kA If = 3 kA
4 110 - 132 7.2  2.8  1.6 
8 220 - 275 14.5  5.5  3.1 
11 380 - 400 19.9  7.6  4.3 
Table 9: Typical figures for Ra (primary )
Note: Dual-end infeed effects will make a fault resistance appear higher, because each IED cannot
measure the current contribution from the remote line end. The apparent fault resistance increase
factor could be 2 to 8 times the calculated resistance. Therefore it is recommended that the zone
resistive reaches are set to say, 4 times the primary arc resistance calculation.
In the example, the minimum phase fault level is 1000 MVA. This is equivalent to an effective short-
circuit fault feeding impedance of:
Z = kV 2/MVA = 2302/1000 = 53  (primary)
The lowest phase fault current level is equivalent to:
Ifault = (MVA x 1000)/(3 x kV)
= (1000 x 1000)/(3 x 230)
= 2.5 kA
And this fault current in the van Warrington formula would give an arc resistance of:
Ra = 4
8-52 P446/EN/TM/E
As this impedance is relatively small compared to the value “Z” calculated above, there is no need to
perform an iterative equation to work out the actual expected Ifault, which would in reality be lower due
to the added Ra arc resistance in the fault loop. It is sufficient to increase the calculated Ra by the
recommended factor of four, and a little extra to account for the fault current being lower than that
calculated. So in this case use a minimum setting of 5 x Ra, which is 20  primary.
It is obvious that the setting could easily be set above 20  on the primary system (perhaps following
the rule of thumb formula in section 3.1.7). Typically, all zone resistive reaches would be set greater
than this 20  primary figure, and ideally less than the load impedance (see “load avoidance” section).
4.1.11.2 Earth Fault Resistive Reaches (RGnd)

Fault resistance would comprise arc-resistance and tower footing resistance. A typical resistive reach
coverage setting would be 40  on the primary system.
For high resistance earth faults, the situation may arise where no distance elements could operate. In
this case it is necessary to provide supplementary earth fault protection, for example using the IED’s
Channel Aided DEF protection. In such cases it is not essential to set large resistive reaches for
ground distance, and then RGnd can be set according to the rule of thumb formula.
4.2 Teed Feeder Protection

The application of distance IEDs to three terminal lines is fairly common. However, several problems
arise when applying distance protection to three terminal lines.
4.2.1 The Apparent Impedance seen by the Distance Elements

Figure 18 shows a typical three terminal line arrangement. For a fault at the busbars of terminal B the
impedance seen by an IED at terminal A is equal to:
Za = Zat + Zbt + [Zbt.(Ic/Ia)]
IED A will underreach for faults beyond the tee-point with infeed from terminal C. When terminal C is
a relatively strong source, the underreaching effect can be substantial. For a Zone 2 element set to
120% of the protected line, this effect may result in non-operation of the element for internal faults.
This not only effects time delayed Zone 2 tripping but also channel-aided schemes. Where infeed is
present, it will be necessary for Zone 2 elements at all line terminals to overreach both remote
terminals with allowance for the effect of tee-point infeed. Zone 1 elements must be set to underreach
the true impedance to the nearest terminal without infeed. Both these requirements can be met
through use of the alternative setting groups.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-53
A Ia Ib B
Z at Z bt
Ic
Z ct
C
V
Va = I a Z at +I b Z bt Impedance seen by relay A = a
Ia
P1018ENa
I b = Ia + Ic P1018ENb
Figure 18: Teed feeder application - apparent impedances seen by IEDs
4.2.2 Permissive Overreach Schemes

To ensure operation for internal faults in a POR scheme, the IEDs at the three terminals should be
able to see a fault at any point within the protected feeder. This may demand very large Zone 2 reach
settings to deal with the apparent impedances seen by the IEDs.
A POR scheme requires the use of two signalling channels. A permissive trip can only be issued upon
operation of Zone 2 and receipt of a signal from both remote line ends. The requirement for an 'AND'
function of received signals must be realized through use of contact logic external to the IED, or the
internal Programmable Scheme Logic. Although a POR scheme can be applied to a three terminal
line, the signalling requirements make its use unattractive.
4.2.3 Permissive Underreach Schemes

For a PUR scheme, the signalling channel is only keyed for internal faults. Permissive tripping is
allowed for operation of Zone 2 plus receipt of a signal from either remote line end. This makes the
signalling channel requirements for a PUR scheme less demanding than for a POR scheme. A
common power line carrier (PLC) signalling channel or a triangulated signalling arrangement can be
used. This makes the use of a PUR scheme for a teed feeder a more attractive alternative than use of
a POR scheme.
The channel is keyed from operation of Zone 1 tripping elements. Provided at least one Zone 1
element can see an internal fault then aided tripping will occur at the other terminals if the
overreaching Zone 2 setting requirement has been met. There are however two cases where this is
not possible:
 Figure 19 (i) shows the case where a short tee is connected close to another terminal. In this
case, Zone 1 elements set to 80% of the shortest relative feeder length do not overlap. This
leaves a section not covered by any Zone 1 element. Any fault in this section would result in
Zone 2 time delayed tripping.
 Figure 19 (ii) shows an example where terminal 'C' has no infeed. Faults close to this terminal
will not operate the IED at 'C' and hence the fault will be cleared by the Zone 2 time-delayed
elements of the IEDs at 'A' and 'B'.
 Figure 19 (iii) shows a further difficulty for a PUR scheme. In this example current is outfed
from terminal 'C' for an internal fault. The IED at 'C' will therefore see the fault as reverse and
not operate until the breaker at 'B' has opened; i.e. sequential tripping will occur.
8-54 P446/EN/TM/E
(i) A B
Z1A Z1C
= area where no zone 1 overlap exists
(ii) A B
Z1A Z1B
Fault Fault seen by A & B in zone 2
C
No infeed
(iii) A B
P1134ENa
Relay at C sees reverse fault until B opens P1166ENa
Figure 19: Teed feeder applications
4.2.4 Blocking Schemes

Blocking schemes are particularly suited to the protection of teed feeders, since high speed operation
can be achieved where there is no current infeed from one or more terminals. The scheme also has
the advantage that only a common simplex channel or a triangulated simplex channel is required.
The major disadvantage of blocking schemes is highlighted in Figure 19 (iii) where fault current is
outfed from a terminal for an internal fault condition. IED 'C' sees a reverse fault condition. This
results in a blocking signal being sent to the two remote line ends, preventing tripping until the normal
Zone 2 time delay has expired.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-55
4.3 VT Connections
4.3.1 Open Delta (Vee Connected) VTs

The MiCOMho P446 can be used with vee connected VTs by connecting the VT secondaries to these
input terminals:
Product Connect VT Secondaries to these Input Terminals
P446 D19, D20 and D21 input terminals, with the D22 input left unconnected
This type of VT arrangement cannot pass zero-sequence (residual) voltage to the IED, or provide any
phase to neutral voltage quantities. Therefore any protection that is dependent on phase to neutral
voltage measurements should be disabled.
The ground directional comparison elements, ground distance elements, neutral voltage displacement
(residual overvoltage) and CT supervision all use phase-to-neutral voltage signals for their operation
and should be disabled. The DEF elements should be selected for negative sequence polarization to
avoid the use of phase-to-neutral voltages. Under and overvoltage protection can be set as phase-to-
phase measuring elements, whereas all other protection elements should remain operational.
The accuracy of the single phase voltage measurements can be impaired when using vee connected
VTs. The IED attempts to derive the phase to neutral voltages from the phase to phase voltage
vectors. If the impedance of the voltage inputs were perfectly matched the phase to neutral voltage
measurements would be correct, provided the phase to phase voltage vectors were balanced.
However, in practice there are small differences in the impedance of the voltage inputs, which can
cause small errors in the phase to neutral voltage measurements. This may give rise to an apparent
residual voltage. This problem also extends to single phase power measurements that are also
dependent on their respective single phase voltages.
The phase to neutral voltage measurement accuracy can be improved by connecting three well-
matched, load resistors between the following phase voltage inputs and neutral point therefore
creating a virtual neutral point. The connections are shown below for each product:
Product Phase Voltage Inputs Neutral Point
P446 C19, C20, C21 C22
The load resistor values must be chosen so that their power consumption is within the limits of the VT. It is
recommended that 10k  1% (6 W) resistors are used for the 110 V (Vn) rated IED, assuming the VT can
supply this burden.
4.3.2 VT Single Point Earthing

The MiCOMho P446 functions correctly with conventional 3 phase VTs earthed at any one point on
the VT secondary circuit. Typical earthing examples being neutral earthing, or B-phase (UK: “yellow
phase” earthing).
4.4 Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS)

In most protective schemes the trip circuit extends beyond the IED enclosure and passes through
components such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary switches and other terminal boards. This
complex arrangement, coupled with the importance of the trip circuit, has led to dedicated schemes for
its supervision.
Several trip circuit supervision scheme variants are offered. Although there are no dedicated settings
for TCS, in the MiCOMho P446 the following schemes can be produced using the Programmable
Scheme Logic (PSL). A user alarm is used in the PSL to issue an alarm message on the IED. If
necessary, the user alarm can be renamed using the menu text editor to show there is a fault with the
trip circuit.
8-56 P446/EN/TM/E
4.4.1 TCS Scheme 1
Figure 20: TCS scheme 1
This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed, however, preclosing
supervision is not provided. This scheme is also incompatible with latched trip contacts, as a latched
contact will short out the opto for greater than the recommended DDO timer setting of 400 ms. If
breaker status monitoring is required a further 1 or 2 opto inputs must be used.
Note: A 52a CB auxiliary contact follows the CB position and a 52b contact is in the opposite state.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input, blocking diode and trip
coil. When the breaker is open current still flows through the opto input and into the trip coil using the
52b auxiliary contact. Hence, no supervision of the trip path is provided while the breaker is open.
Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after a 400 ms delay.
Resistor R1 is an optional resistor that can be fitted to prevent mal-operation of the circuit breaker if
the opto input is inadvertently shorted, by limiting the current to <60 mA. The resistor should not be
fitted for auxiliary voltage ranges of 30/34 volts or less, as satisfactory operation can no longer be
guaranteed. Table 10 shows the appropriate resistor value and voltage setting (OPTO CONFIG
menu) for this scheme.
This TCS scheme will function correctly even without resistor R1, since the opto input automatically
limits the supervision current to less that 10 mA. However, if the opto is accidentally shorted the circuit
breaker may trip.
Auxiliary voltage (Vx) Resistor R1 (ohms) Opto voltage setting with R1 fitted
48/54 1.2 k 24/27
110/250 2.5 k 48/54
220/250 5.0 k 110/125
Table 10: Resistor values and voltage settings for TCS scheme 1
Note: When R1 is not fitted the opto voltage setting must be set equal to supply voltage of the supervision
circuit.

Figure 21 shows the scheme logic diagram for the TCS scheme 1. Any of the available opto inputs
can be used to indicate whether or not the trip circuit is healthy. The delay on drop off timer operates
as soon as the opto is energized, but will take 400 ms to drop off / reset in the event of a trip circuit
failure. The 400 ms delay prevents a false alarm due to voltage dips caused by faults in other circuits
P446/EN/TM/E 8-57
or during normal tripping operation when the opto input is shorted by a self-reset trip contact. When
the timer is operated the NC (normally closed) output relay opens and the LED and user alarms are
reset.
The 50 ms delay on pick-up timer prevents false LED and user alarm indications during the IED power
up time, following an auxiliary supply interruption.
0 0
Opto Input Drop-Off Straight NC Output Relay
400 0
Latching LED
50
& Pick-up
0
User Alarm
P2229ENa
Figure 21: PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3
4.4.2 TCS Scheme 2
Much like scheme 1, this scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed
and also does not provide preclosing supervision. However, using two opto inputs allows the IED to
correctly monitor the circuit breaker status since they are connected in series with the CB auxiliary
contacts. This is achieved by assigning Opto A to the 52a contact and Opto B to the 52b contact.
Provided the Circuit Breaker Status is set to 52a and 52b (CB CONTROL column) the IED correctly
monitors the status of the breaker. This scheme is also fully compatible with latched contacts as the
supervision current will be maintained through the 52b contact when the trip contact is closed.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through opto input A and the trip coil. When
the breaker is open current flows through opto input B and the trip coil. As with scheme 1, no
supervision of the trip path is provided while the breaker is open. Any fault in the trip path will only be
detected on CB closing, after a 400 ms delay.
As with scheme 1, optional resistors R1 and R2 can be added to prevent tripping of the CB if either
opto is shorted. The resistor values of R1 and R2 are equal and can be set the same as R1 in
scheme 1.
8-58 P446/EN/TM/E

The PSL for this scheme (Figure 22) is practically the same as that of scheme 1. The main difference
being that both opto inputs must be off before a trip circuit fail alarm is given.
0 0
Opto Input Drop-Off Straight NC Output Relay
400 0
Latching LED
50
& Pick-up
0
User Alarm
P2229ENa
Figure 23: PSL for TCS scheme 2
4.4.3 TCS Scheme 3
Trip
Circuit Breaker
R3
Trip
Trip
Coil
52a
R2
P54x
Opto R1 52b
P2231ENc
Scheme 3 is designed to provide supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed, but unlike
schemes 1 and 2, it also provides preclosing supervision. Since only one opto input is used, this
scheme is not compatible with latched trip contacts. If CB status monitoring is required a further 1 or 2
opto inputs must be used.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input, resistor R2 and the trip
coil. When the breaker is open current flows through the opto input, resistors R1 and R2 (in parallel),
resistor R3 and the trip coil. Unlike schemes 1 and 2, supervision current is maintained through the
trip path with the breaker in either state, therefore giving full preclosing supervision.
As with schemes 1 and 2, resistors R1 and R2 are used to prevent false tripping, if the opto-input is
accidentally shorted. However, unlike the other two schemes, this scheme is dependent upon the
position and value of these resistors. Removing them would result in incomplete trip circuit monitoring.
Table 11 shows the resistor values and voltage settings required for satisfactory operation.
Auxiliary voltage (Vx) Resistor R1 & R2 (ohms) Resistor R3 (ohms) Opto voltage setting
48/54 1.2 k 0.6 k 24/27
110/250 2.5 k 1.2 k 48/54
220/250 5.0 k 2.5 k 110/125
Table 11: Resistor values and Voltage settings for TCS scheme 3
P446/EN/TM/E 8-59
Note: Scheme 3 is not compatible with auxiliary supply voltages of 30/34 volts and below.

The PSL for scheme 3 is identical to that of scheme 1 (see Figure 21).
4.5 Intermicom64 Application Example

An example of how to apply an InterMiCOM64 scheme is given below. This example should be read in
conjunction with the InterMiCOM64 section of the Operation chapter.
4.5.1 InterMiCOM64 Mapping for Three Ended Application – BLOCKING or PUR Example
The following figure shows a suggested InterMiCOM64 mapping:
8-60 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 25: InterMiCOM64 mapping in a three ended application
4.5.2 Intermicom64 Application Example General Advice

MiCOM IEDs have standard, preconfigured aided scheme logic internal to each IED. Therefore, it is
not necessary to draw the zone logic for Permissive Underreach, Permissive Overreach or Blocking
schemes within the PSL. To gain the benefit of selecting a proven and tested scheme, the standard
Aided scheme logic should be used.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-61
When InterMiCOM64 is being used as the transmission medium for the aided channel signal(s), all that
is required is to create one-to-one mapping between the Aided scheme logic, and the InterMiCOM64
(IM64) signals to be used. The PSL editor is used to perform the simple mapping required.
To configure the signal SEND logic:
 Route the required Aided send DDB signal to the IM64 Output to be used.
To configure the signal RECEIVE logic:
 Route the required IM64 Input signal to the Aided scheme Rx DDB input.
4.5.3 Three-ended Applications

The example in the section 4.5.2 shows a three terminal application, in this case in a BLOCKING or
PUR scheme mode. Note that this breaks with the rule of the one-to-one mapping as described in
section 4.5.2. In three terminal schemes, the input to the Aided scheme is some kind of logic
combination of the signals received from the two remote ends:
 BLOCKING schemes are recommended to take a logical OR of the incoming IM64 signals,
before being mapped to Aided scheme Rx. This is to ensure that if the fault is declared as
external at any line end, Zone 2 accelerated tripping at the local end is blocked.
 PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH schemes are recommended to take a logical OR of the incoming
IM64 signals, before being mapped to Aided scheme Rx. Thus, if the fault is declared as
internal at any remote line end, Zone 2 accelerated tripping at the local end is allowed. As
Zone 1 is an underreaching element, it can only key the channel for an internal fault, so there is
no need for AND logic.
 PERMISSIVE OVERREACH schemes are recommended to take a logical AND of the incoming
IM64 signals, before being mapped to Aided scheme Rx. This is to ensure that the fault must
be seen as forward from both remote ends before Zone 2 accelerated tripping at the local end is
allowed. As Zone 2 keys the channel, confirmation of a forward decision at all three line ends
must be confirmed before aided scheme tripping is permitted.
In all three terminal schemes, the send logic is a one-to-many mapping. The Aided send is mapped to
the IM64 signals which transmit to both remote ends. The connection to Ch1 (channel 1), and Ch2
(channel 2) ensures communication to the two remote ends. In case of channel failure between any
two IEDs, the Aided 1 COS/LGS signal will become high in the IED that is not receiving and activate
the FallBackMode. Therefore to preserve the stability in 3-ended blocking scheme, the corresponding
IM_X DefaultValue in the setting file must be set high. In any PUR and POR schemes such a
precaution is not necessary since the aided signal can not be sent through broken communications.
4.5.4 Intermicom64 Application Example Scheme Description

The scheme in Figure 21 is assumed as a case study. The top half of the page shows the mapping of
the send and receive logic as already described. It can be seen that the first InterMiCOM bit (Input 1)
is being used for the purposes of Aided scheme 1.
Notes: Two Aided schemes are available, Aided 1 and Aided 2. This allows for example an independent
Distance aided scheme, and a DEF aided scheme to be configured. Whether Aided 1 is used
alone, or Aided 2 is used too will depend on the utility preference. Further detail is available in the
MiCOM Technical Manual.
The InterMiCOM64 bits are duplex in nature, in other words InterMiCOM64 bit 1 between the IED at
line end A and B is completely independent from the same bit travelling from end B to A.
For simplicity, it is recommended that Aided scheme 1 is mapped to IM64 bit 1.
8-62 P446/EN/TM/E
Likewise, where Aided scheme 2 is applied, it is more logical to assign IM64 bit 2, providing that it is
not already used in the PSL for some other function.
4.5.5 Intermicom64 Application Example Channel Supervision

For teleprotection schemes, it is commonplace to configure alarming in the event of channel failure.
The third dotted box on the case study provides full monitoring of the scheme in three ended
applications. Here, IM64 bit 2 is permanently energized when the channel is healthy. The OR gate
shows how an opto input (L4) and a Control Input might be used as prerequisites for healthy
signalling:
 The use of an opto input allows a check that correct DC battery voltages are present for local
teleprotection purposes, or perhaps that a selector switch has not taken the scheme out of
service.
 The use of a Control Input allows switching in or out of the teleprotection using menu
commands on the IED concerned. This provides convenient in-out switching of the entire
teleprotection scheme by visiting/addressing just one line end IED.
The exact logic condition to declare the local “signalling healthy” condition will be chosen such as to
reflect the utility’s practices. In the example shown, this logical condition is then mapped to IM64
Output 2 (bit 2), for transmitting to the two remote line ends.
To declare that the signalling scheme is healthy, bit 2 (the assigned health-check bit) must be received
from both remote ends. This can be combined with a general check on InterMiCOM64 messaging,
DDB #314. The AND gate shows that signalling is only healthy if:
 The local DC battery voltage/control state is set to allow teleprotection operation,

 The remote end health-check bits are both received successfully,
 The scheme alarms have not detected messaging failures (IM64 Scheme Fail).
A logical AND combination is used, with the gate output inverted to feed into the aided scheme logic.
This scheme failure output then feeds the standard Channel out of Service (COS) logic.
The fourth dotted box shows how the same scheme failure alarm (COS) can then be simply mapped
to any LED indication, or output contact for alarming.
Note: If a simpler scheme is preferred, it is not necessary to assign a health-check bit. In such instances,
the IM64 Scheme Fail alarm alone can be used to drive COS. However, if a test mode selection
were to disable the aided scheme at one end, the other line ends would have no indication of the
depleted operation.
For this reason, the use of the health-check bit is recommended.
4.5.6 Intermicom64 Application Example Transfer Trip

The case study scheme shows a suggested Transfer Trip (“Intertrip”) in the lower dotted box area.
This is an optional addition (or alternative) with any aided scheme. The example shows an opto input
(L5) which is being used to initiate the intertrip, mapped to send IM64 bit 5 to both remote ends. On
receipt of the intertrip bit from any remote line end, the OR gate is used to map the received intertrip to
whichever output relay trips the local breaker. In the diagram, relay 3 is shown as an example.
Again it can be seen that the PSL is the means by which the InterMiCOM64 signals are driven, and to
where any received bits are routed too.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-63
4.5.7 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Mapping for Two Ended Application

The same scheme principle as shown in Figure 25 applies in a two-ended application. The scheme
will be simplified, whereby Aided Send signals are mapped directly to IM64 bits, on a one-to-one
mapping. The IM64 bit received from the remote end is also mapped directly to the Aided Scheme Rx
signal, requiring no AND or OR logic combination.
4.5.8 Intermicom64 Application Example - Dual Redundant Communications Channels

In dual redundant operation, the user has the option to send end-end signals through two paths. The
two paths (channels) are defined as Ch1 and Ch2. Several factors can be taken into account when
using this mode:
 The assignment of IM64 bits is completely independent, per channel. For example if all 8
possible bits per channel are assigned to discrete functions, this allows a total of 16 end-end
signals.
 The receive logic should employ AND (“both”) or OR (“any”) logic gate functions to combine the
dual redundant signals, as appropriate to the desired operation.
4.5.9 Intermicom64 Application Example - Scheme Coordination Timers

Distance and DEF delta directional aided schemes use scheme coordination timers to ensure correct
operation. The function of these is documented in the OP sections of the Technical Manual.
However, when using InterMiCOM64 as the teleprotection channel, the time delays applied can be
different to those used for traditional channels. This is due, mainly, to the fact that the response time
of opto inputs and output contacts is bypassed. An output contact will take typically 3 to 5 ms to close,
and an opto input will take 1 to 2 ms to recognize a change of state. Therefore using InterMiCOM64
will save around 5-6 ms for I/O response time.
The new time delays appropriate for Dist Dly and Current Reversal Guard timers are as listed in the
following sections. Where direct fibre connections are used for InterMiCOM64, ignore the + MUX
addition. Where a multiplexed link is used, the + MUX figure should account for the multiplexer
response time. If this is unknown, it can be obtained for the specific installation using the appropriate
measurement in the MEASUREMENTS 4 menu column.
4.5.9.1 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Distance PUR Permissive Underreach
 Dist dly = zero
4.5.9.2 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Distance POR Permissive Overreach
 Dist dly = zero

 tREV. Guard = 40 ms + MUX
4.5.9.3 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Distance Blocking
 Dist dly (50 Hz) = 25 ms + MUX

 Dist dly (60 Hz) = 22 ms + MUX
4.5.9.4 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Directional Earth Fault (DEF) POR Permissive Overreach
 DEF dly = zero
8-64 P446/EN/TM/E
4.5.9.5 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Directional Earth Fault (DEF) Blocking
 DEF dly = 25 ms + MUX

4.5.9.6 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Delta Directional POR Permissive Overreach
 Delta dly = zero

 tREVERSAL GUARD = 40 ms + MUX
4.5.9.7 InterMiCOM64 Application Example - Delta Directional Blocking
 Delta dly = 14 ms + MUX

 tREVERSAL GUARD = 25 ms + MUX
Note: When adding any multiplexer delays, the maximum response time of the multiplexed link should be
assumed. This should include any addition for rerouting in self-healing networks.
4.5.10 Fallback Mode for InterMiCOM64 Bits

On temporary loss of the InterMiCOM64 channel, the user may select to latch the last healthy signal for
a period of time, or to fallback to a chosen default value.
For Intertripping schemes, reverting to a default state of 0 is recommended;
For Blocking schemes set, reverting to a default state of 1 is recommended;
For Permissive applications, latching the last healthy received state is recommended.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-65
5 APPLICATION OF NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
5.1 Single and Three Phase Auto-Reclosing
5.1.1 Time Delayed and High Speed Auto-Reclosing

An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are transient in nature.
In the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out, and time is allowed for the
fault arc to de-ionize, reclosure of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-
energized. Auto-reclose schemes are employed to automatically reclose a switching device a set time
after it has been opened due to operation of protection, where transient and semi-permanent faults are
prevalent.
The principal benefit gained by the application of auto-reclosing to overhead line feeders is improved
supply continuity and possibly reduced costs since fewer personnel may be required. On some
systems the application of high speed auto-reclose may permit a higher level of power transfer while
retaining transient stability for most faults which are likely to occur.
High speed single phase auto-reclosure can offer increased benefits over high speed three phase
auto-reclosure in terms of a higher power transfer limit and reduced stress on reclosing.
5.1.2 Auto-reclose Logic Operating Sequence

The standard scheme logic is configured to permit control of one circuit breaker only.
An alternative scheme logic is configured to permit control of one or two circuit breakers.
For high speed auto-reclose, only the instantaneous protection would normally be set to initiate auto-
reclose. This is because for best results when applying high speed auto-reclose to improve a system
stability limit, it is important that the fault should be cleared as quickly as possible from both line ends.
Breaker-and-a-Half and Ring Bus Applications

The MiCOMho P446 can be used in applications such as breaker-and-a-half, or ring bus topologies,
where two circuit breakers feed each line and both need to be controlled by the auto-reclose logic.
Auto-Reclose using two Circuit Breakers

The auto-reclose scheme for the MiCOMho P446 provides auto-reclosing of a feeder terminal
switched by two circuit breakers.
The IED can be set to initiate auto-reclosure following operation of internal trips, or more likely, the
auto-reclose can be initiated from external protection devices.
The two circuit breakers are normally arranged to reclose sequentially with one designated leader
circuit breaker reclosing after a set dead time followed, if the leader circuit breaker remains closed, by
the second circuit breaker after a further delay, the follower time.
5.1.3 Auto-Reclose Setting Guidelines
5.1.3.1 Circuit Breaker Healthy

The MiCOMho P446 monitors the state of the auxiliary contacts (52A, 52B) of the controlled circuit
breaker(s) to determine healthy circuit breaker status before allowing auto-reclose. Monitoring of the
auxiliary contacts is recommended, but this check can be disabled by not allocating opto inputs to this
function, and deliberately applying logic 1 onto the corresponding DDB signals within the PSL.
8-66 P446/EN/TM/E
5.1.3.2 Number of Shots

An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several trip close operations in
quick succession and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period.
The fact that 80 - 90% of faults are transient highlights the advantage of single shot schemes. If
statistical information for the power system shows that a moderate percentage of faults are semi-
permanent, further DAR shots may be used provided that system stability is not threatened.
Note: DAR shots will always be three pole.
5.1.3.3 Dead Timer Setting

High speed auto-reclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power
sources.
For high speed auto-reclose the system disturbance time should be minimized by using fast protection
<30 ms and fast CBs <60 ms.
For stability between two sources a system dead time of ≤300 ms may typically be required.
The minimum system dead time considering just the CB is the trip mechanism reset time plus the CB
closing time.
Minimum relay dead time settings are governed primarily by two factors:
 Time taken for de-ionization of the fault path

 Circuit breaker characteristics
Also it is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time
discrimination will be maintained after reclosure onto a fault. For high speed auto-reclose
instantaneous reset of protection is required.
For highly interconnected systems synchronism is unlikely to be lost by the tripping out of a single line.
Here the best policy may be to adopt longer dead times, to allow time for power swings on the system
resulting from the fault to settle.
5.1.3.4 Follower Time Setting

In the application of auto-reclosing to a feeder terminal switched by two circuit breakers, the MiCOMho
P446 provides the necessary control for both circuit breakers. The two circuit breakers are normally
arranged to reclose sequentially with one designated leader circuit breaker reclosing after a set dead
time followed, if the leader circuit breaker remains closed, by the second, follower, circuit breaker after
a further delay, the follower time.
The follower time is provided to prevent un-necessary operation of the follower circuit breaker. The
follower time should be set sufficiently long as to avoid an un-necessary closure of the follower circuit
breaker where conditions are such that it would be required to trip again.
After expiry of the dead time, the leader circuit breaker will attempt a reclosure. The minimum value of
the follower time should allow sufficient time for the auto-reclosure of the lead circuit breaker to be
considered successful.
A worst case may be where reclosure is onto a dead line with a persistent fault at the remote end of
the line.
Local end protection (Time delayed Back up protection, like distance Z2 element) may detect this fault
after set time delay (typically > 200 ms). In addition to the delays associated with the back-up
protection (typically >200 ms), time must be allowed for the leader circuit breaker to re-trip (50 - 100
ms), and a safety margin needs to be added so that a minimum follower time could be around 500 ms.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-67
If the reclosure of the lead circuit breaker is successful, the follower circuit breaker can be allowed to
reclose. Delaying the reclosure of the follower circuit breaker will allow any transients to decay before
the switching and if the transient decay figure is known, can be used to determine a minimum follower
time value. The larger of the two values can then be used as the minimum follower time.
Note: The follower circuit breaker should only be reclosed if the system is healthy. In a dual circuit breaker
scheme where the system is healthy, the follower circuit breaker acts more like a bus coupler. In
this case there is no need for fast switching and a time delay in excess of 1s is often appropriate.
The MiCOMho P446 default follower time is chosen as 5 s and this can comfortably be applied to
most applications.
5.1.3.5 De-ionizing Time

The de-ionization time of a fault arc depends on circuit voltage, conductor spacing, fault current and
duration, wind speed and capacitive coupling from adjacent conductors. As circuit voltage is generally
the most significant, minimum de-ionizing times can be specified as in Table 12 below.
Note: For single pole high-speed auto-reclose, the capacitive current induced from the healthy phases can
increase the time taken to de-ionize fault arcs.
Line voltage (kV) Minimum de-energization time (s)

66 0.1
110 0.15
132 0.17
220 0.28
275 0.3
400 0.5
Table 12: Minimum fault arc de-ionizing time (three pole tripping)
5.1.3.6 Example Minimum Dead Time Calculation

The following circuit breaker and system characteristics are to be used:
 CB Operating time (Trip coil energized  Arc interruption): 50 ms (a);

 CB Opening + Reset time (Trip coil energized  Trip mechanism reset): 200 ms (b);
 Protection reset time: < 80 ms (c);
 CB Closing time (Close command  Contacts make): 85 ms (d).
 De-ionizing time for 220 kV line:
 280 ms (e) for a three phase trip. (560 ms for a single pole trip).
The minimum relay dead time setting is the greater of:
 (a) + (c) = 50 + 80 = 130 ms, to allow protection reset;

 (a) + (e) - (d)= 50 + 280 - 85 = 245 ms, to allow de-ionizing (three pole);
 = 50 + 560 - 85 = 525 ms, to allow de-ionizing (single pole).
In practice a few additional cycles would be added to allow for tolerances, so Dead Time 1 could be
chosen as  300 ms, and 1Pole Dead Time could be chosen as  600 ms. The overall system dead
8-68 P446/EN/TM/E
time is found by adding (d) to the chosen settings, and then subtracting (a). (This gives 335 ms and
635 ms respectively here).
5.1.3.7 Reclaim Timer Setting

Several factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer, such as:
 Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is a high
incidence of recurrent lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults
 Spring charging time - For high speed auto-reclose the reclaim time may be set longer than the
spring charging time. A minimum reclaim time of >5s may be needed to allow the CB time to
recover after a trip and close before it can perform another trip-close-trip cycle. This time will
depend on the duty (rating) of the CB. For delayed auto-reclose there is no need as the dead
time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check AR Inhibit Time window time if there is
insufficient energy in the CB
 Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean
shorter maintenance intervals
 The Reclaim Time setting is generally set greater than the tZ2 distance zone delay
5.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
5.2.1 Standard CTS

The residual voltage setting, CTS Vn< Inhibit and the residual current setting, CTS n> set, should be
set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system conditions. For example CTS Vn< Inhibit
should be set to at least 120% of the maximum steady state residual voltage. The CTS n> set will
typically be set below minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, CTS Time Delay, is generally
set to 5 seconds.
Where the magnitude of residual voltage during a ground/earth fault is unpredictable, the element can
be disabled to prevent protection elements being blocked during fault conditions.
Standard CTS must not be used to inhibit the operation of Current differential protection as this is a
local supervision and therefore it will not be fast enough to inhibit the operation of the differential
protection at the remote end.
5.3 Circuit Breaker (CB) Condition Monitoring
5.3.1 Setting the  ^ Thresholds

Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCBs), oil
changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes
are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in
premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, so oil degradation is slower than
expected. The  ^ counters monitor the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made.
For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of  2t. This is where
‘’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting
time).
As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the P841 is normally set to monitor the sum of
the broken current squared, by setting “Broken ^” = 2.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-69
Note: The settings are CB1 Broken ^, and CB2 Broken ^.
For circuit breakers operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of
“Broken ^” = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications “Broken ^” may be set lower, typically 1.4
or 1.5. An alarm in this instance may indicate the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure
testing, for example. The setting range for “Broken ^” is variable between 1.0 and 2.0 in 0.1 steps. It
is imperative that any maintenance program must be fully compliant with the switchgear
manufacturer’s instructions.
5.3.2 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds

Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Therefore,
routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations.
Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when
preventative maintenance is due. If maintenance is not carried out, the IED can be set to lock out the
auto-reclose function on reaching a second operations threshold. This prevents further reclosure
when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the switchgear
manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCBs) can only perform a certain number of fault
interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes
carbonizing of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties.
The maintenance alarm threshold, No. CB Ops Maint can be set to indicate the requirement for oil
sampling for dielectric testing, or for more comprehensive maintenance. The lockout threshold
No CB Ops. Lock can be set to disable auto-reclosure when repeated further fault interruptions could
not be guaranteed. This minimizes the risk of oil fires or explosion.
Note: The settings use No. CB1 Ops Maint and No. CB2 Ops Maint.
5.3.3 Setting the Operating Time Thresholds

Slow circuit breaker operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore,
alarm and lockout thresholds CB Time Maint./CB Time Lockout) are provided and are settable in the
range of 5 to 500 ms. This time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
5.3.4 Setting the Excessive Fault Frequency Thresholds

Persistent faults will generally cause auto-reclose lockout, with subsequent maintenance attention.
Intermittent faults such as clashing vegetation may repeat outside of any reclaim time, and the
common cause might never be investigated. For this reason it is possible to set a frequent operations
counter on the IED which allows the number of operations Fault Freq. Count over a set time period
Fault Freq. Time to be monitored. Separate alarm and lockout thresholds can be set.
5.4 Read Only Mode

With IEC 61850 and Ethernet/Internet communication capabilities, security has become a pressing
issue. Px40 IEDs allow the user to remotely enable or disable the configuration change.
Read only mode can be enabled/disabled for the following rear ports:
 Rear Port 1 - IEC 60870-5-103 and Courier protocols

 Rear Port 2 (if fitted) Courier protocol
 Ethernet Port (if fitted) Courier protocol (tunnelled)
8-70 P446/EN/TM/E
6 TWO CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL WORKED EXAMPLE

This section shows a worked example of the control of a feeder switched by a dual circuit breaker.
Detailed explanation of the control of such a scheme is shown in the Operation chapter.
6.1 Introduction
This application example is for two shot, single and three phase, auto-reclosing at one end of an EHV
(500 kV) overhead transmission line switched by two circuit breakers in a one and a half switch
configuration.
The circuit breakers are capable of either single phase or three phase tripping. Circuit breaker 1 (CB1)
is designated as Leader and recloses before Circuit breaker 2 (CB2). CB2 becomes the designated
Follower, and recloses after a Follower Time delay after CB1 has successfully reclosed.
The Leader, CB1 is arranged for single/three phase tripping and reclosing. The Follower, CB2 is
arranged to trip three phase for all faults.
For a single phase fault, CB1 trips single phase and CB2 trips three phase. When the fault has been
cleared, CB1 recloses single phase without any system voltage checks after the selected Single
Phase AR dead time. After the follower time delay, CB2 recloses three phase subject to a
synchronism check between the line and Bus 2.
For a two phase or three phase fault, both circuit breakers trip three phase. When the fault has been
cleared, CB1 recloses three phase after the selected Three Phase AR dead time, with either live
bus/dead line or live bus/live line check synchronism between the line and Bus 1. When CB1 has
successfully reclosed, after the follower time delay, CB2 recloses three phase, subject to a
synchronism check between the line and Bus 2.
For live line/live bus three phase reclosing of either circuit breaker, acceptable conditions are typically:
 The phase angle difference is not greater than 20 degrees;

 The slip frequency is not greater than 0.05 Hz/s; and
 The magnitudes of both the applied line voltage and “compensated” Bus voltage are between
85% and 120% of nominal; and
 The magnitude of the difference between the applied line voltage and the “compensated” Bus
voltage on either side of the circuit breaker is not greater than 10% of nominal.
It is assumed that reclosing at the remote line end is either single phase with no system voltage
checks, or three phase with live bus/live line synchronism check.
6.2 Circuit Breaker Status

The circuit breaker open/closed status is signalled to the auto-reclose scheme by separate type 52B
auxiliary switch contacts on each circuit breaker pole (contact open when circuit breaker phase is
closed, contact closed when the circuit breaker pole is open).
6.3 Voltage Inputs

The voltage inputs to the auto-reclose equipment are:
 3 phase input (3P + N, magnitude 110 V Ph-Ph, 63.5 V Ph-N) from a line VT, connected to the
Line VT (main VT) input;
 1 phase input (A-B, magnitude 110 V) from a Bus1 VT connected to the Bus1 VT
(CB1 CS VT), input;
P446/EN/TM/E 8-71
 1 phase input (A-B, magnitude 110 V) from a Bus2 VT connected to the Bus2 VT
(CB2 CS VT), input.
Under healthy system conditions each bus VT (check sync VT) input leads the A-phase to Neutral
Line VT input (main VT) by 30 degrees and has voltage magnitude of 110 V (assumes settings in
secondary values).
6.4 Application Settings

Typical values for the principal settings and user commands related to the auto-reclosing and system
voltage check functions are given below. They are presented in the order in which they appear in the
menu. The hexadecimal numbers in brackets represent the Courier cell location in the menu.
6.4.1 CB CONTROL Menu:

In the CB CONTROL column, the Autoreclose Mode command (07 0B) should be activated by setting
to In Service;
The data cell AR Status (07 0E) should display In Service.
The CB1 Status Input (07 11): should be set to 52B 1Pole;
The CB2 Status Input (07 80): should be set to 52B 1Pole.
6.4.2 CONFIGURATION Menu:

In the CONFIGURATION column, the following should all be set to Enabled:
 Distance (09 0B)

 System Checks (09 23)
 Auto-Reclose (09 24)
6.4.3 CT & VT RATIOS Menu:

In the CT & VT RATIOS column, the following should be set:
 Main VT Primary (0A 01): set nominal system primary ph-ph voltage (500 kV);
 Main VT Sec’y (0A 02): set 110 V;
 CB1 CS VT Prim’y (0A 03): set nominal system primary ph-ph voltage (500 kV);
 CB1 CS VT Sec’y (0A 04): set 110 V;
 CB2 CS VT Prim’y (0A 05): set nominal system primary ph-ph voltage (500 kV);
 CB2 CS VT Sec’y (0A 06): set 110 V;
 CS Input (0A 0F): set A-N;
 CB1 CS VT PhShft (0A 21): set -30 degrees (this creates a “compensated” Bus1 phase angle
normally in phase with the selected CS Input);
 CB1 CS VT Mag (0A 22): set 0.58 (this creates a “compensated” Bus1 voltage magnitude
normally equal to that of the selected CS Input);
 CB2 CS VT PhShft (0A 23): set -30 degrees (this creates a “compensated” Bus2 phase angle
normally in phase with the selected CS Input);
 CB2 CS VT Mag (0A 24): set 0.58 (creates a “compensated” Bus2 voltage magnitude normally
equal to that of the selected CS Input);
8-72 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: VT secondary voltage settings in this section of the menu are always set in terms of phase to phase
values, even when the actual inputs are taken from phase to neutral VT terminals.
6.4.4 GROUP 1 LINE PARAMETERS Menu:

In the GROUP 1 LINE PARAMETERS column, the following should be set:
 CB1Tripping Mode (30 0C): set 1 and 3 Pole;

 CB2Tripping Mode (30 0E): set 3 Pole.
6.4.5 GROUP 1 DISTANCE Menu:

In the GROUP 1 DISTANCE column, appropriate settings should be applied and the elements
enabled as per the operational requirements. Operation of the Zone 1 tripping and/or the operation of
the aided schemes will initiate auto-reclose.
6.4.6 GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS Menu:

In the GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS column, the following should be set:
 Live Line (48 85): set 32 V (typical setting 50% of nominal applied voltage of selected CS Input
(set to A-N in this example))
 Dead Line (48 86): set 13 V (typical setting 20% of nominal applied voltage of selected CS
Input (set to A-N in this example))
 Live Bus 1 (48 87): set 32 V (typical setting 50% of “compensated” nominal applied voltage)
 Dead Bus 1 (48 88): set 13 V (typical setting 20% of “compensated” nominal applied voltage)
 Live Bus 2 (48 89): set 32 V (typical setting 50% of “compensated” nominal applied voltage)
 Dead Bus 2 (48 8 A): set 13 V (typical setting 20% of “compensated” nominal applied voltage)
 CS UV (48 8B): set 54 V (typical setting 85% of nominal applied voltage of selected
CS Input (set to A-N in this example))
 CS OV (48 8C): set 76 V (typical setting 120% of nominal applied voltage of selected CS Input
(set to A-N in this example))
 Sys Checks CB1 (48 8D): set Enabled
 CB1 CS Volt. Blk (48 8E): set V< V> and Vdiff
 CB1 CS1 Status (48 8F): set Enabled
 CB1 CS1 Angle (48 90): set 20 degree
 CB1 CS1 Vdiff (48 91): set 6.5 V (typical setting 10% of nominal applied voltage of selected CS
 CB1 CS1 SlipCtrl (48 92): set Enabled
 CB1 CS1 SlipFreq (48 93): set 0.05 Hz
 CB1 CS2 Status (48 94): set Disabled
 Sys Checks CB2 (48 9B): set Enabled
 CB2 CS Volt. Blk (48 9C): set V< V> and Vdiff
 CB2 CS1 Status (48 9D): set Enabled
 CB2 CS1 Angle (48 9E): set 20 degrees
P446/EN/TM/E 8-73
 CB2 CS1 Vdiff (48 9F): set 6.5 V (typical setting 10% of nominal applied voltage of selected CS
 CB2 CS1 SlipCtrl (48 A0): set Enable
 CB2 CS1 SlipFreq (48 A1): set 0.05 Hz
 CB2 CS2 Status (48 94): set Disabled
6.4.7 GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE Menu:

In the GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE column, the following should be set:
 Num CBs (49 50): set Both CB1&CB2

 Lead/Foll ARMode (49 53): set L 1/3P, F 3P
 Leader Select By (49 55): set Menu
 Select Leader (49 56): set Sel Leader CB1
 BF if LFail Cls (49 57): set Enabled
 AR Shots (49 59): set 2
 Multi Phase AR (49 5C): set Allow Autoclose
 Discrim Time (49 5D): set 0.5 sec (set as per application requirements)
 CB IS Time (49 60): set 5 sec (this requires the circuit breaker to have been in the closed
position for at least 5 seconds before fault occurrence will enable auto-reclose initiation. It is
designed to prevent auto-reclosure for a fault immediately after manual circuit breaker closure
(switch on to fault))
 CB IS Memory Time (49 61): set 0.5 sec
 DT Start by Prot (49 62): set Protection Reset (measured dead time starts when protection
resets)
 3PDTStart WhenLD (49 63): set Disabled
 DTStart by CB Op (49 64): set Disabled
 SP AR Dead Time (49 67): set 0.5 sec (typical)
 3P AR DT Shot 1 (49 68): set 0.3 sec (or as per application requirements and considerations at
circuit breaker location)
 3P AR DT Shot 2 (49 68): set 60 sec (or as per application requirements and considerations at
the circuit breaker location)
 Follower Time (49 6C): set 5 sec (typical)
 SPAR ReclaimTime (49 6D): set 180 sec (or as required to suit circuit breaker duty cycle)
 3P AR ReclaimTime (49 6E): set 180 sec (or as required to suit circuit breaker duty cycle)
 AR CBHealthyTime (49 6F): set 0.3 sec
 AR CheckSyncTime (49 70): set 0.3 sec
 Z1 AR (49 72): set Initiate AR
 Diff AR (49 73): set Initiate AR
 Dist Aided AR (49 74): set Initiate AR
 All other protection inputs (Z2T AR (49 72) onwards) : set Block AR;
 CB1L SC all (49 A6): set Enabled
8-74 P446/EN/TM/E
 CB1L SC Shot 1 (49 A7): set Enabled

 CB1L SC ClsNoDly (49 A8): set Disabled
 CB1L SC CS1 (49 A9): set Enabled
 CB1L SC CS2 (49 AA): set Disabled
 CB1L SC DLLB (49 AB): set Enabled
 CB1L SC LLDB (49 AC): set Disabled
 CB1L SC DLDB (49 AD): set Disabled
 CB2F SC all (49 BD): set Enabled
 CB2F SC Shot 1 (49 BE): set Enabled
 CB2F SC CS1 (49 BF): set Enabled
 CB2F SC CS2 (49 C0): set Disabled
 CB2F SC DLLB (49 C1): set Disabled
 CB2F SC LLDB (49 C2): set Disabled
 CB2F SC DLDB (49 C3): set Disabled
6.5 PSL (Programmable Scheme Logic) MAPPING

The PSL mapping of some of the opto inputs and relay outputs for this application example are shown
below for guidance.
To test the application example, as well as applying appropriate current and voltage connections, the
settings, and the PSL, it is necessary to use some secondary test equipment capable of mimicking the
circuit breaker status.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-75
For any specific application, the Application Engineer must analyze the particular power systems to
determine the appropriate settings and PSL mappings.
8-76 P446/EN/TM/E
7 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT) REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Recommended CT Classes (British and IEC)

Class X current transformers with a knee point voltage greater or equal than that calculated can be
used.
Class 5P protection CTs can be used, noting that the knee point voltage equivalent these offer can be
approximated from:
Vk = (VA x ALF)/In + (RCT x ALF x In)
Where:
VA = Voltampere burden rating
ALF = Accuracy limit factor
In = CT nominal secondary current
7.2 Distance Protection CT Requirements:
7.2.1 Zone 1 Reach Point Accuracy (RPA)

Vk  KRPA x IF Z1 x (1+ X/R). (RCT + RL)
Where:
Vk = Required CT knee point voltage (volts)
KRPA = Fixed dimensioning factor = always 0.6
IF Z1 = Max. secondary phase fault current at Zone 1 reach point (A)
X/R = Primary system reactance/resistance ratio
RCT= CT secondary winding resistance ()
RL = Single lead resistance from CT to relay ()
7.3 Zone 1 Close-up Fault Operation

An additional calculation must be performed for all cables, and any lines where the source impedance
ratio might be less than SIR = 2.
Vk  Kmax x IF max x (RCT + RL)
Where:
Kmax = Fixed dimensioning factor = always 1.4
IF max = Max. secondary phase fault current (A).
Then, the highest of the two calculated knee points must be used.
Note: It is not necessary to repeat the calculation for earth faults, as the phase reach calculation (3) is
the worst-case for CT dimensioning.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-77
7.4 Time Delayed Distance Zones

When a time delayed distance zone is being used, there is no need to calculate the required Vk
separately. This is due to the employed time delay (usually more than 3 times the primary time
constant for a fault at the remote bus of the protected feeder), which overrides the transient conditions.
When it is insisted to do some calculations for the time delayed distance zone, then we should use the
following equation
Vk > If (RCT + RL)
Where If is the current for a fault at the remote bus of the protected feeder (in other words, the through
fault current for the current differential function)
7.5 Determining Vk for an IEEE “C" class CT

Where American/IEEE standards are used to specify CTs, the C class voltage rating can be checked
to determine the equivalent Vk (knee point voltage according to IEC).
The equivalence formula is:
Vk = [(C rating in volts) x 1.05] + [100 x RCT]
7.6 Worked Example for CT Requirements

The Power system and the line parameters (Line length: 100 km) as given in section 4.1 is used here
to calculate CT requirements.
7.6.1 Important notes to be considered

 Distance Zone1 reach point case – Both If and X/R are to be calculated for a fault at Zone1
reach point
 For calculating the CT requirements, the bus bar short time symmetrical fault rating shall be
considered as the bus fault level.
 If only indicative X/Rs are available, the circuit breaker’s dc breaking capacity is used to derive
the primary time constant and therefore the primary system X/R. It is derived from the circuit
breaker manufacturer’s practical primary time constants. These vary between 50 ms (66 kV
and 132 kV breakers) and 120 ms (220 kV and 400 kV breakers). 150 ms is a practical figure
for generator circuit breakers.
7.6.2 System Data

In the following example, the following parameters have been considered for the CT calculations:
System voltage - 230 kV
System frequency - 50 Hz
System grounding - solid
Single circuit operation between Green Valley and Blue River
CT ratio - 1200/1
Line length - 100 kms
Line positive sequence impedance Z1 = 0.089 + j 0.476 ohm / km
Bus fault level - 40 kA
Primary time constant = 120 ms
8-78 P446/EN/TM/E
7.6.3 Calculation of Primary X/R

Primary X/R till the Green Valley bus = 2 * pi * f * primary time constant in s
= 2 * pi * 50 * 0.12
Primary X/R till the bus = 37.7
7.6.4 Calculation of Source Impedance Zs

Source Impedance Zs = 230 kV / (1.732 * 40 kA)
= 3.32 ohms
Source angle = tan-1 (X/R)
= tan-1 (37.7)
= 88.48 deg
Hence, Zs = 0.088 + j 3.317 ohms
7.6.5 Calculation of Full Line Impedance (full 100 kms)

Z1 = 0.089 + j 0.476 ohm / km
ZL = 8.9 + j 47.6 ohms
ZL = 48.42 ohms with an angle 79.4 deg
7.6.6 Calculation of Total Impedance Till Remote Bus Bar

ZT = Zs + ZL = 8.988 + j 50.917 ohms
= 51.7 ohms with an angle of 80 deg
7.6.7 Calculation of through Fault X/R

X/R thro = 50.917 / 8.988
= 5.66
7.6.8 Calculation of through Fault If

If thro = 230kV / (1.732 * 51.7)
= 2568.5 A primary
= 2.14 A (secondary)
7.6.9 Calculation of Line Impedance Till Zone1 Reach Point (80 kms)
Zzone1 = 0.8 * ZL = 7.12 + j 38.08 ohms
= 38.73 ohms with an angle of 79.4 deg
7.6.10 Calculation of Total Impedance Till Zone1 Reach Point

ZTzone1 = Zs + Zzone1
= 7.208 + j 41.397 ohms
= 42.019 ohms with an angle of 80 deg
P446/EN/TM/E 8-79
7.6.11 Calculation of X/R Till Zone1 Reach Point

X/R Zone1 = 41.397 / 7.208
= 5.74
7.6.12 Calculation of Fault Current Till Zone1 Reach Point

If Zone1 = 230 kV / (1.732 * 42.019)
= 3160.34 A (primary)
= 2.63 A (secondary)
7.6.13 CT Vk for Distance Zone1 Reach Point

Vk  KRPA x IF z1 x (1+ X/R). (RCT + RL) -- From section 7.2
Vk > 0.6 * 2.63 * (1+5.74) * (RCT+RL)
Vk > 10.65 (RCT + RL)
7.6.14 CT Vk for Distance Zone1 Close-up Fault

SIR = Zs / Zzone1 = 3.32 / 38.73 is less than 2; so we need to do this Vk calculation
Close-up fault current = 40 kA (primary) = 33.33 A (secondary)
Vk  Kmax x IF max x (RCT + RL) -- From section 7.3
Vk > 1.4 * 33.33 * ( RCT + RL)
Vk > 46.67 (RCT + RL)
7.6.15 CT Vk for Distance Time Delayed Zones

Vk > If (RCT + RL) -- From section 7.4
Vk > If thro * (RCT + RL)
Vk > 2.14 (RCT + RL)
7.6.16 Vk to be considered
Using the above sections, the different Vk requirements are to be calculated for all the functions that
will be enabled, or that will be brought into operation. Then the highest Vk shall be considered for the
CT design.
8-80 P446/EN/TM/E
8 HIGH BREAK OUTPUT CONTACTS

The high break contacts allow the elimination of auxiliary relays. This in turn helps in the provision of
cost effective solutions, minimizing space, wiring, commissioning time, etc.
According to the model selected, in addition to standard output relay boards, one or two ‘high break’
output relay boards can be fitted. Each houses four normally open output contacts suitable for
breaking loads higher than can be broken with the standard contacts. The performance and possible
applications of these contacts are described in the Hardware and Software Design chapters of this
manual.
P446/EN/TM/E 8-81
9 AUXILIARY SUPPLY FUSE RATING

In the Safety section of this manual, the maximum allowable fuse rating of 16 A is quoted. To allow
time grading with fuses upstream, a lower fuselink current rating is often preferable. Use of standard
ratings of between 6 A and 16 A is recommended. Low voltage fuselinks, rated at 250 V minimum
and compliant with IEC 60269-2 general application type gG are acceptable, with high rupturing
capacity. This gives equivalent characteristics to HRC "red spot" fuses type NIT/TIA often specified
historically.
The table below recommends advisory limits on IEDs connected per fused spur. This applies to
MiCOM Px40 series devices with hardware suffix C and higher, as these have inrush current limitation
on switch-on, to conserve the fuse-link.
Maximum number of MiCOM Px40 IEDs recommended per fuse
Battery nominal voltage 6A 10 A fuse 15 or 16 A fuse Fuse rating > 16 A
24 to 54 V 2 4 6 Not permitted
Table 13: Recommended advisory limits on IEDs connected per fused spur
Alternatively, Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) may be used to protect the auxiliary supply circuits.
8-82 P446/EN/TM/E
MICOMho P446 9 SCADA Communications
SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 9
P446/EN/TM/E 9-1
9 SCADA Communications MICOMho P446
9-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The MiCOM Px40 series supports substation SCADA communications based on two communications
technologies; serial and Ethernet. Serial communications has been around for a long time, and there
are many substations still wired up this way. Ethernet is a more modern medium and all modern
substation communications is based on this technology. Alstom Grid's MiCOM Px40 products support
both of these communication technologies.
1 Chapter Overview
2 Communication Interfaces
3 Serial Communication
3.1 EIA(RS)232 Bus
3.2 EIA(RS)485 Bus
3.3 K-Bus
3.4 Optical Fibre
4 Standard Ethernet Communication

5 Redundant Ethernet Communication
5.1 Redundancy Protocols
5.1.1 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
5.1.2 Self-Healing Protocol (SHP)
5.1.3 Dual-Homing Protocol (DHP)
5.2 Forwarding
5.3 Priority Tagging
5.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
5.5 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
6 Overview of Data Protocols

7 Courier
7.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer
7.2 Courier Database
7.3 Settings Categories
7.4 Setting Changes
7.5 Setting Transfer Mode
7.6 Event Extraction
7.6.1 Automatic Event Record Extraction
7.6.2 Manual Event Record Extraction
7.7 Disturbance Record Extraction
7.8 Programmable Scheme Logic Settings
7.9 Configuration
8 IEC 60870-5-103
8.2 Initialization
8.3 Time Synchronization
8.4 Spontaneous Events
8.5 General Interrogation (GI)
8.6 Cyclic Measurements
8.7 Commands
P446/EN/TM/E 9-3
8.8 Test Mode

8.9 Disturbance Records
8.10 Command/Monitor Blocking
8.11 Configuration
9 DNP 3.0
9.2 Object 1 Binary Inputs
9.3 DNP 3.0 Object 10 Binary Outputs
9.4 Object 20 Binary Counters
9.5 Object 30 Analogue Input
9.6 Object 40 Analogue Output
9.7 Configuration
10 IEC 61850
10.1 Benefits of IEC 61850
10.2 IEC 61850 Interoperability
10.3 The IEC 61850 Data Model
10.4 IEC 61850 in MiCOM IEDs
10.5 The IEC 61850 Data Model of MiCOM IEDs
10.6 The IEC 61850 Communication Services of MiCOM IEDs
10.7 IEC 61850 Peer-to-peer (GSSE) communications
10.8 Mapping GOOSE Messages to Virtual Inputs
10.8.1 IEC 61850 GOOSE Configuration
10.9 Ethernet Functionality
10.9.1 Ethernet Disconnection
10.9.2 Loss of Power
9-4 P446/EN/TM/E
2 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
The MiCOM Px40 IEDs have a number of standard and optional communication interfaces. The
standard and optional hardware and protocols are summarised below:
Physical
Port Availability Use Data Protocols
layer
Front Standard RS232 Local settings Courier
Rear Port 1 RS232 / RS485 / SCADA Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0
Standard
(RP1 copper) K-Bus Remote settings (order option)
Rear Port 1 SCADA Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0
Optional Fibre
(RP1 fibre) Remote settings (order option)
Rear Port 2 RS232 / RS485 / SCADA
Optional Courier
(RP2) K-Bus Remote settings
IEC 61850 or DNP3 IEC 61850, Courier (tunnelled) or DNP3.0
Ethernet Optional Ethernet
Remote settings (order option)
Notes:
1. Optional communications boards are always fitted into slot A and only slot A.
2. When optional fibre board is used for serial SCADA communication over optical fibre, the fibre port
assumes designation RP1. The RP1 copper ports on power supply board are then disabled.
3. It is only possible to fit one optional communications board, therefore RP2 and Ethernet
communications are mutually exclusive.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-5
3 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
Serial communication is possible over metallic or optical fibre cables.
The physical layer standards that are used for metallic serial communications for SCADA purposes
are:
 EIA(RS)232 (often abbreviated to RS232)

 EIA(RS)485 (often abbreviated to RS485)
 K-Bus (a proprietary customization of RS485)
 Serial communication over optical fibre
RS232 is for point-to-point communication over very short distances.

RS485 is for longer distances and allow daisy-chaining and multi-dropping of IEDs.
K-Bus is very similar to RS485, but cannot be mixed on the same link as RS485. Unlike RS485, K-Bus
signals applied across two terminals are not polarized.
Serial links over fibre use a proprietary low level protocol based on HDLC.
It is important to note that these are not data protocols. They only describe the physical
characteristics required for two devices to communicate with each other. A full description of these
physical layer protocols is available from a number of sources including the published standards.
3.1 EIA(RS)232 Bus

The EIA(RS)-232 interface uses the IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 frame format.
The IED supports an IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 connection on the front-port. This is intended for temporary
local connection and is not suitable for permanent connection. This interface uses a fixed baud rate of
19200 bps, 11-bit frame (8 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, even parity bit), and a fixed device address
of '1'.
EIA(RS)232 interfaces are polarized.
3.2 EIA(RS)485 Bus

The RS485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex, fully isolated serial connection to the IED.
The connection is polarized but there is no agreed definition of which terminal is which. If the master
is unable to communicate with the product, and the communication parameters match, then it is
possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
The RS485 bus must be terminated at each end with 120 Ω 0.5 W terminating resistors between the
signal wires.
The RS485 standard requires that each device be directly connected to the actual bus. Stubs and
tees are forbidden. Loop bus and Star topologies are not part of the RS485 standard and are also
forbidden.
Two-core screened twisted pair cable should be used. The final cable specification is dependent on
the application, although a multi-strand 0.5 mm2 per core is normally adequate. The total cable length
must not exceed 1000 m. It is important to avoid circulating currents, which can cause noise and
interference, especially when the cable runs between buildings. For this reason, the screen should be
continuous and connected to ground at one end only, normally at the master connection point.
The RS485 signal is a differential signal and there is no signal ground connection. If a signal ground
connection is present in the bus cable then it must be ignored. At no stage should this be connected
to the cable's screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
9-6 P446/EN/TM/E
It may be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal level
has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when all the
slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. This
may be because the master is waiting in receive mode, in a high impedance state, until it has
something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss the first bits of the first character
in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message and consequently not responding.
Symptoms of this are; poor response times (due to retries), increasing message error counts, erratic
communications, and in the worst case, complete failure to communicate.
Biasing Requirements
Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1 V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point. The
DC source used for the bias must be clean to prevent noise being injected. Figure 2 shows a typical
biasing arrangement.
Note: Some devices may be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components would not
be required.
Figure 1: RS485 bus biasing arrangements
It is possible to use the product’s field voltage output (48 V DC) to bias the bus using values of 2.2 kΩ
0.5 W bias resistors instead of the 180 Ω resistors shown in the above diagram. If using the field
voltage, please heed the following warnings.
Caution The following warnings apply.
It is extremely important that the 120 Ω termination resistors are fitted.

Otherwise the bias voltage may be excessive and may damage the devices
connected to the bus
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, Alstom Grid cannot
assume responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected
to the network as a result of incorrect application of this voltage
Ensure the field voltage is not used for other purposes, such as powering
logic inputs, because noise may be passed to the communication network.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-7
3.3 K-Bus
K-Bus is a robust signalling method based on RS485 voltage levels. K-Bus incorporates message
framing, based on a 64 kbps synchronous HDLC protocol with FM0 modulation to increase speed and
security.
The rear interface is used to provide a permanent connection for K-Bus, which allows multi-drop
connection.
A K-Bus spur consists of up to 32 IEDs connected together in a multi-drop arrangement using twisted
pair wiring. The spur can be up to 1000 m in length. The K-Bus twisted pair connection is non-
polarized.
Two-core screened twisted pair cable should be used. The final cable specification is dependent on
the application, although a multi-strand 0.5 mm2 per core is normally adequate. The total cable length
must not exceed 1000 m. It is important to avoid circulating currents, which can cause noise and
interference, especially when the cable runs between buildings. For this reason, the screen should be
continuous and connected to ground at one end only, normally at the master connection point.
The K-Bus signal is a differential signal and there is no signal ground connection. If a signal ground
connection is present in the bus cable then it must be ignored. At no stage should this be connected
to the cable's screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
It is not possible to use a standard EIA(RS)232 to EIA(RS)485 converter to convert IEC 60870-5
FT1.2 frames to K-Bus. A protocol converter, namely the KITZ101, KITZ102 or KITZ201, must be
used for this purpose. Please consult Alstom Grid for information regarding the specification and
supply of KITZ devices. The following figure demonstrates a typical K-Bus connection.
9-8 P446/EN/TM/E
P0109ENf
Figure 2: Remote communication using K-Bus
Further information about K-Bus is available in the publication R6509: K-Bus Interface Guide, which is
available on request.
3.4 Optical Fibre

It is also possible to use optical fibre as a physical medium for serial communications. An optional fibre
optic board is available for this purpose. This board allows the RS485 frames to be transmitted over
optical fibres. This communication board is available for all available serial data protocols.
850nm multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm fibres are used and are presented on BFOC 2.5 ST
connectors.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-9
4 STANDARD ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

Several different types of Ethernet board are available for use depending on the chosen model. The
available boards and their features are described in the Hardware Design chapter of this manual.
The Ethernet interface is required for either IEC 61850 or DNP3 over Ethernet (protocol must be
selected at time of order). With either of these protocols, the Ethernet interface also offers
communication with MiCOM S1 Studio for remote configuration and record extraction.
Fibre optic connection is recommended for use in permanent connections in a substation environment,
as it offers advantages in terms of noise rejection. The fibre optic port provides 100 Mbps
communication and uses type BFOC 2.5 (ST) connectors. Fibres should be suitable for 1300 nm
transmission and be multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm.
The unit can also be connected to either a 10Base-T or a 100Base-TX Ethernet hub or switch using
the RJ45 port. The port automatically senses which type of hub is connected. Due to noise and
interference reasons, this connection type is only recommended for short-term connections over a
short distance.
Table 1 shows the signals and pins on the RJ45connector.
Pin Signal name Signal definition
1 TXP Transmit (positive)
2 TXN Transmit (negative)
3 RXP Receive (positive)
4 - Not used
5 - Not used
6 RXN Receive (negative)
7 - Not used
8 - Not used
Table 1: Ethernet signals
Note: For Redundant Ethernet, please see separate chapter
9-10 P446/EN/TM/E
5 REDUNDANT ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

Redundancy is transparent backup. It is required where a single point of failure cannot be tolerated,
and is thus required in critical applications such as substation automation. Redundancy acts as an
insurance policy, providing an alternative route in the event that one route fails.
The Redundant Ethernet Board (REB) designed for the Px40 series assures "bumpless" redundancy
at the intelligent electronic device (IED) level. "Bumpless" in this context is a term used to describe the
transferring from one communication path to another without noticeable consequences.
5.1 Redundancy Protocols

There are three redundancy protocols available:
 RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)

 SHP (Self-Healing Protocol)
 DHP (Dual Homing Protocol)
The protocol must be selected at the time of ordering.
5.1.1 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

RSTP is a standard used to quickly reconnect a network fault by finding an alternative path, allowing
loop-free network topology. Although RSTP can recover network faults quickly, the fault recovery time
depends on the number of devices and the topology. The recovery time also depends on the time
taken by the devices to determine the root bridge and compute the port roles (discarding, learning,
forwarding). The devices do this by exchanging Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) containing
information about bridge IDs and root path costs. See the IEEE 802.1D 2004 standard for further
information.
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 1 Switch 2
IED 1 IED 2 IED 1 IED 2
Star connection with redundant ports Ring connection managed by RSTP

managed by RSTP blocking function. blocking function on upper switches
and IEDs interconnected directly.
P4406ENa
Figure 3: Px4x attached to a redundant Ethernet star or ring circuit
The RSTP solution is based on open standards. It is therefore compatible with other Manufacturers’
IEDs that use the RSTP protocol. The RSTP recovery time is typically 300 ms but it increases with
network size, therefore cannot achieve the desired bumpless redundancy.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-11
5.1.2 Self-Healing Protocol (SHP)

Unlike RSTP, the Alstom Grid SHP solution responds to the constraints of critical time applications
such as the GOOSE messaging of IEC 61850. SHP in MiCOM Px4x is fully compatible with SHP used
in the MiCOM C264 and MiCOM H series of switches that are components of the PACiS Substation
Automation System.
SHP is applied to double-ring network topologies. When a fibre is broken, both end stations detect the
break. Using both the primary and redundant networks the ring is automatically reclosed.
Figure 4: MiCOM ALSTOM products in a self-healing ring
The devices shown in Figure 4 are repeaters with a standard 802.3 Ethernet switch plus the Self-
Healing Manager (SHM). Figure 5 shows the internal architecture of such a device.
Figure 5: SHM Internal architecture
9-12 P446/EN/TM/E
The SHM functions manage the ring. If the fibre optic connection between two devices is broken, the
network continues to run correctly.
Normally the Ethernet packets travel on the primary fibre in the same direction, and only a checking
frame (4 octets) is sent every 5 μs on the secondary fibre in the opposite direction.
If the link goes down, both SHMs immediately start the network self-healing. At one side of the break,
received messages are no longer sent to the primary fibre but are sent to the secondary fibre. On the
other side of the break, messages received on the secondary fibre are sent to the primary fibre and
the new topological loop is closed in less than 1 ms.
As well as providing bumpless redundancy for unintentional network failure, this system can also be
used to extend the number of devices, or the size of a sub-station network, without having to disable
the network.
First, the loop is opened intentionally and it immediately self heals. Then the new equipment is
connected and it immediately self heals again, closing the loop.
To increase the reliability some additional mechanisms are used:
 The quality of transmission is monitored. Each frame (Ethernet packet or checking frame) is
controlled by the SHM. Even if the link is not broken, but a larger than normal error rate is
detected, the redundancy mechanism is initiated.
 Even if there is no traffic in the primary link, the secondary link is still supervised by sending out
checking frames every 5 μs.
Figure 6: Nominal redundant Ethernet ring architecture
P446/EN/TM/E 9-13
Figure 7: Ethernet ring architecture after failure
5.1.3 Dual-Homing Protocol (DHP)

Unlike RSTP, the Alstom Grid DHP solution responds to the constraints of critical time applications
such as the GOOSE messaging of IEC 61850.
DHP is applied to double-star network topologies. If the optical fibre connection between two devices
is broken, the network continues to operate correctly.
The Dual Homing Manager (DHM) handles topologies where a device is connected to two
independent networks, one being the "main" path, the other being the "backup" path. Both are active
at the same time.
In sending mode, packets from the device are sent by the DHM to the two networks. In receive mode,
the duplicate discard principle is used. This means that when both links are up, the MiCOM ALSTOM
H16x switch receives the same Ethernet frame twice. The DHM transmits the first frame received to
upper layers for processing, and the second frame is discarded. If one link is down, the frame is sent
through the link, received by the device, and passed to upper layers for processing.
Alstom Grid’s DHM fulfils automation requirements by delivering a very fast recovery time for the entire
network (less than 1 ms).
To increase reliability some specific mechanisms are used:
 Each frame carries a sequence number which is incremented and inserted into both frames.
 Specific frames are used to synchronize the discard mechanism.
9-14 P446/EN/TM/E
Figure 8: Dual homing mechanism
The H36x is a repeater with a standard 802.3 Ethernet switch, plus the DHM. Figure 9 shows the
internal architecture of such a device.
Px4x IED bus
Embedded Flash
Managed Switch Memory
Port MII
Failsafe
Dual Homing Address
Output
Relays Manager (DHM) Switch
100 base FX Ethernet

PHY PHY
Link A Link A
Rx Tx
Tx Rx
Link B Link B
P4415ENc
Key: PHY = Physical port
Figure 9: DHM Internal architecture
P446/EN/TM/E 9-15
Figure 10 shows a star-connected network, using DHP at substation level.
Figure 10: Dual homing star-connected network at substation level
5.2 Forwarding
The MiCOM ALSTOM Ethernet switch products support store and forward mode. The switch forwards
messages with known addresses to the appropriate port. The messages with unknown addresses,
the broadcast messages and the multicast messages are forwarded out to all ports except the source
port. MiCOM ALSTOM switches do not forward error packets, 802.3x pause frames, or local packets.
5.3 Priority Tagging

802.1p priority tagging is enabled on all ports.
5.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a network protocol designed to manage devices in
an IP network. SNMP uses a Management Information Base (MIB) that contains information about
parameters to supervise. The MIB format is a tree structure, with each node in the tree identified by a
numerical Object Identifier (OID). Each OID identifies a variable that can be read or set using SNMP
with the appropriate software. The information in the MIB is standardized.
Each system in a network (workstation, server, router, bridge, etc.) maintains a MIB that reflects the
status of the managed resources on that system, such as the version of the software running on the
device, the IP address assigned to a port or interface, the amount of free hard drive space, or the
number of open files. The MIB does not contain static data, but is instead an object-oriented, dynamic
9-16 P446/EN/TM/E
database that provides a logical collection of managed object definitions. The MIB defines the data
type of each managed object and describes the object.
The SNMP-related branches of the MIB tree are located in the internet branch, which contains two
main types of branches:
 Public branches (mgmt=2), which are defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
 Private branches (private=4), which are assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
(IANA). These are defined by the companies and organizations to which these branches are
assigned.
The following figure shows the structure of the SNMP MIB tree. There are no limits on the width and
depth of the MIB tree.
iso = 1
org = 3
dod = 6
internet = 1
mgmt = 2 private = 4
mib-2 = 1 enterprises = 1
system = 1 printers = 43 microsoft = 311
sysDescr = 1
P4516ENa
Figure 11: MIB tree structure
The top four levels of the hierarchy are fixed. These are:
 International Standards Organization (iso)

 Organization (org)
 Department of Defence (dod)
 Internet
Management (mgmt) is the main public branch. It defines network management parameters common
to devices from all vendors. Underneath the Management branch is MIB-II (mib-2), and beneath this
are branches for common management functions such as system management, printers, host
resources, and interfaces.
The private branch of the MIB tree contains branches for large organizations, organized under the
enterprises branch. This is not applicable to Alstom Grid.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-17
Redundant Ethernet board MIB Structure

The Alstom Grid MIB uses three types of OID:
 sysDescr
 sysUpTime
 sysName.
These are shown shaded in Table 2:

Address Name
0 CCITT
1 ISO
3 Org
6 DOD
1 Internet
2 mgmt
1 Mib-2
1 sys
1 sysDescr
3 sysUpTime
4 sysName
Remote Monitoring
16 RMON
1 statistics
1 etherstat
1 etherStatsEntry
9 etherStatsUndersizePkts
10 etherStatsOversizePkts
12 etherStatsJabbers
13 etherStatsCollisions
14 etherStatsPkts64Octets
15 etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
Table 2: Redundant Ethernet Board MIB Structure
Various SNMP client software tools can be used. Alstom Grid recommends using an SNMP MIB
browser, which can perform the basic SNMP operations such as GET, GETNEXT and RESPONSE.
Note: There are two IP addresses visible when communicating with the Redundant Ethernet Card via the
fibre optic ports: One for the IED itself and one for the on-board Ethernet switch. To access the
network using SNMP, use the IP address of the on-board Ethernet Switch and not that of the IED
REB. See the configuration chapter for further information.
9-18 P446/EN/TM/E
5.5 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is supported by both the IED and the redundant Ethernet
switch. SNTP is used to synchronize the clocks of computer systems over packet-switched, variable-
latency data networks, such as IP. A jitter buffer is used to reduce the effects of variable latency
introduced by queuing, ensuring a continuous data stream over the network.
The IED is synchronized by the SNTP server. This is achieved by entering the IP address of the
SNTP server into the IED using the IED Configurator software described in the Configuration chapter.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-19
6 OVERVIEW OF DATA PROTOCOLS

The Px40 series supports a wide range of protocols to make them applicable to many industries and
applications. The exact data protocols supported by a particular product depend on its chosen
application, but the following table gives a list of the data protocols that are typically available.
Data Protocol Layer 1 protocol Description
K-Bus, RS232, RS485, Ethernet
Courier Standard for SCADA communications developed by Alstom Grid.
and fibre
MODBUS RS485 and fibre Standard for SCADA communications developed by Modicon.
IEC 60870-5 CS103 RS485 and fibre IEC standard for SCADA communications
Standard for SCADA communications developed by Harris. Used mainly in
DNP 3.0 RS485, Ethernet and fibre
North America.
IEC 61850 Ethernet only IEC standard for substation automation. Facilitates interoperability.
Table 3: SCADA data protocols
The relationship of these protocols to the lower level physical layer protocols is shown in Figure 12.
Figure 12: SCADA data protocols
9-20 P446/EN/TM/E
7 COURIER
This section should provide sufficient detail to enable understanding of the Courier protocol at a level
required by most users. For situations where the level of information contained in this manual is
insufficient, further publications (R6511 and R6512) containing in-depth details about the protocol and
its use, are available on request.
Courier is an Alstom Grid proprietary communication protocol. Courier uses a standard set of
commands to access a database of settings and data in the IED. This allows a master to
communicate with a number of slave devices. The application-specific elements are contained in the
database rather than in the commands used to interrogate it, meaning that the master station does not
need to be preconfigured. Courier also provides a sequence of event (SOE) and disturbance record
extraction mechanism.

Courier can be used with three physical layer protocols: K-Bus, EIA(RS)232 or EIA(RS)485.
Several connection options are available for Courier
 The front serial RS232 port (for connection to Settings application software on, for example, a
laptop
 Rear Port 1 (RP1) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485 or K-Bus
 Optional fibre port (RP1 in slot A) - for permanent SCADA connection via optical fibre
 Optional Rear Port 2 (RP2) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485, K-Bus, or RS232
For either of the rear ports, both the IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel
menu or by a suitable application such as MiCOM S1 Studio.
7.2 Courier Database

The Courier database is two-dimensional and resembles a table. Each cell in the database is
referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to
255 (0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, for
example, 0A02 is column 0A row 02. Associated settings or data are part of the same column. Row
zero of the column has a text string to identify the contents of the column and to act as a column
heading.
The product-specific menu databases contain the complete database definition. This information is
also presented in the Settings chapter.
7.3 Settings Categories

There are two main categories of settings in protection IEDs:
 Control and support settings

 Protection settings
With the exception of the Disturbance Recorder settings, changes made to the control and support
settings are implemented immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Changes made to the
Protection settings and the Disturbance Recorder settings are stored in ‘scratchpad’ memory and are
not immediately implemented. These need to be committed by writing to the Save Changes cell in the
CONFIGURATION column.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-21
7.4 Setting Changes

Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes. Either method can be used for editing
any of the settings in the database.
Method 1
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
First, enter Setting mode: This checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits.
1. Preload Setting: This places a new value into the cell. This value is echoed to ensure that
setting corruption has not taken place. The validity of the setting is not checked by this action.
2. Execute Setting: This confirms the setting change. If the change is valid, a positive response
is returned. If the setting change fails, an error response is returned.
3. Abort Setting: This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method. It is ideally suited to on-line editors because the setting limits are
extracted before the setting change is made. However, this method can be slow if many settings are
being changed because three commands are required for each change.
Method 2
The Set Value command can be used to change a setting directly. The response to this command is
either a positive confirm or an error code to indicate the nature of a failure. This command can be
used to implement a setting more rapidly than the previous method, however the limits are not
extracted. This method is therefore most suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM S1
Studio, or for issuing preconfigured control commands.
7.5 Setting Transfer Mode

To transfer all of the settings to or from the unit, use the Setting Transfer cell (location BF03) in the
COMMS SYS DATA column. When this cell is set to 1, all of the settings are made visible. Any
setting changes made in this mode are stored in scratchpad memory, including control and support
settings. When the cell is set back to 0, all setting changes are verified and committed to non-volatile
memory.
7.6 Event Extraction

You can extract events either automatically (rear serial port only) or manually (either serial port). For
automatic extraction, all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier event
mechanism. This includes fault and maintenance data if appropriate. The manual approach allows
you to select events, faults, or maintenance data as desired.
7.6.1 Automatic Event Record Extraction

This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced. It is
only supported through the rear Courier port.
When new event information is created, the Event bit is set in the Status byte. This indicates to the
Master device that event information is available. The oldest, non-extracted event can be extracted
from the IED using the Send Event command. The IED responds with the event data.
Once an event has been extracted, the Accept Event command can be used to confirm that the event
has been successfully extracted. When all events have been extracted, the Event bit is reset. If there
are more events still to be extracted, the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command
as before.
9-22 P446/EN/TM/E
7.6.2 Manual Event Record Extraction

The VIEW RECORDS column (location 01) is used for manual viewing of event, fault, and
maintenance records. The contents of this column depend on the nature of the record selected. You
can select events by event number and directly select a fault or maintenance record by number.
Event Record Selection ('Select Event' cell: 0101)

This cell can be set the number of stored events. For simple event records (Type 0), cells 0102 to
0105 contain the event details. A single cell is used to represent each of the event fields. If the event
selected is a fault or maintenance record (Type 3), the remainder of the column contains the additional
information.
Fault Record Selection ('Select Fault' cell: 0105)

This cell can be used to select a fault record directly, using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of
up to five stored fault records. (0 is the most recent fault and 4 is the oldest). The column then
contains the details of the fault record selected.
Maintenance Record Selection ('Select Maint' cell: 01F0)

This cell can be used to select a maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4. This cell
operates in a similar way to the fault record selection.
If this column is used to extract event information, the number associated with a particular record
changes when a new event or fault occurs.
Event Types
The IED generates events under certain circumstances such as:
 Change of state of output contact

 Change of state of opto-input
 Protection element operation
 Alarm condition
 Setting change
 Password entered/timed-out
Event Record Format

The IED returns the following fields when the Send Event command is invoked:
 Cell reference
 Time stamp
 Cell text
 Cell value
The Menu Database contains tables of possible events, and shows how the contents of the above
fields are interpreted. Fault and Maintenance records return a Courier Type 3 event, which contains
the above fields plus two additional fields:
 Event extraction column

 Event number
These events contain additional information, which is extracted from the IED using the RECORDER
EXTRACTION column B4. Row 01 of the RECORDER EXTRACTION column contains a Select
Record setting that allows the fault or maintenance record to be selected. This setting should be set
to the event number value returned in the record. The extended data can be extracted from the IED by
uploading the text and data from the column.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-23
7.7 Disturbance Record Extraction

The stored disturbance records are accessible through the Courier interface. The records are
extracted using the RECORDER EXTRACTION column (B4).
The Select Record cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 is the oldest non-
extracted record. Older records which have been already been extracted are assigned positive values,
while younger records are assigned negative values. To help automatic extraction through the rear
port, the IED sets the Disturbance bit of the Status byte, whenever there are non-extracted
disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read
from the Trigger Time cell (B402). The disturbance record can be extracted using the block transfer
mechanism from cell B40B and saved in the COMTRADE format. MiCOM S1 Studio automatically
does this.
7.8 Programmable Scheme Logic Settings

The programmable scheme logic (PSL) settings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the IED
using the block transfer mechanism.
The following cells are used to perform the extraction:
 Domain cell (B204): Used to select either PSL settings (upload or download) or PSL
configuration data (upload only)
 Sub-Domain cell (B208): Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be uploaded or
downloaded.
 Version cell (B20C): Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to be
downloaded.
 Transfer Mode cell (B21C): Used to set up the transfer process.
 Data Transfer cell (B120): Used to perform upload or download.
The programmable scheme-logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from the IED using
this mechanism. MiCOM S1 Studio must be used to edit the settings. MiCOM MiCOM S1 Studio also
performs checks on the validity of the settings before they are transferred to the IED.
7.9 Configuration
To configure the IED for Courier, please see the Configuration chapter
9-24 P446/EN/TM/E
8 IEC 60870-5-103
The specification IEC 60870-5-103 (Telecontrol Equipment and Systems Part 5 Section 103:
Transmission Protocols), defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5, which were
designed for communication with protection equipment
This section describes how the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is applied to the Px40 platform. It is not a
description of the standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is
already familiar with the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
This section should provide sufficient detail to enable understanding of the standard at a level required
by most users. For situations where the level of information contained in this manual is insufficient, a
further publication (R6510) is available on request.
The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the device as the slave device. The
device conforms to compatibility level 2,as defined in the IEC60870-5-103.standard.
The following IEC 60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
 Initialization (reset)
 Time synchronization
 Event record extraction
 General interrogation
 Cyclic measurements
 General commands
 Disturbance record extraction
 Private codes

Two connection options are available for IEC 60870-5-103:
 Rear Port 1 (RP1) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485

If the optional fibre optic port is fitted, a menu item appears in which the active port can be selected.
However the selection is only effective following the next power up.
For either of the two connection modes, both the IED address and baud rate can be selected using the
front panel menu or by a suitable application such as MiCOM S1 Studio.
8.2 Initialization
Whenever the device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed
a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The device will respond to either of the
two reset commands; Reset CU or Reset FCB (Communication Unit or Frame Count Bit). The
difference between the two commands is that the Reset CU command will clear any unsent messages
in the transmit buffer, whereas the Reset FCB command does not delete any messages.
The device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5. The Cause of
Transmission (COT) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of
the reset command. The content of ASDU 5 is described in the IEC 60870-5-103 section of the Menu
Database, available from Alstom Grid separately if required.
In addition to the above identification message, it will also produce a power up event.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-25
8.3 Time Synchronization

The time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
The device will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC 60870-5-103. If the time
synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then the device will respond with a
confirm message. A time synchronization Class 1 event will be generated/produced whether the time-
synchronization message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message.
If the clock is being synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to set the device
time using the IEC 60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via the interface will cause the
device to create an event with the current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal
clock.
8.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized using the following information:
 Function type
 Information Number
The IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Menu Database contains a complete listing of all events produced
by the device.
8.5 General Interrogation (GI)

The GI request can be used to read the status of the device, the function numbers, and information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. These are shown in the IEC 60870-5-103 profile in
the Menu Database.
8.6 Cyclic Measurements

The device will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the
device using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The rate at which the device produces new
measured values can be controlled using the measurement period setting. This setting can be edited
from the front panel menu or using MiCOM S1 Studio. It is active immediately following a change.
The device transmits its measurands at 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value, as required
by the CS103 protocol.
8.7 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the Menu Database. The device will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) indicating ‘negative
acknowledgement’.
8.8 Test Mode

It is possible to disable the device output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be performed
using either the front panel menu or the front serial port. The IEC 60870-5-103 standard interprets this
as ‘test mode’. An event will be produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode.
Spontaneous events and cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the device is in test mode will have a
COT of ‘test mode’.
9-26 P446/EN/TM/E

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the standard
mechanisms described in IEC 60870-5-103.
Note: IEC 60870-5-103 only supports up to 8 records.
8.10 Command/Monitor Blocking

The device supports a facility to block messages in the monitor direction (data from the device) and
also in the command direction (data to the device). Messages can be blocked in the monitor and
command directions using one of the two following methods
 The menu command RP1 CS103Blocking in the COMMUNICATIONS column

 The DDB signals Monitor Blocked and Command Blocked
8.11 Configuration
To configure the IED for IEC 60870-1-5-103, please see the Configuration chapter.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-27
9 DNP 3.0
This section describes how the DNP 3.0 standard is applied to the Px40 platform. It is not a
already familiar with the DNP 3.0 standard.
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany the device profile document that is included in
the Menu Database document. The DNP 3.0 protocol is not described here, please refer to the
documentation available from the user group. The device profile document specifies the full details of
the DNP 3.0 implementation. This is the standard format DNP 3.0 document that specifies which
objects; variations and qualifiers are supported. The device profile document also specifies what data
is available from the device using DNP 3.0. The IED operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports
subset level 2, as described in the DNP 3.0 standard, plus some of the features from level 3.
The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP Users Group. For further information
on DNP 3.0 and the protocol specifications, please see www.dnp.org.

DNP 3.0 can be used with three physical layer protocols: EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485, or Ethernet.
Several connection options are available for DNP 3.0
 Rear Port 1 (RP1) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485

 Optional Rear Port 2 (RP2) - for permanent SCADA connection via RS485 or RS232
 An RJ45 connection on an optional Ethernet board - for permanent SCADA Ethernet connection
 A fibre connection on an optional Ethernet board - for permanent SCADA Ethernet connection
The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or by a suitable
application such as MiCOM S1 Studio.
When using a serial interface, the data format is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and optional
configurable parity bit.
9.2 Object 1 Binary Inputs

Object 1, binary inputs, contains information describing the state of signals in the IED, which mostly
form part of the digital data bus (DDB). In general these include the state of the output contacts and
opto-inputs, alarm signals, and protection start and trip signals. The ‘DDB number’ column in the
device profile document provides the DDB numbers for the DNP 3.0 point data. These can be used to
cross-reference to the DDB definition list. See the relevant Menu Database document. The binary
input points can also be read as change events using object 2 and object 60 for class 1-3 event data.
9.3 DNP 3.0 Object 10 Binary Outputs

Object 10, binary outputs, contains commands that can be operated using DNP 3.0. Therefore the
points accept commands of type pulse on (null, trip, close) and latch on/off as detailed in the device
profile in the relevant Menu Database document, and execute the command once for either command.
The other fields are ignored (queue, clear, trip/close, in time and off time).
There is an additional image of the control inputs. Described as alias control inputs, they reflect the
state of the control input, but with a dynamic nature.
 If the Control Input DDB signal is already SET and a new DNP SET command is sent to the
Control Input, the Control Input DDB signal goes momentarily to RESET and then back to SET.
9-28 P446/EN/TM/E
 If the Control Input DDB signal is already RESET and a new DNP RESET command is sent to
the Control Input, the Control Input DDB signal goes momentarily to SET and then back to
RESET.
DNP Latch DNP Latch DNP Latch DNP Latch

ON ON OFF OFF
Control Input
(Latched)
Aliased Control
Input
(Latched)
Control Input
(Pulsed)
Aliased Control
Input
(Pulsed)
'Behaviour of Control Inputs
Existing with Pulsed/Latched Setting
Aliased Control Inputs with Pulsed/Latched Setting
Note: The pulse width is equal to the duration of one protection
iteration (1/16 cycle)
P4218ENe
Figure 13: Control input behaviour
Many of the IED’s functions are configurable so some of the object 10 commands described in the
following sections may not be available. A read from object 10 reports the point as off-line and an
operate command to object 12 generates an error response.
Examples of object 10 points that maybe reported as off-line are:
 Activate setting groups: Ensure setting groups are enabled

 CB trip/close: Ensure remote CB control is enabled
 Reset NPS thermal: Ensure NPS thermal protection is enabled
 Reset thermal O/L: Ensure thermal overload protection is enabled
 Reset RTD flags: Ensure RTD Inputs is enabled
 Control inputs: Ensure control inputs are enabled
9.4 Object 20 Binary Counters

Object 20, binary counters, contains cumulative counters and measurements. The binary counters
can be read as their present ‘running’ value from object 20, or as a ‘frozen’ value from object 21. The
P446/EN/TM/E 9-29
running counters of object 20 accept the read, freeze and clear functions. The freeze function takes
the current value of the object 20 running counter and stores it in the corresponding object 21 frozen
counter. The freeze and clear function resets the object 20 running counter to zero after freezing its
value.
Binary counter and frozen counter change event values are available for reporting from object 22 and
object 23 respectively. Counter change events (object 22) only report the most recent change, so the
maximum number of events supported is the same as the total number of counters. Frozen counter
change events (object 23) are generated whenever a freeze operation is performed and a change has
occurred since the previous freeze command. The frozen counter event queues store the points for
up to two freeze operations.
9.5 Object 30 Analogue Input

Object 30, analogue inputs, contains information from the IED’s measurements columns in the menu.
All object 30 points can be reported as 16 or 32-bit integer values with flag, 16 or 32-bit integer values
without flag, as well as short floating point values.
Analogue values can be reported to the master station as primary, secondary or normalized values
(which takes into account the IED’s CT and VT ratios), and this is settable in the DNP 3.0
Communications Column in the IED. Corresponding deadband settings can be displayed in terms of a
primary, secondary or normalized value. Deadband point values can be reported and written using
Object 34 variations.
The deadband is the setting used to determine whether a change event should be generated for each
point. The change events can be read using object 32 or object 60. These events are generated for
any point which has a value changed by more than the deadband setting since the last time the data
value was reported.
Any analogue measurement that is unavailable when it is read is reported as offline. For example, the
frequency would be offline if the current and voltage frequency is outside the tracking range of the
IED. All object 30 points are reported as secondary values in DNP 3.0 (with respect to CT and VT
ratios).
9.6 Object 40 Analogue Output

The conversion to fixed-point format requires the use of a scaling factor, which is configurable for the
various types of data within the IED such as current, voltage, and phase angle. All Object 40 points
report the integer scaling values and Object 41 is available to configure integer scaling quantities.
9.7 Configuration
To configure the IED for DNP 3.0, please see the Configuration chapter
9-30 P446/EN/TM/E
10 IEC 61850
This section describes how the IEC 61850 standard is applied to the Px40 platform. It is not a
already familiar with the IEC 61850 standard.
IEC 61850 is the international standard for Ethernet-based communication in substations. It enables
integration of all protection, control, measurement and monitoring functions within a substation, and
additionally provides the means for interlocking and inter-tripping. It combines the convenience of
Ethernet with the security that is so essential in substations today.
10.1 Benefits of IEC 61850

The standard provides:
 Standardized models for IEDs and other equipment within the substation
 Standardized communication services (the methods used to access and exchange data)
 Standardized formats for configuration files
 Peer-to-peer communication
The standard adheres to the requirements laid out by the ISO OSI model and thus provides complete
vendor interoperability and flexibility on the transmission types and protocols used. This includes
mapping of data onto Ethernet, which is becoming more and more widely used in substations, in
favour of RS485. Using Ethernet in the substation offers many advantages, most significantly
including:
 Ethernet allows high-speed data rates (currently 100 Mbps, rather than 10’s of kbps or less
used by most serial protocols)
 Ethernet provides the possibility to have multiple clients
 Ethernet is an open standard in every-day use
 There is a wide range of Ethernet-compatible products that may be used to supplement the LAN
installation (hubs, bridges, switches)
10.2 IEC 61850 Interoperability

A major benefit of IEC 61850 is interoperability. IEC 61850 standardizes the data model of substation
IEDs, which allows interoperability between products from multiple vendors.
An IEC 61850-compliant device may be interoperable, but this does not mean it is interchangeable.
You cannot simply replace a product from one vendor with that of another without reconfiguration.
However the terminology is pre-defined and anyone with prior knowledge of IEC 61850 should be able
to integrate a new device very quickly without having to map all of the new data. IEC 61850 brings
improved substation communications and interoperability to the end user, at a lower cost.
10.3 The IEC 61850 Data Model

The data model of any IEC 61850 IED can be viewed as a hierarchy of information, whose
nomenclature and categorization is defined and standardized in the IEC 61850 specification.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-31
Figure 14: Data model layers in IEC 61850
The levels of this hierarchy can be described as follows:

Layer Description
Identifies the actual IED within a system. Typically the device’s name or IP address can be
Physical Device
used (for example Feeder_1 or 10.0.0.2
Identifies groups of related Logical Nodes within the Physical Device. For the MiCOM IEDs, 5
Logical Device
Logical Devices exist: Control, Measurements, Protection, Records, System
Identifies the major functional areas within the IEC 61850 data model. Either 3 or 6 characters
are used as a prefix to define the functional group (wrapper) while the actual functionality is
Wrapper/Logical Node Instance identified by a 4 character Logical Node name suffixed by an instance number.
For example, XCBR1 (circuit breaker), MMXU1 (measurements), FrqPTOF2 (overfrequency
protection, stage 2).
This next layer is used to identify the type of data you will be presented with. For example,
Data Object
Pos (position) of Logical Node type XCBR
This is the actual data (measurement value, status, description, etc.). For example, stVal
Data Attribute (status value) indicating actual position of circuit breaker for Data Object type Pos of Logical
Node type XCBR
Table 4: Data Frame format
10.4 IEC 61850 in MiCOM IEDs

In the MiCOM IEDs, IEC 61850 is implemented by use of a separate Ethernet card. This Ethernet
card manages the majority of the IEC 61850 implementation and data transfer to avoid any impact on
the performance of the protection functions.
In order to communicate with an IEC 61850 IED on Ethernet, it is necessary only to know its IP
address. This can then be configured into either:
 An IEC 61850 client (or master), for example a PACiS computer (MiCOM C264)
 An HMI
9-32 P446/EN/TM/E
 An MMS browser, with which the full data model can be retrieved from the IED, without any prior
knowledge of the IED
The IEC 61850 compatible interface standard provides capability for the following:
 Read access to measurements

 Refresh of all measurements at the rate of once per second.
 Generation of non-buffered reports on change of status or measurement
 SNTP time synchronization over an Ethernet link. (This is used to synchronize the IED's internal
real time clock.
 GOOSE peer-to-peer communication
 GOOSE communications of statuses.
 Disturbance record extraction by file transfer. The record is extracted as an ASCII format
COMTRADE file.
Note: Setting changes are not supported in the current IEC 61850 implementation. Currently these setting
changes are carried out using Alstom Grid's MiCOM S1 Studio Settings & Records application.
10.5 The IEC 61850 Data Model of MiCOM IEDs

The data model naming adopted in the MiCOM IEDs has been standardized for consistency. Hence
the Logical Nodes are allocated to one of the five Logical Devices, as appropriate.
The data model is described in the Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) document,
which is available as a separate document if required.
10.6 The IEC 61850 Communication Services of MiCOM IEDs

The IEC 61850 communication services which are implemented in the MiCOM IEDs are described in
the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) document, which is available as a
separate document if required.
10.7 IEC 61850 Peer-to-peer (GSSE) communications

The implementation of IEC 61850 Generic Substation Event (GSSE) enables faster communication
between IEDs offering the possibility for a fast and reliable system-wide distribution of input and output
data values. The GSSE model uses multicast services to deliver event information. Multicast
messaging means that messages are sent to all the devices on the network, but only those devices
that have been appropriately configured will receive the frames. In addition, the receiving devices can
specifically accept frames from certain devices and discard frames from the other devices. It is also
known as a publisher-subscriber system. When a device detects a change in one of its monitored
status points it publishes a new message. Any device that is interested in the information subscribes
to the data it contains.
Note: Multicast messages cannot be routed across networks without specialized equipment.
Each new message is re-transmitted at configurable intervals, to counter for possible corruption due to
interference, and collisions, thus ensuring delivery. In practice, the parameters controlling the
message transmission cannot be calculated. Time must be allocated to the testing of GSSE schemes
before or during commissioning, in just the same way a hardwired scheme must be tested.
P446/EN/TM/E 9-33
10.8 Mapping GOOSE Messages to Virtual Inputs

Each GOOSE signal contained in a subscribed GOOSE message can be mapped to any of the 32
virtual inputs within the PSL. The virtual inputs allow the mapping to internal logic functions for
protection control, directly to output contacts or LEDs for monitoring. All published GOOSE signals are
BOOLEAN values
An IED can subscribe to all GOOSE messages but only the following data types can be decoded and
mapped to a virtual input:
 BOOLEAN
 BSTR2
 INT16
 INT32
 INT8
 UINT16
 UINT32
 UINT8
10.8.1 IEC 61850 GOOSE Configuration

All GOOSE configuration is performed using the IED Configurator tool available in the MiCOM S1
Studio Support Software.
All GOOSE publishing configuration can be found under the GOOSE Publishing tab in the
configuration editor window. All GOOSE subscription configuration parameters are under the
External Binding tab in the configuration editor window.
Settings to enable GOOSE signalling and to apply Test Mode are available using the HMI.
10.9 Ethernet Functionality

Settings relating to a failed Ethernet link are available in the COMMUNICATIONS column of the IED’s
HMI.
10.9.1 Ethernet Disconnection

IEC 61850 Associations are unique and made between the client and server. If Ethernet connectivity
is lost for any reason, the associations are lost, and will need to be re-established by the client. The
IED has a TCP_KEEPALIVE function to monitor each association, and terminate any which are no
longer active.
10.9.2 Loss of Power

The IED allows the re-establishment of associations without disruption of its operation, even after its
power has been removed. As the IED acts as a server in this process, the client must request the
association. Uncommitted settings are cancelled when power is lost, and reports requested by
connected clients are reset. The client must re-enable these when it next creates the new association
to the IED.
9-34 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 10 Cyber Security
CYBER SECURITY
CHAPTER 10
P446/EN/TM/E 10-1
10 Cyber Security MiCOMho P446
10-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 OVERVIEW
In the past, substation networks were traditionally isolated and the protocols and data formats used to
transfer information between devices were more often than not proprietary.
For these reasons, the substation environment was very secure against cyber attacks. The terms used
for this inherent type of security are:
 Security by isolation (if the substation network is not connected to the outside world, it can’t be
accessed from the outside world).
 Security by obscurity (if the formats and protocols are proprietary, it is very difficult to interpret
them.
The increasing sophistication of protection schemes coupled with the advancement of technology and
the desire for vendor interoperability has resulted in standardization of networks and data interchange
within substations. Today, devices within substations use standardized protocols for communication.
Furthermore, substations can be interconnected with open networks, such as the internet or
corporate-wide networks, which use standardized protocols for communication. This introduces a
major security risk making the grid vulnerable to cyber-attacks, which could in turn lead to major
electrical outages.
Clearly, there is now a need to secure communication and equipment within substation environments.
This chapter describes the security measures that have been put in place for Alstom Grid's range of
Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs).
The chapter contains the following sections:
1 Overview
2 The need for Cyber Security
3 Standards
3.1 NERC Compliance
3.1.1 CIP 002
3.1.2 CIP 003
3.1.3 CIP 004
3.1.4 CIP 005
3.1.5 CIP 006
3.1.6 CIP 007
3.1.7 CIP 008
3.1.8 CIP 009
3.2 IEEE 1686-2007
4 Px40 Cyber Security Implementation

4.1 Four-level Access
4.1.1 Default Passwords
4.1.2 Password Rules
4.1.3 Access Level DDBs
4.2 Password Strengthening
4.3 Password validation
4.3.1 Blank passwords
4.4 Password Management
4.5 Password Recovery
4.5.1 Entry of the Recovery Password
4.5.2 Password Encryption
4.6 Port Disablement
P446/EN/TM/E 10-3
4.6.1 Disabling Physical Ports

4.6.2 Disabling Logical Ports
4.7 Logging out
4.8 Events
4.9 Cyber Security Settings
10-4 P446/EN/TM/E
2 THE NEED FOR CYBER SECURITY

Cyber-security provides protection against unauthorized disclosure, transfer, modification, or
destruction of information and/or information systems, whether accidental or intentional. To achieve
this, there are several security requirements:
 Confidentiality (preventing unauthorized access to information)

 Integrity (preventing unauthorized modification)
 Availability / Authentication (preventing the denial of service and assuring authorized access to
information)
 Non-Repudiation (preventing the denial of an action that took place)
 Traceability/Detection (monitoring and logging of activity to detect intrusion and analyze
incidents)
The threats to cyber security may be unintentional (e.g. natural disasters, human error), or intentional
(e.g. cyber attacks by hackers).
Good cyber security can be achieved with a range of measures, such as closing down vulnerability
loopholes, implementing adequate security processes and procedures and providing technology to
help achieve this.
Examples of vulnerabilities are:
 Indiscretions by personnel (e.g. users keep passwords on their computer)

 Bypassing of controls (e.g. users turn off security measures)
 Bad practice (users do not change default passwords, or everyone uses the same password to
access all substation equipment)
 Inadequate technology (e.g. substation is not firewalled)
Examples of availability issues are:
 Equipment overload, resulting in reduced or no performance

 Expiry of a certificate prevents access to equipment.
To help tackle these issues, standards organizations have produced various standards, by which
compliance significantly reduces the threats associated with lack of cyber security.
P446/EN/TM/E 10-5
3 STANDARDS
There are several standards, which apply to substation cyber security (see Table 1).
Country
NERC CIP (North American Electric Reliability Framework for the protection of the grid critical Cyber
USA
Corporation) Assets
BDEW (German Association of Energy and Water Requirements for Secure Control and
Germany
Industries) Telecommunication Systems
ICS oriented then Relevant for EPU completing existing
ANSI ISA 99 USA standard and identifying new topics such as patch
management
International Standard for substation IED cyber security
IEEE 1686 International
capabilities
IEC 62351 International Power system data and Comm. protocol
Framework for the protection of the grid critical Cyber
ISO/IEC 27002 International
Assets
NIST SP800-53 (National Institute of Standards and Complete framework for SCADA SP800-82and ICS
USA
Technology) cyber security
CPNI Guidelines (Centre for the Protection of National Clear and valuable good practices for Process Control
UK
Infrastructure) and SCADA security
Table 1: Standards applicable to cyber security
The standards currently applicable to Alstom Grid IEDs are NERC and IEEE1686.
3.1 NERC Compliance

The North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) created a set of standards for the
protection of critical infrastructure. These are known as the CIP standards (Critical Infrastructure
Protection). These were introduced to ensure the protection of Critical Cyber Assets, which control or
have an influence on the reliability of North America’s bulk electric systems.
These standards have been compulsory in the USA for several years now. Compliance auditing
started in June 2007, and utilities face extremely heavy fines for non-compliance.
The group of CIP standards is listed in Table 2.
CIP standard Description
CIP-002-1 Critical Cyber Assets Define and document the Critical Assets and the Critical Cyber Assets
Define and document the Security Management Controls required to protect
CIP-003-1 Security Management Controls
the Critical Cyber Assets
Define and Document Personnel handling and training required protecting
CIP-004-1 Personnel and Training
Critical Cyber Assets
Define and document logical security perimeter where Critical Cyber Assets
CIP-005-1 Electronic Security
reside and measures to control access points and monitor electronic access
Define and document Physical Security Perimeters within which Critical
CIP-006-1 Physical Security
Cyber Assets reside
Define and document system test procedures, account and password
management, security patch management, system vulnerability, system
CIP-007-1 Systems Security Management
logging, change control and configuration required for all Critical Cyber
Assets
Define and document procedures necessary when Cyber Security Incidents
CIP-008-1 Incident Reporting and Response Planning
relating to Critical Cyber Assets are identified
CIP-009-1 Recovery Plans Define and document Recovery plans for Critical Cyber Assets
Table 2: NERC CIP standards
10-6 P446/EN/TM/E
The following sections provide further details about each of these standards, describing the associated
responsibilities of the utility company and where the IED manufacturer can help the utilities with the
necessary compliance to these standards.
3.1.1 CIP 002

CIP 002 concerns itself with the identification of:
 Critical assets, such as overhead lines and transformers

 Critical cyber assets, such as IEDs that use routable protocols to communicate outside or inside
the Electronic Security Perimeter; or are accessible by dial-up.
Power utility responsibilities: Alstom Grid's contribution:

We can help the power utilities to create this asset register automatically.
Create the list of the assets
We can provide audits to list the Cyber assets
3.1.2 CIP 003

CIP 003 requires the implementation of a cyber security policy, with associated documentation, which
demonstrates the management’s commitment and ability to secure its Critical Cyber Assets.
The standard also requires change control practices whereby all entity or vendor-related changes to
hardware and software components are documented and maintained
We can help the power utilities to have access control to its critical assets by
providing centralized Access control.
To create a Cyber Security Policy We can help the customer with its change control by providing a section in
the documentation where it describes changes affecting the hardware and
software.
3.1.3 CIP 004

CIP 004 requires that personnel having authorized cyber access or authorized physical access to
Critical Cyber Assets, (including contractors and service vendors), have an appropriate level of
training.
To provide appropriate training of its personnel We can provide cyber security training
3.1.4 CIP 005

CIP 005 requires the establishment of an Electronic Security Perimeter (ESP), which provides:
 The disabling of ports and services that are not required

 Permanent monitoring and access to logs (24x7x365)
 Vulnerability Assessments (yearly at a minimum)
 Documentation of Network Changes
P446/EN/TM/E 10-7

To monitor access to the ESP
To disable all ports not used in the IED
To perform the vulnerability assessments
To monitor and record all access to the IED
To document network changes
3.1.5 CIP 006

CIP 006 states that Physical Security controls, providing perimeter monitoring and logging along with
robust access controls, must be implemented and documented. All cyber assets used for Physical
Security are considered critical and should be treated as such:
Provide physical security controls and perimeter
monitoring.
Ensure that people who have access to critical cyber Alstom Grid cannot provide additional help with this aspect.
assets don’t have criminal records Alstom Grid's
contribution.
3.1.6 CIP 007

CIP 007 covers the following points:
 Test procedures
 Ports and services
 Security patch management
 Antivirus
 Account management
 Monitoring
 An annual vulnerability assessment should be performed

Test procedures; We can provide advice and help on testing.
Ports and services; Our devices can disable unused ports and services
To provide an incident response team and have Security patch management; We can provide assistance
appropriate processes in place Antivirus; We can provide advise and assistance
Account management; We can provide advice and assistance
Monitoring; Our equipment monitors and logs access
3.1.7 CIP 008

CIP 008 requires that an incident response plan be developed, including the definition of an incident
response team, their responsibilities and associated procedures.

To provide an incident response team and have
Alstom Grid cannot provide additional help with this aspect.
appropriate processes in place.
3.1.8 CIP 009

CIP 009 states that a disaster recovery plan should be created and tested with annual drills.
10-8 P446/EN/TM/E

To implement a recovery plan To provide guidelines on recovery plans and backup/restore documentation
3.2 IEEE 1686-2007

IEEE 1686-2007 is an IEEE Standard for substation IEDs' cyber security capabilities. It proposes
practical and achievable mechanisms to achieve secure operations.
The following features described in this standard apply to Alstom Grid Px40 relays:
 Passwords are 8 characters long and can contain upper-case, lower-case, numeric and special
characters.
 Passwords are never displayed or transmitted to a user.
 IED functions and features are assigned to different password levels. The assignment is fixed.
 Record of an audit trail listing events in the order in which they occur, held in a circular buffer.
 Records contain all defined fields from the standard and record all defined function event types
where the function is supported.
 No password defeat mechanism exists. Instead a secure recovery password scheme is
implemented.
 Unused ports (physical and logical) may be disabled.
P446/EN/TM/E 10-9
4 PX40 CYBER SECURITY IMPLEMENTATION

The Alstom Grid IEDs have always been and will continue to be equipped with state-of-the-art security
measures. Due to the ever-evolving communication technology and new threats to security, this
requirement is not static. Hardware and software security measures are continuously being developed
and implemented to mitigate the associated threats and risks.
This section describes the current implementation of cyber security, valid for the release of platform
software to which this manual pertains. This current cyber security implementation is known as Cyber
Security Phase 1.
At the IED level, these cyber security measures have been implemented:
 Four-level Access
 Password strengthening
 Disabling of unused application and physical ports
 Inactivity timer
 Storage of security events (logs) in the IED
 NERC-compliant default display
External to the IEDs, the following cyber security measures have been implemented:
 Antivirus
 Security patch management
4.1 Four-level Access

The menu structure contains four levels of access three of which are password protected. These are
summarized in Table 3.
Level Meaning Read Operation Write Operation
SYSTEM DATA column:
Description
Plant Reference
Model Number
Serial Number
S/W Ref.
Access Level Password Entry
Read Some
0 Security Feature LCD Contrast (UI only)
Write Minimal
SECURITY CONFIG column:

User Banner
Attempts Remain
Blk Time Remain
Fallback PW level
Security Code (UI only)
All items writeable at level 0.
Read All All data and settings are readable. Level 1 Password setting
1
Write Few Poll Measurements Select Event, Main and Fault (upload)
Extract Events (e.g. via MiCOM S1 Studio)
10-10 P446/EN/TM/E
Level Meaning Read Operation Write Operation

Setting Cells that change visibility (Visible/Invisible).
Setting Values (Primary/Secondary) selector
Commands:
Read All All data and settings are readable.
2 Reset Indication
Write Some Poll Measurements
Reset Demand
Reset Statistics
Reset CB Data / counters
Level 2 Password setting
Change all Setting cells
Operations:
Extract and download Setting file.
Extract and download PSL
Extract and download MCL61850 (IED Config - IEC61850)
Extraction of Disturbance Recorder
Courier/Modbus Accept Event (auto event extraction, e.g. via
Read All All data and settings are readable. A2R)
3
Write All Poll Measurements Commands:
Change Active Group setting
Close / Open CB
Change Comms device address.
Set Date & Time
Switch MCL banks / Switch Conf. Bank in UI (IED Config -
IEC61850)
Enable / Disable Device ports (in SECURITY CONFIG column)
Level 3 password setting
Table 3: Password levels
4.1.1 Default Passwords

Default passwords are blank for Level 1 and AAAA for Levels 2 and 3.
4.1.2 Password Rules

 Passwords may be any length between 0 and 8 characters long
 Passwords may or may not be NERC compliant
 Passwords may contain any ASCII character in the range ASCII code 33 (21 Hex) to ASCII
code 122 (7A Hex) inclusive
 Only one password is required for all the IED interfaces
4.1.3 Access Level DDBs

In additional to having the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column (address 00D0), the current
level of access for each interface is also available for use in the Programming Scheme Logic (PSL) by
mapping to these Digital Data Bus (DDB) signals:
 HMI Access Lvl 1
P446/EN/TM/E 10-11
 HMI Access Lvl 2

 FPort AccessLvl1
 FPort AccessLvl2
 RPrt1 AccessLvl1
Where HMI is the Human Machine Interface.

Each pair of DDB signals indicates the access level as follows:
 Lvl 1 off, Lvl 2 off = 0

 Lvl 1 on, Lvl 2 off = 1
 Lvl 1 off, Lvl 2 on = 2
 Lvl 1 on, Lvl 2 on = 3
4.2 Password Strengthening

NERC compliant passwords result in a minimum level of complexity, and include these requirements:
 At least one upper-case alpha character

 At least one lower-case alpha character
 At least one numeric character
 At least one special character (%,$...)
 At least six characters long
4.3 Password validation

The IED checks for NERC compliance. If the password is entered through the front panel then this is
reflected on the panel Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) display.
If the entered password is NERC compliant, the following text is displayed
NERC COMPLIANT
P/WORD WAS SAVED
The IED does not enforce NERC compliance. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that
compliance is adhered to as and when necessary. In the case that the password entered is not NERC-
compliant, the user is required to actively confirm this, in which case the non-compliance is logged.
If the entered password is not NERC compliant, the following text is displayed:
NERC COMPLIANCE
NOT MET CONFIRM?
On confirmation, the non-compliant password is stored and the following acknowledgement message
is displayed for 2 seconds.
10-12 P446/EN/TM/E
NON-NERC P/WORD
SAVED OK
If the action is cancelled, the password is rejected and the following message displayed for 2 seconds.
NON-NERC P/WORD
NOT SAVE
If the password is entered through a communications port using Courier or Modbus protocols the IED
will store the password, irrespective of whether it is or isn’t NERC-compliant, and then uses
appropriate response codes to inform the client that the password was NERC-compliant or not. The
client then can choose if he/she wishes to enter a new password that is NERC-compliant or leave the
entered one in place.
4.3.1 Blank passwords

A blank password is effectively a zero-length password. Through the front panel it is entered by
confirming the password entry without actually entering any password characters. Through a
communications port the Courier and Modbus protocols each have a means of writing a blank
password to the IED. A blank password disables the need for a password at the level that this
password applied.
Blank passwords have a slightly different validation procedure. If a blank password is entered through
the front panel, the following text is displayed, after which the procedure is the same as already
described:
BLANK PASSWORD
ENTERED CONFIRM
Blank Passwords cannot be configured if lower level password is not blank.

Blank Passwords affect fall back level after inactivity timeout or logout.
The ‘fallback level’ is the password level adopted by the IED after an inactivity timeout, or after the
user logs out. This will be either the level of the highest level password that is blank, or level 0 if no
passwords are blank.
4.4 Password Management

The user is locked out temporarily, after a defined number of failed password entry attempts. The
number of password entry attempts, and the blocking periods are configurable. These settings are
shown in Table 4.
The first invalid password entry sets the attempts count (actual text here) to 1 and initiates an
'attempts timer'. Further invalid passwords during the timed period increments the attempts count.
When the maximum number of attempts has been reached, access is blocked. If the attempts timer
expires, or the correct password is entered before the 'attempt count' reaches the maximum number,
then the 'attempts count' is reset to 0.
Once the password entry is blocked, a 'blocking timer' is initiated. Attempts to access the interface
whilst the 'blocking timer' is running results in an error message, irrespective of whether the correct
password is entered or not. Only after the 'blocking timer' has expired will access to the interface be
unblocked, whereupon the attempts counter is reset to zero.
Attempts to write to the password entry whilst it is blocked results in the following message, which is
displayed for 2 seconds.
P446/EN/TM/E 10-13
NOT ACCEPTED
ENTRY IS BLOCKED
Appropriate responses achieve the same result if the password is written through a communications
port.
The attempts count, attempts timer and blocking timer can be configured, as shown in Table 4.
Cell
Setting Units Default Setting Available Setting
col row
Attempts Limit 25 02 3 0 to 3 step 1
Attempts Timer 25 03 Minutes 2 1 to 3 step 1
Blocking Timer 25 04 Minutes 5 1 to 30 step 1
Table 4: Password blocking configuration
4.5 Password Recovery

Password recovery is the means by which the passwords can be recovered on a device if the
customer should mislay the configured passwords. To obtain the recovery password the customer
must contact the Alstom Grid Contact Centre and supply two pieces of information from the IED –
namely the Serial Number and its Security Code. The Contact Centre will use these items to generate
a Recovery Password which is then provided to the customer.
The security code is a 16-character string of upper case characters. It is a read-only parameter. The
IED generates its own security code randomly. A new code is generated under the following
conditions:
 On power up
 Whenever settings are set back to default
 On expiry of validity timer (see below)
 When the recovery password is entered
As soon as the security code is displayed on the LCD display, a validity timer is started. This validity
timer is set to 72 hours and is not configurable. This provides enough time for the contact centre to
manually generate and send a recovery password. The Service Level Agreement (SLA) for recovery
password generation is one working day, so 72 hours is sufficient time, even allowing for closure of
the contact centre over weekends and bank holidays.
To prevent accidental reading of the IED security code the cell will initially display a warning message:
PRESS ENTER TO
READ SEC. CODE
The security code will be displayed on confirmation, whereupon the validity timer will be started. Note
that the security code can only be read from the front panel.
4.5.1 Entry of the Recovery Password

The recovery password is intended for recovery only. It is not a replacement password that can be
used continually. It can only be used once – for password recovery.
Entry of the recovery password causes the IED to reset all passwords back to default. This is all it is
designed to do. After the passwords have been set back to default, it is up to the user to enter new
10-14 P446/EN/TM/E
passwords appropriate for the function for which they are intended, ensuring NERC compliance, if
required.
On this action, the following message is displayed:
PASSWORDS HAVE
BEEN SET TO
DEFAULT
The recovery password can be applied through any interface, local or remote. It will achieve the same
result irrespective of which interface it is applied through.
4.5.2 Password Encryption

The IED supports encryption for passwords entered remotely. The encryption key can be read from
the IED through a specific cell available only through communication interfaces, not the front panel.
Each time the key is read the IED generates a new key that is valid only for the next password
encryption write. Once used, the key is invalidated and a new key must be read for the next encrypted
password write. The encryption mechanism is otherwise transparent to the user.
4.6 Port Disablement
4.6.1 Disabling Physical Ports

It is possible to disable unused physical ports. A level 3 password is needed to perform this action.
To prevent accidental disabling of a port, a warning message is displayed according to whichever port
is required to be disabled. For example if rear port 1 is to be disabled, the following message appears:
REAR PORT 1 TO BE
DISABLED.CONFIRM
Two to four ports can be disabled, depending on the model.
 Front port
 Rear port 1
 Rear port 2 (not implemented on all models)
 Ethernet port (not implemented on all models)
Note: It is not possible to disable a port from which the disabling port command originates.
4.6.2 Disabling Logical Ports

It is possible to disable unused logical ports. A level 3 password is needed to perform this action.
Note: The port disabling setting cells are not provided in the settings file
Caution Disabling the Ethernet port will disable all Ethernet based communications.
P446/EN/TM/E 10-15
If it is not desirable to disable the Ethernet port, it is possible to disable selected protocols on the
Ethernet card and leave others functioning.
Three protocols can be disabled:
 IEC61850
 DNP3 Over Ethernet
 Courier Tunnelling
Note: If any of these protocols are enabled or disabled, the Ethernet card will reboot.
4.7 Logging out

If you have been configuring the IED, you should 'log out'. You do this by going up to the top of the
menu tree. When you are at the Column Heading level and you press the Up button, you may be
prompted to log out with the following display:
DO YOU WANT TO
LOG OUT?
You will only be asked this question if your password level is higher than the fallback level.
If you confirm, the following message is displayed for 2 seconds:
LOGGED OUT
Access Level <x>
Where x is the current fallback level.

If you decide not to log out (i.e. you cancel), the following message is displayed for 2 seconds.
LOGOUT CANCELLED
Access Level <x>
Where x is the current access level.
4.8 Events
The implementation of NERC-compliant cyber security necessitates the generation of a range of Event
records, which log security issues such as the entry of a non-NERC-compliant password, or the
selection of a non-NERC-compliant default display. Table 5 lists all Security events.
Event Value Display
USER LOGGED IN
PASSWORD LEVEL UNLOCKED
ON <int> LEVEL <n>
USER LOGGED OUT
PASSWORD LEVEL RESET
ON <int> LEVEL <n>
P/WORD SET BLANK
PASSWORD SET BLANK
BY <int> LEVEL <p>
10-16 P446/EN/TM/E
Event Value Display

P/WORD NOT-NERC
PASSWORD SET NON-COMPLIANT
BY <int> LEVEL <p>
PASSWORD CHANGED
PASSWORD MODIFIED
BY <int> LEVEL <p>
PASSWORD BLOCKED
PASSWORD ENTRY BLOCKED
ON <int>
P/WORD UNBLOCKED
PASSWORD ENTRY UNBLOCKED
ON <int>
INV P/W ENTERED
INVALID PASSWORD ENTERED
ON <int>
P/WORD EXPIRED
PASSWORD EXPIRED
ON <int>
P/W ENT WHEN BLK
PASSWORD ENTERED WHILE BLOCKED
ON <int>
RCVY P/W ENTERED
RECOVERY PASSWORD ENTERED
ON <int>
IED SEC CODE RD
IED SECURITY CODE READ
ON <int>
IED SEC CODE EXP
IED SECURITY CODE TIMER EXPIRED
-
PORT DISABLED
PORT DISABLED
BY <int> PORT <prt>
PORT ENABLED
PORT ENABLED
BY <int> PORT <prt>
DEF. DISPLAY NOT NERC COMPLIANT DEF DSP NOT-NERC
PSL STNG D/LOAD
PSL SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
BY <int> GROUP <grp>
DNP STNG D/LOAD
DNP SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
BY <int>
TRACE DAT D/LOAD
TRACE DATA DOWNLOADED
BY <int>
IED CONFG D/LOAD
IEC61850 CONFIG DOWNLOADED
BY <int>
USER CRV D/LOAD
USER CURVES DOWNLOADED
BY <int> GROUP <crv>
PSL CONFG D/LOAD
PSL CONFIG DOWNLOADED
SETTINGS D/LOAD
SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
PSL STNG UPLOAD
PSL SETTINGS UPLOADED
DNP STNG UPLOAD
DNP SETTINGS UPLOADED
BY <int>
TRACE DAT UPLOAD
TRACE DATA UPLOADED
BY <int>
P446/EN/TM/E 10-17
Event Value Display

IED CONFG UPLOAD
IEC61850 CONFIG UPLOADED
BY <int>
USER CRV UPLOAD
USER CURVES UPLOADED
BY <int> GROUP <crv>
PSL CONFG UPLOAD
PSL CONFIG UPLOADED
SETTINGS UPLOAD
SETTINGS UPLOADED
EVENTS EXTRACTED
EVENTS HAVE BEEN EXTRACTED
BY <int> <nov> EVNTS
ACTIVE GRP CHNGE
ACTIVE GROUP CHANGED
C & S CHANGED
CS SETTINGS CHANGED
BY <int>
DR CHANGED
DR SETTINGS CHANGED
BY <int>
SETTINGS CHANGED
SETTING GROUP CHANGED
POWER ON
POWER ON
-
S/W DOWNLOADED
SOFTWARE_DOWNLOADED
-
Table 5: Security event values
Where:
int is the interface definition (UI, FP, RP1, RP2, TNL, TCP)
prt is the port ID (FP, RP1, RP2, TNL, DNP3, IEC, ETHR)
grp is the group number (1, 2, 3, 4)
crv is the Curve group number (1, 2, 3, 4)
n is the new access level (0, 1, 2, 3)
p is the password level (1, 2, 3)
nov is the number of events (1 – nnn)
Each event is identified with a unique number that is incremented for each new event so that it is
possible to detect missing events as there will be a ‘gap’ in the sequence of unique identifiers. The
unique identifier forms part of the event record that is read or uploaded from the IED.
Note: It is no longer possible to clear Event, Fault, Maintenance, and Disturbance Records
4.9 Cyber Security Settings

Cyber Security is important enough to warrant its own IED column called SECURITY
CONFIGURATION, located at column number 25. In addition to this new group, settings are affected
in the SYSTEM DATA, COMMS SYS DATA and VIEW RECORDS columns.
10-18 P446/EN/TM/E
A summary of the relevant columns is shown in Table 6. A complete listing of the settings criteria is
described in the Settings and Records chapter.
Cell Interface In Setting
Parameter Default Setting Available Setting
col row Applicability file?
Password 00 02 ASCII 33 to 122 All Yes
0 = Read Some,
1 = Read All,
Yes, Not
Access Level 00 D0 2 = Read All + Write All
Settable
Some,
3 = Read All + Write All
Password Level 1 00 D2 ASCII 33 to 122 All Yes
Yes, Not
Security Feature 00 DF 1 All
Settable
SECURITY CONFIG 25 00 All Yes
ACCESS ONLY FOR
Use Banner 25 01 ASCII 32 to 163 All Yes
AUTHORISED USERS
Attempts Limit 25 02 3 0 to 3 step 1 All Yes
Attempts Timer 25 03 2 1 to 3 step 1 All Yes
Blocking Timer 25 04 5 1 to 30 step 1 All Yes
0 = Disabled or
Front Port 25 05 Enabled All No
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled or
Rear Port 1 25 06 Enabled All No
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled or
Rear Port 2 25 07 Enabled All No
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled or
Ethernet Port* 25 08 Enabled All No
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled or
Courier Tunnel*† 25 09 Enabled All No
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled or
IEC61850*† 25 0A Enabled All No
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled or
DNP3 OE*† 25 0B Enabled All No
1 = Enabled
Yes, Not
Attempts Remain 25 11 All
Settable
Yes, Not
Blk Time Remain 25 12 All
Settable
0 = Password Level 0,
1 = Password Level 1, Yes, Not
Fallbck PW Level 25 20 0 All
2 = Password Level 2, Settable
3 = Password Level 3
Security Code 25 FF UI Only No
Evt Unique Id (Normal
01 FE All No
Extraction)
Evt Iface Source ±
01 FA All No
(Bits 0 – 7 of Event State)
P446/EN/TM/E 10-19
Cell Interface In Setting

Parameter Default Setting Available Setting
col row Applicability file?
Evt Access Level ± (Bits 15 –
01 FB All No
8 of Event State)
Evt Extra Info 1 ± (Bits 23
01 FC All No
– 16 of Event State)
Evt Extra Info 2 ±Ω (Bits
01 FD All No
31 – 24 of Event State)
Table 6: Security Cells Summary
Where:
* - These cells will not be present in a non-Ethernet product
†- These cells will be invisible if the Ethernet port is disabled.
± - These cells invisible if event is not a Security event
Ω – This cell is invisible in current phase as it does not contain any data. It is reserved for future
use.
10-20 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 11 PSL Editor
PSL EDITOR
CHAPTER 11
P446/EN/TM/E 11-1
11 PSL Editor MiCOMho P446
11-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The purpose of the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) is to allow you to configure an individual
scheme to suit your own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable
logic gates and delay timers. This chapter describes the PSL Editor, which allows you to do this. It
consists of the following sections:
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
2 INTRODUCTION TO THE PSL EDITOR
2.1 Warnings
3 PSL EDITOR TOOLBAR

3.1 Logic Symbols
4 PSL LOGIC SIGNALS PROPERTIES

4.1 Link Properties:
4.2 Opto Signal Properties:
4.3 Input Signal Properties:
4.4 Output Signal Properties:
4.5 GOOSE Input Signal Properties:
4.6 GOOSE Output Signal Properties:
4.7 Control in Signal Properties:
4.8 InterMiCOM In Properties:
4.9 InterMiCOM Out Properties:
4.10 Function Key Properties:
4.11 Fault Recorder Trigger Properties:
4.12 LED Signal Properties:
4.13 Contact Signal Properties:
4.14 LED Conditioner Properties:
4.15 Contact Conditioner Properties:
4.16 Timer Properties:
4.17 Gate Properties:

4.18 SR Programmable Gate Properties
P446/EN/TM/E 11-3
2 INTRODUCTION TO THE PSL EDITOR

The programmable scheme logic (PSL) editor is provided to map the digital inputs of the MiCOM Px40
products, to combine these inputs with internally generated digital signals using logic gates and timers,
and to map the resultant signals to the digital outputs of the MiCOM Px40 products.
The PSL is built around a concept called the digital data bus (DDB). The DDB is parallel data bus
containing all of the digital signals (inputs, outputs, and internal signals), which are available for use in
the PSL.
Inputs to the PSL include:
 Opto-isolated digital inputs (opto-inputs)

 IEC 61850 GOOSE inputs
 Control inputs
 Function keys
Outputs from the PSL include:
 Relay outputs
 Light emitting diodes
 IEC 61850 GOOSE outputs
 Trigger signals
Internal signals include “inputs” to the PSL (i.e. signals generated within the product that can be used
to affect the operation of the scheme logic) and “outputs” from the PSL (i.e. signals that can be driven
from the PSL to activate specific functions in the product). Examples of internal inputs and outputs
include:
 IN>1 Trip: an input that is asserted if the Stage 1 Earth fault protection trip operates
 Thermal Trip: an input that is asserted if the thermal trip operates
 Reset Relays/LED : an output that can be asserted to reset the output relays and LEDs
The PSL consists of software logic gates and timers which combine and condition the DDB signals.
The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any
number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay or to condition the logic
outputs.
The PSL logic is event driven. Only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input
change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by
the PSL.
The system gives you flexibility to create your own scheme logic design. This also means that the
PSL can be configured into a very complex system, so you need a suitable PC support package to
allow you to design your PSL scheme. This PC support package is provided in the form of the S1
Studio suite of tools, which includes the PSL Editor.
With the Px40 PSL Module you can:
 Start a new PSL diagram

 Extract a PSL file from a Px40 IED
 Download a PSL file to a Px40 IED
 Open a diagram from a PSL file
 Add logic components to a PSL file
11-4 P446/EN/TM/E
 Move components in a PSL file

 Edit links in a PSL file
 Add links to a PSL file
 Highlight a path in a PSL file
 Use a conditioner output to control logic
 Print PSL files
You can start the PSL editor in two ways:
 From the S1 Studio main menu, select: Tools > PSL editor (Px40)
 By creating a model system in S1 studio with the correct model number and opening the default
PSL and open it.
For more information on the PSL editor, see the online help built into the PSL Editor.
2.1 Warnings
Checks are made before a scheme is downloaded to the IED. Various warning messages may be
displayed as a result of these checks.
In most cases, the model number of the unit will match that of the model number stored in the PSL
software on the PC. The Editor first reads in the model number of the connected unit, then compares
it with its stored model number using a "wildcard" comparison. If a model mismatch occurs, a warning
is generated before sending starts. Both the stored model number and the number read from the IED
are displayed with the warning.
It is up to the user to decide whether the settings to be downloaded are compatible, and to be aware
that incompatible settings could lead to undesirable behavior of the unit.
If there are any obvious potential problems, a list is generated. The types of potential problems that
the program attempts to detect are:
 One or more gates, LED signals, contact signals, or timers have their outputs linked directly
back to their inputs. An erroneous link of this sort could lock up the IED, or cause other
problems to arise.
 A programmable gate has its ITT (Inputs To Trigger) value set to greater than the number of
actual inputs. This will mean the gate can never activate. There is no check for the case where
the ITT value is lower than the number of inputs. A 0-value does not generate a warning.
 Too many gates. There is a theoretical upper limit of 256 gates in a scheme, but the practical
limit is determined by the complexity of the logic. In practice the scheme would have to be very
complex, and this error is unlikely to occur.
 Too many links. There is no fixed upper limit to the number of links in a scheme. However, as
with the maximum number of gates, the practical limit is determined by the complexity of the
logic. In practice the scheme would have to be very complex, and this error is unlikely to occur.
P446/EN/TM/E 11-5
3 PSL EDITOR TOOLBAR

There are a number of toolbars available to help with navigating and editing the PSL.
Toolbar Description
Standard tools: For file management and printing
Alignment tools: To snap logic elements into

horizontally or vertically aligned groupings
Drawing tools : To add text comments and other
annotations, for easier reading of PSL schemes
Nudge tools: To move logic elements
Rotation tools: Tools to spin, mirror and flip
Structure tools: To change the stacking order of

logic components
Zoom and pan tools: For scaling the displayed
screen size, viewing the entire PSL, or zooming to
a selection
Table 1: Toolbars
3.1 Logic Symbols
The logic symbol toolbar provides icons to place each type of logic element into the scheme diagram.
Not all elements are available in all devices. Icons will only be displayed for those elements available
in the selected device.
Symbol Function Explanation
Link Create a link between two logic symbols
Opto Signal Create an opto signal
Input Signal Create an input signal
Output Signal Create an output signal

Create an input signal to logic to receive a GOOSE message transmitted
GOOSE In from another IED. Used in either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE
applications only
Create an output signal from logic to transmit a GOOSE message to
GOOSE Out another IED. Used in either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE applications
only.
Create an input signal to logic that can be operated from an external
Control In
command.
Create an input signal to logic to receive an InterMiCOM command
InterMiCOM In
transmitted from another IED.
Create an output signal from logic to transmit an InterMiCOM command
InterMiCOM Out
to another IED.
Function Key Create a function key input signal.
11-6 P446/EN/TM/E
Symbol Function Explanation

Trigger Signal Create a fault record trigger
LED Signal Create an LED input signal that repeats the status of tri-color LED
Contact Signal Create a contact signal
LED Conditioner Create an LED conditioner
Contact Conditioner Create a contact conditioner
Timer Create a timer
AND Gate Create an AND Gate
OR Gate Create an OR Gate
Programmable Gate Create a programmable gate
Table 2: Logic symbol toolbar
P446/EN/TM/E 11-7
4 PSL LOGIC SIGNALS PROPERTIES
1. Use the logic toolbar to select logic signals. This is enabled by default but to hide or show it,
select View > Logic Toolbar.
2. Zoom in or out of a logic diagram using the toolbar icon or select View > Zoom Percent.
3. Right-click any logic signal and a context-sensitive menu appears.
Certain logic elements show the Properties… option. If you select this, a Component Properties
window appears. The contents of this window and the signals listed will vary according to the logic
symbol selected. The following sections describe each of the available logic symbols. The actual
DDB numbers are dependent on the model and are provided in the DDB table in the PSL Schemes
chapter.
4.1 Link Properties:

Links form the logical link between the output of a signal, gate or condition and the input to any
element. Any, which is connected to the input of a gate, can be inverted. To do this:
1. Right-click the input

2. Select Properties…. The Link Properties window appears.
3. Check the box to invert the link. Or uncheck for a non-inverted link
An inverted link is shown with a small circle on the input to a gate. A link must be connected to the
input of a gate to be inverted.
Links can only be started from the output of a signal, gate, or conditioner, and must end at an input to
any element.
Signals can only be an input or an output. To follow the convention for gates and conditioners, input
signals are connected from the left and output signals to the right. The Editor automatically enforces
this convention.
A link is refused for the following reasons:
 There has been an attempt to connect to a signal that is already driven. The reason for the
refusal may not be obvious because the signal symbol may appear elsewhere in the diagram.
In this case you can right-click the link and select Highlight to find the other signal. Click
anywhere on the diagram to disable the highlight.
 An attempt has been made to repeat a link between two symbols. The reason for the refusal
may not be obvious because the existing link may be represented elsewhere in the diagram.
4.2 Opto Signal Properties:
11-8 P446/EN/TM/E
Each opto-input can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the opto-input will
drive an associated DDB signal.
4.3 Input Signal Properties:
IED logic functions provide logic output signals that can be used for programming in PSL. Depending
on the IED functionality, operation of an active IED function will drive an associated DDB signal in
PSL.
4.4 Output Signal Properties:
Logic functions provide logic input signals that can be used for programming in PSL. Depending on
the output relay functionality, activation of the output signal will drive an associated DDB signal in PSL
and cause an associated response to the output relay function.
4.5 GOOSE Input Signal Properties:
The Programmable Scheme Logic interfaces with the GOOSE Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual
inputs. The Virtual Inputs can be used in much the same way as the opto-input signals.
The logic that drives each of the Virtual Inputs is contained within the GOOSE Scheme Logic file. It is
possible to map any number of bit-pairs, from any subscribed device, using logic gates onto a Virtual
Input (see S1 documentation for further details).
4.6 GOOSE Output Signal Properties:
The Programmable Scheme Logic interfaces with the GOOSE Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual
outputs.
It is possible to map virtual outputs to bit-pairs for transmitting to any subscribed devices (see S1
documentation for further details).
4.7 Control in Signal Properties:
There are 32 control inputs which can be activated via the menu, the hotkeys or via courier
communications. Depending on the programmed setting that is, latched or pulsed, an associated
DDB signal will be activated in PSL when a control input is operated.
P446/EN/TM/E 11-9
4.8 InterMiCOM In Properties:
There are 16 InterMiCOM inputs that can be used for teleprotection and remote commands.
“InterMiCOM In” is a received signal from remote end that can be mapped to a selected output relay or
logic input.
IED End B
At end B, InterMiCOM Input 1 is mapped to the command “Clear Statistics”.
4.9 InterMiCOM Out Properties:
There are 16 InterMiCOM outputs that can be used for teleprotection and remote commands.
“InterMiCOM Out” is a send command to a remote end that can be mapped to any logic output or
opto-input. This will be transmitted to the remote end as a corresponding “InterMiCOM In” command.
IED End A
At end A, InterMiCOM Output 1 is mapped to the command indication “Clear Statistics” (issued at end
A).
4.10 Function Key Properties:
Each function key can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the function key
will drive an associated DDB signal. The DDB signal will remain active according to the programmed
setting (toggled or normal). Toggled mode means the DDB signal will remain in the new state until the
function key is pressed again. In Normal mode, the DDB will only be active for the duration of the key
press.
4.11 Fault Recorder Trigger Properties:
The fault recording facility can be activated, by driving the fault recorder trigger DDB signal.
4.12 LED Signal Properties:
All programmable LEDs will drive associated DDB signals when the LED is activated.
11-10 P446/EN/TM/E
4.13 Contact Signal Properties:
All output relay contacts will drive associated DDB signal when the output contact is activated.
4.14 LED Conditioner Properties:
752
753
752
753
752
753
Figure 1: LED conditioner properties
1. Select the LED name from the list (only shown when inserting a new symbol).
2. Configure the LED output to be Red, Yellow or Green.
3. Configure a Green LED by driving the Green DDB input.
4. Configure a RED LED by driving the RED DDB input.
5. Configure a Yellow LED by driving the RED and GREEN DDB inputs simultaneously
6. Configure the LED output to be latching or non-latching
4.15 Contact Conditioner Properties:

Each contact can be conditioned with an associated timer that can be selected for pick up, drop off,
dwell, pulse, pick-up/drop-off, straight-through, or latching operation.
Straight-through means it is not conditioned at all whereas Latching is used to create a sealed-in or
lockout type function.
P446/EN/TM/E 11-11
Figure 2: Contact properties
1. Select the contact name from the Contact Name list (only shown when inserting a new
symbol).
2. Choose the conditioner type required in the Mode tick list.
3. Set the Pick-up Time (in milliseconds), if required.
4. Set the Drop-off Time (in milliseconds), if required.
4.16 Timer Properties:

Each timer can be selected for pick up, drop off, dwell, pulse or pick-up/drop-off operation.
Figure 3: Timer properties
1. Choose the operation mode from the Timer Mode tick list.
11-12 P446/EN/TM/E
2. Set the Pick-up Time (in milliseconds), if required.

3. Set the Drop-off Time (in milliseconds), if required.
4.17 Gate Properties:

A Gate may be an AND, OR, or programmable gate.
 An AND gate requires that all inputs are TRUE for the output to be TRUE.
 An OR gate requires that one or more input is TRUE for the output to be TRUE.
 A Programmable gate requires that the number of inputs that are TRUE is equal to or greater
than its ‘Inputs to Trigger’ setting for the output to be TRUE.
Figure 4: Gate properties
1. Select the Gate type AND, OR, or Programmable.

2. Set the number of inputs to trigger when Programmable Gate is selected.
3. Select if the output of the gate should be inverted using the Invert Output check box. An
inverted output is indicated with a "bubble" on the gate output.
4.18 SR Programmable Gate Properties

A Programmable SR gate can be selected to operate with the following three latch properties:
O – Set input O – Reset input
S input R input O - Standard
dominant dominant
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 1 1
Table 3: SR programmable gate properties
P446/EN/TM/E 11-13
Figure 5: SR latch properties
Select if the output of the gate should be inverted using the Invert Output check box. An inverted
output is indicated with a "bubble" on the gate output.
11-14 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 12 PSL Schemes
PSL SCHEMES
CHAPTER 12
P446/EN/TM/E 12-1
12 PSL Schemes MiCOMho P446
12-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the PSL scheme and mappings specific to the devices in question. It contains
the following sections:
1 Overview
2 Description of logic nodes
3 Mappings
3.1 Logic Input Mappings
3.2 Standard Output Relay Mappings
3.3 Programmable LED Output Mappings
3.4 Fault Recorder Start Mappings
3.5 PSL DATA Column
4 Viewing and printing psl diagrams
P446/EN/TM/E 12-3
2 DESCRIPTION OF LOGIC NODES

Alstom Grid Px40 products are supplied with pre-loaded default PSL schemes and. If these schemes
suit your requirements, you do not need to take any action. However, if you want to change the input-
output mapping, or to implement custom scheme logic, you will need to know the details of the logic
nodes (also referred to as digital databus – DDB) signals. This section provides a complete listing of
the PSL mappings. For a complete list of the DDB signals, see Appendix C.
Note: The DDB numbers are displayed as part of the associated symbol in the PSL editor.
12-4 P446/EN/TM/E
3 MAPPINGS
3.1 Logic Input Mappings

Opto input Default Menu Text Function 1/2 Cycle Filter
Opto-input 1 Input L1 Not Used Yes
Opto-input 2 Input L2 BAR Yes
Opto-input 3 Input L3 Aid 1 Receive No
Opto-input 4 Input L4 Aid 1 COS/LGS Yes
Opto-input 5 Input L5 Reset LEDs Yes
Opto-input 6 Input L6 CB2 Aux A 52-B Yes
Opto-input 7 Input L7 CB2 Aux B 52-B Yes
Opto-input 8 Input L8 CB2 Aux C 52-B Yes
Opto-input 9 Input L9 CB1 Aux A 52-B Yes
Opto-input 10 Input L10 CB1 Aux B 52-B Yes
Opto-input 11 Input L11 CB1 Aux C 52-B Yes
Opto-input 12 Input L12 MCB/VTS No
Opto-input 13 Input L13 CB1 Close Manual Yes
Opto-input 14 Input L14 CB2 Close Manual Yes
Opto-input 15 Input L15 CB1 Healthy No
Opto-input 16 Input L16 Reset Lockout Yes
Opto-input 17 Input L17 CB2 Healthy No
Opto-input 18 Input L18 IM64 1 Yes
Opto-input 19 Input L19 CB1 Ext Trip A Yes
Opto-input 20 Input L20 CB1 Ext Trip B Yes
Opto-input 21 Input L21 CB1 Ext Trip C Yes
Opto-input 22 Input L22 CB2 Ext Trip A Yes
Opto-input 23 Input L23 CB2 Ext Trip B Yes
Opto-input 24 Input L24 CB2 Ext Trip C Yes
Table 1: Opto-input mappings – P446 models B, C, and D
3.2 Standard Output Relay Mappings

Relay type
Default
Relay Conditioner Function (High-break or
Menu Text
Standard)
Output R1 Straight-through Trip Zone 1 Standard
Output R2 Straight-through Any Start Standard
Output R3 Dwell 100 ms Any Trip Standard
Output R4 Dwell 500 ms General Alarm Standard
Output R5 Straight-through IM64 1 Standard
Output R6 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Fail1 Trip Standard
Output R7 Straight-through Cntl CB1 Close Standard
Output R8 Straight-through Cntl CB1 Trip Standard
Output R9 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Trip A Standard
Output R10 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Trip B Standard
Output R11 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Trip C Standard
P446/EN/TM/E 12-5
Relay type
Default
Menu Text
Standard)
Output R20 Straight-through Dist Inst Trip Standard
Output R21 Straight-through Dist Delay Trip Standard
Output R22 Straight-through Aided DEF Trip Standard
Output R23 Straight-through Signalling Fail Standard
Output R24 Straight-through Aided 1 Send Standard
Output R25 Straight-through Not Used Standard
Output R26 Straight-through Not Used Standard
Output R27 Straight-through VTS Standard
Output R28 Straight-through PSB Standard
Output R29 Straight-through AR CB1 Lockout Standard
Output R30 Straight-through AR CB2 Lockout Standard
Output R31 Straight-through AR in progress Standard
Output R32 Straight-through Success Close Standard
Table 2: Output relay mappings – P446 model B
Relay type
Default
Menu Text
Standard)
Output R9 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Trip A High-break
Output R10 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Trip B High-break
Output R11 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Trip C High-break
12-6 P446/EN/TM/E
Relay type
Default
Menu Text
Standard)
Table 3: Output relay mappings – P446 model C
Relay type
Default
Menu Text
Standard)
Output R12 Straight-through AR in Prog Standard
Output R16 Straight-through Aid 1 Send Standard
Output R20 Dwell 100 ms CB1 Trip 3ph High-break
Output R24 Dwell 100 ms CB2 Trip 3ph High-break
Table 4: Output relay mappings – P446 model D
Note: A fault record can be generated by connecting one or several contacts to the Fault Record Trigger
in PSL. It is recommended that the triggering contact is self reset and not latching. If a latching
contact is used, the fault record is not generated until the contact has fully reset.
3.3 Programmable LED Output Mappings

Default
Latched Function Red LED Function Yellow LED Function Green LED
Menu Text
LED 5 Non-latching Any Start
LED 7 Non-latching Test Loopback
LED 8 Non-latching AR In Service
FnKey 1 Non-latching CB1 Open A ph CB1 Closed A ph
P446/EN/TM/E 12-7
Default
Latched Function Red LED Function Yellow LED Function Green LED
Menu Text
FnKey 2 Non-latching CB1 Open B ph CB1 Closed B ph
FnKey 3 Non-latching CB1 Open C ph CB1 Closed C ph
FnKey 4 Non-latching CB1 AR Lockout
FnKey 5 Non-latching CB1 AR In Prog CB1 AR Successful
FnKey 6 Non-latching CB2 Open A ph CB2 Closed A ph
FnKey 7 Non-latching CB2 Open B ph CB2 Closed B ph
FnKey 8 Non-latching CB2 Open C ph CB2 Closed C ph
FnKey 9 Non-latching CB2 AR Lockout
FnKey 10 Non-latching CB2 AR In Prog CB2 AR Successful
Table 5: LED output mappings – all P446 models
3.4 Fault Recorder Start Mappings

The default mappings for the signal which initiates a fault record is as shown in Table 6
Initiating Signal Fault Trigger
DDB Any Trip Initiate fault recording from main protection trip
Table 6: Fault recorder start mappings
3.5 PSL DATA Column

The unit contains a PSL DATA column that can be used to track PSL modifications. A total of 12 cells
are contained in the PSL DATA column, 3 for each setting group. The function for each cell is shown
in Table 7:
Menu text Description
When downloading a PSL to the IED, you will be prompted to enter the relevant group and a
Grp. PSL Ref reference identifier. The first 32 characters of the reference ID will be displayed in this cell. The
cursor keys can be used to scroll through 32 characters, as only 16 can be displayed at any one time
18 Aug 2008
This cell displays the date and time when the PSL was downloaded to the IED
08:59:32.047
Grp. 1 PSL This is a unique number for the PSL that has been entered. Any change in the PSL will result in a
ID - 2062813232 different number being displayed
Table 7: PSL Data Column
Note: The above cells are repeated for each setting group.
12-8 P446/EN/TM/E
4 VIEWING AND PRINTING PSL DIAGRAMS

It is possible to view and print the PSL diagrams for the device. Typically, these diagrams allow you to
see the following mappings:
 Opto Input Mappings
 Output Relay Mappings
 LED Mappings
 Start Indications
 Phase Trip Mappings
 System Check Mapping
To download the default PSL diagrams for the device and to print them:
1. Close S1 Studio.
2. Select Programs > Alstom Grid > S1 Studio > Data Model Manager.
3. Click Add then Next.
4. Click Internet then Next.
5. Select your language then click Next.
6. From the tree view, select the model and software version.
7. Click Install. When complete click OK.
8. Close the Data Model Manager and start S1 Studio.
9. Select Tools > PSL Editor (Px40).
10. In the PSL Editor select File > New > Default Scheme.
11. In the dialogue select the IED type
12. Use the advance button to select the software and then select the required model number.
13. Highlight the required PSL diagram and select File > Print.
Caution Read the notes in the default PSL diagrams, as these provide critical
information
P446/EN/TM/E 12-9
12-10 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 13 Installation
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 13
P446/EN/TM/E 13-1
13 Installation MiCOMho P446
13-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the installation of the unit and consists of the following sections:
1 Chapter Overview
2 Handling the goods
3 Pre-installation Requirements
4 Mounting the Unit
5 Cables and Connectors
5.1 Terminal blocks
5.2 Wire Sizes
5.3 Power Supply Terminals
5.4 EIA(RS)485 rear port (RP1)
5.5 IRIG-B port
5.6 GPS Fibre-optic port
5.7 Ethernet Fibre-optic ports
5.8 Current Differential / IM64 ports
5.9 Ethernet RJ-45 metallic port
5.10 EIA(RS)232 front port
5.11 Download/monitor port
5.12 Earth connection
6 Case Dimensions
P446/EN/TM/E 13-3
2 HANDLING THE GOODS

MiCOM products are of robust construction but require careful treatment before installation on site.
This section discusses the requirements for receiving and unpacking the goods, and the associated
considerations regarding product care and personal safety.
Caution Before lifting or moving the equipment you should be familiar with the Safety
Information chapter of this manual.
Receipt of the Goods

On receipt, ensure the correct product has been delivered. Unpack the product immediately to ensure
there has been no external damage in transit. If the product has been damaged, make a claim to the
transport contractor and notify Alstom Grid promptly.
Return any units that are not intended for immediate installation to their protective polythene bags and
delivery carton.
Unpacking
When unpacking and installing the unit, take care not to damage any of the parts and make sure that
additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Do not discard any CDROMs or
technical documentation. These should accompany the unit to its destination substation.
Note: With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery isolation strip protrudes from the
positive battery terminal. Do not remove this strip because it prevents battery drain during
transportation and storage; it will be removed as part of the commissioning process.
The site should be well lit to aid inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive
vibration. This particularly applies to installations, which are being carried out at the same time as
construction work.
Storage
If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in a place free from dust and moisture in its original
packaging. Keep any de-humidifier bags included in the packing. The de-humidifier crystals lose their
efficiency if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions. Restore the crystals by gently heating the bag
for about an hour before replacing it in the carton.
On subsequent unpacking, make sure that any dust on the carton does not fall inside. Avoid storing in
locations of high humidity. In locations of high humidity the packaging may become impregnated with
moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency.
The unit can be stored between –25º to +70ºC (-13ºF to +158ºF).
13-4 P446/EN/TM/E
3 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
If your IED is equipped with a redundant Ethernet board (REB), you may be required to partially
dismantle it in order to set the IP address. You will only have to do this if the last octet of the IP
address you need is different from that of the delivered configuration.
The IP address of the REB is configured in both software and hardware. The first three octets are
configured with software, but the last octet is configured in hardware.
Configuring the First Two Octets of the Board IP Address

If using SHP or DHP, the first two octets are configured using Switch Manager or an SNMP MIB
browser. An H35 (SHP) or H36 (DHP) network device is needed in the network to configure the Px40
redundant Ethernet board IP address using SNMP.
If using Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), the first two octets are configured using the RSTP
Configurator software tool or using an SNMP MIB browser.
Configuring the Third Octet of the Board IP Address

The third octet is fixed at 254 (FE hex, 11111110 binary, regardless of the protocol).
Configuring the Last Octet of the Board IP Address

The last octet is configured using board address switch SW2 on the board. It is necessary to first
remove the IED front cover to gain access to the board address switch.
Caution This hardware configuration should ideally take place before the unit is
installed.
1. Make sure you are familiar with the safety section of this technical manual.
2. Switch off the IED. Disconnect the power and all connections.
3. Before the front cover is removed take precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge damage,
according to the ANSI/ESD-20.20 -2007 standard.
4. Wear a 1 MΩ earth strap and connect it to the earthing point (M4 earthing stud), located in the
bottom left hand corner on the back of the IED.
5. Lift the upper and lower flaps. Remove the six screws securing the front panel and pull the
front panel outwards.
P446/EN/TM/E 13-5
F6
F6
Trip
Alarm F7
F7
Out of Service F8
F8
Healthy
F9
F9
OK
F10
F10
C
P4393ENd
6. Press the levers either side of the connector to disconnect the ribbon cable from the front
panel.
P4396ENa
7. You now have access to the address switches on the dual Ethernet board, which is situated in
slot A on the right hand side of the unit looking from the front.
13-6 P446/EN/TM/E
8. Set the last octet of the board IP address by setting the DIP switches.
9. Once you have set the IP address, reassemble the relay, following the above instructions in
the reverse order.
Caution Take care not to damage the pins of the ribbon cable connector on the front
panel when reinserting the ribbon cable.
P446/EN/TM/E 13-7
4 MOUNTING THE UNIT

MiCOM products are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel or rack assembly.
Individual products are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel
cutouts and hole centers. These are shown in section 6 Case Dimensions.
MiCOM products are designed so the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only accessible when
the access covers are open.
If you use a P991 or MMLG test block with the product, when viewed from the front, position the test
block on the right-hand side of the associated product. This minimizes the wiring between the product
and test block, and allows the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and
maintenance tests.
If you need to test the product for correct operation during installation, open the lower access cover,
hold the battery in place and pull the red tab to remove the battery isolation strip. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: Location of battery isolation strip
Panel mounting
Panel-mounted variants can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws
with captive 3 mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in
packs of five (our part number ZA0005 104).
Caution Risk of damage to the front cover molding. Do not use conventional self-
tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MiDOS products
because they have slightly larger heads.
Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of 2.5 mm.
For applications where the product needs to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a range of
collars are available.
13-8 P446/EN/TM/E
If several products are mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, mechanically group them horizontally
or vertically into rigid assemblies before mounting in the panel.
Note: Fastening MiCOM ALSTOM products with pop rivets is not advised because it does not allow easy
removal if repair is necessary.
If the product is mounted on a BS EN60529 IP52 compliant panel, fit a metallic sealing strip between
adjoining products (part no GN2044 001) and fit a sealing ring around the complete assembly,
according to the following table.
Width Single tier Double tier
10TE GJ9018 002 GJ9018 018
15TE GJ9018 003 GJ9018 019
20TE GJ9018 004 GJ9018 020
25TE GJ9018 005 GJ9018 021
30TE GJ9018 006 GJ9018 022
35TE GJ9018 007 GJ9018 023
40TE GJ9018 008 GJ9018 024
45TE GJ9018 009 GJ9018 025
50TE GJ9018 010 GJ9018 026
55TE GJ9018 011 GJ9018 027
60TE GJ9018 012 GJ9018 028
65TE GJ9018 013 GJ9018 029
70TE GJ9018 014 GJ9018 030
75TE GJ9018 015 GJ9018 031
80TE GJ9018 016 GJ9018 032
Table 1: IP52 sealing rings
Rack mounting
Panel-mounted variants can also be rack mounted using single-tier rack frames (our part number
FX0021 101), as shown in Figure 2. These frames are designed with dimensions in accordance with
IEC 60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to use. On a standard 483 mm (19 inch) rack this
enables combinations of case widths up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side.
The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26 mm intervals. Attach
the products by their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3 mm thick
washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in packs of five (our part
number ZA0005 104).
Caution Risk of damage to the front cover molding. Do not use conventional self-
tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MiDOS products
because they have slightly larger heads.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles at each end of
the tier.
P446/EN/TM/E 13-9
P4535ENb
Figure 2: Rack mounting of products
Products can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements using the rack
frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM ALSTOM and MiDOS product ranges
to be pre-wired together before mounting.
Use blanking plates if there are empty spaces. The spaces may be for future installation of products
or because the total size is less than 80TE on any tier. Blanking plates can also be used to mount
ancillary components. Table 2 shows the sizes that can be ordered.
For further details on mounting MiDOS products, see publication R7012, MiDOS Parts Catalogue and
Assembly Instructions.
Case size summation Blanking plate part number
5TE GJ2028 101
10TE GJ2028 102
15TE GJ2028 103
20TE GJ2028 104
25TE GJ2028 105
30TE GJ2028 106
35TE GJ2028 107
40TE GJ2028 108
Table 2: Blanking plates
13-10 P446/EN/TM/E
5 CABLES AND CONNECTORS

This section is a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for each terminal on the
product.
Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the
Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
5.1 Terminal blocks

The unit may use one or more of the terminal block types shown in Figure 3:
 Heavy duty terminal blocks: For CT and VT circuits

 Medium duty terminal blocks: For the power supply, relay outputs and rear communications
port.
 MiDOS terminal blocks: For CT and VT circuits.
 RTD/CLIO terminal block for connection to analogue transducers
P4522ENa .
MiCOM ALSTOM products are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear
mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per
terminal.
If required, M4 90° crimp ring terminals can be supplied in three different sizes depending on wire
size. Each type is available in bags of 100.
Part number Wire size Insulation color
2
ZB9124 901 0.25 - 1.65 mm (22 – 16 AWG) Red
ZB9124 900 1.04 - 2.63 mm2 (16 – 14 AWG) Blue
P446/EN/TM/E 13-11
Part number Wire size Insulation color

2
ZB9124 904 2.53 - 6.64 mm (12 – 10 AWG) Un-insulated
Table 3: M4 90° crimp ring terminals
Caution For safety reasons always fit an insulating sleeve over the ring terminal.
5.2 Wire Sizes

The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:
 Current Transformers: 2.5 mm2

 Auxiliary Supply, Vx: 1.5 mm2
 Other Circuits: 1: 1.0 mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the
medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0 mm2 using ring terminals that are not pre-insulated. If using
only pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63 mm2 per
ring terminal. If you need a larger wire size, use two wires in parallel, each terminated in a separate
ring terminal at the product.
With the exception of the EIA(RS)485 port, the wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy
duty terminal blocks, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.
Each opto-input has a selectable preset ½ cycle filter. This makes the input immune to noise induced
on the wiring. Although this is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. If you switch off the
½ cycle filter, either use double pole switching on the input, or screened twisted cable on the input
circuit.
Caution Current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be
appropriately fused to protect the wire used.
5.3 Power Supply Terminals

Connections to the power supply terminals are made using pins 1 and 2 on the power supply terminal
block. This is always the terminal block on the far right hand-side when viewing the product from the
rear.
13-12 P446/EN/TM/E
Power: Terminals 1 + 2 of
PSU terminal block.
1 T1 = -ve
2
T2 = +ve
16
17
18
P4538ENa
Figure 4: Power supply connections
Protect the auxiliary power supply wiring with a 16 A high rupture capacity (HRC) type NIT or TIA fuse.
5.4 EIA(RS)485 rear port (RP1)

Connections to the rear EIA(RS)485 port are made using ring terminals. 2-core screened cable is
recommended with a maximum total length of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance.
A typical cable specification would be:
 Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC insulated

 Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm2 per core
 Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
The connections are made to pins 16, 17 and 18 as shown in Figure 5
P446/EN/TM/E 13-13
Figure 5: EIA(RS)485 connections
5.5 IRIG-B port

The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50 . We recommend that
connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the product are made using coaxial cable of type
RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
5.6 GPS Fibre-optic port

Some products use a GPS 1 PPS timing signal. If applicable, this is connected to a fibre-optic port on
the coprocessor board in slot B. The fibre-optic port uses an ST type connector, compatible with fibre
multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm – 850 nm.
5.7 Ethernet Fibre-optic ports

We recommend the use of fibre-optic connections for permanent connections in a substation
environment. The 100 Mbps fibre optic port uses type ST connectors (one for Tx and one for Rx),
compatible with 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm multimode fibres at 1300 nm wavelength.
Note: For models equipped with redundant Ethernet connections the product must be partially dismantled
to set the fourth octet of the second IP address. This ideally, should be done before installation.
5.8 Current Differential / IM64 ports

The fibre optic port consists of one or two channels using ST type connectors (one for Tx and one for
Rx). The type of fibre used depends on the option selected.
850 nm and 1300 nm multimode systems use 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm multimode fibres. 1300 nm
and 1550 nm single mode systems use 9/125 µm single mode fibres.
13-14 P446/EN/TM/E
5.9 Ethernet RJ-45 metallic port

If the unit has a metallic Ethernet connection, it can be connected to either a 10Base-T or a 100Base-
TX Ethernet hub; the port automatically senses which type of hub is connected. Due to noise
sensitivity this connection type is recommended for short-term short distance connections, ideally
where the products and hubs are in the same cubicle.
The connector for the Ethernet port is a shielded RJ-45. Table 4 shows the signals and pins on the
connector.
Pin Signal name Signal definition
1 TXP Transmit (positive)
2 TXN Transmit (negative)
3 RXP Receive (positive)
4 - Not used
5 - Not used
6 RXN Receive (negative)
7 - Not used
8 - Not used
Table 4: RJ45 Ethernet connections
5.10 EIA(RS)232 front port

Short term connections to the EIA(RS)232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made
using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15 m long, or a total capacitance of 2500 pF.
The cable should be terminated at the product end with a standard 9-pin D-type male connector.
5.11 Download/monitor port

Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be
made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4 m long. The cable should be terminated
at the product end with a 25-pin D-type male connector.
5.12 Earth connection

Every product must be connected to the cubicle earthing bar using the M4 earthing studs in the bottom
left-hand corner of the product case. The minimum recommended wire size is 2.5 mm2 and should
have a ring terminal at the product end.
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the
medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0 mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is required, two
parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the product, or a metal
grounding bar could be used.
Note: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper ground conductors and the
rear panel of the product, precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another. This could
be achieved in several ways, including placing a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the
conductor and the product case, or using tinned ring terminals.
P446/EN/TM/E 13-15
6 CASE DIMENSIONS
Figure 6: 40TE case dimensions
13-16 P446/EN/TM/E
P1616ENi
P446/EN/TM/E 13-17
13-18 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 14 Commissioning Instructions
COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER 14
P446/EN/TM/E 14-1
14 Commissioning Instructions MiCOMho P446
14-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 OVERVIEW
The Commissioning Instructions chapter describes in detail the commissioning process for the
product.
1 Overview
2 General Guidelines
3 Commissioning Test Menu
3.1 Opto I/P Status
3.2 Relay O/P Status
3.3 Test Port Status
3.4 LED Status
3.5 Monitor Bits 1 to 8
3.6 Test Mode
3.7 Test Pattern
3.8 Contact Test
3.9 Test LEDs
3.10 Test Autoreclose
3.11 Static Test Mode
3.12 Loopback Mode
3.13 IM64 Test Pattern
3.14 IM64 Test Mode
3.15 Using a Monitor/Download Port Test Box
4 Commissioning Equipment
4.1 Minimum Equipment Required
4.2 Optional equipment
5 Product Checks
5.1 With the IED De-energized
5.1.1 Visual Inspection
5.1.2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts
5.1.3 Insulation
5.1.4 External Wiring
5.1.5 Test Watchdog Contacts (IED not Energized)
5.1.6 Auxiliary Supply
5.2 With the IED Energized
5.2.1 Test Watchdog Contacts (IED Energized)
5.2.2 LCD
5.2.3 Date and Time
5.2.4 LEDs
5.2.5 Testing the Alarm and Out-of-Service LEDs
5.2.6 Testing the trip LED
5.2.7 Test user-programmable LEDs
5.2.8 Test Field voltage supply
5.2.9 Test Input Opto-Isolators
5.2.10 Test Output Relays
5.2.11 Communication Port RP1
5.2.11.1 Courier
P446/EN/TM/E 14-3
5.2.11.2 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications

5.2.11.3 DNP3.0 communications
5.2.11.4 IEC 61850 communications
5.2.12 Rear communications port RP2
5.2.12.1 K-Bus configuration
5.2.12.2 EIA(RS)485 configuration
5.2.13 Current Inputs
5.2.14 Voltage inputs
6 Intermicom Communication Loopback

6.1 Communications Loopback Setting
6.2 Loopback Communications Configuration
6.3 Loopback Test
7 InterMiCOM Communication Loopback

7.1 EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM communications
7.1.1 MODEM InterMiCOM loopback testing & diagnostics
7.1.1.1 MODEM InterMiCOM command bits
7.1.1.2 MODEM InterMiCOM channel diagnostics
7.1.1.3 MODEM InterMiCOM channel failure
8 Setting Checks
8.1 Apply Application-Specific Settings
8.1.1 Transferring settings from a settings file
8.1.2 Entering the settings using the IED's front panel HMI panel
8.1.3 Protection communications loopback
8.1.4 Reset statistics
8.2.1 Distance Protection Single-ended Testing
8.2.1.1 Connection and preliminaries
8.2.1.2 Zone 1 reach check
8.2.1.5 Zone 4 reach check (if enabled)
8.2.1.6 Zone P reach check (if enabled)
8.2.1.7 Resistive reach (quadrilateral characteristics only)
8.2.1.8 Load blinder
8.2.2 Distance Protection Operation and Contact Assignment
8.2.2.1 Phase A
8.2.2.2 Phase B
8.2.2.3 Phase C
8.2.2.4 Time delay settings tZ1 Ph, and tZ2 - tZ4
8.2.3 Distance Protection Scheme Testing
8.2.3.1 Scheme Trip Test for Zone 1 Extension Only
8.2.3.2 Scheme trip tests for permissive schemes (PUR/POR only)
8.2.3.3 Scheme trip tests for blocking scheme only
8.2.3.4 Signal send test for permissive schemes (PUR/POR only)
8.2.3.5 Signal send test for blocking scheme only
8.2.4 Scheme Timer Settings
8.3 Delta Directional Comparison
8.3.1 Delta Protection Single-ended Testing
8.3.1.2 Single-ended Injection Test
8.3.1.3 Forward fault preparation
14-4 P446/EN/TM/E
8.3.2 Delta Directional Comparison Operation and Contact Assignment

8.3.3 Delta Directional Comparison Scheme Testing
8.4 Out of Step Protection
8.5 DEF Aided Schemes
8.5.1 Earth current pilot scheme
8.5.1.1 Connecting the test circuit
8.5.1.2 Perform the test
8.5.1.3 DEF aided scheme - forward fault trip test
8.5.2 DEF Aided Scheme Testing
8.6 Overcurrent Protection
8.6.1 Connecting the test circuit
8.6.2 Perform the test
8.6.3 Check the operating time
8.7 Restoration of communications and clearing VTS
8.8 System Check and Check Synchronization
8.8.1 Check sync ok
8.8.2 Check sync fail
8.9 Check trip and auto-reclose cycle
9 End-to-End Protection Communication Tests

9.1 Remove local loopbacks
9.1.1 Restoration of direct fibre connections
9.1.2 Restoration of C37.94 fibre connections
9.1.3 Communications using P59x interface units
9.2 Remote Loopback removal
9.3 Verify communications between IEDs
10 End to End Scheme Tests

10.1.1 Aided scheme 1
10.1.1.1 Remote end preparation to observe channel arrival
10.1.1.2 Application of the test
10.1.2 Channel check in the opposite direction
10.2 Aided scheme 2
11 On-load Checks
11.1 Confirm Voltage Connections
11.2 Confirm Current Connections
11.3 On load directional test
11.4 Signalling channel check (if not already completed)
12 Final Checks
P446/EN/TM/E 14-5
2 GENERAL GUIDELINES
Px40 IEDs are self-checking and raise an alarm in the unlikely event of a failure. This is why the
commissioning tests are less extensive than those for non-numeric electronic devices or electro-
mechanical relays.
To commission the IEDs, you do not need to test every IED function. You need only verify that the
hardware is functioning correctly and that the application-specific software settings have been applied.
You can check the settings by extracting them with appropriate setting software or by using the front
panel interface (HMI panel).
The customer is usually responsible for determining the settings to be applied and for testing any
scheme logic.
The menu language is user-selectable, so the Commissioning Engineer can change it for
commissioning purposes if required.
Note: Restore the language setting to the customer’s preferred language on completion.
Warning: Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with
the contents of the Safety Section or Safety Guide SFTY/4LM as well as the
ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Warning: Do not disassemble the IED in any way during commissioning, other than to
test the CT shorting links.
14-6 P446/EN/TM/E
3 COMMISSIONING TEST MENU

The IED provides several test facilities under the COMMISSION TESTS menu heading. There are
menu cells that allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts, internal Digital Data
Bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be monitored. There are also cells to test the
operation of the output contacts and user-programmable LEDs.
This section describes the commissioning tests available in the IED's Commissioning test menu.
Details of the setting ranges and default values can be found in the Settings and Records chapter.
3.1 Opto I/P Status

This cell can be used to monitor the status of the opto-isolated inputs while they are sequentially
energized with a suitable DC voltage.
The cell displays the status of the opto-isolated inputs as a binary string, '1' meaning energized, '0'
meaning de-energized. If you move the cursor along the binary numbers, the corresponding label text
is displayed for each logic input.
3.2 Relay O/P Status

This cell shows the status of the DDB signals, when the output relays are energized, as a binary
string. A '1' indicates an operated state and '0' a non-operated state. If you move the cursor along the
binary numbers the corresponding label text is displayed for each relay output.
The displayed information can be used to indicate the status of the output relays when the IED is in
service. Also fault finding for output relay damage can be performed by comparing the status of the
output contact under investigation with its associated bit.
Note: When the Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked, this cell continues to indicate which contacts
would operate if the IED was in-service. It does not show the actual status of the output relays.
3.3 Test Port Status

This cell displays the status of the eight DDB signals that have been allocated in the Monitor Bit cells.
If you move the cursor along the binary numbers, the corresponding DDB signal text string is
displayed for each monitor bit.
By using this cell with suitable monitor bit settings, the state of the DDB signals can be displayed as
various operating conditions or sequences are applied to the IED. This allows the programmable
scheme logic to be tested.
3.4 LED Status

The Red LED Status and Green LED Status cells are eighteen bit binary strings that show which of
the user-programmable LEDs are ON when accessing from a remote location. 1 means a particular
LED is ON and 0 means OFF. When the status of a particular LED in both cells is 1, this means the
LED is lit yellow.
3.5 Monitor Bits 1 to 8

The eight Monitor Bit cells allows you to select eight DDB signals that can be observed in the Test
Port Status cell or downloaded via the 25-pin front monitor/download port.
Each Monitor Bit cell can be assigned to a particular DDB signal. You set it by entering the required
DDB signal number from the list of available DDB signals.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-7
The pins of the monitor/download port used for monitor bits are as follows:
Monitor Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Monitor/Download Port Pin 11 12 15 13 20 21 23 24
The signal ground is available on pins 18, 19, 22 and 25.
Warning: The monitor/download port is not electrically isolated against induced

voltages on the communications channel. It should therefore only be used
for local communications.
3.6 Test Mode

This cell allows you to perform secondary injection testing. It also lets you test the output contacts
directly by applying menu-controlled test signals.
To select test mode, set the Test Mode menu cell to Test Mode. This takes the IED out of service and
blocks the maintenance counters. It also causes an alarm condition to be recorded so the yellow Out
of Service LED switches ON and an alarm message Prot’n. Disabled is displayed. This freezes any
information stored in the CB CONDITION column. In IEC 60870-5-103 versions, it changes the Cause
of Transmission (COT) to Test Mode.
In Test Mode the output contacts are still active. To disable the output contacts so they can be tested,
select Contacts Blocked. It also enables the test pattern and contact test functions, used to manually
operate the output contacts.
Once testing is complete, set the cell to Disabled to restore the relay back to service.
Warning: When the cell is in Test mode, the scheme logic still drives the output relays,
which could trip the circuit breakers. To avoid this, set the Test Mode cell to
Contacts Blocked.
Notes: Test mode and Contacts Blocked mode can also be selected by energizing an opto-input mapped
to the Test Mode signal, and the Contact Block signal respectively.
3.7 Test Pattern

Use the Commission Tests > Test Pattern cell to select the output relay contacts to be tested when
the Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test. The cell has a binary string with one bit for each user-
configurable output contact, which can be set to 1 to operate the output and 0 to not operate it.
3.8 Contact Test

When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued, the contacts set for operation change state.
Once the test has been applied, the command text on the LCD changes to No Operation. The
contacts remain in the Test state until reset by issuing the Remove Test command. The command
text on the LCD shows No Operation after the Remove Test command has been issued.
Note: When the Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked the Relay O/P Status cell does not show the
current status of the output relays so can not be used to confirm operation of the output relays.
Therefore it is necessary to monitor the state of each contact in turn.
14-8 P446/EN/TM/E
3.9 Test LEDs

When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the user-programmable LEDs are ON for
approximately 2 seconds before they switch OFF and the command text on the LCD reverts to No
Operation.
3.10 Test Autoreclose

If the IED has an auto-reclose function, this cell is available for testing the sequence of circuit breaker
trip and auto-reclose cycles.
The 3 Pole Trip command causes the device to perform the first three phase trip/reclose cycle so that
associated output contacts can be checked for operation at the correct times during the cycle. Once
the trip output has operated, the command text reverts to No Operation while the rest of the auto-
reclose cycle is performed. To test subsequent three-phase autoreclose cycles, repeat the 3 Pole Trip
command.
Similarly, where single pole auto-reclosing is available, the cycles for each single pole can be checked
by sequentially issuing the Pole A Test, Pole B Test or Pole C Test, as appropriate.
Note: The default settings for the programmable scheme logic has the AR Trip Test signals mapped to
the Trip Input signals. If the programmable scheme logic has been changed, it is essential that
these signals retain this mapping for the‘Test Auto-Reclose facility to work.
3.11 Static Test Mode

Static Test Mode can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When the Static Test mode is enabled it allows
older injection test sets to be used to commission and test the device.
Modern dynamic secondary injection test sets are able to accurately mimic real power system faults.
The test sets mimic an instantaneous fault “shot”, with the real rate of rise of current, and the decaying
DC exponential component. Dynamic injection test sets are available, which cater for all three
phases, providing a six signal set of analogue inputs: Va, Vb, Vc, Ia, Ib, Ic. Such injection test sets
can be used with the device, with no special testing limitations.
Conversely, older test sets, also known as Static Simulators, may not properly provide or simulate:
 A healthy pre-fault voltage

 A real fault shot (instead a gradually varying current or voltage would be used)
 The rate of rise of current and DC components
 A complete set of three-phase analogue inputs
 Real dynamic step changes in current and voltage.
The IED relies on voltage memory and delta step changes in a real power system, therefore certain
functions are disabled or bypassed to allow injection testing. Selecting the Static Mode test option
bypasses the delta phase selectors, and power swing detection.
For the tests, the delta directional line is replaced by a conventional distance directional line. Extra
filtering of distance comparators is used so the filtering slows to use a fixed one cycle window.
Memory polarizing is replaced by cross-polarizing from unfaulted phases.
Note: Trip times may be up to ½ cycle longer when tested in the static mode, due to the nature of the test
voltage and current, and the slower filtering. This is normal, and perfectly acceptable.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-9
3.12 Loopback Mode

Loopback Mode can be used to test InterMiCOM64 signalling.
Note: If the cell is set to Internal, only the IED software is checked. If the cell is set to External, both the
software and hardware are checked.
When the device is switched into Loopback Mode, it automatically uses generic addresses 0-0. It
responds as if it is connected to a remote device. The sent and received IM64 signals continue to be
routed to and from the signals defined in the programmable logic.
Note: Loopback mode can also be selected by energizing an opto-input mapped to the Loopback signal.
3.13 IM64 Test Pattern

This cell is used with the IM64 Test Mode cell to set a 16-bit pattern (8 bits per channel), which is
transmitted whenever the IM64 Test Mode cell is set to Enabled. The IM64 Test Pattern cell has a
binary string with one bit for each user-defined Inter-MiCOM command. These can be set to 1 to
operate the IM64 output under test conditions and 0 for no operation.
3.14 IM64 Test Mode

When the Enable command in this cell is issued, the InterMiCOM64 commands change to reflect the
state of the values set in the IM64 Test Pattern cell. If the cell is set to Disabled, the InterMiCOM64
commands reflect the state of the signals generated by the protection and control functions.
3.15 Using a Monitor/Download Port Test Box

A test box containing eight LEDs and a switchable audible indicator is available. It is housed in a
small plastic box with a 25-pin male D-connector that plugs directly into the monitor/download port.
There is also a 25-pin female D-connector which allows other connections to be made to the
monitor/download port while the monitor/download port test box is in place.
Each LED corresponds to one of the monitor bit pins on the monitor/download port. Monitor Bit 1 is
on the left-hand side when viewed from the front of the IED. The audible indicator can be selected to
sound if a voltage appears on any of the eight monitor pins. Alternatively it can be set to remain silent,
using only the LEDs.
14-10 P446/EN/TM/E
4 COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
4.1 Minimum Equipment Required

As a minimum, the following equipment is required:
 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set.

 Multi-meter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0 - 440 V and 0 -
250 V respectively
 Continuity tester (if not included in multi-meter).
 Phase angle meter
 Phase rotation meter
 A portable PC, installed with appropriate software (MiCOM S1 Studio)
 Fibre optic power meter if using IM64
 Fibre optic test leads (type and number according to application if using IM64)
4.2 Optional equipment

 Multi-finger test plug:
 P992 for test block type P991
 MMLB for test block type MMLG blocks
 Electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V
 KITZ K-Bus - EIA(RS)232 protocol converter for testing EIA(RS)485 K-Bus port, if applicable
 EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter for testing EIA(RS)485 Courier/MODBUS/IEC60870-5-
103/DNP3 port, if applicable
 A portable printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
P446/EN/TM/E 14-11
5 PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks are designed to ensure that the device has not been physically damaged prior
to commissioning, is functioning correctly and that all input quantity measurements are within the
stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the IED prior to commissioning, make a copy
of the settings. This allows you to restore them at a later date if necessary. This can be done by:
 Obtaining a setting file from the customer.

 Extracting the settings from the IED itself, using a portable PC with appropriate setting software.
 Writing them down as you sequentially step through the options using the front panel HMI.
If the customer has changed the password that prevents unauthorized changes to some of the
settings, either the revised password should be provided, or the original password restored before
testing.
Note: If the password has been lost, a recovery password can be obtained from Alstom Grid.
5.1 With the IED De-energized
DANGER: The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary
supply being applied to the IED and, if applicable, with the trip circuit
isolated.
The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the IED for these checks. If a
P991 test block is provided, the required isolation can be achieved by inserting test plug type P992.
This open-circuits all wiring routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, check the scheme diagram to ensure that this will not cause damage or
a safety hazard (the test block may, for example, be associated with protection current transformer
circuits). The sockets in the test plug, which correspond to the current transformer secondary
windings, must be linked before the test plug is inserted into the test block.
DANGER: Never open-circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer since the
high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation.
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the IED should be isolated using the
panel links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers should be short-circuited and
disconnected from the IED terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (for
example isolation links, fuses and MCB) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible,
the wiring to these circuits must be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent
them from being a safety hazard.
14-12 P446/EN/TM/E
5.1.1 Visual Inspection
Warning: The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the
IED should be checked. Check that the IED being tested is correct for the
line or circuit. Ensure that the circuit reference and system details are
entered onto the setting record sheet. Check the CT secondary current
rating and record the CT tap which is in use.
Carefully examine the IED to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connections (bottom left-hand corner at the rear of the IED case) are
used to connect the IED to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
5.1.2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts

Check the current transformer shorting contacts to ensure that they close when the heavy-duty
terminal block is disconnected from the current input board.
A B C DE FG H J K L M N
1
1
1
1
1 2 3 19
2
2
3
3
3
4 5 6 20
4
4
5
5
5
IRIG-B
6
6
6
6
6
7 8 9 21
7
7
8
8
9
9
9
10 11 12 22
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13 14 15 23
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
TX
RX
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16 17 18 24
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
P3003ENb
Figure 1: Rear terminal blocks on size 80TE case
The heavy-duty terminal blocks are fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead screws. These
are located two at the top and two at the bottom.
Note: Use a magnetic bladed screwdriver to minimize the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block
or lost.
Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check with a continuity tester that all the
shorting switches being used are closed.
5.1.3 Insulation
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if explicitly requested.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester
at a DC voltage not exceeding 500 V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected
together.
The main groups of IED terminals are:
 Voltage transformer circuits
P446/EN/TM/E 14-13
 Current transformer circuits

 Auxiliary voltage supply
 Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs
 Relay contacts
 EIA(RS)485 communication port
 Ethernet communication port
 Case earth
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 M at 500 V.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to
the IED.
5.1.4 External Wiring
Warning: Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant IED diagram and
scheme diagram. Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation
appears to be as expected. The IED diagram number appears on the rating
label under the top access cover on the front of the device.
If a P991 test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the scheme diagram. We
recommend that you make the supply connections to the live side of the test block (coloured orange)
and use the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5, 7 …).
The auxiliary supply normally uses terminals 13 (supply positive) and 15 (supply negative). Terminals
14 and 16 connected are connected to the IED’s positive and negative auxiliary supply terminals
respectively. However, you should check the wiring against the schematic diagram to ensure
compliance with the customer’s normal practice.
5.1.5 Test Watchdog Contacts (IED not Energized)

Using a continuity tester, check that the Watchdog contacts are in the following states:
Terminals De-energized contact
M11 to M12 Closed
M13 to M14 Open
Table 1: Watchdog contacts – de-energized
5.1.6 Auxiliary Supply

Depending on its nominal supply rating, the IED can be operated from either a DC only or an AC/DC
auxiliary supply. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Table 2.
Without energizing the IED measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
Nominal supply rating DC (AC RMS) DC operating range AC operating range
24 - 48 V N/A 19 to 65 V N/A
48 - 110 V 30 - 100 V 37 to 150 V 32 - 110 V
125 - 250 V 100 - 240 V 87 to 300 V 80 to 265 V
Table 2: Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx
14-14 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: The IED can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary
supply.
Warning: Do not energize the relay or interface unit using the battery charger with the
battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the relay’s power supply
circuitry.
Energise the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a test block is
provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to
the relay.
5.2 With the IED Energized
Warning: The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from
the IED for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to
prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
The following group of tests verifies that the IED hardware and software is functioning correctly and
should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the IED.
5.2.1 Test Watchdog Contacts (IED Energized)

Using a continuity tester, check that the Watchdog contacts are in the following states:
Terminals De-energized contact
M11 to M12 Open
M13 to M14 Closed
Table 3: Watchdog contacts – energized
5.2.2 LCD
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is designed to operate in a wide range of substation ambient
temperatures and therefore has a contrast setting. This is factory preset but to adjust it use
CONFIGURATION > LCD Contrast.
Warning: Before applying a contrast setting, make sure it does not make the display
too light or dark so the menu text becomes unreadable. The display visibility
can be restored by downloading a MiCOM S1 Studio setting file, with the LCD
contrast set in the range of 7 to 11.
5.2.3 Date and Time

The date and time are stored in memory, which is backed up by an auxiliary battery behind the front
lower access cover. When delivered, this battery is isolated to prevent battery drain during
transportation and storage.
Before setting the time and date:
1. Open the lower access cover on the front panel.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-15
2. Press on the battery lightly, to prevent it from falling out of the battery compartment, then pull
the red tab to remove the isolation strip.
Now it is necessary to set the date and time to the correct values. The method of setting depends on
whether accuracy is maintained by the IRIG-B port at the rear or by the IED's internal clock.
With an IRIG-B signal

When using IRIG-B to maintain the clock, the IED must first be connected to the satellite clock
equipment (usually a P594), which should be energized and functioning.
1. In the DATE AND TIME column, set the IRIG-B Sync cell to Enabled.
2. Ensure the IED is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell IRIG-B Status reads
Active.
3. Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co coordinated time
(satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed.
4. Check that the time, date and month are correct in the Date/Time cell. The IRIG-B signal
does not contain the current year so it needs to be set manually in this cell.
5. If the auxiliary supply fails, the time and date are maintained by the auxiliary battery.
Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, you should not have to set the time and date
again. To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, and then remove the auxiliary supply. Leave
the device de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re energization, the time should be
correct.
6. Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
Without an IRIG-B signal

If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, in the DATE AND TIME column,
ensure that the IRIG-B Sync cell is set to Disabled.
1. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using Date/Time cell or using the
serial protocol.
2. If the auxiliary supply fails, the time and date are maintained by the auxiliary battery.
Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, you should not have to set the time and date
again. To test this, remove the auxiliary supply. Leave the device de-energized for
approximately 30 seconds. On re energization, the time should be correct.
5.2.4 LEDs
On power-up, all LEDs first flash yellow. Following this, the green "Healthy" LED switches ON,
indicating that the device is healthy.
The IED's non-volatile memory stores the states of the alarm, trip and user-programmable LEDs (if
configured to latch). If the auxiliary supply is disconnected, then at some later time reconnected, the
LEDS return to their previous states. If any LEDs were ON previously, they switch ON when the
auxiliary supply is applied.
If any of these LEDs are ON, reset them before proceeding with further testing. If the LED switches
OFF, this means it has reset successfully so it is operational and no testing is needed.
Note: In most cases, alarms related to the communications channels do not reset at this stage.
5.2.5 Testing the Alarm and Out-of-Service LEDs

The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSION TESTS menu column.
1. Set the Test Mode cell to Contacts Blocked.
14-16 P446/EN/TM/E
2. Check that the out of service LED is ON continuously and the alarm LED flashes.
It is not necessary to return the Test Mode cell to Disabled at this stage because the test mode is
required for later tests.
5.2.6 Testing the trip LED

To test the trip LED, initiate a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However, the trip LED will
operate during the setting checks performed later. Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is
required at this stage.
5.2.7 Test user-programmable LEDs

To test these LEDs, set COMMISSIONING TESTS > Test LEDs to Apply Test. Check that all user-
programmable LEDs switch on.
5.2.8 Test Field voltage supply

The IED generates a field voltage of nominally 48 V that can be used to energize the opto-isolated
inputs. Alternatively the substation battery can be used.
1. Measure the field voltage across terminals M7 and M9 of the power supply terminal block.
2. Check the polarity is correct.
3. Check the field voltage is in the range 40 V to 60 V when no load is connected
4. Repeat for terminals M8 and M10.
5.2.9 Test Input Opto-Isolators

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the IED are functioning correctly.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energized one at a time. For terminal numbers, please see the
external connection diagrams in the "Wiring Diagrams" chapter. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the
field supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
Warning: The opto-isolated inputs may be energized from an external DC auxiliary

supply such as the station battery in some installations. Check that this is
not the case before connecting the field voltage otherwise damage to the IED
may result.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using either the Opto I/P Status cell in the
SYSTEM DATA column, or the Opto I/P Status cell in the COMMISSION TESTS column.
A '1' indicates an energized input and a '0' indicates a de-energized input. When each opto-input is
energized, one of the characters on the bottom line of the display changes to indicate the new state of
the input.
5.2.10 Test Output Relays
Caution: The high break output contacts, fitted to some models, are polarity sensitive.
External wiring should be verified against polarity requirements described in
the external connection diagram to ensure correct operation.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-17
This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly.
1. Ensure that the IED is still in test mode by checking that COMMISSION TESTS > Test Mode
is set to Blocked.
2. Energize the output relays one at a time. To select output relay 1 for testing, set the Test
Pattern cell to 1.
3. Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 as shown in
the external connection diagram.
4. To operate the output relay set the Contact Test cell to Apply Test.
5. Check the operation with a continuity tester.
6. Measure the resistance of the contacts in the closed state.
7. Reset the output relay by setting the Contact Test cell to Remove Test.
8. Repeat the test for the remaining output relays.
9. Return the IED to service by setting COMMISSION TESTS > Test Mode to Disabled.
Warning: Keep the time between application and removal of the contact test as short
as possible to avoid excessive heating. Ensure the associated output relay
does not exceed the thermal ratings of anything connected to the output
relays during the contact test procedure.
5.2.11 Communication Port RP1

You need only perform this test if the IED is to be accessed from a remote location. The test varies
depending on the communications protocol used.
This test is not intended to verify the complete communication link between the IED and the remote
location. The test is intended to verify the IED's rear communications port and, if applicable, the
protocol converter.
The rear communication port RP1 has the following physical layer implementations:
 K-Bus (copper connection)

 EIA(RS)485 (copper connection)
 Optical Fibre (fibre optic connection)
Copper connection
The copper rear communication port RP1 is presented on pins 16, 17 and 18 of the power supply
terminal block. Screened twisted pair cable is used. Pin 16 is the earth connection for the screen and
pins 17 and 18 are for the communication signal. The optional fibre connection is presented on a
separate board, housed in the communications slot.
For K-Bus applications, pins 17 and 18 are not polarity sensitive and it does not matter which way
round the wires are connected. EIA(RS)485 is polarity sensitive, so you must ensure the wires are
connected the correct way round (pin 17 is positive, pin 18 is negative).
If K-Bus is being used, a Kitz protocol converter (KITZ101, KITZ102 OR KITZ201) will have been
installed to convert the K-Bus signals into RS232. Likewise, if RS485 is being used, an RS485-RS232
converter will have been installed. In the case where a protocol converter is being used, a laptop PC
running appropriate software (such as MiCOM S1 Studio or PAS&T) can be connected to the
incoming side of the protocol converter, as shown in Figure 2.
14-18 P446/EN/TM/E
K-Bus
KITZ RS232
IED IED IED Protocol
Converter
RS485
RS485-RS232 RS232
IED IED IED
Converter
Figure 2: Connecting laptop to protocol converter
K-Bus can only be used with the Courier protocol, whereas RS485 and RS232 can be used for a
variety of serial protocols as required by the device in question, so communication using the chosen
data protocol also needs to be checked, as described in the following sections.
Fibre Connection
Some models have an optional fibre optic communications port fitted (on a separate communications
board). The communications port to be used is selected by setting the Physical Link cell in the
COMMUNICATIONS column, the values being 'Copper' or 'K-Bus' for the RS485/K-bus port and 'Fibre
Optic’ for the fibre optic port.
5.2.11.1 Courier
K-Bus
1. Set COMMUNICATIONS > Physical Link to K-Bus
2. Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application software are
set the same as those on the protocol converter.
3. In COMMUNICATIONS > Remote Address set the IED's Courier address to a value between
1 and 254.
4. Check that communications can be established with this IED using the portable PC/Master
Station.
Copper
1. Set COMMUNICATIONS > Physical Link to copper.
set the same as those of the IED.
1 and 254.
4. Check that communications can be established with this IED using the portable PC/Master
Station
Fibre
1. Set COMMUNICATIONS > Physical Link to fibre-optic.
2. Ensure that the address and baud rate settings in the application software are set the same as
those of the IED.
3. Check that communications with the IED can be established using the Master Station.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-19
5.2.11.2 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications
Copper
2. IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master Station
and this should be used to verify that the rear fibre optic or EIA(RS)485 port, as appropriate, is
working. Ensure that the IED address and baud rate settings in the application software are
set the same as those in the IED.
Fibre
those of the IED.
5.2.11.3 DNP3.0 communications
Copper
2. Ensure that the IED address, baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set
the same as those in the IED.
3. Check that communications with this IED can be established using the Master Station.
Fibre
those of the IED.
5.2.11.4 IEC 61850 communications
1. Connect a portable PC running the appropriate IEC 61850 Client Software or MMS browser to
the IED's Ethernet port (RJ45 or ST fibre optic connection). Alternatively, you can use a
simple Ethernet 'ping' to the configured IP address.
2. Configure the IP parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway) and SNTP time
synchronization parameters (SNTP Server 1, SNTP Server 2) Configuration of the IP
parameters can be imported from an SCL file or made manually by using the IED Configurator
tool, which is installed as part of MiCOM S1 Studio. In either case, these parameters are sent
to the IED using the IED Configurator via a serial connection to the IED’s front port - they
cannot be configured via the IED’s HMI on the front panel.
Note: If the assigned IP address is duplicated elsewhere on the same network, the remote
communications operates in an indeterminate way. However, the device checks for a conflict on
every IP configuration change and at power up. An alarm is raised if an IP conflict is detected. The
device can be configured to accept data from networks other than the local network using the
‘Gateway’ setting.
3. Check that communications with this IED can be established.
14-20 P446/EN/TM/E
5.2.12 Rear communications port RP2

RP2 is an optional second serial port board providing additional serial connectivity. It provides two 9-
pin D-type serial port connectors SK4 and SK5. SK4 can be configured as an EIA(RS232),
EIA(RS485), or K-Bus connection for Courier protocol only, whilst SK5 is fixed to EIA(RS)232 for
InterMiCOM signalling only.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the IED to the
remote location, just the IED's rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.
5.2.12.1 K-Bus configuration
1. If a K-Bus-to-RS232 KITZ protocol converter is installed, connect a portable PC running

appropriate software (such as MiCOM S1 Studio or PAS&T) to the to the RS232 port of the
KITZ protocol converter.
set the same as those on the protocol converter.
1 and 254.
4. Set COMMUNICATIONS > RP2 Port Config to K-Bus
5. Check that communications can be established with this IED using the portable PC.
1. If an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter is installed, connect a portable PC running

appropriate software (for example MiCOM S1 Studio) to the EIA(RS)232 side of the converter
and the IED's RP2 port to the EIA(RS)485 side of the converter.
3. In COMMUNICATIONS > RP2 Address set the IED's Courier address to a value between 1
and 254.
4. Set COMMUNICATIONS > RP2 Port Config to EIA(RS)485.
5. Check that communications can be established with this relay using the portable PC.
1. Connect a portable PC running the appropriate software (for example MiCOM S1 Studio) to
the rear EIA(RS)232 port (SK5)
3. In COMMUNICATIONS > RP2 Address set the IED's Courier address to a value between 1
and 254.
4. Set COMMUNICATIONS > RP2 Port Config to EIA(RS)232.
5. Check that communications can be established with this IED using the portable PC.
5.2.13 Current Inputs

This test verifies that the current measurement inputs are configured correctly.
All devices leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50 Hz. If operation at 60 Hz is
required then this must be set in the Frequency cell in the SYSTEM DATA column.
1. Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each current
transformer input in turn. See the external connection diagram for the terminal numbers.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-21
2. Check its magnitude using a multi-meter or test set readout. The corresponding reading can
then be checked in the MEASUREMENTS 1 column.
3. Record the displayed value. The measured current values are either in primary or secondary
Amperes. If MEASURE’T SETUP > Local Values is set to Primary, the value displayed
should be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer
ratio (set in the CT AND VT RATIOS column). See Table 4. If Local Values is set to
Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the applied current.
Note: If a PC is connected to the IED rear communications port to display the measured current, the
process is similar. However, the MEASURE’T SETUP > Remote Values setting determines
whether the displayed values are in primary or secondary Amperes.
The measurement accuracy of the IED is ±1%. However, an additional allowance must be made for
the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Corresponding CT ratio
Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1
(in ‘CT and VT RATIOS‘ column)
IA magnitude
IB magnitude Phase CT Primary / Phase CT Secondary
IC magnitude
IM magnitude Mcomp CT Primary / Mcomp CT Secondary
ISEF magnitude SEF amp CT Primary / SEF amp CT Secondary
Table 4: CT Ratios settings
5.2.14 Voltage inputs

This test verifies that the voltage measurement inputs are configured correctly.
1. Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn

2. Check its magnitude using a multimeter or test set readout. The corresponding reading can
then be checked in the MEASUREMENTS 1 column.
3. Record the value displayed. The measured voltage values are either in primary or secondary
Volts. If MEASURE’T SETUP > Local Values is set to Primary, the values displayed should
be equal to the applied voltage multiplied by the corresponding voltage transformer ratio (set
in the CT AND VT RATIOS column), as shown in Table 5. If the Local Values cell is set to
Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the applied voltage.
Note: If a PC connected to the IED using the rear communications port is being used to display the
measured current, the process is similar. However, setting MEASURE’T SETUP > Remote Values
determines whether the displayed values are in primary or secondary Amperes.
Corresponding CT ratio
Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1
(in ‘CT and VT RATIOS‘ column)
VAN magnitude
VBN magnitude Main VT Primary / Main VT Secondary
VCN magnitude
Check Sync Voltage Magnitude C/S VT Primary / C/S VT Secondary
CB2 Check Sync Volt Magnitude (for dual circuit
CB2 C/S VT Primary / CB2 C/S VT Secondary
breaker variants)
Table 5: Voltage ratio settings
14-22 P446/EN/TM/E
6 INTERMICOM COMMUNICATION LOOPBACK

If the IED is used in a scheme with current differential or InterMiCOM64 communications, it is
necessary to configure a loopback to test the communication.
Several different fibre-optic interfaces are available. In general, 1300 nm fibres are used, either
single-mode or multi-mode are used for direct connection. 850 nm multimode fibres are used with
multiplexing telecommunications equipment. It is important that any fibres used for testing are correct
for the specified interface(s).
Optical fibres should be terminated with BFOC2.5 (ST2.5) connectors. For multimode applications
use 50/125 µm cored. Make sure fibre test leads used for measurements are long enough for mode
stripping. A minimum length of 10 m (30ft) is recommended for this.
If IEDs communicate using multiplexed electrical communication channels, a P590 is used. This is a
bidirectional optical-to-electrical signal convertor. It is situated near the multiplexer, between the fibre
from the IED and the electrical interface of the multiplexer. Apply the loopback either at the P590 or
the multiplexer to ensure as much of the circuit as possible is tested.
Set CONFIGURATION > InterMiCOM64 to Enable.
The testing method is similar, irrespective of whether the communications between devices is with
dedicated fibres or with direct fibre connection to a IEEE C37.94 multiplexer.
If using dedicated fibres, a P590 unit is used to interface the IED's fibre-optic communications channel
to a multiplexer. The P590 interface units require additional tests (see P590 documentation).
If the IED is connected to a IEEE C37.94 multiplexer, the loopback testing is exactly the same as for a
direct fibre connection.
Note: Two channels may have different implementations. The sections describing commissioning the
interfaces and the loopback tests should be used as is relevant to each channel.
Warning: NEVER look directly into the transmit port or the end of an optical fibre, as
this could severely damage your eyes
6.1 Communications Loopback Setting

The loopback test can be used to establish correct operation of the local communication interface.
In loopback mode the signals sent and received using the communications interface are routed to and
from the signals defined in the programmable logic. If CONFIGURATION > InterMiCOM64 is set to
Enable, this still applies but if COMMISSION TESTS > IM64 Test Mode is set to Enabled, an IM64
test pattern is transmitted instead.
1. Set INTERMICOM COMMS > Loopback Mode to External.

2. Using an appropriate fibre-optic cable, connect the Channel 1 transmitter (TX1) to an optical
power meter. Check that the average power transmitted is within the range given in the
following table.
3. Record the transmit power level
4. Repeat for Channel 2 if applicable
850 nm 1300 nm 1300 nm

Power
multi-mode multi-mode single-mode
Maximum transmitter power (average value) -19.8 dBm -3 dBm -3 dBm
P446/EN/TM/E 14-23
850 nm 1300 nm 1300 nm

Power
multi-mode multi-mode single-mode
Minimum transmitter power (average value) -22.8 dBm -9 dBm -9 dBm
Table 6: Transmit power levels
6.2 Loopback Communications Configuration

Make a communications loopback on the protection signalling communication paths. Either one or
two channels are fitted depending on the product variant and application. A direct fibre connection or
a multiplexed connection (using P59x units) can be used on each of the channels. Loopbacks should
be made for each of the two channels.
Where direct fibre connections are used (or where multiplexer channels conforming to the IEEE
C37.94 standard are used), connect an appropriate fibre-optic cable from the channel transmitter to
the channel receiver port on the rear of the device.
If the communications use P59x interface devices, connect the appropriate optical fibre(s) between the
channel transmitter(s) on the IED used to make connection to the P590 optical receiver(s). Then
commission the relevant P59x devices as described in Appendix B Commissioning Instructions.
6.3 Loopback Test

1. Set COMMISSION TESTS > IM64 Test Mode to Enabled, and use COMMISSION TESTS >
Test Pattern to set a bit pattern sent using the InterMiCOM64 loopback.
2. Check that MEASUREMENTS 4 > IM64 Rx Status matches the test pattern set. The
communication statistics show the number of valid and erroneous messages received.
Notes: The propagation delay measurement is not valid in this mode of operation. The IED responds as if it
is connected to a remote IED. It indicates a loopback alarm which can only be cleared by setting
COMMISSION TESTS > Loopback Mode to Disabled.
In loopback mode the signals sent and received through the protection communications interface
continue to be routed to and from the signals defined in the programmable logic.
A test pattern can also be sent to the remote end to test the whole InterMiCOM communication path.
To do this, set COMMISSION TESTS >IM64 Test Mode to Enable and connect two ends. Take
special care because the test pattern is executed using PSL at the remote end.
14-24 P446/EN/TM/E
7 INTERMICOM COMMUNICATION LOOPBACK

If the IED is used in a scheme with InterMiCOM communications it is necessary to configure a
loopback on the InterMiCOM communications.
Make the loopback as close as possible to where the communication link leaves the substation.
Therefore as much of the wiring as possible and all associated communication signal converters are
included in the test.
This section only covers an electrical loopback connection using EIA(RS)232 Fibre loopback
connections have already been covered in section 6.
7.1 EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM communications

1. Set CONFIGURATION > InterMiCOM to Enabled.
2. Set INTERMICOM COMMS > Ch Statistics and Ch Diagnostics to Visible.
3. Check that INTERMICOM COMMS > IM HW Status displays OK. This means the
InterMiCOM hardware is fitted and initialized.
7.1.1 MODEM InterMiCOM loopback testing & diagnostics

INTERMICOM COMMS > Loopback Mode allows you to test the InterMiCOM channel. In normal
service it must be disabled. INTERMICOM COMMS > Loopback Status shows the status of the
InterMiCOM loopback mode.
Note: If INTERMICOM COMMS > Loopback Mode is set to Internal, only the internal software of the
device is checked. This is useful for testing functionality if no communications connections are
made. Use the External setting during commissioning because it checks both the software and
hardware used by InterMiCOM . When the IED is switched into either Internal or External Loopback
Mode it automatically uses generic addresses and inhibits the InterMiCOM messages to the PSL by
setting all eight InterMiCOM message command states to zero.
Set INTERMICOM COMMS > Loopback Mode to External and form a communications loopback by
connecting the transmit signal (pin 2) to the receive signal (pin 3).
Note: The DCD signal must be held high (by connecting pin 1 to pin 4) if the connected equipment does
not support DCD. A communications converter is probably used and the loopback is not at the
InterMiCOM connector. Make the loopback as far into the communications channel as possible so
that as much wiring, and as many ancillary communication components as possible are included in
the test.
The loopback mode is shown on the front panel by an Alarm LED and the message IM Loopback on
the LCD.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-25
Figure 3: Connections for InterMiCOM communications loopback
Check that all connections are correct and the software is working correctly. Check that
INTERMICOM COMMS > Loopback Status shows OK.
7.1.1.1 MODEM InterMiCOM command bits

To test the InterMiCOM command bits, go to the INTERMICOM COMMS column and do the following:
1. Enter any test pattern in the Test Pattern cell in the by scrolling through and changing
selected bits between 1 and 0. The entered pattern is transmitted through the loopback.
2. Check that the IM Output Status cell matches the applied Test Pattern.
3. Check that all 8 bits in the IM Input Status cell are zero.
7.1.1.2 MODEM InterMiCOM channel diagnostics

Check that the following cells in the INTERMICOM COMMS column all read OK.
 Data CD Status
 FrameSync Status
 Message Status
 Channel Status
7.1.1.3 MODEM InterMiCOM channel failure
1. Simulate a failure of the communications link by breaking a connection and checking that
some of these cells show Fail.
2. Restore the communications loopback and ensure that the four diagnostic cells display OK
Note: Some or all of these cells show Fail depending on the communications configuration and the way
the link has failed.
14-26 P446/EN/TM/E
8 SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific settings have been correctly applied, both
the IED’s function and the programmable scheme logic settings.
Note: If applicable, the trip circuit remains isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of
the associated circuit breaker.
8.1 Apply Application-Specific Settings

There are two different methods of applying the settings to the IED
 Transferring settings to the IED from a pre-prepared setting file using MiCOM S1 Studio
 Enter the settings manually using the IED’s front panel HMI
8.1.1 Transferring settings from a settings file

This method is preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster, and there is a lower
margin for error.
1. Connect a laptop/PC (that is running MiCOM S1 Studio) to the IED's front serial port, or any
rear Courier communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter if necessary).
2. Power on the IED
3. Right-click on the appropriate device name in the Studio Explorer pane and select Send
4. In the Send to dialog select the setting files and click Send
5. Close the Send to dialog by clicking Close
Notes: If the device name does not already exist in the Studio Explorer system, first perform a
QuickConnect to the IED. Then manually add the settings file to the device name in the Studio
Explorer system. Refer to the MiCOM S1 Studio help for details of how to do this.
If application-specific Programmable Logic Scheme (PSL) is used, this must be transferred to the
IED from MiCOM S1 Studio. It is not possible to change the PSL using the IED’s front panel HMI.
8.1.2 Entering the settings using the IED's front panel HMI panel
Note: It is not possible to change the PSL using the IED’s front panel HMI.
1. Starting at the default display, press the down cursor key to show the first column heading.
2. Use the horizontal cursor keys to select the required column heading.
3. Use the vertical cursor keys to view the setting data in the column.
4. To return to the column header, either press and hold the up cursor key, or press the Cancel
key once. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level.
5. To return to the default display, press the up cursor key or the Cancel key from any of the
column headings. If you use the auto-repeat function of the up cursor key, you cannot go
straight to the default display from one of the column cells because the auto-repeat stops at
the column heading.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-27
6. To change the value of a setting, go to the relevant cell in the menu, then press the Enter key
to change the cell value. A flashing cursor on the LCD shows that the value can be changed.
You may be prompted for a password first.
7. To change the setting value, press the up and down cursor keys. If the setting to be changed
is a binary value or a text string, select the required bit or character to be changed using the
left and right cursor keys.
8. Press the Enter key to confirm the new setting value or the Clear key to discard it. The new
setting is automatically discarded if it is not confirmed within 15 seconds.
9. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be
confirmed before they are used. When all required changes have been entered, return to the
column heading level and press the down cursor key. Before returning to the default display,
the following prompt appears.
Update settings
ENTER or CLEAR
10. Press the Enter key to accept the new settings or press the Clear key to discard the new
settings.
Notes: If the menu time-out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed, the setting values are
also discarded.
Control and support settings are updated immediately after they are entered, without the Update
settings prompt
Warning: If the installation needs application-specific PSL, the relevant .psl files, must
be transferred to the IED for each setting group that will be used.
If you do not do this, the factory default PSL is still resident. This may have
severe operational and safety consequences.
Note: If, as a result of applying the application settings, the communication mode (Comms Mode cell) has
been changed, a comms changed alarm is raised on the user interface. This alarm can only be
cleared by power cycling the relay. If the alarm appears, remove and then re-apply the auxiliary
supply to the relay.
8.1.3 Protection communications loopback

If InterMiCOM64 is being used for the signalling channel, the communication loopbacks that were
tested earlier need to be maintained while scheme testing is performed.
Set COMMISSIONING TEST > Test Loopback to External
Check that COMMISSIONING TEST > Test Pattern has all bits set to 0 initially.
Set COMMISSIONING TEST > IM64Test Mode to Enabled.
8.1.4 Reset statistics

The protection communications / InterMiCOM64 communications statistics should be reset at this point.
The Clear Statistics cell in the MEASUREMENTS 4 column is used for this.
14-28 P446/EN/TM/E
8.2.1 Distance Protection Single-ended Testing

If the distance protection function is being used, the reaches and time delays should be tested.
1. Check for any possible dependency conditions and simulate as appropriate.

2. In the CONFIGUARATION column, disable all protection elements other than the one being
tested.
3. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing.

The IED should now be connected to equipment able to supply phase-phase and phase-neutral volts
with current in the correct phase relation for a particular type of fault on the selected characteristic
angle. The facility for altering the loop impedance (phase-to-ground fault or phase-phase) presented
to the IED is essential.
We recommend that you use a three-phase digital/electronic injection test set to make the
commissioning procedure easier.
1. If testing the distance elements using using test sets that do not provide a dynamic model to
generate true fault delta conditions, set COMMISSIONING TESTS > Static Test Mode to
Enabled. When set, this disables phase selector control and forces the device to use a
conventional (non-delta) directional line.
2. For lower specification test equipment that cannot apply a full three phase set of healthy
simulated pre-fault voltages, the VT supervision may need to be disabled to avoid spurious
pickup. Set CONFIGURATION > Supervision to Disabled.
3. Connect the test equipment to the device using the test block(s), taking care not to open-
circuit any CT secondary windings. If using MMLG type test blocks, the live side of the test
plug must be provided with shorting links before it is inserted into the test block.
4. When the test is complete, make sure COMMISSIONING TESTS > Static Test Mode is set
back to Disabled.

The zone 1 element is set to be directional forward.
1. Apply a dynamic A-phase-to-neutral fault, slightly in excess of the expected reach. The
duration of the injection should be in excess of the tZ1 timer setting, but less than tZ2. These
settings are in the DISTANCE column. No trip should occur, and the red Trip LED should
remain OFF.
2. Reduce the impedance and reapply the simulated fault.
3. Repeat this procedure until a trip occurs. When this happens, the display shows
Alarms/Faults present and the Alarm and Trip LEDs switch ON.
4. To view the alarm message, keep pressing the read key until the yellow alarm LED changes
from flashing to being steadily on.
5. At the prompt Press clear to reset alarms, press the C key. This clears the fault record from
the display.
6. Record the impedance at which the device trips. The measured impedance should be within
+/- 10% of the expected reach.
7. Read and reset the alarms
P446/EN/TM/E 14-29
Modern injection test sets usually calculate the expected fault loop impedance from the device
settings. For those that do not, the appropriate loop impedance is given by the vector sum:
Z1 + Z1 residual = Z1 + (Z1 x kZN Res Comp ∠ kZN Angle) Ω

The zone 2 element is set to be directional forward.
1. Apply a dynamic B-C fault, slightly in excess of the expected reach. The duration of the
injection should be in excess of the tZ2 timer setting, but less than tZ3. These settings are in
the DISTANCE column. No trip should occur, and the red Trip LED should remain OFF.
2. Repeat the test described above to find the zone reach.
4. Read and reset the alarms.
Modern injection test sets usually calculate the expected fault loop impedance from the device
settings. For those that do not, check the reach for phase-phase and confirm the operation of the
appropriate contacts. The appropriate loop impedance is now given by:
2 x Z2 Ω

The zone 3 element is set to forward, reverse or offset. The current injected must be in the appropriate
direction to match the setting in the DISTANCE SETUP column.
1. Apply a dynamic C-A fault, slightly in excess of the expected reach. The duration of the
injection should be in excess of the tZ3 timer setting (typically tZ3 + 100 ms).
5. Check that the correct reverse offset (Z3’) has been applied. The setting is in the Z3’ Ph Rev
Reach and Z3’ Gnd Rev Reach cells.
8.2.1.5 Zone 4 reach check (if enabled)

The zone 4 element is set to be directional reverse.
1. Apply a dynamic B-N fault, slightly in excess of the expected reach. The duration of the
injection should be in excess of the tZ4 timer setting (typically tZ4 + 100 ms).
8.2.1.6 Zone P reach check (if enabled)

The zone P element can be set to forward or reverse directional or offset. The current injected must
be in the appropriate direction to match the setting in the DISTANCE SETUP column.
14-30 P446/EN/TM/E
1. Apply a dynamic C-N fault, slightly in excess of the expected reach. The duration of the
injection should be in excess of the tZP timer setting (typically tZP + 100 ms).
3. Record the impedance at which the relay trips. The measured impedance should be within
+/-10% of the expected reach.
8.2.1.7 Resistive reach (quadrilateral characteristics only)

Check that the correct settings for phase and ground element resistive reaches have been applied.
The relevant settings are:
 R1Ph, R2Ph, R3Ph, R3Ph reverse, R4Ph and RP Ph for phase fault zones.
 R1Gnd, R2Gnd, R3Gnd, R3Gnd reverse, R4Gnd and RP Gnd for ground fault zones.
Note: Zone 3 has an independent setting for the forward resistance reach (right-hand resistive reach line),
and the reverse resistance reach (left-hand resistive reach line).
8.2.1.8 Load blinder

Check that the correct settings for the load blinder have been applied. The settings are at the end of
the DISTANCE SETUP column.
Verify that the Load B/Angle cell is set at least 10 degrees less than the Line Angle setting in the
LINE PARAMETERS column.
8.2.2 Distance Protection Operation and Contact Assignment
8.2.2.1 Phase A
1. Prepare a dynamic A-phase-to-neutral fault, at half the Zone 1 reach.

2. Set a timer to start when the fault injection is applied and to stop when the trip occurs.
3. To verify correct output contact mapping use the trip contacts that would be expected to trip
the circuit breaker(s), as shown below.
Tripping type Single breaker Two circuit breakers
Three Pole Tripping Any Trip Any Trip (CB1) and Any Trip (CB2)
Single Pole Tripping Trip A Trip A (CB1) and Trip A (CB2)
4. For two breaker applications, stop the timer when CB1 and CB2 trip contacts have both
closed.
5. Monitor by connecting the contacts in series to stop the timer if necessary.
6. Record the phase A trip time.
7. Switch OFF the AC supply and reset the alarms.
8.2.2.2 Phase B
1. Reconfigure to test a B phase fault.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-31
2. Repeat the test, this time ensuring that the breaker trip contacts relative to B phase operation
close correctly.
3. Record the phase B trip time.
8.2.2.3 Phase C
1. Reconfigure to test a C phase fault.

2. Repeat the test, this time ensuring that the breaker trip contacts relative to C phase operation
close correctly.
3. Record the phase C trip time.
The average of the recorded operating times for the three phases should typically be less than 20 ms
for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms for 60 Hz when set for instantaneous operation.
Note• Where a non-zero tZ1 Gnd time delay is set in the DISTANCE menu column, the expected operating
time is typically within +/- 5% of the tZ1 setting plus the “instantaneous” delay quoted above.
8.2.2.4 Time delay settings tZ1 Ph, and tZ2 - tZ4

Check that the correct time delay settings have been applied. The relevant settings are in the
SCHEME LOGIC column and are as follows:
 tZ1 Ph Time Delay and Tz1 Gnd Time Delay

 tZ2 Ph Time Delay and tZ2 Gnd Time Delay
 tZP Ph Time Delay and tZP Gnd Time Delay
Note: The P446 allows separate time delay settings for phase (“Ph”) and ground (“Gnd”) fault elements.
BOTH must be checked to ensure that they have been set correctly.
8.2.3 Distance Protection Scheme Testing

The device is tested for its response to internal and external fault simulations, but the response
depends on the aided channel (pilot) scheme selected. Table 7 shows the expected response for
various test situations for a conventional signalling scheme. The response to the Reset Z1 Extension
opto-input is shown in the case of a Zone 1 Extension scheme.
We assume a conventional signalling scheme implementation.
If an InterMiCOM64 scheme is used to provide the signalling, the scheme logic may not use opto-
inputs for the aided scheme implementation. In this case, internal logic signals (DDBs) need to be set
or reset to test the operation of the protection scheme.
Use the IM64 Test Mode with the IM64 Test Pattern to assert or monitor the relevant signals.
Ensure that the injection test set timer is still connected to measure the time taken for the device to
trip. A series of fault injections are applied, with a Zone 1, end-of-line, or Zone 4 fault simulated. At
this stage, note the method in which each fault is applied, but do not inject yet:
14-32 P446/EN/TM/E
 Zone 1 fault: A dynamic forward A-B fault at half the Zone 1 reach is simulated.
 End of line fault: A dynamic forward A-B fault at the remote end of the line is simulated. The
fault impedance simulated should match the Line Impedance setting in the LINE
PARAMETERS menu column.
 Zone 4 fault: A dynamic reverse A-B fault at half the Zone 4 reach is simulated.
IED RESPONSE
Fault type Forward fault in Forward fault at end of line
Reverse fault in zone 4
simulated zone 1 (within Z1X/Z2)
Signal receive opto ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Zone 1 extension Trip Trip No Trip Trip No Trip No Trip
Trip, Trip, No Trip, No Trip, No Trip, Signal No Trip, Signal
Blocking scheme
No Signal Send No Signal Send Signal Send No Signal Send Send Send
Permissive Scheme Trip, No Trip, No No Trip, No No Trip, No

Trip, Signal Send Trip, Signal Send
(PUR/PUTT) No Signal Send Signal Send Signal Send Signal Send
Permissive Scheme No Trip, Signal No Trip, No No Trip, No
Trip, Signal Send Trip, Signal Send Trip, Signal Send
(POR/POTT) Send Signal Send Signal Send
Table 7: Scheme test response
8.2.3.1 Scheme Trip Test for Zone 1 Extension Only
1. Energize the Reset Z1X (Reset Zone 1 Extension) opto-input. This is done by applying a
continuous dc voltage onto the required opto-input, either from the test set, station battery, or
IED field voltage. The commissioning engineer decides on the best method.
2. Inject an end of line fault. The duration of injection should be set to 100 ms. No trip should
occur.
3. De-energize the Reset Z1X opto-input
4. Repeat the test injection and record the operating time. This should typically be less than
20 ms for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms for 60 Hz when set for instantaneous operation.
5. Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms.
Note: Where a non-zero tZ1 Ph or tZ1 Gnd time delay is set in the DISTANCE column, the expected
operating time is typically within +/- 5% of the tZ1 setting plus the “instantaneous” delay quoted
above.
8.2.3.2 Scheme trip tests for permissive schemes (PUR/POR only)

This test applies to both Permissive Underreach, and Permissive Overreach aided scheme
applications.
1. Energize the Signal Receive opto-input. This is done by applying a continuous dc voltage
onto the required opto-input from the test set, station battery, or IED field voltage (it is up to
commissioning engineer to decide on the best method).
2. Inject an end of line fault, and record the operating time. The measured operating time should
typically be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7ms for 60 Hz when set for
instantaneous operation.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-33
Note: Where a non-zero Aided Distance Dly time delay is set in the DISTANCE menu column, the
expected operating time is typically within +/- 5% of the tZ1 setting plus the “instantaneous” delay
quoted above.
De-energize the Signal Receive opto-input (remove the temporary energization link, to turn it OFF).
8.2.3.3 Scheme trip tests for blocking scheme only
1. Energize the Signal Receive opto-input. This is done by applying a continuous DC voltage
onto the required opto-input, either from the test set, station battery, or IED field voltage. The
commissioning engineer decides on the best method.
2. Inject an end of line fault. The duration of injection should be set to 100 ms. No trip should
occur.
3. De-energize the channel received opto-input.
4. Repeat the test injection, and record the operating time.
Note For blocking schemes, a non-zero Aided Distance Dly time delay is set, so the expected operating
time is typically within +/- 5% of the delay setting plus the “instantaneous” operating delay. The trip
time should thus be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms for 60 Hz, plus 1.05 x Delay
setting.
8.2.3.4 Signal send test for permissive schemes (PUR/POR only)

This test applies to both Permissive Underreach, and Permissive Overreach scheme applications.
1. Reconnect the test set so that the timer is no longer stopped by the Trip contact, but is now
stopped by the Signal Send contact (the contact that would normally be connected to the
pilot/signalling channel).
2. Inject a Zone 1 fault, and record the signal send contact operating time. The measured
operating time should typically be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms for 60 Hz
applications.
8.2.3.5 Signal send test for blocking scheme only
stopped by the Signal Send contact. This is the contact that would normally be connected to
the pilot/signalling channel.
2. Inject a Zone 4 fault, and record the signal send contact operating time. The measured
operating time should typically be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms for 60 Hz
applications.
8.2.4 Scheme Timer Settings

Check that the correct time delay settings have been applied. The relevant settings in the AIDED
SCHEMES column are:
 tRev. Guard (if applicable/visible)
14-34 P446/EN/TM/E
 Unblocking Delay (if applicable/visible)

 WI Trip Delay (if applicable/visible)
1. When the tests are completed, restore all settings that were disabled for
testing purposes.
2. Set the Static Test Mode to Disabled.
3. Remove any wires or leads temporarily fitted to energize the channel receive
opto-input.
8.3 Delta Directional Comparison
8.3.1 Delta Protection Single-ended Testing

If the delta directional comparison aided scheme is being used, test the operation.
tested.
2. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing

Use a three-phase digital/electronic injection test set to make the commissioning procedure easier.
Connect the test equipment to the device using the test block(s) taking care not to open-circuit any CT
secondary. If MMLG type test blocks are used, the live side of the test plug must be provided with
shorting links before it is inserted into the test block.
8.3.1.2 Single-ended Injection Test

This set of injection tests aims to determine correct operation of a single IED at one end of the
scheme. The device is tested in isolation, with the communications channel to the remote line
terminal disconnected.
First verify that the device cannot send or receive channel scheme signals to or from the remote line
end.
The device is tested for its response to forward and reverse fault injections but the response depends
on the aided channel (pilot) scheme that is selected. Table 8 shows the expected response for
various test situations for a conventional signalling scheme.
If an InterMiCOM64 scheme is used to provide the signalling, the scheme logic may not use opto-
Use the IM64 Test Mode with the IM64 Test Pattern to assert or monitor the relevant signals.
IED RESPONSE
Direction of fault
Forward fault Reverse fault
test injection
Signal receive opto ON OFF ON OFF
No Trip, Trip, No Trip, No Trip,
Blocking scheme
No Signal Send No Signal Send Signal Send Signal Send
P446/EN/TM/E 14-35
IED RESPONSE
Direction of fault
test injection
Permissive scheme Trip, No Trip, No Trip, No Trip,
(POR/POTT) Signal Send Signal Send No Signal Send No Signal Send
Table 8: Delta protection scheme response
8.3.1.3 Forward fault preparation

Configure the test set to inject a dynamic sequence of injection, as follows:
3. Simulate a healthy three-phase set of balanced voltages, each of magnitude Vn. No load
current should be simulated. The duration of injection should be set to 1 second. Step 1
therefore mimics a healthy unloaded line before the onset of a fault.
4. Simulate a forward fault on the A-phase. The A-phase voltage must be simulated to drop by 3
times the Dir. V Fwd setting,
Va = Vn – 3(Dir. V Fwd)
The fault current on the A-phase should be set to 3 times the Dir. I Fwd setting, lagging Va by
a phase angle equal to the line angle,
Ia = 3 (Dir. I Fwd)∠ -θ Line

Phases B and C should retain their healthy pre-fault voltage, and no current. The duration of injection
should be set to 100 ms longer than the Delta Dly time setting.
8.3.2 Delta Directional Comparison Operation and Contact Assignment

A forward fault should be injected with the intention of causing a scheme trip. For a Permissive
scheme, the Signal Receive opto-input needs to be energized. This is done by applying a continuous
DC voltage onto the required opto-input, either from the test set, station battery, or IED field voltage.
The commissioning engineer decides on the best method.
For a Blocking scheme, the opto-input should remain de-energized.
Phase A
1. Prepare a dynamic A-phase-to-neutral fault, as detailed above.
2. Set a timer to start when the fault injection is applied, and to stop when the trip occurs.
3. To verify the correct output contact mapping use the trip contacts that would be expected to
trip the circuit breaker(s), as shown in the following table.
Tripping type Single breaker Two circuit breakers
Three Pole Tripping Any Trip Any Trip (CB1) and Any Trip (CB2)
Single Pole Tripping Trip A Trip A (CB1) and Trip A (CB2)
4. For two breaker applications, stop the timer when CB1 and CB2 trip contacts have both
closed.
5. Monitor by connecting the contacts in series to stop the timer if necessary.
6. Record the phase A trip time
7. Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms
14-36 P446/EN/TM/E
Phase B
1. Reconfigure to test a B phase fault.
2. Repeat the test, this time ensuring that the breaker trip contacts relative to B phase operation
close correctly.
3. Record the phase B trip time.
Phase C
1. Reconfigure to test a C phase fault.
2. Repeat the test, this time ensuring that the breaker trip contacts relative to C phase operation
close correctly.
3. Record the phase C trip time.
The average of the recorded operating times for the three phases should typically be less than 20 ms
for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms for 60 Hz when set for instantaneous operation.
Note; For Blocking schemes, where a non-zero Delta Dly time delay is set, the expected operating time is
typically within +/- 5% of the delay setting plus the “instantaneous” delay quoted above.
8.3.3 Delta Directional Comparison Scheme Testing
Signal send test for permissive schemes

2. Repeat the forward fault injection, and record the Signal Send contact operating time. The
measured operating time should typically be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms
for 60 Hz applications.
Signal send test for blocking schemes only

Configure the test set to inject a dynamic sequence of injection, as follows:
1. Simulate a healthy three-phase set of balanced voltages, each of magnitude Vn. No load
current should be simulated. The duration of injection should be set to 1 second. Step 1
therefore mimics a healthy unloaded line, prior to the onset of a fault.
2. Simulate a reverse fault on the A-phase. The A-phase voltage must be simulated to drop by 3
times the Dir. V Rev setting,
Va = Vn – 3(Dir. V Rev)
The fault current on the A-phase should be set to 3 times the DI Rev setting, and in antiphase
to the forward injections,
Ia = 3 (Dir. I Rev)∠ 180°-θ Line
1. Prepare the dynamic A phase reverse fault, as detailed above. Ensure that the test set is
simulating Steps 1 and 2 as one continuous transition.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-37
2. Set a timer to start when the fault injection is applied, and to stop when the Delta scheme
Signal Send contact closes.
3. Apply the test, and record the signal send contact response time. The recorded operating
time should typically be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz, and less than 16.7 ms for 60 Hz
applications.
testing purposes.
opto-input.
8.4 Out of Step Protection

For this test, an injection set with a state sequencer function is required, as dynamic impedance
conditions are going to be tested. The four states impedances applied during the Out of Step
commissioning process are shown in Figure 4
+jX
Z6
Z5
State 4
State 3
State 2
State 1
R
R6' R5' R5 R6
∆R
Z5'
Z6'
Figure 4: State impedances
Depending on the Out of Step (OST) settings, use one of the following setting options.
 OST setting
 Predictive OST setting
 Predictive and OST setting
14-38 P446/EN/TM/E
OST setting
1. Clear all alarms.
2. Set the OST timer to zero.
3. To test OST, a 4-state test sequence is required. Based on healthy voltages (VA = VB = VC =
57.8 V) calculate the currents to generate the impedances as below.
State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4
Applied current 57.8 57.8 57.8 57.8

(all 3 phases) 1.1 R 6 R 5 1 ( R 6 R 5 ) 0.9 R 5 1.1 R 5 '
2
Angle 0° 0° 0° 180°
Longer than ‘Delta t’ set
Duration 500 ms 100 ms 500 ms
time
4. Now apply the 4-state sequence, check that all 3-phases have tripped and that an OST alarm
is displayed on the local LCD.
Note: The angle in the table above is the angle between voltages and their respective currents. In state 4
the currents are displaced 180° from their respective voltages.
Predictive OST setting

1. Clear all alarms.
2. Set the OST timer to zero.
3. To test OST, a 3-state test sequence is required. Based on healthy voltages (VA = VB = VC =
57.8V) calculate the currents to generate the impedances as below.
State 1 State 2 State 3
Applied current 57.8 57.8 57.8

(all 3 phases) 1.1 R 6 1
R 5 ( R 6  R 5) 0.9 R 5
2
Angle 0° 0° 0°
Longer than 25 ms but shorter that
Duration 500 ms 500 ms
‘Delta t’ set time
4. Now apply the 3-state sequence, check that all 3-phases have tripped and that an OST alarm
is displayed on the local LCD.
Predictive and OST setting

As per Predictive OST
OST timer test

1. Repeat the test as for ‘predictive OST’ and observe that the 3phase tripping comes up after
the ‘Tost’ set delay.
2. Record the operating time in the commissioning record sheet.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-39
8.5 DEF Aided Schemes
8.5.1 Earth current pilot scheme

tested.
If an InterMiCOM64 scheme is used to provide the signalling, ithe scheme logic may not use opto-
The IM64 Test Mode in conjunction with the IM64 Test Pattern should be used to assert or monitor the
relevant signals.
This set of injection tests aims to determine that a single device, at one end of the scheme is
performing correctly.
Note: The device must be tested in isolation, with the communications channel to the remote line terminal
disconnected.
8.5.1.1 Connecting the test circuit
1. Determine which output relays have been selected to operate when a DEF trip occurs, by
viewing the programmable scheme logic. If the trip outputs are phase segregated (a different
output relay allocated for each phase), the output relay assigned for tripping on ‘A’ phase
faults should be used.
2. Connect the output relay so that its operation trips the test set and stops the timer.
3. Connect the current output of the test set to the ‘A’ phase current transformer input
4. Connect, all three phase voltages Va, Vb, and Vc.
5. Depending on the test equipment used, make sure the timer is set to start when the current is
applied to the relay.
8.5.1.2 Perform the test
1. Ensure that the timer is reset and prepare the following test shot.
2. Simulate a forward fault on the A-phase. The A-phase voltage must be simulated to drop by 4
times the DEF Vpol setting,
Va = Vn - 4( DEF Vpol)
Set the fault current on the A-phase should to 2 times the DEF Threshold setting, and in the forward
direction. For a forward fault, the current Ia should lag the voltage Va by the DEF Char Angle setting,
Ia = 2( IN DEF Threshold   DEF

Phases B and C should retain their healthy pre-fault voltage, and no current. The duration of the
injection should be in excess of the DEF Delay setting (typically tDEF Delay + 100 ms).
14-40 P446/EN/TM/E
IED RESPONSE
Direction of fault
test injection
Signal Receive Opto ON OFF ON OFF
No Trip, Trip, No Trip, No Trip,
Blocking Scheme
No Signal Send No Signal Send Signal Send Signal Send
Permissive Scheme Trip, No Trip, No Trip, No Trip,
(POR/POTT) Signal Send Signal Send No Signal Send No Signal Send
Table 9: DEF scheme response
8.5.1.3 DEF aided scheme - forward fault trip test

A forward fault is now injected as described, with the intention to cause a scheme trip.
For a permissive scheme, the Signal Receive opto-input should be energized. This is done by
applying a continuous dc voltage onto the required opto-input, either from the test set, station battery,
or IED field voltage. The commissioning engineer decides on the best method.
For a blocking scheme, the opto-input should remain de-energized (“OFF”).
1. Apply the fault and record the (phase A) trip time.

The aided earth fault (DEF) scheme trip time for POR schemes (permissive overreach) POR schemes
should be less than 40 ms.
For blocking schemes, where a non-zero DEF Dly time delay is set, the expected operating time is
typically within +/- 5% of the delay setting plus the “instantaneous” (40 ms) delay quoted above.
There is no need to repeat the test for phases B and C, as these trip assignments have already been
proven by the distance/delta trip tests.
8.5.2 DEF Aided Scheme Testing
Signal send test for permissive schemes

stopped by the Signal Send contact (the contact that would normally be connected to the
pilot/signalling channel).
2. Repeat the forward fault injection, and record the Signal Send contact operating time. The
measured operating time should typically be less than 40ms.
Signal send test for blocking schemes only

2. Reverse the current flow direction on the A phase to simulate a reverse fault.
3. Perform the reverse fault injection and record the signal send contact operating time. The
measured operating time should typically be less than 40 ms.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-41
testing purposes.
opto-input.
8.6 Overcurrent Protection

If the overcurrent protection function is being used, the I>1 element should be tested.

tested.
8.6.1 Connecting the test circuit

1. Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an I>1 trip occurs by viewing
the programmable scheme logic. The output relay assigned for Trip Output A (DDB 523)
faults should be used. Stage 1 should be mapped directly to an output relay in the
programmable scheme logic.
Note: If the default PSL is used, output relay 3 can be used as I1> is mapped to Trip inputs 3 Ph (DDB
529), which in turn is mapped internally to Any Trip (DDB 522), which is mapped to output relay 3.
2. Connect the output relay so that its operation trips the test set and stops the timer.
3. Connect the current output of the test set to the A-phase current transformer input.
If the I>1 Directional cell in the GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT column is set to ‘Directional Fwd’,
the current should flow out of terminal C2. If set to ‘Directional Rev’, it should flow into terminal
2.
If the I>1 Directional cell in the GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT column has been set to
‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’, the rated voltage should be applied to terminals 20 and
21.
4. Ensure that the timer starts when the current is applied to the relay.
Note: If the timer does not stop when the current is applied and stage 1 has been set for directional
operation, the connections may be incorrect for the direction of operation set. Try again with the
current connections reversed.
8.6.2 Perform the test

1. Ensure that the timer is reset.
2. Apply a current of twice the setting shown in the I>1 Current Set cell in the GROUP 1
OVERCURRENT column.
3. Note the time displayed when the timer stops.
4. Check that the red trip LED is ON.
14-42 P446/EN/TM/E
8.6.3 Check the operating time

Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in Table 10.
For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Operating time at twice current setting and time multiplier/
Characteristic
time dial setting of 1.0
Nominal (seconds) Range (seconds)
DT I>1 Time Delay] setting Setting ±2%
IEC S Inverse 10.03 9.53 - 10.53
IEC V Inverse 13.50 12.83 - 14.18
IEC E Inverse 26.67 24.67 - 28.67
UK LT Inverse 120.00 114.00 - 126.00
IEEE M Inverse 3.8 3.61 - 4.0
IEEE V Inverse 7.03 6.68 - 7.38
IEEE E Inverse 9.50 9.02 - 9.97
US Inverse 2.16 2.05 - 2.27
US ST Inverse 12.12 11.51 - 12.73
Table 10: Characteristic operating times for I>1
Notes: with the exception of the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in Table 10 are for a
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) or Time Dial Setting (TDS) of 1. For other values of TMS or TDS, the
values need to be modified accordingly.
For definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0.02 second and
0.08 second respectively. You may need to add this the IED's acceptable range of operating times.
Caution: When the tests are completed, restore all settings that were disabled for testing
purposes.
8.7 Restoration of communications and clearing VTS

If, during the testing described above, it was necessary to create communication failure conditions or
VTS alarm conditions, these should now be cleared now. If communications failure was achieved by
setting the Test Loopback cell to Disabled, this should be reset to Enabled.
The protection communications statistics also need to be reset.
8.8 System Check and Check Synchronization

This function performs a comparison between the line voltage and the bus voltage.
For a single circuit breaker application, there are two voltage inputs to compare:
 one from the voltage transformer input from the line side of the circuit breaker (Main VT)
 one from the VT on the bus side of the circuit breaker (CS VT).
P446/EN/TM/E 14-43
For a dual circuit breaker installation (breaker-and-a-half switch or mesh/ring bus), three VT inputs are
required:
 one from the common point of the two circuit breakers, identified as the line (Main VT)
 one from the bus side of CB1 (CB1 CS VT)
 one from the bus side of CB2 (CB2 CS VT).
In most cases the line VT input is three phase, whereas the bus VTs are single phase.
The bus VT inputs are normally single phase so the system voltage checks are made on single
phases and the VT may be connected to either a phase-to-phase or phase to neutral voltage.
For these reasons, the IED has to be programmed with the appropriate connection. The CS Input
setting in the CT AND VT RATIOS column can be set to A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C or C-A according to
the application.
The single-phase bus VT inputs each have associated phase shift and voltage magnitude
compensation settings to compensate for healthy voltage angle and magnitude differences between
the check sync VT input and the selected main VT reference phase. These are:
 CB1 CS VT PhShft, CB1 CS VT Mag, CB2 CS VT PhShft and CB2 CS VT Mag for dual CB
models
Any voltage measurements or comparisons using bus VT inputs are made using the compensated
values.
Each circuit breaker controlled can have two stages of check synchronism enabled according to the
settings:
 Sys Checks CB1, CB1 CS1 Status, CB1 CS2 Status, Sys Checks CB2, CB2 CS1 Status,
CB1 CS2 Status for dual circuit breaker models.
When the system voltage check conditions are satisfied, the relevant DDB signals are asserted high
as follows:
 DDB (883): CB1 CS1 OK (dual CB models)

These DDB signals should be mapped to the monitor/download port and used to indicate that the
system check synchronizing condition has been satisfied.
8.8.1 Check sync ok

1. Taking note of the check synchronism settings, identify the appropriate VT input terminals and
inject voltage signals that should satisfy the system voltage check synchronism criteria.
2. Check that the DDB signals are asserted high.
8.8.2 Check sync fail

1. Change the voltage signals so that the criteria are not satisfied
2. Check that the appropriate DDB signals are driven low.
14-44 P446/EN/TM/E
8.9 Check trip and auto-reclose cycle

If the auto-reclose function is being used, the circuit breaker trip and auto reclose cycle can be tested
automatically by using the application-specific settings.
To test the trip and close operation without operating the breaker, the following conditions must be
satisfied:
 The CB Healthy DDB should either not be mapped, or if it is mapped it must be asserted high.
 The CB status inputs (52A, etc.) should either not be mapped, or if they are mapped they
should be activated to mimic the circuit breaker operation.
 If configured for single pole tripping, either the VTs Connected setting in the CT/VT RATIO
column should be set to No, or appropriate voltage signals need to be applied to prevent the
pole dead logic from converting to 3-pole tripping.
1. To test the first three-phase auto-reclose cycle, set COMMISSION TESTS > Test Auto-
reclose to Trip 3 Pole. The IED performs a trip/reclose cycle.
2. Repeat this operation to test the subsequent three-phase auto-reclose cycles.
3. Check all output relays (used for such as circuit breaker tripping and closing, or blocking other
devices) operate at the correct times during the trip/close cycle.
Check the auto-reclose cycles for single phase trip conditions one at a time by sequentially setting
COMMISSION TESTS > Test Auto-reclose to Trip Pole A, Trip Pole B and Trip Pole C.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-45
9 END-TO-END PROTECTION COMMUNICATION TESTS

If the IED is being used in a scheme with InterMiCOM64 communications you must perform end-to-end
testing of the protection communications channels.
In this section all loopbacks are removed and satisfactory communications between line ends of the
IEDs in the scheme are confirmed.
Note 1: End-to-end communication requires a working telecommunication channel between line ends (which
may be a multiplexed link or may be a direct connection). If the telecommunication channel is not
available, it is not possible to establish end-to end communication. Unless otherwise directed by
local operational practice, follow the instructions in this section so the scheme is ready for full
operation when the telecommunications channels become available.
Note 2: The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
9.1 Remove local loopbacks

As well as removing the loopback, this section checks that all wiring and optical fibre are reconnected.
If P592 or P593 interface units are installed the application-specific settings are also applied.
1. Check the alarm records to ensure that no communications failure alarms have occurred while
the loopback test was in progress. If it was necessary to ‘fail’ the communications while
testing the non-current differential elements, observe the communications behaviour for a few
minutes before removing the loopbacks.
2. After you are satisfied with the communications behaviour in loopback, set COMMISSION
TESTS > Test Mode and Loopback Mode to Disabled.
Note: Most of the required optical signal power levels have already been measured and recorded. If all
signalling uses P59x interface units, no further measurements are required. If, however, direct fibre
or C37.94 communications are used, further measurements are needed.
9.1.1 Restoration of direct fibre connections

When restoring direct fibre connections, check the optical power level received from the remote
IED(s).
1. Remove the loopback test fibres and at both ends of each channel used, reconnect the fibre
optic cables for communications between IEDs.
2. For each channel fitted, remove the fibre connecting to the optical receiver (RX).
3. Using an optical power meter measure the strength of the signal received from the remote
IED. The measurements should be within -25.4dBm and -16.8dBm for 850 nm fibre
connections and between -37dBm and -7dBm for 1300nm fibre connections
4. Record the received power level(s).
5. Reconnect the fibre(s) to the IED receiver(s).
Warning: NEVER look directly into the transmit port or the end of an optical fibre, as
this could severely damage your eyes
14-46 P446/EN/TM/E
9.1.2 Restoration of C37.94 fibre connections

1. When restoring C37.94 fibre connections, it is necessary to check the optical power level
received from the IED at the C37.94 multiplexer, as well as that received by the IED from the
C37.94 multiplexer.
2. Remove the loopback test fibres and at both ends of each channel used.
3. Reconnect the fibre optic cables for communications between IEDs and the C37.94
compatible multiplexer.
4. Check that the value received from the IED at the C37.94 multiplexer, as well as that received
by the IED from the C37.94 multiplexer are between -25.4 dBm (min) and -16.8 dBm (max).
5. Record the received power level(s).
6. Reconnect the fibre(s) to the IED receiver(s).
9.1.3 Communications using P59x interface units

If external wiring has been removed to facilitate testing, ensure that it is replaced in accordance with
the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
For the P592:

1. Set the V.35 LOOPBACK switch to the 0 position.
2. Set the CLOCK SWITCH, DSR, CTS and DATA RATE switches on each unit to the positions
required for the specific application
3. Ensure the OPTO LOOPBACK switch is in the 0 position.
4. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover
For the P593:

1. Set the X.21 LOOPBACK switch to the OFF position
2. Ensure the OPTO LOOPBACK switch is also in the OFF position.
3. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover.
9.2 Remote Loopback removal

Remove loopbacks at remote terminal connected to channel 1 and channel 2 by repeating the
instructions for local loopback removal.
9.3 Verify communications between IEDs

Communications statistics and status
1. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are
raised.
2. Check channel status and propagation delays in MEASUREMENTS 4 column for channel 1
(and channel 2 where fitted).
3. Clear the statistics and record the number of valid messages and the number of errored
messages after a minimum period of 1 hour.
4. Check that the ratio of errored/good messages is better than 10-4.
5. Record the measured message propagation delays for channel 1, and channel 2 (if fitted).
P446/EN/TM/E 14-47
10 END TO END SCHEME TESTS

If an external signalling channel is being used to provide aided scheme signalling, and if an aided
protection scheme is being used without InterMiCOM64 protection signalling, it should be tested.
This section aims to check that the signalling channel is able to transmit the ON/OFF signals used in
aided schemes between the remote line ends.
Before testing, check that the channel is healthy. For example, if a power line carrier link is being
used, it may not be possible to perform the tests until the protected circuit is in service.
10.1.1 Aided scheme 1

Aided Scheme 1 can be tested by operating output contacts to mimic the transmission of an aided
channel signal.
For these tests, an engineer needs to be present at both ends of the line - at the local end to send
aided signals, and at the remote end to observe that the signals are received. A telephone link
between the two commissioning engineers is also necessary, to allow conversation.
1. Put the IED in test mode by setting COMMISSION TESTS > Test Mode to Blocked.
2. Record which contact is assigned as the Signal Send 1 output
3. Select this output contact as the one to test and advise the engineer at the remote end that the
contact is about to be tested.
10.1.1.1 Remote end preparation to observe channel arrival

At the remote end, the engineer must confirm the assignment of the Monitor Bits in the COMMISSION
TESTS column in the menu, to be able to see the aided channel on arrival.
Scroll down and ensure that the Monitor Bit 1 cell is set to DDB493 and that the Monitor Bit 5 cell is
set to 507. The Test Port Status cell appropriately sets or resets the bits that now represent Aided 1
Scheme Receive (DDB #493), and Aided 2 Scheme Receive (DDB #507), with the rightmost bit
representing Aided Channel 1. From now on the remote end engineer should monitor the indication of
the Test Port Status cell.
10.1.1.2 Application of the test
1. At the local end, set the COMMISSION TESTS > Contact Test to Apply Test.
2. Reset the output relay by setting COMMISSION TESTS > Contact Test to Remove Test.
Note: Ensure that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test
procedure are not exceeded by being operated for too long. We therefore advise that the time
between application and removal of the contact test is kept short.
3. Check with the engineer at the remote end that the Aided Channel 1 signal did change state
as expected. The Test Port Status cell should have responded as in the table below:
DDB No. 507 493
Monitor Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contact Test OFF X X X X X X X 0
Contact Test Applied (ON) X X X X X X X 1
Test OFF X X X X X X X 0
Note: “x” = Wildcard/denotes don’t care.
14-48 P446/EN/TM/E
4. Return the IED to service by setting COMMISSION TESTS > Test Mode to Disabled.
10.1.2 Channel check in the opposite direction

Repeat the aided scheme 1 test procedure, but this time to check that the channel responds correctly
when keyed from the remote end. The remote end commissioning engineer should perform the
contact test, with the Monitor Option observed at the local end.
10.2 Aided scheme 2

1. If applicable, repeat the test for Aided Channel 2.
2. Return the device to service by setting COMMISSION TESTS > Test Mode to Disabled.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-49
11 ON-LOAD CHECKS
The objectives of the on-load checks are to:
 Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct
 Measure the magnitude of capacitive current
 Directionality check for distance elements
These checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energization of the
plant, and the other devices in the group have already been commissioned.
Remove all test leads and temporary shorting leads, and replace any external wiring that has been
removed to allow testing.
Warning: If any external wiring has been disconnected for the commissioning process,
replace it in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme
diagram.
11.1 Confirm Voltage Connections

1. Using a multimeter, measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure they are
correctly rated. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter.
2. Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the measured values in the
MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column.
Corresponding VT ratio in ‘VT and CT

Voltage Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 Column (02)
RATIO‘ column (0A) of menu)
VAB VAB Magnitude
VBC VBC Magnitude Error! Bookmark not defined.Error!
VCA VCA Magnitude Bookmark not defined.Main VT Primary
VAN VAN Magnitude / Main VT Secondary
VBN VBN Magnitude

VCN VCN Magnitude
VCHECKSYNC. CS Voltage Mag.] CS VT Primary / CS VT Secondary
CB2 CS VT Prim’y
CB2 VCHECKSYNC. CB2 CS Volt Mag
CB2 CS VT Sec’y
Table 11: Measured voltages and VT ratio settings
If the Local Values cell is set to ‘Secondary’, the values displayed should be equal to the applied
secondary voltage. The values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an
additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If the Local Values cell is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed should be equal to the applied
secondary voltage multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the CT & VT RATIOS
column. The values should be within 1% of the expected values, plus an additional allowance for the
accuracy of the test equipment being used.
11.2 Confirm Current Connections

1. Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a multimeter
connected in series with the corresponding current input.
14-50 P446/EN/TM/E
2. Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle
between the current and voltage, either against a phase meter already installed on site and
known to be correct or by determining the direction of power flow by contacting the system
control centre.
3. Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible.
4. Compare the values of the secondary phase currents and phase angle with the measured
values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 column.
If the Local Values cell is set to ‘Secondary’, the values displayed should be equal to the applied
secondary voltage. The values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an
additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If the Local Values cell is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed should be equal to the applied
secondary voltage multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the CT & VT RATIOS
column. The values should be within 1% of the expected values, plus an additional allowance for the
accuracy of the test equipment being used.
11.3 On load directional test

This test ensures that distance directionalized overcurrent and fault locator functions have the correct
forward/reverse response to fault and load conditions. For this test you must first know the actual
direction of power flow on the system. If not known already, this must be determined using adjacent
instrumentation or protection already in-service.
 For load current flowing in the Forward direction (power export to the remote line end), the A
Phase Watts cell in the MEASUREMENTS 2 column should show positive power signing.
 For load current flowing in the Reverse direction (power import from the remote line end), the A
Phase Watts cell in the MEASUREMENTS 2 column should show negative power signing.
Note: This check applies only for Measurement Modes 0 (default), and 2. This should be checked in the
MEASURE’T. SETUP column (Measurement Mode = 0 or 2). If measurement modes 1 or 3 are
used, the expected power flow signing would be opposite to that shown above.
In the event of any uncertainty, check the phase angle of the phase currents with respect to their
phase voltage.
11.4 Signalling channel check (if not already completed)

If the aided scheme signalling channel(s) have not already been tested, they should be tested now.
This test may be avoided only with the agreement of the customer, or if the basic scheme is used.
Follow the tests in section 11.
P446/EN/TM/E 14-51
12 FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete.
1. Remove all test leads and temporary shorting leads.

2. If you have had to disconnect any of the external wiring, to perform the wiring verification tests,
replace all wiring, fuses and links in accordance with the relevant external connection or
scheme diagram.
3. Ensure that the IED has been restored to service by checking that the Test Mode and Static
Test cells in the COMMISSION TESTS column are set to ‘Disabled’.
4. The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific
settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during testing.
There are two methods of checking the settings;
 Extracting them from the IED to a laptop

 Step through the settings using the HMI panel
In either case, compare the settings with the original application-specific setting records
Finally, ensure that all protection elements required have been set to Enabled in the
CONFIGURATION column
5. If the IED is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset
using the Reset All Values cell. If the required access level is not active, the device requests
a password so the setting change can be made.
6. If the menu language has been changed to allow accurate testing it should be restored to the
customer’s preferred language.
7. If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the
cover so that the protection is put into service.
8. Ensure that all alarms and LEDs and communications statistics have been reset.
9. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover of the unit.
14-52 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 15 Maintenance & Troubleshooting
MAINTENANCE &
TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 15
P446/EN/TM/E 15-1
15 Maintenance & Troubleshooting MiCOMho P446
15-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The Maintenance and Troubleshooting chapter provides details of how to maintain and troubleshoot
products based on the Px40 platform. It is important to heed the warning signs in this chapter, as not
do so may result injury or defective equipment.
Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM and the ratings
on the equipment’s rating label.
The troubleshooting part of the chapter allows an error condition on the IED to be identified so that
appropriate corrective action can be taken.
If the IED develops a fault, it is usually possible to identify which module needs replacing. It is not
possible to perform an on-site repair to a faulty module.
If you return a faulty unit or module to the manufacturer or one of their approved service centres, you
should include a completed copy of the Repair or Modification Return Authorization (RMA) form.
1 Chapter Overview
2 Maintenance
2.1 Maintenance Checks
2.1.1 Alarms
2.1.2 Opto-isolators
2.1.3 Output relays
2.1.4 Measurement accuracy
2.2 Replacing the unit
2.3 Repairing the unit
2.4 Removing the front panel
2.5 Replacing PCBs
2.5.1 Replacing the main processor board
2.5.2 Replacement of communications boards
2.5.3 Replacement of the input module
2.5.4 Replacement of the power supply board
2.5.5 Replacement of the I/O boards
2.6 Recalibration
2.7 Changing the battery
2.7.1 Post Modification Tests
2.7.2 Battery Disposal
2.8 Cleaning
3 Troubleshooting
3.1 Problem Identification
3.2 Power-up Errors
3.3 Error Message or Code on Power-up
3.4 Out of Service LED on at power-up
3.5 Error Code during Operation
3.6 Mal-operation during Testing
3.6.1 Failure of Output Contacts
3.6.2 Failure of Opto-inputs
P446/EN/TM/E 15-3
3.6.3 Incorrect Analogue Signals

3.7 Coprocessor board failures
3.8 PSL Editor Troubleshooting
3.8.1 Diagram Reconstruction
3.8.2 PSL Version Check
4 Repair and Modification Procedure
15-4 P446/EN/TM/E
2 MAINTENANCE
2.1 Maintenance Checks

We recommend that Alstom Grid products receive periodic monitoring after installation. In view of the
critical nature of the application, they should be checked at regular intervals to confirm they are
operating correctly.
Alstom Grid IEDs are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
The devices are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of protection
devices. Most problems will result in an alarm, indicating that remedial action should be taken.
However, some periodic tests should be carried out to ensure that they are functioning correctly and
that the external wiring is intact.
If the customer’s organization has a Preventative Maintenance Policy, the recommended product
checks should be included in the regular program. Maintenance periods depend on many factors,
such as:
 The operating environment

 The accessibility of the site
 The amount of available manpower
 The importance of the installation in the power system
 The consequences of failure
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location, these are predominantly
restricted to checking that the unit is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and
checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. For this reason, maintenance checks should also
be performed locally at the substation.
Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be
familiar with the contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide
SFTY/4LM and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
2.1.1 Alarms
First check the alarm status LED to see if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the Read key
repeatedly to step through the alarms.
After dealing with any problems, clear the alarms. This will clear the relevant LEDs.
2.1.2 Opto-isolators
Check the opto-inputs by repeating the commissioning test detailed in the Commissioning chapter.
2.1.3 Output relays

Check the output relays by repeating the commissioning test detailed in the Commissioning chapter.
P446/EN/TM/E 15-5
2.1.4 Measurement accuracy

If the power system is energized, the measured values can be compared with known system values to
check that they are in the expected range. If they are within a set range, this indicates that the A/D
conversion and the calculations are being performed correctly. Suitable test methods can be found in
Commissioning chapter.
Alternatively, the measured values can be checked against known values injected into the device
using the test block, (if fitted) or injected directly into the IED's terminals. Suitable test methods can be
found in the Commissioning chapter. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being
maintained.
2.2 Replacing the unit

If your product should develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the
watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. In the case of a fault,
either the complete unit or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, should be
replaced.
If possible you should replace the complete unit, as this reduces the chance of damage due to
electrostatic discharge and also eliminates the risk of fitting an incompatible replacement PCB.
However, we understand it may be difficult to remove an installed product and you may be forced to
replace the faulty PCB on-site. The case and rear terminal blocks are designed to ease removal of
the complete unit, without disconnecting the scheme wiring
Caution Replacing PCBs requires the correct on-site environment (clean and dry) as
well as suitably trained personnel.
Caution If the repair is not performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will
be invalidated.
Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment, you should be familiar with
the contents of the Safety Information section of this guide or the Safety Guide
SFTY/4LM, as well as the ratings on the equipment’s rating label. This should
ensure that no damage is caused by incorrect handling of the electronic
components. .
Warning Before working at the rear of the unit, isolate all voltage and current supplying
it.
Note: The MiCOM ALSTOM products have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close,
for safety reasons, when the heavy duty and/or MiDOS terminal block is removed
To replace the complete unit:
1. Carefully disconnect the cables not connected to the terminal blocks (e.g. IRIG-B, fibre optic
cables, earth), as appropriate, from the rear of the unit.
2. Remove the terminal block screws using a magnetic bladed screwdriver to minimize the risk of
losing the screws or leaving them in the terminal block.
15-6 P446/EN/TM/E
Note: There are four types of terminal block: RTD/CLIO input, heavy duty, medium duty, and MiDOS. The
terminal blocks are fastened to the rear panel using slotted screws on the RTD/CLIO input blocks
and crosshead screws on the heavy and medium duty blocks. See Figure 1.
3. Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks
away from their internal connectors.
4. Remove the terminal block screws that fasten the unit to the panel and rack. These are the
screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers are fitted
and open.
If the top and bottom access covers have been removed, some more
screws with smaller diameter heads are made accessible. Do NOT remove
these screws, as they secure the front panel to the unit.
5. Withdraw the unit from the panel and rack. Take care, as the unit will be heavy due to the
internal transformers.
6. To reinstall the unit, follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block
is relocated in the correct position and the chassis ground, IRIG-B and fibre optic connections
are replaced. The terminal blocks are labelled alphabetically with ‘A’ on the left hand side
when viewed from the rear.
Once the unit has been reinstalled, it should be re-commissioned as set out in the Commissioning
chapter.
P4522ENa
2.3 Repairing the unit

If your product should develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the
watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. In the case of a fault,
either the complete unit or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, should be
replaced.
P446/EN/TM/E 15-7
Replacement of printed circuit boards and other internal components must be undertaken by Alstom
Grid-approved Service Centres. Failure to obtain the authorization of Alstom Grid after-sales
engineers prior to commencing work may invalidate the product warranty.
We recommend that you entrust any repairs to Alstom Grid Automation Support teams, which are
available world-wide.
2.4 Removing the front panel
Warning Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB, you must first remove the
auxiliary power supply and wait 5 seconds for the internal capacitors to
discharge. You should also isolate voltage and current transformer
connections and trip circuit.
Caution Before removing the front panel, you should be familiar with the contents of
the Safety Information section of this guide or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM, as
well as the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
To remove the front panel:
1. Open the top and bottom access covers. You must open the hinged access covers by more
than 90° before they can be removed.
2. If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover.
3. Apply outward pressure to the middle of the access covers to bow them and disengage the
hinge lug, so the access cover can be removed. The screws that fasten the front panel to the
case are now accessible.
4. Undo and remove the screws. The 40TE case has four crosshead screws fastening the front
panel to the case, one in each corner, in recessed holes. The 60TE/80TE cases have an
additional two screws, one midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate.
Do not remove the screws with the larger diameter heads which are accessible
when the access covers are fitted and open. These screws hold the relay in its
mounting (panel or cubicle).
5. When the screws have been removed, pull the complete front panel forward to separate it
from the metal case. The front panel is connected to the rest of the circuitry by a 64-way
ribbon cable.
The internal circuitry is now exposed and is not protected against electrostatic
discharge and dust ingress. Therefore ESD precautions and clean working
conditions must be maintained at all times.
6. The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on the cable
and a plug with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the two locking latches
outwards which eject the connector socket slightly. Remove the socket from the plug to
disconnect the front panel.
2.5 Replacing PCBs

1. To replace any of the PCBs, first remove the front panel.
2. Once the front panel has been removed, the PCBs are accessible. The numbers above the
case outline identify the guide slot reference for each printed circuit board. Each printed circuit
board has a label stating the corresponding guide slot number to ensure correct relocation
after removal. To serve as a reminder of the slot numbering there is a label on the rear of the
front panel metallic screen.
3. Remove the 64-way ribbon cable from the PCB that needs replacing
15-8 P446/EN/TM/E
4. Remove the PCB in accordance with the board-specific instructions detailed later in this
section.
Note: To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of an identical part number.
2.5.1 Replacing the main processor board

The main processor board is situated in the front panel. This board contains application-specific
settings in its non-volatile memory. You may wish to take a backup copy of these settings. This could
save time in the re-commissioning process.
To replace the main processor board:
1. Remove front panel.

2. Place the front panel with the user interface face down and remove the six screws from the
metallic screen, as shown in Figure 2. Remove the metal plate.
3. Remove the two screws either side of the rear of the battery compartment recess. These are
the screws that hold the main processor board in position.
4. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable. Take care as this could easily be damaged by
excessive twisting.
5. Replace the main processor board
6. Reassemble the front panel using the reverse procedure. Make sure the ribbon cable is
reconnected to the main processor board and that all eight screws are refitted.
7. Refit the front panel.
8. Refit and close the access covers then press the hinge assistance T-pieces so they click back
into the front panel moulding.
9. Once the unit has been reassembled, carry out the standard commissioning procedure as
defined in the Commissioning chapter.
Note: After replacing the main processor board, all the settings required for the application need to be re-
entered. This may be done either manually or by downloading a settings file.
P446/EN/TM/E 15-9
P2020ENA
Figure 2: Front panel assembly
2.5.2 Replacement of communications boards

Most products will have at least one communications board of some sort fitted. There are several
different boards available offering various functionality, depending on the application. Some products
may even be fitted two boards of different types.
To replace a faulty communications board:

2. Disconnect all connections at the rear.
3. The board is secured in the relay case by two screws, one at the top and another at the
bottom. Remove these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel.
4. Gently pull the communications board forward and out of the case.
5. Before fitting the replacement PCB check that the number on the round label next to the front
edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is
missing or incorrect, write the correct slot number on the label.
6. Fit the replacement PCB carefully into the correct slot. Make sure it is pushed fully back and
that the securing screws are refitted.
7. Reconnect all connections at the rear.
10. Once the unit has been reassembled, commission it according to the Commissioning chapter.
2.5.3 Replacement of the input module

Depending on the product, the input module consists of two or three boards fastened together and is
contained within a metal housing. One board contains the transformers and one contains the
analogue to digital conversion and processsing electronics. Some devices have an additional auxiliary
transformer contained on a third board.
15-10 P446/EN/TM/E
To replace an input module:

2. The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible from the
front, as shown below. Move these screws carefully as they are not captive in the front plate
of the module.
3. On the right-hand side of the module there is a small metal tab which brings out a handle (on
some modules there is also a tab on the left). Grasp the handle(s) and pull the module firmly
forward, away from the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force is needed due to
the friction between the contacts of the terminal blocks.
With non-mounted IEDs, the case needs to be held firmly while the module is
withdrawn. Withdraw the input module with care as it suddenly comes loose
once the friction of the terminal blocks is overcome.
4. Remove the module from the case. The module may be heavy, because it contains the input
voltage and current transformers.
5. Slot in the replacement module and push it fully back onto the rear terminal blocks. To check
that the module is fully inserted, make sure the v-shaped cut-out in the bottom plate of the
case is fully visible.
6. Refit the securing screws.
7. Refit the front panel (adapt the procedure described in Section 2.4).
Note: If individual boards within the input module are replaced, recalibration will be necessary. We
therefore recommend replacement of the complete module to avoid on-site recalibration.
2.5.4 Replacement of the power supply board
Caution Before removing the front panel, you should be familiar with the contents of
the Safety Information section of this guide or the Safety Guide SFTY/4LM, as
well as the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
The power supply board is fastened to an output relay board with push fit nylon pillars. This doubled-
up board is secured on the extreme left hand side, looking from the front of the unit.

2. Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of the case.
A reasonable amount of force is needed due to the friction between the contacts of the
terminal blocks.
3. Separate the boards by pulling them apart carefully. The power supply board is the one with
two large electrolytic capacitors.
4. Before reassembling the module, check that the number on the round label next to the front
edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is
missing or incorrect, write the correct slot number on the label
5. Reassemble the module with a replacement PCB. Push the inter-board connectors firmly
together. Fit the four push fit nylon pillars securely in their respective holes in each PCB.
6. Slot the power supply module back into the housing. Push it fully back onto the rear terminal
blocks.
P446/EN/TM/E 15-11

2.5.5 Replacement of the I/O boards

There are several different types of I/O boards, which can be used, depending on the product and
application. Some boards have opto-inputs, some have relay outputs and others have a mixture of
both.

2. Gently pull the board forward and out of the case
3. If replacing the I/O board, make sure the setting of the link above IDC connector on the
replacement board is the same as the one being replaced.
4. Before fitting the replacement board check the number on the round label next to the front
edge of the board matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is
missing or incorrect, write the correct slot number on the label.
5. Carefully slide the replacement board into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully
back onto the rear terminal blocks.
7. Refit and close the access covers then press at the hinge assistance T-pieces so they click
back into the front panel moulding.
2.6 Recalibration
Recalibration is not needed when a PCB is replaced, unless it is one of the boards in the input
module. If any of the boards in the input module is replaced, the unit must be recalibrated.
Although recalibration is needed when a board inside the input module is replaced, it is not needed if
the input module is replaced in its entirety.
Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires special test equipment and
software. We therefore recommend that the work be carried out by the manufacturer, or entrusted to
an approved service centre.
2.7 Changing the battery

Each IED has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply voltage
fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the
time of failure.
As part of the product's continuous self-monitoring, an alarm is given if the battery condition becomes
poor. Nevertheless, you should change the battery periodically to ensure reliability.
To replace the battery:
1. Open the bottom access cover on the front of the relay.

2. Gently remove the battery. If necessary, use a small insulated screwdriver.
3. Make sure the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust.
4. Remove the replacement battery from its packaging and insert it in the battery holder,
ensuring correct polarity.
15-12 P446/EN/TM/E
Only use a type ½AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6 V and safety
approvals such as UL (Underwriters Laboratory), CSA (Canadian Standards
Association) or VDE (Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizitätswerke).
5. Ensure that the battery is held securely in its socket and that the battery terminals make good
contact with the socket terminals.
6. Close the bottom access cover.
Note: Events, disturbance and maintenance records will be lost if the battery is replaced whilst the IED is
de-energized.
2.7.1 Post Modification Tests

To ensure that the replacement battery maintains the time and status data if the auxiliary supply fails,
scroll across to the DATE and TIME cell, then scroll down to Battery Status which should read
Healthy.
2.7.2 Battery Disposal

Dispose of the removed battery according to the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the
country in which the relay is installed.
2.8 Cleaning
Warning Before cleaning the IED, ensure that all AC and DC supplies and current and
transformer connections are isolated, to prevent any chance of an electric
shock while cleaning.
Only clean the equipment with a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water. Do not use detergents,
solvents or abrasive cleaners as they may damage the product's surfaces and leave a conductive
residue.
P446/EN/TM/E 15-13
3 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 Problem Identification

Use Table 1 to find the description that best matches the problem, and then consult the referenced
section for a more detailed analysis of the problem.
Symptom Refer to
IED fails to power up Section 3.2
IED powers up but indicates an error and halts during the power-up sequence Section 3.3
IED Powers up but the Out of Service LED is ON Section 3.4
Error during normal operation Section 3.5
Mal-operation of the IED during testing Section 3.6
Table 1: Problem Identification
3.2 Power-up Errors

If the IED does not appear to power up, use the following to determine whether the fault is in the
external wiring, auxiliary fuse, IED power supply module or IED front panel.
Test Check Action
Measure the auxiliary voltage on terminals
1 and 2. Verify the voltage level and
polarity against the rating label on the If the auxiliary voltage is correct, go to test 2. Otherwise
1
front. check the wiring and fuses in the auxiliary supply.
Terminal 1 is –dc, 2 is +dc
If the LEDs and LCD backlight switch on, or the contact
Check the LEDs and LCD backlight switch closes and no error code is displayed, the error is probably
on at power-up. Also check the N/O on the main processor board in the front panel.
2
(normally open) watchdog contact for
closing. If the LEDs and LCD backlight do not switch on and the
contact does not close, go to test 3.
Check the field voltage output (nominally If there is no field voltage, the fault is probably in the IED
3
48 V DC) power supply module.
Table 2: Power-up errors Identification
3.3 Error Message or Code on Power-up

The IED performs a self-test during power-up. If it detects an error, a message appears on the LCD
and the power-up sequence stops. If the error occurs when the IED application software is running, a
maintenance record is created and the device reboots.
Test Check Action
If the IED locks up and displays an error code
Is an error message or code permanently permanently, go to test 2.
1
displayed during power up? If the IED prompts for user input, go to test 4.
If the IED reboots automatically, go to test 5.
Record whether the same error code is displayed when
the IED is rebooted. If no error code is displayed,
Record displayed error, and then remove
2 contact the local service centre stating the error code
and re-apply IED auxiliary supply.
and IED information. If the same code is displayed, go
to test 3.
15-14 P446/EN/TM/E
Test Check Action

Error Code Identification
The following text messages (in English) are These messages indicate that a problem has been
displayed if a fundamental problem is detected on the IED’s main processor board in the front
detected, preventing the system from panel.
booting:
Bus Fail – address lines
3 SRAM Fail – data lines
FLASH Fail format error
FLASH Fail checksum
Code Verify Fail
The following hex error codes relate to errors
detected in specific IED modules:
3.1 0c140005/0c0d0000 Input Module (including opto-isolated inputs)
3.2 0c140006/0c0e0000 Output IED Cards
Other error codes relate to hardware or software
The last four digits provide details on the
3.3 problems on the main processor board. Contact Alstom
actual error.
Grid with details of the problem for a full analysis.
The power-up tests have detected corrupted IED
The IED displays a message for corrupt
settings. Restore the default settings to allow the power-
4 settings and prompts for the default values to
up to complete, and then reapply the application-specific
be restored for the affected settings.
settings.
Error 0x0E080000, programmable scheme logic error
due to excessive execution time. Restore the default
settings by powering up with both horizontal cursor keys
pressed, then confirm restoration of defaults at the
The IED resets when the power-up is prompt using the Enter key. If the IED powers up
5
complete. A record error code is displayed successfully, check the programmable logic for feedback
paths.
Other error codes relate to software errors on the main
processor board, contact Alstom Grid.
Table 3: Power on self test up error
3.4 Out of Service LED on at power-up

Test Check Action
Using the IED menu, confirm the
If the setting is Enabled, disable the test mode and make
1 Commission Test or Test Mode setting is
sure the Out of Service LED is OFF.
Enabled. If it is not Enabled, go to test 2.
Check for the H/W Verify Fail maintenance record. This
Select the VIEW RECORDS column then indicates a discrepancy between the IED model number
2 view the last maintenance record from the and the hardware. Examine the Maint Data; cell. This
menu. indicates the causes of the failure using bit fields:
Bit Meaning
The application type field in the model number
0
does not match the software ID
The application field in the model number does
1
not match the software ID
The variant 1 field in the model number does
2
The variant 2 field in the model number does
3
P446/EN/TM/E 15-15
Test Check Action

The protocol field in the model number does
4
The language field in the model number does
5
The VT type field in the model number is
6
incorrect (110 V VTs fitted)
7
incorrect (440 V VTs fitted)
8
incorrect (no VTs fitted)
Table 4: Out of service LED illuminated
3.5 Error Code during Operation

The IED performs continuous self-checking. If the IED detects an error it displays an error message,
logs a maintenance record and after a short delay resets itself. A permanent problem (for example
due to a hardware fault) is usually detected in the power-up sequence. In this case the IED displays
an error code and halts. If the problem was transient, the IED reboots correctly and continues
operation. By examining the maintenance record logged, the nature of the detected fault can be
determined.
If the IED’s self-check detects a failure of the field voltage or the lithium battery, the IED displays an
alarm message and logs a maintenance record but the IED does not reset.
If the IED detects the field voltage has dropped below threshold, a scheme logic signal is set. This
allows the scheme logic to be adapted specifically for this failure (for example if a blocking scheme is
being used).
To prevent the IED from issuing an alarm when there is a battery failure, select Date and Time then
Battery Alarm then Disabled. The IED can then be used without a battery and no battery alarm
message appears.
3.6 Mal-operation during Testing
3.6.1 Failure of Output Contacts

An apparent failure of the relay output contacts can be caused by the configuration. Perform the
following tests to identify the real cause of the failure. The self-tests verify that the coils of the output
relay contacts have been energized. An error is displayed if there is a fault in the output relay board.
Test Check Action
If this LED is ON, the relay may be in test mode or the
1 Is the Out of Service LED ON? protection has been disabled due to a hardware verify
error (see Table 4).
Examine the Contact status in the If the relevant bits of the contact status are operated, go
2
Commissioning section of the menu. to test 4; if not, go to test 3.
If the protection element does not operate, check the test
Examine the fault record or use the test port is correctly applied.
3 to check the protection element is operating If the protection element operates, check the
correctly. programmable logic to make sure the protection element
is correctly mapped to the contacts.
15-16 P446/EN/TM/E
Test Check Action

Using the Commissioning or Test mode If the output relay operates, the problem must be in the
function, apply a test pattern to the relevant external wiring to the relay. If the output relay does not
relay output contacts. Consult the correct operate the output relay contacts may have failed (the
4
external connection diagram and use a self-tests verify that the relay coil is being energized).
continuity tester at the rear of the relay to Ensure the closed resistance is not too high for the
check the relay output contacts operate. continuity tester to detect.
Table 5: Failure of output contacts
3.6.2 Failure of Opto-inputs

The opto-isolated inputs are mapped onto the IED's internal DDB signals using the programmable
scheme logic. If an input is not recognized by the scheme logic, use the Opto I/P Status cell in the
COMMISSION TESTS column to check whether the problem is in the opto-input itself, or the mapping
of its signal to the scheme logic functions.
If the device does not correctly read the opto-input state, test the applied signal. Verify the
connections to the opto-input using the wiring diagram and the nominal voltage settings in the OPTO
CONFIG column. To do this:
1. Select the nominal battery voltage for all opto-inputs by selecting one of the five standard
ratings in the Global Nominal V cell.
2. Select 'Custom' to set each opto-input individually to a nominal voltage.
3. Using a voltmeter, check that the voltage on its input terminals is greater than the minimum
pick-up level (See the Technical Specifications chapter for opto pick-up levels).
If the signal is correctly applied, this indicates failure of an opto-input, which may be situated on
standalone opto-input board, or on an opto-input board that is part of the input module. Separate opto-
input boards can simply be replaced. If, however, the faulty opto-input board is part of the input
module, the complete input module should be replaced. This is because the analogue input module
cannot be individually replaced without dismantling the module and recalibration of the IED.
3.6.3 Incorrect Analogue Signals

If the measured analogue quantities do not seem correct, use the measurement function to determine
the type of problem. The measurements can be configured in primary or secondary terms.
1. Compare the displayed measured values with the actual magnitudes at the terminals.
2. Check the correct terminals are used (in particular the dual-rated CT inputs)
3. Check the CT and VT ratios set on the relay are correct.
4. Check the phase displacement to confirm the inputs are correctly connected
3.7 Coprocessor board failures

If a coprocessor board is used, this may cause the IED to report one or more of the following alarms:
 Signalling failure alarm (on its own)

 C diff failure (on its own)
 Signalling failure and C diff failure together
 Incompatible IED
 Comms changed
 IEEE C37.94 fail
P446/EN/TM/E 15-17
Signalling failure alarm (on its own)

This indicates that there is a problem with one of the fibre-optic signalling channels. This alarm can
occur in dual redundant or three terminal schemes. The fibre may have been disconnected, the device
may have been incorrectly configured at one of the ends, or there is a problem with the
communications equipment. Further information about the status of the signalling channels can be
found in MEASUREMENTS 4 column.
C diff failure alarm (on its own)

This indicates there is a problem with the Coprocessor board. As a result the current
differential/distance protection is not available and backup protection will operate, if configured to do
so. Further information can be found in the maintenance records.
Signaling failure and C diff failure alarms together

This indicates that there is a problem with one or both fibre-optic signalling channels. The fibre may
have been disconnected, the device may have been incorrectly configured at one of the ends, or there
is a problem with the communications equipment. As a result the current differential protection is not
available and backup protection will operate, if configured to do so. Further information about the
status of the signalling channels can be found in MEASUREMENTS 4 column.
Incompatible IED
This occurs if the IEDs trying to communicate with each other are of incompatible types.
Comms changed
This indicates that the Comms Mode setting has been changed without a subsequent power off and
on.
IEEE C37.94 fail

This indicates a Signal Lost, a Path Yellow (indicating a fault on the communications channel) or a
mismatch in the number ofN*64 channels used on either channel 1 or channel 2. Further information
can be found in the MEASURMENTS 4 column.
3.8 PSL Editor Troubleshooting

A failure to open a connection could be due to one or more of the following:
 The IED address is not valid (this address is always 1 for the front port)
 Password in not valid
 Communication set-up (COM port, Baud rate, or Framing) is not correct
 Transaction values are not suitable for the IED or the type of connection
 The connection cable is not wired correctly or broken. See MiCOM S1 Studio connection
configurations
 The option switches on any KITZ101/102 in use may be incorrectly set
3.8.1 Diagram Reconstruction

Although a scheme can be extracted from an IED, a facility is provided to recover a scheme if the
original file is unobtainable.
A recovered scheme is logically correct but much of the original graphical information is lost. Many
signals are drawn in a vertical line down the left side of the canvas. Links are drawn orthogonally
using the shortest path from A to B. Any annotation added to the original diagram such as titles and
notes are lost.
15-18 P446/EN/TM/E
Sometimes a gate type does not appear as expected. For example, a single-input AND gate in the
original scheme appears as an OR gate when uploaded. Programmable gates with an inputs-to-
trigger value of 1 also appear as OR gates.
3.8.2 PSL Version Check

The PSL is saved with a version reference, time stamp and CRC check. This gives a visual check
whether the default PSL is in place or whether a new application has been downloaded.
P446/EN/TM/E 15-19
4 REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE

Please follow these steps to return an Automation product to us:
1. Get the Repair and Modification Return Authorization (RMA) form

For an electronic version of the RMA form, go to the following url:
http://www.alstom.com/grid/productrepair/
2. Fill in the RMA form

Fill in only the white part of the form.
Please ensure that all fields marked (M) are completed such as:
 Equipment model
 Model No. and Serial No.
 Description of failure or modification required (please be specific)
 Value for customs (in case the product requires export)
 Delivery and invoice addresses
 Contact details
3. Send the RMA form to your local contact

For a list of local service contacts worldwide, go to following url:
http://www.alstom.com/grid/productrepair/
4. The local service contact provides the shipping information

Your local service contact provides you with all the information needed to ship the product:
 Pricing details
 RMA number
 Repair centre address
If required, an acceptance of the quote must be delivered before going to the next stage.
5. Send the product to the repair centre

 Address the shipment to the repair centre specified by your local contact
 Make sure all items are packaged in an anti-static bag and foam protection
 Make sure a copy of the import invoice is attached with the returned unit
 Make sure a copy of the RMA form is attached with the returned unit
 E-mail or fax a copy of the import invoice and airway bill document to your local contact.
15-20 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 16 Technical Specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 16
P446/EN/TM/E 16-1
16 Technical Specifications MiCOMho P446
16-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The Technical Specifications chapter consists of the following sections:
1 Chapter Overview
2 Interfaces
2.1 Front Serial Port
2.2 Download/Monitor port
2.3 Rear Serial Port
2.4 Optional Second Rear Serial Port SK4
2.6 Optional Rear Serial Fiber Port
2.7 Optional IRIG-B (Demodulated)
2.8 Optional IRIG-B (Modulated)
2.9 Rear Ethernet port (copper)
2.10 Rear Ethernet port (fiber including redundancy option)
2.11 InterMiCOM fibre Interface
3 Protection Functions
3.2 InterMiCOM64 Fibre optic Teleprotection
3.3 Out of Step
3.4 Slow Power Swing Blocking
3.5 Three Phase Overcurrent Protection
3.6 Earth Fault Protection
3.8 Undervoltage
3.9 Overvoltage
3.10 Neutral Displacement / Residual Overvoltage
3.11 Circuit Breaker Fail and Undercurrent
3.12 Broken Conductor Logic
3.14 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)
3.15 Current Transformer Supervision
3.16 CB State Monitoring and Condition Monitoring
3.18 Auto-reclose and Check Synchronism
4 Measurements and Recording

4.1 General
4.3 Event, Fault & Maintenance Records
4.4 Fault Locator
4.5 Plant Supervision
5 Standards Compliance
5.1 EMC Compliance: 2004/108/EC
5.2 Product Safety: 2006/95/EC:
5.3 R&TTE Compliance
P446/EN/TM/E 16-3
5.4 UL/CUL Compliance
6 Mechanical Specifications
6.1 Physical Parameters
6.2 Enclosure Protection: IEC 60529:1992
6.3 Mechanical Robustness
7 Terminals
7.1 AC Current and Voltage Measuring Inputs
7.2 General Input/Output Terminals
7.3 Case Protective Ground Connection
8 Ratings
8.1 AC Measuring Inputs
8.2 AC Current
8.3 AC Voltage
8.4 Auxiliary voltage (Vx)
8.5 Field Output Voltage
8.6 Nominal burden
8.7 Power-up
8.8 Power Supply Interruption
8.9 Output Contacts
8.10 High Break Contacts (Optional)
8.11 Watchdog Contacts
8.12 Fiber defect contacts (watchdog relay – redundant Ethernet version)
8.13 Opto-isolated digital inputs
9 Environmental Conditions
9.1 Ambient Temperature Range
9.2 Ambient Humidity Range
9.3 Corrosive Environments (for relays with harsh environment coating of PCBs)
10 Type Tests
10.1 Insulation
10.2 Creepage Distances and Clearances
10.3 High Voltage (Dielectric) Withstand
10.4 Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
11 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

11.1 1 MHz Burst High Frequency Disturbance Test
11.2 100 kHz Damped Oscillatory Test
11.3 Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge
11.4 Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements
11.5 Surge Withstand Capability
11.6 Surge Immunity Test
11.7 Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
11.8 Radiated Immunity from Digital Communications
11.9 Radiated Immunity from Digital Radio Telephones
11.10 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
11.11 Magnetic Field Immunity
11.12 Conducted Emissions
16-4 P446/EN/TM/E
11.13 Radiated Emissions
P446/EN/TM/E 16-5
2 INTERFACES
2.1 Front Serial Port

Front parallel port
Use For local connection to laptop for configuration purposes
Standard EIA(RS)232
Connector 9 pin D-type female connector
Isolation Isolation to ELV level
Protocol Courier
Constraints Maximum cable length 15 m
2.2 Download/Monitor port

Front parallel port
Use For firmware downloads or monitor connection
Standard Compatible with IEEE1284-A
Isolation Isolation to ELV level
Protocol Proprietary
2.3 Rear Serial Port

Rear serial port
Use For SCADA communications (multi-drop)
Standard EIA(RS)485, K-bus
Connector General purpose block, M4 screws (2 wire)
Cable Screened twisted pair (STP)
Supported Protocols Courier, IEC-870-5-103, DNP3.0
Isolation Isolation to SELV level

Rear serial port
Standard EIA(RS)485, K-bus, EIA(RS)232
Supported Protocols Courier
Constraints Maximum cable length 1000 m for RS485 and K-bus, 15 m for RS232
16-6 P446/EN/TM/E

Rear serial port
Standard EIA(RS)232
Supported Protocols InterMiCOM (IM)
2.6 Optional Rear Serial Fiber Port

Rear Ethernet port (fiber)
Main Use Serial SCADA communications over fiber
Connector IEC 874-10 BFOC 2.5 –(ST®) (1 each for Tx and Rx)
Fibre type Multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm
Supported Protocols Courier, IEC870-5-103, DNP 3.0
Wavelength 850 nm MM
2.7 Optional IRIG-B (Demodulated)

IRIG-B Interface (De-modulated)
Use External clock synchronization signal
Standard IRIG 200-98 format B00X
Connector BNC
Cable type 50 Ohm coaxial
Input signal TTL level
Input impedance dc 10 k ohms
Accuracy +/- 1 ms
2.8 Optional IRIG-B (Modulated)

Use External clock synchronization signal
Standard IRIG 200-98 format B12X
Connector BNC
Cable type 50 Ohm coaxial
Input signal 200 mV to 20 V peak-to-peak
Input impedance ac 6 k ohms at 1 kHz
P446/EN/TM/E 16-7

Modulation ratio 3:1 to 6:1
Accuracy +/- 1 ms
2.9 Rear Ethernet port (copper)

Rear Ethernet port (copper)
Main Use IEC 61850 or DNP3 SCADA communications
Standard IEEE 802.3 10BaseT/100BaseTX
Connector RJ45
Cable type Screened twisted pair (STP)
Isolation 1.5 kV
Supported Protocols IEC 61850, DNP3.0
2.10 Rear Ethernet port (fiber including redundancy option)

Rear Ethernet port (fiber)
Main Use IEC 61850 or DNP3 SCADA communications
Connector IEC 874-10 BFOC 2.5 –(ST®) (1 each for Tx and Rx)
Standard IEEE 802.3 100 BaseFX
Fiber type Multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm
Supported Protocols IEC 61850, DNP3.0
Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)
Optional Redundancy Protocols Supported Self-healing protocol (SHP)
Dual homing protocol (DHP)
Wavelength 1300 nm
100 Base FX Transmitter characteristics

Parameter Sym Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Output Optical Power BOL 62.5/125
-19
µm PO -16.8 -14 dBm avg.
-20
NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL
Output Optical Power BOL 50/125
-22.5
µm PO -20.3 -14 dBm avg.
-23.5
NA = 0.20 Fiber EOL
10 %
Optical Extinction Ratio
-10 dB
Output Optical Power at Logic “0” PO
-45 dBm avg.
State (“0”)
Conditions: TA = 0°C to 70°C, VCC = 4.75 V to 5.25 V
16-8 P446/EN/TM/E
100 Base FX Receiver characteristics

Parameter Sym Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Input Optical Power Minimum at
PIN Min. (W) -33.5 –31 dBm avg.
Window Edge
Input Optical Power Minimum at
PIN Min. (C) -34.5 -31.8 Bm avg.
Eye Center
Input Optical Power Maximum PIN Max. -14 -11.8 dBm avg.
Conditions: TA = 0°C to 70°C, VCC = 4.75 V to 5.25 V
2.11 InterMiCOM fibre Interface

InterMiCOM (fibre)
Main Use Inter relay communications
IEC 874-10 BFOC 2.5 –(ST®) (1 each for Tx and Rx) 1 or 2
Connector
channels
Fibre type Multimode 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm or Single mode 9/125 µm
Wavelength 850 nm MM, 1300 nm MM, 1300 nm SM, 1550 nm SM
Optical budget
850 nm 1300 nm 1300 nm 1550 nm
Multi mode Multi mode Single mode Single mode
Min. transmit output level (average power) -19.8 dBm -6 dBm -6 dBm -6 dBm
Receiver sensitivity
-25.4 dBm -49 dBm -49 dBm -49 dBm
(average power)
Optical budget 5.6 dB 43.0 dB 43.0 dB 43.0 dB
Less safety margin (3 dB) 2.6 dB 40.0 dB 40.0 dB 40.0 dB
Typical cable loss 2.6 dB/km 0.8 dB/km 0.4 dB/km 0.3 dB/km
Max. transmission distance 1 km 50.0 km 100.0 km 130 km
P446/EN/TM/E 16-9
3 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Accuracy
Stability angle +/- 2° or 4%, whichever is greater
Current and voltage starters +/- 2%
Operating time with default settings, back-to-back
propagation delay included
50 Hz, 1 p.u. ≤ relay current < 2 p.u. <45 ms
60 Hz, 1 p.u. ≤ relay current < 2 p.u. <40 ms
50 Hz, relay current ≥ 2 p.u. <35 ms
60 Hz, relay current ≥ 2 p.u. <30 ms
Repeatability +/- 2.5%

P443 50Hz, SIR = 5
40
Operating time versus reach percentage, for faults Performance:
Subcycle up
close to line angle. 30 to 75% Reach
50 Hz, SIR = 5 20
10
All quoted operating times include closure of the
trip output contact
0 50% 70% 80% 90%
P443 60Hz, SIR = 5
Operating time versus reach percentage, for faults 40

close to line angle.
Performance:
30 Subcycle up
to 75% Reach
60 Hz, SIR = 5
20
All quoted operating times include closure of the 10

trip output contact
0 50% 70% 80% 90%
Operating time for resistive faults > 20% inside the 50 Hz, up to SIR = 30 < 30 ms
characteristic 60 Hz, up to SIR = 30 < 25 ms
Accuracy
+/- 5% for on-angle fault (on the set line angle)
+/- 10% for off-angle fault
Characteristic shape, up to SIR = 30
Example: For a 70 degree set line angle, injection testing
at 40 degrees would be referred to as “off-angle”.
Zone time delay deviations +/- 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
16-10 P446/EN/TM/E
3.2 InterMiCOM64 Fibre optic Teleprotection

The table below shows the minimum and maximum transfer time for InterMiCOM64 (IM64). The times
are measured from opto initialization (with no opto filtering) to relay standard output and include a
small propagation delay for back-back test (2.7 ms for 64 kbits/s and 3.2 ms for 56 kbits/s).
IDiff IM64 indicates InterMiCOM64 signals working in conjunction with the differential protection fiber
optic communications channel. IM64 indicates InterMiCOM64 signals working as a standalone feature.
Configuration Permissive op times (ms) Direct op times (ms)
IM64 at 64 k 13 - 18 17 - 20
IM64 at 56 k 15 - 20 19 - 22
IDiff IM64 at 64 k 22 - 24 23 - 25
IDiff IM64 at 56 k 24 - 26 25 - 27
3.3 Out of Step

Accuracy
Accuracy of zones and timers As per Distance
Operating range Up to 7 Hz
3.4 Slow Power Swing Blocking

Accuracy
Accuracy of zones and timers As per Distance
3.5 Three Phase Overcurrent Protection

Accuracy
Pick-up Setting +/- 5%
Drop-off 0.95 x setting +/- 5%
Minimum trip level for IDMT elements 1.05 x Setting +/-5%
Inverse time stages +/-40 ms or 5%, whichever is greater
Definite time stages +/-40 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Repeatability 5%
Directional boundary accuracy +/-2° with hysteresis <3°
Additional tolerance due to increasing X/R ratios +/- 5% over the X/R ratio from 1 to 90
Overshoot of overcurrent elements <30 ms
3.6 Earth Fault Protection

Earth Fault
DT Pick-up Setting +/- 5%
Drop-off 0.95 x Setting +/-5%
Minimum IDMT Trip level 1.05 x Setting +/-5%
+/- 5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
IDMT shape (Reference conditions TMS = 1, TD = 1 and IN > setting of 1 A, operating range
2-20 In)
IEEE reset +/- 10% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
DT operation +/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
P446/EN/TM/E 16-11
Earth Fault
DT reset +/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Repeatability +/- 5%
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)

Minimum IDMT Trip level 1.05 x Setting +/-5%
+/- 5% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
IDMT shape (Reference conditions TMS = 1, TD = 1 and IN > setting of 100 mA, operating
range 2-20 Is)
IEEE reset +/- 17.5% or 60 ms, whichever is greater
DT operation +/- 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
DT reset +/- 5% or 50 ms, whichever is greater
Restricted Earth Fault (REF)

Pick-up Setting formula +/- 5%
Drop-off 0.8 x Setting formula +/-5%
Operating time < 60 ms
High pick-up Setting +/- 5%
High operating time < 30 ms
Wattmetric SEF
Pick-up P = 0 W ISEF > +/-5% or 5 mA
Pick-up P > 0 W P > +/-5%
Drop-off P = 0 W 0.95 x ISEF> +/- 5% or 5 mA
Drop-off P > 0 W 0.9 x P> +/- 5% or 5 mA
Boundary accuracy +/-5% with hysteresis < 1°
Polarizing Quantities
Pick-up VN> and V2> level detectors +/- 10%
Resetting ratio VN> and V2> level detectors 0.9
Pick-up I2> level detector +/- 10%
Resetting ratio I2> level detectors 0.9

Accuracy
DT operation +/- 60 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Reset < 35 ms
16-12 P446/EN/TM/E
Accuracy
Directional boundary accuracy +/- 2% with hysteresis < 1°
3.8 Undervoltage
Accuracy
IDMT Pick-up 0.98 x Setting +/- 2%
Reset < 35 ms
IDMT shape +/- 40 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
3.9 Overvoltage
Accuracy
Reset < 75 ms
3.10 Neutral Displacement / Residual Overvoltage

Accuracy
Instantaneous operation < 50 ms
Reset < 35 ms
Repeatability 10%
3.11 Circuit Breaker Fail and Undercurrent

Accuracy
Pick-up +/- 10% or 0.025 In, whichever is greater
Timers +/- 2 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Reset < 15 ms
P446/EN/TM/E 16-13
3.12 Broken Conductor Logic

Accuracy
Pick-up Setting +/- 2.5%
Drop-off 0.95 x Setting +/- 2.5%
Reset < 25 ms

Accuracy
Thermal alarm pick-up Calculated trip time +/- 10%
Calculated trip time +/- 10%
Thermal overload pick-up
Cooling time accuracy +/- 15% of theoretical
Repeatability <5%
* Operating time measured with applied current of 20% above thermal setting.
3.14 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)

Accuracy
Fast block operation < 1 cycle
Fast block reset <1.5 cycles
Time delay +/- 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
3.15 Current Transformer Supervision

CTS Accuracy
IN> Pick-up Setting +/- 5%
VN< Pick-up Setting +/- 5%
IN> Drop-off 0.9 x setting +/-5%
VN< Drop-off 1.05 x setting +/-5% or 1 V, whichever is greater
Time delay operation Setting +/-2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater
CTS block operation < 1 cycle
CTS reset < 35 ms
3.16 CB State Monitoring and Condition Monitoring

Accuracy
Broken current accuracy < +/- 5%

Accuracy
Output conditioner timer Setting +/- 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Dwell conditioner timer Setting +/- 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Pulse conditioner timer Setting +/- 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
16-14 P446/EN/TM/E
3.18 Auto-reclose and Check Synchronism

Accuracy
P446/EN/TM/E 16-15
4 MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING
4.1 General
General Measurement Accuracy
General measurement accuracy Typically +/- 1%, but +/- 0.5% between 0.2 - 2 In/Vn
Current 0.05 to 3 In +/- 1.0% of reading
Voltage 0.05 to 2 Vn +/- 1.0% of reading
0.2 to 2 Vn and 0.05 to 3 In +/- 5.0% of reading at unity power
Power (W)
factor
Reactive power (Vars) 0.2 to 2 Vn to 3 In +/- 5.0% of reading at zero power factor
Apparent power (VA) 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.05 to 3 In +/- 5.0% of reading
Energy (Wh) 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.2 to 3 In +/- 5.0% of reading at zero power factor
Phase 0° to 360° +/- 0.5%
Frequency 45 to 65 Hz +/- 0.025 Hz

Disturbance Records Measurement Accuracy
Maximum record duration 50 s
Minimum 5 at 10 seconds each
No of records Maximum 50 at 1 second each
(8 records of 3 seconds, each via IEC60870-5-103 protocol)
Magnitude and relative phases accuracy 5% of applied quantities
Duration accuracy 2%
Trigger position accuracy 2% (minimum Trigger 100 ms)
4.3 Event, Fault & Maintenance Records

Event, Fault & Maintenance Records
Record location The most recent records are stored in battery-backed memory
Viewing method Front panel display or S1 Studio
Extraction method Extracted via the communication port
Number of Event records Up to 1024 time tagged event records
Number of Fault Records Up to 15
Number of Maintenance Records Up to 10
4.4 Fault Locator

Accuracy
+/- 2% of line length
Fault Location
Reference conditions: solid fault applied on line
4.5 Plant Supervision

Accuracy
Timers +/- 2% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
Broken current accuracy +/- 5%
16-16 P446/EN/TM/E
Accuracy
Reset time < 30 ms
Undercurrent Accuracy
Pick-up +/- 10% or 25 mA, whichever is greater
Reset time < 25 ms
P446/EN/TM/E 16-17
5 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
5.1 EMC Compliance: 2004/108/EC

Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC is demonstrated using a Technical File.
Compliance with EN50263:2000 was used to establish conformity.
5.2 Product Safety: 2006/95/EC:

Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive (LVD) is demonstrated using a
Technical File.
Compliance with EN 60255-27: 2005 was used to establish conformity:
5.3 R&TTE Compliance

Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive 99/5/EC.
Conformity is demonstrated by compliance to both the EMC directive and the Low Voltage directive, to
zero volts.
5.4 UL/CUL Compliance

Canadian and USA Underwriters Laboratory
File Number E202519
16-18 P446/EN/TM/E
6 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Physical Parameters

Physical Measurements
Case Types 80TE
Weight (80TE case) 11kg – 13.1kg (depending on chosen options)
Dimensions in mm (w x h x l) (80TE case) 413.2 x 177 x 270 (with secondary cover fitted)
Mounting Front of panel flush mounting
6.2 Enclosure Protection: IEC 60529:1992

Enclosure Protection
Against dust and dripping water (front face) IP52 as per IEC 60529:1999
Protection for sides of the case IP30 as per IEC 60529:1999
Protection for rear of the case IP10 as per IEC 60529:1999
6.3 Mechanical Robustness

Mechanical Robustness
Vibration test per IEC 60255-21-1:1996 Response: class 2, Endurance: class 2
Shock and bump immunity per IEC 60255-21- Shock response: class 2, Shock withstand: class 1, Bump
2:1995 withstand: class 1
Seismic test per IEC 60255-21-3: 1995 Class 2
Transit Packaging Performance Product testing to simulate protection offered by
primary packaging carton, to ISTA 1C specification
Vibration and Drop Release Tests Vibration tests in 3 orientations, vibratory movement 7 Hz,
amplitude 5.3 mm, acceleration 1.05g
Drop tests - 10 drops from 61 cm height on multiple carton

faces, edges and corners
P446/EN/TM/E 16-19
7 TERMINALS
7.1 AC Current and Voltage Measuring Inputs

AC Current and Voltage Measuring Inputs
Terminal Block Type Heavy Duty (HD)
Use For CT and VT inputs
Terminal Location Located on heavy duty (black) terminal block, at rear
Connection type Threaded female M4 terminals, for ring lug connection
CT inputs have integral safety shorting, upon removal of the terminal
Protection
block
7.2 General Input/Output Terminals

General Input/Output Terminals
Terminal Block Type Medium Duty (MD)
For power supply, opto-inputs, output contacts and RP1 rear
Use
communications
Terminal Location Located on general purpose (grey) blocks, at rear
Connection type Threaded female M4 terminals, for ring lug connection
7.3 Case Protective Ground Connection

Case Protective Ground Connection
Use For case protective ground only
Terminal Location Two stud connections at rear
Connection type Threaded M4 studs. Suitable for ring tags
Special conditions Must be grounded for safety. Minimum earth wire size 2.5 mm2
16-20 P446/EN/TM/E
8 RATINGS
8.1 AC Measuring Inputs

AC Measuring Inputs
Nominal frequency 50 and 60 Hz (settable)
Operating range 45 to 65 Hz
Phase rotation ABC or CBA
8.2 AC Current
AC Current
Nominal current (In) 1A and 5A dual rated*
Nominal burden per phase < 0.2 VA at In
Continuous: 4*In
10 s: 30 x In
AC current thermal withstand
1 s: 100 x In
Linear to 64 x In (non-offset ac current)
Note: 1A and 5A inputs use different transformer tap connections, check correct terminals are wired.
8.3 AC Voltage
AC Voltage
Nominal voltage 100 to 120 V phase-phase
Nominal burden per phase < 0.02 VA at Vn
Thermal withstand Continuous: 2*Vn, 10 s: 2.6*Vn
8.4 Auxiliary voltage (Vx)

Auxiliary voltage (Vx)
Type 1: 24-48 V dc,
Ordering options Type 2: 48-110 V dc + 40-100 V ac
Type 3: 110-250 V dc + 100-240 V ac
Operating range, type 1 19 to 65 V dc
37 to 150 V dc
Operating range, type 2
32 to 110 V ac
87 to 300 V dc
Operating range, type 3
80 to 265 V ac
Ripple <12% for a dc supply (compliant with IEC 60255-11:2008)
8.5 Field Output Voltage

Field Output Voltage
Voltage 48 V dc regulated
Current limit 112 mA maximum output
P446/EN/TM/E 16-21
8.6 Nominal burden

Nominal burden
Quiescent burden 11 W
Additions for second rear comms
1.25 W
board
Per opto input:
0.09 W (24 to 54 V)
Additions for energized binary inputs
0.12 W (110/125 V)
0.19 W (220/120 V)
Additions for energized binary outputs Per energized output relay: 0.13 W
8.7 Power-up
Power-up
Time to power up < 11 s
Mounting: Front panel, Type: ½ AA, 3.6 V Lithium Thionyl Chloride
Battery Backup
Battery
Type: ½ AA, 3.6 V Lithium Thionyl Chloride Battery (SAFT advanced:
Battery Type
LS14250)
Battery Life >10 years (based on 90% energization time)
8.8 Power Supply Interruption

Power Supply Interruption
IEC60255-11:2008 (dc)
Standard
IEC61000-4-11:2004 (ac)
20 ms at 24 V
Vx = 24 – 48 V dc
50 ms at 36 V
Quiescent / half load
100 ms at 48 V
20 ms at 24 V
Vx = 24 – 48 V dc
50 ms at 36 V
Full load
100 ms at 48 V
20 ms at 36 V
Vx = 48 – 100 V dc 50 ms at 60 V
Quiescent / half load 100 ms at 72 V
200 ms at 110 V
20 ms at 36 V
Vx = 24 – 48 V dc 50 ms at 60 V
Full load 100 ms at 85 V
200 ms at 110 V
50 ms at 110 V
Vx = 110 – 250 V dc
100 ms at 160 V
200 ms at 210 V
20 ms at 85 V
Vx = 110 – 250 V dc 50 ms at 98 V
Full load 100 ms at 135 V
200 ms at 174 V
16-22 P446/EN/TM/E
Power Supply Interruption

Vx = 40 – 100 V ac
50 ms at 27 V for 100% voltage dip
Vx = 40 – 100 V ac
Full load
Vx = 100 – 240 V ac
Vx = 100 – 240 V ac
Full load
Maximum loading = all digital inputs/outputs energized

Quiescent or 1/2 loading = 1/2 of all digital inputs/outputs energized
8.9 Output Contacts

Standard Contacts
Use General purpose relay outputs for signaling, tripping and alarming
Rated voltage 300 V
Maximum continuous current 10 A
30 A for 3 s
Short duration withstand carry
250 A for 30 ms
Make and break, dc resistive 50 W
Make and break, dc inductive 62.5 W (L/R = 50 ms)
Make and break, ac resistive 2500 VA resistive (cos  = unity)
Make and break, ac inductive 2500 VA inductive (cos  = 0.7)
Make and carry, dc resistive 30 A for 3 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Make, carry and break, dc resistive 4 A for 1.5 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Make, carry and break, dc inductive 0.5 A for 1 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Make, carry and break ac resistive 30 A for 200 ms, 2000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Make, carry and break ac inductive 10 A for 1.5 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Loaded contact 1000 operations min.
Unloaded contact 10000 operations min.
Operate time < 5 ms
Reset time < 5 ms
8.10 High Break Contacts (Optional)

High Break Contacts
Use High Break relays used for tripping purposes
Rated voltage 300 V
Maximum continuous current 10 A
Short duration withstand carry 30 A for 3 s, 250 A for 30 ms
Make and break, dc resistive 7500 W
Make and break, dc inductive 2500 W (L/R = 50 ms)
Make and carry, dc resistive 30 A for 3 s, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Make, carry and break, dc resistive 30 A for 3 s, 5000 operations (subject to the above limits)
P446/EN/TM/E 16-23
High Break Contacts

Make, carry and break, dc resistive 30 A for 200 ms, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
10 A, 10000 operations (subject to the above limits)
Make, carry and break, dc inductive
See table below for test details
MOV protection Maximum voltage 330V dc
Durability - Loaded contact 10,000 operations min.
Durability - Unloaded contact 100,000 operations min.
Operate time < 0.2 ms
Reset time < 8 ms
Make, carry and break, dc inductive

Voltage Current L/R No. of shots per second
65 V 10 A 40 ms 5
150 V 10 A 40 ms 4
250 V 10 A 40 ms 2
250 V 10 A 20 ms 4
Note: Typical for repetitive shots with 2 minutes idle for thermal dissipation
8.11 Watchdog Contacts

Watchdog Contacts
Use Non-programmable contacts for relay healthy/relay fail indication
Breaking capacity, dc resistive 30 W
Breaking capacity, dc inductive 15 W (L/R = 40 ms)
Breaking capacity, ac inductive 375 VA inductive (cos  = 0.7)
8.12 Fiber defect contacts (watchdog relay – redundant Ethernet version)

Fiber Defect Contacts
Use Non-programmable contacts for Ethernet fiber healthy/fail indication
Connection method Phoenix cage type retention
Rated voltage 250 Vac
Rated continuous current 5A
Make current Max. 30 A and carry for 3 s
1500 VA resistive (cos  = unity)
Breaking capacity AC
1500 VA inductive (cos  = 0.5)
50 W, 250 Vdc resistive
Breaking capacity, DC
25 W, inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
8.13 Opto-isolated digital inputs

Opto-isolated digital inputs (opto-inputs)
The opto-inputs with programmable voltage thresholds may be energized
Options
from the 48 V field voltage, or the external battery supply
Rated nominal voltage 24 to 250 V dc
16-24 P446/EN/TM/E
Opto-isolated digital inputs (opto-inputs)

Operating range 19 to 265 V dc
Withstand 300 V dc
Recognition time with half-cycle ac
< 2 ms
immunity filter removed
Recognition time with filter on < 12 ms
Nominal pick-up and reset thresholds:

Nominal Battery voltage Logic levels: 60-80% DO/PU Logic Levels: 50-70% DO/PU
24/27 V Logic 0 < 16.2 V : Logic 1 > 19.2 V Logic 0 <12.0 V : Logic 1 > 16.8
220/250 Logic 0 < 150 V : Logic 1 > 176.0 V Logic 0 < 110.V : Logic 1 > 154.0 V
Note: Opto-inputs operated with filtering removed are more susceptible to EM interference and
precautions should be taken to minimize pickup on the external wiring.
P446/EN/TM/E 16-25
9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
9.1 Ambient Temperature Range

Ambient Temperature Range
Compliance IEC 60068-2-1: 2007 and 60068-2-2: 2007
Operating temperature range -25°C to +55°C (-13°F to +131°F)
Storage and transit temperature range -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Tested as per
IEC 60068-2-1: 2007

-25°C storage (96 hours)
-40°C operation (96 hours)
IEC 60068-2-2: 2007 +85°C storage (96 hours)
+85°C operation (96 hours)
9.2 Ambient Humidity Range

Ambient Humidity Range
Compliance IEC 60068-2-78: 2001 and IEC 60068-2-30: 2005
Durability 56 days at 93% relative humidity and +40°C
Damp heat cyclic six (12 + 12) hour cycles, 93% RH, +25 to +55°C
9.3 Corrosive Environments (for relays with harsh environment coating of PCBs)
Corrosive Environments
Compliance IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3
Industrial corrosive environment/poor environmental 21 days at 75% relative humidity and +30oC
control, mixed gas flow test exposure to elevated concentrations of H2S,
(100 ppb) NO2, (200 ppb) Cl2 (20 ppb).
Tested as per
IEC 60068-2-52 Salt mist (7 days)
IEC 60068-2-43 H2S (21 days), 15 ppm
IEC 60068-2-42 SO2 (21 days), 25 ppm
16-26 P446/EN/TM/E
10 TYPE TESTS
10.1 Insulation
Insulation
Compliance IEC 60255-27: 2005
Insulation resistance > 100 M at 500 V dc (Using only electronic/brushless insulation tester)
10.2 Creepage Distances and Clearances

Creepage Distances and Clearances
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category lll
Impulse test voltage 5 kV
10.3 High Voltage (Dielectric) Withstand

High Voltage (Dielectric) Withstand
IEC Compliance IEC 60255-27: 2005
Between all independent circuits 2 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Between independent circuits and protective earth conductor
2 kV ac rms for 1 minute
terminal
Between all case terminals and the case earth 2 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open watchdog contacts 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open contacts of changeover output relays 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Between all D-type EIA(RS)232 contacts and protective earth 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Between all screw-type EIA(RS)485 contacts and protective earth 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
ANSI/IEEE Compliance ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989
Across open contacts of normally open output relays 1.5 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open contacts of normally open changeover output relays 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
Across open watchdog contacts 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute
10.4 Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs, Peak value: 5 kV,
Between all independent circuits
0.5 J
Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs, Peak value: 5 kV,
Between terminals of all independent circuits
0.5 J
Between all independent circuits and protective Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs, Peak value: 5 kV,
earth conductor terminal 0.5 J
Exceptions: EIA(RS)232 ports and EIA(RS485) ports and normally-open output contacts
P446/EN/TM/E 16-27
11 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
11.1 1 MHz Burst High Frequency Disturbance Test

1 MHz Burst High Frequency Disturbance Test
Compliance IEC 60255-22-1: 2007 2008, Class III
Common-mode test voltage 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage 1.0 kV
Exception: EIA(RS)232 ports
11.2 100 kHz Damped Oscillatory Test

100 kHz Damped Oscillatory Test
Compliance EN61000-4-18: 2006: Level 3, 100 kHz and 1 MHz
Common-mode test voltage 2.5 kV
Differential mode test voltage 1.0 kV
11.3 Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge
Compliance IEC 60255-22-2: 1996 Class 3 and Class 4,
Class 4 Condition 15 kV discharge in air to user interface, display, and exposed metalwork
Class 3 Condition 1 8 kV discharge in air to all communication ports
Class 3 Condition 2 6 kV point contact discharge to any part of the front of the product
11.4 Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements
IEC 60255-22-4: 2002 and EN61000-4-4:2004. Test severity Class lll
Compliance
and lV
Applied to auxiliary supply and all other
Amplitude: 2 kV, burst frequency 5 kHz (class lll)
inputs except for EIA(RS)232)
Applied to auxiliary supply and all other
Amplitude: 4 kV, burst frequency 2.5 kHz (class lV)
inputs except for EIA(RS)232)
Applied directly to auxiliary Amplitude: 4 kV, burst frequency 5 kHz (class lV)
11.5 Surge Withstand Capability

Surge Withstand Capability
Compliance IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1: 2002
4 kV fast transient and 2.5 kV oscillatory applied common mode and
Condition 1 differential mode to opto inputs (filtered), output relays, CTs, VTs, power
supply, field voltage
4 kV fast transient and 2.5 kV oscillatory applied common mode to
Condition 2
communications, IRIG-B
16-28 P446/EN/TM/E
11.6 Surge Immunity Test

Surge Immunity Test
Compliance IEC 61000-4-5: 2005 Level 4
Pulse duration Time to half-value: 1.2/50 µs
Between all groups and protective earth conductor terminal Amplitude 4 kV
Between terminals of each group Amplitude 2 kV
Exception: EIA(RS)232 ports
11.7 Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
Compliance IEC 60255-22-3: 2000, Class III
Frequency band 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Spot tests at 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz
Test field strength 10 V/m
Test using AM 1 kHz / 80%
Compliance IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2: 2004
Frequency band 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Waveform 1 kHz 80% am and am pulse modulated
Field strength 35 V/m
11.8 Radiated Immunity from Digital Communications

Radiated Immunity from Digital Communications
Compliance EN61000-4-3: 2002, Level 4
Frequency bands 800 to 960 MHz, 1.4 to 2.0 GHz
Test using AM 1 kHz / 80%
11.9 Radiated Immunity from Digital Radio Telephones

Radiated Immunity from Digital Radio Telephones
Compliance IEC 6100-4-3: 2002
Frequency bands 900 MHz and 1.89 GHz
11.10 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
Compliance IEC 61000-4-6: 1996, Level 3
Frequency bands 150 kHz to 80 MHz
Test disturbance voltage 10 V
P446/EN/TM/E 16-29
11.11 Magnetic Field Immunity

Magnetic Field Immunity
IEC 61000-4-8: 1994 Level 5
Compliance
IEC 61000-4-9/10: 1993 Level 5
IEC 61000-4-8 test 100 A/m applied continuously, 1000 A/m applied for 3 s
IEC 61000-4-9 test 1000 A/m applied in all planes
100 A/m applied in all planes at 100 kHz/1 MHz with a
IEC 61000-4-10 test
burst duration of 2 s
11.12 Conducted Emissions

Conducted Emissions
Compliance EN 55022: 1998
0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 79 dBV (quasi peak) 66 dBV
Test 1
(average)
Test 2 0.5 – 30 MHz, 73 dBV (quasi peak) 60 dBV (average)
11.13 Radiated Emissions

Radiated Emissions
Compliance EN 55022: 1998
Test 1 30 – 230 MHz, 40 dBV/m at 10 m measurement distance
Test 2 230 – 1 GHz, 47 dBV/m at 10 m measurement distance
16-30 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 17 Symbols and Glossary
SYMBOLS AND GLOSSARY
CHAPTER 17
P446/EN/TM/E 17-1
17 Symbols and Glossary MiCOMho P446
17-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
1 Chapter Overview
2 Acronyms and Abbreviations
3 Company Proprietary Terms
4 ANSI and IEC61850 Terms
5 Units for Digital Communications
6 American vs British English Terminology
7 Logic Symbols and terms
8 Logic Timers
9 Logic Gates
P446/EN/TM/E 17-3
2 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Term Description
A Ampere
AA Application Association
AC / ac Alternating Current
ACSI Abstract Communication Service Interface
ACSR Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
ALF Accuracy Limit Factor
AM Amplitude Modulation
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Auto-Reclose.
ARIP Auto-Reclose In Progress
ASDU Application Service Data Unit
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AUX / Aux Auxiliary
AWG American Wire Gauge
BAR Block Auto-Reclose signal.
BCD Binary Coded Decimal
BCR Binary Counter Reading
Bundesverband der Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft | Startseite (i.e. German Association of
BDEW
Energy and Water Industries)
BMP BitMaP – a file format for a computer graphic
BOP Blocking Overreach Protection - a blocking aided-channel scheme.
BRCB Buffered Report Control Block
BRP Beacon Redundancy Protocol
BU Backup: Typically a back-up protection element
A ChangeOver contact having normally-closed and normally-open connections: Often called
C/O
a “form C” contact.
CB Circuit Breaker
CB Aux. Circuit Breaker auxiliary contacts: Indication of the breaker open/closed status.
CBF Circuit Breaker Failure protection
CDC Common Data Class
CF Control Function
Ch Channel: usually a communications or signaling channel
CIP Critical Infrastructure Protection standards
CLK / Clk Clock
Cls Close - generally used in the context of close functions in circuit breaker control.
CMV Complex Measured Value
CNV Current No Volts
COT Cause of Transmission
CPNI Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRP Cross-network Redundancy Protocol
CRV Curve (file format for curve information)
CRx Channel Receive: Typically used to indicate a teleprotection signal received.
17-4 P446/EN/TM/E
Term Description
CS Check Synchronism.
CSV Comma Separated Values (a file format for database information)
CT Current Transformer
CTRL. Control
CTS Current Transformer Supervision: To detect CT input failure.
CTx Channel Transmit: Typically used to indicate a teleprotection signal send.
CU Communication Unit
CVT Capacitor-coupled Voltage Transformer - equivalent to terminology CCVT.
DAU Data Acquisition Unit
DC Data Concentrator
DC / dc Direct Current
DCC An Omicron compatible format
Digital Data Bus within the programmable scheme logic: A logic point that has a zero or 1
DDB
status. DDB signals are mapped in logic to customize the relay’s operation.
DDR Dynamic Disturbance Recorder
DEF Directional earth fault protection: A directionalized ground fault aided scheme.
DG Distributed Generation
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHP Dual Homing Protocol
Diff Differential protection.
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung (German standards body)
Dist Distance protection.
DITA Darwinian Information Typing Architecture
Dead-Line Dead-Bus: In system synchronism check, indication that both the line and bus
DLDB
are de-energized.
Dead-Line Live-Bus: In system synchronism check, indication that the line is de-energized
DLLB
whilst the bus is energized.
DLR Dynamic Line Rating
DLY / Dly Time Delay
DMT Definite Minimum Time
DNP Distributed Network Protocol
DPWS Device Profile for Web Services
DST Daylight Saving Time
Definite Time: in the context of protection elements:
DT An element which always responds with the same constant time delay on operation.
Abbreviation of “Dead Time” in the context of auto-reclose:
DTD Document Type Definition
DTOC Definite Time Overcurrent
DTS Date and Time Stamp
EF or E/F Earth Fault (Directly equivalent to Ground Fault)
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
ELR Environmental Lapse Rate
ER Engineering Recommendation
FCB Frame Count Bit
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FIR Finite Impulse Response
P446/EN/TM/E 17-5
Term Description
FLC Full load current: The nominal rated current for the circuit.
FLT / Flt Fault - typically used to indicate faulted phase selection.
Fn or FN Function
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FPS Frames Per Second
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FWD, Fwd or Fwd. Indicates an element responding to a flow in the “Forward” direction
GIF Graphic Interchange Format – a file format for a computer graphic
GND / Gnd Ground: used in distance settings to identify settings that relate to ground (earth) faults.
GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
GPS Global Positioning System
GRP / Grp Group. Typically an alternative setting group.
GSE General Substation Event
GSSE Generic Substation Status Event
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
HSR High-availability Seamless Ring
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
I Current
I/O Input/Output
I/P Input
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
ID Identifier or Identification. Often a label used to track a software version installed.
Inverse Definite Minimum Time. A characteristic whose trip time depends on the measured
IDMT
input (e.g. current) according to an inverse-time curve.
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IIR Infinite Impulse Response
Inh An Inhibit signal
Inst An element with Instantaneous operation: i.e. having no deliberate time delay.
IP Internet Protocol
IRIG InterRange Instrumentation Group
ISA International Standard Atmosphere
ISA Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society
ISO International Standards Organization
JPEF Joint Photographic Experts Group – a file format for a computer graphic
L Live
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display: The front-panel text display on the relay.
LD Level Detector: An element responding to a current or voltage below its set threshold.
LDOV Level Detector for Overvoltage
LDUV Level Detector for Undervoltage
LED Light Emitting Diode: Red or green indicator on the front-panel.
17-6 P446/EN/TM/E
Term Description
Live-Line Dead-Bus : In system synchronism check, indication that the line is energized
LLDB
whilst the bus is de-energized.
Ln Natural logarithm
LN Logical Node
LoL A Loss of Load scheme, providing a fast distance trip without needing a signaling channel.
LPDU Link Protocol Data Unit
LPHD Logical Physical Device
MC MultiCast
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCL MiCOM Configuration Language
MICS Model Implementation Conformance Statement
MMF Magneto-Motive Force
MMS Manufacturing Message Specification
MRP Media Redundancy Protocol
MU Merging Unit
MV Measured Value
N Neutral
N/A Not Applicable
N/C A Normally Closed or “break” contact: Often called a “form B” contact.
N/O A Normally Open or “make” contact: Often called a “form A” contact.
NERC North American Reliability Corporation
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
NPS Negative Phase Sequence
NVD Neutral voltage displacement: Equivalent to residual overvoltage protection.
NXT Abbreviation of “Next”: In connection with hotkey menu navigation.
O/C Overcurrent
O/P Output
Opto An Optically coupled logic input. Alternative terminology: binary input.
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCT Protective Conductor Terminal (Ground)
PDC Phasor Data Concentrator
Ph Phase - used in distance settings to identify settings that relate to phase-phase faults.
PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PMU Phasor Measurement Unit
PNG Portable Network Graphics – a file format for a computer graphic
Pol Polarize - typically the polarizing voltage used in making directional decisions.
POR Permissive Over Reach
POST Power On Self Test
POTT Permissive Over Reach Transfer Tripping
PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol
PSB Power Swing Blocking, to detect power swing/out of step functions (ANSI 78).
Programmable Scheme Logic: The part of the relay’s logic configuration that can be
PSL
modified by the user, using the graphical editor within S1 Studio software.
PT Power Transformer
P446/EN/TM/E 17-7
Term Description
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PUR A Permissive UnderReaching transfer trip scheme (alternative terminology: PUTT).
Q Quantity defined as per unit value
R Resistance
RBAC Role Based Access Control
RCA Relay Characteristic Angle - The center of the directional characteristic.
REB Redundant Ethernet Board
REF Restricted Earth Fault
Rev. Indicates an element responding to a flow in the “reverse” direction
Root mean square. The equivalent a.c. current: Taking into account the fundamental, plus
RMS / rms
the equivalent heating effect of any harmonics.
RP Rear Port: The communication ports on the rear of the IED
RS232 A common serial communications standard defined by the EIA
RS485 A common serial communications standard defined by the EIA (multi-drop)
RST or Rst Reset generally used in the context of reset functions in circuit breaker control.
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
Rx Receive: Typically used to indicate a communication transmit line/pin.
SBS Straight Binary Second
SC Synch-Check or system Synchronism Check.
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCL Substation Configuration Language
SCU Substation Control Unit
SEF Sensitive Earth Fault
SHP Self Healing Protocol
SIR Source Impedance Ratio
SMV Sampled Measured Values
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SOA Service Oriented Architecture
SOAP Simple Object Access Protocol
SOC Second of Century
SOTF Switch on to Fault protection. Modified protection on manual closure of the circuit breaker.
SP Single pole.
SPAR Single pole auto-reclose.
SPC Single Point Controllable
SPDT Single Pole Dead Time. The dead time used in single pole auto-reclose cycles.
SPS Single Point Status
SQRT Square Root
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SV Sampled Values
SVM Sampled Value Model
TAF Turbine Abnormal Frequency
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
TD Time Dial. The time dial multiplier setting: Applied to inverse-time curves (ANSI/IEEE).
17-8 P446/EN/TM/E
Term Description
TE Unit for case measurements: One inch = 5TE units
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
TICS Technical Issues Conformance Statement
TIFF Tagged Image File Format – a file format for a computer graphic
TLS Transport Layer Security protocol
TMS Time Multiplier Setting: Applied to inverse-time curves (IEC)
TOC Trip On Close (“line check”) protection. Offers SOTF and TOR functionality.
TOR Trip On Reclose protection. Modified protection on autoreclosure of the circuit breaker.
TP Two-Part
TUC Timed UnderCurrent
TVE Total Vector Error
Tx Transmit
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UPCT User Programmable Curve Tool
USB Universal Serial bus
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
V Voltage
VA Phase A voltage: Sometimes L1, or red phase
VB Phase B voltage: Sometimes L2, or yellow phase
VC Phase C voltage: Sometimes L3, or blue phase
VDR Voltage Dependant Resistor
VT Voltage Transformer
VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision: To detect VT input failure.
WAN Wide Area Network
XML Extensible Markup Language
XSD XML Schema Definition
Z S / ZL Source to Line Impedance Ratio
Table 1: Acronyms and abbreviations
P446/EN/TM/E 17-9
3 COMPANY PROPRIETARY TERMS

Symbol Description
Courier Alstom Grid’s proprietary SCADA communications protocol
Metrosil Brand of non-linear resistor produced by M&I Materials Ltd.
MiCOM Alstom Alstom Grid’s brand of protection relays
Table 2: Company-proprietary terms
17-10 P446/EN/TM/E
4 ANSI AND IEC61850 TERMS

ANSI no. IEC61850 Description
PTRC Tripping Mode (1 & 3 pole)
FnkGGIO Function keys
LedGGIO Programmable LEDs
PloGGIO1 Control inputs
∆I/∆V Delta directional comparison
16E Ethernet communication
16S Serial communication
21/21N DisPDIS Distance zones, full-scheme protection
25 AscRSYN Check synchronism
27 VtpPhsPTUV Undervoltage protection
3PAR Three pole auto-reclose.
3PDT Three pole dead time (the dead time used in three pole auto-reclose cycles)
46 Current Transformer supervision
46BC Broken conductor protection
47 Voltage Transformer supervision
49 ThmPTTR Thermal overload protection
50/51/67 OcpPTOC/RDIR Phase overcurrent protection with optional directionality
50BF CbfRBRF Breaker fail protection
50N/51N/ 67N EfdPTOC/RDIR Earth/ground overcurrent with optional directionality
SotfPSOF/
50SOTF/27SOTF Switch-On-To-Fault and trip on reclose
TorPSOF
51N/67N/SEF SenPTOC/RDIR Sensitive earth fault (SEF)
Circuit breaker control - Normally Open (NO): The contact is in the same state as the breaker
52a
primary contacts.
Circuit breaker control - Normally Closed (NC): The contact is in the opposite state as the
52b
breaker primary contacts
59 VtpPhsPTOV Overvoltage protection
59N VtpResPTOV Residual voltage protection (also known as Neutral Displacement)
59R VtpCmpPTOV Remote overvoltage protection
64 SenRefPDIF High Impedance Restricted earth fault (REF)
67/46 NgcPTOC/RDIR Negative sequence overcurrent protection, with optional directionality
67N Directional earth fault (DEF) unit protection
68 PsbRPSB Power swing blocking
78 OstRPSB Out of step
Delta directional comparison - fast channel schemes operating on fault generated superimposed
78DCB/78DCUB
quantities
79 ArcRREC1 Auto-reclose
81O FrqPTOF Overfrequency protection
81R DfpPFRC Rate of change of frequency protection
81U FrqPTUF Underfrequency protection
85 DisPSCH Communication-aided schemes, PUTT, POTT, Blocking, Weak Infeed
87L DifPDIF1 Phase segregated current differential protection
87N DifPDIF2 Neutral current differential protection
P446/EN/TM/E 17-11
ANSI no. IEC61850 Description

87T Feeders with in-zone transformers
CLK IRIG-B time synchronization
CTS Current Transformer supervision (including differential CTS)
DFR RDRE Disturbance Recorder
FL RFLO Fault Locator
MET Measurement of instantaneous values
VTS Voltage transformer supervision
Table 3: ANSI terms
17-12 P446/EN/TM/E
5 UNITS FOR DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

Unit Description
b bit
B Byte
kb Kilobit(s)
kbps Kilobits per second
kB Kilobyte(s)
Mb Megabit(s)
Mbps Megabits per second
MB Megabyte(s)
Gb Gigabit(s)
Gbps Gigabits per second
GB Gigabyte(s)
Tb Terabit(s)
Tbps Terabits per second
TB Terabyte(s)
Table 4: Units for digital communications
P446/EN/TM/E 17-13
6 AMERICAN VS BRITISH ENGLISH TERMINOLOGY

British English American English
…ae… …e…
…ence …ense
…ise …ize
…oe… …e…
…ogue …og
…our …or
…ourite …orite
…que …ck
…re …er
…yse …yze
Aluminium Aluminum
Centre Center
Earth Ground
Fibre Fiber
Ground Earth
Speciality Specialty
Table 5: American vs British English terminology
17-14 P446/EN/TM/E
7 LOGIC SYMBOLS AND TERMS

Symbol Description Units
& Logical “AND”: Used in logic diagrams to show an AND-gate function.
Σ “Sigma”: Used to indicate a summation, such as cumulative current interrupted.
τ “Tau”: Used to indicate a time constant, often associated with thermal characteristics.
δ Angular displacement rad
θ Angular displacement rad
Φ Flux rad
φ Phase shift rad
ω System angular frequency rad
< Less than: Used to indicate an “under” threshold, such as undercurrent (current dropout).
> Greater than: Used to indicate an “over” threshold, such as overcurrent (current overload)
1 Logical “OR”: Used in logic diagrams to show an OR-gate function.
ABC Anti-clockwise phase rotation.
ACB Clock-wise phase rotation.
C Capacitance A
df/dt Rate of Change of Frequency protection Hz/s
df/dt>1 First stage of df/dt protection Hz/s

F<1 First stage of underfrequency protection: Could be labeled 81-U in ANSI terminology. Hz
F>1 First stage of overfrequency protection: Could be labeled 81-O in ANSI terminology. Hz
fmax Minimum required operating frequency Hz
fmin Minimum required operating frequency Hz

fn Nominal operating frequency Hz
I Current A
Current raised to a power: Such as when breaker statistics monitor the square of ruptured current squared (∧
I∧ power = 2).
An
I’f Maximum internal secondary fault current (may also be expressed as a multiple of In) A
I< An undercurrent element: Responds to current dropout. A
I>> Current setting of short circuit element In
I>1 First stage of phase overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51-1 in ANSI terminology. A
I>2 Second stage of phase overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51-2 in ANSI terminology. A
I>3 Third stage of phase overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51-3 in ANSI terminology. A
I>4 Fourth stage of phase overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51-4 in ANSI terminology. A
Earth fault current setting
I0 A
Zero sequence current: Equals one third of the measured neutral/residual current.
I1 Positive sequence current. A
I2 Negative sequence current. A

I2> Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS element). A
I2pol Negative sequence polarizing current. A
P446/EN/TM/E 17-15

IA Phase A current: Might be phase L1, red phase.. or other, in customer terminology. A
IB Phase B current: Might be phase L2, yellow phase.. or other, in customer terminology. A
IC Phase C current: Might be phase L3, blue phase.. or other, in customer terminology. A
Idiff Current setting of biased differential element A
If Maximum secondary through-fault current A
If max Maximum secondary fault current (same for all feeders) A
If max
Maximum secondary contribution from a feeder to an internal fault A
int
If Z1 Maximum secondary phase fault current at Zone 1 reach point A
Ife Maximum secondary through fault earth current A
IfeZ1 Maximum secondary earth fault current at Zone 1 reach point A
Ifn Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 x I> setting (whichever is lowest) A
Ifp Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 x I> setting (whichever is lowest) A
Im Mutual current A
IM64 InterMiCOM64.
IMx InterMiCOM64 bit (x=1 to 16)

Current transformer nominal secondary current.
In The rated nominal current of the relay: Software selectable as 1 amp or 5 amp to match the line CT input.
A
IN Neutral current, or residual current: This results from an internal summation of the three measured phase currents. A
IN> A neutral (residual) overcurrent element: Detects earth/ground faults. A
IN>1 First stage of ground overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51N-1 in ANSI terminology. A
IN>2 Second stage of ground overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51N-2 in ANSI terminology. A
Iref Reference current of P63x calculated from the reference power and nominal voltage A
IRm2 Second knee-point bias current threshold setting of P63x biased differential element A
Is Value of stabilizing current A

IS1 Differential current pick-up setting of biased differential element A
IS2 Bias current threshold setting of biased differential element A
ISEF> Sensitive earth fault overcurrent element. A

Isn Rated secondary current (I secondary nominal) A
Isp Stage 2 and 3 setting A
Ist Motor start up current referred to CT secondary side A
K Dimensioning factor
K1 Lower bias slope setting of biased differential element %
K2 Higher bias slope setting of biased differential element %

Ke Dimensioning factor for earth fault
km Distance in kilometers
Kmax Maximum dimensioning factor
Krpa Dimensioning factor for reach point accuracy
Ks Dimensioning factor dependent upon through fault current
17-16 P446/EN/TM/E

Kssc Short circuit current coefficient or ALF
Kt Dimensioning factor dependent upon operating time

The mutual compensation factor (mutual compensation of distance elements and fault locator for parallel line
kZm coupling effects).
kZN The residual compensation factor: Ensuring correct reach for ground distance elements.
L Inductance A
m1 Lower bias slope setting of P63x biased differential element None
m2 Higher bias slope setting of P63x biased differential element None
mi Distance in miles.
N Indication of “Neutral” involvement in a fault: i.e. a ground (earth) fault.

Used in IEC terminology to identify the primary CT terminal polarity: Replace by a dot when using ANSI
P1 standards.
P2 Used in IEC terminology to identify the primary CT terminal polarity: The non-dot terminal.
Pn Rotating plant rated single phase power W
PN> Wattmetric earth fault protection: Calculated using residual voltage and current quantities.
R Resistance Ω
R Gnd. A distance zone resistive reach setting: Used for ground (earth) faults.
R Ph A distance zone resistive reach setting used for Phase-Phase faults.
Rct Secondary winding resistance Ω

Rl Resistance of single lead from relay to current transformer Ω
Rr Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current transformer Ω
Rrn Resistance of relay neutral current input Ω
Rrp Resistance of relay phase current input Ω
Rs Value of stabilizing resistor Ω
Rx Receive: typically used to indicate a communication receive line/pin.
Used in IEC terminology to identify the secondary CT terminal polarity: Replace by a dot when using ANSI
S1 standards.
S2 Used in IEC terminology to identify the secondary CT terminal polarity: The non-dot terminal.
t A time delay.
t’ Duration of first current flow during auto-reclose cycle s
T1 Primary system time constant s
tfr Auto-reclose dead time s
tIdiff Current differential operating time s
Ts Secondary system time constant s
Tx Transmit: typically used to indicate a communication transmit line/pin.

V Voltage. V
V< An undervoltage element. V
V<1 First stage of undervoltage protection: Could be labeled 27-1 in ANSI terminology. V
V<2 Second stage of undervoltage protection: Could be labeled 27-2 in ANSI terminology. V
V> An overvoltage element. V
P446/EN/TM/E 17-17

V>1 First stage of overvoltage protection: Could be labeled 59-1 in ANSI terminology. V
V>2 Second stage of overvoltage protection: Could be labeled 59-2 in ANSI terminology. V
V0 Zero sequence voltage: Equals one third of the measured neutral/residual voltage. V
V1 Positive sequence voltage. V
V2 Negative sequence voltage. V
V2pol Negative sequence polarizing voltage. V
VA Phase A voltage: Might be phase L1, red phase.. or other, in customer terminology. V
VB Phase B voltage: Might be phase L2, yellow phase.. or other, in customer terminology. V
VC Phase C voltage: Might be phase L3, blue phase.. or other, in customer terminology. V
Vf Theoretical maximum voltage produced if CT saturation did not occur V
Vin Input voltage e.g. to an opto-input V

Required CT knee-point voltage.
Vk IEC knee point voltage of a current transformer.
V
VN Neutral voltage displacement, or residual voltage. V
Vn Nominal voltage V
Vn The rated nominal voltage of the relay: To match the line VT input. V
VN>1 First stage of residual (neutral) overvoltage protection. V

VN>2 Second stage of residual (neutral) overvoltage protection. V
Vres. Neutral voltage displacement, or residual voltage. V
Vs Value of stabilizing voltage V
Vx An auxiliary supply voltage: Typically the substation battery voltage used to power the relay. V
WI Weak Infeed logic used in teleprotection schemes.
X Reactance None
X/R Primary system reactance/resistance ratio None
Xe/Re Primary system reactance/resistance ratio for earth loop None
Xt Transformer reactance (per unit) p.u.
Y Admittance p.u.
Z Impedance p.u.
Z0 Zero sequence impedance.
Z1 Positive sequence impedance.
Z1 Zone 1 distance protection.
Z1X Reach-stepped Zone 1X, for zone extension schemes used with auto-reclosure.
Z2 Negative sequence impedance.
Z2 Zone 2 distance protection.

ZP Programmable distance zone that can be set forward or reverse looking.
Zs Used to signify the source impedance behind the relay location.
Φal Accuracy limit flux Wb
Ψr Remanent flux Wb
17-18 P446/EN/TM/E

Ψs Saturation flux Wb
Table 6: Logic Symbols and Terms
P446/EN/TM/E 17-19
8 LOGIC TIMERS
Logic
Explanation Time chart
symbols
INPUT
t
t OUTPUT
Delay on pick-up timer, t
0 INPUT
t
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
0 t
Delay on drop-off timer, t INPUT
t
OUTPUT
t
INPUT
t1 t2
t1 OUTPUT
Delay on pick-up/drop-off timer
t2 INPUT
t1 t2
OUTPUT
INPUT
t
OUTPUT
Pulse timer
t
INPUT
t
OUTPUT
INPUT
Pulse pick-up falling edge t
t OUTPUT
INPUT
Pulse pick-up raising edge t
t OUTPUT
17-20 P446/EN/TM/E
Logic
Explanation Time chart
symbols
INPUT
Latching Latch
OUTPUT
INPUT
Dwell t
OUTPUT
Dwell timer
Timer
INPUT
t
OUTPUT
Straight (non latching): INPUT

Straight
Hold value until input reset signal
OUTPUT
Table 7: Logic Timers
P446/EN/TM/E 17-21
9 LOGIC GATES
Figure 1: Logic Gates
17-22 P446/EN/TM/E
MiCOMho P446 18 Wiring Diagrams
WIRING DIAGRAMS
CHAPTER 18
P446/EN/TM/E 18-1
18 Wiring Diagrams MiCOMho P446
The following diagrams are for indication only. Please refer to the wiring diagrams supplied with the IED.
18-2 P446/EN/TM/E
1 P446 EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
P1727ENb
Figure 1: P446 second rear port connection
P446/EN/TM/E 18-3
10P44600_1
Figure 2: P446 Common external connection diagram - power systems connection
18-4 P446/EN/TM/E
10P44601_1
Figure 3: P446 Model B external connection diagram - 24 inputs, 32 standard outputs
P446/EN/TM/E 18-5
10P44601_2
Figure 4: P446 Model B external connection diagram - 24 inputs, 32 standard outputs
18-6 P446/EN/TM/E
10P44602_1
Figure 5: P446 Model C external connection diagram - 24 inputs, 8 standard outputs & 12 high-
break outputs
P446/EN/TM/E 18-7
10P44602_2
IN
Figure 6: P446 Model C external connection diagram - 24 inputs, 8 standard outputs & 12 high-
break outputs
18-8 P446/EN/TM/E
10P44603_1
Figure 7: P446 Model D external connection diagram - 24 inputs, 16 standard outputs & 8 high-
break outputs
P446/EN/TM/E 18-9
10P44603_2
Figure 8: P446 Model D external connection diagram - 24 inputs, 16 standard outputs & 8 high-
break outputs
18-10 P446/EN/TM/E
Appendix A Commissioning Record
COMMISSIONING RECORD
APPENDIX A
Appendix A-1
Appendix A-2
1 TEST RECORD
1.1 Engineer Details

Item Value
Engineer's name
Commissioning date
Station
Circuit
System Frequency
VT Ratio
CT Ratio
1.2 Front Plate Information

Item Value
Device
Model number
Serial number
Rated current In
Rated voltage Vn
Auxiliary voltage Vx
1.3 Test Equipment

This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices that have been
commissioned using equipment that is later found to be defective or incompatible, but may not be
detected during the commissioning procedure.
Test Equipment Model Serial Number
Injection test set
Phase angle meter
Optical power meter
Phase rotation meter
Insulation tester
Setting software:
IED configurator software
1.4 Tests
The following tests are to be carried out with the product de-energized
Test Result
Was the IED damaged on visual inspection? Yes No
Is the rating information correct for installation? Yes No
Appendix A-3
Test Result
Is the case earth installed? Yes No
Are the current transformer shorting contacts closed? Yes No Not checked
Is the insulation resistance >100 M at 500 V DC? Yes No Not tested
Wiring checked against diagram? Yes No
Test block connections checked? Yes No N/A
Watchdog terminals 11 and 12 contacts closed? Yes No
Watchdog terminals 13 and 14 contacts open? Yes No
Measured auxiliary supply V AC DC
The following tests are to be carried out with the product energized
General Tests Result
Watchdog terminals 11 and 12 contact open? Yes No
Watchdog terminals 13 and 14 contact closed? Yes No
LCD contrast setting used
Clock set to local time? Yes No
Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? Yes No
Alarm (yellow) LED working? Yes No
Out of service (yellow) LED working? Yes No
All 18 programmable LEDs working? Yes No
Field supply voltage measured between terminals 8 and 9 V DC
All opto-inputs working? Yes No
All output relays working? Yes No
Communications Result
Courier
DNP3.0
SCADA Communication standard
IEC61850
IEC60870-5-103
Communications established? Yes No
Protocol converter tested? Yes No N/A
Current Inputs Result

Displayed current Primary Secondary
Phase CT ratio N/A
Input CT Applied Value Displayed Value
IA A A
IB A A
IC A A
ISEF A N/A A N/A
Voltage Inputs Result

Voltage inputs
Appendix A-4
Voltage Inputs Result

Primary*
Displayed voltage
Secondary*
Main VT ratio N/A
Input VT Applied Value Displayed value
VAN V V
VBN V V
VCN V V
Overcurrent Checks Result

Directional
Overcurrent type (set in cell [>1 Direction])
Non-directional
Applied voltage V N/A
Applied current A
Expected operating time s
Measured operating time s
On-load checks Result

Test wiring removed? Yes No
Voltage inputs and phase rotation OK? Yes No
Current inputs and polarities OK? Yes No
On-load test performed? Yes No
(If No, give reason why) …
Relay IED is correctly directionalized? Yes No N/A
Final Checks Result

All test equipment, leads, shorts and test blocks removed
Yes No
safely?
Ethernet connected? Yes No N/A
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes No N/A
All commissioning tests disabled? Yes No
Circuit breaker operations counter reset? Yes No N/A
Current counters reset? Yes No N/A
Event records reset? Yes No
Fault records reset? Yes No
Disturbance records reset? Yes No
Alarms reset? Yes No
LEDs reset? Yes No
Secondary front cover replaced? Yes No N/A
Appendix A-5
Appendix A-6
Appendix B P59x Commissioning
Instructions
P59X COMMISSIONING
INSTRUCTIONS
APPENDIX B
Appendix B-1
Instructions
Appendix B-2 P59x_EN_CommissioningInstructions

Instructions
1 OVERVIEW
Read all relevant safety instructions before starting commissioning process
This Appendix provides instructions on how to commission the P59x devices (P591, P592, P593)
1 Overview
2 Commissioning the P59x unit
2.1 P59x visual Inspection
2.2 P59x Insulation Tests
2.3 P59x External Wiring
2.4 P59x Auxiliary Supply
2.5 P59x LEDs
2.6 Optical Received Signal Level
2.7 Loopback
2.8 Optical Transmitter Signal Level
2.9 Optical Signal Optical Received from P59x
Appendix B-3
Instructions
2 COMMISSIONING THE P59X UNIT
2.1 P59x visual Inspection

1. Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
2. Check the rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the unit to
ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
3. Ensure that the case earthing connection, top left-hand corner at the rear of the case, is used
to connect the unit to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
2.2 P59x Insulation Tests

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they haven’t been performed during installation.
1. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless
insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500 V.
2. The auxiliary DC supply terminals should be temporarily connected together.
3. Measure the insulation resistance. It should be greater than 100 MΩ at 500 V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to
the P59x.
Note: The V.35 circuits and the X.21 circuits of the P592 and P593 respectively are isolated from all other
circuits but are electrically connected to the outer case. The circuits must therefore not be insulation
or impulse tested to the case.
2.3 P59x External Wiring

Check that the external wiring accords with the connection diagram or scheme diagram. The
connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the
P59x. The connection diagram should have been included in the P59x documentation.
Warning: Ensure that the DC supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
2.4 P59x Auxiliary Supply

P591 units operate from a DC auxiliary supply within the range of 19 V to 65 V for a 24 - 48 V version
and 87.5 V to 300 V for a 110 - 250 V version.
P592 and P593 units operate from a DC auxiliary supply within the range of 19 V to 300 V.
Without energizing the unit measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
The units are designed to withstand an AC ripple component of up to 12% of the normal DC auxiliary
supply. However, in all cases the peak value of the DC supply must not exceed the maximum
specified operating limit.

Instructions
Warning: Do not energize the unit using the battery charger with the battery
disconnected as this can irreparably damage the unit’s power supply
circuitry.
2.5 P59x LEDs

On power up the green ‘SUPPLY HEALTHY’ LED should have illuminated and stayed on, indicating
that the unit is healthy.
P592 only
The four red LED’s can be tested by appropriate setting of the DIL switches on the unit’s front plate.
Set the data rate switch according to the communication channel bandwidth available. Set all other
switches to 0. To illuminate the ‘DSR OFF’ and ‘CTS OFF’ LED’s, disconnect the V.35 connector from
the rear of the P592 and set the ‘DSR’ and ‘CTS’ switches to ‘0’. The ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ and ‘V.35
LOOPBACK’ LEDs can be illuminated by setting their corresponding switches to ‘1’.
Once operation of the LED’s has been established set all DIL switches, except for the ‘OPTO
LOOPBACK’ switch, to ‘0’ and reconnect the V.35 connector.
P593 only
Set the ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch to ‘ON’. The green ‘CLOCK’ and red ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ LED’s
should illuminate. Reset the ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch to the ‘OFF’ position.
Set the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch to ‘ON’. The red ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ LED should illuminate. Do
not reset the “OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch as it is required in this position for the next test.
2.6 Optical Received Signal Level

1. With an optical cable connected to the P54x optical transmitter, disconnect the other end of
the cable from the P59x receiver (Rx) and use an optical power meter to measure the received
signal strength. The value should be in the range -16.8 dBm to -25.4 dBm.
2. Record the measured value and replace the connector to the P59x receiver.
2.7 Loopback
P591
It is necessary to loop the transmitted electrical G.703 signal presented on terminals 3 and 4 of the
P591 to the received signal presented on terminals 7 and 8.
If test links have been designed into the scheme to facilitate this they should be used. Alternatively,
remove any external wiring from terminals 3, 4, 7 and 8 at the rear of each P591 unit. Loopback the
G.703 signals on each unit by connecting a wire link between terminals 3 and 7, and a second wire
between terminals 4 and 8.
P592
With the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch in the ‘1’ position, the receive and transmit optical ports are
connected together. This allows the optical fibre communications between the IED and the P592 to be
tested, but not the internal circuitry of the P592 itself.
P593
With the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch in the ‘1’ position, the receive and transmit optical ports are
connected together. This allows the optical fibre communications between the IED and the P592 to be
tested, but not the internal circuitry of the P592 itself.
Appendix B-5
Instructions
Set the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch to ‘OFF’ and ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch to ‘ON’ respectively. With
the ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch in this position the ‘Receive Data’ and ‘Transmit Data’ lines of the X.21
communication interface are connected together. This allows the optical fibre communications
between the IED and the P593, and the internal circuitry of the P593 itself to be tested.
2.8 Optical Transmitter Signal Level

1. Using an appropriate fibre-optic cable, connect the optical transmitter (Tx) to an optical power
meter.
2. Check that the average power transmitted is within the range -16.8 dBm to -22.8 dBm.
3. Record the transmit power level.
4. Connect the appropriate optical fibre to connect the P591 transmitter to the IED's optical
receiver
5. Return to the IED
2.9 Optical Signal Optical Received from P59x

1. Disconnect the fibre from the IED's optical receiver that connects to the optical transmitter of
the P59x and measure the received signal level. The value should be in the range -16.8 dBm
to -25.4 dBm.
2. Record the measurement and then reconnect the fibre to the optical receiver.

Appendix C DDB Signals
DDB SIGNALS
APPENDIX C
Appendix C-1
Appendix C-2
DDB No Text Source Description

0 Relay 1 Output conditioner Assignment of signal to drive output Relay 1
32 Opto 1 Opto Input From opto input 1 - when opto energized
Appendix C-3

56 to 79 Unused Opto Input Unused
80 IM Input 1 InterMiCOM InterMiCOM Input 1 - is driven by a message from the remote line end
88 IM Output 1 PSL InterMiCOM Output 1 - is an output to the remote line end
96 IM64 Ch1 Input 1 IM64 IM64 Ch1 input 1 - is driven by a message from the remote line end
112 IM64 Ch1 Output1 PSL IM64 Ch1 output 1 - mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
Appendix C-4

128 Relay Cond 1 PSL Input to relay 1 output conditioner
Appendix C-5

160 Timer in 1 PSL Input to auxiliary timer 1
176 Timer out 1 Auxiliary Timer Output from auxiliary timer 1
192 Control Input 1 Virtual Input Command Control input 1 - for SCADA and menu commands into PSL
Appendix C-6

220 Control Input 29 Virtual Input Command Control input 29- for SCADA and menu commands into PSL
224 Virtual Input 1 GOOSE Input Command Virtual Input 1 - received from GOOSE message
Appendix C-7

Virtual output 1 - allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via
256 Virtual Output 1 PSL
SCADA protocol output to other devices
Virtual output 10 - allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped
265 Virtual Output10 PSL
via SCADA protocol output to other devices
Appendix C-8

Setting group selection opto inputs have detected an invalid (disabled) settings
288 SG-opto Invalid Group Selection
group
289 Prot'n Disabled Commissioning Test Protection disabled - typically out of service due to test mode
Static test mode option bypasses the delta phase selectors, power swing
290 Static Test Mode Commissioning Test detection and reverts to conventional directional line and cross polarization to
allow testing with test sets that can not simulate a real fault
291 Test Loopback C Diff Loopback test in service (external or internal)

292 Test IM64 C Diff Indication that relay is in test mode
293 VT Fail Alarm VT Supervision VTS indication alarm- failed VT (fuse blow) detected by VT supervision
CT1S indication alarm (CT supervision alarm)

In the cases of two CTs:
294 CT1 Fail Alarm CT Supervision - If standard CTS is used, this indication is ON in case of failure on any of the
CTs
- If Diff CTS is used this indication is ON in case of failure on CT1
CT2S indication alarm (CT supervision alarm)

In the cases of two CTs:
295 CT2 Fail Alarm CT Supervision - If standard CTS is used, this indication is ON in case of failure on any of the
CTs
- If Diff CTS is used this indication is ON in case of failure on CT2
296 Reserved CT Supervision Unused

297 Power Swing Powerswing Blocking Powerswing blocking will block any distance zone selected in the setting file
298 CB1 Fail Alarm CB Fail Circuit breaker 1 fail alarm
This alarm indicates that DDB CB1 I^ Maint (1106) or DDB CB OPs Maint.
299 CB1 Monitor Alm CB Monitoring
(1108) or DDB CB Time Maint. (1110)
This alarm indicates that DDB CB1 I^ Lockout (1107) or DDB CB1 Ops Lock
300 CB1 Mon LO Alarm CB Monitoring
(1109) or DDB CB1 Time lockout (1111)
Appendix C-9
CB1 Status Alarm - set when CB1 status is determined by inputs from BOTH
52A and 52B type auxiliary contacts (setting "CB1 Status Input = 52A&52B-
301 CB1 Status Alm CB Status
xPole), and both inputs are in the same state (both = 0 or both = 1) for time
period => 5sec, indicating a problem with the auxiliary switch mechanism).
CB1 Failed to Trip - alarm set if CB1 does not trip within set Trip Pulse Time
302 CB1 Trip Fail CB Control
when CB1 trip command is issued.
CB1 Failed to Close - alarm set if CB1 fails to close within set Close Pulse Time
303 CB1 Close Fail CB Control
when CB1 close command is issued
ManCB1 Unhealthy - alarm set if CB1 remains "unhealthy" for CB Control set
304 ManCB1 Unhealthy CB Control time "CB Healthy Time" when operator controlled CB1 close sequence is
initiated. (Please see description for CB Control setting "CB Healthy Time").
NoCS CB1ManClose - alarm set if selected system check conditions for manual
closing CB1 remain unsatisfied for CB Control set time "Check Sync Time" when
305 NoCS CB1ManClose CB Control
operator controlled CB1 close sequence is initiated. (Please see description for
CB Control setting "Check Sync Time").
306 CB1 AR Lockout Autoreclose CB1 AR Lockout - alarm set when CB1 autoreclose is locked out.
AR CB1 Unhealthy - alarm set if CB1 remains "unhealthy" for Autoreclose set
307 AR CB1 Unhealthy Autoreclose time "CB Healthy Time" when CB1 close sequence is initiated by autoreclose
function. (Please see description for Autoreclose setting "CB Healthy Time").
AR CB1 No C/S - alarm set if selected system check conditions for autoreclosing
CB1 remain unsatisfied for Autoreclose set time "Check Sync Time" when CB1
308 AR CB1 No C/S Autoreclose
close sequence is initiated by autoreclose function. (Please see description for
Autoreclose setting "Check Sync Time").
309 Reserved Check sync Unused

310 Reserved C Diff Unused
If a differential protection communication path has remained failed for a period
311 Signalling Fail C Diff
which is longer than the “Comms Fail Timer”, this alarm is ON
It indicates that communications between relays are completely lost and
314 IM64 SchemeFail
therefore IM64 does not work
It will appear in case of at least one of the following: CH1 (or CH2) loss of signal,
315 IEEE C37.94 Fail C Diff
CH1 (or CH2) PATH_YELLOW or CH1 (or CH2) BAD_RX_N
Aided channel scheme 1 - channel out of service indication, indicating channel
317 Aid 1 Chan Fail PSL
failure
Aided channel scheme 2 - channel out of service indication, indicating channel

318 Aid 2 Chan Fail PSL
failure
319 F out of Range Frequency Tracking Frequency out of range alarm
320 CB2 Fail Alarm CB2 Fail Circuit breaker 2 fail alarm
This alarm indicates that DDB CB2 I ^ Maint. Alarm (1113) or DDB CB2 OPs
321 CB2 Monitor Alm CB Monitoring
Maint. (1115) or DDB CB2 Time Maint. (1117)
This alarm indicates that DDB CB2 I ^ Lockout Alarm (1114) or DDB CB Ops
322 CB2 Mon LO Alarm CB Monitoring
Lock (1116) or DDB CB Time lockout (1118)
CB2 Status Alarm - set when CB2 status is determined by inputs from BOTH
52A and 52B type auxiliary contacts (setting "CB2 Status Input = 52A&52B-
323 CB2 Status Alm CB Status
xPole), and both inputs are in the same state (both = 0 or both = 1) for time
period => 5sec, indicating a problem with the auxiliary switch mechanism).
CB2 Failed to Trip - alarm set if CB2 does not trip within set Trip Pulse Time
324 CB2 Trip Fail CB2 Control
when CB2 trip command is issued.
Appendix C-10

CB2 Failed to Close - alarm set if CB2 fails to close within set Close Pulse Time
325 CB2 Close Fail CB2 Control
when CB2 close command is issued
ManCB2 Unhealthy - alarm set if CB2 remains "unhealthy" for CB Control set
326 ManCB2 Unhealthy CB2 Control time "CB Healthy Time" when operator controlled CB2 close sequence is
initiated. (Please see description for CB Control setting "CB Healthy Time").
NoCS CB2ManClose - alarm set if selected system check conditions for manual
closing CB2 remain unsatisfied for CB Control set time "Check Sync Time" when
327 NoCS CB2ManClose CB2 Control
operator controlled CB2 close sequence is initiated. (Please see description for
CB Control setting "
328 CB2 AR Lockout Autoreclose CB2 AR Lockout - alarm set when CB2 autoreclose is locked out.
AR CB2 Unhealthy - alarm set if CB2 remains "unhealthy" for Autoreclose set
329 AR CB2 Unhealthy Autoreclose time "CB Healthy Time" when CB2 close sequence is initiated by autoreclose
function. (Please see description for Autoreclose setting "CB Healthy Time").
AR CB2 No C/S - alarm set if selected system check conditions for autoreclosing
CB2 remain unsatisfied for Autoreclose set time "Check Sync Time" when CB2
330 AR CB2 No C/S Autoreclose
close sequence is initiated by autoreclose function. (Please see description for
Autoreclose setting
331 Invalid AR Mode Autoreclose AR Mode selected via optos is not supported
333 InValid Mesg Fmt C Diff Invalid Message Format
Indicates a failure with the Co-Processor, this will affect the protections that run
334 Main Prot. Fail Co-processor interface on this board, eg. current differential, phase comparision, distance and DEF
Protections.

This is an alarm which indicates that C37.94 comms have been changed to
337 Comms Changed C Diff
standard or vice versa and relay must be rebooted
338 Max Prop. Alarm C Diff Maximum Propagation Delay Alarm
339 Reserved PSL Unused
344 SR User Alarm 1 PSL Triggers user alarm 1 message to be alarmed on LCD display (self-resetting)
348 MR User Alarm 5 PSL Triggers user alarm 5 message to be alarmed on LCD display (manual-resetting)
Front panel miniature battery failure - either battery removed from slot, or low
352 Battery Fail Self monitoring
voltage
353 Field Volts Fail Self monitoring 48V field voltage failure
354 Rear Comm 2 Fail Self monitoring Comm2 hardware failure - second rear communications board
355 GOOSE IED Absent Ethernet Interface The IED is not subscribed to a publishing IED in the current scheme
356 NIC Not Fitted Ethernet Interface Ethernet board not fitted
357 NIC No Response Ethernet Interface Ethernet board not responding
Appendix C-11

358 NIC Fatal Error Ethernet Interface Ethernet board unrecoverable error
359 NIC Soft. Reload Ethernet Interface Ethernet problem
360 Bad TCP/IP Cfg. Ethernet Interface Ethernet problem
361 Bad OSI Config. Ethernet Interface Ethernet problem
362 NIC Link Fail Ethernet Interface Ethernet link lost
363 NIC SW Mis-Match Ethernet Interface Ethernet board software not compatible with main CPU
364 IP Addr Conflict Ethernet Interface The IP address of the IED is already used by another IED
365 IM Loopback InterMiCOM EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM indication that Loopback testing is in progress
EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM Message Failure alarm. Setting that is used to alarm

for poor channel quality. If during the fixed 1.6 s rolling window the ratio of
366 IM Message Fail InterMiCOM invalid messages to the total number of messages that should be received
(based upon the ‘Baud Rate’ setting) exceeds the above threshold, a ‘Message
Fail’ alarm will be issued
367 IM Data CD Fail InterMiCOM EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM Data Channel Detect Fail i.e. modem failure
EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM Channel Failure alarm. No messages were received
368 IM Channel Fail InterMiCOM
during the alarm time setting
This is an alarm that is ON if any setting fail during the setting changing process.
369 Backup Setting Self monitoring
If this happens, the relay will use the last known good setting
370 Reserved Self monitoring Bad DNP Settings
371 Backup Usr Curve Self monitoring Backup Curve
372 Reserved Platform Alarm 21
384 Block Zone 1 Gnd PSL Zone 1 ground basic scheme blocking
385 Block Zone 1 Phs PSL Zone 1 phase basic scheme blocking
390 Block Zone P Gnd PSL Zone P ground basic scheme blocking
391 Block Zone P Phs PSL Zone P phase basic scheme blocking
394 Aid1 InhibitDist PSL Block distance aided scheme 1 tripping
395 Aid1 Inhibit DEF PSL Block DEF aided scheme 1 tripping
396 Aid1 Inhib Delta PSL Block Delta directional aided scheme 1 tripping
397 Aid2 InhibitDist PSL Block distance aided scheme 2 tripping
398 Aid2 Inhibit DEF PSL Block DEF aided scheme 2 tripping
Appendix C-12

399 Aid2 Inhibit DIR PSL Block Delta directional aided scheme 2 tripping
400 Time Synch PSL Time synchronism by opto pulse
401 I>1 Timer Block PSL Block phase overcurrent stage 1 time delayed trip
405 IN>1 Timer Block PSL Block standby earth fault stage 1 time delayed trip
409 ISEF>1 Timer Blk PSL Block sensitive earth fault stage 1 time delayed trip
413 Unused PSL Unused
414 V<1 Timer Block PSL Block phase undervoltage stage 1 time delayed trip
415 V<2 Timer Block PSL Block phase undervoltage stage 2 time delayed trip
416 V>1 Timer Block PSL Block phase overvoltage stage 1 time delayed trip
417 V>2 Timer Block PSL Block phase overvoltage stage 2 time delayed trip
418 VN>1 Timer Blk PSL Block residual overvoltage stage 1 time delayed trip
419 VN>2 Timer Blk PSL Block residual overvoltage stage 2 time delayed trip
420 CB1Aux 3ph(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB1 closed) CB auxiliary input (3 phase)
421 CB1Aux A (52-A) PSL 52-A (CB1 A phase closed) CB auxiliary
422 CB1Aux B (52-A) PSL 52-A (CB1 B phase closed) CB auxiliary
423 CB1Aux C (52-A) PSL 52-A (CB1 C phase closed) CB auxiliary
424 CB1Aux 3ph(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB1 open) CB2 auxiliary input (3 phase)
425 CB1Aux A (52-B) PSL 52-B (CB1 A phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
426 CB1Aux B (52-B) PSL 52-B (CB1 B phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
427 CB1Aux C (52-B) PSL 52-B (CB1 C phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
428 CB2 Aux3ph(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB2 closed) CB2 auxiliary input (3 phase)
429 CB2 Aux A(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB2 A phase closed) CB auxiliary
430 CB2 Aux B(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB2 B phase closed) CB2 auxiliary
431 CB2 Aux C(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB2 C phase closed)CB2 auxiliary
432 CB2 Aux3ph(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB2 open) CB2 auxiliary input (3 phase)
433 CB2 Aux A(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB2 A phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
434 CB2 Aux B(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB2 B phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
435 CB2 Aux C(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB2 C phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
Circuit breaker healthy (input to auto-recloser - that the CB1 has enough energy
436 CB1 Healthy PSL
to allow re-closing)
Circuit breaker healthy (input to auto-recloser - that the CB2 has enough energy
437 CB2 Healthy PSL
to allow re-closing)
VT supervision input - signal from external miniature circuit breaker showing
438 MCB/VTS PSL
MCB tripped
439 Init Trip CB1 PSL Initiate tripping of circuit breaker 1 from a manual command
440 Init Close CB1 PSL Initiate closing of circuit breaker 1 from a manual command
441 Init Trip CB2 PSL Initiate tripping of circuit breaker 2 from a manual command
442 Init Close CB2 PSL Initiate closing of circuit breaker 2 from a manual command
Appendix C-13

Reset Manual CB Close Timer Delay (stop & reset Manual Close Delay time for
443 Rst CB1 CloseDly PSL
closing CB1).
444 Reset Relays/LED PSL Reset latched relays & LEDs
445 Reset Thermal PSL Reset thermal state to 0%
446 Rst CB1 Lockout PSL Manual control to reset auto-recloser from CB1 lockout
447 Rst CB1 Data PSL Reset CB1 Maintenance values
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. External signal to force CB1
448 Block CB1 AR PSL
autoreclose to lockout.
Pole discrepancy (from external detector) - input used to force a 3 pole trip on
451 Pole Discrep.CB1 PSL
CB1.
452 Loopback Mode PSL To enable loopback mode via opto input
453 Unused Unused
454 Stub Bus Enabled To enable stub bus protection, requires setting to enable feature.
455 to 457 Unused Unused
458 Inhibit WI PSL Inhibit weak infeed aided scheme logic
459 Test Mode PSL Commissioning tests - automatically places relay in test mode
For IEC-870-5-103 protocol only, used for "Command Blocking" (relay ignores
460 103 CommandBlock PSL
SCADA commands)
For IEC-870-5-103 protocol only, used for "Monitor Blocking" (relay is quiet -
461 103 MonitorBlock PSL
issues no messages via SCADA port)
462 Unused Unused
463 Inhibit I>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 overcurrent protection
467 Inhibit IN>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 earth fault protection
471 Inhibit V<1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 undervoltage protection
472 Inhibit V<2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 undervoltage protection
473 Inhibit V>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 overvoltage protection
474 Inhibit V>2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 overvoltage protection
475 Inhibit VN>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 residual overvoltage protection
476 Inhibit VN>2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 residual overvoltage protection
478 Inhibit Thermal PSL Inhibit thermal overload protection
Inhibit circuit breaker state monitoring (no alarm for defective/stuck auxiliary
479 InhibitCB Status PSL
contact)
480 Inhibit CB Fail PSL Inhibit circuit breaker fail protection

481 Inh Broken Line PSL Inhibit Broken conductor protection
482 Inhibit VTS PSL Inhibit VT supervision (including turn OF MCB’s) via PSL
483 Inhibit CTS PSL Inhibit CT supervision (both differential and standard CTS) via PSL
484 InhibitChecksync PSL Inhibit checksync. (Both stages and for each CB)
485 Inhibit TOR PSL Inhibit trip on reclose (TOR)
Appendix C-14

486 Inhibit SOTF PSL Inhibit switch onto fault (SOTF)
To enable SOTF logic by an external pulse. When this input is energized by en
488 Set SOTF PSL
external pulse, SOTF becomes enabled during “SOTF Pulse” time setting
This signal is to reset the Z1X reach back to Z1 reach in Z1 extension scheme.
489 AR Reset Z1 EXT Zone 1 Extension Scheme
DDB to be mapped in PSL from either internal or external AR
Reset zone Z1X back to Z1 reach using logic input (i.e. case when external AR
490 Reset Zone 1 Ext PSL
and Z1 extension scheme are used)
491 Inhibit LoL PSL Inhibit Loss of Load scheme function
Aided 1 channel out of service signal (COS) or Loss of Guard Signal (LGS) in
492 Aided 1 COS/LGS PSL distance unblocking schemes. This signal is normally driven from an opto input
on conventional channels or from InterMiCOM
Aided channel 1 - external signal received, for input to distance fixed scheme
493 Aided1 Scheme Rx PSL
logic
494 Aided 1 Receive Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 1 - internal signal received generated in the signal receive logic
495 Unused Unused
496 Aid1 Block Send PSL Prevent sending by customized logic - aided scheme 1
497 Aid1 Custom Send PSL Programmable send logic for special customized scheme (aided channel 1)
498 Aided 1 Send Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 1 send - internal send signal generated in signal send logic
When using a custom programmable aided scheme 1, the user is able to include
499 Aid1 Custom T In PSL a current reversal guard timer. Energizing this DDB will additionally start this
timer, from PSL
When using customized aided scheme 1, this signal is used to indicate any
additional condition that should be treated as permission for an aided trip (for
500 Aid1 CustomT Out Aided Scheme Logic
example a permissive signal received could be connected, or a blocking signal
could be inverted and then connected)
Aided scheme 1 trip enable - this is a permissive signal used to accelerate zone
501 Aid1 Trip Enable Aided Scheme Logic 2, or a blocking signal which has been inverted. It is a signal output, part-way
through the internal fixed logic of aided schemes
502 Aid1 Custom Trip PSL Aid1 custom trip enable

503 Aid 1 Dist Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 distance trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
Aided Scheme 1 Delta Directional Trip command (output from Aided tripping
504 Aid 1 Delta Trip Aided Scheme Logic
logic)
505 Aid 1 DEF Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 DEF trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
Aided 2 channel out of service signal (COS) or Loss of Guard Signal (LGS) in
506 Aided 2 COS/LGS PSL distance unblocking schemes. This signal is normally driven from an opto input
on conventional channels or from InterMiCOM
Aided channel 2 - external signal received, for input to distance fixed scheme
507 Aided2 Scheme Rx PSL
logic
508 Aided 2 Receive Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 2 - internal signal received generated in the signal receive logic
509 RP1 Read Only RP1 Read Only Enables RP1 Read Only
510 RP2 Read Only RP2 Read Only Enables RP2 Read Only
511 NIC Read Only NIC Read Only Enables NIC Read Only
512 Aid2 Block Send PSL Prevent sending by customized logic - aided scheme 2
513 Aid2 Custom Send PSL Programmable send logic for special customized scheme (aided channel 2)
514 Aided 2 Send Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 2 send - internal send signal generated in signal send logic
When using a custom programmable aided scheme 2, the user is able to include
515 Aid2 Custom T In PSL a current reversal guard timer. Energizing this DDB will additionally start this
timer, from PSL
Appendix C-15
When using customized aided scheme 2, this signal is used to indicate any
additional condition that should be treated as permission for an aided trip (for
516 Aid2 CustomT Out Aided Scheme Logic
example a permissive signal received could be connected, or a blocking signal
could be inverted and then connected)
Aided scheme 2 trip enable - this is a permissive signal used to accelerate zone
517 Aid2 Trip Enable Aided Scheme Logic 2, or a blocking signal which has been inverted. It is a signal output, part-way
through the internal fixed logic of aided schemes
518 Aid2 Custom Trip PSL Aid2 custom trip enable

519 Aid 2 Dist Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 distance trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
Aided Scheme 2 Delta Directional Trip command (output from Aided tripping
520 Aid 2 Delta Trip Aided Scheme Logic
logic)
521 Aid 2 DEF Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 DEF trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
Any trip signal - can be used as the trip command in three-pole tripping
522 Any Trip Trip Conversion Logic
applications
Trip signal for CB1 phase A - used as a command to drive CB1 trip A output
523 CB1 Trip OutputA Trip Conversion Logic
contact(s). Takes the output from the internal trip conversion logic
Trip signal for CB1 phase B - used as a command to drive CB1 trip B output
524 CB1 Trip OutputB Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for CB1 phase C - used as a command to drive CB1 trip C output
525 CB1 Trip OutputC Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for CB1 3ph - used as a command to drive CB1 trip 3ph output
526 CB1 Trip 3ph Trip Conversion Logic
2 or 3 phase fault indication - used to flag whether the fault is polyphase.

527 2/3 Ph Fault Trip Conversion Logic Typically used to control auto-reclose logic, where auto-reclosing is allowed only
for single phase faults
3 phase fault indication. Typically used to control auto-reclose logic, where

528 3 Ph Fault Trip Conversion Logic
auto-reclosing is blocked for faults affecting all three phases together
529 CB1 Trip I/P 3Ph PSL CB1 Trip 3 Phase - Input to Trip Latching Logic
A phase trip - input to trip conversion logic. Essential to ensure correct single or
530 Trip Inputs A PSL
three pole trip command results (e.g. converts a 2 pole trip to 3 phase)
B phase trip - input to trip conversion logic. Essential to ensure correct single or
531 Trip Inputs B PSL
C phase trip - input to trip conversion logic. Essential to ensure correct single or
532 Trip Inputs C PSL
External DDB input to host protection trip conversion logic to force 3 Pole
533 Force 3PTrip CB1 PSL
tripping of CB1 for all faults
CB1 Ext Trip3ph - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit
534 CB1 Ext Trip3ph PSL breaker condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) of
CB1
CB1 Ext Trip A - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker
535 CB1 Ext Trip A PSL condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) (A Ph) of
CB1
CB1 Ext Trip B - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker
536 CB1 Ext Trip B PSL condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) (B Ph) of
CB1
CB1 Ext Trip C - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker
537 CB1 Ext Trip C PSL condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) (C Ph) of
CB1
CB2 Ext Trip3ph - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit
538 CB2 Ext Trip3ph PSL breaker condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) of
CB2
Appendix C-16

CB2 Ext Trip A - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker
539 CB2 Ext Trip A condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) (A Ph) of
CB2
CB2 Ext Trip B - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker
540 CB2 Ext Trip B condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) (B Ph) of
CB2
CB2 Ext Trip C - allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker
541 CB2 Ext Trip C condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled) (C Ph) of
CB2
Setting group selector X1 (low bit)-selects SG2 if only DDB 542 signal is active.
542 SG Select x1 SG1 is active if both DDB 542 & DDB 543=0
SG4 is active if both DDB 542 & DDB 543=1
Setting group selector 1X (high bit)-selects SG3 if only DDB 543 is active.SG1 is
543 SG Select 1x active if both DDB 542 & DDB 543=0SG4 is active if both DDB 542 & DDB
543=1
To reset all statistics values cumulated on the relay. If mapped, the input for this
544 Clear Statistics PSL signal could come from a command of the remote end (DDB 1020 - clear stats
cmd -) via IM64
545 Unused Stability test Unused

546 Unused Phase Comparison Unused
550 Inh Pred. OST PSL Block predictive out of step tripping command
551 Pred. OST Out Of Step Tripping Predictive out of step trip
552 Inhibit OST PSL Block out of step tripping command
553 OST Out Of Step Tripping Out of step trip
554 Start Z5 Out Of Step Tripping Positive sequence impedance is detected in Zone 5
555 Start Z6 Out Of Step Tripping Positive sequence impedance is detected in Zone 6
556 CNV ACTIVE Distance Basic Scheme Level detector Current No Volts (CNV) exceeded
557 TOR Trip CNV Distance Basic Scheme Trip on Reclose trip due to Current No Volts (CNV) level detectors
558 SOTF Trip CNV Distance Basic Scheme Switch on to Fault trip due to Current No Volts (CNV) level detectors
559 Fast OV PHA Distance Basic Scheme Phase A Fast Overvoltage level detector used by Current No Volts (CNV)
560 Fast OV PHB Distance Basic Scheme Phase B Fast Overvoltage level detector used by Current No Volts (CNV)
561 Fast OV PHC Distance Basic Scheme Phase C Fast Overvoltage level detector used by Current No Volts (CNV)
562 I2> Inhibit PSL Inhibit Neg Sequence overcurrent protection
563 I2>1 Tmr Blk PSL Block Neg Sequence overcurrent stage 1 time delayed trip
567 I2>1 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent 1st stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
568 I2>2 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent 2nd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
569 I2>3 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent 3rd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
570 I2>4 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent 4th stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
571 I2>1 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent 1st stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
572 I2>2 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent 2nd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
573 I2>3 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent 3rd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
574 I2>4 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent 4th stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
575 Unused Phase comparison Unused
Appendix C-17

Auto-reclose trip test 3 phase. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in
576 AR Trip Test 3Ph Commissioning Test
progress
Auto-reclose trip test A phase. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in

577 AR Trip Test A Commissioning Test
progress
Auto-reclose trip test B phase. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in

578 AR Trip Test B Commissioning Test
progress
Auto-reclose trip test C phase. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in

579 AR Trip Test C Commissioning Test
progress
580 to 590 Unused Autoreclose Unused
591 Stub Bus Trip C Diff Stub bus trip
592 df/dt> Inhibit PSL Inhibit df/dt protection
593 df/dt>1 Tmr Blk PSL Block df/dt Stage 1 Timer
597 df/dt>1 Start df/dt protection df/dt Stage 1 Start
601 df/dt>1 Trip df/dt protection df/dt Stage 1 Trip
605 Start Z7 PSB Positive sequence impedance is detected in Zone 7
606 Start Z8 PSB Positive sequence impedance is detected in Zone 8
607 Slow PSB PSB Slow Power Swing detected
608 Zone 1 Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 Trip
609 Zone 1 A Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 A Phase Trip
610 Zone 1 B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 B Phase Trip
611 Zone 1 C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 C Phase Trip
612 Zone 1 N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 N Trip
623 Zone P Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P Trip
624 Zone P A Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P A Phase Trip
625 Zone P B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P B Phase Trip
626 Zone P C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P C Phase Trip
627 Zone P N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P N Trip
Appendix C-18

632 Zone 4 N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 N Phase Trip
633 Aided 1 Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 trip A phase
634 Aided 1 Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 trip B phase
635 Aided 1 Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 trip C phase
636 Aided 1 Trip N Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 trip involving ground (N)
637 Aid 1 WI Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 Weak Infeed trip phase A
638 Aid 1 WI Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 Weak Infeed trip phase B
639 Aid 1 WI Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 Weak Infeed trip phase C
640 Aid1 Delta Tr3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 Delta directional Trip 3 Phase
641 Aid1 DEF Trip3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 Directional Earth Fault Trip 3 phase
642 Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 Weak Infeed logic trip 3 phase
643 Aided 2 Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 trip A phase
644 Aided 2 Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 trip B phase
645 Aided 2 Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 trip C phase
646 Aided 2 Trip N Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 trip involving ground (N)
647 Aid 2 WI Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 Weak Infeed trip phase A
648 Aid 2 WI Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 Weak Infeed trip phase B
649 Aid 2 WI Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 Weak Infeed trip phase C
650 Aid2 Delta Tr3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 Delta directional Trip 3 Phase
651 Aid2 DEF Trip3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 Directional Earth Fault trip 3 phase
652 Aid2 WI Trip 3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 Weak Infeed logic trip 3 phase
653 Unused Unused
654 Loss ofLoad Trip Loss of Load Logic Loss of Load Trip
655 I>1 Trip Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
656 I>1 Trip A Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
657 I>1 Trip B Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
658 I>1 Trip C Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
659 I>2 Trip Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
660 I>2 Trip A Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
661 I>2 Trip B Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
662 I>2 Trip C Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
663 I>3 Trip Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
664 I>3 Trip A Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
665 I>3 Trip B Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
666 I>3 Trip C Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
667 I>4 Trip Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
668 I>4 Trip A Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
669 I>4 Trip B Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
670 I>4 Trip C Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
671 IN>1 Trip Earth Fault 1st stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
672 IN>2 Trip Earth Fault 2nd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
673 IN>3 Trip Earth Fault 3rd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
674 IN>4 Trip Earth Fault 4th stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
Appendix C-19

675 ISEF>1 Trip SEF 1st stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection trip
676 ISEF>2 Trip SEF 2nd stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection trip
677 ISEF>3 Trip SEF 3rd stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection trip
678 ISEF>4 Trip SEF 4th stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection trip
679 Broken Line Trip Broken Conductor Broken Conductor Trip
680 Thermal Trip Thermal overload Thermal Overload Trip
681 Unused Unused
682 IREF> Trip SEF Restricted earth fault (REF) protection trip
683 V<1 Trip Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, three phase trip
684 V<1 Trip A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1 A/AB phase trip
685 V<1 Trip B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1 B/BC phase trip
686 V<1 Trip C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1 C/CA phase trip
687 V<2 Trip Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, three phase trip
688 V<2 Trip A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2 A/AB phase trip
689 V<2 Trip B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2 B/BC phase trip
690 V<2 Trip C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2 C/CA phase trip
691 V>1 Trip Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, three phase trip
692 V>1 Trip A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 A/AB phase trip
693 V>1 Trip B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 B/BC phase trip
694 V>1 Trip C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 C/CA phase trip
695 V>2 Trip Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, three phase trip
696 V>2 Trip A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2 A/AB phase trip
697 V>2 Trip B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2 B/BC phase trip
698 V>2 Trip C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2 C/CA phase trip
Pole Discrepancy (signal raised when a pole discrepancy state is detected on
699 Pole Discrep.CB1 Pole discrepency
CB1)
700 VN>1 Trip Residual overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 1 trip
701 VN>2 Trip Residual overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 2 trip
702 Fault REC TRIG PSL Trigger for Fault Recorder
703 Unused Neg Sequence overcurrent Unused
704 TOR Trip Zone 1 Trip on Close TOR trip zone 1 (trip on reclose)
705 TOR Trip Zone 2 Trip on Close TOR Trip Zone 2
708 TOR Trip Zone P Trip on Close TOR Trip Zone P
709 SOTF Trip Zone 1 Trip on Close SOTF Trip Zone 1 (switch on to fault)
710 SOTF Trip Zone 2 Trip on Close SOTF Trip Zone 2
713 SOTF Trip Zone P Trip on Close SOTF Trip Zone P
714 to 735 Unused SW Unused
736 Any Start PSL Any Start
741 Zone 1 A Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 A Phase Start
742 Zone 1 B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 B Phase Start
743 Zone 1 C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 C Phase Start
Appendix C-20

744 Zone 1 N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 N Start
748 Zone 2 N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 N start
753 Zone P A Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P A Phase Start
754 Zone P B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P B Phase Start
755 Zone P C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P C Phase Start
756 Zone P N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P N Start
761 I>1 Start Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start 3 phase
762 I>1 Start A Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start phase A
763 I>1 Start B Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start phase B
764 I>1 Start C Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start phase C
765 I>2 Start Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start 3 phase
766 I>2 Start A Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start phase A
767 I>2 Start B Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start phase B
768 I>2 Start C Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start phase C
769 I>3 Start Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start 3 phase
770 I>3 Start A Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start phase A
771 I>3 Start B Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start phase B
772 I>3 Start C Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start phase C
773 I>4 Start Overcurrent 4th stage overcurrent start 3 phase
774 I>4 Start A Overcurrent 4th stage overcurrent start phase A
775 I>4 Start B Overcurrent 4th stage overcurrent start phase B
776 I>4 Start C Overcurrent 4th Stage overcurrent start phase C
777 IN>1 Start Earth Fault 1st stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
778 IN>2 Start Earth Fault 2nd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
779 IN>3 Start Earth Fault 3rd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
780 IN>4 Start Earth Fault 4th stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
781 ISEF>1 Start SW 1st stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) overcurrent start
782 ISEF>2 Start SW 2nd stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) overcurrent start
783 ISEF>3 Start SW 3rd stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) overcurrent start
784 ISEF>4 Start SW 4th stage sensitive earth fault (SEF) overcurrent start
785 Thermal Alarm Thermal overload Thermal Overload Alarm
786 Unused Unused
787 Unused Unused
788 V<1 Start Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, three phase start
789 V<1 Start A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, A/AB phase start
Appendix C-21

790 V<1 Start B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, B/BC phase start
791 V<1 Start C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, C/CA phase start
792 V<2 Start Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, three phase start
793 V<2 Start A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, A/AB phase start
794 V<2 Start B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, B/BC phase start
795 V<2 Start C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, C/CA phase start
796 V>1 Start Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, three phase start
797 V>1 Start A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, A/AB phase start
798 V>1 Start B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, B/BC phase start
799 V>1 Start C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, C/CA phase start
800 V>2 Start Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, three phase start
801 V>2 Start A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, A/AB phase start
802 V>2 Start B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, B/BC phase start
803 V>2 Start C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, C/CA phase start
804 VN>1 Start Residual overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 1 start
805 VN>2 Start Residual overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 2 start
806 to 828 Unused Neg Sequence overcurrent Unused
Phase A undervoltage level detector used in the pole dead logic. Detectors
829 VA< start Poledead
have a settable threshold: default undervoltage pickup 38.1 V-drop off 43.8 V
Phase B undervoltage level detector used in the pole dead logic. Detectors
830 VB< start Poledead
Phase C undervoltage level detector used in the pole dead logic. Detectors
831 VC< start Poledead
VT supervision fast block - blocks elements which would otherwise maloperate

832 VTS Fast Block VT Supervision
immediately a fuse failure event occurs
VT supervision slow block - blocks elements which would otherwise maloperate

833 VTS Slow Block VT Supervision
some time after a fuse failure event occurs
834 CB1 Fail1 Trip CB Fail Three phase output from circuit breaker 1 failure logic, stage 1
Control trip - operator trip instruction to circuit breaker 1, via menu, or SCADA.
838 Control TripCB1 CB Control
(Does not operate for protection element trips)
Control close command to circuit breaker 1. Operates for a manual close

839 Control CloseCB1 CB Control command (menu, SCADA), and additionally is driven by the auto-reclose close
command
Control trip - operator trip instruction to circuit breaker 2, via menu, or SCADA.
840 Control TripCB2 CB Control
(Does not operate for protection element trips)
Control close command to circuit breaker 2. Operates for a manual close

841 Control CloseCB2 CB Control command (menu, SCADA), and additionally is driven by the auto-reclose close
command
Control close in progress CB1 - the relay has been given an instruction to close
842 CB1 Close inProg CB Control the circuit breaker, but the manual close timer delay has not yet finished timing
out
843 Unused Autoreclose Unused
844 CB1 AR 3p InProg Autoreclose CB1 Auto Reclose AR 3 pole in Progress
846 Seq Counter = 0 Autoreclose Sequence Counter = 0
Appendix C-22

851 Seq Counter > 4 Autoreclose Sequence Counter > 4
This signal is set when CB1 has successfully completed a three phase
852 CB1 Succ 3P AR Autoreclose
autoreclose cycle.
853 3P Dead Time IP Autoreclose Three pole dead time in progress
This is a signal issued by the autoreclose logic to the general CB1 Control logic
854 Auto Close CB1 Autoreclose when the conditions to autoreclose CB1 are satisfied (dead time complete, CB
healthy etc).

Used by in-built Trip conversion logic to allow AR to convert CB1 to 3pole
858 AR Force CB1 3P Autoreclose
tripping
Indicates that AR is in one of the following states, Disabled, Inhibited, AR In
859 AR Blocked Autoreclose
Progress or Locked out
Composite Lockout Alarm - circuit breaker locked out due to auto-recloser, or

860 CB1 LO Alarm CB Control
condition monitioring
861 Unused C Diff Unused
DDB to block output contacts, same as setting Commissioning Column -> Test
862 Block Contacts PSL
Mode -> Contacts Blocked
Indicates contacts blocked mode enabled. Can be mapped in PSL and sent via
863 Contacts Blocked SW
InterMiCOM/IM64 to block contacts at the remote end.
A phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current). It is used for
864 IA< Start Undercurrent
breaker failure and for fault record reset.
B phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current). It is used for
865 IB< Start Undercurrent
C phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current). It is used for
866 IC< Start Undercurrent
A phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT1). It is

867 CB1 IA< Start Undercurrent
used to detect breaker failure conditions.
B phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT1). It is

868 CB1 IB< Start Undercurrent
C phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT1). It is

869 CB1 IC< Start Undercurrent
A phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT2). It is

870 CB2 IA< Start Undercurrent
B phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT2). It is

871 CB2 IB< Start Undercurrent
C phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT2). It is

872 CB2 IC< Start Undercurrent
873 ISEF< Start Undercurrent SEF undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT SEF)
874 CBF Non I Trip PSL Mapped in PSL to all none current protection trip signals to initiate CB Fail
875 Unused Undercurrent Unused
876 Z1X Active Zone 1 Extension Scheme Zone 1 extension active - zone 1 is operating in its reach extended mode
Trip on close functions (either SOTF or TOR) active. These elements are in-
877 TOC Active Trip on Close
service for a period of time following circuit breaker closure
Appendix C-23

Trip on re-close protection is active - indicated TOC delay timer has elapsed
878 TOR Active Trip on Close after circuit breaker opening, and remains in-service on auto-reclosure for the
duration of the trip on close window
Switch on to fault protection is active - in service on manual breaker closure, and

879 SOTF Active Trip on Close
then remains in-service for the duration of the trip on close window
Output from CB1 system check logic: indicates system checks for CB1 are
880 SChksInactiveCB1 Check sync disabled (setting "System Checks CB1" = Disabled or global setting "System
Checks" = Disabled)
DDB input must be high to enable CB1check sync stage1 logic to operate.
881 CB1 CS1 Enabled PSL
Defaults to high if not mapped in PSL; if mapped in PSL must be driven high.
DDB input must be high to enable CB1check sync stage 2 logic to operate.
Output from CB1 Check Sync logic, when enabled: indicates set conditions for
883 CB1 CS1 OK Check sync
CB1 sync check stage 1 are satisfied.
884 CB1 CS2 OK Check sync
886 Live Bus 1 Voltage Monitoring Indicates Bus 1 input is live, i.e. voltage >= setting "Live Bus 1"
887 Dead Bus 1 Voltage Monitoring Indicates Bus 1 input is dead, i.e. voltage < setting "Dead Bus 1"
888 Live Line Voltage Monitoring Indicates Line input is live, i.e. voltage >= setting "Live Line"
889 Dead Line Voltage Monitoring Indicates Line input is dead, i.e. voltage < setting "Dead Line"
890 All Poles Dead Poledead logic Pole dead logic detects 3 phase breaker open
891 Any Pole Dead Poledead logic Pole dead logic detects at least one breaker pole open
892 Pole Dead A Poledead logic Phase A Pole Dead
893 Pole Dead B Poledead logic Phase B Pole Dead
894 Pole Dead C Poledead logic Phase C Pole Dead
895 VTS Acc Ind Fixed Logic Any Trip
896 VTS Volt Dep Fixed Logic Any Voltage Dependent Function
Input to the circuit breaker control logic to indicate manual check synchronization
898 Ctl Check Sync PSL
conditions are satisfied
900 CB1 Ext CS OK PSL External check-sync is OK for CB1
901 CB2 Ext CS OK PSL External check-sync is OK for CB2
903 CB1 Open 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 is open, all three phases
904 CB1 Open A ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 A phase is open
905 CB1 Open B ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 B phase is open
906 CB1 Open C ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 C phase is open
907 CB1 Closed 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 is closed, all three phases
908 CB1 Closed A ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 A phase is closed
909 CB1 Closed B ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 B phase is closed
910 CB1 Closed C ph CB Status Circuit breaker 1 C phase is closed
911 CB2 Open 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 is open, all three phases
912 CB2 Open A ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is open
913 CB2 Open B ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is open
914 CB2 Open C ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is open
915 CB2 Closed 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 is closed, all three phases
Appendix C-24

916 CB2 Closed A ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is closed
917 CB2 Closed B ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 B phase is closed
918 CB2 Closed C ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 C phase is closed
919 Inhibit Cmp V1>1 PSL Inhibit the first stage compensated overvoltage element
920 Inhibit Cmp V1>2 PSL Inhibit the second stage compensated overvoltage element
921 Cmp V1>1 Tim Blk PSL Block the first stage compensated overvoltage element
922 Cmp V1>2 Tim Blk PSL Block the second stage compensated overvoltage element
923 V1>1 Cmp Start Overvoltage 1st stage compensated overvoltage start signal
924 V1>2 Cmp Start Overvoltage 2nd stage compensated overvoltage start signal
925 V1>1 Cmp Trip Overvoltage 1st stage compensated overvoltage trip signal
926 V1>2 Cmp Trip Overvoltage 2nd stage compensated overvoltage trip signal
927 Unused Unused
928 CTS Block CT Supervision block (current transformer supervision)
929 to 951 Unused CT Supervision Unused
Faulted phase A - must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records,
952 Faulted Phase A PSL
and on the LCD display
Faulted phase B - must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records,
953 Faulted Phase B PSL
Faulted phase C - must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records,
954 Faulted Phase C PSL
Faulted phase N (fault involves ground) - must be assigned, as this sets the start
955 Faulted Phase N PSL
flag used in records, and on the LCD display
Started phase A - must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records,
956 Started Phase A PSL
Started phase B - must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records,
957 Started Phase B PSL
Started phase C - must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records,
958 Started Phase C PSL
Started phase N (fault involves ground) - must be assigned, as this sets the start
959 Started Phase N PSL
flag used in records, and on the LCD display
960 Zone1 AN Element Distance Elements Zone 1 AN ground fault element

961 Zone1 BN Element Distance Elements Zone 1 BN ground fault element
962 Zone1 CN Element Distance Elements Zone 1 CN ground fault element
963 Zone1 AB Element Distance Elements Zone 1 AB phase fault element
964 Zone1 BC Element Distance Elements Zone 1 BC phase fault element
965 Zone1 CA Element Distance Elements Zone 1 CA phase fault element
Appendix C-25

978 ZoneP AN Element Distance Elements Zone P AN ground fault element
979 ZoneP BN Element Distance Elements Zone P BN ground fault element
980 ZoneP CN Element Distance Elements Zone P CN ground fault element
981 ZoneP AB Element Distance Elements Zone P AB phase fault element
982 ZoneP BC Element Distance Elements Zone P BC phase fault element
983 ZoneP CA Element Distance Elements Zone P CA phase fault element
996 DEF Forward Directional Earth Fault DEF forward (directional earth fault aided scheme detector)
997 DEF Reverse Directional Earth Fault DEF reverse (directional earth fault aided scheme detector)
998 Delta Dir FWD AN Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme forward AN detection
999 Delta Dir FWD BN Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme forward BN detection
1000 Delta Dir FWD CN Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme forward CN detection
1001 Delta Dir FWD AB Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme forward AB detection
1002 Delta Dir FWD BC Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme forward BC detection
1003 Delta Dir FWD CA Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme forward CA detection
1004 Delta Dir Rev AN Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme reverse AN detection
1005 Delta Dir Rev BN Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme reverse BN detection
1006 Delta Dir Rev CN Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme reverse CN detection
1007 Delta Dir Rev AB Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme reverse AB detection
1008 Delta Dir Rev BC Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme reverse BC detection
1009 Delta Dir Rev CA Delta directional Element Delta directional scheme reverse CA detection
1010 Phase Select A Phase Selector Phase selector - phase A pickup
1011 Phase Select B Phase Selector Phase selector - phase B pickup
1012 Phase Select C Phase Selector Phase selector - phase C pickup
1013 Phase Select N Phase Selector Phase selector - neutral indication
1014 P Swing Detector Powerswing Blocking Power swing detected
1015 PSB Fault Powerswing Blocking Power swing block fault
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase A (may be used to block
1016 Ih(2) Loc Blk A Inrush Detector any instantaneous distance elements that reach through the reactance of a
power transformer)
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase B (may be used to block
1017 Ih(2) Loc Blk B Inrush Detector any instantaneous distance elements that reach through the reactance of a
power transformer)
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase C (may be used to block
1018 Ih(2) Loc Blk C Inrush Detector any instantaneous distance elements that reach through the reactance of a
power transformer)
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on neutral current measurement

1019 Ih(2) Loc Blk N Inrush Detector (may be used to block any instantaneous distance elements that reach through
the reactance of a power transformer)
Appendix C-26

1024 LED1 Red Tri LED Red 1 Programmable LED 1 red is energized
1025 LED1 Grn Tri LED Green 1 Programmable LED 1 green is energized
1040 FnKey LED1 Red Tri LED Red 9 Programmable function key LED 1 red is energized
1041 FnKey LED1 Grn Tri LED Green 9 Programmable function key LED 1 green is energized
1060 LED1 Con R LED_CON_R1 Assignment of input signal to drive output LED 1 red
Assignment of signal to drive output LED 1 green. To drive LED 1 yellow DDB
1061 LED1 Con G LED_CON_G1
1024 and DDB 1025 must be driven at the same time
Appendix C-27

Assignment of signal to drive output function key LED 1 red. This LED is
1076 FnKey LED1 ConR LED_CON_R9
associated with function key 1
Assignment of signal to drive output function key LED 1 green. This LED is
1077 FnKey LED1 ConG LED_CON_G9 associated with function key 1. To drive function key LED, yellow DDB 1040
and DDB 1041 must be active at the same time
Appendix C-28

Function key 1 is activated. In ‘Normal’ mode it is high on keypress and in

1096 Function Key 1 Function Key 1
‘Toggle’ mode remains high/low on single keypress









Broken current maintenance alarm - circuit breaker cumulative duty alarm set-
1106 CB1 I^ Maint CB Monitoring
point CB1
Broken current lockout alarm - circuit breaker cumulative duty has been
1107 CB1 I^ Lockout CB Monitoring
exceeded CB1
No of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm - indicated due to circuit

1108 No.CB1 OPs Maint CB Monitoring
breaker trip operations threshold CB1
No of circuit breaker operations maintenance lockout - excessive number of

1109 No.CB1 OPs Lock CB Monitoring
circuit breaker trip operations, safety lockout CB1
Excessive circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm - excessive

1110 CB1 Time Maint CB Monitoring
operation time alarm for the circuit breaker (slow interruption time) CB1
Excessive circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm - excessive operation

1111 CB1 Time Lockout CB Monitoring
time alarm for the circuit breaker (too slow interruption) CB1
1112 CB1FaultFreqLock CB Monitoring Excessive fault frequency lockout alarm CB1
Broken current maintenance alarm - circuit breaker cumulative duty alarm set-
1113 CB2 I^ Maint CB2 Monitoring
point CB2
Appendix C-29

Broken current lockout alarm - circuit breaker cumulative duty has been
1114 CB2 I^ Lockout CB2 Monitoring
exceeded CB2
No of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm - indicated due to circuit

1115 No.CB2 OPs Maint CB2 Monitoring
breaker trip operations threshold CB2
No of circuit breaker operations maintenance lockout - excessive number of

1116 No.CB2 OPs Lock CB2 Monitoring
circuit breaker trip operations, safety lockout CB2
Excessive circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm - excessive

1117 CB2 Time Maint CB2 Monitoring
operation time alarm for the circuit breaker (slow interruption time) CB2
Excessive circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm - excessive operation

1118 CB2 Time Lockout CB2 Monitoring
time alarm for the circuit breaker (too slow interruption) CB2
1119 CB2FaultFreqLock CB2 Monitoring Excessive fault frequency lockout alarm CB2
This is an alarm that appears if the channel 1 baud rate is outside the limits 52
1123 Ch1 Mux Clk Fibre Monitor Bits
kbits/s or 70 Kbits/s
1124 Ch1 Signal Lost Fibre Monitor Bits Mux indicates signal lost over channel 1
One way communication. Local relay that is sending over Ch1 indicates that
1125 Ch1 Path Yellow Fibre Monitor Bits
remote end is not receiving
1126 Ch1 Mismatch RxN Fibre Monitor Bits Indication of mismatch between Ch1 N*64kbits/s setting and Mux
Indication that no valid message is received over channel 1 during ‘Channel
1127 Ch1 Timeout Fibre Monitor Bits
Timeout’ window
1128 Ch1 Degraded Fibre Monitor Bits Indicates poor channel 1 quality
1129 Ch1 Passthrough Fibre Monitor Bits Ch1 data received via Ch 2 in 3 ended configuration - self healing indication -
This is an alarm that appears if the channel 2 baud rate is outside the limits
1133 Ch2 Mux Clk Fibre Monitor Bits
52kbits/s or 70 kbits/s
1134 Ch2 Signal Lost Fibre Monitor Bits Mux indicates signal lost over channel 2
One way communication. Local relay that is sending over Ch2 indicates that
1135 Ch2 Path Yellow Fibre Monitor Bits
remote end is not receiving
1136 Ch2 Mismatch RxN Fibre Monitor Bits Indication of mismatch between InterMiCOM64 Ch 2 setting and Mux
Indication that no valid message is received over channel 2 during ‘Channel
1137 Ch2 Timeout Fibre Monitor Bits
Timeout’ window
1138 Ch2 Degraded Fibre Monitor Bits Indicates poor channel 2 quality
1139 Ch2 Passthrough Fibre Monitor Bits Ch2 data received via Ch 1 in 3 ended configuration - self healing indication -
1147 SEF Trip SEF Trip (Any Stage)
1148 B Fail SEF Trip Current Prot SEF Trip
1149 F<1 Timer Block PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer
1153 F>1 Timer Block PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer
1154 F>2 Timer Block PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer
1155 F<1 Start Frequency Protection Under frequency Stage 1 start
Appendix C-30

1159 F>1 Start Frequency Protection Over frequency Stage 1 start
1160 F>2 Start Frequency Protection Over frequency Stage 2 start
1161 F<1 Trip Frequency Protection Under frequency Stage 1 trip
1165 F>1 Trip Frequency Protection Over frequency Stage 1 Trip
1166 F>2 Trip Frequency Protection Over frequency Stage 2 Trip
1167 Inhibit F<1 PSL Inhibit Stage 1 Underfrequency protection
1171 Inhibit F>1 PSL Inhibit Stage 1 Overfrequency protection
1172 Inhibit F>2 PSL Inhibit Stage 2 Overfrequency protection
1173 Unused Unused
1174 Unused Unused
1175 Unused Unused
1176 HMI Access Lvl 1 Binary encoded with DDB 1177 to indicate HMI interface password level
1177 HMI Access Lvl 2 Binary encoded with DDB 1176 to indicate HMI interface password level
1178 FPort AccessLvl1 Binary encoded with DDB 1179 to indicate front port interface password level
1179 FPort AccessLvl2 Binary encoded with DDB 1178 to indicate front port interface password level
1180 RPrt1 AccessLvl1 Binary encoded with DDB 1181 to indicate rear port 1 interface password level
Monitor port signal 1 - allows mapped monitor signals to be mapped to

1184 Monitor Bit 1 Commissioning Test
disturbance recorder or contacts







1192 New Fault Record Fault recorder New Fault Record
1193 Unused Unused
1194 PSL Int 1 PSL PSL Internal Node
Appendix C-31

Appendix C-32

Appendix C-33

1294 VTS Ia> VT Supervision “VTS I> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded in Phase A
1295 VTS Ib> VT Supervision “VTS I> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded in Phase B
1296 VTS Ic> VT Supervision “VTS I> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded in Phase C
1297 VTS Va> VT Supervision Va has exceed 30 volts (drop off at 10 volts)
1298 VTS Vb> VT Supervision Vb has exceed 30 volts (drop off at 10 volts)
1299 VTS Vc> VT Supervision Vc has exceed 30 volts (drop off at 10 volts)
1300 VTS I2> VT Supervision “VTS I2> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded
1301 VTS V2> VT Supervision V2 has exceed 10 volts
1302 VTS Ia delta> VT Supervision Superimposed Phase A current has exceed 0.1In
1303 VTS Ib delta> VT Supervision Superimposed Phase B current has exceed 0.1In
1304 VTS Ic delta> VT Supervision Superimposed Phase C current has exceed 0.1In
1305 Z1 AN Comparator Distance diagnostic Z1 AN Comparator
1306 Z1 BN Comparator Distance diagnostic Z1 BN Comparator
1307 Z1 CN Comparator Distance diagnostic Z1 CN Comparator
1308 Z1 AB Comparator Distance diagnostic Z1 AB Comparator
1309 Z1 BC Comparator Distance diagnostic Z1 BC Comparator
1310 Z1 CA Comparator Distance diagnostic Z1 CA Comparator
1323 ZP AN Comparator Distance diagnostic ZP AN Comparator
1324 ZP BN Comparator Distance diagnostic ZP BN Comparator
1325 ZP CN Comparator Distance diagnostic ZP CN Comparator
1326 ZP AB Comparator Distance diagnostic ZP AB Comparator
1327 ZP BC Comparator Distance diagnostic ZP BC Comparator
1328 ZP CA Comparator Distance diagnostic ZP CA Comparator
Appendix C-34

1335 IN> Bias Distance diagnostic Biased Neutral Level Detector
1336 WI Detect I0/I2 WI Detect I0/I2
1337 Delta Dir FWD AN Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Forward AN
1338 Delta Dir FWD BN Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Forward BN
1339 Delta Dir FWD CN Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Forward CN
1340 Delta Dir FWD AB Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Forward AB
1341 Delta Dir FWD BC Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Forward BC
1342 Delta Dir FWD CA Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Forward CA
1343 Delta Dir Rev AN Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Reverse AN
1344 Delta Dir Rev BN Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Reverse BN
1345 Delta Dir Rev CN Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Reverse CN
1346 Delta Dir Rev AB Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Reverse AB
1347 Delta Dir Rev BC Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Reverse BC
1348 Delta Dir Rev CA Delta directional Diagnostic Delta Directional Reverse CA
1349 Zone 1 Blocked Distance diagnostic Zone 1 Blocked by PSB
1352 Zone P Blocked Distance diagnostic Zone P Blocked by PSB
1354 Mem. Valid Distance diagnostic Memory Valid
1355 Ph Two Cycle Phase Selector Phase Sel Two Cycle
1356 Ph Five Cycle Phase Selector Phase Sel Five Cycle
1357 Ph Frozen Phase Selector Buffer Frozen
1358 Aided 1 WI V< A Aided Scheme Logic Aided 1 WI V< A
1359 Aided 1 WI V< B Aided Scheme Logic Aided 1 WI V< B
1360 Aided 1 WI V< C Aided Scheme Logic Aided 1 WI V< C
1361 Aided 2 WI V< A Aided Scheme Logic Aided 2 WI V< A
1362 Aided 2 WI V< B Aided Scheme Logic Aided 2 WI V< B
1363 Aided 2 WI V< C Aided Scheme Logic Aided 2 WI V< C
1364 CB1 Pre-Lockout CB Control CB1 Condition Monitoring Pre-Lockout condition
1365 I> LoL A Loss of Load logic Loss of Load level detector A
1366 I> LoL B Loss of Load logic Loss of Load level detector B
1367 I> LoL C Loss of Load logic Loss of Load level detector C
1368 Freq High Frequency Tracking Freq High
1369 Freq Low Frequency Tracking Freq Low
1370 Freq Not found Frequency Tracking Freq Not found
1371 Stop Freq Track Frequency Tracking Stop Freq Track
1372 3d/4th HarmonicA 3d/4th Harmonic Restraint A Phase 3rd/4th Harmonic Restraint A Phase
1373 3d/4th HarmonicB 3d/4th Harmonic Restraint B Phase 3rd/4th Harmonic Restraint B Phase
1374 3d/4th HarmonicC 3d/4th Harmonic Restraint C Phase 3rd/4th Harmonic Restraint C Phase
This is an output signal available in the PSL, that could be mapped to “C Diff
1375 Teleprot Disturb
Failure” for IEC870-5-103
This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected (in IEC870-5-103)

1376 I>> Backup Super This signal is ON if an overcurrent stage is selected to be enabled on VTS and
distance is blocked by VTS
Appendix C-35

1377 I> Trip by VTS This signal is ON if DDB 1376 is ON and one of the overcurrent stages set to be
enabled on VTS condition trips

1378 Teleprot Tx This is an output signal available in the PSL, which could be mapped to a signal
send of one of the two teleprotection channels
This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected (in IEC870-5-103) This is
1379 Teleprot Rx an output signal available in the PSL, which could be mapped to a signal receive
of one of the two teleprotection channels
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped in IEC870-5-
1380 Group Warning
103 to a minor defect which does not shut down the main protection
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped in IEC870-5-
1381 Group Alarm
103 to a major problem normally linked to the watchdog
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped to enable
1382 AR On Pulse
AR via pulse
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped to disable
1383 AR Off Pulse
AR via pulse
External input via DDB mapped in PSL to enable AR if Enable AR CB1 or

1384 AR Enable
Enable AR CB2 is set and AR Configuration setting is enabled
1385 AR In Service Auto-reclose in service
1386 MaxCh1 PropDelay Setting MaxCh 1 PropDelay has been exceeded
1387 MaxCh2 PropDelay Setting MaxCh 2 PropDelay has been exceeded
1388 Unused Unused
1389 Unused Unused
1390 ZV AN Comparator Distance diagnostic ZV AN Comparator
1391 ZV BN Comparator Distance diagnostic ZV BN Comparator
1392 ZV CN Comparator Distance diagnostic ZV CN Comparator
1393 ZV AB Comparator Distance diagnostic ZV AB Comparator
1394 ZV BC Comparator Distance diagnostic ZV BC Comparator
1395 ZV CA Comparator Distance diagnostic ZV CA Comparator
1396 Unused Unused
1397 Unused Unused
1398 Unused Unused
1399 Unused Unused
1400 Unused Unused
1401 Unused Unused
1402 Unused Unused
1403 Unused Unused
Signal from the VTS logic that can be used to block operation of the distance
1404 VTS Blk Distance Transfer
elements
1405 Unused Unused
1406 Unused Unused
1407 Unused Unused
If setting "Leader Select By:" = Opto, then preferred leader CB is CB1 if input
1408 CB2 Lead PSL
DDB "CB2 LEAD" is low, or CB2 if DDB "CB2 LEAD" is high.
If setting "Foll AR Mode" = Opto, then if input DDB "FARSP" is high, the follower
1409 Foll AR Mode 1P PSL CB is enabled for single phase autoreclose, if "FARSP" is low, the follower CB is
NOT enabled for single phase autoreclose.
Appendix C-36

If setting "Foll AR Mode" = Opto, then if input DDB "FAR3P" is high, the follower
1410 Foll AR Mode 3P PSL CB is enabled for three phase autoreclose, if "FAR3P" is low, the follower CB is
NOT enabled for three phase autoreclose.

1412 to 1416 Unused PSL Unused
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. This input DDB is used when
1417 Ext Rst CB2 AROK PSL
required to reset any CB2 Successful Autoreclose" signal.
1418 Ext Rst CB2Shots PSL
required to reset the CB2 cumulative "Shots" counters.
DDB mapped in PSL. Reset Manual CB2 Close Timer Delay (stop & reset
1419 Rst CB2 CloseDly PSL
Manual Close Delay time for closing CB2).
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. External signal to inhibit
1420 Inhibit AR PSL
autoreclose.
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. External signal to force CB2
1421 Block CB2 AR PSL
autoreclose to lockout.
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Reset Lockout Opto Input to
1422 Rst CB2 Lockout PSL
reset CB2 Lockout state
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (Bus2 VT secondary MCB tripped or VT fail
1423 MCB/VTS CB2 CS PSL
detected by external VTS scheme), or signal from host relay VTS scheme
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Live Bus 2
1424 Inhibit LB2 PSL
function)
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Dead Bus 2
1425 Inhibit DB2 PSL
function)
DDB input must be high to enable CB2 check sync stage 1 logic to operate.
DDB input must be high to enable CB2 check sync satge 2 logic to operate.
1428 CB2 In Service CB2 In Service (can be initiated for autoreclose)
1429 CB2 NoAR Autoreclose CB2 not available for autoreclose
1430 Unused Unused
1431 Leader CB2 Autoreclose CB2 set as leader
1432 Follower CB1 Autoreclose CB1 set as follower
1433 Follower CB2 Autoreclose CB2 set as follower
1434 CB2 AR Init Autoreclose CB2 AR cycle initiation
1435 CB2 ARIP Autoreclose CB2 AR cycle in progress
1436 to 1440 Unused Autoreclose Unused
1441 CB2 Failed AR CB2 autoreclose failed due to persistent fault
Output DDB indicates conditions to enable CB2 lead single phase autoreclose
1442 DTOK CB2L 1P
dead time to run are satisfied
Output DDB indicates conditions to enable CB2 lead three phase autoreclose
1443 DTOK CB2L 3P
1444 CB2 3P DTime Indicates CB2 three phase autoreclose dead time running
1445 En CB2 Follower Indicates conditions are satisfied to enable CB2 follower sequence
1446 1P Follower Time Indicates a single pole autoreclose follower time is running (either CB)
1447 3P Follower Time Indicates a three pole autoreclose follower time is running (either CB)
This is a signal issued by the autoreclose logic to the general CB2 Control logic
1448 Auto Close CB2 when the conditions to autoreclose CB2 are satisfied (dead time complete, CB
healthy etc).
1449 Set CB2 Close Indicates a CB2 Auto Close signal has been issued
Appendix C-37

Output DDB can be applied to inhibit CB2 reclose by adjacent scheme until local
1450 CB2 Control
autoreclose scheme confirms it is OK to close CB2
This signal is set when CB2 has successfully completed a single phase
1451 CB2 Succ 1P AR
autoreclose cycle.
This signal is set when CB2 has successfully completed a three phase
1452 CB2 Succ 3P AR
autoreclose cycle.
Control close in progress CB2 - the relay has been given an instruction to close
1453 CB2 Close inProg the circuit breaker, but the manual close timer delay has not yet finished timing
out
1454 CB2 Fast SCOK OK to reclose CB2 with sync check without waiting for dead time to complete
1455 CB2L SCOK System conditions OK to reclose CB2 as leader when dead time complete
1456 CB2F SCOK System conditions OK to reclose CB2 when follower time complete
1457 Unused Unused
1458 CB2 Man SCOK System conditions OK to manually close CB2
1459 CB2 Fail Pr Trip signal to force CB2 AR lockout if CB2 fails to trip when protection operates
1460 Unused Unused
1461 Live Bus 2 Indicates Bus 2 input is live, i.e. voltage >= setting "Live Bus 2"
1462 Dead Bus 2 Indicates Bus 2 input is dead, i.e. voltage < setting "Dead Bus 2"
1463 CB2 CS2 OK
Line-Bus 1 slip freq > setting [48 98] (frequency difference (slip) between line
1464 CB1 CS2 SlipF> voltage and bus 1 voltage is greater than maximum slip permitted for CB1
synchronism check stage 2)
Line-Bus 1 slip freq < setting [48 98] (frequency difference (slip) between line
1465 CB1 CS2 SlipF< voltage and bus 1 voltage is within the permitted range for CB1 synchronism
check stage 2)
Line-Bus 2 slip freq > setting [48 A1] (frequency difference (slip) between line
Line-Bus 2 slip freq < setting [48 A1] (frequency difference (slip) between line
check stage 1)
Line-Bus 2 slip freq > setting [48 A6] (frequency difference (slip) between line
Line-Bus 2 slip freq < setting [48 A6] (frequency difference (slip) between line
check stage 2)
Voltage magnitude difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting
1470 CB2 CS1 VL>VB
[48 9F] (line V > Bus V)
1471 CB2 CS2 VL>VB
[48 A4] (line V > Bus V)
1472 CB2 CS1 VL<VB
[48 9F] (line V < Bus V)
1473 CB2 CS2 VL<VB
[48 A4] (line V < Bus V)
Frequency difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting [48 A1]
1474 CB2 CS1 FL>FB
(line freq > Bus freq)
1475 CB2 CS2 FL>FB
Appendix C-38

1476 CB2 CS1 FL<FB
(line freq < Bus freq)
1477 CB2 CS2 FL<FB
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: setting [48 9E] to +180deg (anticlockwise from
1478 CB2 CS1 AngHigh+
Vbus)
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: setting [48 9E] to -180deg (clockwise from
1479 CB2 CS1 AngHigh-
Vbus)
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: setting [48 A3] to +180deg (anticlockwise from
Vbus)
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: setting [48 A3] to -180deg (clockwise from
Vbus)
Line freq > (Bus2 freq + 0.001Hz) (Line voltage vector rotating anticlockwise
1482 CB2 CS AngRotACW
relative to VBus2)
Bus2 freq > (Line freq + 0.001Hz) (Line voltage vector rotating clockwise relative
1483 CB2 CS AngRotCW
to VBus2)
Output from CB2 system check logic: indicates system checks for CB2 are
1484 SChksInactiveCB2 disabled (setting "System Checks CB2" = Disabled or global setting "System
Checks" = Disabled)
Used by in-built Trip conversion logic to allow AR to convert CB2 to 3pole

1485 AR Force CB2 3P Autoreclose
tripping
1486 Unused Unused
1488 En CB1 Follower Indicates conditions are satisfied to enable CB1 follower sequence
1489 Unused Unused
1490 Unused Unused
1491 CB1F SCOK System conditions OK to reclose CB1 when follower time complete
1492 Unused Unused
Frequency difference between Line V and Bus1 V is greater than setting [48 98]
1493 CB1 CS2 FL>FB
1494 CB1 CS2 FL<FB
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: setting [48 95] to +180deg (anticlockwise from
Vbus)
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: setting [48 95] to -180deg (clockwise from
Vbus)
If setting "Lead AR Mode" = Opto, then if input DDB "AR Mode 1P" is high, the
1497 AR Mode 1P PSL leader CB is enabled for single phase autoreclose, if "AR Mode 1P" is low, the
leader CB is NOT enabled for single phase autoreclose.
If setting "Lead AR Mode" = Opto, then if input DDB "AR Mode 3P" is high, the
1498 AR Mode 3P PSL leader CB is enabled for three phase autoreclose, if "AR Mode 3P" is low, the
leader CB is NOT enabled for three phase autoreclose.
1499 CB2 Trip AR MemA CB2 A Ph trip & AR initiation memory

1500 CB2 Trip AR MemB CB2 B Ph trip & AR initiation memory
1501 CB2 Trip AR MemC CB2 C Ph trip & AR initiation memory
1502 Unused Unused
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input operation will initiate APh
1504 Init APh AR Test PSL
test trip & autoreclose cycle
Appendix C-39

DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input operation will initiate BPh
1505 Init BPh AR Test PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input operation will initiate CPh
1506 Init CPh AR Test PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input operation will initiate 3Ph
1507 Init 3P AR Test PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input: indicates external protection
1508 Ext Fault APh PSL
operated for fault involving A phase
1509 Ext Fault BPh PSL
operated for fault involving C phase
1510 Ext Fault CPh PSL
operated for fault involving C phase
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input: if setting "AR Skip Shot 1" =
Enable and this input is high when a protection operation initiates an autoreclose
1511 AR Skip Shot1 PSL cycle, then the sequence counter advances directly to SC:COUNT = 2 so the
autoreclose cycle skips (omits) Shot 1 and instead starts at Dead Time 2 for the
first reclose attempt.
1512 to 1516 Unused PSL Unused

1517 Ext Rst CB1 AROK PSL
required to reset any CB1 "Successful Autoreclose" signal.
1518 Ext Rst CB1Shots PSL
required to reset the CB1 cumulative "Shots" counters.
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (Bus1 VT secondary MCB tripped or VT fail
1521 MCB/VTS CB1 CS PSL
detected by external VTS scheme), or signal from host relay VTS scheme
1522 Inhibit LL PSL DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Live Line function)
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Dead Line
1523 Inhibit DL PSL
function)
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Live Bus 1
1524 Inhibit LB1 PSL
function)
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Dead Bus 1
1525 Inhibit DB1 PSL
function)
1526 CB1 In Service CB1 In Service (can be initiated for autoreclose)
1527 Unused Unused
1528 CB1 NoAR Autoreclose CB1 not available for autoreclose
1529 Unused Unused
1530 Leader CB1 Autoreclose CB1 set as leader
1535 CB1 Trip AR MemA CB1 A Ph trip & AR initiation memory
1536 CB1 Trip AR MemB CB1 B Ph trip & AR initiation memory
1537 CB1 Trip AR MemC CB1 C Ph trip & AR initiation memory
1538 Unused Unused
1539 Unused Unused
1540 Unused Unused
1541 AR Start Autoreclose Any AR initiation signal present
1542 ARIP Autoreclose Any AR cycle in progress
1543 CB1 AR Init Autoreclose CB1 AR cycle initiation
1544 CB1 ARIP Autoreclose CB1 AR cycle in progress
Appendix C-40

1545 Unused Unused
1546 Seq Counter>Set Sequence counts greater than AR Shots settings
If a single phase fault evolves to a multi-phase fault during the single phase
1547 Evolve 3Ph dead time, this DDB indicates the fault has evolved and that SPAR will be
stopped and 3PAR started.
1548 Unused Unused

1549 Unused Unused
1550 CB1 Failed AR CB1 AR failed due to persistent fault
1551 DTOK All Enabling condition for any dead time
Output DDB indicates conditions to enable CB1 lead single phase autoreclose
1552 DTOK CB1L 1P
Output DDB indicates conditions to enable CB1 lead three phase autoreclose
1553 DTOK CB1L 3P
1554 1P DTime Indicates single phase autoreclose dead time running
1555 OK Time 3P OK to start 3PAR dead time
1556 3P DTime1 3Phase dead time 1 running
1560 CB1 3P DTime Indicates CB1 three phase autoreclose dead time running
1561 1PF TComp Either CB SP follower time complete
1562 3PF TComp Either CB 3P follower time complete
1563 Unused Unused
1564 Unused Unused
1565 Set CB1 Close Indicates a CB1 Auto Close signal has been issued
Output DDB can be applied to inhibit CB1 reclose by adjacent scheme until local
1566 CB1 Control
autoreclose scheme confirms it is OK to close CB1
1567 1P Reclaim Time Single Phase AR reclaim time running
1568 1P Reclaim TComp Single Phase AR reclaim time complete
1569 3P Reclaim Time Three Phase AR reclaim time running
1570 3P Reclaim TComp Three Phase AR reclaim time complete
This signal is set when CB1 has successfully completed a single phase
1571 CB1 Succ 1P AR
autoreclose cycle.
1572 CB1 Fast SCOK OK to reclose CB1 with sync check without waiting for dead time to complete
1573 CB1L SCOK System conditions OK to reclose CB1 when dead time complete
1574 CB1 Man SCOK System conditions OK to manually close CB1
1575 CB1 Fail Pr Trip signal to force CB1 AR lockout if CB1 fails to trip when protection operates
1576 Unused Unused
1577 CB2 CS1 OK
Line-Bus 1 slip freq > setting [48 93] (frequency difference (slip) between line
synchronism check type 1)
Line-Bus 1 slip freq < setting [48 93] (frequency difference (slip) between line
1579 CB1 CS1 SlipF< voltage and bus 1 voltage is greater than maximum slip permitted for CB1
synchronism check type 1)
1580 CS VLine< Line Volts < setting [48 8B]

1581 CS VLine> Line Volts > setting [48 8C]
Appendix C-41

1582 CS VBus1< Bus1 Volts < setting [48 8B]
1583 CS VBus1> Bus1 Volts > setting [48 8C]
1584 CS VBus2< Bus2 Volts < setting [48 8B]
1585 CS VBus2> Bus2 Volts > setting [48 8C]
1586 CB1 CS1 VL>VB
[48 91] (line V > Bus V)
1587 CB1 CS2 VL>VB
[48 96] (line V > Bus V)
1588 CB1 CS1 VL<VB
[48 91] (line V < Bus V)
1589 CB1 CS2 VL<VB
[48 96] (line V < Bus V)
1590 CB1 CS1 FL>FB
1591 CB1 CS1 FL<FB
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: setting [48 90] to +180deg (anticlockwise from
Vbus)
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: setting [48 90] to -180deg (anticlockwise from
Vbus)
Line freq > (Bus1 freq + 0.001Hz) (Line voltage vector rotating anticlockwise
1594 CB1 CS AngRotACW
relative to VBus1)
Bus1 freq > (Line freq + 0.001Hz) (Line voltage vector rotating clockwise relative
1595 CB1 CS AngRotCW
to VBus1)
1596 Unused Unused
1597 Rst CB2 Data Reset CB2 Maintenance values
1598 CB2 Pre-Lockout CB2 Condition Monitoring Pre-Lockout condition
Composite Lockout Alarm - circuit breaker locked out due to auto-recloser, or
1599 CB2 LO Alarm
condition monitioring
Trip signal for CB2 3ph - used as a command to drive CB2 trip 3ph output
1600 CB2 Trip 3ph Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for CB2 phase A - used as a command to drive CB2 trip A output
1601 CB2 Trip OutputA Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for CB2 phase B - used as a command to drive CB2 trip B output
1602 CB2 Trip OutputB Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for CB2 phase C - used as a command to drive CB2 trip C output
1603 CB2 Trip OutputC Trip Conversion Logic
External DDB input to host protection trip conversion logic to force 3 Pole
1604 Force 3PTrip CB2 PSL
tripping of CB2 for all faults
External input via DDB to enable CB2, if "in service", to be initiated for
1605 AR Enable CB2 autoreclosing by an AR initiation signal from protection. DDB input defaults to
high if not mapped in PSL, so CB2 AR initiation is permitted.
Pole discrepancy (from external detector) - input used to force a 3 pole trip on
1606 Pole Discrep.CB2 PSL
CB2.
Pole Discrepancy (signal raised when a pole discrepancy state is detected on

1607 Pole Discrep.CB2 Pole discrepency
CB2)
1608 CB2 Trip I/P 3Ph PSL CB2 Trip 3 Phase - Input to Trip Latching Logic
Appendix C-42

External input via DDB to enable CB1, if "in service", to be initiated for
1609 AR Enable CB1 autoreclosing by an AR initiation signal from protection. DDB input defaults to
high if not mapped in PSL, so CB1 AR initiation is permitted.

Appendix C-43

1672 CB1 Fail1 Trip A CB Fail CB1 Fail1 Trip A
1673 CB1 Fail1 Trip B CB Fail CB1 Fail1 Trip B
1674 CB1 Fail1 Trip C CB Fail CB1 Fail1 Trip C
1684 Stub Bus Start A SW Dist Stub Bus Start A
1685 Stub Bus Start B SW Dist Stub Bus Start B
1686 Stub Bus Start C SW Dist Stub Bus Start C
1687 Stub Bus Trip A SW Dist Stub Bus Trip A
1688 Stub Bus Trip B SW Dist Stub Bus Trip B
1689 Stub Bus Trip C SW Dist Stub Bus Trip C
1690 StubBus Start SW StubBus Start
1691 Any Dist Start PSL Any Distance Start
1696 IEC Usr 01 Open PSL IEC61850 User Dual Point Status 1 Open
1697 IEC Usr 01 Close PSL IEC61850 User Dual Point Status 1 Closed
1704 IEC Usr 05 Open PSL IEC61850 User Dual Point Status 5 Opened
Appendix C-44

1724 Inhibit ISEF>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 SEF
1727 Inhibit ISEF>4 PSL Inhibit stage 4SEF
GOOSE virtual input 1 - provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an
1728 Quality VIP 1 GOOSE Input Command
incoming GOOSE message
Appendix C-45

GOOSE virtual input 1- indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for

1760 PubPres VIP 1 GOOSE Input Command
publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present.








Appendix C-46

2016 Timer in 17 PSL Input to Auxiliary Timer 17
Appendix C-47

2032 Timer out 17 Auxiliary Timer Output from Auxiliary Timer 17
Appendix C-48
PXXX
Product Description
Alstom Grid
© - ALSTOM 2011. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM

logo and any alternative version thereof are
trademarks and service marks of ALSTOM.
The other names mentioned, registered or
not, are the property of their respective
companies. The technical and other data
contained in this document is provided for
information only. Neither ALSTOM, its officers
or employees accept responsibility for, or
should be taken as making any representation
or warranty (whether express or implied), as
to the accuracy or completeness of such data
or the achievement of any projected
performance criteria where these are
indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to
revise or change this data at any time without
further notice.
Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre
www.alstom.com/grid/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070
www.alstom.com
GRID

Micomho P446: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micomho P446: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micomho P446: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOMho P446

1.1 Target Audience

1.2.1 Typographical Conventions

1.3 Manual Structure

1.4 Product Scope

Features Model B Model C Model D

1.5 Features and Functions

Distance/DEF/Delta features (optional)

Feature IEC61850 ANSI

Feature IEC61850 ANSI

Figure 1: Application Overview

Nominal auxiliary voltage

Protocol options Hardware Compatibilty

Customer specific options

5 Decommissioning and Disposal

2 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Caution: Risk of electric shock

Ground terminal (In some countries, known as the Earth terminal)

Protective ground terminal

4 INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

4.1 General Safety Guidelines

4.1.1 Lifting Hazards

 Lifting heavy objects

4.1.2 Electrical Hazards

Before working on the terminal strips, the equipment must be isolated.

Equipment operating conditions

4.2 UL/CSA/CUL Requirements

4.3 Equipment Connections

4.4 Protection Class 1 Equipment Requirements

Do not remove the PCT.

Use a locknut or similar mechanism to ensure the integrity of M4 stud-connected PCTs.

The PCT connection must have low-inductance and be as short as possible.

4.5 Pre-energization Checklist

Check voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation).

Check CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections.

Check protective fuse or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) rating.

Check integrity of the PCT connection.

4.6 Peripheral Circuitry

5 DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Parallel Data Bus

Serial data link

Figure 1: Hardware functional diagram Digital inputs

Figure 2: Front panel (60TE)

The front panel of the unit comprises the following:

A top compartment with a hinged cover

A bottom compartment with a hinged cover

An alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)

4 arrow keys to navigate the menus

An enter key for executing the chosen option

A clear key for clearing the last command

A read key for viewing larger blocks of text (arrow keys

Fixed Function LEDs

Programmable Alarm LEDs

Programmable Function LEDs

4.1 Front panel ports

Figure 3: Front serial port connection

Front Parallel Port (SK2)

Figure 4: Rear view of populated 80TE case

6 BOARDS AND MODULES